sign in sign up
<<
Home , Ancient Tamil music, Aph Ko, Chemistry education, Cobalt bomb, Consumer movement, David Washbrook

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) – 4 M.Sc. – I (Core) Semester-I Paper No. : I Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 4

OBJECTIVES

1 To gain knowledge about reaction intermediates in organic chemistry. 2 To acquire knowledge in aliphatic nucleophilic substitution reactions. 3 To suggest synthetic route for simple organic compounds with . 4 To make the students understand and appreciate the concept of stereochemistry, conformational analysis of organic compounds. 5 To acquire a thorough knowledge on the concept of addition reaction on carbon carbon multiple bonds and their reaction mechanism. 6 To understand the mechanism of a , the path and the feasibility of a reaction

UNIT I (18 hrs)

REACTIVE INTERMEDIATES (5 hrs) Carbocations, carbanions, radicals, carbenes, nitrenes, arynes – generation, stabilities, identification, trapping and structure.

ALIPHATIC NUCLEOPHILIC SUBSTITUTION (13 hrs) Neighbouring group participation, Substitution at carbonyl, vinylic and bridgehead system. Substitution with ambident nucleophiles. “O” Vs”C”- alkylation. Role of LDA, crown ethers and phase transfer catalyst (PTC) in nucleophilic substitution reactions. Generation of enolates, enolates selectivity (kinetics Vs thermodynamics), alkylation of enolates and stereochemistry of enolate alkylation. Mechanism of ester hydrolysis (only BAC2, AAC2, AAL1). Alkylation of active methylene compounds. Asymmetric alkylation (Evans, Enders and Meyers procedure). Preparation and synthetic utility of enamines, Finkelstein reaction-Wurtz coupling.

UNIT II STEREOCHEMISTRY (18 hrs) Introduction to molecular symmetry and chirality; axis, plane, center, alternating axis of symmetry; Configuration and conformational stereoisomers; enantiomers – racemic modifications - R and S

nomenclature using Cahn-Ingold-Prelog rules – with a chiral center and Cn – molecules with more than one center of chirality; definition of diastereoisomers; constitutionally symmetrical and unsymmetrical chiral molecules; erythro, threo nomenclature; Fischer, Sawhorse and Newmann Projections and their interconversion. Axial, planar and helical chirality – examples – stereochemistry and absolute configuration of allenes, biphenyls and binaphthyls, ansa and cyclophanic compounds, spiranes, exo-cyclic alkylidenecycloalkanes. Topicity and prostereoisomerism – topicity of ligands and faces, and their nomenclature – NMR distinction of enantiotopic/diastereotopic ligands.

UNIT III (18 hrs) CONFORMATIONAL ANALYSIS Conformational analysis of acyclic and cyclic systems : 1,2 disubstituted ethane derivatives, cyclohexane and its disubstituted derivatives, cyclo hexanols –conformation and reactivity – oxidation, acylation, hydrolysis and esterification – chemical consequence of conformational equilibrium - Curtin-Hammett principle. Conformation and stereochemistry of cis and trans decalins and 9-methyl decalin

UNIT IV (18 hrs)

ADDITION REACTION Addition to Carbon-Carbon Multiple Bonds Mechanism: Electrophilic, nucleophilic and free radical addition Orientation and reactivity : Stereochemical orientation, addition to cyclopropane rings. Reactions: Addition of hydro-hydro; halo; hydroxyl; alkoxy, acyloxy, alkylthio, amino, amido, alkyl, acyl, carboxy, carbonyl, allyl groups to double bonds. Addition of dihydro-oxo, dialkyl groups to triple bonds. Addition of boranes, addition of halogen –oxygen, dihydroxy addition, oxyamination, diamination, Michael Addition-using copper, by reaction with electrophiles, with and without copper; Micheal reaction coupled to a photochemical cyclisation, employing Organolithium, Organomagnesium, Organozinc, Organocopper reagents. Stereochemical aspects of each reaction.

UNIT - V (18 hrs) METHODS OF DETERMINING REACTION MECHANISMS Kinetic and non-kinetic methods of determining reaction mechanisms-Thermodynamic and kinetic aspects-spectroscopic studies - isotope effects – energy profile diagrams – intermediate vs transition state – product analysis and its importance – cross over experiments. Relationship between thermodynamic stability and rates of reactions - kinetic versus thermodynamic control of product formation – Hammond postulate - kinetic isotope effects with examples Quantitative treatment of structure and reactivity – Hamett and Taft equations – Classification of solvents (protic and aprotic), solvent effects in organic chemistry – solute –solvent interactions.

COURSE OUTCOME

The student

1 can have understanding about the nature and reactivity of reactive intermediates. 2 can determine the mechanism of chemical reactions. 3 will have thorough knowledge about the mechanism of substitution involving NGP, enolates, asymmetric alkylation and addition reactions, and hence will be able to optimise the yield of a reaction and control the regiochemical as well as the stereochemical outcome of chemical reactions. 4 can find out whether the compound is chiral or not 5 can determine the configuration, conformation and topicity of organic compounds, an essential skill in drug development.

Reference Books 1. J. March, Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions, Mechanisms and Structure, 6th Ed., Wiley interscience, 2007.

2. J. Clayden, N. Greeves, S. Warren and P. Wothers, Organic Chemistry, Oxford Press, 1st Ed., 2000. 3. F. A. Carey and R. J. Sundberg, Advanced Organic Chem., parts A and B. 5th Ed., Springer, 2007. 4. Paul Wyatt.Stuart Warren Organic Synthesis- Strategy and Control, Wiley publications,2013.

5. E.L. Eliel, S. H. Wilen, L. N. Mander, Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2005.

6. P. S. Kalsi, Stereochemistry, Conformation and Mechanism, New Age International, 6th Ed., 2006. 7. D.Nasipuri, Stereochemistry of Organic compounds, Principles and Applications, 3rd edn, New Age Publishers, 2012.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 4 M. Sc. CHEMISTRY ORGANIC APPLICATIONS OF (CORE) Semester-I

Paper: II Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 4

OBJECTIVES 1 To learn quantization of energy and interaction of electromagnetic radiation with matter. 2 To understand the fundamentals of different branches of spectroscopy. 3 To elucidate the structures of organic molecules using different spectral techniques

UNIT - I (18 hrs) IR and

IR Spectroscopy : Skeletal vibrations and finger print regions – characteristic vibrational frequencies of , , , aromatic compounds, alcohols, ethers, phenols and amines, carbonyl compounds (ketones, aldehydes, esters, amides, acids, anhydrides, lactones, lactams and conjugated carbonyl compounds) - Effect of Hydrogen bonding and solvent effect on vibrational frequencies – extension to various organic molecules for structural assignment. Vibrational frequency chart for various functional frequencies.

Raman Spectroscopy: Application in organic chemistry – Benzene: ortho, para, meta isomers- cis, trans isomers – structure determination by combined use of Raman and IR spectra

UNIT - II (18 hrs) UV Spectroscopy

Types of transitions – Woodward Fieser rules – differentiation of geometrical isomers and position isomers (disubstituted benzene derivatives, nitrophenols) conjugated cyclic ketones, acetophenones, esters – study of steric effect in aromatic compounds – steric inhibition of resonance. Solvent effects.

Introduction: ORD and CD, axial halo ketone rule, cotton effect.

UNIT - III (18 hrs) 1H NMR Spectroscopy Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy: Approximate chemical shift values of various chemically non-equivalent protons and correlation to protons bonded to carbon (aliphatic, olefinic, aldehydic and aromatic), Protons bonded to other nuclei (alcohols, phenols, enols, carboxylic acids, amines, amides, SH), effect of deuteration, complex spin-spin interaction between two, three, and four interacting nuclei (first order spectra), Complex interaction, virtual coupling, stereochemically hindered rotation, Karplus curve, variation of coupling constant with dihedral angle, simplification of complex spectra using shift reagents, nuclear magnetic double resonance and Nuclear Overhauser Effect (NOE).

Unit - IV (18 hrs) Basic principle, instrumentation, nomenclature, Mass spectral fragmentation of organic compounds – common functional groups – molecular peaks – meta stable peak – McLafferty rearrangement – general rules for interpretation of the spectrum – molecular weight, isotope effect, nitrogen rule, ring rule – examples of mass spectral fragmentation of organic compounds with respect to their structure determination, identification of unknown compounds, characterization of polymers based on mass spectrometry.

UNIT - V (18 hrs) 13C and 2D NMR Spectroscopy 13C NMR Spectroscopy: isotopic abundance, Chemical shift, Applications of IR, NMR, and Mass spectroscopy for structure elucidation of organic compounds. DEPT 2D NMR Spectroscopy: Introduction, Homo COSY, C, H-HETCOR and NOESY for simple molecules.

COURSE OUTCOME The student will have a sound knowledge in various spectroscopy principles and to analyse any spectral data of organic molecules.

Reference Books 1. R. M. Silverstein, F. X. Webster, and D. Kiemle, Spectroscopic Identification of Organic Compounds, 7th Ed., John Wiley & Sons, 2005. 2. R. S. Macomber, A complete introd. to modern nmr spectroscopy, John Wiley & Sons, 1998.

3. E. D. Becker, High resolution NMR, 3rd Ed., Academic Press, 1999. 4. D. L. Pavia et al., Introduction of spectroscopy, 4th Ed., Brooks Cole, 2008. 5. W. Kemp, Organic Spectroscopy, 3rd Ed., McMillan Press Ltd., 1991. 6. D. H. Williams & I. Fleming, Spectroscopic Methods in Organic Chemistry, 5th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, 2004. 7. C. N. Banwell & E. M. McCash, Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy, Tata McGraw-Hill, , 2006. 8. D. Pasto, C.Johnson & M.Miller, Experiments and Techniques in Organic Chemistry, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1992 9. Barrow, Molecular Spectroscopy, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1962. 10. D. N. Sathyanarayana, Vibrational spectroscopy – Theory and Applications, Ist Ed., New Age International Ltd., New Delhi.

QUEEN MARYS COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI – 4 M.Sc. CHEMISTRY AND – (Core) Semester-I

Paper: III Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 4

OBJECTIVES:

1 To make the students understand the need and basics of quantum chemistry. 2 To have a good foundation in the physical and mathematical aspects of . 3 To elucidate the use of chemical kinetics in monitoring reaction mechanisms.

UNIT - I (18 hrs) Review of essential mathematical concepts, Origin of the Quantum theory. Postulates of quantum mechanics, Operators: Linear, differential, Hermitian and Hamiltonian operators. Eigen functions and Eigen values – time-dependent and time independent Schrodinger wave equations. Particle in a box (1D, 2D & 3D); degeneracy, QM tunneling.

UNIT - II (18 hrs) Rigid rotator wave equation and solution, calculation of rotational constants and bond length. Harmonic Oscillator: Wave equation and solution, anharmonicity force constant and its significance. Angular momentum - spin coupling and spin-orbit coupling.

UNIT - III (18 hrs) Approximation method - Variation method . Application to the helium . Slater determinantal wave functions, Born – Oppenheimer approximation. LCAO – MO and VB treatments of hydrogen . Huckel pi-electron theory and its application to ethylene and butadiene.

UNIT - IV (18 hrs) EMPRICAL CHEMICAL KINETICS - I Experimental techniques – Monitoring the progress of a reaction spectrophotometry – application of the techniques; Fast reactions – flow method – flash photolysis; The rates of reactions – Temperature dependence of reaction rate – Arrhenius parameters – Temperature jump – relaxation methods.

UNIT - I (18 hrs) EMPRICAL CHEMICAL KINETICS – II Elementary reactions – unimolecular – bimolecular – consecutive elementary reactions – variation of concentration with time – Rate determining step – steady state approximation – Third order reactions – Michaelis – Menton’s mechanism – Lindemann – Hinshelwood mechanism – Rice Ramsperger – Kassel theory.

COURSE OUTCOME The students would be able to 1. Write operators for physically observable properties like linear momentum, angular momentum and energy 2. Find Eigen functions and eigen values of operators 3. Write and solve Schrodinger wave equation for the simple systems like particle in a 1D, 2D or 3D box,on atom 1D simple harmonic oscillator, rigid rotor and the hydrogen atom.

4. Apply approximation methods such as variation method to solve Schrodinger wave equation for multi electron . 5. Know the experimental techniques such as flash photolysis available for monitoring the progresss of a reaction, especially fast reaction. 6. Write mechanism of chemical reactions 7. Interpret enzyme using steady state approximation and arrive at Michalis Menten equation . REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. Levine, Quantum Chemistry, 4th Ed., Allyn & Bacon Inc., 1983. 2. R. K. Prasad, Quantum Chemistry, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi. 1997. 3. R. P. Rastogi and V.K. Srivastava, An Introduction to Quantum Mechanics of Chemical Systems. Oxford & IBH Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1986, 4. D. A. McQuarrie, Quantum chemistry, Viva Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2007. 5. P.W.Atkins, , Oxford university press, 1978. 6. K.L.Kapoor, A textbook of Physical chemistry, (volumes-2 and 3) Macmillan Ltd, 1994. 7. K.J. Laidler, Chemical Kinetics, 3rd Ed., Harper and Row Publishers. New York, 1987. 8. J.Rajaram and J.C.Kuriokose, Kinetics and Mechanisms of chemical transformation, 1st Ed., Macmilland India Ltd, Delhi, 1993. 9. A.A.Frost and R.G.Pearosn, Kinetics and Mechanism, 2nd Ed., John Wiley and Sons, 1963. 10. K.B. Ytsimiriski, Kinetic Methods of Analysis, Pergamon press, 1996. 11. .A.K. Chandra, Indtroductory Quantum Chemistry, 3rd edition, Tata – Mc.Graw – Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi. 12. James E.House, 2nd edition, Fundametals of Quantum chemistry, Elsevier Academic Press, 2008.

QUEEN MARYS COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI – 4 M.Sc. CHEMISTRY -I- (Core) Semester –I Paper: III Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 4

OBJECTIVES

1 To understand the need for non aqueous solvents and the fundamental concepts of hard and soft acids and bases. 2 To gain thorough knowledge about the crystal field and molecular orbital theories of Coordination complexes. 3 To facilitate an in depth study about the stereochemical aspects of Inorganic complexes. 4 To acquire knowledge about photochemical reactions in Inorganic complexes and the role of photocatalysts.

UNIT – I (18hrs)

NON-AQUEOUS SOLVENTS:

Factors justifying the need of Non Aqueous solution Chemistry and failure of water as a Solvent. Solution chemistry of Sulphuric acid: Physical properties, Ionic self dehydration in

H2SO4, high electrical conductance in spite of high viscosity, Chemistry of H2SO4 as an acid, as an dehydrating agent, as an oxidizing agent, as an medium to carry out acid-base neutralization reaction and as a differentiating solvent. Liquid BrF3: Physical properties, solubilities in BrF3, self ionization, acid base neutralization reactions, solvolytic reactions and formation of transition metal fluorides. Chemistry of Molten salts as Non-Aqueous Solvents: Solvent properties, solution of metals, complex formation, Unreactivity of molten salts, Low temperature molten salts.

HSAB concept of acids and bases -acid, base strength and hardness and softness -symbiosis – Relation of electronegativity of acids and bases with their hardness and softness.

UNIT – II (18hrs)

COORDINATION CHEMISTRY – I

Crystal field theory and its application to explain magnetic properties of coordination compounds, octahedral vs tetrahedral complexes, Jahn-Teller effect, Interpretation of electronic spectra including charge transfer spectra: spectrochemical series, nephelauxetic series: magnetic properties of lanthanides and actinides and splitting of d-orbitals in octahedral field.

Magnetic properties and Electronic strtucture of Transition Metal Complexes: Brief review of different types of magnetic behavior, spin-orbit coupling, quenching or orbital angular momenta, temperature-independent para magnetism, measurement of magnetic susceptibility using Guoy and Faraday methods..

UNIT – III (18 hrs)

COORDINATION CHEMISTRY – II

MOT: MOT  – bonding and - bonding in Oh complexes effect of – bonding on the value of 10 Dq of Oh complexes spectrochemical series 18 e- rule in terms of MOT, MOT for the square planar (16 e- rule) and Td (18 e- rule)complexes –comparison of VBT, CFT, LFT and MOT of bonding in Oh complexes.

UNIT- IV (18 hrs)

STABILITY OF COMPLEXES

Stability and Stereo chemical Aspects Stability of complexes - thermodynamic aspects of complex formation, factors affecting stability, stability correlations, statistical and chelate effects; Determination of stability constants - polarographic, photometric and potentiometric methods.Stereochemistry of coordination compounds - stereoisomerism in inorganic complexes, isomerism arising out of ligand distribution and ligand conformation, chirality. Macrocyclic ligand types - porphyrins, corrins, Schiff bases, crown ethers, cryptates and catenands. (simple complexes).

UNIT-V (18 hrs)

PHOTOCHEMICAL REACTIONS:

Photochemical excitation – prompt and delayed reaction photochemical reactions of metal 3- 4- carbonyls, Co(III) complexes, Cr(III) complexes – photolysis of [M(CN)8] and [M(CN)8] (M = 3- Mo, W) in aqueous solution – oxalate complexes [M(OX)3] (M = Fe, Mn, Co), photochemical reactions of Fe(II) and Fe(III) complexes – photochemical substitution process in Pt(IV). 2+ of [Ru(bpy)3] photochemical splitting of H2O - TiO2 as a green photocatalyst in removing air and water pollutants – photochemical reactions of nitrogen.

COURSE OUTCOME

1 The syllabus offers a complete knowledge about core concepts of inorganic chemistry like the demand for non aqeous solvents, theories of hard and soft acids and bases. 2 It provides indepth knowledge about the interpretation of electronic spectra of complexes and their magnetic properties. 3 A clear picture of photochemical inorganic reactions are taught which will help the student understand the mechanism of these reactions in detail.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Huheey, J. E.; Keiter, E. A. Keiter, R. L. Inorganic Chemistry; 4th Ed.; Harper and Row, NewYork, 1983. 2. Cotton, F. A.; Wilkinson, G.; Murillo, C. A.; Bochmann, M. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry; 6th Ed., Wiley Interscience: New York, 1988. 3. Purcell, K. F.; Kotz, J. C. Inorganic Chemistry; Saunders: Philadelphia, 1976. 4. Moeller, T. Inorganic Chemistry, A Modern Introduction; John Wiley: New York, 1982. 5. Shriver, D. F.; Atkins, P. W.; Langford, C. H. Inorganic Chemistry; 3rd Ed.; Oxford University Press: L0ondon, 2001. 6. Stout, G. H.; Jenson, L. H. X-Ray Structure Determination, 2nd Ed.; John Wiley & Sons: New York, 1989. 7. West, A. R. Solid State Chemistry and its Applications, John Wiley & Sons: New York, 1989. 8. Rhodes, G. Made crystal Clear; Academic Press Inc.: New York, 1993. 9. Hammond, C. The Basics of Crystallography and Diffraction; Oxford University Press; 1997.

10.Smart, L.; Moore, E. Solid State Chemistry An Introduction; 2nd Ed.; Nelson ThomesLtd.:Cheltenham, 1996. 11.Rohatgi.K.K, Mukherjee, Fundamentals of photochemistry, New age international publishers. 12.Arthur Wilson Adamson, Paul D.S Fleischauer, Concepts of Inorganic Photochemistry, John Wiley & Sons Australia, Limited, 1975 13. Asim. K. Das and Mahua Das, Fundamentals concepts of Inorganic chemistry, CBS publishers & Distributors private Ltd.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI-4 M. Sc. CHEMISTRY INORGANIC CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL –I (Core) Semester-I Paper-V Max. Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 4 OBJECTIVES

1 To impart the skill in preparations of metal complexes. 2 To identify the methodology to estimate a metal ion in the presence of another metal ion. 3 To improve the skill in the qualitative analysis of rare metal in different groups. 4 To identify the methodology to analyse a metal ion in the presence of another metal ion. 5 To enable the students in interpreting the spectra of inorganic complexes.

1. Inorganic Preparations

1. Preparation of Tris(thiourea) copper(I) sulphatedihyrade 2. Preparation of hexammine nickel(II) chloride 3. Preparation of cis-potassium bis(oxalato) diaquochromate(III) 4. Preparation of trans-potassium bis(oxalate) diaquochromate(II) 5. Preparation of sodium hexanitrocobaltate(III) 6. Preparation of Bis(acetylacetonato) copper(II)

2. Inorganic Estimations.

1. Estimation of copper volumetrically and nickel gravimetrically 2. Estimation of copper volumetrically and zinc gravimetrically 3. Estimation of iron volumetrically and nickel gravimetrically

4. Estimation of iron volumetrically and magnesium gravimetrically

*3. Semi micro qualitative analysis

Analysis of cations containing less familiar elements- tungsten. Selenium, tellurium. Molybdenum, cerium, thorium, zirconium, vanadium, uranium and lithium.

*4. Identification of inorganic compounds from spectral data

*Experiments only for Internal assessment

COURSE OUTCOME

The students

1 Will have a sound knowledge in preparation of inorganic complexes which is useful in their research field. 2 Will possess the ability to separate and analyse mixture of ions either gravimetrically or by using volumetric methods. 3 Can able to resolve any spectral data of inorganic compounds which is essential in their research as well as in any analytical field. 4 Can analyse and identity the less common elements if present in a sample, in a laboratory.

REFERENCE:

1. Inorganic Quantitative Analysis- A. Vogel 2. Inorganic preparations – A. King. 3. V.V.Ramanujam Inorganic Semimicro Qualitative Analaysis, 3rd Ed. The National Publishing Co. Chennai 1974.

4. Woolins. J D. Ed., Inorganic Experiments; VCH. Weinheim, 1994 5. Pass, G. Sutcliffe, H., Practical Inorganic Chemistry, Chapman Hall, 1965. 6. Palmer, W. G. Eperimental Inorganic Chemistry, Cambridge University Press, 1954. 7. V.Venkatesan, R.Veerasamy,A.R.Kulandaivelu, Basic Principles of Practical Chemistry. S.Chand and Sons, 2004.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 4 M.Sc. CHEMISTRY- Organic Chemistry – II Semester- II

Paper No. : VI Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 4

OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the mechanism of organic chemical reactions. 2. To appreciate the concept of substitution, elimination and rearrangement reactions and their reaction mechanisms. 3. To acquire a sound knowledge in the reagents employed for oxidation and reduction reactions.

UNIT- I (18 hrs) ELIMINATION REACTION Structural and Stereochemical factors governing E1, E2 and E1cb reactions, Reactivity, Orientation of the double bond: Hoffmann, Zaitsev’s and Bredt’s rule, Mechanisms and orientation in pyrolytic elimination. Chelotropic elimination, Decomposition of cyclic azo compounds, β-eliminations involving cyclic transition states such as sulfoxides, selenoxides, N-oxides, acetates, xanthates eliminations.

UNIT – II (18 hrs)

AROMATIC ELECTROPHILIC & NUCLEOPHILIC SUBSTITUTION REACTIONS SE1, SE2 reaction mechanism, Arenium ion mechanism, ortho/para ratio; orientation and reactivity in monosubtituted benzene rings and benzene rings with more than one subtituent; Ortho directing reactions (i) using lithium: ortho lithiation - directing groups containing oxygen, nitrogen, several lithiation ; (ii) halogens , (iii) alpha lithiation and (iv) lateral lithiation and halogens, multiple directed lithiations, several lithiations, Von Richter rearrangement.

UNIT III (18 hrs)

REARRANGEMENTS Rearrangements involving migration to electron-deficient carbon: Wagner-Meerwein, Dienone Phenol, Demjanov and Wolff rearrangements. Rearrangements involving migration to electron-rich carbon: Sommelet-Hauser Favorskii, Fries, Stevens, Neber.

UNIT - IV (18 hrs) REAGENTS FOR OXIDATION

Alcohols to carbonyls: Chromium based reagents - CrO3 in H2SO4, Jone’s reagent, PCC, PDC, and

Collin’s reagent; Manganese based reagent - MnO2; Ruthenium based reagents -TPAP, NMO; Hypervalent iodine reagents - DMP and IBX; Silver based reagents - Fetizon’s reagent; DMSO based reagents - Swern, Pfitzner Moffatt oxidation; TEMPO. Alkenes to epoxides: Sharpless asymmetric epoxidation, Jacobsen epoxidation, Shi epoxidation.

Alkenes to diols – OsO4. KMnO4,Sharpless asymmetric dihydroxylation, Prevost reaction and Woodward modification,

Alkenes to carbonyls with bond cleavage - KMnO4, OsO4 & NaIO4, Ozonolysis Alkenes to alcohols/carbonyls without bond cleavage - hydroboration-oxidation, Wacker oxidation, SeO2 based allylic oxidation. Ketones to ester/lactones - Baeyer-Villiger

UNIT - V (18 hrs) REAGENTS FOR REDUCTION

(1) Catalytic hydrogenation Heterogeneous: Palladium/Platinum/Rhodium/Nickel etc; Homogeneous: Wilkinson (2) Metal based reductions Birch reduction, Lindlar’s Catalyst, and Samarium reagents.

(3) Hydride transfer reagents from Group III and Group IV in reductions : LiAlH4, LiAlH(OR)3,

DIBAL-H, and Red-Al; NaBH4, LiBH4, Zn(BH4)2, L-selectride, K-selectride, NaBH3CN,

NaBH3CN & NH2NHTs, Luche reduction, and Bu3SnH.

COURSE OUTCOME The student

1 Will have thorough knowledge about the mechanism of electrophilic substitution reactions involving Arenium ion mechanism and elimination reactions and hence will be able to optimise the yield of a reaction and control the regiochemical as well as the stereochemical outcome of chemical reactions. 2 Can suggest ways to transform functional groups through rearrangements and by employing reagents for oxidation and reduction.

Reference Books 1. J. March, Ad. Org. Chem.; Reactions, Mech. and Structure, 6th Ed., Wiley Intersci., 2007.

2. J. D. Coyle, Organic Photochemistry, Wiley, 1985.

3. J. M. Coxon, B. Halton, Organic Photochem., Cambridge University Press, 2nd Ed., 1987.

4. J. Clayden, N. Greeves, S. Warren and P. Wothers, Org. Chem., oxford University Press, 1st Ed., 2000.

5. F. A. Carey and R. J. Sundberg, Advanced Org. Chem., parts A and B. 5th Ed., Springer, 2007.

6. I. L. Finar, Organic Chemistry, Vol.II, 5th Ed., Pearson, 2009.

7. Jie Jack Li, Name reactions. A collection of detailed reaction mech., 4th Ed., Springer, 2009.

8. B. P. Mundy, M. G. Ellerd, F. G. Favaliro, Advanced organic chemistry 2nd Ed., Wiley, 2005.

9. L. Kurti B. Czako, Strategic Appl. of Named Reactions in Org. Syn., Elsevier Academic Press, 2005.

10. A. Hassner, C. Stumer, Org. Syn. Based on Name and Unnamed Reactions, Elsevier Sci. Ltd., UK, 1994.

11. G. Brahmachari, Org. Name Reactions: A Unified approach, Alpha Science Intl. Ltd., 2006.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI-4 M. Sc. CHEMISTRY INORGANIC CHEMISTRY - II SEMESTER II Paper No. : VII Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 4

OBJECTIVES 1. To study in detail about the reaction mechanism involving transition metal complexes. 2. To acquire knowledge about the fundamentals of Organometallic compounds, their vivd reactions and their role as catalysts.

UNIT- I (18 hrs) INORGANIC REACTIONS AND MECHANISM:

Substitution reactions in octahedral complexes- general mechanism, discussion of A, D, IA, ID and DCB mechanism, replacement of coordinated water, acid hydrolysis reactions, base hydrolysis and anation reactions, substitution reaction, reactions occurring without rupture of metal-ligand bond. Substitution reactions of square planar complexes. Theories of trans-effect, labile and inert complexes. Mechanism of redox reactions.

UNIT-II (18 hrs) ELECTRON TRANSFER REACTIONS Inner sphere (ISET) and outer sphere (OSET) electron transfer reactions – OSET: steps of OSET – electron transfer and Frank Condon principle – potential energy diagram for ET process – the Marcus eqn for OS cross – reaction nature of donors and receptors MO in OSET process – important factors to control the rate constants of OSET reactions – effect of external ions as ET rate in OSET process.

ISET: Steps of ISET process – rate law for the ISET process – effect of the native (HOMO) of donor and (LUMO) of the receptor orbitals in the ISET process Comparison of reaction rates for 2+ the reduction of Co(III) complexes by [Cr(OH)6] through the OSET and ISET processes – types of ISET – effect of the nature of HOMO of the reductant and LUMO of the oxidant on the rate of 1S reaction – role of bridging ligand with ISET reaction – tunneling transfer, resonance transfer –

multiple bridging in the activated complex in the ISET process – effect of the non-bridging ligand on the rate of ISET & OSET processes – ligand replacement reactions through ET – non- complementary ET reaction.

UNIT – III (18hrs) - I Transition Metal Alkyls and Aryls, Related σ-Bonded Ligands, Metal Hydride Complexes, σ - complexes, Bond Strengths for Classical σ-Bonding Ligands.

Carbonyls, Phosphine complexes and ligand substitution reactions: Metal complexes of CO, RNC, CS, NO, Phosphines and related ligands, Dissociative substitution, Associative mechanism, Redox effects- mechanism and rearrangement. Substitution – photochemical substitution, steric and solvent effects in substitutions.

Metal-ligand multiple bonds; Carbenes, Carbynes, Bridging carbenes, carbynes, N-Heterocyclic Carbenes, multiple bonds to heteroatoms, applications – Metathesis,

UNIT – IV (18hrs) ORGANOMETALLIC CHEMISTRY - II Complexes of π-Bound Ligands: Alkene and Complexes, Allyl Complexes, Diene Complexes, Cyclopentadienyl Complexes, Arenes and other Alicyclic Ligands,Metalacycles and Isoelectronic and Isolobal replacement, Stability of Polyene and Polyenyl Complexes.

Insertion and elimination reactions involving CO, Insertions involving alkenes, alpha beta and omega elimination

Cyclopentadienyl complexes - metallocenes - synthesis of metallocenes - bonding in metallocenes - reactions of metallocenes - Cp2Fe/Cp2Fe+ couples in biosensors - bent sandwich complexes - bonding in bent sandwich complexes - metallocene halides and hydrides - metallocene and stereospecific polymerisation of 1-alkenes - cyclopentadiene as a non-spectator ligand.

UNIT-V (18 hrs)

CATALYSIS BY TRANSITION METAL COMPLEXES

General principles of catalysis - basic reactions involved in the catalysis by organometallic compounds – Tolman catalytic loops – catalytic mechanism in the following reactions: hydrogenation of olefins (Wilkinson’s catalyst) – hydroformylation (oxo process) – Monsanto acetic acid synthesis from methanol – oxidation of alkenes to aldehydes and ketones (Wacker process) – catalysis in the formation of synthesis gas (syn gas) – homologation – water gas shift reaction (WGSR) – synthetic gasoline by using ZSM – 5 catalyst (Fisher – Tropsch and mobil process – political process) – cyclooligomerisation of acetylenes (Reppe’s orWilke’s catalyst) – olefin isomerisation using Ni catalyst – olefin metathesis catalysed by Schröck type carbene – catalytic deuteration of benzene.

COURSE OUTCOME 1. An in depth knowledge about electron transfer reactions and its mechanism is imparted to the students. 2. The fundamental principle behind organometallic chemistry, various reactions involving organometallic compounds and their role in catalysing various reactions is taught,which will enable the student to apply the knowledge to understand the analytical concepts involved.

Reference Books 1. Huheey, J. E.; Keiter, E. A. Keiter, R. L. Inorganic Chemistry; 4th Ed.; Harper and Row, NewYork, 1983. 2. Cotton, F. A.; Wilkinson, G.; Murillo, C. A.; Bochmann, M. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry; 6th Ed., Wiley Interscience: New York, 1988. 3. Purcell, K. F.; Kotz, J. C. Inorganic Chemistry; Saunders: Philadelphia, 1976. 4. Moeller, T. Inorganic Chemistry, A Modern Introduction; John Wiley: New York, 1982. 5. Shriver, D. F.; Atkins, P. W.; Langford, C. H. Inorganic Chemistry; 3rd Ed.; Oxford University Press: L0ondon, 2001. 6. Arthur Wilson Adamson, Paul D.S Fleischauer, Concepts of Inorganic Photochemistry, John Wiley & Sons Australia, Limited, 1975. 7. Asim. K. Das and Mahua Das, Fundamentals concepts of Inorganic chemistry, CBS publishers & Distributors private Ltd.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI – 4 M. Sc. CHEMISTRY ORGANIC CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL- II (Core) Semester-II Paper: VIII Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 4

OBJECTIVES

To develop analytical skill in

1 Separation and identification of organic mixture. 2 Organic preparations involving two stages. 3 To understand the techniques involved in estimations of organic compounds. 4 To develop the skill in interpretation of spectral data of various organic compounds

Experiments:

1. Separation and identification of components in a two component mixture and preparation of their derivative

2. Identification of organic compounds using spectroscopic data.

3. Synthesis of organic compounds involving two steps. i. Preparation of phthalimide from phthalic anhydride, preparation of anthranilic acid from phthalic anhydride. ii. preparation of p-bromo acetanilide from acetanilide, preparation of p-bromoaniline from p- bromo acetanilide. iii. Preparation of p-nitroacetanilide from acetanilide, preparation of p-nitroaniline from p- nitroacetanilide. iv. Preparation of 2,4,6-tribromoaniline from aniline, preparation of 1,3,5-tribromobenzene from 2,4,6-tribromoaniline.

*4. Quantitative estimation of organic compounds

(i) Estimation of Aniline. (ii) Estimation of Phenol. (iii) Estimation of Glucose.

*Experiments only for internal assessment

COURSE OUTCOME

The student

1 Can separate any organic mixture and identify it. 2 Acquires knowledge in preparing organic compounds. 3 Acquires the skill in estimation of organic compounds. 4 Possess the ability to interpret any spectral data which help her in

REFERENCE BOOKS 1. N. S. Gnanapragasam and G. Ramamurthy, Organic chemistry - Lab manual, S. Viswanathan Co. Pvt. Ltd., 1998. 2. J.N. Gurtu and R. Kapoor, Advanced Experimental Chemistry (Organic), S. Chand and Co., 1987. 3. Vogel’s Textbook of Practical organic chemistry, 5th Ed., ELBS/Longman, Ingland 1996. 4. V. Venkatesan, R. Veeraswamy, A. R. Kulandaivelu, basic principles of practical chemistry, S. Chand and Sons, 2004.

QUEEN MARYS COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI – 4 M.Sc. CHEMISTRY ELECTRO CHEMISTRY – (Elective) Semester : II Paper No. : IX Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits : 3

OBJECTIVES:

1. To enable the students to understand the behaviour of electrolytes in solution. 2. To understand the structure of electrolyte surface. 3. To know the applications of electrode process.

UNIT – I (12 Hrs)

IONIC PHENOMENA IN SOLUTION – I

(12hrs)

Born model of ion-solvent interaction, ion-ion interaction, concept of ionic atmosphere. Debye Hukel equation for the mean activity coefficient of electrolytes – verification and experimental validity of the equation. Bjerrum ion pair theory – Bjerrum modification of Debye Hukel equation.

UNIT – II (12 Hrs)

IONIC PHENOMENA IN SOLUTION –II

(12hrs)

Ion association treatment – diffusion – Fick’s law of diffusion – Einstein Smolunchowki equation – conduction – Stoke Einstein equation - Plank Henderson equation – influence of ionic atmosphere on conductivity of electrolytes. Debye Huckel Onsager equation for the equivalent conductance of electrolyte – Experimental verification.

UNIT-III (12 Hrs)

STRUCTURE AND THEORIES OF ELECTRIFIED INTERFACE

The electrode electrolyte interface – electrical double layer – electro capillary phenomena – Helmholtz – Perrin model, Guoy Chapman diffuse model and Stern model. Significance of equilibrium – exchange current density and symmetry factor. Butler- Volmer equation for one electron transfer. Electro kinetic phenomena – zeta potential – Tisselius method of separation of proteins.

UNIT – IV (12 Hrs)

SOME ELECTROCHEMICAL SYSTEMS OF TECHNOLOGICAL INTEREST

(12hrs)

Corrosion and the stability of metals. Theories of corrosion – charge transfer reaction of corrosion, short circulate energy producing cell, corrosion of ultrapure metals – corrosion current and corrosion potential. Evans diagrams, potential – pH diagram (Pourbaix diagram) – Prevention of corrosion – electronic approach to the stability of metals.

UNIT – V (12 Hrs)

Electrode, SHE, Dipping calomel electrode, Quinhydrone electrode, glass electrode – merits and demerits. Fuel cells – kinds of fuel cells and their relative merits – electricity storage – Lead storage battery - Lechlanche cell – silver – zinc cell and sodium – sulphur cell.

COURSE OUTCOME

Sound knowledge in the theories and concepts of

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. J.O.M.Bockris and A.K.N.Reddy, Modern Electrochemistry, vol.1&2. Plenum Press, New

York, 1970.

2. S.Glasstone, Electrochemistry, Affiliated East – West Press Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1974..

3. L.Andropov, Theoretical Electrochemistry, Mir Publications, Moscow, 1977.

4. J. Rajaram and J.C.Kuriakose, Kinetics and Mechnism of Electrochemical Transformations,

Macmillan Inida Ltd.,New Delhi, 1993.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 4 M. Sc. CHEMISTRY- NANO CHEMISTRY (Elective) Semester- II Paper No. : X Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 3

OBJECTIVES 1. To acquire knowledge about 2. To learn the synthesis of nanomaterials, characterization and applications.

UNIT - I (12 hrs) FUNDAMENTALS AND OVERVIEW OF NANOSCIENCE

Nano revolution of the XX century-Basic idea of nanomaterials-Structure-Nucleation and growth-Grain boundaries, Properties at nanoscale: Strength and Hardness, optical, electrical, magnetic, mechanical and chemical properties.

UNIT - II (12 hrs) SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS Top down approach – Nanolithography, Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD). Bottom up approach - sol-gel processing, . self assembly-Supramolecular approach. Reverse micelles and role of surfactants, capping of nanoparticles, Synthesis, purification, properties and uses of CNT, metal Nanoparticles. Nano tubes, Nano rods, Bucky balls-fullerenes, Nanofibers, Nanoshells. Semiconductor Nanoparticles - Energy band structure of Semiconductors Quantum dots-Quantization effect.

UNIT - III (12 hrs) CHARACTERISATION OF NANOMATERIALS-I Theories and Techniques used for characterization-UV-Visible and PL spectroscopy-XRD- Electron microscopes-SEM, TEM, HR-TEM (SAED).

UNIT - IV (12 hrs) CHARACTERISATION OF NANOMATERIALS-II Theories and Techniques used for characterization SPM, AFM, STM, XPS, XANES.

UNIT - V (12 hrs) APPLICATIONS OF NANOMATERIALS Solar energy conversion and catalysis - Uses of Nanocomposites, chemical and nano biosensors. Nanomedicine and Nanobiotechnology-NEMS. Nanomaterials in bone substitutes and dentistry, drug delivery and its application- nanoparticles in cancer targeting and treatment. Food and cosmetic applications, textiles, paints, Nanotechnology in agriculture, fertilizer and pesticides. Nanoparticles in Pollution control.

COURSE OUTCOME The student

1. Know the different approaches to synthesise a nanomaterial 2. can practice the application of nanomaterial in different field

Reference Books 1. Pradeep, T., “Nano: the Essentials”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2007.

2. Rao, C.N.R. and Cheetham, A.K., “The chem. of Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and Applications”, Wiley-VCH, 2004.

3. Hari Singh Nalwa, “Nanostructured materials and Nanotechnology”, Acad. press, 2002.

4. Charles P. Poole and Frank J. Owens, “Intro. to Nanotechnology” Wiley-Intersci., 2003.

5. A.Nanobook, “Organic and Inorganic Nanostructures”, Artech House, 2005. 6. Sulabha K. Kulkarni, “Nanotech.: Principles and Practices”, Publishing Co, 2007.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI – 4 M. Sc. CHEMISTRY- - (Other Elective) Semester- II Paper No. : XI Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 3

OBJECTIVES 1. To understand the basic concepts in food chemistry 2. To understand type of additives added to a food product 3. To understand the processing and preservation techniques adopted in a food process. 4. To have knowledge in analysis of various content present in food. 5. To know the various types of adulterants that may be mixed in a food product.

UNIT- I (12 hrs)

CONCEPTS IN FOOD CHEMISTRY Introduction to food chemistry, water structure, interactions of water with food materials and food components, water binding, moisture contents in foods, role of water in food preparation, food guide- basic five groups, and usage of food guide.

UNIT- II (12 hrs) FOOD ADDITIVES

Food additives: Need for food additives, Antioxidants, chelating agents, colouring agents, curing agents, emulsions, Flavours and flavour enhancers, Texuring agents, Humecants, sweeteners- Nonnutritive sweeteners, Preservatives, stabilizers and thickeners, other additives.

UNIT- III (12 hrs) FOOD PRESERVATION AND PROCESSING Food Deterioration- Microbial spoilage, food enzyme, insects, parasites and rodents, temperature, moisture, oxygen, light and time, in the home. Methods of Preservation and Processing- Preservation and processing by- heat, cold. Chill storage, Deep freezing, Drying, Concentration, Fermentation, Radiation.

UNIT- IV (12 hrs) FOOD ANALYSIS

Food sampling- sample and sample preparation of foods. Analysis of protein- determination of moisture content, ash content, nitrogen content- Kjeldahl method. Analysis of oils and fats- analysis of crude fats, determination of iodine number, acid number, saponification value. Analysis of carbohydrates- analysis of glucose and starch- Benedict’s method, Anthrone method, Nelson- Somoyogi- analysis of crude fibers. Estimation of vitamins- Thiamine and Riboflavin. Enzyme Activity- Measurement of enzyme activity-principle, estimation of catalase in chow-chow and radish.

UNIT- V (12 hrs) FOOD ADULTERATION

Detection of adulteration in coffee, tea, oil, fooddhal, sugar, milk, ghee, supari, turmeric powder, kesari powder, chilli powder, spices, jaggery, sweets, jam, jelly, honey- laboratory tests, chemistry behind each test and health hazards of the adulterants. Estimation of benzoic acid, saccharin powder and B.O.A. A test.

COURSE OUTCOME The student 1. Gain a sound knowledge in food chemistry 2. Can identify the type of adulterant mixed in a food product and even analyse the products to determine its quality.

REFERENCES 1. Beritz. H.D., Grosch. M.W, “Food Chemistry”, 2nd edition, Springer, Verlag, Germany. 2. Geetha Swaminathan, Mary George, “Laboratory Chemical Methods in Food Analysis”, 1999, Margham publication, Chennai. 3. Sharma. B. K, “Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis”, Goel Publishing house, Meerut. 4. Swaminathan. M., “Text Book on Food Chemistry”, Printing and Publishing Co ltd., Bangalore. 5. Coultate. T. P., “Food Chemistry of is Components”3rd Edition, 1999, Royal Society of Chemistry, Cambridge. 6. Lehninger. A.L., ‘Principles of ”, Worth Publishers. 7. Voet and Voet, “Biochemistry”, John Wiley. 8. Norman N. Potter, Food science, CBS publishers and distributors, New Delhi. 1994. 9. Lillian Hoagoland Meyer, Food Chemistry, CBS publishers and distributors, New Delhi. 1994. 10. Owen R Fennema, Food Chemistry, Marcel Decker Inc., New York. 1996. 11. Srilakshmi B., Food Science, New age International Pvt. Ltd. Publishers, III ed. 2003. 12. Siva Sankar B., Food Processing and Preservation. Prentice – Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 2002. 13. Shakuntala Manay. N, Shadaksharaswamy.M., Foods Facts and Principles.,New age International Pvt. Ltd. Publishers. 14. Chopra.H.K, Panesar.P.S., Food Chemistry., Narosa Publishing House.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 4 M.Sc. CHEMISTRY ORGANIC CHEMISTRY – III Semester- III

Paper No. : XII Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 4

OBJECTIVES 1 To understand the basic principle in photochemical reactions. 2 To understand the concept behind pericyclic reactions 3 To have a thorough knowledge in identifying the aromaticity concepts in organic compounds. 4 To identify the reactions involving specific reagents and their mechanism. 5 To acquire knowledge in retro synthetic analysis.

UNIT - I (18 hrs)

PHOTOCHEMISTRY Photochemical excitation: Experimental techniques, electronic transitions, Jablonskii diagrams, intersystem crossing (ISC), energy transfer. Reactions of electronically excited ketones, π- π* and n- π* triplets, α – cleavage: Norrish type I and Norrish type II reactions; β- cleavage; photo reductions, phot oxidation and dimerisation, Paterno – Buchi reactions, photochemistry of an α, β-unsaturated ketones, cis-trans isomerisation. Photochemical rearrangement : di-pi methane rearrangement, 1,3,5-trimethylbenzene to 1,2,4- trimethylbenzene, Barton reactions.

UNIT –II (18 hrs) PERICYCLIC REACTIONS Classification, Woodward – Hoffmann rules – Frontier Molecular Orbital (FMO), Orbital symmetry correlation approaches. Huckel Molecular orbital method or perturbation molecular orbital method.

Electrocyclic reactions: Conrotatory and disrotatory motions of 4n, 4n+2, allyl systems, selection rules. Cycloaddition reactions: antarafacial and suprafacial additions, notation of cycloadditions in 4n and 4n+2 systems, [2+2] and [4+2], ene reactions and 1, 3-dipolar cycloaddition reactions, stereochemical effects and effect of substituents on the rate of cycloaddition. Sigmatropic rearrangements: selection rules with simple examples, 1, 3- and 1, 5- hydrogen shift – Cope, hetero cope and Claisen and thio-Claisen rearrangements.

UNIT III (18 hrs) AROMATICITY NMR concept of aromaticity and antiaromaticity – compounds with aromatic sextets: Five, six, seven, and eight membered ring and other systems – Huckel’s theory of aromaticity – electron occupancy in MOs – Systems with (4n+2) π electrons and 4nπ electrons – Alternant and Non- alternant hydrocarbons – aromatic systems with 2, 4, 8, and 10 electrons – Systems of more than 10 electrons (Annulenes) – Aromaticity in Sydnones and fullerenes – Concept of homoaromaticity – Heteroaromatic molecules.

UNIT IV REACTIONS INVOLVING MODERN REAGENTS IN ORGANIC SYNTHESIS Stork-Enamine reaction, Japp-Klingemann reaction, Ziegler alkylation, Hoffmann-Loffler reaction, Simmon-Smith reaction, Mannich reaction, Baylis-Hillman reaction. Biginelli reacation, Mitsunobu reaction, Fukuyama coupling, Heck reaction, Dieckmann reaction, Hiyama coupling, Stille coupling, Suzuki coupling, Sonogashira coupling.

UNIT V (18 hrs) RETROSYNTHESIS An introduction to synthons and synthetic equivalent groups, electron donors (nucleophiles), electron acceptors (electrophiles). Guidelines for retrosynthesis. One group C-X disconnections – carbonyl derivatives, alcohols and ethers. Two group C-X disconnections - 1,1-, 1,2-, and 1,3-, difunctionalised compounds. One group C-C disconnections – ketones, acids; Alkene synthesis. chemoselectivity and regioselectivity. Umpolung reactions, Diels Alder reactions

COURSE OUTCOME The student

1 can suggest methodologies to synthesize compounds with high stereochemical and regiochemical selectivity by employing light/ heat energy/modern reagents. 2 can determine whether a compound is aromatic/non aromatic /anti aromatic. 3 can analyse the target material and design its synthesis through retrosynthesis.

Reference Books 1. J. March, Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions, Mechanisms and Structure, 6th Ed., Wiley interscience, 2007. 2. J. Clayden, N. Greeves, S. Warren and P. Wothers, Organic Chemistry, Oxford University Press, 1st Ed., 2000. 3. F. A. Carey and R. J. Sundberg, Advanced Organic Chemistry, Parts A and B. 5th Ed., Springer, 2007. 4. H. O. House, Modern Synthetic Reactions, 2nd Ed. W. A. Benjamin, New York, 1972. 5. K. Mackie, M. Smith, P. Aitken, Guide Book to Organic Synthesis, 3rd Ed., ELBS, England, 2000. 6. S. Warren, P. Wyatt, Organic Synthesis, The Disconnection Approach, Wiley, 2009. 7. R. K. Kar, Fundamentals of Organic Synthesis-The , New Central Book Agency, 2007. 8. W. Carruthers, I. Coldham, Modern Methods of Organic Synthesis, 4th Ed., Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 2004. 9. J. D. Morrison, Asymmetric Synthesis, Vols 1-5, Academic Press, 1983. 10. R. Noyori, Asymmetry Catalysis in Organic Synthesis, Wiley, New York, 1994. 11. I. Ojima, Catalytic Asymmetric Synthesis, VCH- New York, Pergamon, 1998. 12. H. B. Kagan, Asymmetric Synthesis, Thieme Medical Publishers, 1st Ed., 2003. 13. J. D. Coyle, Organic Photochemistry, Wiley, 1985. 14. J. M. Coxon, B. Halton, Organic Photochem., Cambridge University Press, 2nd Ed., 1987. 15. S. Sankararaman, Pericyclic Reactions – A Textbook, Wiley-VCH, 2005. 16. J. Singh, J. Singh, Photochemistry and Pericyclic Reactions, New Age International, 2003.

QUEEN MARYS COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI – 4 M.Sc. CHEMISTRY GROUP THEORY, SURFACE PHENOMENA AND THERMODYNAMICS –(CORE) Semester - III

Paper No. : XIII Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 4

OBJECTIVES

1. To understand the concept of group theory and its applications and significance. 2. To apply the concepts of statistical thermodynamics. 3. To give an insight into the area of surface chemistry.

UNIT - I (18 hrs)

GROUP THEORY – I Symmetry elements and symmetry operations. Groups, subgroups and classes of symmetry operations. Systematic classification of molecules into point groups. Matrix representation of symmetry operation, Reducible and irreducible representations. Direct product representation. Orthogonality theorem – construction of character table for point groups-C2v, C2h, C3v.

UNIT – II (18 hrs) GROUP THEORY – II Symmetry selection rules for IR and Raman spectra. Systematic procedure for determining the symmetries of vibrational modes in molecules such as H2O, NH3, trans N2F2. Rule of mutual exclusion. Hybrid orbitals for sigma bonding in BF3, CH4, SF6 and PCl5.

UNIT - III (18 hrs) SURFACE PHENOMENA Surface tension, adsorption on solids, surface excess and its importance. Gibbs adsorption isotherm, electrical phenomena at interfaces, including electro kinetic phenomena, micelles and reverse micelles, solubilisation, micro emulsion.. SEM to the study of surfaces.

UNIT - IV (18 hrs) THERMODYNAMICS - I

Statistical Thermodynamics - Different types of ensembles, thermodynamic probability and distribution law (Boltzmann statistics). Partition function and thermodynamics parameters: Relation between partition function and E, H, S, Cv, P, A and G. Relation between molecular and molar partition function, translational partition function, rotational partition function for linear and nonlinear molecules, vibrational partition function, electronic partition function, equilibrium constant in terms of partition function. Introduction to quantum statistics: Distribution law for fermions (Fermi-Dirac Statistics) and for bosons (Bose-Einstein statistics)

UNIT - V (18 hrs) THERMODYNAMICS - II Irreversible Thermodynamics - Near equilibrium process: Conservation of mass and energy- Entropy production in chemical reactions – entropy production and entropy flow in open systems. - Onsager theory – Onsager’s reciprocal relations – validity and verification. Thermoelectricity-Electro kinetic and thermo mechanical effects. Application of irreversible thermodynamics to biological and non- linear systems.

COURSE OUTCOME The student 1. Can identify the symmetry elements present in a molecule and classify the molecule into appropriate point group 2. Can understand and use the symmetry selection rules for IR and Raman for different molecules in a point group 3. Can explain the physical and chemical adsorption concept and its analysis techniques 4. Know the concept of statistical thermodynamics and its application in quantum statistics

REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. Alan.Vincent, Molecular Symmetry and Group Theory. A Programmed Introduction to Chemical Applications. John and Wiley & Sons Ltd., 1977 2. D. A. McQuarrie, J. D. Simon, Physical chemistry - A Molecular Approach, Viva Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1998. 3. Donald A. McQuarrie, Quantum Chemistry. Viva Books PW. Ltd.. New Delhi. 2003. 4. R.L. Flurry Jr., Sym.Groups. Theory and Chem. Applications, Prentice Hall Inc., 1980. 5. F. A. Cotton, Chem. Appl.s of Group Theory, 2nd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, 1971. 6. P.W. Atkins and J. P. Atkins, Physical Chem., 7th Ed, Oxford University Press, 2002.

7. K. Rajaram and J.C. Kuriacose, Thermodynamics for students of chemistry, 2nd Ed., S. Chand and Sons., Jalandhar, 1986. 8. K. K.Rohatgi, Mukherjee, Fundamentals of Photochemistry, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 1978. 9. D. A. McQuarrie and J. D. Simon, “Physical Chemistry-A Molecular Approach” 1st Ed., Viva Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1998. 10. I. M. Klotz and R. M. Rosenberg, , 6th Ed., W.A.Benjamin Publishers, California, 1972. 11. M. C. Gupta, Statistical Thermodynamics, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1995. 12. R. P. Rastogi and R. R. Misra, Classical Thermodynamics, Vikas Publishing Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1990 13. S. H. Maron and J. B. Lando, Fundamentals of Physical chemistry, MacMillan Publishers, New York, 1974

QUEEN MARYS COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI – 4 M.Sc. CHEMISTRY PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY PRACTICAL – III (core) Semester: III

Paper No. :XIV Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits : 4

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to understand the important concepts in physical chemistry by carrying out suitable related experiments.

I. CONDUCTOMETRIC :

a. Strong acid vs. Strong base b. Weak acid vs strong base c. Mixture of acids vs. Strong base d. Determination of the equivalent conductance at infinite dilution of the given electrolyte e. Determination of the equivalent conductance , degree of dissociation and dissociation constant of the weak acid.

II. POTENTIOMETRIC TITRATIONS:

a. Acid – Base titrations b. Redox titrations c. Determination of dissociation constant of weak acid. d. pH of buffer.

III. KINETICS:

Persulphate – Iodide reaction – Determination of order, Effect of ionic strength on rate constant.

COURSE OUTCOME

The student by applying the concept of conductometric and potentiometric titrations

1. Can determine the strength of strong/weak acid or base 2. Can determine the dissociation constant of weak acid 3. Can perform a redox titrations 4. Can correlate the ionic strength and rate constant by applying kinetics

REFERENCES : 1. Experimental Physical Chemistry, G. Peter Mathews, Oxford Science Publications, 1985.

2. Experimental Physical Chemistry, Ed. By G. Daniet, International Students Ed., McGraw

Hill Hogakusha Ltd., 1970.

3. Senior Practical Chemistry, D.D. Khosla, V.C. Carg, R. Chand & Co. New Delhi, 1975

QUEENMARY’S COLLEGE (A), CHENNAI - 4 M.Sc CHEMISTRY IN CHEMISTRY- (Elective) Semester -III Paper No: XV Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 3

OBJECTIVES 1. To learn the strategy of problem solving in various fields such as coordination chemistry, quantum chemistry and kinetics. 2. To understand the functional group transformations in organic chemistry and to choose the correct reagents for the same.

UNIT – I (12hrs) INORGANIC CHEMISTRY 1.1 Coordination chemistry Nomenclature, isomerism, hybridization, CFT, CFSE, paramagnetic and diamagnetic properties, strong and weak ligands, nephelauxetic series, stability, colour, concepts of acids and bases: Hard- Soft acids and base concept – Non aqueous solvents.

UNIT – II (12hrs) ORGANIC CHEMISTRY -I 2.1 Reaction Mechanism – selectivity of alkylation of enolates, Micheal addition reactions, Lithium directed aromatic electrophilic substitutions. 2.2 Reagents in Organic synthesis Grignard reagent – Diborane – mCPBA - Cu reagents: Simmon-Smith reaction, Gilman reagent - Titanium reagents: Sharpless asymmetric epoxidation. Palladium reagents: Fukuyama coupling, Heck reaction, Stille coupling, Suzuki coupling - Palladium & Copper: Sonogashira coupling - Palladium & Silicon: Hiyama coupling.

UNIT – III ( 12 hrs) ORGANIC CHEMISTRY – II 3.1 Stereochemistry and Conformational Analysis Enantiotopic and diastereotopic atoms, groups and faces – R, S notation. 3.2 Photochemistry &Pericyclic Reactions Jablonskii diagrams - Norrish type I and Norrish type II reactions - Paterno – Buchi reactions. HOMO LUMO in ethylene and 1, 3-butadiene Electrocyclic reactions – Conrotatory and disrotatory motions. Cycloaddition reactions – 1, 3 Dipolar additions - Diels Alder reaction: Nature of diene, Effect of substituents, Stereochemistry, Regioselectivity. Sigmatropic rearrangements – Cope rearrangement, Claisen Rearrangment

UNIT -IV (12 hrs) Normalisation of wave functions – Eigen value and Eigen functions – particle in 1D, 2D, 3D boxes – degree of degeneration – Huckel Molecular Orbital Theory – first order perturbation – Variation method.

UNIT-V (12 hrs) 5.1Chemical kinetics: Rate law - Order determination , theories , ARRT – photochemical reactions.

5.2 Electrochemistry:Nernst equation – Debye Huckel Theory – conductance – Kohlrausch’s law and its application – ionic equilibria. 5.3 Solid state:Unit cells, miller indices, density and radius.

COURSE OUTCOME The student 1. Can attempt and solve the problems from coordination chemistry, quantum chemistry and kinetics. 2. Can bring about the functional group transformations choosing proper reagents and analyse the correct products

REFERENCE BOOKS UNIT I 1. Huheey, J. E.; Keiter, E. A. Keiter, R. L. Inorganic Chemistry; 4th Ed.; Harper and Row, NewYork, 1983. 2. Cotton, F. A.; Wilkinson, G.; Murillo, C. A.; Bochmann, M. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry; 6th Ed., Wiley Interscience: New York, 1988. 3. R. S. Drago, PhysicaI Methods in Chemistry; Saunders: Philadelphia, 1977. 4. SathyaPrakash, G.D.Tuli, S. K. Basu and R. D. Madan, Advanced Inorganic Chemistry, Volume I and Volume II, S.Chand, Reprint 2008

UNIT II & UNIT III 5. J. March, Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions, Mechanisms and Structure, 6th Ed., 6. Wiley interscience, 2007. 7. D. Nasipuri, Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds-Principles and Applications, New Age International, 2nd Ed., 2002. 8. E.L. Eliel, S. H. Wilen, L. N. Mander, Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2005. 9. P. S. Kalsi, Stereochem. Conformation and Mechanism, New Age International, 6th Ed., 2006. 10. J. Clayden, N. Greeves, S. Warren and P. Wothers, Organic Chemistry, Oxford University Press, 1st Ed., 2000.

11. F. A. Carey and R. J. Sundberg, Advanced Organic Chem., parts A and B. 5th Ed., Springer, 2007. 12. S. Sankararaman, Pericyclic Reactions – A Textbook, Wiley-VCH, 2005. 13. J. Singh, J. Singh, Photochemistry and Pericyclic Reactions, New Age International, 2003.

UNIT IV 14. Atkins’ Physical chemistry , 8thEd,Oxford university press 2006 15. Donald A McQuarrie,John D .Simon, Physical Chemistry a molecular approach,Viva Books Pvt.Ltd.,2010 16. Thomas Engel,PhilipReid,PhysicalChemistry,Pearson ,2006. 17. S.K.Dogra ,S.Dogra ,Physical chemistry through problems,New Age International Publishers,2004 18. Clyde R Metz, Schaum’s outline series theory and problems of Physical chemistry,McGraw- Hill book company

UNIT V

19. J N Gurtu ,R.Kapoor, A.Kapoor, Numerical Chemistry,S.Chand& Co. ,I Edn,1993. 20. ArunBahl,B.S.Bahl, Numerical problems in physical chemistry, S.Chand& Co. , I Edn,2009. 21. K. D. Sharma, Anu Sharma, Numerical chemistry for competitions, S.Chand& Co. , I Edn,2009.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI-4 M. Sc. CHEMISTRY INORGANIC CHEMISTRY – III (Elective) SEMESTER III Paper No. : XVI Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 3

OBJECTIVES 1 To gain knowledge about the main group elements.

2 To gain knowledge about the mechanism of nuclear reactions, the instrumentation involved and applications of radio isotopes. 3 To provide indepth knowledge on the different inorganic reactions within the biological system and the enzymes involved. 4 To offer insight into the field of boranes, cage compounds and .

UNIT- I (18 hrs) -I ( REF BOOK- 13, 15 &16) Porphyrin ring system – metalloporphyrins – hemoglobin and myoglobin – structures and work functions, Bohr effect models for cooperative interaction in Hb, oxygen transport in human body, cyanide poisoning and its remedy. Non- heme proteins Synthetic oxygen carriers – cytochromes – structure and work functions – in respiration.Chlorophyll – structure – photosynthetic sequence – iron-sulphur proteins (non-heme iron protein). Copper containing proteins: Classification – blue copper proteins – structure of blue copper electron transferases – copper proteins as oxidases – cytochrome c oxidase – mechanistic studies of cytochrome c oxidase – Hemocyanin.

UNIT – II (18hrs) BIOINORGANIC CHEMISTRY-II (REF BOOK- 1 &13) Carboxypeptidase A: Structure, function – carbonic anhydrase – inhibition and poisoning – corin ring system – vitamin B12 and B12 coenzymes – in-vivo and in-vitro nitro nitrogen fixation. Essential and trace elements in biological systems. Metal ion deficiency and disease: Fe, Cu and Zn. Metal ion toxicity: Classes of toxic metal compounds – Cu, Cd, Fe, Pb, Ca and Hg toxicity – detoxification. Molecular mechanism of ion transport across the membrane – sodium and potassium ions pumps. Metals in : Au in rheumatic arthritis – Pt, Au and metallocenes in anticancer drugs – metals in radio diagnosis and magnetic resonance imaging. Biological cycles: Nitrogen cycle – hydrogen cycle. Metal storage and transport: Fe,Cu,Zn and V storage and transport – metallothioneins: transporting some toxic metals – Zn2+ ion complexes: carbonic anhydrase II – carboxypeptidase A, Carboxypeptidase G2, for Zn ion substitution.

UNIT-III (18hrs) -I Bethe’s notation – comparison between nuclear and chemical reaction – general mechanism of nuclear reactions – compound nuclear theory – direct nuclear reaction mechanism – scattering reactions, photonuclear reaction, trans mutation – stripping & pick–up reaction, nuclear fission, spallation, fragmentation and fusion. Comparison between fission, spallation and fragmentation. Hydrogen and cobalt bomb – cosmic abundance of elements – charged particle accelerator, bondurator, linear accelerator, cyclotron – synchrotron – counters: Applications of radioactive isotopes : characteristics of tracer isotopes – principle, applications and limitation of isotope dilution analysis – activation analysis – radiation dosimetry – radiometry – radiolysis of water Numerical problem in Nuclear Chemistry.

UNIT-IV BORON AND RING COMPOUNDS

Classification of boranes - nomenclature -structure and -molecular frame work of hydrides of boron skeletal electro pair counting and Wade’s rule -polyhedral skeletal electron pair theory (PSEPT)- calculation of the number of election deficient bonds – equations of balance – Styx number and topology of boron hydrides – concept of multicentred bond as applied to electron deficient molecules –borazine, Carboranes – types such as closo and nido – preparation, properties and structure. Metallocarboranes – a general study. Chain: Catenation, heterocatenation, intercalation, Rings: phosphazenes, homocyclic inorganic systems Cages: Phosphorus cages. Polyacids- Isopolyacids of V, Cr, Mo and W; Heteropolyacids of Mo and W.

UNIT – V (18hrs) SUPRAMOLECULAR CHEMISTRY (REF. BOOK 11):

Introduction, Some important concepts - Introduction to Recognition, information and complementarity, Principles of molecular receptor designs, Spherical recognition (cryptates of metal cations) Tetrahedral recognition by macrotricycliccryptands, Recognition of ammonium ions, Recognition of neutral molecules and anionic substrates (anionic coordination)

COURSE OUTCOME 1 A better understanding about the various reaction mechanisms in biological systems is provided. 2 Concepts taught in nuclear chemistry facilitates the learner to apply the concepts to solve numerical problems. 3 Unique structures based on different types of bonding patterns in boranes and phosphorous cages is introduced to the learner. 4 The fundamentals and concepts taught helps the learner to develop analytical reasoning skills and helps to apply the concepts to application oriented questions

REFERENCES

1. Huheey, J. E.; Keiter, E. A. Keiter, R. L. Inorganic Chemistry; 4th Ed.; Harper and Row, NewYork, 1983.

2. Cotton, F. A.; Wilkinson, G.; Murillo, C. A.; Bochmann, M. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry; 6th Ed., Wiley Interscience: New York, 1988. 3. Purcell, K. F.; Kotz, J. C. Inorganic Chemistry; Saunders: Philadelphia, 1976. 4. Moeller, T. Inorganic Chemistry, A Modern Introduction; John Wiley: New York, 1982. 5. Shriver, D. F.; Atkins, P. W.; Langford, C. H. Inorganic Chemistry; 3rd Ed.; Oxford University Press: London, 2001. 6. Rhodes, G. Crystallography Made crystal Clear; Academic Press Inc.: New York, 1993. 7. Hammond, C. The Basics of Crystallography and Diffraction; Oxford University Press; 1997. 8. Smart, L.; Moore, E. Solid State Chemistry An Introduction; 2nd Ed.; Nelson ThomesLtd.:Cheltenham, 1996. 9. H. J. Arnikar, “Essentials of Nuclear Chemistry”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi (1982) 10. A.K. Srivatsava and P. Jain, “Essential of nuclear Chemistry”, S.Chand, N.Delhi, 1989 11. Supramolecular Chemistry (Concepts and Perspectives) - Jean Marie Lehn(VCH-1995). 12. Bio Inorganic Chemistry - Robert Wittay.

13. The Inorganic Chemistry of Biological processes - M.N.Hughes. 14.Topics in current chemistry (Inorganic Biochemistry) vol. 64 (1976) Davison and Coworkers. 15. An Introduction to Biochemcial Reaction Mechanism - James N.Lowe and Lloyalt Ingraham. 16. General Biochemistry - Fruton J.S. and Simmonds S. 17. Physiology - RobeertN.Devtin.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI – 4

M. Sc. CHEMISTRY CHEMISTRY OF ENGINEERING MATERIALS- (Other Elective) Semester -III Paper No. : XVII Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 3

OBJECTIVES

To understand the application of chemistry materials in various fields

UNIT-I (12hrs) LUBRICANTS Classification of lubricants with examples- properties (viscosity index, flash and fire points- cloud and pour point oiliness)- solid lubricants – graphite- molybdenum sulphide.

UNIT-II (12 hrs)

ABRASIVES

Abrasive- types and classification- bonded, coated and others and their uses. Abrasive minerals, Choice of abrasives.

UNIT-III (12 hrs) PLASTICS AND POLYMERS Classification of plastics- Engineering plastics- PVC, Teflon, Polycarbonate, Polyurethane and Thermocole- properties-applications-compounding of plastics, moulding methods- injection moulding and compreesionmoulding- polymer blends, alloys and some examples.

UNIT-IV (12 hrs) WATER TECHNOLOGY Boiler feed water- requirements- disadvantages of using hard water in boilers- internal conditioning (phosphate, calgon and carbonate conditioning methods)- External conditioning- demineralization process- desalination- reverse osmosis- domestic .

UNIT-V (12 hrs) FUELS AND COMBUSTION Proximate and ultimate analysis of coal- significance, characteristics of metallurgical coke- manufacture by Otto- Hoffman method- synthetic petrol- knocking- octane number- improvement of knocking characteristics- cetane number, gaseous fuels- water gas, producer gas and CNG, gross and net calorific values-(definitions only)- theoretical calculation of calorific values( Dulong’s formula)- simple problems- calculation of minimum air requirements- simple problems- flue gas, analysis- orsat’s apparatus.

COURSE OUTCOME

The students

1. Gain knowledge and apply in the usage of fabricated chemistry materials such as lubricants, abrasives, plastics and polymers 2. Know the methodology of purifying water and the reverse osmosis system

REFERENCES

1. Engineering Chemistry by A. Ravikrishnan 2. Engineering Chemistry by Jain and Jain. 3. Industrial chemistry by B.K. Sharma

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 4 M. Sc. CHEMISTRY Organic Chemistry – IV Semester- IV

Paper No. : XVIII Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 4

OBJECTIVES

1 To understand the techniques involved in the extraction and methods of determination of structure of natural products. 2 To enable the student to understand and appreciate the importance of biomolecules. 3 To apply the knowledge of chemical reactions in solvent free organic synthesis 4 To comprehend the importance of heterocyclic compounds.

UNIT I (18 hrs)

NATURAL PRODUCTS Terpenoids: Isolation and classification – methods of structural elucidation of zingeberine, squalene, caryophyllene, cadinene and abietic acid Alkaloids: Structural elucidation of papaverine and cocaine. Synthesis and functions of atropine, heptaphyllene and morphine

UNIT II (18 hrs)

BIOMOLECULES Chemistry of Bio-molecules: Basic aspects of structure and classification of carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins and nucleic acids. Flow of genetic information, nature of genetic code, replication of DNA, transcription and translation, regulation of gene expression.

UNIT III (18 hrs)

ASYMMETRIC SYNTHESIS Asymmetric synthesis on chiral substrate: nucleophilic addition to alpha-chiral carbonyl compounds, prediction of stereochemistry-Cram’s rule, Prelog’s rule, Felkin-Ahn model.

Asymmetric synthesis using chiral reagents: Chiral modification of lithium aluminium hydride – BINAL-H – Application in reduction of prochiral ketones; oxazaborolidines, T.S. Model, Asymmetric synthesis using chiral auxiliary: Chiral auxiliaries derived from proline, camphor, and menthol. Asymmetric synthesis using chiral catalysts: Asymmetric alkylation and allylation of carbonyl compounds. Yeast as biocatalyst in asymmetric synthesis.

UNIT IV (18 hrs)

GREEN CHEMISTRY The need for and eco-efficiency, challenges and green chemistry education, pollution control and pollution prevention – green methods, green products, of waste. Twelve principles of green chemistry, inception of green chemistry, awards for green chemistry and international organizations promoting green chemistry. Oxidation and reduction reactions, Alkylation reactions, Esterification and ether forming reactions, C-C and C-hetereoatom forming reactions, Dihydroxylation and Hydroxylamination,

UNIT V (18 hrs) HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS Five-membered ring compounds with 2 or more heteroatoms: Imidazoles, Oxazoles, thiazoles, isooxazolone; Six-membered ring compounds with 2 or more heteroatoms: pyrimidines, purines, triazines. Fused heterocycles containing one or more heteroatoms: indoles, benzofurans, benzothiophene, quinolines, isoquinolines, benzopyrones.

COURSE OUTCOME

The student

1 can suggest methodologies for stereoselective synthesis of organic compounds by employing chiral substrates/reagents/catalysts. 2 can suggest methods for the synthesis and transformation of natural products, biomolecules and heterocyclic compounds. 3 has familiarity with green methods for the synthesis.

Reference Books 1. J. March, Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions, Mechanisms and Structure, 6th Ed., Wiley interscience, 2007.

2. E.L. Eliel, S. H. Wilen, L. N. Mander, Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2005.

3. P. S. Kalsi, Stereochemistry, Conformation and Mechanism, New Age International, 6th Ed., 2006.

4. J. Clayden, N. Greeves, S. Warren and P. Wothers, Organic Chemistry, Oxford University Press, 1st Ed., 2000.

5. F. A. Carey and R. J. Sundberg, Advanced Organic Chemistry, Parts A and B. 5th Ed., Springer, 2007.

6. H. O. House, Modern Synthetic Reactions, 2nd Ed. W. A. Benjamin, New York, 1972. 7. K. Mackie, M. Smith, P. Aitken, Guide Book to Organic Synthesis, 3rd Ed., ELBS, England, 2000. 8. S. Warren, P. Wyatt, Organic Synthesis, The Disconnection Approach, Wiley, 2009. 9. R. K. Kar, Fundamentals of Organic Synthesis-The retrosynthetic analysis, New Central Book Agency, 2007. 10. W. Carruthers, I. Coldham, Modern Methods of Organic Synthesis, 4th Ed., Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 2004. 11. I. L. Finar, Organic Chemistry, Vol.II, 5th Ed., Pearson, 2009. 12. RashmiSanghi, M. M. Srivastava, Green Chemistry, Environment Friendly Alternatives, Narosa Publishing House, 2007 13. V. Kumar, AnIntrod to Green Chem., Vishal Publishing CO. Jalandhar, 2007.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (A), CHENNAI - 4 M.Sc CHEMISTRY PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY AND ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES (Core)

Semester -IV Paper No: XIX Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 4

OBJECTIVES

1. To understand the chemistry of macromolecules and kinetics of polymerisation.

2. To understand the techniques involved in the instrumental analysis and electroanalytical methods.

UNIT-I (18 hrs) MACROMOLECULES

Polymerisation in homogeneous and heterogeneous phases – kinetics and mechanism of polymerization – addition and condensation – chain initiation, propagation and termination – chain transfer – Inhibition and retardation, molecular weight of polymers, molecular weight determination by light scattering, osmometry and viscometry, ultracentrifuge and gel permeation – Crystallinity of polymers – Glass transition temperature.

UNIT – II (18 hrs) REACTIONS IN SOLUTION

Comparison of gas phase reactions with reactions in solutions, factors influencing reaction rates in solution - effect of dielectric constant and influence of ionic strength - Primary and secondary salt effect. Application of ARRT – Entropy of activation for reactions in solution.

UNIT – III (18 hrs) ELECTROANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES Polarography: Introduction, Instrumentation, Ilkovic equation and its verification. Derivation of wave equation: Determination of half wave potential, qualitative and quantitative applications. Applications of AC polarography, cyclic voltammetry and differential pulse voltammetry to the study of coordination compounds: Amperometry: Basic principles, instrumentation, nature of curves, and analytical applications. UNIT-IV (18 hrs) ATOMIC ABSORPTION SPECTROSCOPY

Principle – instrumentation – flame sources- hollow cathode lamp – Analysis of Zn2+, Cu2+, Pb2+,Cd2+. Flameless AAS for Hg2+ analysis – inductively coupled plasma (ICP) spectroscopy – introduction, instrumentation, interferences and applications.

UNIT-V

PHOTOELECTRON SPECTROSCOPY

Principle and technique of PES, Ultraviolet PES, X-ray PES, Koopman’s theorem. Instrumentation, applications of ESCA,Auger electron spectroscopy –principle instrumentation and applications .

COURSE OUTCOME

The student can describe the instrumentation techniques and explain the principles involved in it.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. V. R. Gowarikar, N.V. Viswanathan and JayadevSreedhar “” New Age international (P) ltd., Publishers New Delhi, 2005. 2. Fred W. Billmeyer, JR “Text book of polymer science” A wiley – interscience publication John wiley& sons, New Yark, 1994 3. Ayodhya sing “” campus Books, New Delhi, 2003 4. Jettery, Bassett, Mendham, Denney “Vogel’s Text book of Quantitative chemical analysis”, ELBS, 1997 5. Skoog, West, Holler “Fundamentals of " 6. F. A. Cotton, G. Wilkinson, C. A. Murillo and M. Bochmann, Advanced Inorganic Chemistry; 6th Ed.; Wiley Interscience: New York, 1988. 7. J. E. Huheey, E. A. Keiter, and R. L. Keiter, Inorganic Chemistry; 4th Ed.; Harper and Row: New York, 1983. 8. K. F. Purcell, and J. C. Kotz, Inorganic Chemistry; Saunders: Philadelphia, 1976. 9. D. F. Shriver, P. W. Atkins, and C. H. Langford, Inorganic Chemistry; 3rd Ed.; Oxford University Press: London, 2001. 10. T. Moeller, Inorganic Chemistry, A Modern Introduction; John Wiley: New York, 1982. 11. W. L. Jolly, Modern Inorg. Chem., 2nd Ed., McGraw-Hill International Edition, 1991. 12. G. S. Girolami, T. B. Rauchfuss, and R. J. Angelici, Synthesis and Technique in Inorganic Chemistry, 3rd Ed., University Science Books, Sausalito, 1999. 13. W. L. Jolly, The Synthesis and Characterisation of Inorganic Compounds, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1970.

14. J.Rajaram and J.C. Kuriacose kinetics and mechanism of chemical Transformation, McMillan India Ltd, 1993. 15. Polymer Science,V.R. Gowariker, N.V. Viswanathan and Jayadev Sreedhar. 16. Text book of Polymer Science,3rd edition, Fred.W.Billmeyer, Jr.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI-4 M. Sc. CHEMISTRY PHYSICAL METHODS IN INORGANIC SPECTROSCOPY - (Core) SEMESTER IV Paper No. : XX Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 4

OBJECTIVES

1. To learn the basic principles of molecular spectroscopy and its applications in structure determination 2. To understand the concept of structural determination of Inorganic compounds

UNIT – I (18 hrs)

ROTATIONAL AND VIBRATIONAL SPECTROSCOPY

Vibrating diatomic molecule: energy of diatomic molecules -simple harmonic oscillator - anharmonic oscillator energy levels- selection rules,. Diatomic vibrating rotator: Born- Oppenheimer approximation – break down -vibration-rotation spectra, selection rules, P, Q, R branches. Vibrations of polyatomic molecules- fundamental vibrations – Overtones- influence of rotation on the spectra. Raman spectroscopy:Classical and quantum theory- - selection rules-Raman effect s- Application - 2- of IR to the following: i) Distinction between a) Ionic and coordinate anions such as NO3 ,SO4 and SCN b) Lattice and coordinated water. ii) Mode of bonding of ligands such as urea, dimethylsulphoxide and hexamethylphosphoramide.

UNIT - II (18hrs)

ELECTRONIC SPECTRA OF TRANSITION METALS Electron –electron interactions and term symbols -Racah parameters B and C.-spin orbit coupling in free ions-Selection rules and the intensities of transition- breakdown of selection rules -Orgel diagram –Characteristics – prediction and assignment of transitions for dn weak field cases. Use of Orgel diagram–Calculation of βand 10Dq for simple octahedral complexes of Co and Ni Tanabe – Sugano diagrams – characteristics – Prediction and assignment of transition for weak field and strong field dn systems –Effect of distortions on the d-orbital energy levels.Charge transfer spectra in electronic spectra.- effect of solvent polarity

UNIT - III (18 hrs) NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE SPECTROSCOPY

Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy: Introduction to Nuclear Magnetic Resonance, Chemical shift, Mechanism of electron shielding and factors contributing to the magnitude of chemical shift, Nuclear overhausser effect, Double resonance, Chemical exchange, Lanthanide shift reagents and NMR spectra of paramagnetic complexes. Experimental technique(CW and FT). Stereochemical non-rigidity and fluxionality: Introduction, use of NMR in its detection, its presence in trigonal bipyramidal molecules(PF5), Systems with coordination number six (

Ti(acac)2Cl2, Ti(acac)2Br2, Ta2(OMe)10,).

UNIT-IV (18 hrs)

ELECTRON PARAMAGNETIC RESONANCE SPECTROSCOPY

Principle - presentation of the spectrum, nuclear hyperfine splitting in isotropic systems. Hyperfine splitting of radicals, viz., methyl, ethyl, phenyl, naphthyl and Bis(salicylaldiminecopper(II) – factors affecting the magnitude of the ‘g’ values of transition metal ions – interactions affecting the energies of unpaired electrons in transition metal ion complexes. Zero-field splitting and Kramer’s degeneracy – Anisotropy in the ‘g’ value –anisotropy in hyperfine coupling constant- nuclear quadrupolar interaction – Spin Hamiltonian-Line widths in solid state –electron delocalization-applications of EPR.

UNIT - V (18 hrs)

NQR AND MOSSBAUER SPECTROSCOPY Introduction-energies of quadrupole transitions -effect of magnetic field on the spectra, electric field gradient and molecular structure – Interpretation of NQR data, Structural information of the + following: PCl5, TeCl4, Na GaCl4 - , BrCN, HIO3 and Hexahalometallates Principles of Mossbauer spectroscopy: Doppler shift, recoil energy.Mossbauer spectra: Isomer shift, factors affecting isomer shift, quadrupole interaction,magnetic interaction - applications – isomer shift and quadrupole splitting . Application of MB spectroscopy in structural determination of the following: i) High spin Fe (II) and Fe (III) halides FeF2, FeCl2.2H2O, FeF3, FeCl3.6H2O. Low spin Fe(II) and Fe(III) Complexes-Ferrocyanides, Ferricyanides, Prussian Blue. ii) Iron carbonyls. Fe(CO)5, Fe2(CO)9 and Fe3(CO)12 iii) Inorganic Sn(II) and Sn(IV) halides.

COURSE OUTCOME The student 1. can apply the concepts of molecular spectroscopy and identify the shape and geometry of molecules 2. know the type of chemical bonding present in a molecule 3. can do structural interpretation of a newly synthesized inorganic molecule

REFERENCE BOOKS 1. R. S. Drago, PhysicaI Methods in Chemistry; Saunders: Philadelphia, 1977. 2. P. Atkins and J. de Paula, Physical Chemistry, 7th Ed., Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2002. 3. I. N. Levine, Molecular Spectroscopy, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1974. 4. K. Nakamoto, Infrared and Raman Spectra of Inorganic and coordination Compounds, Part B: 5th Ed., John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 1997. 5. A. Rahman, Nuclear Magnetic Resonance-Basic Principles, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1986. 6. J. A. Weil, J. R. Bolton and J. E. Wertz, Electron Paramagnetic Resonance; Wiley Interscience, 1994. 7. C. N. Banwell and E. M. McCash, Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy, 4th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2000. 8. D. F. Shriver and P. W. Atkins, Inorg. Chem., W. H. Freeman and Co, London, 1999.

9. F. A. Cotton, G.Wilkinson, C.Murillo and M.Bochman, Advanced Inorg. Chemistry, 6th ed., John Wiley, New York, 1999. 10. T. Moeller, Inorganic Chemistry: A Modern Introduction, Wiley, New York, 1990. 11. S.H.Maron and J.B. Lando, Fundamentals of Phys. Chem., Macmillan Ltd., NY, 1996. 12. P.W. Atkins, Physical Chemistry, Oxford University Press, 1978. QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI-4 M. Sc. CHEMISTRY ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY PRACTICALS-IV- (Core) Semester- IV

Paper No. : XXI Max Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 4

OBJECTIVES

1. To learn the basic analytical methods and to have a sound knowledge of chemistry involved in chemical analysis. 2. To know the principle of different chromatographic techniques in separation of mixture of ions. 3. To learn the analytical concepts involved in estimation of certain common chemicals used in day to day life

1. Colourimetric Estimations:

1. Estimation of Copper

2. Estimation of Nickel

3. Estimation of iron

2. Chromatographic separations and calculation of Rf value.

(i) Separation of a mixture of two metal ions by Paper chromatography.

(ii) Separation of green leaf pigments by Thin layer chromatography.

(iii) Separation of metal ions by ion exchange chromatography.

3. *Estimation (i) Estimation of bleaching powder (ii) Estimation of Aspirin (iii) Estimation of ascorbic acid

(iv) Estimation of H2O2

4. *Analysis of Dolomite ore

*Only for Internal Assesment

COURSE OUTCOME

The student know

1. Calorimetric estimations of certain metals 2. To separate metals ions using chromatographic techniques 3. To estimate the presence of certain common chemicals such as bleaching powder, aspirin, ascorbic acid etc.

REFRENCES

1. V. K. Srivastava, K.K. Srivastava, Introduction to Chromatography: Theory and Practice, S. Chand and Sons., New Delhi, 1987. 2. Vogel’s Textbook of Practical organic chemistry, 5th Ed., ELBS/Longman, England, 1996a 3. Vogel’s Textbook of quantitative chemical analysis, 5th Ed., ELBS/Longman, England

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 4 M. Sc. CHEMISTRY- BATCH IV DISSERTATION & VIVA VOCE- (Elective) Semester- IV Paper No:XXII Max. Marks: 75 Code: Credits: 3

COURSE DETAILS OF M.Phil. CHEMISTRY

Distribution of the weekly hours – 30 hrs

S.NO. Paper Hrs/week Max.Marks Credit

1. I 6 100 4

2. II 6 100 4

3. III 6 100 4

4. Dissertation 12 100 4

Question Paper Pattern

• In each paper 8 questions to be asked without omitting any unit • Out of 8 questions, 5 questions have to be answered. • Each question carries 20 marks.

Evaluation of Dissertation:

• As per norms of Universtiy of Madras.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE(A),CHENNAI – 600 004. DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY M.Phil. SYLLABUS PAPER – I RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

SUBJECT CODE: MAX.MARKS : 100

UNIT –I UNDERSTANDING RESEARCH (15Hrs) Purpose and characteristics of research; Types of research: Fundamentals of pure research, applied research, action research, historical, experimental research.

UNIT –II (15Hrs) CHEMISTRY LITERATURE – I Sources of chemical information: primary, secondary and tertiary sources. Indexes and abstracts in science and technology: and technology index.

UNIT – III (15Hrs) CHEMISTRY LITERATURE – II Chemical abstracts, chemical titles, current contents, index chemicals, science citation index, impact factor, CA volume indexes. A brief literature survey from chemical abstracts for locating relevant journal articles.

UNIT – IV (15Hrs) REPORTING AND THESIS WRITING Structure and components of scientific papers, technical reports and thesis; Planning the scientific paper – contents of scientific papers – contents of reports; Illustration and tables. Preparation of final manuscript/thesis: mechanics of writing a research report; Proof / correction of research manuscript; style manuals; Bibliography referencing and footnotes etc.

Issues related to copyright – Reproduction of published materials – Royalty, IPR, Patenting, TRIPS.

UNIT – V (15Hrs) DATA ANALYSIS Types of error – Accuracy, Precision, significant figures – describing data, population samples, mean, variance, standard deviation, way of describing uncertainty – repeatability and reproducibility of measurements – hypothesis testing, levels of confidence and significance, test for an outlier, testing variances, mean t – test – Q & F test -correlation and regression – curve fitting, fitting of linear equations, simple linear cases, weighted linear cases.

REFERENCES

1. C.R. Kothari, “Reaseach Methodology : Methods and Techniqus”, 2nd edition, New Age International publishers, Chennai (2004). 2. R.L. Dominoswki, “Reasearch Methods”, Prendice hall, 1981. 3. J.W. Best, “Reasearch in Education”, 4th Ed. Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1981. 4. H.F.Ebel, C.Blifert and W.E.Russey, “Art of Scientific Writing”, VCH, Weinheim, 1988. 5. B.E.Cavin,”The Basis of Technical ”, ACS, Washington, D.C. ,1988. 6. H.M.Kanare, “Writing the laboratory Notebook”,American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C.,1985. 7. D.Pasto, C.Johnson &M.Miller, Experiments and Techniques in Organic Chemistry, Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1992 8. J.C. Miller and J.N. Miller, Ellis Harwood, Chichester, “Statistics for Analytical Chemistry”, 1984. 9. R.Caulcutt and R. Boddy, Chapmann and Hall, “Statistics for Analytical : London, 1982.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE(A),CHENNAI – 600 004. DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY M.Phil. SYLLABUS PAPER – II INSTRUMENTAL METHODS OF ANALYSIS

SUBJECT CODE: MAX. MARKS : 100

UNIT – I (15Hrs) ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES – I Basic principles, Instrumentation and analytical applications of CV and Polarography.

UNIT – II (15Hrs) Principles and applications of HPLC, GC-MS, and Ion exchange chromatography.

UNIT – III (15Hrs) IR,MASS AND NMR SPECTROSCOPY Principles and applications of IR, MASS AND NMR spectroscopy for structural determination of organic compounds.

UNIT – IV (15Hrs) 13C AND 2D NMR Principles and applications of 13C NMR, DEPT, INEPT, APT. 2D: Introduction, COSY, HETCOR, NOESY and INADEQUATE techniques.

UNIT – V (15Hrs) SURFACE ANALYSIS Types of Surface analysis, types of X-ray spectroscopy (XPS, ESCA, AUGER spectroscopy), Generation of X-rays, Scanning electron microscope (SEM), Transmission electron microscope (TEM).

REFERENCES:

1. R.M. Silverstein, F.X. Webster, and D.Kiemie, Spectroscopic identification of Organic Compounds, 7th Ed., John Wiley & Sons, 2005.

2. R.S.Macombe, A complete introduction to modern NMR spec., John Wiley & Sons, 1998.

3. E.D.Becker, High resolution NMR, 3RD Ed., Academic Press, 1999.

4. D.L.Pavia et al., Introduction of Spectroscopy, 4th Ed.,Brooks Cole, 2008.

5. W.Kemp, Organic Spectroscopy, 3rd Ed.,McMillan Press Ltd., 1991.

6. D.H.Williams & I.Fleming, Spectroscopic Methods in Organic Chemistry, the Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.

7. C.N.Banwell &E.M.McCash, Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2006.

Queen Mary’s College (Autonomous) Chennai - 4

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH SYLLABUS FOR POST GRADUATE COURSE IN ENGLISH LITERATURE June 2018 onwards

Queen Mary’s College (Autonomous) Chennai - 4

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH SYLLABUS FOR POST GRADUATE COURSE IN ENGLISH LITERATURE

Major& Elective June 2018 onwards

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (A), CHENNAI

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH

BOARD OF STUDIES MEETING PARTICULARS

Year Members Names of Members Signature

2018 University 1. Dr. S. Armstrong Nominee Professor & Head Department of English , Chennai -5 Subject 2.Dr.Fathima Banu Expert I Associate Professor & Head Department of English Justice Basheer Ahmed Sayeed College for women(A) , Chennai-18 Subject 3. Dr. V. S. Ramakrishnan Expert II Associate Professor & Head Department of English Presidency College(A) Chepauk, Chennai - 5 H.O.D 4.Dr.Anita Balakrishnan Associate Professor & Head Department of English Queen Mary’s College, Chennai-4 Internal Members 5. Dr. Maria Preethi Srinivasan Assistant Professor Department of English.

6.Dr.Sujatha Menon Assistant Professor Department of English.

7. Dr. N. Balambigai Assistant Professor

Department of English The Board 8. Mrs. P. M.Vasugi of Assistant Professor Department of English Studies Meeting was convened on 15-02-2018, for the evaluation of M.A.ENGLISH LITERATURE syllabus from the academic year 2018 onwards. In the meeting the PG syllabus was unanimously approved by the Board.

Remarks:

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

Title of the papers for syllabus effect from the Academic year 2018-19 onwards

Course: English Literature Degree: M.A.

Sem Paper Title of the Papers Subject UE IA TOTAL C Pg. No. code No.

I I CHAUCER TO THE ELIZABETHAN AGE 75 25 100 4 9

II SHAKESPEARE 75 25 100 4 10

III THE AUGUSTAN AGE 75 25 100 4 11

IV ROMANTIC AND VICTORIAN AGE 75 25 100 4 12

V APPROACHES TO ENGLISH LANGUAGE 75 25 100 4 13 TEACHING

II VI AMERICAN LITERATURE 75 25 100 4 14

VII WORLD CLASSICS 75 25 100 4 15

VIII WOMEN’S WRITING 75 25 100 4 16

IX ELECTIVE – I GREEN LITERATURE 75 25 100 3 17

X ELECTIVE-II PERSONALITY 75 25 100 3 18 DEVELOPMENT AND SELF EMPOWERMENT

XI EDE – WRITING SKILLS 75 25 100 3 19

III XII TWENTIETH CENTURY LITERATURE 75 25 100 4 20

XIII LITERARY CRITICISM AND THEORY 75 25 100 4 21

XIV LINGUISTICS 75 25 100 4 22

XV ELECTIVE-III RESEARCH METHODS 75 25 100 3 23 AND WRITING

XVI ELECTIVE-IV ESSENTIAL OF 75 25 100 3 24 LANGUAGE AND COMMUNICATION

XVII EDE – COMMUNICATIVE SKILLS 75 25 100 3 25

IV XVIII POST COLONIAL LITERATURE 75 25 100 4 26

XIX INDIA STUDIES 75 25 100 4 27

XX CULTURAL STUDIES 75 25 100 4 28

XXI TRANSLATION STUDIES 75 25 100 4 29

XXII ELECTIVE-V DISSERTATION (50+25) 75 25 100 3 30

Controller of Examinations Signature of H.O.D

APPENDIX UNIVERSITY OF MADRAS

M.A. DEGREE COURSE REGULATIONS

I SEMESTER

Inst. Exam Course Components/Title of the Paper Credits Marks Hours/Week Hours CIA EXT TOTAL

Core Paper – I: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – II: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – III: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – IV: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – V: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Soft Skill - I - 2 3 40 60 100

II SEMESTER

Inst. Exam Course Components/Title of the Paper Credits Marks Hours/Week Hours CIA EXT TOTAL

Core Paper – VI: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – VII: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – VIII: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Extra Disciplinary Paper – I: 6 4 3 25 75 100 Chromatographic Techniques/ Analytical Techniques in Chemistry/ / Polymer Chemistry

Elective - I 6 4 3 25 75 100

Elective - II

Soft Skill Paper - II - 2 3 40 60 100

Internship** 2

III SEMESTER

Inst. Exam Course Components/Title of the Paper Credits Marks Hours/Week Hours CIA EXT TOTAL

Core Paper – IX: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – X: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – XI: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Extra Disciplinary Paper – II: Materials 4 3 3 25 75 100 Science/ / Research Methodology / Bioinorganic Chemistry

Elective Paper - III 4 3 6 25 75 100

Elective Paper - III 4 3 6 25 75 100

Soft Skill Paper - II - 2 3 40 60 100

30 23

IV SEMESTER

Inst. Exam Course Components/Title of the Paper Credits Marks Hours/Week Hours CIA EXT TOTAL

Core Paper – XII: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – XIII: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – XIV: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – XV: 6 4 3 25 75 100

Elective Paper V: Dissertation Viva Voce 6 4 3 25 75 100 exam

Soft Skill - IV - 2 3 40 60 100

PG COURSES:

The total credits allotted for PG Courses is minimum of 90 credits

Core Subjects - 15 Core Papers x 4 credits = 60 credits

Soft Skills - 4 Papers x 2 credits = 8 credits

*Internship - 2 credits = 2 credits = 10 credits

Elective Subjects (5) + Extra Disciplinary Elective Subjects

(2) – 5 + 2 = 7 Subjects

7 Papers x 3 credits = 21 credits ------Total (60+10 + 21) = 91 credits

*Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the II semester

Extra disciplinary subjects should be allocated in the II & III semester alone for all PG courses

Queen Mary’s College (Autonomous) Chennai 600 004 Question Paper pattern for P.G. Courses

Time : 3Hrs Total Number of Units - 5 Total Marks:75 Question Paper Pattern: ( Without Omitting Any Unit)

Section A

Answer ALL the Questions [ 5x2= 10]

[ 5 Questions 1 from each unit without Choice]

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Section B

Answer ALL the Questions: [5x4= 20]

[2 Questions from each unit with Either or Choice]

6.(a) Or (b) 7.(a) Or (b) 8.(a) Or (b) 9.(a) Or (b) 10.(a) Or (b) Section C

Answer any THREE Questions: [3x15=45][3 Questions to be answered out of 5 Questions. 1 Questions from each unit]

11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

CHAUCER TO THE ELIZABETHAN AGE

SEMESTER: I CORE PAPER: I I M.A. CODE:

Objective: ➢ To familiarize students with the socio- political background of Chaucer’s age. To provide an overview of the Renaissance in England. Unit I

POETRY I

Chaucer : Prologue to the Canterbury tales – Introduction. Lines 1-41 The Knight. Lines 42-80 The Prioress Lines 122-166 The Wife of Bath Lines 455-486 Edmund Spenser : Prothalamion John Donne : The Canonization Unit II

POETRY II

Sir Thomas Wyatt : Find no Peace Andrew Marvell : To his coy mistress George Herbert : The Pearl Unit III

PROSE

Sir Francis Bacon : Of Truth : Of Marriage and single life : Of Ambition Unit IV

DRAMA

Christopher Marlowe : Dr. Faustus

Unit V

DRAMA

John Webster : Duchess of Malfi

Suggested Reading:

W.H. Hudson – An Introduction of the Study of English Literature Pramod.K. Nayar – A Short History of English Literature Poetry – Jill.P. Baumgartner C.T. Thomas - Chaucer to Houseman vol I B I publication

SHAKESPEARE

SEMESTER : I PAPER : II

IM.A. CODE:

OBJECTIVES:

➢ To introduce the students to the age of Shakespeare and current scholarship. ➢ To gain an insight into the psychological aspects of human nature as portrayed by Shakespeare. Unit I

A Midsummer Night’s Dream

Unit II

Antony and Cleopatra

Unit III

Hamlet

Unit IV

The Winter’s Tale

Unit V

Sonnets – No: 18 Shall I compare thee

No: 30 When to the sessions of sweet

No: 127 In the old age black was not

No: 130 My mistress eyes are nothing like the sun

Suggested Reading :-

A.C. Bradley: Shakespearean Tragedy Lecture I

Sirfield and Dollimore: “Introduction: Shakespeare”

Cultural materialism and New Historicism

Political Shakespeare: New essays in cultural materialism

J. Drakakis Alternative Shakespeares

THE AUGUSTAN AGE I M.A PAPER: III SEMESTER I: CODE:

Objective:

➢ To introduce the students to the Reformation, the Restoration and the writings influenced by these movements and events.

Unit: I POETRY: John Milton : Paradise Lost Book IX William Collins : Ode to Evening Thomas Gray : The Bard

Unit: II PROSE: Dr Johnson : Preface to Shakespeare (Full Text) Joseph Addison : Sir Roger and the Gipsies

Unit: III DRAMA: Richard Brinsley Sheridan : The Rivals

Unit: IV Oliver Goldsmith : She Stoops to Conquer

Unit: V

Jonathan Swift : Gullivers Travel 1st & 2nd voyages

Suggested Books:

1. Compton & Rickett History of English Literature.

ROMANTIC AND VICTORIAN AGE I M.A PAPER: IV SEMESTER : I CODE:

Objective:

➢ To introduce the students to the socio-political background, the change in mood and temper, the compromise between science and religion and the major Victorian writers.

Unit: I POETRY I Lord Alfred Tennyson : The Lotos Eaters Robert Browning : Fra Lippo Lippi William Wordsworth : Tintern Abbey

Unit: II POETRY II John Keats : Ode on a Grecian Urn D.G. Rosetti : The Blessed Damozel P.B.Shelley : Ode to the West Wind William Blake : The Lamb, The Tiger

Unit: III PROSE Matthew Arnold : The Study of Poetry Charles Lamb : Dream Children: A Reverie

Unit: IV

Oscar Wilde : Lady Windermere’s Fan

Unit: V FICTION Charles Dickens : Hard Times Bronte : Wuthering Heights Thomas Hardy : Tess of the D’ Urbervilles

Suggested Reading:

1. W. H. Hudson – An Introduction to the study of English Literature 2. Compton and Rickett History of English Literature.

APPROACHES TO ENGLISH LANGUAGE TEACHING I M.A. SEMESTER : I PAPER V CODE: Objective:

➢ To introduce and orient the students to the background, history of language teaching and its developments through various approaches and methods

Unit-I

Nature of Approaches and Methods in Language Teaching

Background, Approach, Design, Procedure

Unit-II

The Oral Approach and Situational Language Teaching

Background, Approach, Design, Procedure

Unit-III

The Audio lingual Method

Background, Approach, Design, Procedure

The Decline of the Audio lingual Method

Unit-IV

Communicative Language Teaching

Background, Approach, Design, Procedure

Distinctive Features of ALM and CLT

Unit-V

How to Teach English with Technology

Technology in the Classroom (chapter 1)

Preparing for the future – web 2.0 (chapter 12)

Recommended Books: 1. Approaches and Methods in Language Teaching. Jack C Richards & Theodore S Rodgers 2. How to Teach English with Technology. Dudeney, Gavin and Hockly, Nicky, 20 AMERICAN LITERATURE I M.A PAPER: VI SEMESTER II: CODE:

Objective:

➢ To introduce the students to the history and literature of USA and the distinctive features of American character Unit: I PROSE: Emerson : Self Reliance Alice Walker : In Search of Our Mother’s Gardens (Essay 1972) Henry Thoreau : From Walden - ‘Economy’

Unit: II POETRY: Edgar Allan Poe : Lenore Wallace Stevens : Anecdote of a Jar Walt Whitman : When Lilacs Last in the Dooryard Bloomed

Unit: III DRAMA: Tennessee Williams : A Street Car Named Desire Arthur Miller : Death of a Salesman

Unit: IV

SHORT STORY & AUTOBIOGRAPHY

Short Story: Paule Marshall : Reena

Autobiography: Barack Obama : Excerpts from Dreams from my Father (Part I pg: 1 to 129)

Unit: V FICTION: Louise Erdrich : Love Medicine

Suggested Reading:

1. An Anthology - Literature of the Nineteenth Century Fisher Samuelsson & Renenger 2. An Anthology - American Literature of the Nineteenth Century –William J.Fisher etal

WORLD CLASSICS II M.A PAPER: VII SEMESTER II: CODE: Objective: ➢ To enable students to appreciate the literary values, philosophical and socio- political background of great classics to help them develop a cross – cultural perspective. Unit: I POETRY: : Thirukkural CHAPTER XXXX: : 391 – 400 (10 couplets) – Translation by G.U. Pope

Homer : The Iliad – Chapter III – A Truce and A Duel (Translated by E.V.Rieu) Unit: II PROSE: Swami Vivekananda : Speech at the Parliament of World Religions, Chicago Abraham Lincoln : Gettysburg Address Kahlil Gibran : The Prophet (1) On Marriage (2) On Children (3) On Joy

(4) On Work (5) On Teaching Unit: III DRAMA: Kalidasa : Sakuntala (Translated by A . W. Ryder) Euripdes : Medea Anton Chekhov : The Cherry Orchard Unit: IV FICTION: Anne Frank : Diary of Anne Frank (excerpts part I: Chapter I to XXXIV) Leo Tolstoy : Anna Karenina - Vol No – 1 Don Quixote : Part I, Book – 1, 2 & 3. Unit: V SHORT STORY: Mulk Raj Anand : The Lost Child Katherine Mansfield : Taking the Veil Giovanni Boccaccio : The Pot of Basil Suggested Books: Wellek and Warren – Theory of Literature

WOMEN’S WRITING

SEMESTER: II CORE PAPER: VIII I M.A. CODE:

Objective: ➢To introduce students to women’s writing a genre and to familiarize them with the key concepts and debates in women’s writing.

UNIT – I POETRY Elizabeth Barrett Browning : How do I Love thee? Let me count the Ways Sylvia Plath : Lady Lazarus Maya Angelou : Phenomenal Woman Kamala Das : Introduction Toru Dutt : Sita

UNIT – II PROSE Virginia Woolf : A Room of One’s Own Alice Munro : The Bear Came over the Mountain

UNIT – III DRAMA

Mahasweta Devi : Mother of 1084 Caryl Churchill : The Handmaid’s Tale

UNIT – IV FICTION Jhumpa Lahiri : The Namesake Margaret Atwood : The Handmaid’s Tale

UNIT – V LITERARY CRITICISM Elaine Showalter : Towards a Feminist Poetics

Suggested Reading: Routledge Encyclopedia of and Post Feminism Mary Eagleton -Feminist Literary theory

GREEN LITERATURE

SEMESTER:III PAPER: IX

I M.A. ELECTIVE I CODE :

Objectives:

• To introduce students to the key concepts in ecocriticism. • To inculcate environmental concern through reading relevant literary texts. UNIT– A CheryllGlotfelty. “Introduction: Literary Studies in an Age of Environmental Crisis”.Glotfelty and Fromm The Ecocriticism Reader. Key Concepts : Social Ecology

UNIT-B Mary Mellor. Chapter 3 & 4 from Feminism and Ecology Key Concept: .

UNIT-C Poetry John Clare. Beans in Blossom. DilipChitre. Felling of the Banyan Tree. Keki Daruwalla. Boat-Ride along the Ganga. Mamang Dai. Floating Island.

UNIT-D Non Fiction Aldo Leopold. Thinking like a Mountain. From The Sand County Almanac. C.K.Janu. Mother Forest: The Unfinished Story of C. K. Janu.

UNIT-E Fiction C.S.Chellappa Vaadivasal. Lakshmi Kannan. Nandanvan. From Nandanvan& other stories

Books for Reference: G.Garrard. Ecocriticism. C.Glotfelty. and H.Fromm,The Ecocriticism Reader. T.Clark. The Cambridge Introduction to Literature and the Environment.

PERSONALITY DEVELOPMENT AND SELF EMPOWERMENT

SEMESTER :II PAPER: ELECTIVE II I M.A. CODE:

OBJECTIVE: To enable the students to build a strong self image and acquire leadership skills and emotional intelligence.

Unit I

1. Norman Vincent Peale: The Power of Positive Thinking [Chapter 13 – Inflow of New Thoughts can Remake You] 2. Deepak Chopra: The Ultimate Happiness Prescription a) Detoxify Your Life [Pg No. 59 – 72] b) Focus on the Present [Pg. No.89 – 104]

Unit II

1. Chicken Soup for the Soul : Think Positive a) Just Show Up b) Eleven Minutes 2. Ken Blanchard and Spencer Johnson :Who Moved My Cheese

Unit III 1. Brene Brown: Vulnerability “Chapter - 4” 2. Eric Berne: Games People Play “Chapter -2”

Unit IV

1. Edward De Bono : “Six Hats, Six Colours” (from Six Thinking Hats) 2. Daniel Goleman : “What Makes A Leader?”|

Unit V

1. David Foster Wallace: This is Water 2. Ten Life Core Skills (as per WHO) i. Decision Making ii. Problem Solving iii. Creative Thinking iv. v. Effective Communication vi. Inter Personal Relationship vii. Self Awareness viii. Empathy ix. Coping with Stress x. Coping with Emotion

WRITING SKILLS SEMESTER: II EDE: I I M.A. CODE:

Objective: ➢To enable the students to acquire effective writing skills. ➢To encourage the students to present their original thoughts and ideas into a piece of cogent writing.

UNIT – I Features of Written Communication Discourse Makers

UNIT – II Writing paragraphs Unifying and Developing Paragraphs

UNIT – III Writing Papers Generating Ideas Thesis statement, Rough Draft and unfinished Draft and Revision

UNIT - IV Resume Writing

UNIT – V Common Errors

Suggested Reading:

Personality Development and Communicative English Dr. T. Bharathi & Dr. M. Hari Prasad A B C of Common Grammatical Errors – Nigel D Turton English in Cross Cultural Communication – Arpita Mishra J. Anderson & B. M. Poole: Assignment and Thesis Writing 4th Edition

TWENTIETH CENTURY LITERATURE

II M.A PAPER: XII SEMESTER: III CODE:

Objective: ➢ To introduce the students to the dominant literary traditions and the authors of the 20th century.

Unit: I POETRY I: W.B.Yeats : Sailing to Byzantium. T.S.Eliot : The Wasteland Wilfred Owen : Anthem for Doomed Youth

Unit: II POETRY II : Hopkins : The Windhover Seamus Heaney : The Tollund Man Stephen Spender : I Think Continually of Those Who Are Truly Great.

Unit: III PROSE:

George Orwell : Politics and the English Language* E.M.Forster : Hymn Before Action

Unit: IV DRAMA: Samuel Beckett : Waiting for Godot G.B.Shaw : Saint Joan

Unit: V FICTION: Muriel Spark : The Driver’s Seat Ian Mc Ewan : Saturday

Suggested Books:

1. J.Ramazani and J.Stallworthy eds. Norton Anthology of English Literature Volume F 2. David Daiches Vol. 5 Modern Age.

LITERARY CRITICISM AND THEORY II M.A PAPER: XIII SEMESTER: III CODE:

Objective: To familiarize the students with the concepts in contemporary criticism

Unit: I INTRODUCTION TO LITERARY THEORY: Classical literary Theory i) The Greek Master – Aristotle (pg 9-21) ii) The Roman Classicist- Morace (pg 29-38)

Ref. B.Prasad – An Introduction to English Criticism. Key Terms: Literary Theory * :Literary Criticism (pg 1-4)*

Unit: II STRUCTURALISM AND POST STRUCTURALISM: Jacques Derrida : Structure, Sign and Play in the Discourse of the Human Sciences. Roland Barthes : The Death of the Author

Unit: III POSTMODERNISM AND PSYCHOANALYTICAL CRITICISM Jacques Lacan : The Mirror Stage as Formation of the Function of the I as revealed in Psychoanalytic experience.

Unit: IV FEMINIST LITERARY CRITICISM

Key Term: Gender Theory: (pg No 109 – 118) * Lee Maracle : Oratory: Coming to Theory C.T.Mohanty : Under Western Eyes (excerpts from Post Colonial Studies Reader)

Unit: V COLONIALISM, POST COLONIALITY, POST COLONIALISM Key concepts in Postcolonial Theory ; Decolonization, Subaltern, Hegemony.

Gayatri Spivak : Can the Subaltern Speak? (excerpts from Post Colonial Studies Reader) Chinua Achebe : Colonialist Criticism. (excerpts from Post Colonial Studies Reader)

Suggested Books:

1. Joseph Chandra S.K.S.Antony Samy. Classical to Contemporary Literary Theory* 2. Martin Coyle et al, ed. Encyclopaedia of Literature and Criticism. 3. Ramaswami.S, V.S.Sethuraman. The English Critical Tradition. 4. Patricia Waugh, Literary Theory and Criticism. 5. Philip Rice & Patricia Waugh. Modern Literary Theory. 6. Plain and Susan Sellers, ed. A History of Feminist Literary Criticism. LINGUISTICS

SEMESTER: III PAPER: IV

II M.A. CODE:

Objective: To familiarize the students with the major concepts of linguistics and its applications Unit- I

Introduction to Linguistics

Brief History: Definition, Major Concepts and Branches. Language: Definition, Nature, Properties and Functions of Language, Sub-systems of Language.

Unit- II

Syntax Syntactic Analysis, IC Analysis, Phrase Structure Grammar, Transformational Grammar, Components and Functions of Grammar.

Unit- III

Language and the mind

Psycholinguistics: Introduction to psycho linguistics Competence and Performance

Unit- IV

Introduction to Sociolinguistics, ethno linguistics

Language Isolates, Language change, Language varieties, Languages in contact Stylistics variations and stylistics Unit- V

Introduction to Neurolinguistics: What is Neurolinguistics? (pp. 3-9) Language and the brain Development of theories about brain and language (pp. 9- 35)

Recommended Books: 1. A.E Darbyshire A Description of English 2. Fromkin. V, et al An Introduction to Language 7th edition, Thomson Heinle, 2010 3. M.J.Ball Routledge Handbook of Sociolinguistics around the World, 2009 4. G. Yule The Study of Language 5. John Lyons Language and Linguistics-An Introduction 6. Elisabeth Ahlsen Introduction to Neuro Linguistics. John Benjamins Gotenberg University. RESEARCH METHODS AND WRITING SEMESTER: II PAPER: IX

II M.A. - ELECTIVE I CODE:

Objective:

To introduce students to research and to train them in critical writing.

Unit I

➢ Qualitative and Quantitative research design (Pg.114,118&119)* ➢ Procedures for conducting qualitative research

Unit II

➢ Descriptive and experimental research (p.117,124 &125)* ➢ Data collection (p.126-129)*

Unit III

➢ Format of the Dissertation

Unit IV

➢ Developing a Thesis ➢ Organising ideas, Literature Review ➢ Writing Abstracts ➢ Chapterisation ➢ Conclusion ➢ Revising and Editing

Unit V

➢ Compiling a Working Bibliography.

Books for Reference:

Gibaldi, Joseph. MLA style Manual and Guide to Scholarly Publishing. 7th Edition. New York, MLA, 2014. Griffin Gabriele ed. Research Methods for English Studies. , Edinburgh UP, 2005. *Shohamy and W.Seliger. Second Language Research Methods. Oxford University Press, 1989.

ESSENTIALS OF LANGUAGE AND COMMUNICATION

SEMESTER :III PAPER :XVI

II M.A. ELECTIVE :IV CODE:

UNIT I

Recap of Language Skills

Vocabulary Phrases Clauses Sentences UNIT II

Fluency Building

Developing Fluency Word and its Manifestations Listening Skills and Comprehension Reading Skills and Comprehension UNIT III

Principles of Communication

Understanding Communication Language and Communication Modes of Communication UNIT IV

Types of Communication

Inter personal, Group and Interactive Communication Public and Mass-Line Communication UNIT V

LSRW in Communication

Listening Skills Speaking Skills Reading Skills Writing Skills

COMMUNICATIVE SKILLS

SEMESTER: III EDE: II II M.A. CODE:

Objectives: To enhance and broaden the learners views about ➢ Communication Skills ➢ To emphasize that communication is a social affair ➢ To be instrumental in aiding the learner understand that effective communication involves three things: Language, Structure and attitude.

Unit: I Understanding Communication Essentials of Effective Communication

Unit: II Dyadic Communication Telephonic Communication

Unit: III Paragraph, Letter, Report Writing Tips for Effective Writing

Unit: IV Visual Communication Audio – Visual Aids

Unit: V

Famous Speeches: M.L. King – ‘I Have a Dream’ Dr. A.P.J. Abdul Kalam Lectures. Wings of Fire (an extract)

Books Recommended:

Developing Communication Skills - Krishna Mohan and Meera Bannerji.

Basic Communication Skills - P. Kiranmani Dutt et al. Communication in English - E. Suresh Kumar P. Sreehari A Course in Listening and Speaking 1 – V.SasiKumar. P.Kiranmai Dutt. Geetha Rajeevan.

POST - COLONIAL LITERATURE II M.A PAPER: XII SEMESTER : IV CODE: Objective: ➢ To familiarize the students with post- colonial literatures and perceptions of the impact of colonialism and colonial encounters ➢ To introduce students to post- colonial concepts such as Globalization., Hybridity, Displacement, Decolonisation, Resistance Unit: I Helen Tiffin , Bill Aschcroft et.al : The Empire Writes Back 1. Introduction 2. Chapter I 3. Chapter II Unit: II CANADA: E.J. Pratt : The Dying Eagle Thomas Highway : Rez Sisters Carol Shields : The Stone Diaries Unit: III AFRICA: John Pepper Clark : A Child Asleep Chinua Achebe : No Longer at Ease Wole Soyinka : Kongi’s Harvest Unit: IV Australia: A.D. Hope : Australia Elizabeth Jolley : 1. Pear Tree Dance 2. The Woman in a Lampshade 3. Uncle Bernard’s Proposal (From the Text: The Women in a Lampshade) Jack Davis : Honey Spot Unit: V NEW ZEALAND: Allen Curnow : The Dying Eagle Keri Hulme : Rez Sisters Witi Ihimaera : The Whale Rider Patricia Grace : From Potiki*

Suggested Reading:

1. *J. Thieme, ed. The Arnold Anthology of Post Colonial Literature in English 2. Pramod Nayar Post Colonialism. 3.

INDIA STUDIES I M.A PAPER: XIX SEMESTER IV: CODE: Objective: ➢ To introduce students to the historical context for the rise of Indian Writing in English and to familiarise them with the flowering of Indian English Poetry, the development of Fiction and Drama in English in India as well as to sensitise them to the recent trends in this area. In the Dalit writing component to provide canonical recognition to the Art, Experience and Knowledge of a marginalised community and to expose students to the Dalit renewal of a discussion on Humanism and Democracy. Unit: I POETRY Tagore : Gitanjali – Songs 1, 6, 50, 81, 95. Nissim Ezekiel : Very Indian Poem In Indian English Imtiaz Dharker : The Right Word Tishani Doshi : The Day We Went to the Sea Unit: II PROSE A.K. Ramanujam : Is there an Indian Way of Thinking :An Informal Essay V.S Sethuraman : Indian Aesthetics ( Theory) Unit: III DRAMA : The Wedding Album : Kanyadaan Unit: IV FICTION R.K. Narayan : The Dark Room Salman Rushdie : Haroun and The Sea of Stories Mahasweta Devi : Breast Giver (short story) Unit: V DALIT WRITING B.R Ambedkar : Annihilation of Caste T.M. Yesudasan : “Towards a Prologue to Dalit Studies” K. Sathyanarayana

and Susie Tharu eds. No Alphabet in Sight Pratibha Jayachandran : Dream Teller (Poem) Cho Dharuman : Koogai K. Gunasekaran : Touch P. Sivakami : The Grip of Change and Authors Notes Suggested Reading: 1. Ravikumar and Azhagarasan eds. Oxford Anthology of Tamil Dalit Writing. 2. K. Sathyanarayana and Susie Tharu eds. No Alphabet in Sig CULTURAL STUDIES

II M.A PAPER: XX SEMESTER : IV CODE:

Objective: To introduce students to a new area of research and teaching that brings in fresh perspectives to our notions regarding ‘texts’ and ‘meanings’ and therefore to the study of literatures, cultures and societies.

Unit I: Ideas and Concepts Simon During, Introduction. Cultural Studies Reader. Pg. 1-6. Toby Miller. What is and What isn’t Cultural studies? Introducing Cultural studies. A Companion to Cultural Studies. Pg. 1-5.

UnitII: Theory Adorno and Horkheimer. Excerpts From “ The Cultural Industry: Enlightenment as Mass Deception.” Excerpts from Francis Mulhern Culture/Metaculture, New Critical Idiom.

Unit: III Methodology Stuart Hall “Ëncoding Decoding ” Paul du Guy “ Doing Cultural Studies: The story of the Sony Walkman.”

Unit :IV Praxis Janice Radway Excerpts from Reading the Romance

Unit :V Praxis in the Indian Context Chandrima Chakroborty. Bollywood Motifs: Cricket fiction and Fictional cricket from Bollywood Motifs.

Books Recommended: Simone During – Cultural Studies Reader Chandrima Chakraborty – Bollywood Motifs Francis Mulhern – Cultural / Meta Culture

TRANSLATION STUDIES

SEMESTER: IV PAPER: XXI II M.A CODE: Objective: ➢ To expose the students to international thought and culture. ➢ To equip the students to translate short pieces. ➢ To acquaint the students with the rudiments of translation

Unit – I

Definitions: Theory and Principles

Unit – II

Language and Culture

Unit – III

Types of Translation Decoding and Recoding

Unit – IV

History of Translation: The Bible Translation Early Theories The Renaissance The Seventeenth Century The Eighteenth Century The Romanticism The Victorians

The 20th Century

Unit – V

Problems of Translation: Structures Translating Prose, Poetry and Drama

Books Recommended: Bassnett, Susan: Translation Studies

Pattern of Evaluation: 75 Marks End Semester Exam 25 Marks Awarded for Translation Mini Project after VivaVoce by An External Examiner

DISSERTATION

SEMESTER: IV PAPER: XXII II M.A. CODE: As part of the completion of the Masters Programme, the students will write a mini Dissertation in the fourth semester. OBJECTIVE: To enhance the research skills of the students and introduce them to the fundamentals of research writing. The students will prepare a typewritten proposal to be submitted to the guide. FORMAT: ➢ Tentative title ➢ Introduction ➢ Reasons for the choice of Topic and Literature Review ➢ Objective ➢ Methodology ➢ Limitations, if any ➢ Brief Bibliography

• The tutor allots students to the guide at the beginning of the fourth semester. • Project should be submitted by the end of March. • Any instance of plagiarism will be dealt with severely. If plagiarism is detected, the dissertation could be rejected.

• Project will be evaluated out of 50 marks by the external examiner. • Viva should be conducted for 25 marks by the external examiners only. PATTERN OF EVALUATION: ✓ Proposal 25 marks ✓ Dissertation 50 marks ✓ Viva 25 marks RULES TO BE FOLLOWED: ✓ 30 Pages ✓ Times New Roman 12 point ✓ MLA 7th edition style

REFERENCE Joseph Gibaldi: MLA Handbook for Writers of Research Papers. 8th Edition ❖ Ch 1: Selecting a Topic (Pg: 6&7) ❖ Ch 6: Documentation (Pg: 213 -232)

Queen Mary’s College (Autonomous) Chennai - 4

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH SYLLABUS FOR M.Phil. COURSE IN ENGLISH LITERATURE

June 2018 onwards

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (A), CHENNAI

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH

BOARD OF STUDIES MEETING PARTICULARS

Year Members Names of Members Signature

2018 University 1. Dr. S. Armstrong Nominee Professor & Head Department of English University of Madras Chepauk, Chennai -5 Subject 2.Dr.Fathima Banu Expert I Associate Professor & Head Department of English Justice Basheer Ahmed Sayeed College for women(A) Teynampet, Chennai-18 Subject 3. Dr. V. S. Ramakrishnan Expert II Associate Professor & Head Department of English Presidency College(A) Chepauk, Chennai - 5 H.O.D 4.Dr.Anita Balakrishnan Associate Professor & Head Department of English Queen Mary’s College, Chennai-4 Internal Members 5. Dr. Maria Preethi Srinivasan Assistant Professor Department of English.

6.Dr.Sujatha Menon Assistant Professor Department of English.

The 7. Dr. N. Balambigai Board Assistant Professor of Department of English

8. Mrs.P.M.Vasugi Assistant Professor Department of English Studies Meeting was convened on 15-02-2018, for the evaluation of M.Phil..ENGLISH LITERATURE syllabus from the academic year 2018 onwards. In the meeting the PG syllabus Sem Paper Title of the Papers Subject TOTAL Pg. was No. code No.

I I Research Methodology and Literary Criticism 100 6

II Contemporary Literature 100 8

III Area Paper 75 unanimously approved by the Board.

Remarks:

DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

Title of the papers for syllabus effect from the Academic year 2018-19 onwards

Course: English Literature Degree: M. Phil

M.Phil. Degree Examination

SUB: Code No.: PAPER NO.: Title of the Paper: Research Methodology and Literary Criticism Time: 3 Hrs Max. Marks: SECTION - A I) Answer all the questions in a sentence or two (10x1 = 10)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

II) Write short notes on any THREE of the following (3x5 = 15) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. SECTION – B Literary Criticism – Theory Part I – Ancient Criticism Answer any ONE of the following essays in about 1200 words (1x25 = 25) 1. 2. 3. 4. Part – II Modern Criticism Answer any TWO of the following in about 500 words each (2x10 = 20)

1. 2. 3. 4. Part – III Contemporary Critical Theory Answer any THREE of the following in about 500 words each (3x10 = 30)

1. 2. M.Phil. Degree Examination

SUB: Code No.: PAPER NO.: Title of the Paper: Contemporary Literature Time: 3 Hrs Max. Marks:

SECTION – A

I) Answer any TWO of the following (2x15 = 30)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

SECTION – B FICTION

II) Answer any TWO of the following (2x20 = 40) 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

SECTION – C DRAMA

III) Answer any THREE of the following: (3x10 = 30)

12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

17

PAPER I

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND LITERARY CRITICISM Unit I Section A Research Methodology 1. Choice of the Research Problem – The Hypothesis. 2. The Use of the Research Library. 3. Preparing the Working Bibliography. 4. Collection of Materials – Note-Making –Plagiarism. 5. Planning the Thesis. 6. Documentation of sources – Parenthetical Documentation- Author – Date System. 7. Drafting the Thesis – Use of Quotations – Abbreviation- Use of Dictionaries and Reference books- Revising – Proof Reading. 8. Preparing the list of Works Cited. 9. The Format of the Thesis.

Books Recommended: 1. F.W. Bateson The Scholar Critic 2. George Watson The Literary Thesis 3. Joseph Gibaldi MLA Handbook for Writers of Research Papers. 8th Edition

Unit II Section B Literary Criticism: Theory Part I – Ancient Criticism 1. Aristotle : Poetics 2. Longinus : On the Sublime 3. Horace : Ars Poetica 4. Anandavardhana: From Dhvanyaloka pg 78-88. Indian Aesthetics: An Introduction. Ed. V.S.Sethuraman. 5. Tholkappiar : From Tholkappiam: III : Porul; Chapter 6 ‘Meypattu Iyal’

Unit III Part II: Modern Criticism

1. V.S.Sethuraman: Comparative Criticicm: An Anthology. Introduction 1-49 2. Ania Loomba: Colonialism/ Postcolonialism. Chapter 1: Situating Colonial and Postcolonial Studies Chapter 2: Colonial and Postcolonial Identities Chapter 3: Challenging Colonialism. 3. Greg Garrard: Ecocriticism (New Critical Idiom) Beginnings: Pollution Pg: 18 Positions: Pg: 18 - 34 Unit IV Part III: Contemporary Critical and Ecocritical Theory 1. Walter Benjamin. The Author as Producer New Left Review July/Aug 1970 pg. 83-96 2. Michel Foucault What is an Author (from D.Lodge, pg 196-210) 3. Maria Mies & Vandana Shiva Ecofeminism New Delhi: Kali for Women, 1998. ( Chapter 3 & 20) 4. Paula Gunn Allen. The Sacred Hoop: A Contemporary Perspective. Glotfelty and Fromm, The Ecocriticism Reader

Unit V Part IV: Postcolonial Theory 1. Frantz Fanon. National Culture* 2. Ketu H.Katrak. Decolonizing Culture : Towards a Theory for Postcolonial Women’s Texts.* 3. Barbara Christian The Race for Theory.* (*Excerpts from Ashcroft et. al. eds. The Postcolonial Studies Reader)

Recommended reading: 1. W.L. Guerin et. al. eds. A Handbook of Critical Approaches to Literature. New York: Oxford UP, 1999. 2. Robert J.C. Young. Postcolonialism: A Very Short Introduction. 3. New York: Oxford UP, 2003.

PAPER II CONTEMPORARY LITERATURE Unit I POETRY I British: Carol Ann Duffy: i) Valentine Palestine: Mahmood Darwish: i) When the Martyr’s Go to Sleep ii) Give Birth to Me Again That I May Know

American: John Ashbery: i) Abstensions Elizabeth Alexander: i) Haircut ii) Vernal Observations Unit II POETRY II Indian: A.K.Ramanujam: i) Small Scale Reflections on a Great House; ii) Ecology Australian: Les Murray: i) Poetry and Religion ii)The Gum Forest African and Caribbean: Derek Walcott: From Omeros Chapter 37 (Ref. Arnold Anthology of Post Colonial Literatures) Unit III FICTION I British: A.S.Byatt Possession American: Gloria Naylor: Women of Brewster Place Maxine Hong Kingston: The Woman Warrior Diaspora writer: Bharati Mukherjee Desirable Daughters Unit IV FICTION II Indian: Amitav Ghosh: Sea of Poppies Aravind Adiga: The White Tiger Australian : Kate Grenville: The Secret River. Unit V DRAMA German: Brecht : Mother Courage Irish: Beckett : Endgame Australia: Jack Davis : The Dreamers Indian: Satish Alekar : Deluge Recommended Reading: 1. John Thieme ed. Arnold Anthology of Postcolonial Literature.

2. Rajeev Patke: Postcolonial Poetry in English. 3. Bruce King: Modern Indian Poetry in English.

M.A. HISTORY

FRAMEWORK OF THE SYLLABUS WITH CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

For the Students admitted from 2018 – 2019

Course Paper Title of the Course Subject Lecture IM EM Total Credits Code Hours Marks No.

FIRST SEMESTER

I Cultural Heritage of India 6 25 75 100 4

II Socio-Economic and Cultural 6 25 75 100 4 History of

III History of World Civilizations 6 25 75 100 4

Core

IV Economic History of India 6 25 75 100 4

(A.D. 1857 – 1947)

V Archives Keeping 6 25 75 100 4

Soft I Soft Skill I - 40 60 100 2 Skill

TOTAL 30 - - - 22

SECOND SEMESTER

VI History of Freedom Movement 6 25 75 100 4 in India (A.D. 1885 – 1947)

VII Contemporary History of 6 25 75 100 4 Core Tamil Nadu (A.D. 1947 – 2016)

VIII History of Modern Europe 6 25 75 100 4

(A.D. 1815 – 1945)

I Empowerment of Women in 4 25 75 100 3 India Elective

II Modern Journalism – Principles 4 25 75 100 3 and Practices

EDE I Chennai through the Ages 4 25 75 100 3

Soft II Soft Skill II - 40 60 100 2 Skill Internship* - - - - 2

TOTAL 30 - - - 25

Course Paper Title of the Course Subject Lecture CA SE Total Credits Code Hours Marks No.

THIRD SEMESTER

IX History of Contemporary India 6 25 75 100 4

(A.D. 1947 – 2014)

X Historiography and Historical 6 25 75 100 4 Methods Core XI History of South-East Asia 6 25 75 100 4

(A.D. 1900 – 2000)

Elective III Public Administration 4 25 75 100 3

IV Socio-Economic Development 4 25 75 100 3 Programmes in India

EDE II Tourism and Travel Management 4 25 75 100 3

Soft III Soft Skill III - 40 60 100 2 Skill

TOTAL 30 - - - 23

FOURTH SEMESTER

XII Indian Constitution 6 25 75 100 4

XIII History of U.S.A. 6 25 75 100 4

(A.D. 1945 – 2017)

Core XIV International Relations and 6 25 75 100 4 Politics

XV Project Work & Viva-Voce 6 25 75 100 4

Elective V Studies in Human Rights 6 25 75 100 3

Soft IV Soft Skill IV - 40 60 100 2

Skill

TOTAL 30 - - - 21

TOTAL CREDITS (22+25+23+21) 91 =

EDE – Extra Disciplinary Elective (offered to the students of other Departments)

*Internship will be carried out in the summer vacation of II Semester.

Controller of Examinations Head of the Department - History

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER I CORE PAPER – I CULTURAL HERITAGE OF INDIA (4 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• To analyze historically the culture and polity of India. • To critically evaluate the socio-cultural ethos of Indian society. • To examine various trends in the shaping of Indian history. • To inculcate the importance of Indian culture and society.

UNIT I Theoretical Framework: Theoretical Orientations of analyzing Socio-Cultural History of India – Ancient Indian Culture – Unity in Diversity – Iron Age: Second Urbanization. UNIT II Society and Culture: Vedic Period – Evolution of Social and Cultural Institutions – Rise of and Buddhism – Indian Feudalism – Position of Women – Educational Centres – Cultural Synthesis – Literary Traditions – Literature, Art and Architecture. UNIT III Society and Culture: Foundations of Medieval State – Classification of Classes – Rural Society – Urban Centres and Industries – Position of Women – Islamic Traditions – Bhakti Movement – Sufism – The Sikh Movement – Literature, Fine Arts and Architectural Developments. UNIT IV Indian Society in Transition: Modern Era – Arrival of Christianity – The New Education – Status of Women – Capitalism – Industrialization. UNIT V

Renaissance: Reforms – Institutions – Educational, Religious, Political, Social Associations – Linguistic Revivalism – Birth of a State – Secular Values – Literary Traditions – Arts and .

Books for Reference:

1. Romila Thapar : Ancient Indian Social History

2. Romila Thapar : History and Beyond

3. Basham, A.L. : The Wonder that was India – Vol. I

4. Rizvi, S.A.A. : The Wonder that was India – Vol. II

5. Kosambi, D.D. : The Culture and Civilization of Ancient India

6. Luniya .B.N. : Evolution of Indian Culture

7. Sharma. L.P. : History of Ancient India

8. Mahajan. V.D. : Ancient India

9. Rawlinson. H.G. : A Short Cultural History of India

10. Srivastava. A.L. : Medieval Indian Culture

11. Majumdar. R.C. : Ancient India

12. Sharma. R.S. : Ancient India

13. Panikker. K.M. : A Survey of Indian History

14. Srinivasachari. C.S. : Social and Religious Movements in India

15. Sharma. S.R. : Renaissance of Hinduism

16. Tripathi.R.S. : History of Ancient India

17. Sarkar. J.N. : India through the Ages

18. Sreenivasa Murthy. H.V. : History and Culture of India up to A.D.1000

19. Subramanian. N. : Indiya Varalaru (Tamil)

20. Metcalfe, R. : A Concise History of India

21. Cultural Heritage of India - Vol. I – Ramakrishna Mission Publication

22. Indian Culture (Vivekananda Kendra Prakashana)

23. India Inheritance, Literature, Philosophy and Religion – Vol. I (Bharathiya Vidya Bhavan)

24. http://knowindia.gov.in/culture-and-heritage/ancient-history.php

25. http://www.discoveredindia.com/india-at-a-glance/culture.htm

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER I CORE PAPER – II

SOCIO-ECONOMIC AND CULTURAL HISTORY OF TAMILNADU

(4 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• To provide an understanding about the importance of and civilization. • To enable the students to perceive the nature of Tamil society before and after Independence. • To highlight the social and economic changes in Tamil Nadu over the years.

UNIT I Tamil Society: Nature and Character – Ancient Tamil Civilization: Institutions, Customs and Practices – Trade contacts with Arabs - Perception of Tamil Society during Colonialism – Native Response to Colonial Perception of Tamil Society.

UNIT II Structural Changes and Migration: Rural-Urban Structures – Agrarian Structure and Change – Industrialization and Urbanization – Emergence of Mercantile Capitalism – Agrarian Unrest and the Emergence of Urban Centres: Impacts of Migration.

UNIT III

Modern Tamil Society: Emergence - Tamil Society under British Imperialism – Institutionalization of Religious Orders – Religious Conversions and Socio-Cultural Crisis – Education in Modern Tamil Nadu – Introduction of Western Education – Contribution of Christian Missionaries.

UNIT IV Tamil Renaissance: Emergence of Print Culture and the Proliferation of Linguistic Consciousness – Consolidation of Caste and Religious Identities and Revivalism – Anti-Caste Movements – Self-Respect Movement – Women Movements in Tamil Nadu.

UNIT V Nationalist Upsurge – Social Legislations – Language as and Linguistic Reorganization – Politics for Language – Literary Traditions.

Books for Reference:

1. K.A. Nilakanta Sastri : History of 2. K.K. Pillai : Social and Cultural History of the 3. K. Rajayyan : 4. V.M. Krishnamoorthy : Topics in South Indian History 5. David Arnold : Congress in Tamil Nadu 6. Eugene Irshchick : Tamil Separatism and Social Conflict in South India 7. Barnett : Politics of Cultural Nationalism 8. Theodore Baskaran : The Message Bearers: The Nationalist Policies and the Entertainment Media in South India 9. Nambi Arooran : Tamil Renaissance and Dravidian Nationalism 1905-1944 10. Charles Ryerson : Regionalism and Religion: the Tamil Renaissance and Popular Hinduism 11. David Washbrook : The Emergence of Provincial Politics: The Madras Presidency 1870-1920

12. R. Nagaswamy : Studies in South Indian History and Culture 13. C.S. Srinivasachari : Social and Religious Movements in 19th century 14. R. Hardgrave : The Dravidian Movement 15. S. Sathianadhan : in the Madras Presidency 16. R. Suntharalingam : Politics and Nationalist Awakening in South India 17. P. Rajaraman : The Justice Party: A Historical Perspective 1916 – 1937. 18. https://web.archive.org/web/20061116152002/http://www.ifpindia.org/Historical-Atlas- of-South-India-Timeline.html 19. http://www.tamilselvi.com/history.htm

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER I CORE PAPER – III HISTORY OF WORLD CIVILIZATIONS (4 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives: • To make students aware of the Great Civilizations of the world.

• To give a critical understanding of the contributions made by the significant Civilizations of the world. • To study various aspects of Civilizations like Polity, Literature, Philosophy, Science and Arts of these Civilizations. UNIT I Introduction: Definition of Civilization – Comparison between Culture and Civilization – Origin and Growth of Civilization – Toynbee and D.D. Kosambi’s views on Civilization. UNIT II Egyptian Civilization: Society, Religion, Culture and Art – Mesopotamian Civilization: Sumerian, Babylonian – Code of Hammurabi, Religion, Art and Architecture – Persian Civilization and its important features. UNIT III Ancient Greek Civilization: City States, Legacy in the fields of Science and Philosophy – Roman Civilization: Society, Government, Law and Architecture – Chinese Civilization and its important features. UNIT IV Middle Ages: Byzantine and Saracenic Civilization – Feudalism – Origin, Merits and Demerits – Crusades – Growth of Cities and Progress of Education.

UNIT V Transition to Modern Age: Geographical Discoveries – Renaissance: Causes and Results – Reformation and Counter Reformation – Industrial and Agrarian Revolutions. Books for Reference:

1. Will Durant : The Life of Greece

2. Will Durant : The Age of Faith

3. Will Durant : The Renaissance

4. Will Durant : The Reformation

5. Edward MacNall Burns : Western Civilization

6. Hayes C.J. : History of Civilization

7. Swain. J.E. : A History of World Civilization

8. Barnes. H.E. : The History of Western Civilization

9. Rebellow : History of Civilization

10. Judd. G.P. : History of Civilization

11. Hedger G.A. and Others : An Introduction to Western Civilization

12. Thorndike. L. : History of Civilization

13. Joshi P.S. : History of Civilization

14. Dharam Singh : Ancient and Modern Civilizations

15. T. Walter Wall Bank & Alastair : Civilization: Past and Present

16. Phul. R.K. : World Civilization

17. Gokhale. B.K. : Introduction to Western Civilization

18. http://www.history.com/topics/ancient-history

19. http://www.historyworld.net/wrldhis/PlainTextHistories.asp?historyid=ab25

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER I CORE PAPER – IV ECONOMIC HISTORY OF INDIA (A.D. 1857 – 1947) (4 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75

Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• To give an understanding about the Indian Economy on the eve of the British Rule. • To provide awareness of the Land Revenue Settlements under the British. • An attempt to explain the contributions of Agriculture, Industries, Transport and Communication, Trade and Commerce during the period of British Rule in India. UNIT I

Indian Economy on the eve of the British Rule – Trade under the East India Company and the Economic Drain from India – Land Revenue Settlements under British Rule.

UNIT II

Agriculture – Policy and Development – Commercialization of Agriculture – Irrigation – Famine and Famine Administration – Condition of Peasants.

UNIT III

Industries – Policy and Development – Indigenous Industries - Major Industries: Cotton, Textile, Jute, Iron and Steel, Sugar and Chemical – Labour Problems and Labour Legislation.

UNIT IV

Transport and Communication – Policy and Development – Roadways – Railways – Waterways – Modernisation and Development of Post and Telegraph – Telephones and Radio.

UNIT V

Trade and Commerce: Internal Trade – External Trade – Principal Trade Centres in India– Trade Organisations.

Books for Reference:

1. S.S.M. Desai : Economic History of India

2. S.P. Nanda : Economic and Social History of Modern India

3. D. Rothermund : Economic History of India

4. Tirthankar Roy : The Economic History of India: 1857 – 1947

5. G. Kaushal : Economic History of India

6. G.B. Jathar & S.G. Beri : Indian Vol. II

7. B.L. Grover & S. Grover : A New Look at Modern Indian History

8. R.C. Dutt : Cambridge Economic History of India

9. http://www.culturalindia.net/indian-history/economic-history.html

10. https://www.theglobalist.com/indias-modern-economic-history-a-brief-review/

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER I CORE PAPER – V ARCHIVES KEEPING (4 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• To know the history of the archives. • To study the activities of various archives. • To understand the importance of archives keeping.

UNIT I Introduction: History of Archives – Archives Keeping through the Ages – International Archives – Archives in India: Growth and Development.

UNIT II Creation of Archives: Establishment of Registry – Racking – Shelves and other materials – Archives and Libraries – Organisation of Archives in India – Structure and Classification. UNIT III Preservation in Archives: Methods of Preservation – Preliminary and Precautionary Measures – Preventive Measures – Factors of Deterioration – Methods of Preservation and Repair of Archival material – Problems in Archives Keeping.

UNIT IV Administration of Archives: National Archive – Tamil Nadu Archive – Functions of Archives – Uses of Archives.

UNIT V Private Archives: Categories of Private Archives – Indian Historical Records Commission (IHRC) – Indian Council of Archives (ICA) – SWARBICA and ARBICA.

Books for Reference:

1. Theodore R. Schellenberg : Modern Archives: Principles and Techniques

2. Theodore R. Schellenberg : Management of Archives

3. Madhu Gupta : Archives and Record Management

4. N. Harinarayana : Science of Archives Keeping

5. F.L. Marsh : Problems of Archival Book Restoration

6. Sailen Ghose : Archives in India

7. P. Sarvaswaran : Archives Keeping

8. M. Sampathkumar : Nature and Scope of Archives – A Study

9. M. Sundararaj : A Manual of Archival System & the World of

Archives

10. J. Dharmaraj : Archives Keeping (Tamil)

11. http://nationalarchives.nic.in/content/national-archives-india

12. http://www.tnarchives.tn.gov.in/aboutus.html

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS

SEMESTER II CORE PAPER – VI HISTORY OF FREEDOM MOVEMENT IN INDIA (A.D. 1885 – 1947) (4 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• To give an understanding about the freedom movement in India in depth. • It helps the students to prepare themselves to write all the competitive examinations as well as to develop their General Knowledge.

UNIT I Emergence of Indian Nationalism: Pre-Congress Political Associations – The Formation of Indian National Congress – First Phase of the Congress: Moderate Nationalism – Partition of Bengal – Muslim League – Surat Split – Morley-Minto Reforms of 1909.

UNIT II Second Phase of the Congress: Rise of Extremism – Home Rule Movement – Tilak and Annie Besant – Ghadar Movement – Pact of 1916 – Impact of the First World War – Rowlatt Act and Jallianwalla Bagh Massacre – Montague – Chelmsford Reforms of 1919.

UNIT III

Gandhian Phase: Non-Cooperation Movement – Khilafat Movement – Swarajist Party – Simon Commission – Nehru Report – Lahore Congress – Jinnah’s Fourteen Points.

UNIT IV

The Civil Disobedience Movement: Salt Satyagraha – Round Table Conferences – Communal Award – Poona Pact – Government of India Act of 1935 – Impact of the Second World War – Subash Chandra Bose and the INA – Jinnah and Muslim Separatism – August Offer.

UNIT V

Individual Satyagraha: Cripps Mission – Quit India Movement – Congress and Muslim League efforts for Reconciliation – C.R. Formula – Wavell Plan – Simla Conference – Cabinet Mission – Direct Action Day – Interim Government – Mountbatten Plan and the Indian Independence Act of 1947.

Books for Reference :

1. Percival Spear : The Oxford History of Modern India

2. Bipan Chandra : India’s Struggle for Independence

3. Sumit Sarkar : Modern India 1885 – 1947

4. R.C. Majumdar : History of Freedom Movement in India

5. Ramana Rao : A Short History of Indian National Congress

6. S. Chowdhury : Growth of Nationalism in India 1919 – 1929, Vol.

II

7. G.S. Chhabra : Advanced Study in the History of Modern India

8. Jyoti Prasad & Satish Kumar : The Indian National Movement

9. B.L. Grover and S. Grover : Evolution of Indian Constitution and Freedom

Struggle

10. A.C. Kapur : Indian Constitutional Development

11. V.D. Mahajan : Indian Freedom Struggle

12. S.N. Sen : History of Freedom Movement in India

13. Prakash Chandra : The History of the Indian National Movement

14. N. Rajendran : Nationalist Movement in Tamil Nadu

15. Spectrum : A Brief History of Modern India

16. http://www.historydiscussion.net/history-of-india/history-of-freedom-struggle-in-india/3188

17. https://archive.india.gov.in/knowindia/culture_heritage.php?id=4

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER II CORE PAPER – VII

CONTEMPORARY HISTORY OF TAMIL NADU (A.D. 1947 – 2016) (4 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• The course intends to enhance the students’ knowledge about the administration of Tamil Nadu since independence. • The course helps to gain a deeper understanding about the various determinants of Tamil Nadu’s developments and its contribution to the national economy.

UNIT I Introduction: Congress Ministry – Omanthur Ramaswamy Reddiyar, P.S. Kumara Swami Raja, Rajaji – State Re-organisation in Tamil Nadu – Kamaraj and his Ministry – Developmental Schemes: Social, Economic and Educational Programmes – Industrial Development – Kamaraj Plan – M. Baktavatsalam – Achievements of Congress Ministry.

UNIT II Dravida Kazhagam: Principles and Reforms – Formation of DMK: C.N. Annadurai and his Ministry - M. Karunanidhi and his Ministry – Welfare Schemes – Socio-Economic and

Educational Developments during DMK regime – World Tamil Conferences – Revival of and Literature – Pure Tamil Movement.

UNIT III Formation of AIADMK: M.G. Ramachandran and his Ministry – J. Jayalalithaa and her Ministry – Developmental Schemes - Social, Economic and Educational developments during AIADMK Regime.

UNIT IV Centre-State Relations – Five Year Plans and Tamil Nadu – Irrigation – Agriculture – Industrial Development – Reservation Policy and Social Justice.

UNIT V Educational Growth – Developments in Information and Communication Technology – Growth of New Industries – Arts and Fine Arts.

Books for Reference:

1. Rajayyan, K. : A Real History of Tamil Nadu up to 2004 A.D.

2. Subramanian, N. : History of Tamil Nadu (Part. II)

3. Gopalakrishnan M.D : Periyar , Father of the Tamil Race

4. Sathianathier. R, : History of India, Vol. II

5. B.S. Baliga, : Studies in Madras Administration, 2 Vols.

6. Baker, C.J. : The Politics of South India

7. Venkatesan, G. : History of Modern Tamil Nadu from A.D.1600 – 2011

8. Nadarajan .C : Social History of Modern Tamil Nadu

9. Subramanian .N : History of Tamil Nadu A.D.1336 – 1984

10. Devanesan .A : History of Tamil Nadu up to 1995 A.D

11. Balasundaram .M : Kamaraj and his Secrets of Success

12. Veeramani.K : The History of the Struggle for Social Justice in Tamil Nadu

13. MohanRam .K

& Kalimuthu A.K : Tamizhagam – An Amazing People’s History

14. Nadarajan .C : Social History of Modern Tamil Nadu

15. Thandavan. R : Political Dynamics of AIADMK

16. Thandavan. R : J. Jayalalithaa: A Phenomenon

17. http://www.investingintamilnadu.com/tamilnadu/institutional_support/TIDCO.php

18. www.tn.gov.in/department

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER II CORE PAPER – VIII

HISTORY OF MODERN EUROPE (A.D.1815 – 1945)

(4 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• To understand the origin of the revolutionary thinking in modern Europe. • To study the causes and nature of various revolutions in Europe. • To give an understanding on the causes, course and results of two World Wars.

UNIT I Congress of – Holy Alliance – Concert of Europe – Metternich – Revolution of 1830 and 1848: Causes, Course and Effects – Third French Republic.

UNIT II Unification of Italy: Role of Cavour, Garibaldi, Mazzini and Victor Immanuel II

Unification of Germany- Bismarck - Domestic and Foreign Policy – Fall of Bismarck.

UNIT III Eastern Question – Causes for the First World War – Course – Results – Peace Treaties – League of Nations – Achievements – Failure.

UNIT IV The Russian Revolution (1917) – Rise of Dictatorship: Turkey – Mustafa Kemal Pasha – Fascism in Italy: Mussolini – Nazism in Germany: Adolf Hitler.

UNIT V

Second World War – Causes – Course and Results – Peace Treaties- San Francisco Conference – The Organisation: Organs and Achievements.

Books for Reference:

1. V.D. Mahajan : A History of Modern Europe since 1789

2. C.D. Hazen : Europe since 1815

3. C.J.H. Hayes : A Political and Social History of Modern Europe

4. C.D.M. Ketelbey : A Short History of Modern Europe – 1789 to Present

5. H.A.L. Fisher : History of Europe

6. B.V. Rao : History of Modern Europe

7. A.J. Grant : Europe in the 19th and 20th centuries

8. Marriot : Remaking of Europe

9. Gooch John : The Unification of Italy

10. H.S. Hughes : Contemporary Europe

11. https://www.britannica.com/topic/history-of-Europe

12. www.historyworld.net/wrldhis/plaintexthistories.asp?historyid=ab06

13. https://www.ancient.eu/europe/

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER II ELECTIVE PAPER – I EMPOWERMENT OF WOMEN IN INDIA (3 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 4 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• To evaluate the concept, importance and need for the empowerment of women. • To provide specialized knowledge to the students about the various strategies of women empowerment. • Mainstreaming a gender perspective in the development process.

UNIT I Women Studies : Nature, Scope and Significance – Concept and Meaning of Women Empowerment – Objectives and Need for Women’s Empowerment – Qualitative and Quantitative Indicators of Women Empowerment – Factors for Women Empowerment – Classification of Empowerment.

UNIT II Social Empowerment: Role of Education in Empowering Women – Recent Trends in Women’s Education – Impact of Education on Women Empowerment – Women and Health care Access.

UNIT III Economic Empowerment: Impact of Women’s Work on Family Income – Employment Generation for Women – Women in Self-help Groups – Emergence of Women Entrepreneurship – Impact of Globalization on Women Empowerment – Women and Technology.

UNIT IV

Political Empowerment: Political Status of Women in India – Need for Women Reservation Bill – Legal Empowerment: Indian Constitution and the Status of Women – Legal Enactments after Independence – Impact of the Legislations.

UNIT V Women under the Five Year Plans – National Policy for the Empowerment of Women – Developmental Schemes and Programmes for Women Empowerment – Welfare Measures for Women in Tamil Nadu – Role of NGOs towards Women Empowerment. Books for Reference:

1. Promilla Kapur : Empowering Indian Women

2. Geraldine Forbes : Women in Modern India

3. N.S. Nagar : Empowerment of Women

4. M. Raziya Parvin : Empowerment of Women: Strategies and Systems

for

Gender Justice

5. A.K. Pandey : Emerging Issues in the Empowerment of Women

6. Shailaja Nagendra : Women’s role in Modern World

7. Dr. Krishna Gupta : Empowerment of Women: Emerging Dimensions

8. M. Raziya Parvin : Socio-Economic Empowerment of Women:

Dimensions

and Strategies

9. www.indiacelebrating.com/social-issues/women-empowerment/

10. www.womenempowermentinindia.com/

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER II ELECTIVE PAPER – II

MODERN JOURNALISM – PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES

(3 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 4 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• To give an understanding of the principles of modern journalism. • To furnish the role of media in the development of society. • To provide specialized knowledge to the students about the types of journalism.

UNIT I Introduction to Journalism – Basic Concept – Definition – Nature and Scope – Journalism: Science and Art – Canons of Journalism – Types of Journalism. UNIT II History of Journalism – Brief History of the Press up to 1947 – Press Council – Press Laws – Defamation – Contempt of Court – Official Secrets Act – Freedom of Press in India - Prasar Bharathi. UNIT III

Reporting: Definition – Principles of Reporting – Components and Sources of News – News Value – News Agencies: World and India – Interview: Types of Interview – Reporting Crime News.

UNIT IV

Editing : Principles of Editing – Editing Techniques – News Editor – Sub-Editors – Proof Reading – Page Make up – Features – Editorial – Columns and Columnists – Letters to the Editor – Photo Journalism – Book Review.

UNIT V

Different forms of Writing: Features – News Structure – Types of Head-Body-Lead – Types of Headlines – Leading Newspapers in India: The Hindu, Times of India, Dinamani and Dinathanthi – Advertisements – Necessity and Kinds.

Books for Reference:

1. Ahuja B.N : Theory and Practice of Journalism.

2. Kamath. M.V. : Professional Journalism

3. Rangasamy Parthasarathy : Journalism in India.

4. Agarwal .S.K. : A Handbook of Journalism and Editorial Excellence

5. Ahuja. B.N : History of Press, Press Laws and

6. Natarajan .J : History of Indian Journalism

7. Barienjoy : A Guide of Journalism

8. Mehta .D.S : Mass Communication and Journalism in India

9. Pant N.C. : Modern Journalism: Principles and Practice

10. Tony Harcut : Journalism: Principles and Practices

11. maharajkrishanshah.blogspot.com/2014/.../history-of-journalism-in-india-modern.htm...

12. https://woman.thenest.com › Careers and › Work Life

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER II EXTRA DISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE PAPER – I

CHENNAI THROUGH THE AGES

(3 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 4 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• To bring out the importance of Chennai and its political, administrative, economic, social, literary, religious and architectural history from the earliest times. • A superficial study of the place, names of various urban and sub-urban settlements of the Chennai city with much historical insight.

UNIT I

Geographical Location of Chennai – Origin of Madras – Fort St. George – Madras under East India Company – The Antiquity of the City of Chennai – Its Socio-Economic and Cultural History.

UNIT II

Industrialization – Port Trust – Growth of Trade Union Movement – Development of Transport and Communication – Electricity – Medicine.

UNIT III

Education and its development during the British – Contribution of Christian Missionaries and Minorities - Development of Press and Film.

UNIT IV

Fine Arts, Music and Dance during the British rule – Kalakshetra, Lalit Kala Academy – Heritage Monuments and their Historical Background.

UNIT V

Changing Perspective of the City of Chennai – Its Developments.

Books for Reference:

1. Raja Raman. P : Chennai through the Ages

2. Muthiah. S : Madras Rediscovered

3. Muthiah. S. : Madras that is Chennai: Gateway of the South

4. Raman .K.V. : Early History of Madras Region

5. Love .H.D. : Vestiges of Old Madras 1640-1800

6. Srinivasachari .C.S. : History of the City of Madras

7. Venkatachalapathy A.R.: Chennai Not Madras: Perspectives on the City

8. Narasayya : Madarasapattinam (Tamil)

9. Wheeler J Talboys : Madras in the Olden Times

10. www.mapsofchennai.com/general-information/history-of-chennai.html

11. http://www.chennai.tn.nic.in/chndistprof.htm

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER III CORE PAPER – IX HISTORY OF CONTEMPORARY INDIA (A.D. 1947 – 2014)

(4 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• The course intends to enhance the students’ knowledge about the domestic policy of India since Independence to 2014. • The course helps to gain a deeper understanding about the various determinants of India’s foreign policy and India’s relations with other countries.

UNIT I

The Nehruvian Era: Economic Policy – Five Year Plans - Social Welfare Programmes - Foundations of Foreign Policy and Non-Alignment – Panchsheel – India and Common Wealth – India and UNO – – Tashkent Accord.

UNIT II

Era of Indira Gandhi: Domestic Policy – Declaration of Emergency – 20 Point Programme – Janata Revolution: – Morarji Desai – Resurgence of Indira Gandhi: Administrative Reforms. UNIT III

Rajiv Gandhi: Economic and Social Measures – New – National Front Government: V.P. Singh – Mandal Commission – P.V. Narashima Rao – New Economic Policies - United Front Government. UNIT IV

National Democratic Alliance: BJP – Vajpayee Administration – Manmohan Singh: Economic Reforms – Indo-US relations and Indo-Soviet relations – India’s Nuclear Policy NPT and CTBT. UNIT V

India’s Foreign Policy: Indo-China War 1962 – Indo-Pakistan Wars 1965, 1971, 1998 – Emergence of Bangladesh – Indo - Sri Lanka Accord – IPKF.

Books for Reference:

1. Bipin Chandra : Essays on Contemporary History of India

2. Bipin Chandra : India after Independence

3. Bhambhri .C.P. : Indian Politics since Independence

4. Dube. S.C. : Contemporary India and its Modernization

5. Desai .A.R. : Planning in India

6. Kuldip Nayar : India after Nehru

7. Ram Ahuja : Social Problems in India

8. Venkatesan. G. : History of Contemporary India

9. Guha RC : India after Gandhi

10. Lloyd Rudolph : In Pursuit of Lakshmi, The Political Economy of

the Indian State

11. www.pmindia.gov.in/en/

12. https://web.archive.org/web/20070219015332/http://www.ficci.com/international/countries/si

ngapore/singapore-commercialrelations.htm

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER III CORE PAPER – X HISTORIOGRAPHY AND HISTORICAL METHODS

(4 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• To equip and train the final year P.G. history students in the relevant research skills necessary for success in the Research work. • The aim of the paper is to inculcate the detailed knowledge of historiography and methods of history to the students.

UNIT I

Definition of History – Nature, Scope and Value of History – Kinds of History – Causation in History – History and its Auxiliary Sciences – History: Science or Art.

UNIT II

Indian Historiography: Ancient, Medieval and Modern – Nature of Historical Writings – Indian Historians: Bilhana, Kalhana, Alberuni, Barani, Romila Thapar, Irfan Habib, R.G. Bhandarkar, R.C. Dutt, K.A. Nilakanda Sastri, K.K. Pillai, R. Sathyanatha Aiyer, D.D. Kosambi.

UNIT III

Reasons for undertaking Research – Choice of Subject – Review of Literature – Objectivity and Bias in History – Qualitative and Quantitative techniques.

UNIT IV

Collection of Data – Primary and Secondary Sources – External Criticism and Internal Criticism.

UNIT V

Synthesis – Organizing Material – Writing of History – Footnotes – Bibliography Documentation – Report Writing.

Books for Reference:

1. B. Sheik Ali : History: Its Theory and Method

2. Anderson, Durston and Poole : Thesis and Assignment Writing

3. E.H. Carr : What is History?

4. R.G. Collingwood : The Idea of History

5. H.E. Markes : History of Historical Writing

6. K. Rajayyan : History: Its Theory and Method

7. N. Subramanian : Historiography

8. R.C. Majumdar : Recent Trends in Historiography

9. S. Manickam : Theory of History and Method of Research

10. G. Venkatesan : A Study of History

11. N. Rajendran : Varalattru Varaiviyal (Tamil)

12. Kathirvel : Historiography

13. https://www.britannica.com/topic/historiography/Methodology-of-historiography

14. https://study.com/academy/.../introduction-to-historiography-historical-methods.html

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER III CORE PAPER – XI

HISTORY OF SOUTH-EAST ASIA (A.D. 1900 – 2000)

(4 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• This subject will generate the interest of the students in South-East Asian History. • To analyze historically the rise of nationalism in South – East Asia. • To examine various trends in the shaping of South-East Asian history

UNIT I

Impact of Colonialism – British Burma since 1900 – Anti-Fascist People’s Freedom League – General Aung San – Burma after Independence – Ne Win.

UNIT II

Indo-China – French Imperialism – Nationalism in Indo-China – Geneva Conference – Laos – Cambodia – Vietnam – Ho Chi Minh – Indo-China after Second World War.

UNIT III

Indonesia – Nationalism in Indonesia – Indonesia after Independence – Bandung Conference – Sukarno – Guided Democracy – National Unity – Suharto.

UNIT IV

Siam – Siam in Transition – Phibun – Siam after the Second World War – Thailand – Noradum Sihanuk – Philippines Independence – Akino – Tourism Development.

UNIT V

Nationalism in Malaysia – Tunku Abdul Rahman – Malaysia after Independence – UMNO – Birth of Singapore – Lee Kuan Yew - Economic Growth – SEATO.

Books for Reference:

1. Clyde and Beers : The Far East

2. Paul Boxer : South East Asia

3. H.R. Cheeseman : Bibliography of Malaya

4. Christian J. Leroy : Modern Burma

5. Fifield : The Diplomacy of South-East Asia

6. B. Harrison : South East Asia – A Short History

7. D.G.E. Hall : History of South East Asia

8. W. Henderson : Southeast Asia : Problems of US Policy

9. Bruno Lasker : Peoples of South East Asia

10. V. Purcell : South and East Asia since A.D.1860

11. Harold Vinacke : A History of the Far East in Modern Times

12. N. Jayapalan : History of Modern Asia

13. John F Cady : South East Asia: Its Historical Development

14. https://www.britannica.com/topic/history-of-Southeast-Asia

15. www.historyworld.net/wrldhis/PlainTextHistories.asp?historyid=ac37

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER III ELECTIVE PAPER – III PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION (3 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 4 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• To give an overview regarding the principles of organization and administration. • To provide a clear understanding regarding the functions of Indian administration. • The course gives an opportunity to the students to understand the structure and functions of governmental machinery in India.

UNIT I Meaning of Public Administration – Public Administration and its relations with other Social Sciences – Organization: Bases and Principles of Organization – Hierarchy – Span of Control – Unity of Command – Centralization and Decentralization – Nature and Scope of Indian Administration.

UNIT II Central Secretariat: Composition, Structure and Functions – State Secretariat: Composition, Structure and Functions – Chief Secretary: Powers and Functions

UNIT III Cabinet Secretariat: Role and Functions – Prime Minister’s Office: Composition and Functions – Cabinet Committees – Planning Commission and NITI Aayog – Major Ministries: Home Affairs, External, Finance, Defence.

UNIT IV Civil Services in India: Recruitment to All India and Central Services – Systems of Recruitment – Rationale of All-India Services – Powers and Functions of UPSC – Staff Selection Commission – State Public Service Commission – Training of Civil Servants.

UNIT V Concept of Budget: Concept and Forms – Formulation and Enactment – Execution of Budget – and Auditing in India: Role of Comptroller and Auditor General – Duties and Powers – Prevention of Corruption – Institution of Lok Pal.

Books for Reference:

1. Amreshwar Avasthi & S. Maheshwari: Public Administration

2. Rumki Basu : Public Administration - Concepts &Theories

3. Bhagwan & Vidya Bhusan : Public Administration

4. Lakshmi Kant : Public Administration

5. Sadhana Thakur : Public Administration

6. P.D. Sharma & B.M. Sharma : Public Administration – Retrospect

&Prospect

7. P. Gomathinayagam & Dinakaran : Public Administration (Tamil)

8. https://www.managementstudyguide.com/what-is-public-administration.htm

9. https://learn.org/articles/What_is_Public_Administration.html

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER III ELECTIVE PAPER – IV

SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMMES IN INDIA

(3 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 4 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• To familiarize the students regarding the social and economic development programmes in India after Independence. • The course gives an opportunity to the students to understand the functions of important governmental machinery in India that would promote the social welfare of Indian citizens. • It provides a good scope to the students towards the preparation of various competitive examinations.

UNIT I Role of Agriculture in Indian Economy: Green Revolution – Indian Agriculture under the Five Year Plans – Second Green Revolution – National Agricultural Policy – ICAR – NABARD – Road Ahead. UNIT II Role of Industries in Economic Development: Cottage, Small Scale and Large Scale Industries – Need for Industrial Development – Indian Industries under Five Year Plan Period – New Industrial Policy – Appraisal of Industrial Policy. UNIT III Rural and Urban Development: Meaning and Essential Aspects – Important Rural and Urban Development Programmes – Rural Transformation by Technology – Demographic Dimension of Urbanization in India – Problems of Urbanization and Solutions. UNIT IV Health Sector in India: Status of Health in India after Independence – Family Welfare and Family Planning – Health Development Programmes in India – Impact of Technology on Health – Importance of Women’s Health – Children Health Related Programmes – Sustaining Transformation UNIT V : Development of Education after Independence – Measures for the Eradication of Literacy – National Literacy Mission – Issues Related to Education – Education for All – Growth of Higher Education in India. Books for Reference:

1. Agarwal. A.N. : Indian Economy– Problems of Development& Planning 2. Desai .A.R. : Planning in India 3. Dutt and Sundaram : Indian Economy 4. Jayaram. N. : in India 5. Promilla Kapur : Empowering Indian Women

6. A.K. Pandey : Emerging Issues in the Empowerment of Women 7. Bipin Chandra : Essays on Contemporary History of India 8. Bhambhri .C.P. : Indian Politics since Independence 9. Dube. S.C. : Contemporary India and its Modernization 10. Kuldip Nayar : India after Nehru 11. Ram Ahuja : Social Problems in India 12. Venkatesan. G. : History of Contemporary India 13. Shankar Rao. C.N. : Sociology of Indian Society 14. India Year Book 2018 15. India Book of the Year 2002 – Encyclopaedia Britannica and The Hindu 16. Manorama Year Book 2018 17. https://www.india.gov.in/topics/social-development 18. www.dst.gov.in/scientific-programmes/st-and-socio-economic-development 19. socialjustice.nic.in/SchemeList/index?mid=24541

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER III EXTRA DISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE PAPER – II

TOURISM AND TRAVEL MANAGEMENT

(3 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 4 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• To get acquainted with the importance of tourism and travel business. • To provide an understanding of the historical perspective and recent developments in tourism. • To make the students to know the various organizations that promote tourism and the strategies of tourism marketing.

UNIT I Introduction to Travel and Tourism: Historical Perspective and Recent Developments – The Booming Tourism Industry in India – Objectives of Travelling – Business Status of Tourism – Mass Travel and its Aspects – International Mass Tourism. UNIT II Management of Travel and Tourism: Indian Travel and Tourism – Travel Agent: Duties and Responsibilities – Modes of Travelling: Airlines, Railways, Ocean Liners and Cruising and Motor Coach Services. UNIT III Tourism Organisations: National Tourism Organisations: ITDC, TTDC, ASI and TFCI – International Tourism Organisations: IATA, WTO, UFTAA, ICAO, PATA, FHRAI. UNIT IV Challenges and Opportunities in different forms of Tourism: Heritage Tourism – Medical Tourism – Nature based Tourism – Niche Tourism – Economic Conservation of Tourism – Impacts of Tourism, Corporate in the Tourism Industry. UNIT V Tourism Marketing: Marketing Plans for Tourism and Hospitality – Behaviour for Tourism and Hospitality – Emerging Dimensions: Tourism and Information Management.

Books for Reference:

1. A.K. Bhatia : Tourism Development: Principles & Practices

2. S.K. Gupta : Travel and Tourism Management

3. Douglas Foster : Tourism and Travel Management

4. V.K. Gupta : Tourism in India

5. Anand Singh : Tourism in Ancient India

6. Stephen Ball, Susan : Contemporary Hospitality and Tourism

7. Thangamani : Sutrulaviyal (Tamil)

8. https://www.edx.org/course/tourism-travel-management-uqx-tourismx

9. www.iittmb.in/

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER IV CORE PAPER – XII INDIAN CONSTITUTION (4 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives: • To provide an in depth knowledge on Indian citizen’s Rights and Duties. • To make them aware of the constitutional laws. • To make learner’s proficient regarding the functioning of Government in India. • This paper helps the students to write all the competitive examinations as well as to develop their General Knowledge.

UNIT I Historical Background – Sources of the Indian Constitution – Making of the Constitution – Preamble – Main Features of the Indian Constitution – Fundamental Rights – Fundamental Duties – Directive Principles of State Policy.

UNIT II Union Executive: President – Election of the President – Powers and Functions – Vice- President – Cabinet: Prime Minister: Powers and Functions – Parliament: Composition, Powers and Functions of Rajya Sabha and Lok Sabha – Judiciary – Public Services – Emergency – Amendments.

UNIT III

State Executive: Governor – Constitutional Status, Powers and Functions – State Cabinet – Legislature: Composition and Functions – Chief Minister: Powers and Functions – High Courts.

UNIT IV Indian Federalism: Centre and State Relations – Legislative aspects – Union List, State List, Concurrent List – Administrative aspects – Directions to the State Governments – Disputes, Inter–State Council – National Development Council – NITI Aayog – Finance Commission.

UNIT V Local Governments in India: Urban and Rural – Development of Local Bodies – Objectives of Panchayati Raj – Political Parties – Election Commission: Powers and Functions – Electronic Voting Machine.

Books for Reference:

1. Basu, D.D. : An Introduction to Indian Constitution 2. Pylee M.V. : Constitutional Government in India 3. Basu, D.D. : Comparative Federalism 4. Pylee M.V. : India’s Constitution 5. Basu D.D. : Constitutional Law of India 6. Kapoor A.C. : Select Constitutions 7. Philips A.J. and Shivaji Rao R.H. : Indian Government and Politics 8. Siwachi : Dynamics of Politics and Government 9. Agarwal R.C : National Movement and Constitutional Development in India 10. Vidyasagar : Constitution of India 11. Shukla V. N. : Constitution of India 12. Khanna V.N. : Constitution and Government of India 13. Grover : Political System and Constitution of India 14. lawmin.nic.in/olwing/coi/coi-english/coi-indexenglish.htm 15. https://www.india.gov.in/my-government/constitution-india

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER IV CORE PAPER – XIII

HISTORY OF U.S.A. (A.D. 1945 – 2017)

(4 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• This subject will generate the interest of the students in American History. • It help them to comprehend the developments that are taking place in the contemporary in a broad historical prospective.

UNIT I

The Cold War: Strategy of “Containment” – Harry S. Truman – Fair Deal – Truman Doctrine – Marshall Plan – Point Four Programme - Eisenhower – Suez Canal Crisis – Anti-Communist Crusade - Korean War - Cuban Crisis.

UNIT II

John F. Kennedy – New Frontier Policy - Civil Rights Movement – Martin Luther King - L.B. Johnson – Great Society - Foreign Policy.

UNIT III

Richard Nixon – Watergate Scandal - Ping Pong Diplomacy – Man on the Moon – Super Power Rivalry – Vietnam War.

UNIT IV

America under Jimmy Carter – Domestic and Foreign Policy – Détente: Strategic Arms Limitation Treaty [SALT-II] – Ronald Reagan, Escalation of the Cold War – US-Soviet Relations – George Bush Senior – End of Cold War.

UNIT V

Bill Clinton – USA as a Super Power – Domestic and Foreign Policy – George Bush Junior – Barack Obama: Domestic and Foreign Policy.

Books for Reference:

1. Parks H.B : The United States of America

2. Hill C.P : The History of United States of America

3. K. Rajayyan : History of USA

4. William Miller : A New History of United States of America

5. Somerwell D.C : History of USA up to 1941

6. James T. Patterson : America in the Twentieth Century: A History

7. James T. Patterson : America, Past & Present

8. LLC. Henretta : America, Concise History

9. An Outline of American History, USIS Publications

10. Philips Jenkins : A History of the USA

11. N. Subramaniam : A History of USA

12. Nambi Arooran : History of USA (Tamil)

13. https://www.usa.gov/history

14. https://www.britannica.com/topic/history-of-United-States

15. www.u-s-history.com/

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER IV CORE PAPER – XIV

INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS AND POLITICS

(4 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives:

• To make the students analyze the changes and developments at world level and their implications for international relations.

• To discuss and explain to the students about the Globalization and its impact.

UNIT I

Meaning and Definition of International Relations – Nature of Power Politics – Theoretical Approaches to International Relations – Diplomacy – Peace and Conflict Studies: History of Peace Ideas and Movements – Dominant Concepts of Security.

UNIT II

Achievements of the UNO – Post Cold War International System – Uni-Polarism and Multi-Polarism – Regional Organizations and their role – NAM, SAARC, ASEAN, OAU, UAS and EU.

UNIT III

Racialism and Resurgence of African and Asian countries – Neo- Colonialism – Rise of the Third World – Its aim, role and impact.

UNIT IV

Oil Diplomacy and the Middle East – Emergence of the Fourth World – Gulf War – Present International Economic Order – North South Conflict – New International Economic Order

UNIT V

Globalization – its positive and negative impact – Rise of Terrorism – Causes - Terrorist Organizations – Sept 11th attack – War on Afghanistan – 26/11 attack – Environment and International Relations.

Books for Reference:

1. Prakash Chander, Prem Arora : Comparative Politics & International Relations

2. A.W. Zimmermann : International Relations

3. Vinay Kumar Malhotra : International Relations

4. Vinod Saighal : Dealing with Global Terrorism

5. R.S. Chaurasia : History of Middle East

6. Stephonic Lawson : International Relations and Politics

7. J.C. Johari : International Relations and Politics

8. Palmer and Perkins : International Relations

9. S.P. Nanda : History of Modern World

10. Peu Ghosh : International Relations

11. Paul Wilkinson : International Relations

12. K.L. Khurana : World History

13. https://www.hsps.cam.ac.uk/prospective-students/subjects/polis

14. www.un.org/en/

.

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER IV CORE PAPER – XV

PROJECT WORK & VIVA-VOCE

(4 CREDITS)

Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives: • To give orientation to the final year P.G. history students in the basic research skills necessary for success in their research education. • The aim of this paper is to inculcate the practical knowledge of research and methods of history to the students. • The title for the project can be selected by the student with consent of the respective Guide. • Project work titles would be based on the political, social, economic and cultural aspects of the society. • The project will be evaluated by External Examiner and Viva-Voce will be conducted for the same as well.

STRUCTURE OF THE PROJECT WORK The following structure of project work should be followed to maintain the uniformity in preparation and presentation

Chapter I : Introduction

Chapter II : Research Methodology

Chapter III : Literature Review

Chapter IV : Data Presentation and Data Analysis

Chapter V : Conclusion

Bibliography

Appendix

M.A. HISTORY SYLLABUS SEMESTER IV ELECTIVE PAPER – V STUDIES IN HUMAN RIGHTS (3 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 75 Total Hours : 6 hours per week Internal Marks: 25 Objectives: • To impart knowledge to the students about the civil, political, economic, social and cultural rights.

• To make them acquainted with knowledge about the problems of women, children, dalits, tribals and other disadvantaged groups.

• The efforts of governmental and non-governmental at national and international levels to protect the Human rights are also highlighted in the study. UNIT I Introduction to Human Rights: Definition and Characteristics – Nature – Theories – Classification and Scope of Human Rights – Historical Development of Human Rights: Ancient, Medieval and Modern periods. UNIT II The Universal Declaration of Human Rights – Preamble – The International Covenants on Civil and Political Rights – The International Covenants on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights – Optional Protocols I & II – Vienna Declaration – Mexico Declaration on Human Rights – Helsinki Declaration. UNIT III India and Human Rights: Indian Constitutional Guarantee on Human Rights – Fundamental Rights of Indian Constitution – Directive Principles of State Policy – Role of Judiciary – National and State Human Rights Commissions – Right to Constitutional Remedies.

UNIT IV Contemporary Challenges in Human rights – Violation of the Rights of Women and Children Juvenile Delinquency – Dalits and Tribals – Refugees – Displaced Persons – Transgender – Prisoners –– Bonded Labour – Capital Punishment – Custodial Torture. UNIT V Organization for Human Rights: International, National, State Level Organizations – Role of UNO – Amnesty International – International Committee of Red Cross – Asia Watch and PUCL – International Commission of Jurist – Human Rights Watch – Role of NGO’s. Books for Reference: 1. Alston Philip : The United Nations and Human Rights 2. Desai, A.R. : Violation of Democratic Rights in India 3. Gokulesh Sharma : Human Rights and Legal Remedies 4. Micheline Ishay : The History of Human Rights 5. Kevalramani G.S : Child Abuse 6. Khanna S.K. : Women and Human Rights 7. Pachauri S.K. : Children and Human Rights 8. Ram Ahuja : Rights of Women 10. Sankar Sen : Human Rights 11. Sankar Sen : Human Rights in Developing Countries 12. Tripathy S.N. : in India 13. www.un.org/en/universal-declaration-human-rights/ 14. www.un.org/en/sections/issues-depth/human-rights/

M.Phil HISTORY

FRAMEWORK OF THE SYLLABUS

For the Students admitted from 2018 – 2019

Course Paper Title of the Course Course Total Marks No. Code

Core I Research Methodology 100

Core II Indian National Movement and Constitutional 100 Development

Optional III Social and Cultural History of Modern 100

Tamil Nadu

- IV Dissertation & Viva-voce 100

Controller of Examinations Head of the Department - History

M.Phil. HISTORY SYLLABUS CORE PAPER – I RESEARCH METHODOLOGY (5 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 100 Objectives:

• To familiarize the students with the basic knowledge of social research and select different methods and techniques for the data collection. • To make them understand the formulation of their research topic for undertaking their research.

UNIT I

Meaning, Objectives and Types of Research – Purpose of Research – Types of Research – Problems of Objectivity and Subjectivity in Social Research – Research Ethics - Formulating a Specific Research Problem – Determining the Feasibility of the Dissertation.

UNIT II

Research Design – Significance of Research Design – Features of Good Research Design – Important Concepts relating to Research Design – Various types of Research Design – Formulating Hypothesis – Types of Hypothesis – Characteristics of a Usable Hypothesis.

UNIT III

Sampling – Need for Sampling in Social Research – Steps in Sampling Design – Characteristics of Universe – Types of Sampling – Scaling Techniques – Measurement in Research – Tests of Sound Measurement: Validity, Reliability and Practicality.

UNIT IV

Collection of Data – Techniques of Data Collection: Case Study Method, Observation Method – Participation Method, Interviews – Types of Interviews – Significance of Interviews – Constructing a Questionnaire – Mailed Questionnaire – Schedule – Secondary Data Collection Sources.

UNIT V

Statistical Analysis of Data – Interpretation of Data – Report Writing – Steps in Writing Report – The Style of the Report – Final Report.

Books for Reference:

1. Claire, Lawrence & Cook : Research Methods in Social Science

2. William Goode and Paul Hatt : Methods in Social Research

3. Sheikh Ali, B. : History: Its Theory and Method

4. Parsons, C.J. : Theses and Project Work: A Guide to

Research

5. Nagarajan & Kaliyaperumal : Research Methodology

6. Cauvery, Sudha, Girija & Menaksi : Research Methodology

7. Kothari, C.R. : Research Methodology: Methods &

Techniques

8. https://www.britannica.com/topic/historiography/Methodology-of-historiography

9. https://study.com/academy/.../introduction-to-historiography-historical-methods.html

M.Phil. HISTORY SYLLABUS CORE PAPER – II INDIAN NATIONAL MOVEMENT AND CONSTITUTIONAL DEVELOPMENT (5 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 100

Objectives:

• To give an understanding about the freedom movement in India in depth. • It helps the students to prepare themselves to write all the competitive examinations as well as to develop their General Knowledge.

UNIT I Rise of Indian Nationalism: Social and Economic Bases of Nationalism – and Programmes of the Indian National Congress – Moderate Phase – Trends in Swadeshi Movement – Partition of Bengal – Muslim League – Surat Split – Morley-Minto Reforms of 1909.

UNIT II Rise of Extremism: Ideologies and Programmes of Indian Revolutionaries in India and Abroad – Home Rule Movement – Tilak and Annie Besant – Ghadar Movement – Lucknow Pact of 1916 – Impact of the First World War – Rowlatt Act and Jallianwalla Bagh Massacre – Montague – Chelmsford Reforms of 1919.

UNIT III

Gandhian Phase: Non-Cooperation Movement – Khilafat Movement – Swarajist Party – Simon Commission – Nehru Report – Lahore Congress – Jinnah’s Fourteen Points.

UNIT IV

The Civil Disobedience Movement: Salt Satyagraha – Round Table Conference – Communal Award – Poona Pact – Government of India Act of 1935 – Impact of the Second World War – Subash Chandra Bose and the INA – Jinnah and Muslim Separatism – August Offer.

UNIT V

Individual Satyagraha: Cripps Mission – Quit India Movement – Congress and Muslim League efforts for Reconciliation – C.R. Formula – Wavell Plan – Simla Conference – Cabinet Mission – Direct Action Day – Interim Government – Mountbatten Plan and the Indian Independence Act of 1947. Books for Reference:

1. Percival Spear : The Oxford History of Modern India

2. Bipan Chandra : India’s Struggle for Independence

3. Sumit Sarkar : Modern India 1885 – 1947

4. R.C. Majumdar : History of Freedom Movement in India

5. Ramana Rao : A Short History of Indian National Congress

6. S. Chowdhury : Growth of Nationalism in India 1919 – 1929, Vol.

II

7. G.S. Chhabra : Advanced Study in the History of Modern India

8. Jyoti Prasad & Satish Kumar : The Indian National Movement

9. B.L. Grover and S. Grover : Evolution of Indian Constitution and Freedom

Struggle

10. A.C. Kapur : Indian Constitutional Development

11. V.D. Mahajan : Indian Freedom Struggle

12. S.N. Sen : History of Freedom Movement in India

13. R.C. Agarwal : Indian National Movement and Constitutional

Development

14. https://archive.india.gov.in/knowindia/culture_heritage.php?id=4

15. http://www.historydiscussion.net/history-of-india/history-of-freedom-struggle-in-india/3188

16. www.pmindia.gov.in/en/

M.Phil. HISTORY SYLLABUS INTERNAL PAPER

SOCIAL AND CULTURAL HISTORY OF MODERN TAMILNADU

(5 CREDITS) Subject Code : External Marks: 100

Objectives:

• To provide an understanding about the importance of Tamil society. • To enable the students to perceive the nature of Tamil society during modern period. • To highlight the social and cultural changes in modern Tamil Nadu over the years.

UNIT I Tamil Society and Modernization: Emergence of Modern Tamil Society – Tamil Society under British Imperialism – Institutionalization of Religious Orders – Religious Conversions and Socio-Cultural Crisis.

UNIT II Religion in Modern Tamil Nadu: Spread of Christianity and its contributions – Impact of Islam – Hindu Reform Movement – Secularism.

UNIT III Education in Modern Tamil Nadu: Introduction of Western Education – Contribution of Christian Missionaries – Higher Education – Professional Education – Educational Policy – Development of Science and Technology.

UNIT IV Tamil Renaissance: Emergence of Print Culture and the Proliferation of Linguistic Consciousness – Consolidation of Caste and Religious Identities and the Hindu Revivalism – Social Reform Movements – Self-Respect Movement – Women Movements in Tamil Nadu.

UNIT V Nationalist Upsurge – Social Legislations – Language as Ideology and Linguistic Reorganization – Politics for Language – Literary Traditions – Development of Literature – Arts – Fine Arts in Modern Tamil Nadu.

Books for Reference:

1. V.M. Krishnamoorthy : Topics in South Indian History

2. David Arnold : Congress in Tamil Nadu

3. Eugene Irshchick : Politics and Social Conflict in South India:

The

Non-Brahmin Movement and Tamil

Separatism, 1916 - 1929

4. Barnett : Politics of Cultural Nationalism

5. Theodore Baskaran : The Message Bearers: The Nationalist

Policies

and the Entertainment Media in South India

6. Nambi Arooran : Tamil Renaissance and Dravidian

Nationalism,

1905-1944

7. Charles Ryerson : Regionalism and Religion: the Tamil

Renaissance and Popular Hinduism

8. David Washbrook : The Emergence of Provincial Politics

9. R. Nagaswamy : Studies in South Indian History and Culture

10. C.S. Srinivasachari : Social and Religious Movements in 19th

century

11. R. Hardgrave : The Dravidian Movement

12. S. Sathianadhan : History of Education in the Madras

Presidency

13. R. Suntharalingam : Politics and Nationalist Awakening in South

India

14. P. Rajaraman : The Justice Party: A Historical Perspective,

1916-1937

15. https://web.archive.org/web/20061116152002/http://www.ifpindia.org/Historical-Atlas-

of-South-India-Timeline.html

16. http://www.tamilselvi.com/history.htm

M.Phil. HISTORY SYLLABUS PAPER – IV

DISSERTATION & VIVA-VOCE

Subject Code : External Marks: 100 Objectives: • To equip the M.Phil. degree students in the research skills necessary for success in their research education. • The aim of this paper is to inculcate the practical knowledge of research methodology and methods of doing social research to the students. • The title for the project can be selected by the student or it can be selected with consent of the respective Guide allotted to each student in the Department. • Dissertation titles would be based on the political, social, economic and cultural aspects of the society. • The dissertation will be evaluated by External Examiner and Viva-Voce will be conducted for the same as well.

STRUCTURE OF THE DISSERTATION The following structure of dissertation should be followed to maintain the uniformity in preparation and presentation

Chapter I : Introduction

Chapter II : Research Methodology

Chapter III : Literature Review

Chapter IV : Data Presentation, Analysis and Interpretation

Chapter V : Conclusion

If required more chapters can be added.

Bibliography

Appendix

DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY

M.A SYLLABUS FROM THE ACADEMIC YEAR 2018 - 2019

Sem Paper Title of the Course Subject UE IA Total C No Code

I I Principles of Sociology 75 25 100 4

II Classical Sociological Theory 75 25 100 4

III Indian Social Problems 75 25 100 4

IV Indian Society 75 25 100 4

V Rural Sociology 75 25 100 4

Soft Skill 2

II VI Contemporary Sociological Theory - I 75 25 100 4

VII Social Movements in India 75 25 100 4

VIII Developmental Sociology 75 25 100 4

IX ELECTIVE – I Sociology of Health 75 25 100 3

X ELECTIVE – II Development 75 25 100 3 Programmes in India

XI E D E – I Population Education and 75 25 100 3 Family Welfare

Soft Skill 2

Summer Internship 2

III XII Contemporary Sociological Theory II 75 25 100 4

XIII Neo Functionalism and Neo- Marxism 75 25 100 4

XIV Research Methodology and Statistics 75 25 100 4

XV ELECTIVE – III Sociology of 75 25 100 3 Marginalised Communities

XVI ELECTIVE – IV Environmental Sociology 75 25 100 3

XVII E D E – II Information Technology and 75 25 100 3 Society

IV XVIII Contemporary Sociological Theory III 75 25 100 4

XIX Urban Sociology 75 25 100 4

XX Industrial Sociology 75 25 100 4

XXI Dissertation and Viva 75 25 100 4

XXII ELECTIVE – V Gender and Society 75 25 100 3

Controller of Examination Signature of H.O.D

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY

MINUTES OF THE POST GRADUATION BOARD OF STUDIES

The Board of Studies Meeting for the Post Graduate Course (P.G.) has held on 28.2.2018 at 11.00 a.m. in the Department of Sociology. The Members of the Board of Studies have accepted the changes made in the course content. It will help the students to study sociology with proper understanding to gain deep knowledge on the subjects related to sociology. Members of Board of Studies 1. Dr. Sasitha University Nominee Associate Professor and Head

Department of Sociology Stella Mary’s College Chennai

2. Dr. Kumar Subject Expert Associate Professor and Head Department of Sociology New College, Chennai

2. Dr. M. Thamilarasan Subject Expert Associate Professor and Head i/c Department of Sociology University of Madras Chennai

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY DEPARTMENT MEMBERS FOR BOARD OF STUDIES

1. Dr. S. Sakthi Associate Professor and Head

2. Dr. S. Kalavathi Associate Professor

3. Dr. V. Jaisee Geetha Assistant Professor

4. Mrs. A. Bhanu Gayatri Devi Assistant Professor

5. Dr. R. Malarvizhi Assistant Professor

6. Mrs. G. Suguna Assistant Professor

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY

CHANGES MADE IN THE COURSE DURING THE ACADEMIC YEAR FROM 2018

The Board of Studies Meeting for the Post Graduate Course (P.G.) has held on 28.2.2018 at 11.00 a.m. in the Department of Sociology. The committee revised the Syllabus of M.A. (Sociology) and the following changes were made. 1. Contemporary Sociological Theory is divided in to three sections and incorporated in second, third and fourth semester 2. The paper on Urban Sociology is modified in order to meet the changing needs 3. The papers on Field Work in Sociology and NGO Management and Development are removed from the course. Instead of these papers the papers on Neo Functionalism and Neo-Marxism and Contemporary Sociological Theory – III is incorporated in 3rd and 4th semesters. 4. The Core paper – Development Programmes in India is converted into Elective paper 5. Appropriate changes are made in the paper Sociology of Health. Changes are also made in paper Industrial Sociology.

The following members were present for Board of studies on 28.2.2018 1. Dr. Sasitha University Nominee Associate Professor and Head Department of Sociology Stella Mary’s College, Chennai

2. Dr. Vasantha Kumar Subject Expert Associate Professor and Head Department of Sociology New College,Chennai

3. Dr. M. Thamilarasan Subject Expert Associate Professor and Head i/c Department of Sociology University of Madras, Chennai

1. Dr. S. Sakthi Internal Member Associate Professor and Head

2. Dr. S. Kalavathi Internal Member Associate Professor

3. Dr. V. Jaisee Geetha Internal Member Assistant Professor

4. Mrs. A. Bhanu Gayatri Devi Internal Member Assistant Professor

5. Dr. R. Malarvizhi Internal Member Assistant Professor

6. Mrs. G. Suguna Internal Member Assistant Professor

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR PG COURSES

Time Total Marks Total Number of Units

3 Hours 75 5

Question paper pattern : (Without omitting any unit) Section – A Answer All the Questions: (5 questions, one from each unit without choice) (5 x 2 = 10) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Section – B Answer all the questions (2 questions from each unit with either or choice) (5 x 4 = 20) 6. a (OR) b 7. a (OR) b 8. a (OR) b 9. a (OR) b 10. a (OR) b Section – C Answer any THREE questions (3 questions to be answered out of 5 questions. One question from each unit). (15 x 3 = 45) 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

PRINCIPLES OF SOCIOLOGY Paper : 1 (Semester – I) CODE Objectives: 1. To introduce the concept of sociology 2. To create interest to observe the perceptive of sociological concept in their surrounding UNIT 1: ORIGIN AND DEVELOPMENT OF SOCIOLOGY 1. Social and intellectual forces contributing to the development of sociology 2. Sociology as a Science: Nature and Scope of the subject and comparison with other social sciences: History, Economics, Psychology, Political Science 3. Major sociological perspectives: Functionalist perspectives, Conflict perspectives, Interactionist perspectives 4. The Uses of Sociology: Sociology and social problems – Sociology and Social Change – Sociology and Social Policy and Action – Sociology and Development – Sociology and Profession

UNIT 2: BASIC CONCEPTS IN SOCIOLOGY 1. Society: Definition and Characteristics 2. Community: Definition and Characteristics 3. Social groups: Definitions, Characteristics and Types 4. Social Control: Definition and types of Social Control – Conformity and Deviance 5. Social Structure: Meaning – Status and role, their relationship – Multiple roles – Role set – Status sequence and Role Conflict.

UNIT 3: SOCIALIZATION AND SOCIAL AND CULTURAL PROCESSES 1. Socialization: Stages and Agencies of Socialization. 2.Social Processes: Co-operation, Accommodation, Assimilation, Competition and Conflict 3.Social Change: Evolution, Progression and Deterioration- Factors of Social Change- Biological, Physical and Cultural. 4. Culture: Meaning and Characteristics and functions – Types of Culture – Norms, Values, Cultural Variation, Ethnocentrism, Cultural Relativism

UNIT 4: SOCIAL INSTITUTIONS 1. Marriage- Monogamy, Polygamy, Polygyny, Polyandry, Hypergamy, Hypogamy, Endogamy, Exogamy, Levirate, Sorrorate. 2. Rules of Residence: Patrilocal, Matrilocal, Avanculocal, Neo-local, Family: Joint Family, Nuclear Family, Extended Family – inter and intra generational conflict 3. Economy: Production Relation- Division of Labour- Concept of Class Distribution 4. Polity: Government – State and Nation- Power, Electoral System, Voting. 5. Religion: Monotheism, Polytheism, Animism, Major Gods and Goddesses, Village Level Deities–Ancestral worship (Family level), Individual Level Deities.

UNIT 5: SOCIAL STRATIFICATION 1. Race- Classification- Negroid, Australoid, Mangoloid, Xanthoclaroid, Melanochroid, Races in India- Aryan and Dravidian 2. Caste: Varna System- Brahmin, Kshatriya, Vaishya, Shutra. 3. Class- Owners, Workers, Upper, Middle, Lower Classes- Co-existence of Caste and Class, Class Consciousness. 4. Gender- Concept of - Feminism- - - – Marxist Socialist feminism - Empowerment of Women- Social, Economic and Political. References : ▪ Gelles J. Richard, Ann Levine, Sociology- An Introduction, Mc Graw Hill Company, Singapore, 1995. ▪ Leonard Broom, Principles of Sociology, Media Promoters and Publication Pvt. Ltd., Bombay, 1993. ▪ Ogburn and Nimkaff, A Handbook of Sociology, Eurasia Publication House, New Delhi, 1966. ▪ Gisbert, Pavscal, Fundamentals of Sociology, Orient Longman, Bombay, 193. ▪ Goldthorpe J.K., An Introduction to Sociology, Cambridge University press, 1985. ▪ Sharma, K.L., Reconceptualising Caste, Class & Tribe, Rawat Publications, Jaipur, 2001.

CLASSICAL SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY Paper :2 (Semester – I) CODE Objectives: 1. To introduce the pioneer of Sociological thinkers 2. To inculcate the knowledge on the development of sociology

UNIT 1 : AUGUST COMTE 1. Introduction: Meaning of classical sociological theory 2. The Law of Human Progress- 3. Hierarchy of Sciences- Social 4. Social Statics and Social Dynamics

UNIT 2 : HERBERT SPENCER 1. Evolutionary Theory 2. Organismic Analogy

UNIT 3: EMILE DURKHEIM

1. Methodology of Social Sciences 2. Sociology of Religion- 3. Theory of Suicide- 4. Division of Labour- 5. Theory of Anomie

UNIT 4: KARL MARX

1. Historical Materialism 2. Class Struggle 3. Theory of Alienation 4. Theory of Social Change

UNIT 5 : MAX WEBER 1. Methodology of social sciences 2. Ideal Type 3. Types of Authority

4. Class, Status and Power 4. Bureaucracy References:

▪ Abraham, Francis, Modern Sociological Theory. ▪ Coser, Lewis A and B. Rosenberg, Sociological Theory, Macmillan Publication, New York, 1997. ▪ Fletcher, Ronald, The Making of Sociology, Vol.I, Rawat Publication, New Delhi, 1971. ▪ Haralambas, M. and R.M. Heald, Sociology: Themes and Perspectives, Oxford University Press, New Delhi,1980. ▪ Nisbet R., Sociological Tradition, Basic Book, New York, 1956. ▪ Turner, Bryan. S (ed)., The Black Well Companion to Social Theory, Oxford & Cambridge, USA.

INDIAN SOCIAL PROBLEMS Paper :3 (Semester – I)

CODE: Objectives: 1. To make the student to aware of Indian Social problems and its implication in the society. 2. To motivate the students to work UNIT 1: SOCIAL PROBLEMS 1. Definition and characteristics of social problems 2. Social disorganization- characteristics of social disorganization- causes for social disorganization- 3. Difference between social problem and social disorganization 4. Approaches to social problems: Deviance- Labeling - Subculture. UNIT 2: MAJOR SOCIAL PROBLEMS 1. Poverty- causes-consequences-remedial measures 2. Unemployment -types- causes-consequences-remedial measures 3. Population: Over population, High Infant and Maternal mortality, low sex ratio 4. Illiteracy- causes-consequences-remedial measures.

UNIT 3: SOCIO CULTURAL PROBLEMS 1. AIDS- causes-consequences- remedial measures 2. Alcoholisms and Drug addiction- causes-consequences- remedial measures 3. Prostitution - causes-consequences- remedial measures 4. Beggary- causes-consequences- remedial measures UNIT 4: PROBLEMS OF VULNERABLE GROUPS 1. Children: Child marriage- female infanticide- sex selective abortion 2. Women: Dowry deaths- Sexual Abuse – Domestic violence 3. Aged: Emotional and psycho social problems

UNIT 5: POLICIES FOR PREVENTION AND REHABILITATION WELFARE FOR WOMEN

1. Child welfare: Legal Measures, Government Policies and programmes

2. Youth welfare: Employment generation programmes, Government welfare schemes for education

3. Welfare of the aged and disabled: Social security for the aged and senior citizen rights, Old age homes

Reference ✓ Ahuja Ram, Crime against Women, Rawat Publications, Jaipur, 1987. ✓ Attachand, Poverty and Underdevelopment, Gian Publishing House, Delhi, 1987. ✓ Prasad, Population Growth and Child Labour, Kanishka Publishers distributors, New Delhi, 2001. ✓ Bhattacharya, S.K., Social Problems in India, Regency Publications, New Delhi, 1994. ✓ Kattakayam and Vadackumchery, Crime and Society, A.P.H, Publishing Corporation, New Delhi, 1999. ✓ Kohli and Sharma, Poverty Alleviation and Problem, Anmol Publications, Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 1997 ✓ Kempe, R.S and Kempe C.H., Child Abuse, Fontana, London, 1978.

INDIAN SOCIETY Paper: 4 (Semester – I) CODE: Objectives: 1. To impart knowledge about Indian society to the students 2. To know various approaches, issues, transformations in Indian society.

UNIT 1: STRUCTURE OF INDIAN SOCIETY Hindu Social Organisation: Purusharthas, and Ashram UNIT 2: APPROACHES TO THE STUDY OF INDIAN SOCIETY

1. Indological Approach: G.S Ghurye and Louis Dumont

2. Structural Functional Approach : M.N. Srinivas and S.C. Dube (Understanding Caste, Indian Village and Social structure)

3. Dialectical Approach: /Marxian Perspectives: D.P. Mukherjee and A.R. Desai (Understanding Indian State, Role of Nation, Indian Development, Modernity and tradition)

4. Subaltern Approach : B.A. Ambedkar, David Hardiman ( Understanding the history of bellows, oppression of the marginalized Indian communities and social groups)

UNIT 3: MAJOR SOCIAL INSTITUTION AND ORGANISATION

1. Varna and Caste: Various approaches to the study of caste

2. Tribes in India: Problems of tribes, their economy and religion, Tribal movement and issues of displacement and rehabilitation

3. Marriage and family

a. Marriage in India : Rules of marriage - Sacrament, contract, types of marriage

b. Family: Types of families – Rules of Residence

4. Kinship Pattern: Types of kinship system

UNIT 4: SOCIAL ISSUES IN INDIAN SOCIETY

1. Social and Economic Inequalities

2. Casteism and Caste Conflict and Untouchability

3. Communalism and Communal Tension

4. Regionalism, Nationalism and Linguism

UNIT 5: TOWARDS SOCIAL TRANSFORMATION OF INDIAN SOCIETY

1. Modernization of Indian Tradition

2. Ideology and Change

3. Social Legislation and Social Change

4. Industrialization and Urbanization.

References ▪ Ahuja Ram., Indian Social System, Rawat Publication, Jaipur, 2002. ▪ Atal Yogesh, Indian Sociology- from where to where, Rawat Publication, New Delhi, 2003. ▪ Beteille Andre, Caste, Class and Power: Changing Patterns of stratification in a Tanjore Village, University of California Press, USA, 1965. ▪ Desouza, P.R. (ed), Contemporary India, Sage Publication, New Delhi, 2000. ▪ Dhenagare D.N., Themes and Perspectives in Indian Sociology, Rawat Publication, Jaipur, 1993. ▪ Dube S.C., Indian Society, National Book Trust, New Delhi, 1996. ▪ Dube S.C, The Indian Village, Routledge Publication, London, 1967. ▪ Dumont Louis., Homo Hierarchicus: The Caste System and its Implications, Vikas Publication, New Delhi, 1970. ▪ Kolenda P.M., Caste in Contemporary India, Rawat Publications, Jaipur,1984. ▪ Mukherjee D.P., Diversities, People’s Publishing house, Delhi, 1958. ▪ Oommen T.K., and P.N. Mukherjee., (etd) Indian Sociolgy: Reflections and Introspections, popular prakashan, Bombay, 1986. ▪ Singer, Milton & B Cohn, Structure and Change in Indian Society: Chicago: Aldine Publising Co, New Delhi, 1968. ▪ Singh Y., Indian Sociology: Social Conditioning and Emerging concerns, Vistaar, Delhi, 1986. ▪ Singh, Yogendra, Modernization of Indian Tradition, A Systematic Study of Social Change, Thompson Press, Delhi,1983.

▪ Singhi K. Narendra (etd)., Theory and Ideology in Indian Sociology, Rawat Publication, New Delhi, 1996. ▪ Srinivas M.N., Caste in Modern India and other Essays: Asia Publishing House, Bombay,1966. ▪ Srinivas M.N., India’s Villages, Asia Publishing House, Bombay, 1960. ▪ Vani Prabhakar, Third World Sociology, Dominant Publisher and distributor, New Delhi, 2003.

RURAL SOCIOLOGY Paper : 5 (Semester – I) CODE: Objectives: 1. To impart the knowledge about Rural Society 2. To know the Rural Social problems and Rural Social Change

UNIT 1 : INTRODUCTION

1. Nature, subject matter and importance of the study of rural sociology 2. Characteristics of Agrarian and Peasant Society 3. Habitat and Settlement in Rural Society 4. Rural - Urban differences and Rur-urban continuum

UNIT 2 : RURAL SOCIAL STRUCTURE

1. Caste and class in rural India 2. Inter caste relations 3. Dominant Caste and Jajmani system 4. Untouchability – Role of Government and N.G.Os for the removal of untochability

UNIT 3 : AGRARIAN STRUCTURE AND CHANGE

1. Land Tenure and Land reforms and social change 2. Green revolution and social change 3. White revolution

UNIT 4 : PLANNED CHANGE FOR RURAL SOCIETY

1. Panchayat Raj and Local Self Government 2. Community Development Programmes 3. Rural Development Strategies

4. Co-operatives 5. Self-help groups

UNIT 5 : PROBLEMS OF RURAL SOCIETY

1. Landless Labourers 2. Rural Poverty and Rural Indebtedness 3. Problem of Rural Industries and Rural Marketing 4. Impact of GATT & WTO References ▪ Berch, Berberoguse, (1992) Class, State and Development in India 1,2,3 and 4 Chapters, Sage, New Delhi. ▪ Desai A.R., (19970, Rural Sociology in India, Popular Prakashan, Bombay ▪ Mencher J.P., (1983), Social Anthropology of Peasantry Part III, OUP ▪ P.Radhakrishnan, (1989), Peasant Struggles : Land Reforms and Social Change in ▪ Malabar 1836-1982, Sage Publications, New Delhi ▪ Thoner Daniel and Thoner Alice, (1962) Land and Labour in India, Asia Publications, Bombay ▪ Dhanagare D.N., (1988), Peasant Movement in India, OUP, New Delhi

CONTEMPORARY SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY – I Paper : 6 (Semester – II)

CODE:

Objectives: 1. To divulge various contemporary sociological theories to the students 2. To make use of application of theory to fill up the gaps in Research work

UNIT 1: FUNCTIONALISM Talcott Parsons: Rationality, Value consensus and Functional prerequisites

UNIT 2: STRUCTURALISM Randall Collins: Micro structuralism, Violence and Reflexivity

UNIT 3: CONFLICT THEORY George Simmel’s conflict theory : Individuality and social forms

UNIT 4: INTERACTIONISM 1. G.H. Mead- Mind Self and Society: I and Me, Development of Self 2. Herbert Blumer : Methodology and Symbolic Interactionism

UNIT 5: PHENOMENOLOGY 1. Edmund Husserl (1859-1938) - Phenomenology, Natural thinking and the , Perception, Time consciousness 2. Alfred Schultz (1899-1959) –Concept of Life World (The Phenomenology of the Social World, Method of Study, Stock of Knowledge, Common Sense, reflexive action and interaction, indexicality of Meaning) References:

▪ Calhoun, Craig, et. Al, (etd) Contemporary Sociological Theory, Blackwell Publishers, Oxford, UK, 2002. ▪ Elliot, Anthony and Larry Ray (etd), Key Contemporary Social Theories, Blackwell Publishing, UK, 2003. ▪ Ferretter, Luke., Louis Althusser – Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Jones, Steve., Antonio Gramsci, Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Mills, Steven, Social Theory in the Real World, Sage Publication, London, 2001. ▪ Mills, Steven (etd), The Polity Reader in Social Theory, Polity Press, Cambridge, U.K, 2002. ▪ Royle, Nicholas., Jacques Derrida, Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Seidman, Steven and Alexander, Jeffrey C (etd), The New Social Theory- Reader, Routledge Publication, London, 2001. ▪ Smart, Barry., Michel Foucault, Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Turner H. Jonathan, The Structure of Sociological Theory, Fourth Edition, Rawat Publication, Jaipur, 2001.

SOCIAL MOVEMENTS IN INDIA Paper: 7 (Semester – II)

CODE:

Objectives: 1. To stress the significance of various movements in India 2. To impart knowledge on various social movements, conditions and impact on society.

UNIT I: INTRODUCTION

1. Meaning- Nature and Characteristics of Social Movements- 2. Types of Social movements:

1. Reform, Rebellion and Revival 2. Revolution and insurrection 3. Counter movement

UNIT 2: RELIGIOUS AND NATIONAL MOVEMENTS

1. Samaj and Arya Samaj 2. Civil Disobedience Movement 3. Quit India Movement

UNIT 3: SOCIAL REFORM MOVEMENTS 1. Self respect Movement in Tamil Nadu 2. SNDP Movement in 3. Non-Brahmin Movement in Maharashtra 4. Mahar Movement in Maharashtra,

UNIT 4: PEASANT AND TRIBAL MOVEMENT 1. Telegana Movement 2. Naxalbari Movement 3. The Santal Movement 4. Jarkhand Movement

UNIT 5: NEW SOCIAL MOVEMENTS 1. Women’s Movement 2. Environmental Movement 3.Dalit Movement in T.N.

References :

▪ Rao M.S.A., Social Movements and Social Transformation, Manohar, New Delhi 1979. ▪ Dhanagare. D.N. Peasant Movements in India., 1920-1950. OUP, Delhi 1983. ▪ Bateile, Andre. The Backward Classes: The New Social Order, OUP, New Delhi ▪ 1983. ▪ Kishore Nand, International Terrorism, New Delhi, S. Chand & Company, 1989.

DEVELOPMENTAL SOCIOLOGY Paper: 8 (Semester – II)

CODE:

Objectives:

1. To divulge the prominence of developmental sociology 2. To impart knowledge on various perspective and plans in India

UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Development and Change 2. Human Development 3. Social Development 4. 5. Socio- Cultural - 6. Multiple Sustainability

UNIT 2 : THEORETICAL PERSPECTIVES ON DEVELOPMENT 1. Functional Perspective 2. Marxist Perspective 3. Ecological Perspective 4. Liberal Perspective 5. Social Action Perspective

UNIT 3: THEORIES OF DEVELOPMENT AND UNDER-DEVELOPMENT 1. Modernization Theory 2. Centre Periphery Theory 3. World Systems Theory 4. Unequal Exchange Theory UNIT 4: MODELS AND AGENCIES OF DEVELOPMENT

1. Capitalism 2. Socialism 3. Mixed Economy 4. Market Forces 5. Non-Governmental Organizations UNIT 5: INDIAN EXPERIENCE OF DEVELOPMENT 1. Planned Development through Five Year Plans 2. Impact of Globalization 3. Impact of Information Technology 4. Regional Development: Selected case Studies of U.P., West Bengal and Kerala References ▪ Amin Samir, Unequal Development, OUP, New Delhi, 1979. ▪ Appadurai, Arjun, Modernity At Large: Cultural Dimensions of Globalization, OUP, New Delhi, 1997. ▪ Dereze, Jean and Amartya Sen, India: Economic Development and Social Opportunity, OUP., New Delhi,1996 ▪ Dereze, Jean and Amartya Sen, Indian Development – Selected Regional Perspectives, OUP., New Delhi,1996. ▪ Gore, M.S., Social Development, Rawat Publications, Jaipur, 2003. ▪ Harrison, D., The Sociology of Modernization and Development, Sage, New Delhi, 1989. ▪ Haq, Mahbub Ul, Reflections on Human Development, sage, New Delhi,1991. ▪ Pandey, Rajendra, Sociology of Under-Development, MITTAL Publications, Delhi,1985. ▪ Paramit S. Judge (etd), Dimensions of Social Change, Rawat Publication, Jaipur, 1997. ▪ Sharma, S.L., Criteria of Social Development, Journal of Social Action, Jan- March, 1980. ▪ , World Development Report, New York, 2005. ▪ Wallerstein Immanual, The Modern World System, OUP, New York, 1974.

SOCIOLOGY OF HEALTH Paper : 9 (Elective I) (Semester – II) ELECTIVE - I CODE: Objectives: 1. To impart knowledge on sociology of health.

2. To divulge the significance of sociological perspectives on health.

UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Nature, scope and importance of sociology of Health 2. Dimensions of health. 3.Concept of Disease, Illness and Sickness 4.Systems of Medicine: , Ayurvedha, Unani, Homeopathy and Allopathy 5. Sociological Perspectives in Health : Functionalist, Conflict and Interactionist perspectives UNIT 2: EPIDEMIOLOGY 1. Meaning of epidemiology 2.Social Context of health : Social factors influencing the health of the people 3. Epidemiological approach to health: Family in health and disease, cultural factors in health and disease, Social factors in health and disease. 4. Occupational hazards and occupational diseases, 5. Legislative measures to prevent occupational diseases and to protect the welfare of employees. UNIT 3: HEALTH CARE OF THE COMMUNITY 1. Concept of health care 2. Level of health care: Primary care level, secondary care level, Tertiary care level 3.Elements of primary health care and Principles of primary health care\ 4. Preventive, Social and community Medicine 4. Primary health care in India

UNIT 4: HEALTH PROFESSIONALS AND HEALTH CARE ORGANIZATIONS 1. Professional qualities of physician- Professionalization of physician. 2. Doctor– Patient relationship 3. Role of nurse in health care 4. Hospital as a social organization: Structure and function of a hospital - Medical social service in a hospital.

UNIT 5: HEALTH PLANNING IN INDIA 1. Health policy: Health for all by 2000A.D National Health Policy 2002, The Millennium Development Goal and Sustainable Development Goals. 2. Health Planning: Bhore Committee, Mudaliar Committee, Chadah Committee, Mukerji Committee, Jungalwalla Committee, Kartar Singh Committee, Shrovastav committee, Rural Health Scheme Reference: ▪ Cockerham, William, C. Medical Sociology (Ninth Edition), Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2003. ▪ Cockerham, William, C. in Medical Sociology, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1997. ▪ Park K. Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine, M/S, Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers, Jabalpur, 2000. ▪ Thamilarasan M, Medical Sociology, Rawat Publication, Jaipur, 2016.

DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMMES IN INDIA

Paper: 10 (ELECTIVE II) (Semesster – II) ELECTIVE- II CODE: PC 6210 Objectives: 1. To stress the need for the rural development 2. To impart knowledge on various rural development programmes in India

UNIT 1: RURAL DEVELOPMENT 1. Meaning – Concept – Objectives of Rural Development 2. Rural Development Experiments before independence: Sriniketan, Sevagram, Gurgaon, Marthandam and Etawah pilot project. 3.Strategies and approaches of rural development UNIT 2: RURAL DEVELOPMENT IN INDIA 1. Community development programme

2. IRDP 3. Panchayat Raj Institution 4. Land Reforms measures 5. Green Revolution

UNIT 3 : INSTITUTIONAL FRAME WORK FOR RURAL DEVELOPMENT

1. Ministry of Rural Development 2. District Rural Development Agency 3. CAPART 4. KVK 5. Co- operatives 6. Council for Advancement of Rural Technology (CART) 7. National Fund for Rural Development (NFRD) 8. National Institution for Rural Development (NIRD) 9. Rural Electrification Corporation

UNIT 4: RURAL DEVELOPMENT PROGRAMMES 1. Five Year Plans 2. National Rural Livelihoods Mission (NRLM) 3. Indira Awaas Yojana (IAY): 4. Rural Electrification: 5.. Renewable Energy for Rural Application: 6. Draught Prone Areas Programme (DPAP) 7. Pradhanmantri Adarsh Gram Yojana (PMAGY) 8. Bharat Nirman Program 9. Pradhan Mantri Gramodaya Yojana 10. Pradhan Mantri Gram Sadak Yojana (PMGSY) 11. Mahila Samridhi Yojana 12. District Rural Development Agency (DRDA) 13. Agriculture and Rural Debt Relief Scheme (ARDRS 14. Accelerated Rural Water Supply Programme(ARWSP) 15.Members of Parliament Local Area Development Scheme

UNIT 5 : EMPLOYMENT GENERATION AND POVERTY ALLIVIATION PROGRAMMES

1. National Rural Employment Programme (NREP) 2. Development of Women and Children in Rural Areas (DWCRA) 3. Jawahar Rozgar Yojana 4. National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (2005) (NREG)/ Mahathma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA) 5. Sampoorna Gramin Rozgar Yojana 6. Annapurna Scheme 2000 7. Swarna Jayanti Gram Swarozgar Yojana

References:

▪ Bhose S.G.R Joel., NGOs and Rural Development, Theory and Practice, Concept Publising Company, New Delhi, 2003. ▪ Lewis David and Tina Wallace (etd), Development and NGO’s and the Challenges of Change- New Roles and Relevance, Rawat Pub, Jaipur, 2003 ▪ Lawani B.T., NGOs in Development, Rawat Pub, Jaipur, 1999 ▪ Pawar S.N et.al, NGOs and Development, The Indian Scenario, Rawat Pub, Jaipur, 2004 ▪ Dharmarajan Shivani, NGOs As Prime Movers, Sectoral Action for Social Development, Kanishka Publication and Distributions, New Delhi, 2001 ▪ Edward Micheal and Alan Flower, NGO Management, Pub, New Delhi, 2003 ▪ Somesh Kumar, Methods for Community Participation, Sage Pub, New Delhi, 2002 ▪ Bhatia Anju, Women’s Development and NGO’s, Rawat Pub, Jaipur, 2000 ▪ Sen and Derez, The Amartya Sen & Jean Derez Omnibus, OUP, New Delhi, 1999 ▪ Roa Mohan, (etd) Disinvesting in Health – The World Bank’s Perception for Health, Sage Publication, New Delhi, 2001 ▪ Baviskar, Anitha, In the Belly of the River, OUP, New Delhi, 1997.

POPULATION EDUCATION AND FAMILY WELFARE EDE – I Paper: 11 (EDE – 1) (Semester – II) CODE: Objectives: 1. To make the students learn about the problems growth and measures taken by the government of India to control the birth rate. 2. To motive the students to learn family welfare programmes available in India.

UNIT 1 : POPULATION EDUCATION 1. Concepts: Growth rate, density of population, sex ratio, birth rate and death rate , Literacy rate, Age Pyramid 2. Need for population education in India. 3. and relevance of sex education. 4. The difference between sex education and population education UNIT 2 : : POPULATION POLICY OF INDIA 1. Family planning: Population policy of India 2010 2. Resistance to family planning. 3. Family planning Programme and incentives. UNIT 3: FAMILY WELFARE 1. Definition-Family Welfare Services and Agencies. 2. Family Life education programmes. 3. Small family norm UNIT 4 : PROBLEMS OF 1. Social Problems of overpopulation 2. Economical Problems of overpopulation 3. Population Control Measures and Methods

UNIT 5: POPULATION AND CONTROL MODEL 1. Role of Agencies in propagating population education and family Welfare. 2. International Model of population control: American Model and Chinese Model. Reference:- 1. David Klin and David Harman, Issues in population education, London- Lexington, 1976. 2. Chandrasekar. S., Population growth, infant mortality and family planning in India, Allied publishers, Bombay. 3. Gopal Rao. D., Population Education- A guide to curriculam and teachers Training education, Sterling Publisher, Mumbai. 4. Madam,G.R., Indian Social Problems, Vol II, Allied Publishers, Chennai, 1987.

CONTEMPORARY SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY II Paper : 12 (Semester – III) CODE:

Objectives: 1. To divulge various contemporary sociological theories to the students 2. To make use of application of the theory to fill up the gaps in Research work

UNIT 1 : FUNCTIONALISM Robert K Merton: The concept of dysfunctions, strain theory

UNIT 2 : STRUCTURALISM Antony Giddens : Theoretical and methodological understandings, Agency and structure

UNIT 3 : CONFLICT THEORY Ralf Dahrendorf : Dialectical Conflict

UNIT 4 : SYMBOLIC INTERACTIONISM Erving Goffman : Dramatical approach interactionism

UNIT 5 : ETHONO METHODOLOGY Harold Garfinkel: Rethinking social order, Relativist and subjectivist sociology

References: ▪ Calhoun, Craig, et. Al, (etd) Contemporary Sociological Theory, Blackwell Publishers, Oxford, UK, 2002. ▪ Elliot, Anthony and Larry Ray (etd), Key Contemporary Social Theories, Blackwell Publishing, UK, 2003. ▪ Ferretter, Luke., Louis Althusser – Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Jones, Steve., Antonio Gramsci, Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Mills, Steven, Social Theory in the Real World, Sage Publication, London, 2001. ▪ Mills, Steven (etd), The Polity Reader in Social Theory, Polity Press, Cambridge, U.K, 2002. ▪ Royle, Nicholas., Jacques Derrida, Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Seidman, Steven and Alexander, Jeffrey C (etd), The New Social Theory- Reader, Routledge Publication, London, 2001. ▪ Smart, Barry., Michel Foucault, Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Turner H. Jonathan, The Structure of Sociological Theory, Fourth Edition, Rawat Publication, Jaipur, 2001.

NEO FUNCTIONALISM AND NEO- MARXISM (Semester III) Paper : 13 CODE:

Objectives: 1. To divulge various contemporary sociological theories to the students 2. To make use of the theory to fill up the gaps in Research work

UNIT 1

Jeffery . C. Alexander: Neo- Functional approach: Multi- dimensional Analysis of Social action, the concept of post- positivism. UNIT 2 Jurgen,Habermass Critical Theory : Legitimation theory (rationalization and communication theory, rationality and modernity, democracy) UNIT 2 Louis Althusser- Structural Marxism : Althusser’s theory of Idealogy, Idealogical state Apparatuses UNIT 4 Antonio Gramsci- Hegemony : Coercion, consent, culture and class struggle UNIT 5 Levi- Strauss: Structural Functionalism, Alliance theory, Totemism.

References:

▪ Calhoun, Craig, et. Al, (etd) Contemporary Sociological Theory, Blackwell Publishers, Oxford, UK, 2002.

▪ Elliot, Anthony and Larry Ray (etd), Key Contemporary Social Theories, Blackwell Publishing, UK, 2003. ▪ Ferretter, Luke., Louis Althusser – Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Jones, Steve., Antonio Gramsci, Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Mills, Steven, Social Theory in the Real World, Sage Publication, London, 2001. ▪ Mills, Steven (etd), The Polity Reader in Social Theory, Polity Press, Cambridge, U.K, 2002. ▪ Royle, Nicholas., Jacques Derrida, Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Seidman, Steven and Alexander, Jeffrey C (etd), The New Social Theory- Reader, Routledge Publication, London, 2001. ▪ Smart, Barry., Michel Foucault, Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Turner H. Jonathan, The Structure of Sociological Theory, Fourth Edition, Rawat Publication, Jaipur, 2001.

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND STATISTICS

Paper : 14 (Semester – III)

CODE: Objectives: 1. To inculcate the knowledge of research methodology 2. To impart the significance in using statistical methods

UNIT 1 : INTRODUCTION

1. Definition, Nature and scope of social research 2. Characteristics of Social Science Research 3. Aims of Social Science Research 4. Importance of Social Research

UNIT 2 : TYPES OF SOCIAL RESEARCH

1. Descriptive Research and Analytical Research 2. Pure and Applied Research 3. Quantitative and Qualitative Research 4. Exploratory and Experimental 5.Diagnostic Research 6. Case study UNIT 3 : PROCESS OF SOCIAL RESEARCH 1. Steps in Social Research 2.Hypotheses: Types of Hypotheses, Formulation of Hypotheses, Functions of Hypotheses, Hypotheses Testing

SAMPLING AND DATA COLLECTION

3. Sampling: Meaning and Definition, Sample Design, Probability sampling and Non Probability Sampling, Sampling in Qualitative Research, Sampling in Quantitative Research 4. Data Collection : Sources of Data: Primary and Secondary sources of Data 5. Methods of Data Collection: Observation , Questionnaire, Interview Schedule

UNIT 4 : DATA ANALYSIS AND REPORT WRITING 1.Analysis of data: Classification of Variables, Coding, Editing Tabulation 2. Contents of Report 3. Documentation: Footnotes and Bibliography UNIT 5 : STATISTICS 1. Meaning and Importance of statistics 2. Functions and Limitations of Statistics

3. Measures of Central Tendency: Mean, Median, Mode 4. Measures of Dispersion: Range, Quartile Deviation, Mean Deviation and Standard Deviation 5. Correlation Analysis: Karl Pearsons Co-efficient of Correlation 6. Regression Analysis: Simple Regression 7. Test of Significance: Chi Square Test References

▪ Goode and Hatt.,Methods in Social Research., Tata McGraw-Hill., Singapore., 1987. Das, Lal, D.K., Practice of Social Research.,Rawat Publications., Jaipur., 2000. ▪ Babbie, Earl.,The Practice of Social Research., 7th Edition., Wadsworth Publishing Company., USA., 1995. ▪ Young, Pauline, V., Scientific Social Surveys and Research., 4th Edition., Prentice-Hall., NJ-USA., 1988. ▪ Thamilarasan, M. Research Methodology for Social Sciences, New Centuary Publications, New Delhi, India, 2015.

SOCIOLOGY OF MARGINALIZED COMMUNITIES (ELECTIVE III) Paper : 15 (ELECTIVE III) (Semester – III) CODE: Objectives: 1. To make the students to understand the meaning of marginalized communities 2. To divulge the knowledge about the conditions of marginalized communities

UNIT 1. CONCEPT AND INDICES The concept of marginalization Socio-economic indices of marginalized communities- poverty, Social exclusion, relative deprivation, exploitation, discrimination, educational backwardness and inequality.

UNIT 2. UNTOUCHABILITY 1. Historical review of untouchability

2. Theories of origin of Untouchability a) Race and occupation theory b) Brahminical Theory c) B.R. Ambedkar’s Borken –Men Theory d) Multi Causal theory e) Dysfunctions of untouchability f) Current practices of untouchability: Overt and covert forms

UNIT 3. SOCIAL REFORMERS AND MARGINALIZED GROUPS 1. Jothirao Phule 2. M.K. Gandhi 3. B.R. Ambedkar 4. E.V.R. Periyar UNIT 4. CASTE SYSTEM

1. The concept of caste and casteism 2. Caste system as a base of inequality 3. Caste system: continuity and change

UNIT 5. SOCIAL POLICY AND EMPOWERMENT OF MARGINALIZED GROUPS

1. Constitutional provisions and policies for the marginalized communities- SC, ST BC, and OBC 2. Social policy for the empowerment of women.

REFERNCES: 1. Bedeille, Andre, The Backward Classes in Contemporary in India, Oxford University press, 1992.

2. charsley, S.R. and Karanth, G.K. Challenging untouchability. Sage Publication, Delhi,1998 3. choudhuri, S.M., Changing status of depressed Caste in contemporary in india, Daya Publishing House, DELHI, 1998. 4. RAM Ahuja, INDIAN Social system, Rawat Publication, Jaipur, 1993.

ENVIRONMENTAL SOCIOLOGY

ELECTIVE IV

Paper : 16 (ELECTIVE IV) (Semester – III) CODE:

Objectives:

1. To stress the significance in protecting the environment 2. To impart the knowledge on measures that protect the environment

UNIT 1: CONCEPTS IN ENVIRONMENTAL SOCIOLOGY 1. Interrelationship between people and environment 2. Global issues: greenhouse effect, global warming, Acid rain, and

UNIT 2: ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND EFFECTS 1. Solid Waste Pollution - Pesticide and Nuclear pollution 2. - River and Marine pollution 3. Air Pollution 4. Noise Pollution

UNIT 3: ENVIRONMENTAL MOVEMENTS IN INDIA 1. Chipko Movement 2. Appikko Movement 3. Narmada Bachao Andolan 4. Anti –Tehri Dam Movement

UNIT 4 : ENVIRONMENTAL POLICIES

1. Regulation of natural resources- Forest Conservation Act 1980- Wild Life Act 1980- Water Act- 1974. 2. Regulation of Environmental Pollution: Tiwari Committee of 1980, 3. Damodar Valley Corporation Regulation Act 1948. 4. Environmental Protection Act 1986.

UNIT 5 : TECHNOLOGY DEVELOPMENT AND ENVIRONMENT 1. Criticism of Modern Technology 2. Environmentally sound and appropriate technology- Criteria for selection of technology, Satisfaction of basic needs, 3. Sustainable development

References:

▪ Allan Schnaiberg (1994) "The Political Economy of Environmental Problems and Policies: Consciousness, Conflict and Control Capacity." Advances in Human Ecology 3: 23-64. ▪ Bandyopadhyay, India’s Environment, Natraj Publishers, Dehra Dun, 1985 ▪ Frederick H. Buttel (1978) "Environmental Sociology: A New Paradigm?" American Sociologist 13(4): 252-256. ▪ Frederick H. Buttel (1987) "New Directions in Environmental Sociology." Annual Review of Sociology 13: 465-488. (Follow the link, search for Buttel [in Author], and away you go.) ▪ Guha, Ramachandra, Social Ecology, Oxford University Press, Calcutta, 1998. ▪ Karpagam, M., Environmental Economics, Sterling Publishing Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 1990. ▪ Michael Goldman and Rachel A. Schurman (2000) "Closing the 'Great Divide': New Social Theory on Society and Nature." Annual Review of Sociology 26: 563-584. ▪ Paras Diwan, Environment Administration, Law and Judicial Attitude, Deep & Deep publications, New Delhi, 1992. ▪ Raja Sehekhara, C.V., Global Environmental Series, Discovery Publishing House, New Delhi, 1992. ▪ Rathore M.S., (etd), Environment and Development, Rawat Publications, Jaipur, 1996. ▪ Robert Gramling and William R. Freudenburg (1996) "Environmental Sociology: Toward a Paradigm for the 21st Century." Sociological Spectrum 16(4): 347-370. ▪ Saxena, Environmental Geography, Rawat Publications, Jaipur,1999. ▪ Sankaran S, Environmental Economics, Margham Publication, Chennai-1998. ▪ Shekhar Mehta et.al., Controlling Pollution, Sage Publication,New Delhi,1997. ▪ William R. Catton, Jr. and Riley E. Dunlap (1978) "Environmental Sociology: A New Paradigm." American Sociologist 13(1): 41-49.

INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AND SOCIETY (EDE - II) Paper : 17 ( EDE – II) (Semester – III) CODE: PD 6202

OBJECTIVE 1. To make the students to understand the relations between the information Processing and the society to the current needs. 2. To create the awareness to identify the merits and demerits of information technological changes in the promotion of economy of society.

UNIT 1: TECHNOLOGY AND SOCIETY

1. Information-technology-definition-Meaning 2. Industrialism: Meaning, Function, Development Technological Innovation Process 3. Information: Meaning- Need for information – process of Informationalism

UNIT 2 : INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY REVOLUATION

1. IT application in an industries 2. Vending information- Information marketing- Information highway 3. The impact of information technology- Email-E.Business-Internet

UNIT 3 : INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AND ORGANISATION MANAGEMENT

1. Work environment in Organization 2. New technology and modern management 3. Occupational structure and skills- changing work culture

UNIT 4 : INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AND ITS IMPACT ON SOCIETY

1. Education 2. Economy 3. Culture

UNIT 5 : INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AND CRIME

1. Cyber crime 2. Cyber Stalking 3. Cyber Terrorism

REFERENCES: 1. S.L.Sha, Information Technology, Gyan publishing, Hocna, 1999 2. Shivraj Kanungo, Making information Technolgy, Stage Publication-1999

CONTEMPORARY SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY III Paper : 18 (Semester – IV)

CODE: Objectives: 1. To divulge various contemporary sociological theories to the students 2. To make use of the theory to fill up the gaps in Research work

UNIT 1 : CONFLICT - FUNCTIONALISM Lewis. A. Coser – Social Conflict AND Conflict – functionalism.

UNIT 2 : SOCIAL EXCHANGE THEORY 1. George C. Homan: social exchange theory, Exchange Behaviourism and the five propositions of all human behaviour. 2. Peter M. Blau: Structural exchange theory, group formation, group cohesion and power, bureaucracy and social organization.

UNIT 3 : PHENOMENOLOGY 1. Peter Berger: The Social Construction of Reality, Externalization, Objectivation, internalization.

UNIT 4 : POST MODERNITY

Michael Foucault: Archeology of Knowledge, Genealogy of Power, Discipline and Punishment, Birth of Clinic and the history of sexuality.

UNIT 5 : POST STRUCTURALISM Jacques Derrida : Deconstruction Theory, Hermeneutical method

References:

▪ Calhoun, Craig, et. Al, (etd) Contemporary Sociological Theory, Blackwell Publishers, Oxford, UK, 2002. ▪ Elliot, Anthony and Larry Ray (etd), Key Contemporary Social Theories, Blackwell Publishing, UK, 2003. ▪ Ferretter, Luke., Louis Althusser – Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Jones, Steve., Antonio Gramsci, Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Mills, Steven, Social Theory in the Real World, Sage Publication, London, 2001. ▪ Mills, Steven (etd), The Polity Reader in Social Theory, Polity Press, Cambridge, U.K, 2002. ▪ Royle, Nicholas., Jacques Derrida, Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Seidman, Steven and Alexander, Jeffrey C (etd), The New Social Theory- Reader, Routledge Publication, London, 2001. ▪ Smart, Barry., Michel Foucault, Routledge Critical Thinkers, Routledge Publication, UK, 2007. ▪ Turner H. Jonathan, The Structure of Sociological Theory, Fourth Edition, Rawat Publication, Jaipur, 2001.

URBAN SOCIOLOGY

Paper : 19 (Semester – IV)

CODE:

Objectives:

1. To impart the significance of urban sociology 2. To impart the knowledge of urban society

UNIT 1 : INTRODUCTION

1.Definition- Meaning of Urban Sociology 2.Nature of Urban Sociology 3. Scope of Urban Sociology 4. Role of Urban Sociologists

UNIT 2 : URBAN SOCIOLOGICAL THEORIES

1. Redfield’s Folk urban continuum 2. Louis wirth’s Urbanism as a way of life 3. Hoyt’s Sector theory 4. Bargess’s Concentric zone theory

UNIT 3 : URBAN SOCIAL STRUCTURE

1. Family,marriage,recreation,religion 2. Characteristics of urban society 3. Causes of growth of cities 4. Types of cities

UNIT 4 : URBANISATION & HOUSING PROBLEMS

1. Factors of Urbanisation 2. Consequences of urbanization 3. Urban housing problems, slums, overcrowding, over urbanization, 4. Pushback factors in migration

UNIT 5 : URBAN PLANNING

1. Importance of urban planning 2. Fundamentals of urban planning 3. Urban Development Programmes

References:

▪ Pickwance C.G (ed) 1976, Urban Sociology, Critical Essays, Methuen. ▪ Saunders Peter, 1981, Social Theory and Urban Question, Hutchionson.. ▪ Bose Ashis, 1978, Studies in India Urbanization 1901-1971, Tata McGraw Hill, Delhi. ▪ Abrahimson M, 1976, Urban Sociology, Englewoot, Prentice Hall. ▪ Ronnan, Paddison, 2001, Handbook of Urban Studies, Sage Publication, India. ▪ Bharadwaj., R.K., 1974, Urban Development in India, National Pub House, New Delhi. ▪ Gold, Harry, 1982, Sociology of Urban Life, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliff. ▪ Alfred De Souza, 1979, The Indian City, Poverty, Ecology and Urban Development, Mahonar, Delhi. ▪ Desai A.R and Pillai S.D (ED) 1970, Slums and Urbanization, Popular Prakashan, Bombay. ▪ Ramachandran R, 1991, Urbanization and Urban Systems in India, OUP, Delhi. ▪ Elllin Nan, 1996, Post-Modern Urbanism, Oxford, U.K.

INDUSTRIAL SOCIOLOGY Paper :20 (Semester – IV)

CODE: PC 6205 Objectives: 1.To inculcate the knowledge about the relationship between industry and society. 2. To ascertain knowledge about the Industrial organization, trade union and industrial labour relations

UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Definition of Industrial Sociology 2. Nature and scope of industrial sociology 3. Concept of work- Work and recreation – Work and Leisure 4.Systems of Production: Manorial system, Guild system, Domestic system, Factory system. UNIT 2: SOCIAL INDUSTRIAL THOUGHT 1. Classical Theories: Adam Smith, Karl Marx, Max Weber,Emile Durkheim and Elton Mayo 2.Sociological Theories: Rensis Likert, Frederick Herzberg, Abraham Maslow, McClelland.

UNIT 3: INDUSTRIAL ORGANISATION 1. Formal Organization: Nature of formal organization – Advantages and Disadvantages of formal organization 2. Informal Organization: Nature of informal organization – Advantages and Disadvantages of informal organization 3. Line and Staff Organization: Nature and Functions of line and staff organizations 4.Organizational Communication Process: Structure and Functions

UNIT 4: TRADE UNION 1. Concept, features, functions and types 2. History of trade union movements in India and Trade Union Act 3. Trade unions and challenges of privatization and globalization UNIT 5: INDUSTRIAL AND LABOUR RELATION 1. Industrial Relations: International Labour Organization. Labour Legislation, 2. Industrial Relations in India: Industrial Disputes/conflicts- Concept, Features and kinds of disputes - Industrial Dispute Act 3.Settling disputes: Mediation, Arbitration, Conciliation, Negotiation Workers’ Participation in Management (WPM) Collective Bargaining: Concept, Types, Scope and importance

REFERENCES

▪ Davis, Keith Human Behaviour at work. New Delhi. Mcgraw Hill 1984. ▪ Ramaswamy, E.A. Industrial Relations in India. Delhi. MacMillan, 1978. ▪ Schneider, Eugene, Industrial Sociology, Mcgraw Hill – London, 1971. ▪ Miller and Form, Industrial Sociology, Harper and Row, 1964. ▪ Singh, V.B., Industrial Labour in India ▪ Mamoria C.M., Industrial Labour and Industrial relations, Vol.II

DISSERTATION AND VIVA (Semester – IV) Paper : 21

CODE:

Objectives: 1. To examine the knowledge of the students on various social issues prevailing in India 2. To make students to bring out the solution for the issues

Marks

1. Internal Marks: 25

2. Project Report: 50

3. Viva : 25

Total 100

GENDER AND SOCIETY (ELECTIVE V) Paper : 22 (Semester – IV)

CODE: Objectives: 1. To stress the significance of gender and society 2. To impart the knowledge pertaining to gender and its development

UNIT 1 : SOCIAL CONSTRUCTION OF GENDER 1. Gender Vs Sex: Men, Women, Transgender 2. Cultural and gender role – Division of labour 3. Gender based socialization

UNIT 2 : FEMINIST THEORIES 1. Liberal Feminism 2. 3. Socialist Feminism 4. Radical Feminism 5. Eco Feminism

UNIT 3 : STATISTICAL PROFILE AND ANALYSIS OF GENDER DISPARITY IN INDIA 1. Economic Sector 2. Educational Sector 3. Politics 4. Health

UNIT 4 : GENDER AND DEVELOPMENT 1. Effect of Development Policies on gender relations 2. Perspectives on gender and development: Welfare, development and empowerment

UNIT 5 : WOMEN AND DEVELOPMENT IN INDIA 1. Strategies for the protection of women’s rights and rehabilitation of women; welfare of women through legislation, establishment of national commission for women, governments 2. Gender Budgeting and 3. Women Empowerment prgrammes: Raashtiya Mahila Kosh, Mother and Child Tracking System, ( MCTS) , Indira Gandhi Matriva Sahyog Yojana Conditional Maternity Plan, Rajiv Gandhi scheme for empowerment of Adolescent girls ( Sabla, Priyadharsini)

Reference: ▪ Bhasin Kamala, Understanding Gender, Kali for Women, New Delhi 2000. ▪ Davis Kathy, Evans Mary, Lorber. J, Hand Book of Gender and Women’. ▪ Rage Sharmila, Sociology of Gender, Sage Publication, New Delhi, 2003 ▪ Delamont Sara, , Sage Publication, 2003. ▪ Chanana, Karuna, Socialization, Women and Education: Exploration in gender identity, Orient Longman, New Delhi 1998.

DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE(AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI- 600 004.

MINUTES OF THE BOARD MEETING

The Board Meeting for verifying the Syllabus for M.A., Music was held on 16/02/2018 at the Department of Music, Queen Mary’s College (Autonomous).

It was resolved that the changes made be passed from the Academic Year 2018-2019.

Members present

1. Dr. Rajsri Sripathy Head, Department of Indian Music

University of Madras, Chennai- 600 005

2. Dr. M.A. Bhageerathi Associate Professor and Head

Department of Music

Queen Mary’s College(Autonomous)

Chennai- 600 004.

3. Dr. R. Abhiramasundari Associate Professor

Department of Music

Queen Mary’s College(Autonomous)

Chennai- 600 004.

4. Dr. Shanti Mahesh Assistant Professor

Department of Music

Queen Mary’s College(Autonomous)

Chennai- 600 004.

DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC

QUEENMARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS)

SYLLABUS-CBCS-M.A., (MUSIC)

FROM THE ACADEMIC YEAR 2018-2019

M.A., (MUSIC) Question Paper Pattern

Section A

Answer all the Questions 5X2=10

Section B 5X4=20

Answer all the Questions-

All the Questions will have Either OR Pattern

Section C 3X15=45

Answer Any Three -Five questions will be given

Marks Distribution for M.A. (Music)

Type of Paper Internal Marks External Marks Total Marks

Theory 25 75 100

Practical 25 75 100

Distribution of Internal Marks for M.A., (Music)

Assignment Test 1 Test 2 Model Seminar Total

Examination

5 5 5 5 5 25

DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

TITLE OF THE PAPERS OF REVISED SYLLABUS FROM THE ACADEMIC YEAR 2016- 2017

FIRST SEMESTER

MARKS

Title of the Paper Inst. CREDIT EXAM CIA EXT TOTAL S Hours/ HOURS

Week

Core Paper-I: 6 4 3 75 25 100

Music of the Modern Period

Core Paper –II: 6 4 3 75 25 100

Advanced Theory-I

Core Paper- III 6 4 3 75 25 100

Kalpita -I Practical

Core Paper- IV 6 3 3 75 25 100

Kalpita Sangita- II Practical

Elective Paper –I 4 3 3 75 25 100

Tamil Compositions I Practical

Soft Skill-I 2 3

SECOND SEMESTER

MARKS

Title of the Paper Inst. CREDIT EXAM CIA EXT TOTAL S Hours/ HOUR S

Week

Core Paper-V: 6 4 3 75 25 100

History of Music

Tamil Tradition

Core Paper –VI 6 4 3 75 25 100

Kalpita Sangita- III Practical

Core Paper- VII 6 4 3 75 25 100

Manodharma Sangita-I Practical

Elective Paper- II 4 3 3 75 25 100

Tamil Compositions II Practical

Elective Paper –III 4 3 3 75 25 100

Musical Compositions-I Practical

Extra Disciplinary Elective- I 4 3 3 75 25 100

Social and Ritualistic Music Practical

Soft Skill- II 2

Internship 2

THIRD SEMESTER

MARKS

Title of the Paper Inst. CREDIT EXAM CIA EXT TOTAL S Hours/ HOUR S Week

Core Paper-VIII: 6 4 3 75 25 100

History of Music

Sanskrit Tradition

Core Paper –IX 4 4 3 75 25 100

Comparative Musicology

Core Paper- X 6 4 3 75 25 100

Manodharma Sangita-II Practical

Core Paper XI 6 4 3 75 25 100

Devotional Compositions Practical

Elective Paper –IV 4 3 3 75 25 100

Musical Compositions-II Practical

Extra Disciplinary Elective- II 4 3 3 75 25 100

Patriotic Music Practical

Soft Skill- III 2

FOURTH SEMESTER

MARKS

Title of the Paper Inst. CREDIT EXAM CIA EXT TOTAL S Hours/ HOUR S Week

Core Paper-XII: 6 4 3 75 25 100

Advanced Theory- II

Core Paper –XIII 4 4 3 75 25 100

Dissertation

Core Paper- XIV 6 4 3 75 25 100

Manodharma Sangita-III Practical

Core Paper XV 6 4 3 75 25 100

Kalpita Sangita IV Practical

Elective Paper –V 4 3 3 75 25 100

Concert Practical

Soft Skill- IV 2

Practical Examination to be conducted at the end of the Semester

Internship will be carried out during the Summer Vacation of the first Year

And Marks will be sent to the University by the college and the same will be included in the Third Semester Mark Sheets.

I M.A., - I Semester

Core Paper- I Theory – I:

Music of the Modern Period

1. Contribution of the following scholars: (i) Arivanar (Pancha Marabu) (ii) Subbarama Dikshitar (iii) Abraham Panditar

2. Development of Notation in 19th & 20th century

3. Trends and developments in 20th century with reference to:

(i) Musical instruments (ii) Compositions (iii) Concerts (iv) Books (v) Journals (vi)

(vii) Research

4. I Lakshanas of the , , , Lathangi, Subhapantuvarali, and Sriranjani II Notations of the Krits learnt in the ragas Hindolam, Darbar, Lathangi, Subhapantuvarali, Sahana and Sriranjani

5. Detailed study of Violin, Vina , , , with respect to manufacture, Tuning and Playing Techniques.

I M.A., - I Semester

Core Paper- II Theory – II

Advanced Theory – I

1. Study of the contents of the Geyanatakams-Nauka charitram and Ramanatakam

2. Treatment of music in Kuravanji Natakam-pertaining to Kutrala Kuravanji, Bhagavata mela Nataka, bhajana and Harikatha

3. Mudras in Musical compositions. Musical Mnemonics – Their History and Utility. Modal shift of Tonic

4. Appreciation of the style of Musical Trinity

5. Music of the post period. Analysis of the of the following composers:

Patnam Subramanya Iyer, Oothukkadu Venkata Subbayyar, Tanjai Nalvar,

Muthaiya Bhagavatar, Papanasam Sivan, Koteesvara Iyer.

I M.A., - I Semester

Core Paper- III Practical – I

Kalpita Sangita – I

1. Ata tala – Tisram

2.Kritis in Devagandhari and Hindolam

3.Kritis in Darbar and

4.Kritis in Subhapantuvarali and Sahana

6.Kritis in Sriranjani and

I M.A., - I Semester

Core Paper-IV Practical –II

Kalpita Sangita – II

1.Ghana Pancaratnam- Any One

2.Kritis in Saurashtram, and Pantuvarali

3.Kritis in Yadukulakambhoji and

4.Kritis in , Purvikalyani and

5.Javali and and Kavadi Chindu.

I M.A., - I Semester

Elective – I Practical – Tamil Compositions I

1. Compositions of Muthuthandavar and Marimuthapillai

2. Compositions of Arunachala Kavi and Periyasami Thooran

3. Compositions of Koteesvara Iyer and Papanasam Sivan

4. , Thiruthandagam, Divyaprabhandam, Thiruvasagam.

5. , Thiruvempavai, and Thiruarutpa.

I M.A., - II Semester

Core Paper- V Theory – III

History of Music – Tamil tradition

1. Study of the treatment of ancient Tamil music in Silappadikaram and its commentaries

2. Study of the references to music in the following works-Tolkappiyam, Ettutogai, Pattupattu, Paripadal, Pingala nighandu, Divakaram, Periyapuranam.

3. Detailed study of Palai and Pan system of ancient Tamil music. Musical instruments in ancient Tamil music.

4. Study of 108 talas and tala concepts mentioned in Caccaputa venba and Talasamudram

5. Metrical structure in Tevaram and Tiruppugazh

I M.A., - II Semester

Core Paper- VI Practical

Kalpita Sangita III

1. Ata tala Varnam- Tisram

2. Ghana raga Pancaratnam(), Syama Sastri Svarajati

3. Navagraha , Navavarnam and Navaratnamalika

4. Tiruvotriyur Pancharatnam

5. Kovur Pancharatnam and Kalahastisa Pancharatnam

I M.A., - II Semester

Core Paper- VII Practical

Manodharma Sangita I

Ragam, Niraval and Kalpana Svaram in the following Ragas

1. Todi and Bhairavi

2. Subhapantuvarali

3. Purvikalyani

4. and Khambhoji

5. Saveri

I M.A., - II Semester

Elective Paper II Practical

Tamil Compositions II

Kirtana-s of Gopala Krishna Bharati in the following Raga-s

1. and Kambhoji 2. Manji and 3. and 4. and Jaganmohini 5. Behag and

I M.A., - II Semester

Elective Paper- III Practical

Musical Compositions- I

Musical Compositions in various languages

1. Sanskrit-2 2. Tamil-2 3. -2 4. Telugu-2 5. Kannadam-2

Extra Disciplinary Elective I Practical

Social and Ritualistic music

1. Lali and Unjal song

2. Nalangu song & Kummi

3. Bharatiyar song

4. Bharathidasan song

5. Arutpa and Tiruppugazh

II M.A., - III Semester

Core Paper- VIII Theory – IV

History of Music in Sanskrit Tradition

1. Musical forms- Samagana and its characteristics, Gita Prabandhas

2. Historical study of the following topics- a. Grama, Murchchana, Jati b. Marga ragas and Desi ragas c. Suddha, Chayalaga and Sankirna ragas d. Raga and time theory e. Devatamaya rupa ragas f. Raga dhyana slokas

g. Raga Ragini classification h. Classification of Uttama, Madhyama and Adhama ragas g. Ghana, Naya and Desya ragas h. Mela and Mela paddhati g. Vadi , samvadi, vivadi and anuvadi h. Gamakas, Sthayas and

3. Raga alapti and Rupaka alapti

4. Marga and Desi talas. Sudhdha vikrita svaras

5. Music of the Kudumiyamalai inscriptions. Study of the Lakshana granthas- and Caturdandi Prakasika

II M.A., - III Semester

Core Paper- IX Theory – V -Comparative Musicology

Study of the following music systems- Karnatik, Hindustani, and Western Music

1. Evolution of the above Systems

2. Scales figuring in these Systems

3. Study of Musical forms, Rhythmic aspects Musical instruments and Concert Format in the above systems

4. Ability to reproduce a Gitam in Staff notation

5. Elements of Rabindra Sangeetha

II M.A., - III Semester

Core Paper X Practical

Manodharma Sangita II

Ragam, Niraval and Kalpana Svaram in the following ragas

1. Karaharapriya and Hindolam

2. Sahana and Latangi

3. Sriranjani

4. Sankarabharanam

5. Pantuvarali

II M.A., - III Semester

Core Paper XI Practical

DEVOTIONAL COMPOSITIONS

1. Tevaram, Divyaprabandham

2. Todayamangalam, Viruttam

3. Gurukirtanai, Divyanama, Utsava Sampradaya Kirtanai

4. Hindi and Abhang

5. Ashtapadi-1, Tarangam-1

II M.A., - III Semester

Elective Paper IV Practical

Musical Compositions II

Compositions in the Prathama Ghana Raga-s

TWO Compositions in

1. Nattai Raga 2. Gaula Raga 3. Raga 4. Raga 5. Sri Raga

Extra Disciplinary Elective II

Practical

Patriotic songs

1. Tamil –3 – Bharatiyar, Bharatidasan, Namakkal Kavignar

2. Telugu –1

3. Kannada –1

4. Malyalam-1

5. Hindi-1

II M.A., - IV Semester

Core Paper- XII Theory – VI

ADVANCED THEORY II

1. Study of the characteristics that determine the Melodic individuality of the Ragas 2. Comparative study of the Lakshanas of the following Ragas: A. Kambhoji, Harikambhoji, Yadukulakambhoi, B. Sriraga, Madhyamavathi, Manirangu C. Darbar, Nayaki And Anandabhairavi And Ritigaula D. Janaranjani And Purnachandrika E. Kalyani, Saranga, Hamirkalyani, Yamunakalayani F. Bhairavi, Manji, Huseni

3. Lakshanas of the following Ragas: , Varali, Nilambari, Begada And

4. Notation for the songs learnt in the Ragas Todi, Bhairavi, Purvikalyani, Saurashtram, Saveri, Yadukulakambhoji, Anandabhairavi, Pantuvarali 5. Concept of Tala Dasa Pranas

II M.A., - IV Semester

Core Paper XIII THEORYVII:

DISSERTATION

The Dissertation Topic should be relevant to the Syllabus taught in the Two years.

The Dissertation may be between 30 to 50 Pages.

SCHEME OF EVALUVATION:

IA: DISSERTATION =30 VIVA VOCE=10

V.E DISSERTATION =50 VIVA VOCE=10

II M.A., - IV Semester

Core Paper XIV Practical

Manodharma Sangita III- RTP

1. ORU KALAI PALLAIV-1

2. RENDU KALAI PALLAVI-1

3. NALU KALAI PALLAVI-1

4. NADAI PALLAVI-1

5. RAGAM, TANAM, NIRAVAL AND KALPANA SVARAM FOR THE ABOVE PALLAVIS

II M.A., - IV Semester

Core Paper XV Practical

Kalpita Sangita IV

1. Compositions in Desh, Hindustani

2. Compositions in Hamir kalyani, Yamuna kalyani and Behag

3. Compositions in Brindavana saranga, Dvijavanti

4. Compositions in Kurinji and Navaroj

5. Compositions in Nadanamakriya and

II M.A., - IV Semester

ELECTIVE PAPER V PRACTICAL PAPER

CONCERT

1. Varnam

2. A Kriti With Brief Alapana And Kalapanasvara

In Hindolam Or Shubhapantuvarali

3. Raga Alapana, Kriti, Niraval And Kalpana

4. Devotional Musical Form

5. Tiruppugazh

Recommended books:

1. South Indian Music Book I to VI Prof P Sambamurthy

2. Great Composers I & II Prof P Sambamurthy

3. A Dictionary of South Indian Music and Musicians I to VI Prof P Sambamurthy

4. History of Music Prof P Sambamurthy

5. Great Musicians Prof P Sambamurthy

6. Cilappatikarathu Isaittamiz Dr. S. Ramanathan

7. Nandanar Carittirakkirtanaikal of Gopalakrishna Bharati Dr. S. Ramanathan

8. Isaittamiz Ilakkana Vilakkam Va. Su. Gomathi Sankara Ayyar

9. Kavadiccindum Kavijnan Varalarum Aranga Srinivasan

10. Pazantamiz Ilakkiyattil Isayiyal Dr. Vi.Pa.Ka. Sundaram

11. Isaiyiyal Verriccelvan

12. Tolkappiyattil Isaikkuriuppukal Dr. Vi.Pa.Ka. Sundaram

13. Talamuzakkiyal Vi.Pa.Ka. Sundaram

14. Isaitturai Tamizc corkal Vi.Pa.Ka. Sundaram

15. Isaittamizp Paamalai M.M. Dandapani Desikar

16. Tamizil Kirttanai Ilakkiyam Dr. S. Soundarapandiyan

17. Panar Kaivazi Yaznul A.A. Varaguna Pandiyan

18. Yaz Nul Vipulananda Adigal

19. Viruttapaaviyal Virabhaddira Mudaliyar

20. Pannirutirumurai Varalaru Ka. Vellai Varanan

21. Sarvasamayasamarasak Kirttanaikal Mayuram Vedanayakam Pillai

22. Tamizisai Ilakkana Marapu Dr. Salem. S. Jayalakshmi

23. Cilappatikaram with Commentaries Ed. U. Ve. Saminatha Ayyar

24. Tirukkutraalakkuravanji Tirikuda Rasappa Kavirayar

25. Panchamarapu of Arivanar Deivasikamani Gavundar

220

26. Paripaadal Ed. U. Ve. Saminatha Ayyar

27. Tamizisaikkalaik Kalanjiyam Dr. Vi.Pa.Ka. Sundaram

28. Tamizai Iyakkam Ira Illankumaran

29. Isai Manjari Periyasami Thuran

30. Dravidar Isai Pa. Dandapani

31. Tirumuraiyum Tamizisaiyum Pulavar Senduraimuthu

32. Isai Marapu Ka Sankaranar

33. Bharata Isai Marapu Dr. Jnana Kulendran

34. Aindisaippan Pa. Sundaresan

35. Kanalvari Va. Su Gomathi Sankarayyar

36. Tennaga Isaiyiyal Dr. P.T. Chelladurai

37. Purvika Sangita Unmai Ponnusami Pillai

38. Cilappatikarattil Isaiccelvangal Dr. Salem S. Jayalakshmi

39. Tamizisaip Padalgal Series-23 volumes Annamalai University

40. Tamizisai Nunukkam Isaiperarijnar Ko. Shanmugasundaram

41. Sirkazi Tamizisai Muvar Padalgal Isaiperarijnar Ko. Shanmugasundaram

42. Muvar Tevarappadalgal Isaiperarijnar Ko. Shanmugasundaram

43. Kuttanul Sattanar

44. Karunamritha Sagaram Abraham Pandithar

45. Pazantamizisai Ku Kothandapani Pillai

46. Kavadiccindu Dr. S. Ramanathan

47. Tevaram, Divyaprabandham Dr. S. Ramanathan

48. Tevara Divyaprabandhap Padalgal M.M. Dandapani Desikar

49. Isai Malar Kottu T.M. Tyagarajan

50. Tamizarisai Dr. A.N. Perumal

51. Isaittamiz Ka Vellai Varanan

221

52. Putiya Ragangal Prof. Ku. A. Thanapandiyan

53. Nunnalagukalum Ragangalum Prof. Ku. A. Thanapandiyan

54. Tiruppugaz Padalgalil candakkurugal Dr. E. Angayakkanni

55. Tiruppugazisai Dr. E. Angayakkanni

56. Tirujnanasambandar Tevara Padalgalil Isai Dr. E. Angayakkanni

57. Isaiyum ilakkiyamum Dr. E. Angayakkanni

58. Panchamarapil Isai Marapu Dr. E. Angayakkanni

59. Cilappatikarattil Kanappadum isaippadalgal Dr. E. Angayakkanni

60 Sekkizharum Isaiththamizhum Dr.M.A.Bhageerathi

61. Cindupadalkalin Yappilakkanam Dr. Ira. Tirumurugan

62. Cinduppaviyal Dr. Ira. Tirumurugan

63. Cindu Ilakkiyam Dr. Ira. Tirumurugan

64. Cilappatikaram - Tamizan Padaitha Kalaikkaruvulam Dr. Ira. Tirumurugan

65. Isaiyum Yazum A. Raghavan

66. Yazhnool Vipulananda Adigal

67. Tanjore as a Seat of Music Dr.S.Seetha

68. Kathakalakshepa – A Study Dr. M.Premeela

69. Music through the Ages Dr V Premlatha

70. Isaittamizh Ilakkana Vilakkam Gomathi Sankarayyar

222

DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE(AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI- 600 004.

MINUTES OF THE BOARD MEETING

The Board Meeting for verifying the Syllabus for M.Phil., Music was held on 16/02/2018 at the Department of Music, Queen Mary’s College (Autonomous).

It was resolved that the changes made be passed from the Academic Year 2018-2019.

Members present

5. Dr. Rajsri Sripathy Head, Department of Indian Music

University of Madras, Chennai- 600 005

6. Dr. M.A. Bhageerathi Associate Professor and Head

Department of Music

Queen Mary’s College(Autonomous)

Chennai- 600 004.

7. Dr. R. Abhiramasundari Associate Professor

Department of Music

Queen Mary’s College(Autonomous)

223

Chennai- 600 004.

8. Dr. Shanti Mahesh Assistant Professor

Department of Music

Queen Mary’s College(Autonomous)

Chennai- 600 004.

224

` M. Phil Revised Syllabus- From the Academic Year 2017-2018

Paper I RESEARCH METHODOLOGY CODE: MCC1

1. Choosing a Topic 2. Data Collection; Field Work 3. Source Cards; Reference Cards 4. Organization of material and Analysis 5. The Structure of a Dissertation a) Preface b) Acknowledgement c) Introduction d) Chapterisation e) Notes, Foot Notes f) Charts g) Appendix h) Bibliography i) Audio-References j) Video-References k) Photo Plates l) Roman Script with Diacritical Marks

Paper II AREAS OF RESEARCH IN MUSIC CODE: MCC2

UNIT-1

Music Concepts and analysis of Musical Forms- dhata, matu, tala, laya, Styles of Composers

UNIT-2

1.Thevara Moovar 2. Thiruvarur Moovar

UNIT-3

Sirkazhi Moovar

UNIT-4

Preparation of Key words Index from articles published in specified issues of a Journal

225

UNIT-5

Contribution by the Legends to Music

M.S.S., Dhandapani Desikar, Sirkazhi Govindarajan, Vina Dhanammal, Maharajapuram Viswanatha Iyer, Semmangudi Srinivasa Iyer, Ariyakudi Ramanuja Iyengar, G.N.B., D. K. Pattammal, Brinda and Muktha, Dharmapuram Swaminathan

Paper III

⃰⃰ Guide Paper

⃰⃰ Paper IV

⃰⃰ Dissertation

M. Phil BROAD AREA PAPERS

I COMPOSERS

1. Life and contribution of , and &

Arunagirinathar

2. Life and contribution of 12 Alwars

3. Life and contribution of Arunachalakavi, Marimutha Pillai and Muthuthandavar

4. Life and contribution of Tyagaraja, Muthusvami Dikshitar and Syama Sastri

5. Life and contribution of Mahakavi Subramanya Bharathiyar, Bharathi Dasan, Kavimani Desika Vinayakam Pillai

II MUSICIANS

1. Life and contribution of MahaVaidyanatha Ayyar and MahaVaidyanatha Sivan

2. Life and contribution of Dandapani Desikar, Musiri Subramanya Ayyar, Mudikontan Venkatarama Ayyar, Sirkazhi GovindaRajan, Somasundaram

226

3. Life and contribution of Vena Dhanammal, Brinda and Mukta, M.S. Subbulakshmi, D.K. Pattammal, M.L. Vasantha Kumari

4. Life and contribution of Tirukkodikkaval Krishna Ayyar, G. N. Balasubramanyam, Kumbakonam Rajamanickam Pillai, Thiruvalankadu Sundaresa Ayyar, Naina Pillai

5. Life and contribution of P. Sambamurthy, Flute Mahalingam, Flute Thiruppamburam Swaminatha Pillai, Rajarathnam Pillai, Tavil Meenakshi Sundaram Pillai, Chidambaram Nataraja Pillai

III MUSICOLOGY- Sanskrit Tradition

1. Musical References in Natyasastra

2. Musical References in Brhaddesi

3. Musical References in Sangita Ratnakara

4. Musical References in Chaturdandi Prakasika

5. Musical References in Sangraha Chudamani

IV MUSICOLOGY Tamil Tradition

1. Musical References in Tolkappiyam

2. Musical References in Pathuppattu and Ettuththokai

3. Musical References in Silappadikaram

4. Musical References in Thevaram and Panniru Thirumurai

5. Musical References in Divyaprabandham and Thiruppugazh

V COMPARITIVE MUSICOLOGY

1. Introduction to Technical Terms in Hindustani Music

2. Musical forms in Hindustani Music

3. Hindustani Traditions

4. Hindustani Performances

5. Introduction to Western - Technical Terms and Basic Notation

227

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI 4. DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS Program- M.Sc. MATHEMATICS Syllabus from the Academic year 2018-2019

Semester PAPER Title of the Course Course Core/ HOURS/Week Marks Scheme Credits Page NO Code Elective No. SE IA Total I I Algebra-I C 6 75 25 100 4 4

II Mathematical C 6 75 25 100 4 5 Analysis

III Ordinary Differential C 6 75 25 100 4 7 Equations

IV Programming in C 6 75 25 100 4 9 C++ and

Maple

V Advanced C 6 75 25 100 4 11 Operations Research-I

Soft Skill-I 75 25 100 2 --

II VI Algebra-II C 6 75 25 100 4 13

VII Topology C 6 75 25 100 4 15

VIII Complex Analysis C 6 75 25 100 4 17

IX Elective- I E 4 3 (GROUP A)

X Elective- II E 4 3 (GROUP A)

XI Extra Disciplinary E 4 3 Paper-I

Soft Skill-II 75 25 100 2

228

Internship** 75 25 100 2

III XII Measure Theory and C 6 75 25 100 4 19 Integration

XIII Classical C 6 75 25 100 4 21 Mechanics

XIV Differential C 6 75 25 100 4 23 Geometry

XV Elective III E 4 3 (GROUP B)

XVI Elective IV E 4 3 (GROUP B)

XVII Extra Disciplinary E 4 3 Paper-II

Soft Skill-III 75 25 100 2

IV XVIII Functional Analysis C 6 75 25 100 4 25

XIX Tensor Analysis and C 6 75 25 100 4 27 Theory of Relativity

XX Fluid Dynamics C 6 75 25 100 4 29

XXI Advanced C 6 75 25 100 4 31 Operations Research -II

XXII Elective V E 6 75 25 100 3 (GROUP C)/Project

Soft Skill-IV 75 25 100 2

** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year.

229

Elective Papers For Major students

Semester Title of the Course Course Elective HOURS/Week Marks Scheme Credits Page Code No. SE IA Total GROUP A II Programming in C++ and E 4 60 40 100 3 34 Maple (Practical) Partial Differential E 4 75 25 100 3 36 Equations

Mathematical software - E 4 75 25 100 3 38 MATLAB

Fuzzy Sets and Their E 4 75 25 100 3 40 Applications

GROUP B III Number Theory and E 4 75 25 100 3 42 Cryptography

Formal Languages and E 4 75 25 100 3 44 Automata Theory

Advanced Graph Theory E 4 75 25 100 3 46

Calculus of Variations and E 4 75 25 100 3 48 Integral Equations

GROUP C IV Probability theory E 4 75 25 100 3 50

Stochastic Process E 4 75 25 100 3 52

230

Discrete Structures E 4 75 25 100 3 54

Non Major Electives

Semeste PAPE Title of the Cours Electiv HOURS/Wee Marks Scheme Credit Pag r R NO Course e k s e e Externa Interna Tota Code No. l l l I xI Resource EDP I 4 75 25 100 3 55 Managemen t Techniques

xvII Statistical EDP II 4 75 25 100 3 57 Methods

231

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester - I

Algebra-I Title of the Course To introduce the basic concepts and methods in the study of linear Objective transformations on finite dimensional vector spaces and their matrix form.

Paper Number I Category Core I Credits 4 Course Year Code Semester I 6 Hours/Week Course Outline UNIT-I :

Another counting principle – Class equation for finite groups and its applications – Sylow’s Theorems ( Theorem 2.12.1 –first proof only).

Chapter 2- Sections 2.11 and 2.12 (omit Lemma 2.12.5).

UNIT-II :

Direct products – Finite Abelian groups – Solvability by Radicals.

Chapter 2- Section 2.13 and 2.14 (Theorem 2.14.1 only). Chapter 5-Section 5.7 (Lemma 5.7.1, Lemma 5.7.2, Theorem 5.7.1).

UNIT-III:

Linear Transformations, Canonical forms, Triangular form- Nilpotent transformations. Chapter 6-Section 6.4, 6.5

UNIT-IV :

Canonical forms: A decomposition of v: Jordan form, Rational Canonical form. Chapter 6-Section 6.6 & 6.7

232

UNIT-V:

Trace and transpose – Hermitian, Unitary, Normal Transformations, Real quadratic forms. Chapter 6-Sections 6.8, 6.10 and 6.11

After successful completion of the syllabus students will know how to Outcomes apply sylow’s theorem in problems of finding the number of p- sylow subgroups and also the characteristics of various linear transformations.

Recommended I.N. Herstein , “Topics in Algebra” , Second Edition, Wiley Eastern Text Limited, New Delhi, 1975.

Reference Books& Artin M, “Algebra”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2000. Website Website: www.nptel.ac.in

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester - I

Title of the Course Mathematical Analysis To introduce the topics in Analysis at the Advanced Calculus Level Objective and to provide some of the abstract thinking that pervades Modern Analysis.

Paper Number II Category Core I Credits 4 Course Year Code Semester I Hours/Week 6

233

Course Outline UNIT I:

Riemann-Stieltjes integral: Introduction – Notation – The definition of Riemann-Stieltjes integral – Linear properties – Integration by parts – Change of variable in a Riemann-Stieltjes integral – Reduction to a Riemann-integral – Step functions as integrators – Reduction of a Riemann-Stieltjes integral to a finite sum - Euler’s Summation formula.

Chapter 7: Sections 7.1 – 7.10 of [1]

UNIT II:

Monotonically increasing integrators: Upper and lower integrals – Additive and Linearity properties of upper and lower integrals- Riemann’s condition – Comparison Theorems – Integrators of bounded variation – Sufficient conditions for existence of Riemann-Stieltjes integrals – Necessary conditions for existence of Riemann-Stieltjes integrals – Mean Value theorems for Riemann-Stieltjes integrals.

Chapter 7: Sections 7.11 – 7.18 of [1]

UNIT III:

Sequences of functions: Pointwise convergence of Sequences of functions – Examples of Sequences of real valued functions –Definition of uniform convergence – Uniform convergence and continuity – The Cauchy condition for uniform convergence – Uniform convergence of infinite series of functions – Uniform convergence and Riemann – Stieltjies integration – Nonuniformly convergence Sequences that can be integrated term by term – Uniform convergence and differentiation- Sufficient conditions for uniform convergence of a series – Uniform convergence and double sequences – Mean convergence.

Chapter 9: Sections 9.1 – 9.6, 9.8 – 9.13 of [1]

234

Course Outline UNIT IV :

Fourier Series: Introduction – Orthogonal systems of functions – The theorem on best approximation – The Fourier series of a function relative to an orthonormal system – Properties of the Fourier coefficients –The Riesz-Fischer theorem – The convergence and representation problems for trigonometric series – The Riemann Lebesgue Lemma – The Dirichlet integrals – An integral representation for the partial sums of a Fourier series – Riemann’s localization theorem - Sufficient conditions for convergence of a Fourier series at a particular point.

Chapter 11: Sections 11.1 – 11.12 of [1]

UNIT V:

Functions of Several Variables: Differentiation – Partial derivatives – The Contraction Principle – The Inverse Function Theorem – The Implicit Function Theorem.

Chapter 9: Sections 9.10 – 9.29 of [2]

Outcomes At the end of the course, the student will be able to understand Riemann stieltjes integrals, sequence of functions Fourier series and Functions of several variables

Recommended [1]. Tom M. Apostol, Mathematical Analysis, Second Edition, Text Addison Wesley Publishing Company Inc. New York, 1985.

[2]. Walter Rudin, Principles of Mathematical Analysis, 3rd Edition, Mc Graw Hill Book Company, New York, 1986.

1. Bartle R. G, Real Analysis, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 1976 Reference 2. Goldberg- Methods of Real Analysis. Books& 3. K. Viswanath Naik – Real Analysis, Emerald Publications. Website Website: www.nptel.ac.in

235

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester - I

Title of the Ordinary Differential Equations Course

Objective To import knowledge in advanced concept in study of solving linear differential equation of nth degree

Paper Number III Category Core I Credits 4 Course Year Code Semester I Hours/Week 6

Course Outline UNIT-I : Linear equations with Constant Coefficients: Introduction-The Second order homogeneous equation – Initial value problems for second order equations- Linear dependence and independence- A formula for Wronskian – The non-homogeneous equation of order two.

Chapter 2: Sections 1 to 6 UNIT-II :

Linear equations with Constant Coefficients: The Homogeneous equation of order n –Initial value problems for n-th order equations- The non-homogeneous equation of order n- A Special method for solving the non-homogeneous equation.

Chapter 2 : Sections 7-11 (Omit Section 9).

236

UNIT-III :

Linear Equation with Variable Coefficients: Introduction- Initial Value Problems for the homogeneous equation – Solutions of the homogeneous equation – The Wronskian and linear independence – Reduction of the order of a homogeneous equation – The non- homogeneous equation - Homogeneous equations with analytic coefficients-The Legendre equation.

Chapter 3 : Sections 1 to 8

UNIT-IV :

Linear equation with regular singular points: Introduction – The Euler equation – Second order equations with regular singular points- an example – Second order equations with regular singular points-the general case-The Bessel Equation.

Chapter 4 : Sections 1 to 4 and 7 to 8

UNIT-V : Existence and Uniqueness of Solutions to First Order Equations: Introduction-Equation with variables separated– Exact equations– The method of successive approximations – the Lipschitz condition – convergence of the successive approximations . Chapter 5 : Sections 1 to 6

Outcomes On completion of this course the learner should be able to, identify ,analyse and subsequently solve physical situations whose behavior can be described by ordinary differential equations. To determine solutions to second order linear homogenous and non-homogenous differential equations with constant coefficients.

Recommended E.A.Coddington, An Introduction to ordinary differential equations(3rd Text Printing) Prentice-Hall of India Ltd.,New Delhi, 2006.

237

1. Williams E. Boyce and Richard C. Di Prima, Elementary Reference differential equations and boundary value problems, John Wiley and sons, New York, 1967. Books& Web 2. George F Simmons, Differential equations with applications and site historical notes, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1974. 3. N.N. Lebedev, Special functions and their applications, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1965.

4. W.T.Reid. Ordinary Differential Equations, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1971.

5. M.D.Raisinghania, Advanced Differential Equations, S.Chand & Company Ltd. New Delhi 2001.

6. B.Rai, D.P.Choudhury and H.I. Freedman, A Course in Ordinary Differential Equations, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002.

7. S.G. Venkatachalapatty, Ordinary Differential Equations, Margham Publications, Chennai, 2005

Website: http://mathforum.org

M.Sc., Mathematics

Semester –I

Title of the Programming in C++ and Maple Course

Objective To learn basic concepts in Programming and develop skills in solving mathematical problems using C++ and Maple Programming

Paper Number IV

Category Core Year I Credits 4 Course Code Semester I Hours/Week 6

238

Course Outline UNIT-I :

Tokens, Expressions, Control Structures and Functions: Tokens, Keywords, Identifiers and constants, Basic data types, user defined, Derived data type, Constants, Variables, operators, Expression and Control Structures –Functions, Functions overloading, friend and virtual functions.

UNIT-II :

Classes and Objects: Classes ,Member function, Arrays within a class, Static member functions, objects, arrays of objects, objects as function arguments, friendly functions.

UNIT-III:

Constructors and destructors: Constructors, parametrized and multiple constructors, dynamic initialization of objects, copy constructor , dynamic constructors, Destructors.

UNIT –IV :

Introduction to Maple: Plotting curves-Composition of functions, Slope of a line, a secant, 2-D and 3-D graphs.Numerical Methods: Solving algebraic equations-Bisection Method, Newton Raphson Method and Secant Method.

UNIT-V:

Numerical Methods:Solving Linear system of equations-Gauss Elimination, Guass- Seidal, Guass Jordan Methods – Interpolation – Lagrange’s Interpolation Formula-Evaluation of Integrals-Trapezoidal Rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule, Simpson’s 3/8 rule – Numerical solution to differential equations, Euler’s Method and Runge-Kutta Method order 4.

239

Outcomes After the completion of this course, a successful student will be able to do the following, use the characteristics of an object –oriented programming language in a program. Use the basic object-oriented design principles in computer problem solving.

Recommended Text E.Balagurusamy, Object Oriented Programming with C++, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,1999

Chapters: 3.1-3.14, 3.17-3.24; 4.1-4.11;5(all) ;6(all)

Numerical Analysis: Richard L.Burden and J.Douglas Faires publisher : Brooks/Cole.

M.Sc., Mathematics

Semester –I

Advanced Operations Research-I Title of the Course To introduce Mathematical models for analysis of real problems using Operations Objective Research Techniques.

Paper V Number Category Core I Credits 4 Course Year Code Semester I Hours/Week 6

Course Outline UNIT-I : Revised Simplex Method : Introduction – Standard Forms for Revised Simplex Method – Computational Procedure for Standard Form I – Comparison of Simplex Method and Revised Simplex Method.

Dual-Simplex Method :Introduction-Dual Simplex Algorithm-Problems. Chapters: 26(26.1 to 26.4) & Chapter 27 (27.1 & 27.2).

240

IT UNIT II :

Deterministic Inventory Control Models : Introduction- Inventory Model Building-Single Items Inventory Control Models without Shortages-Model I(a) , Model I(b) , Model I(c)- Single Item Inventory Control Models With Shortages-Model II(a) , Model II(b) , Model II(c)- Multi-Item Inventory Models with Constraints- Model III(a) , Model III(b) , Model III(c) and Model III(d). Chapter 14(14.1 to 14.9).

UNIT-III:

Probabilistic Inventory Control Models: Introduction-Instantaneous Demand Inventory Control Models Without Set-up Cost-Model I , Model II , Model III(a) , Model III(b) , Model III(c)- Continuous Demand Inventory Control Models Without Set-up Cost- Model IV(a) , Model IV(b)-Instantaneous Demand Inventory Control Models With Set-up Cost- Model V(a).

Chapter 15 (15.1 to 15.4).

UNIT-IV :

Queuing Theory: Introduction-Essential Features of Queuing System-Performance Measures of Queuing System-Probability Distributions in Queuing System- Classification of Queuing Models-Single-Server Queuing Models – Model I : {(M/M/1): (∞/FCFS)} , Model II : {(M/M/1): (∞/SIRO)} , Model III : {(M/M/1): (N/FCFS)} . Chapter 16(16.1 to 16.6)

UNIT-V :

Queuing Theory: Multi-Server Queuing Model- Model IV: {(M/M/S): (∞/FCFS)} - Model V :{(M/M/S): (N/FCFS)}-Finite Calling Population Queuing Model- Model VI :{(M/M/1): (M/GD)}- Model VII :{(M/M/S): (M/GD)}.

Chapter 16(16.7 to 16.9)

Outcomes Identify and develop operational research models from the verbal description of the real system. Understand the mathematical tool that are needed to solve optimization problems

241

Recommended J.K.Sharma, Operations Research (Third Edition), Macmillan (India) New Delhi 2007 Text

1. A. Taha, Operations Research, (seventh edition) Reference Prentice – Hall of Hamdy India Private Limited, New Delhi, 1997. 2. F.S. Hiller & J.Lieberman Introduction to Operation Research Books (7th Edition) Tata- McGraw Hill Company, New Delhi, 2001. & Website 3. Beightler. C, D.Phillips, B. Wilde ,Foundations of Optimization (2nd Edition) Prentice Hall Pvt Ltd., New York, 1979. 4. Problems in Operations Research, Er.Prem kumar Gupta & Dr.D.S.Hira, S.Chand. 5. S.S. Rao – Optimization Theory and Applications, Wiley Eastern Ltd. New Delhi. 1990 . 6. S.D.Sharma, Operations Research (19th Edition), Kedar Nath Ram Nath Publisher, Meerut 2017.

Website : www.nptel.com

242

M.Sc., Mathematics

Semester –II

Algebra – II Title of the Course

Objective To study the extension fields and the properties using the concept of vector fields and to discuss the polynomial equations and there by defining the Galois group. Two main theorems have been proved using the finite field theory.

Paper Number VI Category Core I Credits 4 Course Year Code Semester II Hours/Week 6

Course Outline UNIT-I :

Extension fields : The degree of K over F, Finite extension of a field, Algebraic extension of a field, Algebraic number.

Chapter 5- Sections 5.1 and 5.2

UNIT-II :

Roots of polynomials , Remainder theorem, root with multiplicity m, Splitting fields, More about roots.

Chapter 5 – Sections 5.3 and 5.5

UNIT-III:

Elements of Galois Theory. Galois group, Order of a Galois group, Theorem on symmetric polynomials, Normal extension, Fundamental theorem of Galois theory.

Chapter 5 – Section 5.6

243

UNIT-IV :

Finite Fields: Finite fields with Pm elements, isomorphism of finite fields, Weddurburns theorem of finite division rings.

Chapter 7 – Sections 7.1 and 7.2 (Theorem 7.2.1 only)

UNIT-V:

A Theorem of Frobenius – Integral Quaternions and four square theorem. Adjoint, norms, Lagrange identity, Lagrange’s four square theorem.

Chapter 7 – Sections 7.3 & 7.4

Outcomes After successful completion of the syllabus the student will be able to compare the extension field and the vector space. They will be able to understand the splitting field of a polynomial.

Recommended I.N. Herstein , “Topics in Algebra” , Second Edition, Wiley Eastern Text Limited, New Delhi, 1975.

1. M.Artin, Algebra, Prentice Hall of India, 1991. Reference 2. B.Bhattacharya, S.K.Jain and S.R.Nagpaul, Basic Abstract Books& Algebra (II Edition), Cambrindge University Press, 1997 ( Indian Edition). Website 3. I.S.Luther and I.B.S.Passi, Algebra, Vol. I- Groups(1996); Vol. II Rings, Narosa Pubilshing House, New Delhi, 1999.

Website: www.nptel.ac.in

244

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester - II

Title of the Course Topology

Objective To impart knowledge of Topology which serves to lay foundation in Analysis , Geometry and in Algebraic Topology

Paper Number VII Category Core I Credits 4 Course Year Code Semester II Hours/Week 6

Course Outline UNIT-I :

Topological Spaces: Topological Spaces – Basis for a topology – The order topology – The product topology on X x Y – The sub space topology – closed sets and limit points.

Chapter 2: Section 12 to 17.

UNIT-II :

Continuous functions: Continuous function – homeomorphisms- Constructing Continuous function – The Product topology – The metric topology.

Chapter 2: Section 18 to 21.

UNIT-III : Connectedness: Connected spaces– connected subspace of the real line – Components and local connectedness.

Chapter 3: Section 23 to 25.

245

UNIT-IV :

Compact sets: Compact spaces – compact sets in the real line – Limit point compactness – local compactness.

Chapter 3: Section 26 to 29.

UNIT-V:

The countability and Separation axioms: The countability axioms – the separation axioms – normal spaces – The Urysohn Lemma – The Tietz extension Theorem – Urysohn Metrization theorem.

Chapter 4: Section 30 to 34.

Outcomes After the completion of the course the student will be able to understand properties and results related to topological spaces and also techniques of proving basic theorems on topological spaces.

Recommended James . R.Munkres, Topology, 2nd Edition, PHI Learning Private Ltd., Text New Delhi, 2011.

1. George F.Simmons Introduction to Topology and Modern Reference Analysis, Books& McGraw Hill Book Company. 2. J.Dugundji, Topology, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1975. Website 3. S.Willard, General Topology, Addison-3Wesley, Mass.,1970.

Web site: www.nptel.ac.in

246

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester - II

247

Title of the Complex Analysis Course

Objective To introduce conceptual learning of complex analysis at higher level

Paper Number VIII Category Core I Credits 4 Course Year Code Semester II Hours/Week 6

Course Outline UNIT-I :

The General Form of Cauchy’s theorem: Chains and cycles- Simple connectivity- Homology-General Statement of Cauchy’s Theorem- Proof of Cauchy theorem – Locally exact Differentials- Multiply Connected Region.

The Calculus of Residues: The Residue theorem- The Argument Principle.

Chapter 4 : Section 4.1 to 4.7, 5.1 and 5.2,

UNIT-II :

Harmonic Functions: Definition and basic properties-The Mean Value Property- Poisson’s formula.

A Closer Look at Harmonic functions:Function with Mean value property- Harnack’s Principle.

Chapter 4 : Section 6 : 6.1 to 6.3: Chapter 6 : Section 3 : 3.1 to 3.2

UNIT-III :

Partial Fractions and Factorisation: Partial fractions- Infinite products- Canonical products- The Gamma Function..

Entire Functions: Jensen’s formula- Hadamard’s theorem.

Chapter 5 : Section 2 : 2.1 to 2.4, Section 3 : 3.1 to 3.2.

248

UNIT-IV :

The Riemann Zeta Function : The Product development- Extension of ζ(s) to the whole plane-The Functional Equation- The Zeros of the Zeta function.

Chapter 5 : Section 4 : 4.1 to 4.4

UNIT-V:

Elliptic Functions: Simply Periodic Functions: Representation by Exponentials-The Fourier Development-Functions of finite order.

Doubly Periodic Functions: The Period Module – Unimodular Transformations- The Canonical Basis – General Properties of Elliptic Functions.

The Weierstrass Theory:The Weierstrass -function –The Functions

ζ (z) and σ(z) – The differential equation.

Chapter 7 : Section 1: 1.1 to 1.3, Section 2 : 2.1 to 2.4, Section 3 : 3.1 to 3.3.

Outcomes Students will have the knowledge and skills to explain the fundamental concepts of complex Analysis. Demonstrate capacity for mathematical reasoning through analyzing, proving and explaining concepts from complex analysis.

Recommended Text Lars V.Ahlfors, Complex Analysis, Third Edition.

1. S.Ponnusamy, Foundations of Complex Analysis, Second Edition, Reference Narosa Publishing Pvt.Ltd. Books & 2. E.Hille, Analytic function theory, 1959. 3. J.B.Conway, Functions of one complex variables , Springer-Verlag, Website International student Edition, Narosa Publishing Co. Website: www.nptel.ac.in

249

M.Sc. Mathematics Semester - III

Title of the Measure Theory and Integration Course

Objective To introduce the basic concepts of Lebesgue measure and to teach how Integration can be approached via measure.

Paper Number XII Category Core II Credits 4 Course Year Code Semester III Hours/Week 6

Course Outline UNIT-I : Measure on the Real line: Lebesgue outer measure – Measurable sets – Regularity – Measurable functions – Borel and Lebesgue measurability. Chapter 2: Sections 2.1 to 2.5

UNIT-II: Integration of functions of a real variable: Integration of non negative functions – The general integral – Integration of series – Riemann and Lebesgue integrals. Chapter 3: Sections 3.1 to 3.4

UNIT- III: Abstract Measure spaces: Measures and outer measures – Extension of a measure – Uniqueness of the extension – Completion of a measure – Measure Spaces – Integration with respect to a measure. Chapter 5: Sections 5.1 to 5.6

250

UNIT-IV : Inequalities and 푳풑 spaces: The 퐿푝 spaces – Convex functions – Jensen’s inequality – The inequalities of Holder and Minkowski. Convergence: Convergence in Measure – Almost Uniform Convergence. Chapter 6: Sections 6.1 to 6.4 , Chapter 7: Sections 7.1 to 7.2 UNIT-V : Signed Measures and their Derivatives: Signed Measures and the Hahn Decomposition – The Jordan Decomposition – The Radon-Nikodym Theorem – Some Applications of the Radon-Nikodym Theorem. Chapter 8 : Sections 8.1 to 8.4

Outcomes At the end of the course ,the student will be able to understand lebesgue outer measure, Integration of functions of a real variable,abstract measure space, L space

Recommended Text G. de Barra, Measure Theory and Integration, New International (P) Ltd. 2006

1. Tom M. Apostol Mathematical Analysis 2nd Edition , Narosa Publication House, 1985. 2. H.L.Royden, Real Analysis, 2nd Edition, Collier Macmillon Reference International Editions, 1968. Books& 3. W. Rudin, Principles of Mathematical Analysis 3rd Edition Mc Graw –Hill Book company, New York, 1979 Website Website: www.nptel.ac.in

251

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester - III

Title of the Course Classical Mechanics Objective To study various mechanical principles and to formulate various differential equations of Mechanical systems Paper XIII Number Category Core II Credits 4 Course Year Code Semester III Hours/Week 6

Course Outline UNIT-I :

Mechanical Systems: The Mechanical system- Generalized coordinates- Constraints- Virtual work- Energy and Momentum.

Chapter 1 : Section 1.1 to 1.5

252

UNIT-II :

Lagrange’s Equations: Derivation of Lagrange’s equations- Examples- Integrals

of Motion.

Chapter 2 :Sections 2.1 to 2.3 UNIT III :

Hamilton’s equation: Hamilton’s principle- Hamilton’s Equation- Other Variational Principle.

Chapter 4: Sections 4.1 to 4.3 UNIT-IV :

Hamilton- Jacobi Theory: Hamilton Principle function- Hamilton- Jacobi Equation.

Chapter 5: Section 5.1 & 5.2 UNIT-V:

Canonical transformations: Differential forms and generating function. Further comments on the Hamilton- Jacobi method. Lagrange and Poisson brackets.

Chapter 6: Section 6.1 & 6.3.

Outcomes To apply concepts of mass,momentum and energy conservation.to understand the dynamics of fluid flows and governing non-dimensional parameters. Recommended D. Greenwood, Classical Dynamics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1985. Text 1. Goldstein , Classical Mechanics, ( 2nd Edition), Narosa Publishing Reference house, New Delhi. 2. Synge and Griffith , Principles of Mechanics , 3rd Edition, McGraw Books& Hill Book & Co.., New York, 1970. Website 3. Sankara Rao, “Classical Mechanics” Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi 2005. 4. Rana N.C and Joag P.S “Classical Mechanics” Tata McGraw Hall, 1991.

Website : http://www.brown.edu / Department

253

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester - III

254

Differential Geometry Title of the Course

Objective To understand the concept of curvature and torsion of a space curve. To study different types of curvatures associated to a surface. To compute the first and second fundamental forms of a surface and thereby determining the local shape of the surface.

Paper Number XIV Category Core II Credits 4 Course Year Code

Semester III Hours/Week 6

Course Outline UNIT-I : The Theory of Space curves:

Definition of a Space Curve – Arc length- Tangent, Normal and Binormal – Curvature and Torsion of a curve given as the intersection of two surfaces – Contact between curves and surfaces – Tangent surface, Involutes and Evolutes – Intrinsic Equations – Fundamental Existence Theorem for Space curves – Helices.

Chapter 1: Sections 1 to 9

UNIT-II : Local Intrinsic properties of a surface:

Definition of a surface – Curves on a Surface - Surface of revolution – Helicoids – Metric – Direction Coefficients – Families of curves

Chapter 2: Sections 1 to 7

UNIT-III : Geodesics:

Definition – Canonical Geodesics Equations – Normal Property of Geodesics – Existence theorems – Geodesics parallels.

Chapter 2: Sections 10 to 14

255

UNIT-IV :

Geodesics curvature – Gauss-Bonnet Theorem – Gaussian curvature – Surfaces of constant curvature.

Chapter 2: Sections 15 to 18

UNIT-V: Local Non intrinsic properties of a surface:

The Second Fundamental form – Principal Curvatures – Lines of Curvature – Developables – Developable associated with space curves and with curves on surfaces.

Chapter 3: Sections 1 to 6

Outcomes At the end of the course, the student will be able to understand the concept of curvature and torsion of a space curve, curves on surfaces, types of curvatures on surfaces. Recommended Text T.J. Willmore, An introduction to Differential Geometry, Oxford University Press ( 20th Impression), New Delhi 2005 (Indian Print)

[1] A.N. Pressley, Elementary Differential Geometry, 2nd Edition, Reference Springer-Verlag London Ltd, 2012. [2] J.A. Thorpe, Elementary Topics in Diffrential Geometry , Books & Undergraduate Texts in Mathematics, Springer-Verlag, 1979. Website [3] S.G. Venkatachalapathy, Differential Geometry, Margham Publications, Chennai, 2007.

Website: www.nptel.ac.in

256

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester - IV

Title of the Functional Analysis Course To introduce concepts of Functional Analysis which is very much useful to pursue Objective research in Analysis and Engineering fields .

Paper Number XVIII Category Core II Credits 4 Course Year Code Semester IV Hours/Week 6

Course Outline UNIT-I : Banach Spaces : Definition – Some examples – Continuous Linear Transformations – The Hahn-Banach Theorem - The natural embedding of N in N**.

Chapter 9 : Sections 46 to 49. UNIT-II : Banach Spaces : The Open mapping theorem - The conjugate of an operator. Hilbert Spaces : Definition and properties – Orthogonal complements – Orthonormal sets.

Chapter 9, 10 : Sections 50 to 54 UNIT-III: Hilbert Spaces : Conjugate space H* - Adjoint of an operator – Self-adjoint operator – Normal and Unitary Operators – Projections.

Chapter 10 : Sections 55 to 59

257

UNIT-IV : General Preliminaries on Banach Algebras : Definition and some examples – Regular and singular elements – Topological divisors of zero – The spectrum – The formula for the spectral radius – The radical and semi-simplicity.

Chapter 12 : Sections 64 to 69.

UNIT-V: The structure of commutative Banach Algebras: The Gelfand mapping – Involutions in Banach algebras – The Gelfand –Neumark theorem.

Chapter 13 : Sections 70 to 73.

Outcomes The student has knowledge of central concepts from functional Analysis, including the Hahn-Banach Theorem, The Open mapping Theorem, Closed graph Theorem and Banach Algebras

Recommended Text G.F.Simmons , Introduction to Topology and Modern Analysis, McGraw Hill Education( India) Private Limited, Edition 2004.

Reference Books& 1.W.Rudin Functional Analysis, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, New Website Delhi , 1973 2. G. Bachman & L.Narici, Functional Analysis Academic Press, New York, 1966. 3.C. Goffman and G.Pedrick, First course in Functional Analysis, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1987 4. Balmohan. V. Limaye Functional Analysis, Second Edition, New Age International (P) Limited Publisher. 5. M.Thamban Nair, Functional Analysis. A First Course, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2002

Website :www.sciencedirect.com

258

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester - IV

Tensor Analysis and Theory of Relativity Title of the Course To Introduce new concepts and techniques of vectors in higher dimension Objective and to apply the techniques in calculus of variation. To study the concepts of theory of relativity.

Paper Number XIX Category Core II Credits 4 Course Year Code

Semester IV Hours/Week 6

Course Outline UNIT-I:

Tensor Algebra :Systems of Different orders – Summation Convention – Kronecker Symbols - Transformation of coordinates – Covariant and Contravariant vectors - Tensors of Second Order – Mixed Tensors – Zero Tensor – Tensor Field – Algebra of Tensors – Equality of Tensors – Symmetric and Skew-symmetric tensors - Outer multiplication, Contraction and Inner Multiplication – Quotient Law of Tensors .

259

UNIT-II: Metric Tensor: Reciprocal Tensor – Relative Tensor – Cross Product of Vectors. Tensor Calculus : Riemannian Space – Christoffel Symbols and their properties.

UNIT-III: Tensor Calculus: Covariant Differentiation of Tensors – Riemann– Christoffel Curvature Tensor – Intrinsic and absolute Derivative. UNIT-IV : Special Theory of Relativity : Galilean Transformations – The ether Theory – The Principle of Relativity. Relativistic Kinematics :Lorentz Transformation equations – Events and simultaneity –Einstein Train – Time dilation – Longitudinal Contraction - Invariant Interval - Proper time and Proper distance - World line - Twin paradox UNIT-V: Addition of velocities – Relativistic Doppler effect. Relativistic Dynamics :Momentum – Energy – Momentum energy four vector – Force - Conservation of Energy – Mass and energy – Example – inelastic collision – Principle of equivalence – Lagrangian and Hamiltonian formulations. At the end of the course the student will be able to categorize the different types of tensors and its application in higher dimension and they will be Outcomes able to understand the principle of relativity, Lagrangian and Hamiltonian formulations. Recommended Text 1.Vector Analysis by Murray and Spiegal (Units I, II and III) 2. D.Greenwood, Classical Dynamics, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1985. (Unit-IV & Unit-V)

1. J.L.Synge and A.Schild, Tensor Calculus, Toronto, 1949. Reference 2. A.S.Eddington. The Mathematical Theory of Relativitity, Cambridge University Press, 1930. Books 3. P.G.Bergman, An Introduction to Theory of Relativity, Newyork, & Website 1942. 4. C.E.Weatherburn, Riemannian Geometry and the Tensor Calculus, Cambridge, 1938.

Website:http://www.mas.nesu.edu/zhu

260

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester - IV

261

Title of the Fluid Dynamics Course

Objective To implant mathematical approach in study of motions of fluids.

Paper Number XX Category Core II Credits 4 Course Year Code Semester IV Hours/Week 6

Course Outline UNIT-I :

Kinematics of fluids in Motion: Real Fluids and Ideal Fluids – Velocity of a Fluid at a Point – Streamlines and Pathlines; Steady and Unsteady Flows - The Velocity Potential - The Vorticity Vector - Local and Particle Rates of Change – The Equation of Continuity - Examples – Acceleration of a Fluid – Conditions at a Rigid Boundary.

Chapter 2: Section 2.1 to 2.10

UNIT-II :

Equation of Motion of a Fluid: Pressure at a Point in a Fluid at Rest – Pressure at a Point in a Moving Fluid – Conditions at a Boundary of Two Inviscid Immiscible Fluids - Euler’s Equations of Motion – Ber noulli’s

Equation – Examples.

Chapter 3 : Sections 3.1 to 3.6

UNIT-III :

Some Three-Dimensional Flows: Introduction-Sources, Sinks and Doublets – Images in a Rigid Infinite Plane – Images in Solid Sphere – Axi- Symmetric flows ; Stoke’s Stream Function – Some Special Forms of the Stream function for Axi -Symmetric Irrotational Motions.

Chapter 4 : Sections 4.1 to 4.5

262

UNIT-IV :

Some Two -Dimensional Flows: Meaning of Two Dimensional Flow – Use of Cylindrical Polar Coordinates–The Stream Function- The Complex Potential for Two Dimensional, Irrotational, Incompressible Flow – Complex Velocity Potentials for Standard Two Dimensional Flows – Uniform Stream :Line sources and Line Sinks ; Line Doublets ; Line Vortices – Examples.

Chapter 5 : Sections 5.1 to 5.6

UNIT-V :

Viscous Flow: Stress Components in Real Fluid-Relations between Cartesian Components of Stress-Translational Motion of Fluid Element-The Rate of Strain Quardric and Principal Stresses- Some Further Properties of the Rate of Strain Quadric- Stress Analysis in Fluid Motion- Relations between Stress and Rate of Strain- The Coefficient of Viscosity and Laminar Flow- The Navier- Stokes Equations of Motion of a Viscous Fluid.

Chapter 8 : Sections 8.1 to 8.9

Outcomes To develop an appreciation for the properties of Newtonian fluids and to apply analytical solutions to variety of simplified problems.

Recommended Text F. Chorlton, “Text Book of fluid Dynamics”, CBS Publications Delhi -1985

1. Milne Thomson - Theoretical Hydrodynamics Reference 2. Rutherford - Fluid Dynamics 3. Bansal - Viscous flow Books& 4. S. N. Yvan - Foundation of Fluid Dynamics Website Website: http://mathforum.org

263

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester - IV

Advanced Operations Research-II Title of the Course To introduce Mathematical models for analysis of real problems using Objective Operations Research Techniques.

Paper Number XXI Category Core II Credits 4 Course Year Code Semester IV Hours/Week 6

Course Outline UNIT-I :

Integer Linear Programming: Introduction-Types of Integer Linear Programming Problems – Concept of Cutting Plane – Gomory’s All Integer Cutting Plane Method – Gomory’s mixed Integer Cutting Plane method – Branch and Bound Method.

Chapters: 7.(7.1 to 7.6)

UNIT-II :

Simulation : Introduction – Simulation Defined – Types of Simulation – Steps of Simulation Process – Advantages and Disadvantages of Simulation – Stochastic Simulation and Random Numbers – Monte Carlo Simulation – Random Number Generation – Problems – Role of Computer in Simulation – Application of Simulation.

264

Chapters: 19

UNIT-III:

Classical Optimization Methods: Unconstrained Optimization – Constrained Multi-variable Optimization with Equality Constraints - Constrained Multi-variable Optimization with inequality Constraints .

Chapters: 23

UNIT-IV :

Non-linear Programming Methods: Introduction – General NLPP – Graphical solution method – Quadratic Programming – Kuhn-Tucker conditions-Wolfe’s modified Simplex Methods – Beale’s Method.

Chapter 24.(24.1 to 24.4)

UNIT-V: Dynamic Programming:

Introduction-Dynamic Programming Terminology-Developing Optimal Decision Policy-General Algoritham- Dynamic Programming under Certainty-Model I:Shortest Route Problem- Model II: Multiplicative Separable Return Function and Single Additive Constraint- Model III: Additive Separable Return Function and Single Additive Constraint- Model IV: Additive Separable Return Function and Single Multiplicative Constraint- Dynamic Programming Approach for Solving Linear Programming Problem.

Chapter 20 (20.1 to 20.5).

Identify and develop operational research models from the verbal description of the real system. Understand the mathematical tool that Outcomes are needed to solve optimization problems

Recommended Text J.K.Sharma, Operations Research(3rd Edition) , Macmillan (India) New Delhi- 2007

265

1. A. Taha, Operations Research, (seventh edition) Reference Prentice - Hall of Hamdy India Private Limited, New Delhi, 1997. Books 2. F.S. Hiller & J.Lieberman Introduction to Operation Research & Website (7th Edition) Tata- McGraw Hill Company, New Delhi, 2001. 3. Beightler. C, D.Phillips, B. Wilde ,Foundations of Optimization (2nd Edition) Prentice Hall Pvt Ltd., New York, 1979. 4. Problems in Operations Research,Er.Prem kumar Gupta & Dr.D.S.Hira.S.Chand. 5. S.S. Rao - Optimization Theory and Applications, Wiley Eastern Ltd. New Delhi. 1990 . 6. S.D.Sharma, Operations Research (19th Edition),Kedar Nath Ram Nath Publisher,Meerut.

Website : www.nptel.com

266

Elective Subjects for Major Students

M.Sc., Mathematics

Semester -II

Title of the Course Programming in C++ and Maple (Practical)

Objective To execute C++ and Maple Programming in computer lab.

Paper Number Category Elective I Credits 3 Course Year Code GROUP Semester II Hours/Week 4 A

Course Outline C++ PROGRAMS

267

1. Write a class called employee that contains a name and an employee number. Include a member function to get data from the user for insertion into object and another function to display the data. Write a main program to create an array of employee information and accept information from the user and finally print the information.

2. Write a program to use a common friend function to exchange the private values of two classes.

3. Write a program to read a set of numbers from the keyboard and to sort out the given array of elements in ascending order using a function 4. Write a program to solve a quadratic equation.

5. Write a program to construct a matrix of size m × n and output a particular element of the matrix. 6. Write a program to perform addition and subtraction operations using complex numbers. 7. Write a program to find the square of a given number with different arguments using function overloading.

8. Write a program to generate a series of Fibonacci numbers.

9. Write a program to concatenate two strings using dynamic Constructors.

10. Write a program to calculate the simple interest and output it.

MAPLE PROGRAMS

268

11. Write a Maple procedure for solving an algebraic equation by Bisection method. 12. Write a Maple procedure for solving an algebraic equation by Newton Raphson method 13. Write a Maple procedure for solving an algebraic equation by secant method. 14. Write a Maple procedure for solving a system of linear equation by Guass elimination method. 15. Write a Maple procedure for solving a system of linear equation by Guass Jordan method. 16. Write a Maple procedure for solving a system of linear equation by Guass Seidal method. 17. Write a Maple procedure for finding Lagrange Polynomial and to find a interpolated value. 18. Write a Maple procedure for evaluating definite integral by Trapezoidal rule 19. Write a Maple procedure for evaluating definite integral by Simpson’s 1/3 rule. 20. Write a Maple procedure for evaluating definite integral by Simpson’s 3/8 rule. 21. Write a Maple procedure for solving Differential equation by Euler’s method. 22. Write a Maple procedure for solving Differential equation by Runge Kutta method of order 4. Outcomes After the completion of this course, a successful student will be able to do the following 1. Use the characteristics of an object oriented programming language in a program 2. Use the basic object-oriented design principles in computer problem solving 3. Maple provides an interaction problem solving environment,complete with procedures for performing symbolic,numeric and graphical computations

269

Recommended E.Balagurusamy, Object Oriented Programming with C++, Tata Text McGraw Hill, New Delhi,1999

Chapters: 3.1-3.14, 3.17-3.24; 4.1-4.11;5(all) ;6(all),7.1-7.5, 7.7-7.8, 8.1-8.9.

Numerical Analysis: Richard L.Burden and J.Douglas Faires publisher : Brooks/Cole.

D.Ravichandhran, Programming with C++, Tata McGraw Hill, New Reference Delhi,1996.

Books& Website www.cprogrammming.com Website

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester -II

Title of the Course Partial Differential Equations

Objective To give an introduction to mathematical techniques in analysis of 2nd order linear partial differential equations. Finding solutions of linear pde by various methods are introduced.

Paper Number Category Elective I Credits 3 Course Year Code GROUP Semester II Hours/Week 4 A

270

Course Outline UNIT-I : Mathematical Models and classification of 2 nd order equation Classical equations – Vibrating String, Vibrating membrane- waves in elastic medium – Conduction of heat in solids- Second order equations in two independent variables- Canonical forms- Equations with constant coefficients- general solution.

Chapter 2: Sections 2.1 to 2.5 and Chapter 3: Sections 3.1 to 3.4

UNIT-II :

Cauchy Problem: The Cauchy Problem- Cauchy- Kowalewsky theorem- Homogeneous wave equation- Initial Boundary Value Problem- Non – Homogeneous boundary conditions- finite string with fixed ends- Non – Homogeneous wave equation- Riemann method.

Chapter 4: Sections 4.1 to 4.8.

UNIT-III:

Method of separation of variables: Separation of variable-Vibrating string problem- Existence and uniqueness of solution of Vibration string problem-Heat conduction problem- Existence and uniqueness of solution of heat conduction problem.

Chapter 6: Sections 6.1 to 6.5

UNIT-IV:

Boundary Value Problem: Boundary value problems-Maximum and minimum Principles-Uniqueness and continuity theorem- Dirichlet problem for a circle, a circular annulus, a rectangle.

Chapter 8: Section 8.1 to 8.7

UNIT-V:

Green’s Function: The delta function- Green’s function- method of green’s function- Dirichlet problem for the Laplace and Helmholtz operator.

Chapter 10: Section 10.1 to 10.5

271

Outcomes Introduce students how to solve linear partial differential equation with different methods upon successful completion of this syllabus, the student will be able to classify partial differential equation and transform into canonical form and solve partial differential equation of second order equations

Recommended Text Tyn Myint-U and Lokenath Debnath, Partial Differential Equations for scientists and Engineers(Third Edition), North Hollan , New York, 1987.

1. M.M.Smir nov, Second Order Partial Differential Equation , Reference Leningrad, 1964.

Books& 2. I.N.Sneddon, Elements of Partial Differential equation, McGraw Website Hill, New Delhi,1968.

3. M.D.Raisinghania, Advanced Differential Equation, S.Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2001.

4. S.Sankar Rao, Partial Differential Equation, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.2004

Website: www.nptel.ac.in

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester -II

272

Title of the Course Mathematical software - MATLAB

Objective To learn basic concepts of MATLAB and to develop skills in solving mathematical problems using MATLAB.

Paper Number Category Elective I Credits 3 Course Year Code GROUP A Semester II Hours/Week 4

Course Outline UNIT-I :

MATLAB Basics –Input and Output – Arithmetic – Algebra – Symbolic Expressions, Variable Precision, and Exact Arithmetic – Managing Variables – Errors in Input – Online Help –Variables and Assignments - Solving Equations.

UNIT-II :

Vectors and Matrices : Vectors – Matrices – Suppressing Output – Functions –Built -in functions –User-defined functions.

UNIT-III:

Complex Arithmetic – More on Matrices – Doing Calculus with MATLAB – Default variables . UNIT-IV :

MATLAB Graphics :Two-Dimensional Plots – Three-Dimensional Plots - Special Effects – Customizing and Manipulating Graphics –Sound. UNIT-V:

MATLAB Programming – Practicals.

273

Outcomes After completion of this course, the student will be able to express programming & simulation for problems. Ability to find importance of this software for Lab Experimentation. Articulate importance of software’s in research by simulation work. This course is designed to expose students to the development of programming skill using a computer language, which is suitable for the current computer operating system.

Recommended Text Brian R.Hunt, Ronald L.Lipsman, Jonathan M. Rosenberg “A guide to MATLAB beginners and Experienced Users”, Cambridge University Press edition, 2008

Unit I :Chapter 2 Unit II Chapter 3 Unit III Chapter 4 Unit IV Chapter 5 Unit V Practicals only

1. MATLAB –The language of technical computing, The MATH WORKS Inc., Version 5 1996(http:\\www.mathworks.com) 2. L.F. Shampine, I.Gladwell, S. Thompson , Solving ODEs with Reference MATLAB, Books Cambridge University press 2003. & Website Website: www.ann.jussieu.fr/free.htm

List of Practicals

1. Write a MATLAB program involving matrix manipulations such as multiplication,

inverse, determinant.

2. Write a MATLAB program to solve a system of linear equations.

3. Use MATLAB commands to plot 2D and 3D graphs.

4. Write a MATLAB program to solve quadratic equation.

5. Using the function for n!. write a MATLAB program to find the binomial coefficient nCr.

6. Write a MATLAB program to generate Fibonacci numbers.

274

7.. Write a MATLAB program to solve an algebraic equation using bisection method.

8. Write a MATLAB program to solve an algebraic equation using Newton Raphson

method.

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester -II

Title of the Course Fuzzy Sets and Their Applications

Objective To introduce concepts of Fuzzy Logic which gives a technique for laying the foundations for an important task to simulate a human being in dealing with certainty and uncertainty in information.

Paper Number XV Category Elective I Credit 3 Course Year Code GROUP Semester II Hours/Week 4 A

275

Course Outline UNIT-I :

Fundamental Notions : Introduction- Review of the notion of membership- The concept of a fuzzy subset- Dominance relations- Simple operations on fuzzy subsets- Set of fuzzy subsets for E and M finite- Properties of the set of fuzzy subsets- Product and algebraic sum of two fuzzy subsets.

Chapter I: Sec 1 to 8

UNIT-II :

Fuzzy Graphs: Introduction- Fuzzy graphs- Fuzzy relations- Composition of fuzzy relations- Fuzzy subsets induced by a mapping- Conditioned fuzzy subsets- Properties of fuzzy binary relation- Transitive closure of a fuzzy binary relation- Paths in a finite fuzzy graph.

Chapter II: Sec. 10 to 18

UNIT- III:

Fuzzy Relations: Fuzzy preorder relations- Similitude relations- Similitude subrelations in a fuzzy preorder- Antisymmetry- Fuzzy order relations- Antisymmetric relations without loops- Dissimilitude relations- Resemblance relations- Various properties of similitude and resemblance- Various properties of fuzzy perfect order relations.

Chapter II: Sec. 19 to 28

UNIT-IV :

Fuzzy Logic: Introduction- Characteristic function of a fuzzy subset- Fuzzy variables- Polynomial forms- Analysis of a function of fuzzy variable- Method of Marinos- Logical structure of a function of fuzzy variables- Composition of intervals.

Chapter III: Sec. 31 to 36

276

UNIT-V:

The Laws of Fuzzy Composition: Introduction- Review of the notion of a law of composition- Laws of fuzzy internal composition- Fuzzy groupoids- Principal properties of fuzzy groupoids- Fuzzy monoids.

Chapter IV : Sec. 43 to 47

Outcomes At the end of the course,the student will be able to apply the application of fuzzy concept in real life situations.

Recommended Text A. Kaufmann, Z.L.Zadeh, D.L.Swanson, Introduction to the theory of Fuzzy Subsets, Academic Press, New York, 1975(Vol.I)

1. H.J. Zimmermann, Fuzzy set theory and its Applications-, Allied Reference Publishers, Chennai, 1996.

Books 2. George J.Klir and Bo Yuan, Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic, Theory & Website and Application, Prentice Hall India, New Delhi, 2001.

Website: www.nptel.com

277

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester -III

Title of the Course Number Theory and Cryptography

Objective To impart knowledge of arithmetic topics in Elementary Number Theory, both ancient and very modern which have been at the center of interest in applications especially in Cryptography.

Paper Number Category Elective II Credits 3 Course Year Code GROUP Semester III Hours/Week 4 B

Course Outline UNIT-I :

Some Topics in Elementary Number Theory : Time Estimates for doing arithmetic – Divisibility and the Euclidean algorithm.

Chapter 1 :Sections – 1 &2

UNIT-II : Congruence – Some applications to factoring. Chapter 1: Sections - 3 & 4

UNIT –III:

Finite Fields & Quadratic Residues: Finite Fields – Existence of multiplicative generators of finite fields – Existence and uniqueness of finite fields with prime power number of elements.

Chapter 2 : Section – 1

UNIT-IV : Cryptography: Some simple crypto systems – Enciphering matrices. Chapter 3: Sections – 1 & 2

278

UNIT-V: Public key :The Idea of Public Key Cryptography - RSA Primality and Factoring: Pseudoprimes ( omit propositions V.1.6 & V.1.7) Chapter 4 : Sections- 1&2 Chapter 5: Section – 1 Outcomes This syllabus will make the students to apply the basics of the number theory to encrypt and decrypt messages and to break the code of one applied RSA carelessly. The course is designed as an introduction to elementary no/theory suited by scientifically oriented students. It analyse the structure of real world problems and plan solution strategies. Recommended Neal Koblitz, A Course in Number Theory and Cryptography, Text Springer-Verlag, New York, 1987.

1. Niven and H.S.Zuckermann, An Introduction to Theory of Numbers (Edn. 3), Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi,1976 2. David M.Burton, Elementary Number Theory, Brown Publishers, Reference Iowa,1989 Books 3. K.Ireland and M.Rosen, A Classical Introduction to Modern Number & Website Theory, Springer Verlag, 1972 4. N.Koblitz, Algebraic Aspects of Cryptography, Springer 1998

Website : www.nptel.com

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester -III

279

Title of the Formal Languages and Automata Theory Course

Objective To introduce Finite state automata(FSA) and the languages accepted by FSA, Regular sets, Context free language and its simplifications.

Paper Number Category Elective II Credits 3 Course Year Code GROUP Semester III Hours/Week 4 B

Course Outline UNIT-I : Three Basic concepts : Languages – Grammars – Automata. Finite Automata : Deterministic finite accepters- Nondeterministic finite accepters- Equivalence of Deterministic and Nondeterministic Finite Accepters .

Chapter 1. Section 1.2 Chapter 2. Sections 2.1 to 2.3

UNIT-II :

Regular Languages and Regular Grammars : Regular Expressions – Connection between Regular Expressions and Regular Languages – Regular Grammars.

Chapter 3 : Sections 3.1 to 3.3 UNIT-III : Properties of Regular Languages: Closure properties of Regular languages – Elementary Questions about Regular Languages – Identifying Nonregular Languages. Chapter 4 : Section 4.1 to 4.3 UNIT-IV : Context – Free Languages: Context- Free Grammars – Parsing and Ambiguity .

280

Chapter 5 : Sections 5.1 to 5.2

UNIT-V :

Simplification of Context-free Grammars: Methods for transforming Grammars – Two Important Normal forms.

Chapter 6 : Sections 6.1 to 6.2

Outcomes After completion of this course, the student should be able to:

• Explain and manipulate the different concepts in automata theory and formal languages such as formal proofs, non- deterministic automata, regular expressions, regular languages, context-free grammars, context-free languages, Turing machines; • Explain the power and the limitations of regular languages and context-free languages.

Peter Linz, An Introduction to Formal Languages and Automata, Fourth Edition, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi. Recommended Text

1. John E.Hopcraft and Jeffrey D.Ullman, Introduction to Reference Automata Theory, Languages and Computation, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 1987. Books& 2. A. Salomaa, Formal Languages, Academic Press, New York, Website 1973. 3. John C. Martin, Introduction to Languages and theory of Computations (2nd Edition) Tata-McGraw Hill Company Ltd., New Delhi, 1997.

Website: www.sciencedirect.com

281

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester -III

Title of the Course Advanced Graph Theory To make the students understand the concepts of Matching, Independent Objective Sets, Colouring and Planar Graphs

Paper Number Category Elective II Credits 3 Course Year Code GROUP B Semester III Hours 4

/week

Course Outline UNIT-I :

Graphs and Sub graphs: Graphs and Simple Graphs – Graph Isomorphism – The Incidence and Adjacency Matrices – Sub graphs – Vertex Degrees – Paths and Connection – Cycle.

Chapter 1 ( Section 1.1 – 1.7 )

UNIT- II :

Matchings and Edge Colourings: Matchings – Matchings and Coverings in Bipartite Graphs – Perfect Matchings.

Edge Colourings: Edge Chromatic Number – Vizing’s Theorem.

Chapter 5 (Section 5.1 – 5.3)

Chapter 6 (Section 6.1 and 6.2)

UNIT- III: Independent Sets and Cliques: Independent Sets – Ramsey’s Theorem. Chapter 7 (Section 7.1 and 7.2)

282

UNIT- IV: Vertex Colorings: Chromatic Number – Brooks’ Theorem – Chromatic Polynomials Chapter 8 (Section 8.1 , 8.2 and 8.4).

UNIT-V: Planar graphs : Plane and planar Graphs – Euler’s Formula – Kuratowski’s Theorem – The Five- Colour Theorem and The Four-Colour Conjecture. Chapter 9 (Section 9.1, 9.3, 9.5 and 9.6)

Outcomes At the end of the course, the student will be able to understand the concepts of matchings, Edge colourings, Independent sets,Vertex colourings and Planar graphs

Recommended Text Contents and Treatment as in:

J.A.Bondy and U.S.R. Murty, Graph Theory with Applications, Macmillan, London, 1976.

Reference Books & 1. Douglas B West, Introduction to Graph Theory, Prentice Hall of Website India, 2002.

2. Harary F, Graph Theory, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 1989. 3. R.J. Wilson, Introduction to Graph Theory, Pearson Education, 4th Edition, 2004, Indian Print. 4. S.A.Choudum, A First Course in Graph Theory, MacMillan India Ltd. 1987.

Website : www.nptel.com

283

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester -III

Title of the Course Calculus of Variations and Integral Equations To introduce concepts which have wide applications in industries and Objective Satellite research centres.

Paper Number Category Elective II Credits 3 Course Year Code GROUP Semester III Hours/Week 4 B

Course Outline UNIT-I : TheMethod of Variations in problems with fixed boundaries: Euler’s equation – Functionals of the form ∫ F( x,y1,y2,…yn) dx – Functionals dependent on Higher order derivatives – Functionals dependent on the functions of several Independent variables- variational problems in parametric form – some applications. Chapter6: 6. 1 - 6.7 in [ 1]

UNIT-II :

Variational problems with moving boundaries and certain other problems.

Chapter7 : 7.1 – 7.4 in [1]

UNIT-III :

Integral equations and Integral Equations with Seperable kernels.

Chapter 1: 1.1 -1.6, Chapter 2: 2.1 -2.5 in [2]

284

UNIT-IV:

Methods of Successive approximation and Classical Fredholm theory

Chapter 3: 3. 1 to 3.5 Chapter 4: 4. 1 to 4.5 in [ 2] UNIT – V :

Symmetric Kernals and Singular integral equations

Chapter 7: 7.1 to 7.6 Chapter 8: 8.1 to 8. 5 in [ 2] Outcomes The course provides basis for thorough understanding of the problems, methods and techniques of the calculus of variations and prepares students for the study of modern optimal control theory. The treatment is limited to extensive coverage of single integral problems in one and more unknown functions.

[1]. L. Elsgolts, Differential Equations and the Calculus of Variations Recommended Text Mir Publishers, Moscow, 1973.

[2]. Ram P. Kanwal, Linear Integral Equations. Academic Press, New York, 1971. A.S. Gupta, Calculus of Variations with Applications Prentice. Hall Reference of India, New Delhi, 1997. Website: www.nptel.ac.in Books & Website

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester -IV

285

Title of the Course Probability Theory

Objective To introduce different probability models to develop skills in analysing and interpreting the results.

Paper Number Category Elective II Credits 3 Course Year Code GROUP Semester IV Hours/Week 6 C

Course Outline UNIT-I : Random events and random variables: Random events - Probability axioms - Combinatorial formulae - conditional probability - Bayes Theorem - Independent events - Random Variables - Distribution Function - Joint Distribution - Marginal Distribution - Conditional Distribution - Independent random variables - Functions of random variables. Chapter 1: Sections 1.1 to 1.7 Chapter 2 : Sections 2.1 to 2.9 UNIT-II: Parameters of the distribution : Expectation- Moments – The Chebyshev Inequality - Absolute moments - Order parameters - Moments of random vectors - Regression of the first and second types. Chapter 3 : Sections 3.1 to 3.8

UNIT-III: Characteristic functions : Properties of characteristic functions - Cha racteristic functions and moments - semi-invariants - characteristic function of the sum of the independent random variables - Determination of distribution function by the Characteristic function - Characteristic function of multidimensional random vectors - Probability generating functions. UNITChapter-IV 4 :: Sections 4.1 to 4.7 Some probability distributions : One point , two point , Binomial - Polya - Hypergeometric - Poisson (discrete) distributions - Uniform – normal gamma - Beta - Cauchy and Laplace (continuous) distributions. Chapter 5 : Section 5.1 to 5.10

286

UNIT-V: Limit theorems : Stochastic convergence - Bernoulli law of large numbers - Convergence of sequence of distribution functions - Levy- Cramer Theorems - de Moivre-Laplace Theorem - Poisson, Chebyshev, Khintchine Weak law of large numbers - Lindberg Theorem - Lyapunov Theroem - Borel-Cantelli Lemma - Kolmogorov Inequality and Kolmogorov Strong Law of large numbers.

Chapter 6 : Sections 6.1 to 6.4, 6.6 to 6.9 , 6.11 and 6.12. (Omit Sections 6.5, 6.10) Outcomes The course is heavily oriented towards the formulation of mathematical concepts on probability and probability distributions.

Recommended Text M. Fisz, Probability Theory and Mathematical Statistics, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.

1. R.B. Ash, Real Analysis and Probability, Academic Press, New York, Reference 1972 Books& 2.K.L.Chung, A course in Probability, Academic Press, New York, 1974. 3.R.Durrett, Probability : Theory and Examples, (2nd Edition) Duxbury Website Press, New York, 1996. 4.V.K.Rohatgi An Introduction to Probability Theory and Mathematical Statistics, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 1988(3rd Print).

Website: www.nptel.com

287

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester -IV

Stochastic Processes Title of the Course To introduce different stochastic models to develop skills in analyzing Objective and interpreting the results.

Paper Number Category Elective II Credits 3 Course Year Code GROUP Semester IV Hours 6 C /Week

Course Outline UNIT - 1 :

Markov chain : Definition and Examples – Higher Transition Probabilities – Generalization of Independent Bernoulli Trials : Sequence of Chain – Dependent trials – Classification of States and Chain – Determination of Higher Transient Probabilities.

Chapter: 2(2.1 to 2.5)

UNIT 2:

Markov Chain with Denumerable Number of states – Reducible Chains – Statistical Inference for Markov Chains – Markov Chains with Continuous State Space – Non-Homogeneous Chains.

Chapter: 2 (2.8 to 2.11)

288

UNIT 3:

Poission Process : Poission Process and Related Distributions – Generalisations of Poission Process - Birth and Death Process - Markov Processes with Discrete State Space.

Chapter: 3(3.1 to 3.5 – omit 3.3.6 & 3.3.7)

UNIT 4:

Markov Process with Continuous State Space – Brownion Motion – Wiener Process – Differential Equation for a Wiener Process – Kolmogorov Equations – First Passage time Distribution for Wiener Process.

Chapter: 4(4.1 to 4.5)

UNIT 5:

Martingales : Introduction – Definition and Examples – Properties of Martingales – Continuous Parameter Martingales.

Chapter: 5(5.1 to 5.4)

Outcomes Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to understand how random variables and stochastic processes can be described and analyzed and they will be able to understand ,analyze and solve typical problems in statistics and understand the role of probability theory as well as the concept of random variables and stochastic processes

Recommended Text Stochastic Process (Third Edition) –J.Medhi (2009) New Age International (P) Limited

289

1. Karlin.S and Taylor.H.M.,(1975), A first Course in Stochastic Reference Processes, Academic Press, New York. 2. Ross.S.M (1982),Stochastic Processes, Johnholy & Sons Press, Books New & Website York. 3. A.Ravidran, Don T.Philips and James J.Solberg, Operations Research Principles and Practice (2nd Edition) 4. Medhi, Stochastic Processes, Narosa Publication Co.Ltd., 2nd Edition, New Delhi. 5.Introduction to Probability Models(10th Edition) Sheldon M.Ross- Acadamic Press.

Website : www.nptel.com

M.Sc. Mathematics

Semester -IV

Title of the Course Discrete Structures Objective To acquire knowledge of Lattices, Boolean Algebra and its applications, Certain concepts in Applied Paper Number abstract algebra and its applications in Coding Category Elective Theory. II Credits 3 Course Year Code GROUP C Semester IV Hours/ 6 Week

Theory.

290

Course Outline UNIT-I : Lattices:Properties of Lattices: Lattice definitions – Modular and distributive lattice; Boolean algebras: Basic properties – Boolean polynomials, Ideals; Minimal forms of Boolean polynomials.

Chapter 1: Sections- 1 to 6 UNIT-II : Applications of Lattices:Switching Circuits: Basic Definitions - Applications Chapter 2: Sections-7 to 9 UNIT III : Fields: Kroneckers Theorem- Fundamental theorem of algebra- Finite fields. Chapter 3: Section-12 & 13

UNIT-IV : Polynomials:Irreducible Polynomials over Finite fields – Factorization of Polynomials Chapter 3: Section- 14 & 15 UNIT-V: Coding Theory : Linear Codes and Cyclic Codes Chapter 4 : Sections-16 to 18

Outcomes Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to construct simple mathematical proofs• Be able to understand logical arguments and logical constructs. Have a better• understanding of sets, functions, and relations. Acquire ability to describe computer programs in a formal mathematical manner

Recommended Text Rudolf Lidl and Gunter Pilz, Applied Abstract Algebra, Spinger- Verlag, New York, 1984.

1. A.Gill, Applied Algebra for Computer Science, Prentice Hall Reference Inc., New Jersey. 2. J.L.Gersting, Mathematical Structures for Computer Science(3rd Books& Website Edn.), Computer Science Press, New York. 3. S.Wiitala, Discrete Mathematics- A Unified Approach, McGraw Hill Book Co..

Website:www.nptel.com

291

Non Major Elective I

Title of the Course Resource Management Techniques Resource Management Technique as a discipline provides the techniques for the Objective enhancement in Management, Planning, economics and so on, in almost all the fields.

Paper XI Number Category EDP I Credits 3 Course I Year Code Semester II Hours/Week 4

Course Outline UNIT-I :

Transportation Problem : Introduction-General structure of the problem-Finding initial basic feasible solution by Vogel’s Approximation method-Moving towards optimality.

UNIT-II :

Transportation Problem: Finding initial basic feasible solution by North-West corner rule - least cost Method -Moving towards optimality.

UNIT- III: Assignment problem: Introduction-Mathematical formulation – Solving an assignment problem –Variations of the Assignment problem-Travelling Salesman Problem.

292

UNIT-IV :

Sequencing Problems: Introduction-Problem of sequencing -Terminology, Notation and Assumptions-Problems with n jobs and 2 machines- Problems with n jobs and 3 machines- Problems with n jobs and m machines - Problems with 2 jobs and m machines.

UNIT V:

Network Analysis: Introduction-Basic concepts-construction of Network-

Critical path Analysis-Statistical considerations in PERT.

Outcomes Identify and develop operational research models from the verbal description of the real system. Understand the mathematical tool that are needed to solve optimization problems

Recommended Introduction to Operations Research by Kanti Swarup, P.K.Gupta and Text & Website Man Mohan- Sultan Chand and Sons-Educational Publisher-New Delhi.

UNIT-I & II : CHAPTER 6 - 6.1,6.2,6.7 & 6.8. (Except Theorem 6.1)

UNIT III : CHAPTER 7 - 7.1 to 7.5.

UNIT IV : CHAPTER 8 – 8.1 to 8.7.

UNIT V : CHAPTER 14- 14.1 to 14.5.

293

Reference Books 1. . Problems in Operations Research,Er.Prem kumar Gupta & Dr.D.S.Hira.S.Chand. 2. Operations Research-V.K.Kapoor.

3. A. Taha, Operations Research, (seventh edition) Prentice - Hall of Hamdy India Private Limited, New Delhi, 1997.

4. F.S. Hiller & J.Lieberman Introduction to Operation Research (7th Edition) Tata- McGraw Hill Company, New Delhi, 2001.

5.V.Sundaresan,K.S. Ganapathy Subramanian and K.Ganesan, Resource Management Techniques , A.R. Publications.

Website : www.nptel.com

Non Major Elective II

Statistical Methods Title of the Course To introduce concepts of Statistics which has a wide application in Objective almost all field of research.

Paper Number XVII Category EDP II II Credits 3 Course Year Code Semester III Hours/Week 4

Course Outline UNIT-I :

Measures of central tendency : Mean, Median , Mode – Measures of dispersion-Range, Quartile deviation, Standard deviation, Coefficient of variation. (problems only)

294

UNIT-II :

Correlation of discrete data – Rank correlation using Spearman’s rank correlation coefficient- Regression of y on x and x on y. (problems only ).

UNIT III

Test of Significance: Large Sample Test: 1. Test for Significance of single mean 2. Test for Significance of difference of two sample means 3. Test for Significance of Standard deviation. 4. Test for Significance of difference between standard deviations of two samples (problems only) UNIT-IV :

Test of significance for small samples: Using student’s t-distribution 1. Test of significance of sample mean and population mean. 2. Test of significance for difference of means of two samples. (problems only) UNIT-V : Small Sample Test: 1. F- test for Equality of population variance . 2.Chi- square test of independence of attributes. (problems only)

Outcomes Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to understand

• Statistical reasoning and inferential methods. • Statistical Modeling and its limitations. • Interpreting and communicating the results of a statistical analysis. • data analysis using statistical computing tools and software. probability and the mathematical foundations of statistics.

Recommended Text Statistical Methods, S.P. Gupta , S.Chand & Co., New Delhi.

295

Mathematical Statistics, P.R. Vittal, Margham Publications, Reference Chennai.

Books&Website Web site :www.springer.com

296

M.Phil. SYLLABUS

Semester Title of the Subject Paper Subject Core Credits Page No. No. Code

I Algebra and Analysis I C 4 59

Topology and Geometry II C 4 61 Paper on the topic of research III C 4 (Guide Paper)

Available Research Topics :

Operations Research, Difference equations, Functional Analysis, Differential equations, Univalent mappings , Harmonic mappings, Automata theory and Formal languages, Graph Theory, Operations Research Dissertation IV

297

M.Phil. Mathematics

Title of the Course Algebra and Analysis

Objective The representation theory of groups and finite groups which solidifies the knowledge of group theory is introduced. The link between the group representations over a field F and modules is obtained. Different functions spaces at research level is introduced.

Paper I Number Category Core I Credits 4 Course Year Code

Course Outline ALGEBRA

UNIT I: Theory of Representations : Representation- Equivalence - Adjoint representations - Direct and Semi-Direct sum of representations. The tensor product of finite dimensional representations – Finite Dimensional Representations of a direct product of groups – Unitary Representations – The characters – Interwining Operators. Chapter 1: Section 2 : 2.1- 2.10 of [1] .

298

UNIT II: Theory of Representations of finite groups: The invariant mean of a finite group - complete reducibility – the space L2 (G) - the Regular Representations - Orthogonality - the factorization – The Parseval’s equality and Plancherel’s Formula -characters of a representation of the Group algebra - further properties of the group algebra. Chapter 2: Section 1: 1.1 – 1.8 and Section 2 : 2.1- 2.9 of [1].

ANALYSIS UNIT- III:

L p spaces ; Convex functions and inequalities – The Lp spaces. (Omitting the section Approximation of continuous functions) Chapter III (Pages: 62-71) of [2]

UNIT- IV:

Elementary Hilbert space theory : Inner products and linear functionals – Orthonormal sets- Trignometric series

Chapter IV – (Pages: 76-92) of [2]

.

UNIT- V:

Fourier Transforms – Formal properties – The inversion theorem

–The Plancherel theorem- The Banach algebra L1 -Complex homomorphism.

Chapter IX- (Pages: 178-193) of [2]

Outcomes The students will know how the elements of a group can be expressed

as an invertible matrix. Also, they know how the theory of abstract algebra

can be transformed into the linear algebra

299

Recommended 1. M.A.Naimark, A.I.Stern, Theory of group Representations- Text & Website English Edition , Springer – Verlag.

2. Walter Rudin, Real and Complex Analysis(Third edition) . Note: The duration of paper will be 3 hours and the maximum marks will be 100. There will be 8 questions (4 from Algebra and 4 from Analysis) out of which the candidates will have to answer five choosing atleast 2 from either part.

M.Phil. Mathematics

Title of the Course Topology and Geometry

Objective To introduce calculus and topological approach to different surfaces so as to provide a platform for doing research in future.

Paper Number II Category Core I Credits 4 Course MMA02 Year Code

Course Outline TOPOLOGY UNIT I: Fundamental group and covering space: Homotopy, Fundamental Group and covering spaces. Chapter 3 of [1].

300

UNIT II: Simplicial Complexes: Geometry of simplicial complexes, Barycentric sub divisions, simplicial approximation theorem, fundamental group of a simplicial complex. Chapter 4 of [1]. GEOMETRY UNIT III: Differential forms in Rn - Line Integrals. Chapter 1 and 2 of [2] UNIT IV: Differentiable manifolds. Chapter 3 of [2] UNIT V: Integration of Manifolds - Integration of differential forms, Stoke’s theorems, Poincare lemma. Chapter 4 of [2]

Outcomes On satisfying the requirements of this course, students will have the knowledge and skills to: 1. Explain the fundamental concepts of the differential geometry and topology of curves and surfaces. 2. Demonstrate accurate and effective use of fundamental techniques of differential geometry and topology. 3. Refine geometrical problem-solving and analysis skills and relate them to existing body of knowledge in mathematics, physics, and engineering. 4. Present advanced concepts in geometry and topology orally and in writing.

301

1. I.M. Singer and J.A. Thorpe, Lecture notes on elementary topology Recommended Text and geometry (Springer Undergraduate Texts, 1967). 2. M.P. Docarmo, Differential Forms and Applications- Springer – Verlag 1994.

Note: The duration of paper will be 3 hours and the maximum marks will be 100. There will be eight questions (4 from Topology and 4 from Geometry) out of which the candidates will have to answer five choosing atleast 2 from either part.

302

Chennai - 600 004

PG AND RESEARCH DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS

M. Sc PHYSICS

SYLLABUS 2018-19 onwards

303

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (A), CHENNAI – 4

PG AND RESEARCH DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS BOARD OF STUDIES – (2018 - 2019)

MINUTES OF THE BOARD MEETING HELD ON 03. 04.2018 REVISION OF PG SYLLABI

THE MEETING OF THE BOARD OF STUDIES WAS HELD ON 03 - 04- 2018. THE PROPOSED NEW SYLLABI WERE PRESENTED BEFORE THE BOARD.

CHANGES MADE

➢ SYLLABI OF UGC - CSIR, UNIVERSITY OF MADRAS, BHARATIYAR UNIVERSITY, BHARATHIDASAN UNIVERSITY AND OTHER NEIGHBOURING P.G INSTITUTIONS HAVE BEEN REFERRED FOR UPDATION OF OUR SYLLABUS ➢ CHANGES HAVE BEEN MADE IN ALL PAPERS TAKING INTO ACCOUNT, CSIR – NET EXAMINATION SYLLABUS AND THE RECENT ADVANCES IN ALL FIELDS OF PHYSICS. ➢ UNIFORMITY HAS BEEN MAINTAINED FOR ALL SCIENCE SUBJECTS IN THE O ALLOTMENT OF MARKS O THEORY AND PRACTICAL HOURS O QUESTION PAPER PATTERN O INTERNAL EVALUATION PATTERN ➢ SUGGESTIONS MADE BY THE EXPERTS WERE CARRIED OUT. THE COPY OF THE SYLLABI AFTER CARRYING OUT THE SUGGESTIONS WAS SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL.

304

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (A), CHENNAI – 4

PG and RESEARCH DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS BOARD OF STUDIES – (2018 - 2019)

MINUTES OF THE BOARD MEETING HELD ON 03. 04.2018

The meeting of the Board of studies was held on 03-04-2018. The proposed new syllabi were presented before the board.

MEMBERS OF THE BOARD 1. DR. HEMAMALINI RAJAGOPAL CHAIR PERSON ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR and HEAD PG and RESEARCH DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (A), CHENNAI - 4 2. DR. RITA JOHN UNIVERSITY NOMINEE PROFESSOR and HEAD DEPARTMENT OF THEORETICAL PHYSICS UNIVERSITY OF MADRAS CHENNAI - 25 3 . DR. P. BABU SUBJECT EXPERT ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR and HEAD PG and RESEARCH DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS A.M JAIN COLLEGE CHENNAI - 114 4. DR. S. JEROME DAS SUBJECT EXPERT ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF PHYSICS LOYOLA COLLEGE CHENNAI - 34

INTERNAL MEMBERS (ALL THE MEMBERS OF STAFF)

5. MRS. J. SRIVIDYA - ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR 6. DR. (MRS). G. USHA - ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR 7. DR.(MRS). JOVITA THEODORE - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 8. DR. (MRS). D. JAYALAKSHMI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 9. DR.(MRS). R. VASANTHI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 10. DR. (MRS). R. RAJAKUMARI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 11. DR. (MRS). V. NIRMALA - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 12. MRS. M. P. SAVITHIRI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 13. DR. (MRS). A. ANURADHA - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 14. DR. (MRS). S. SAROJINI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 15. MRS. R. VANATHI VIJAYALAKSHMI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 16. DR.(MRS). K. S. EZHILARASI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 17. DR. MRS. B. ANITHA - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR

305

18. DR. MRS. S. MAHALAKSHMI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 19. MS.D.JEMIMAL - DEPT. ALUMNI 20. MS.S.DHARANI - STUDENT REPRESENTATIVE

CONTENTS

SL.NO TITLE PAGE NO

1 LIST OF PAPERS WITH CREDITS FOR THE PROPOSED NEW 5 SYLLABI

2 TOTAL PAPERS / CREDITS / MARKS 6

3 QUANTIFICATION INTERNAL, EXTERNAL AND TEACHING 7 EVALUATION METHODOLOGY

4 CLASSICAL AND STATISTICAL MECHANICS 9

5 MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS - I 11

6 GENERAL NUCLEAR PHYSICS 13

7 INTEGRATED ELECTRONICS AND MICROPROCESSOR 15

8 GENERAL PRACTICAL - I 17

9 QUANTUM MECHANICS - I 18

10 MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS - II 20

11 ADVANCED ELECTRONICS PRACTICAL 22

12 COMPUTATIONAL METHODS AND PROGRAMMING IN C (DE -1) 23

13 (DE - 2) 25

14 MEDICAL PHYSICS (EDE - 1) 27

15 QUANTUM MECHANICS - II 29

16 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY AND RELATIVITY 31

17 GENERAL PRACTICAL - II 33

306

18 ADVANCED ELECTRONICS (DE - 3) 34

19 ADVANCED NUCLEAR PHYSICS (DE - 3) 36

20 INSTRUMENTATION TECHNIQUES (DE - 4) 38

21 FUNDAMENTALS OF ASTROPHYSICS (EDE - 2) 40

22 METHODS OF SPECTROSCOPY 42

23 SOLID STATE PHYSICS 44

24 ADVANCED ELECTRONICS AND C PROGRAMMING PRACTICAL 46

25 SPACE SCIENCE (DE-5) 47

LIST OF PAPERS WITH CREDITS FOR THE PROPOSED NEW SYLLABI (PG)

307

C – Core; DE - Department Elective ; EDE – Other Department Elective

S. C /E NO. OF MARKS TITLE OF THE PAPERS IN THE NO SEMESTER CREDITS CODE EXT INT NEW SYLLABUS . SEMESTER- I 1 I C CLASSICAL AND STATISTICAL 4 75 25 MECHANICS 2 I C MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS - I 4 75 25 3 I C GENERAL NUCLEAR PHYSICS 4 75 25 4 I C INTEGRATED ELECTRONICS AND 4 75 25 MICROPROCESSOR 5 I C GENERAL PRACTICAL - I 4 75 25 SEMESTER- II 6 II C QUANTUM MECHANICS - I 4 75 25 7 II C MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS - II 4 75 25 8 II C ADVANCED ELECTRONICS 4 75 25 PRACTICAL 9 II DE COMPUTATIONAL METHODS 3 75 25 AND PROGRAMMING IN C (DE - 1) 10 II DE MATERIALS SCIENCE (DE - 2) 3 75 25 11 II EDE MEDICAL PHYSICS (EDE - 1) 3 75 25 SEMESTER- III 12 III C QUANTUM MECHANICS - II 4 75 25 13 III C ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY 4 75 25 AND RELATIVITY 14 III C GENERAL PRACTICAL - II 4 75 25 15 III DE ADVANCED ELECTRONICS / 3 75 25 ADVANCED NUCLEAR PHYSICS (DE - 3) 16 III DE INSTRUMENTATION TECHNIQUES 3 75 25 (DE - 4) 17 III EDE FUNDAMENTALS OF 3 75 25 ASTROPHYSICS (EDE - 2) SEMESTER- IV 18 IV C METHODS OF SPECTROSCOPY 4 75 25 19 IV C SOLID STATE PHYSICS 4 75 25 20 IV C ADVANCED ELECTRONICS 4 75 25 AND C PROGRAMMING PRACTICAL 21 IV C PROJECT AND VIVA VOCE 4 75 25 22 IV DE SPACE SCIENCE (DE - 5) 3 75 25

308

SOFT SKILL SUBJECTS S.NO SEMESTER TITLE OF THE PAPERS IN THE NO. OF CODE NEW SYLLABUS CREDITS

1 I Soft skill - I 2

2 II Soft skill - II 2

3 III Soft skill - III 2

4 IV Soft skill - IV 2

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM FOR P.G 2018 - 2019 Total number of papers - 27 ; 91 credits

NO.OF CREDITS PER PAPER CREDITS TYPE OF PAPER PAPERS CORE 15 4 60

CORE ELECTIVE 5 3 15 OTHER DEPARTMENT ELECTIVE 2 3 6 SOFT SKILL 4 2 8 INTERNSHIP 1 2 2

• Out of 7 elective papers 5 elective papers will be offered by the parent department ( II, III and IV Semester) • The remaining 2 elective papers will be offered to all other PG students in the college (II and III Semester) • *Week - 6 working day order Semester – 15 such weeks

S. NO. CORE/ELECTIVE HRS/WEEK* NO. OF WEEKS* TOTAL HOURS / SEMESTER* 1 Core 06 15 90

309

2 Elective 04 15 60

• Number of Units in the syllabus of core papers 05 • Number of Units in the syllabus of elective papers 05 • Maximum marks per paper 100 • Total marks 2200

QUANTIFICATION OF END SEMESTER EAMINATION

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN (EFFECTIVE FROM THE ACADEMIC YEAR 2018 - 2019)

CORE and ELECTIVE PAPERS Maximum Marks: 100

Internal Assessment: 25 External Valuation: 75

Part – A Part – B Part - C 5 x 2 = 10 marks 5 x 4 = 20 marks 3 x 15 = 45 marks Answer all the questions Answer all the questions Answer any 3 questions out of5

Question Unit Question Unit Question Unit

1 I 6(a) or 6(b) I 11 I 2 II 7(a) or 7(b) II 12 II 3 III 8(a) or 8(b) III 13 III 4 IV 9(a) or 9(b) IV 14 IV 5 V 10(a) or 10(b) V 15 V

INTERNAL EVALUATION METHODOLOGY FOR ALL THE PROGRAMS:

✓ Quiz programme ✓ Periodical class tests ✓ Objective type assignments ✓ Problem solving assignments ( INDIVIDUAL / GROUP) ✓ Individual seminar USING POWER POINT ✓ Seminar based on lecture notes available online

QUANTIFICATION OF INTERNAL EVALUATION - PG THEORY • Minimum 6 tests – 2 out of 6 • Minimum 3 assignments – best of three • Model Examination for 75 marks reduced to 10 marks

310

TES ASSIGNME SEMINA MODEL TOT CONTINUOUS INTERNAL T NT R EXAM AL ASSESSMENT 10 10 5 75 100 - Reduced To 5 5 5 10 25

PRACTICALS

Maximum Marks : 100 Internal Assessment : 25 External Valuation : 75 Model test for 75 marks reduced to 5 marks

RECORD MODEL TOTAL

20 5 25

PRACTIAL EXAM – END SEMESTER

75

Passing minimum End Semester Examination 50% Aggregate (CIA+UE) 50% Grade Points and Cumulative Grade Point Average are awarded in the mark sheet

TEACHING METHODOLOGIES ADOPTED FOR THE PG PROGRAM

1. CHALK TALK 2. TEXT BOOK LEARNING 3. DIGITAL LEARNING- ONLINE PPT - LECTURE NOTES 4. VIDEO LECTURE – ONLINE – YOU TUBE 5. INTERACTIVE SESSIONS 6. STUDENT SEMINAR 7. LECTURE BY EXPERTS IN FIELD – INVITED TALKS 8. PARTICIPATORY LEARNING – LECTURES IN OTHER INSTITUTIONS

Course Outcome:

311

Upon completion of M.Sc Degree course in Physics, the student will be able to

• Associate the concepts of physics in day today activities. • Reason out and explain every scientific event in the eyes of physics. • Logically analyse scientific problem catering to any competitive examination. • Demonstrate her skills in C programming, circuit debugging, and solve computational problems. • Acquire employability skills through hands on experience with PPT presentations, Documentation techniques and EXCEL sheet calculations, they adopt throughout the coursework.

CLASSICAL AND STATISTICAL MECHANICS Semester: I Code: Paper: I Credit: 4

Objectives: • To develop a concrete understanding of the concept of classical Mechanics. • To learn the fundamental concepts of classical and quantum statistics and their applications to microscopic systems. Outcome: On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to • describe the motion of bodies with the aid of familiar theoretical laws. • understand the basics of classical and quantum statistical mechanics

Unit I: Canonical Transformations Canonical transformations and their generators - condition for transformation to be canonical - Hamiltonian Jacobi method-Solution of Hamilton Jacobi equation - harmonic oscillator problem and Kepler’s Problem by Hamilton Jacobi method - Poisson’s brackets – properties – invariance of Poisson’s brackets under canonical transformation– Lagrange’s brackets – properties –Relation between Lagrange’s and Poisson’s bracket.

Unit II: Dynamics of Rigid Body Generalized coordinates of a rigid body – body and space coordinates - Euler’s angles – components of angular velocity - angular momentum and inertia tensor- rotational kinetic energy of a rigid body – motion of heavy symmetrical top under the action of gravity – fast top - sleeping top.

Unit III: Small Oscillations Stable, unstable and neutral equilibrium –Langrange’s equations for small oscillations - Properties of T,V and ω- normal coordinates and normal modes of vibration– motion of a linear triatomic molecule.

312

Unit IV: Classical Statistics Phase space - Liouville theorem and its significance - ensembles – Types of ensembles - Perfect mono atomic gas in microcanonical ensemble - Entropy - Gibb’s Paradox - Partition function and its correlation with thermodynamic parameters - Micro states and Macro states - Maxwell’s distribution (qualitative only)– Maxwell’s distribution of molecular velocities – experimental test for Maxwell’s law.

Unit V: Quantum Statistics Bose Einstein statistics (qualitative only) – black body radiation - Planck’s radiation law - ideal BE gas and degeneracy- BE condensation and its application to liquid helium -Fermi Dirac statistics (qualitative only) – electron gas in metals – free electron model and electronic emission.

Books for study: 1. Classical Mechanics – Gupta, Kumar and Sharma – K. Nath and Co. Meerut II Edition. [Unit – I, II and III] 2. Classical Mechanics – J. C. Upadhyaya - 2nd edition (2009) - Himalayan Publication House. [Unit – I, II and III] 3. Statistical Mechanics - Gupta, Kumar and Sharma – K. Nath and Co. Meerut II Edition. [Unit – IV, V] 4. Statistical Mechanics – Satya Prakash and T.P. Agarwal – Kedarnath Ramnath and Co, VI Edition. [Unit – IV, V]

Books for reference: 1. Classical Mechanics – H. Goldstein - Narosa Publication 2. Statistical Mechanics – Kerson Huang – Wiley Eastern - New Delhi, 1991 3. Classical Mechanics for particles and rigid bodies – Keran C. Gupta - Wiley Eastern, 1988. 4. Classical Mechanics -N.C. Rana and P.S. Joag (Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1991).

Web references: 1. http://www.phy.auckland.nz/staff/smt/453310SC.html 2. http://www.damtp.cam.ac.uk/user/tong/dynamics.htm 3. http://farside.ph.utexas.edu/teaching/301/lectures/lectures.html 4. http://www.lancs.ac.uk/depts/physics/teaching/py332/phys332.htm 5. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yGyoTMeQWbQ 6. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ocm4HpPOlgs 7. Physics 430: Lecture 17 Examples of Lagrange's Equations - ppt video ... 8. formulation of Quantum Statistics - ppt video online download slideplayer.com/slide/8556406 9. Mod-01 Lec-01 Introduction - YouTube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q6Gw08pwhws

313

10. PPT – Rigid Body Dynamics I An Introduction PowerPoint presentation ... www.powershow.com/.../Rigid_Body_Dynamics_I_An_Introducti...

MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS – I Semester: I Code: Paper: II Credit: 4

Objectives: • To gain skill in problem solving and analytical thinking. • To analyse critically dynamical systems Outcomes: Students will be able to • Apply Mathematics to all fields of Physics • Expand and elucidate physical theories.

Unit I : Vector Algebra Concept of gradient, divergence and curl – Important vector identities – Statement and proof – Line, surface and volume integrals (basic ideas)-Gauss divergence theorem – physical significance and proof – Gauss’ law in differential form, Poisson’s and Laplace equations -Stokes’ theorem -physical significance and proof- Green’s theorem in a plane.

Unit II : Linear Vector space and Green’s function Definition of a Linear Vector space - Linear independence - basis and dimension - Inner product and Unitary spaces – orthonormal sets - Gram Schmidt’s Orthogonalization- Schwartz inequality- Green’s function – Eigen function: expansion of Green’s function – Simple boundary value problems.

Unit III : Matrices Elementary ideas – Special types of matrices: Square and diagonal matrix –Symmetric and anti symmetric – orthogonal – Hermitian – skew Hermitian– Unitary- singular and nonsingular– inverse, conjugate of a matrix - normal - elementary and equivalent matrices. Characteristic equation of a matrix – Eigen values and Eigen vectors – Cayley- Hamilton theorem – Statement and proof – Inverse of a matrix by Cayley-Hamilton theorem only – similarity and Unitary transformation - Diagonalisation of a matrix – Basic ideas of Rotation, Pauli spin and Dirac matrices.

Unit IV : Tensors Basic ideas of Coordinate transformation – Indicial and summation conventions – Dummy and real indices – Kronecker delta and its properties – Contravariant and covariant vectors – Definition of tensors – Rank – tensors of higher ranks - Addition and subtraction – Equality – Inner and outer product - contraction of tensors - Quotient law - symmetric and antisymmetric tensors.

314

Unit V : Group Theory and its Applications Basic definitions of Abelian group and cyclic group– subgroups -Lagrange’s theorem for finite group-Homomorphism and Isomorphism between groups -Representation of a group -Unitary representations - Reducible and Irreducible representations - Schur’s Lemmas – Great Orthogonality theorem - Character table – properties - Character table of C2v, C3v and D3h – basic ideas of SU(2) - O(3)groups.

Books for Problems: Worked out problems in Mathematical physics by Satyaprakash are encouraged. Books for study: 1. SathyaPrakash – Mathematical Physics – 14th Edition – 1999 - Sultan Chand and Co. (All Units) 2. B. D. Gupta – Mathematical Physics - 3rd Edition – 2004 – Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd., - (All Units) 3. B. S. Rajput – Mathematical Physics – 14th Edition – 1999 – Pragathi Prakashan (All Units) 4. Vector and Tensor Analysis – Murray R. Spiegel – Schaum’s outline series, Tata Mc Graw Hill Co. – TMH Edn. (Unit – I, II, III) 5. A. W. Joshi – Elements of Group theory for Physicists - 4th Edition – 1997 -New Age International, New Delhi (Unit V)

Books for reference: 1. A. W. Joshi - Matrices and Tensors in Physics – 3rd Edition – Wiley Eastern Ltd., (Unit III and IV) 2. F. A. Cotton – Chemical Applications of group Theory - 3rd Edition – 1990 –John Wiley and Sons (Unit V). 3. E. Kreyszig – Advanced Engineering Mathematics - 8th Edition – 1999 - Wiley, NY 4. M. D. Greenberg - Advanced Engineering Mathematics - 2nd Edition – 1998, Prentice Hall International, NJ. 5. E. Butkov- Mathematical Physics - Addision Wesley. 6. Mathematical Methods for Physicists - G. Arfken and H. J. Weber – Harcourt, V Edn., New Delhi, 2001. 7. Applied Mathematical Methods – Pipes and Harvel, McGraw Hill, Koga - kusha Ltd.

Web Refereneces: 1. http://www.mpipks-dresden.mpg.de/~jochen/methods/outline/html 2. http://phy.syr.edu/~trodden/courses/mathmethods/ 3. http://dmoz.org/Science/Physics/Mathematical_Physics/ 4. http://www.thphys.nuim.ie/Notes/engineering/frame-notes.html 5. http://www.thphys.nuim.ie/Notes/frame-notes.html 6. ancientweb.upei.ca/~physics/sbo/Teaching/.../MathPhysNotes/Phys381_L10.pdf 7. nasc.ac.in/nasc/images/studyMaterials/Physics/MScTensors.pdf 8. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mathematics/18-703-modern-algebra.../lecture-notes/ 9. home.iitk.ac.in/~peeyush/102A/Lecture-notes.pdf 10. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=y3ARLfm-52w

315

GENERAL NUCLEAR PHYSICS

Sem: I Code: Paper: III Credit: 4

Objective: • The emphasis is on presenting the more important basic aspects of nuclear physics • Providing a sufficiently comprehensive coverage of the subject.

Outcome: • Students will have a complete idea of properties of nucleus and a nuclear reactor. • The students will have deep knowledge in the subject to face the competitive exams.

Unit I : Nuclear structure and nuclear forces Nuclear radius - electron scattering method - nuclear magnetic dipole moment - magnetic resonance method - Electric Quadrupole moment – Nuclear forces – properties -central forces - ground state of the Deuteron - magnetic moment - Quadrupole moment -Exchange forces - Isotopic spin formalism - tensor forces - S and D state admixtures.

Unit II : Radioactivity Beta decay - energy spectrum-energy release in beta decay - Fermi’s theory - Fermi Curie plot - Fermi-Gamow teller selection rules - Total decay rate - Comparative half - lives and forbidden decays - non-conversion of parity - Gamma emission - multipole radiation and selection rules internal conversion - Nuclear isomerism.

Unit III : Nuclear models and nuclear reactions Liquid drop model - shell model - spin orbit coupling - spin parity and magnetic moment - predictions of shell model - Electric Quadrupole moment - Schmidt lines. Nuclear reactions - cross section - compound nucleus - Breit-Wigner Dispersion formula.

Unit IV: Nuclear Reactor Chain reaction - four factor formula - Neutron diffusion - solution to neutron diffusion equation - Fermi age equation - condition of criticality of nuclear reactor and buckling. General aspects of nuclear reactor design – Research reactors.

Unit V : Elementary Particles and Quark theory Classification of elementary particles-fundamental interactions with examples-quantum numbers of elementary particles (Isospin, strangeness, parity, charge)-conservation laws-CPT theorem. Quark model-elementary ideas of Symmetries- Su(2), Su(3) symmetry-Octet and Decuplet - Gellman Okubo formula (No derivation)

316

Books for study : 1. Elements of Nuclear Physics-M.L.Pandya and R.P.S. Yadav-Kedarnath Ramnath and Co (All Units) 2. Nuclear Physics-D.C.Tayal – Himalaya Publishing House. Co (All Units) 3. Nuclear Physics-R.R.Roy and B.P. Nigam Wiley Eastern Limited Co (All Units) 4. Elementary Particles – Michael longo- McGraw Hill Koga Kuswa Limited. Co (Unit-IV) 5. Nuclear Physics-V. Devanathan, Narosa Publishers, 2006 Co (All Units)

Books for reference: 1. Nuclear Physics-Bowler-Pergamon Press 2. Nuclear Physics- Irving Kaplan- Addison Wesley Publishing House 3. Theoretical Nuclear Physics- Blatt and Weisskof – Wiley New York 4. Introduction to Elementary Particles- David Griffiths – John Wiley and Sons.

Web references: 1. www.fen.bilkent.edu.tr/~bulutay/453/intro-nuclear-particle-physics.pdf 2. nptel.ac.in/courses/115104043 3. https://ocw.mit.edu/.../nuclear...nuclear-physics.../lecture-notes/MIT22_02S12_lec_ch. 4. https://sites.google.com/a/northgeorgia.edu/ngcsu-physics-note-sharing/home/nuclear 5. https://courses.mak.ac.ug/sites/default/files/downloads/phy7211.pdf 6. https://www.scribd.com/doc/156160049/kaplan-nuclear-physics-pdf 7. physics.valpo.edu/courses/p430/ppt/Krane_ch5_1.ppt 8. https://www.slideshare.net/harshXtime/quark-particles 9. https://www.slideshare.net/saravanamoorthy/elementary-particles 10. https://www.jackson.k12.ga.us/teachers/jawall/Phy%20Sci%20Notes/Radioactivity.ppt

INTEGRATED ELECTRONICS AND MICROPROCESSOR Sem: I Code: Paper: IV Credit: 4

Objectives: • To impart a diversified knowledge on operational amplifiers and their applications • To make the students conversant with the programmable aspect of the microprocessor technology which is a growing field which will pervade the industry for decades to come. Outcome: • Strong grasp of fundamentals and confident in OPAMP basics and can design circuits • Capable of writing, debugging and executing programs using 8085

Unit I : Operational Amplifier Instrumentation amplifier –- Voltage to current converter- current to voltage converter – active filters: low pass, high pass, band pass –first order, second order Butterworth filter circuits – Solving simultaneous and differential equations. Op - amp as comparator- regenerative comparator (Schmitt trigger).

317

Unit II : Op-Amp Applications (Oscillators And Convertors) Wien bridge, phase shift oscillators – triangular, saw-tooth and square wave generators – Schmitt’s trigger – sample and hold circuits. Basic D to A conversion: weighted resister DAC – Binary R-2R ladder DAC – Basic A to D conversion: counter type ADC – successive approximation converter – dual slope ADC.

Unit III: Microprocessor 8085 Introduction to Intel Microprocessor – Pin functions of 8085 – Architecture of 8085 – Machine language and Assembly language –Instructions – Data Transfer, Arithmetic, Logic, Branch Stack and Stack related, I/O and Machine control instructions – 8085 addressing modes – Timing diagram (MEM R, MEM W)

Unit IV: Programming With 8085 Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and Division (16 bit) – Square and Square root (8 bit) , largest/smallest number in an array – Ascending/ Descending order- reversing the elements in an array Code conversion – BCD to Binary and Binary to BCD (8 bit) debugging a program.

Unit V: Memory And I/O Operations RAM - ROM - EPROM – RAM : Introduction to memory interfacing (2K X 8 and 4K X 8). I/O Operations : Programmed I/O Restart instructions – Interrupts – Interrupt circuits - Interrupt instructions – Serial input and serial output – extending the interrupt system – DMA - Support chip (8156) – Port numbers – Programming the I/O ports – Programming the timer.

Books for study: 1. OP-AMPs and Linear Integrated circuits - Ramakant A Gayakwad – (Unit I and II) 1. A text book of applied electronics – R.S.Sedha – S.Chand and company ltd. – (Unit I and II) 2. Introduction to Integrated Electronics – V.Vijayendran - Viswanathan Pub. –(Unit I and II) 3. Linear integrated circuits – D.Roy Choudhry and Shail Jain. Wiley eastern ltd. – (Unit I and II) 4. Microprocessor architecture – Gaonkar - 3 rd edition - Wiley eastern ltd ( Unit III,IV,V) 5. Fundamentals of 8085 microprocessor – V.Vijayendran - Viswanathan Pub.(Unit III,IV,V) 6. Digital computer electronics – 2nd edition – Albert Paul Malvino – Tata Mc Graw Hill ( Unit III,IV,V)

Books for reference: 1. Introduction to Microprocessor –A P Mathur 3rd edn. Tata McGraw Hill Company 2. Digital Fundamentals – Floyd 3 rd edn. Universal Book stall – New Delhi Web 3. Analog and Digital circuits and systems – Jacob Milman and Christos Halkias Tata McGraw Hill Company 4. Microprocessors and applications – A. Nagoor Kani RBA Pubblications 1999 5. Fundamentals of microprocessor and microcomputers B Ram -Dhanapat Rai Publications

318

Web references: 1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3Cg8ly8Aq6g 2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=U3BGOaiyjz8 3. https://www.coursera.org/learn/electronics/lecture/.../2-5-active-filt.. 4. https://www.allaboutcircuits.com/...lectures/op-amp-band-pass-ban... 5. Chapter 4 Oscillators. - ppt video online download - SlidePlayerslideplayer.com/slide/9697321/ 6. PPT – Digital to Analog Converters DAC PowerPoint presentation ...www.powershow.com/.../Digital_to_Analog_Converters_DAC_po.. 7. PPT Intel 8085 Architecture Presentation - YouTube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=xHUPkB90Y5g 8. Interrupt in 8085 Microprocessor PPT - YouTube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9upNIP0PnoU 9. 8085 PROGRAMMING COUNTING and LOOPING - YouTube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1d9sSoYYjcA 10. 8085 Timing diagrams - YouTube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CswQL928Ri8

GENERAL PRACTICAL - I (Any 15 experiments)

Sem: I Code: Paper : V Credit: 4

Objectives:

• To impart practical skills through hands on experience with instruments, computers, circuits and their troubleshooting. • To acquire strong foot hold of physics concepts and strengthen analytical skills. Outcome:

• Student will be able to measure data, practically analyze, interpret results, plot graphs and prepare a report.

1. Young’s Modulus by Elliptic Fringes 2. Young’s Modulus by Hyperbolic Fringes 3. Coefficient of viscosity of liquid – Meyer’s oscillating disc method 4. Determination of Stefan’s constant 5. Hartmann’s interpolation formula –Hydrogen spectrum - Rydberg’s constant 6. Hartmann’s interpolation formula – Solar spectrum - Fraunhofer lines 7. Temperature coefficient of resistance – Thermistor

319

8. Energy loss calculations – B -H curve 9. F.P. Etalon – Distance between plates. 10. Specific heat capacity of liquid- Ferguson’s method 11. Determination of Energy band gap of semiconductors 12. Maxwell’s Bridge – Self inductance 13. Determination of self inductance - Anderson’s bridge 14. LASER- study of laser beam parameters and particle size. 15. Determination of numerical aperture, acceptance angle and attenuation coefficient of an Optical fiber – LASER 16. Four probe method- resistivity of a sample. 17. Dielectric constant of a solid. 18. Impedance measurement of a polymer film using electrochemical work station.(Demonstration) 19. Zeeman Effect - study. 20. Determination of Planck’s constant – Photoelectric cell. QUANTUM MECHANICS - I Sem: II Code: Paper: VI Credit: 4

Objectives • To make the students, understand and visualize the basic structure of quantum Mechanics through matrices • To frame and solve Schrödinger equations for One-electron and two electron systems in 3D. • To learn the basic approximations helpful to solve quantum mechanical problem. Outcomes: • Identify and define basic terms and concepts which are needed for advanced paper in quantum mechanics • Assimilate and apply principles of quantum mechanics to basic scientific problems Unit I : General formalism Quantum concept and postulates – Physical interpretation of the wave function - Normalised and Orthogonal wave function - Expansion theorem - Conditions to be satisfied by the wave function- Solution of the Shroedinger equation (time dependent and time independent) - Stationary state solutions -Operators associated with different observables - Expectation values of dynamical quantities - Probability current density: Particle flux - Ehrenfest's Theorem - Dirac’s- Bra - ket vectors - Dual space. Unit II: Representation Theory Coordinate and momentum representations – operators as matrices - Matrix form of wave function - Schroedinger equation in momentum representation theory - Matrix theory of

320

harmonic oscillator - time evolution - Representation of operators in Schroedinger, Heisenberg and Interaction(Dirac) pictures. Unit III: Eigen value - 3D problems and Identical particles The free particle - the particle in a box - free axis rigid rotator - reduction of two body Hamiltonian - the hydrogen atom - total angular momentum and spherical harmonics. System of identical particles - symmetric and anti-symmetric wave functions -bosons and fermions - construction of symmetric and anti symmetric wave functions - Pauli’s spin matrices and their commutation relations - the density operator, density matrix and its limitations. Unit IV: Angular momentum Commutation relations for orbital angular momentum operator and its components - Eigen 2 2 values of Lz and L - ladder operators(raising and lowering)-commutation relations with Jz and J 2 - matrix representation of angular momentum operators (J , JZ, J+ and J- ) - addition of two angular momenta- Clebsch -Gordon coefficients - calculation of C. G coefficients for j1= j2 = 1/2.

Unit V: Stationary states –Approximation methods Time independent perturbation theory- first order correction to wave function and energy - non - degenerate case - the perturbed harmonic oscillator - degenerate level - Stark effect in hydrogen atom – anharmonic oscillator - variation method - application to ground state of helium atom - WKB approximation - application to linear harmonic oscillator.

Books for study: 1. Quantum mechanics. Sathya Prakash - Kedarnath, Ramnath and Co. Publications.(All Units) 2. Quantum Mechanics. Gupta, Kumar and Sharma - Jai Prakash Nath andCo, Meerut. 11th edition.(Unit – II to V)

Books for reference: 1. Quantum Mechanics. L. Schiff - Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi. 2. A Text Book of Quantum Mechanics. P. M. Mathews and K. Venkatesan - Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2000 3. Quantum Mechanics - A.K. Ghatak and S. Loganathan - McMillan India, 3rd edition. 4. Advanced Quantum mechanics. Sathya Prakash -Kedar Nath, Ram Nath and Co. Publications. 5. Quantum Mechanics - V. Devanathan - Narosa Publishing - New Delhi, 2006 6. Quantum Mechanics. V. K. Thankappan - Wiley - Eastern, New Delhi, 1985. 7. Quantum Mechanics. . J.L. Powell and B. Crasemann -Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi - 1993.

Web references: 1. http://www.netsa.org.lk/OcwWeb/Physics/index.htm 2. http://www.theory.caltech.edu/people/preskill/ph229/ 3. http://www.nscl.msu.edu/~pratt/phy851/lectures/lectures.html 4. http://walet.phy.umist.ac.uk/QM/LectureNotes/ 5. PPT – Introduction to Quantum Theory of Angular Momentum ...www.powershow.com/.../Introduction_to_Quantum_Theory_of_Ang...

321

6. PPT – 5'1 Angular momentum operators PowerPoint presentation ...www.powershow.com/.../51_Angular_momentum_operators_power.. 7. http://ocw.mit.edu/8-05F13 ... Bra ket vectors 8. Mod-08 Lec-34 Clebsch Gordon Coefficients - YouTube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pYG8I0ENlEg 9. Spin and Adding Angular Momentum 8A. Rotations Revisited - ppt ...slideplayer.com/slide/5290612/ 10. Wenzel Kramers Brillouin Approximation - PowerPoint PPT Presentation www.powershow.com/.../WenzelKramersBrillouin_Approximation..

MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS - II Sem: II Code: Paper: VII Credit: 4 Objectives: • To learn to integrate complex functions through contour integrals and analyze numerical values statistically. • To generate moments and generating function of Binomial, Poisson and Normal distribution and solve differential equations through Laplace and Fourier transforms. Outcomes: • Student will be able to do Complex contour integration, perform statistical calculation of data and find solution to standard differential equations

Unit I : Complex Integration Analytic functions – Cauchy - Riemann conditions –Problems- C.R equations in polar form - Harmonic functions - singular points –Cauchy’s integral theorem and formula - Taylor and Laurent’s expansion – Poles, Residues and evaluation of integrals - Cauchy’s Residue theorem – evaluation of definite integrals of trigonometric functions round the Unit circle- Problems. Unit II: Statistics Measures of central tendency –mean – arithmetic mean – geometric mean – harmonic mean – median – mode- Methods of dispersion – standard deviation – numerical problems. Binomial distribution- moments - first four moments- moment generating function – numerical problems-Poisson distribution – -moments - first four moments- moment generating function – numerical problems – Normal distribution – -moments - first four moments- moment generating function – numerical problems properties of normal curve- Problems. Unit III: Fourier and Laplace Transforms Fourier series – Dirichlet conditions - half range series - application of Fourier series to generate square, triangular and saw tooth wave - Fourier transforms –Properties- Fourier sine and cosine transform -Derivative of Fourier transforms-Application of Fourier transform-Heat transfer equations- Problems. Laplace transforms - linearity property - change of scale property - shifting property - transform of derivatives- inverse Laplace transform– Fourier - Mellin Theorem - – Properties -

322

change of scale property - shifting property- Application of Laplace transforms - solution of differential equations with constant coefficients- Problems. Unit IV: Special Functions - I Beta and gamma functions – properties - Bessel differential equation - recurrence relations and generating function for Jn(x) - orthonormality of Bessel function. Hermite differential equation - Hermite polynomials - generating function - recurrence relation - Rodrigue’s formula - orthogonal property of Hermite polynomials. Unit V: Special functions - II Legendre differential equations – Polynomials - generating function - recurrence relations - Rodrigue’s formula - orthogonal property - Laguerre differential equations – Polynomial - generating function - recurrence relations - Rodrigue’s formula - orthogonal property.

Books for problems: Worked out problems in Mathematical Physics, H. K. Dass and Mathematical Physics, Satyaprakash are encouraged. Books for study: 1. Sathya Prakash – Mathematical Physics – 14th Edition – 1999 - Sultan Chand and Co. (All Units) 2. H.K.Dass and Rama Verma-Mathematical Physics- 1997-Sultan Chand and Co (All Units) 3. B. D. Gupta – Mathematical Physics - 3rd Edition – 2004 – Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd (All Units) 4. S. Rajput – Mathematical Physics – 14th Edition – 1999 - Pragathi Prakashan. (All Units) Books for reference: 1. Fourier Analysis – Schaum Series – M. R. Speigel, Tata Mc GrawHill , NY) 2. Theories and Problems of Laplace transforms - Schaum Series – M. R. Speigel, TataMc GrawHill , NY 3. Complex Variables - Vectors and tensors - Schaum Series - M. R. Speigel, TataMc GrawHill , NY 4. M. D. Greenberg - Advanced Engineering Mathematics - 2nd Edition – 1998 - Prentice Hall International, NJ. 5. Special Functions, W. W. Bell, D. Van Nostrand Company Ltd, London, New Jersey, Toronto, Melbourne.

Web references: 1. http://www.mpipks-dresden.mpg.de/~jochen/methods/outline/html 2. http://phy.syr.edu/~trodden/courses/mathmethods/ 3. http://dmoz.org/Science/Physics/Mathematical_Physics/ 4. http://www.thphys.nuim.ie/Notes/engineering/frame-notes.html 5. http://www.thphys.nuim.ie/Notes/frame-notes.html 6. Legendre Polynomials Recurrence Relation - ppt video online downloadslideplayer.com/slide/11575472/ 7. PPT – 3. Laguerre Functions PowerPoint presentation | free to ...www.powershow.com/.../3_Laguerre_Functions_powerpoint_ppt_pr 8. Orthogonal property of hermite polynomials. (MATH) - YouTube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=X7nlQFWv7bE

323

9. Solving Integrals using Beta Gamma Functions - YouTube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=k1zQqG-xSZs 10. ocw.abu.edu.ng/.../res...lectures/lecture-20-the-laplace-transform/ 11. Lecture 24 | The Fourier Transforms and its Applications - YouTubehttps://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zKEh9CxFpsM

ADVANCED ELECTRONICS PRACTICAL (Any 15 experiments) Sem: II Code: Paper: VIII Credit: 4 Objectives: • To construct amplifiers, oscillators and digital circuits. • Write and solve simple programs using microprocessor 8085 Outcome:

• Can demonstrate digital circuits and use microprocessor for simple problems

1. Dual IC Regulated Power Supply – Construction of Voltage follower 2. OP-AMP- Wien’s bridge Oscillator 3. OP-AMP- Phase shift Oscillator 4. OP-AMP - waveform generator - square and triangular waves 5. Construction of Astable multivibrator using 555 timer 6. Construction of Schmitt trigger using 555 timer 7. Verification of Boolean expression - SOP and POS method 8. Half adder and Full adder – Simplification using K map - Using Nand gates 9. Half Subtractor and Full Subtractor - Simplification using K map - Using Nand gates 10. Study of R-S, clocked R-S and D flip flop using NAND /NOR and J-K, D and T flip flops using 7476 / 7473 11. Shift left register, Ring counter and Johnson counter 12. Synchronous and Asynchronous (up and down) counter using IC 74193 13. Designing n- modulo counter using IC 7490 14. Binary Adder / Subtractor using IC 7483 15. Study of D/A converter - R-2R ladder network- resolution and accuracy 16. Microprocessor 8085– Addition with carry , Subtraction with borrow, Multiplication and Division

324

17. Microprocessor 8085 – Ascending and descending order, largest and smallest using register pairs 18. Microprocessor 8085– BCD to binary, Binary to BCD 19. Microprocessor 8085 - Moving a block of data, Fibonacci series, sum of n numbers

COMPUTATIONAL METHODS AND NUMERICAL PROGRAMMING IN C (CORE ELECTIVE)

Sem: II Code: Paper: IX Credit: 3

Objectives: • To provide the basic concept of a few numerical methods • To understand the method of solving different kind of numerical problems in Physics. Outcomes: • Can apply numerical methods to solve integrals, differential equations, curve fit data. • Apply C programming for numerical method problems

Unit I: Solutions of equations Bisection method – iteration method- Newton Raphson method. Solutions of non linear equations: Two equations with two unknowns– the method of Iteration and Newton Raphson method.

Unit II: Interpolation Forward differences – Backward differences – Detection of errors by difference tables – Newton’s forward and backward difference interpolation formula – Lagrange’s interpolation formula. Unit III: Differentiation and Differential equations Newton’s forward and backward difference formulae to get the derivatives. Solution of ordinary differential equations: Euler method – Modified Euler method – Runge - Kutta method (Second and Fourth order).

Unit IV: Numerical Integration and Curve fitting General quadrature formula for equidistance ordinates - Trapezoidal Rule – Simpson’s 1/3 Rule – Simpson’s 3/8 Rule – Gaussian quadrature – 2 points formula. Curve fitting: Principle of least squares – Fitting a/an (i) straight-line ii) curve of the form, y = axb (iii) polynomial of the form, y = a +bx+ cx2 (iv) exponential curve y = aebx.

325

Unit V: Programming with C Integer and floating-point arithmetic expressions – Built - in Functions – Syntaxes of Executable and Non-Executable statements. Flow Charts and Programs: Iteration and Newton Raphson method - Newton’s forward and backward difference formula – Simpson’s 1/3 and 3/8 Rule – Euler method.

Books for study: 1. Introductory methods of Numerical Analysis - S. S. Sastry, 3rd Edn., Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd. (Unit I – IV) 2. Numerical Methods in Science and Engineering-Dr. Venkataraman, V Edn., (2013)- The National Publishing Company (Unit I – IV) 3. .Numerical methods- Dr .P. Kandasamy, Dr. K. Thilagavathi, Dr. K. Gunavathi, S. Chand and company Pvt.Ltd .(Unit I – IV), Appendix C– Gaussian quadrature – 2 points formula. 4. Numerical Methods- A. Singaravelu- IV edition1999.–(Unit I – IV) 5. Computer oriented Statistical and Numerical Methods - E.Balagurusamy, Macmillan. (Unit-V) 6. Computer oriented Numerical Methods - V. Rajaraman, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd.(Unit-V)

Books for reference: 1. Numerical Methods for Scientific and Engineering computation - M. K. Jain, S. R. K. Iyengar, R. K. Jain, New Age international Publishers. 2. 2. Numerical Analysis – Scheid, McGraw Hill International Book Company. 3. Advanced Engineering Mathematics - E. Kreyzig, Wiley.

Web references: 1. Newton Raphson Method - YouTube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oE98W4A7Zio 2. Bisection Method - YouTube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XPUsRgaMsUs 3. Euler's Method | MIT 18.03SC Differential Equations, Fall 2011 ...https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=X5-ucBtneVM 4. https://dspace.mit.edu/bitstream/handle/1721.../index.htm 5. Classical Runge-Kutta, ODE4 - YouTube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Mva9UIz_wwA 6. Fitting a straight line - curve fitting part 1 - YouTube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gj6ct_KMLkU 7. Fitting a parabola - curve fitting part 2 - YouTube https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_IDfBG_pPgs 8. NPTEL Numerical Methods and Programming - YouTube https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PL1A70C686CB3C95FC

9. DEFINITE INTEGRALS using SIMPSON'S 1/3rd RULE - C PROGRAM . ..https://www.youtube.com/watch?V=Hdpg3hHnlkw

326

10. C Functions Tutorial : with Example Programs - YouTube

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=J1vV1VDnCn0

MATERIALS SCIENCE (CORE ELECTIVE) Sem: II Code: Paper: X Credit: 3

Objectives: • To understand materials through their properties • To classify materials based on applications • To learn about new materials.

Outcome : • Student will have basic knowledge of structures, properties, characterization and applications of different materials

Unit I: Nanomaterials Nano particles-Preparation of nano materials-bulk to nano significant impacts-surface to volume ratio- Quantum confinement (qualitative) - Density of states of nano structures- excitons in nano semiconductors-properties of nano materials- carbon nano tubes-applications of nanotechnology.

Unit II: New Materials Metallic glasses –Surface Acoustic Materials (SAM) – Applications and merits of SAW devices-Biomaterial - High temperature materials – Thermoelectric materials – Electrets – Nuclear Engineering Materials-shape memory alloys-SMART materials(Basic ideas).

Unit III: Ceramics Classification and structure of ceramics – ceramic fabrication – ceramic materials –Piezo, ferroelectric and ferromagnetic ceramics –ceramic fibres- cement and concrete –properties and applications of ceramics.

Unit IV: Polymers Polymers-mechanisms of polymerizations-Molecular structure and classification of polymers- properties of polymers – applications- Thermo setting and Thermo plastics -– Composite materials and their classification- Fibre reinforced composites.

Unit V: Characterization techniques X-Ray diffraction technique - crystal structure and grain size determination - Electron microscopy - scanning electron microscope (SEM) -Transmission electron microscope (TEM) – spectroscopic techniques-Absorption spectroscopy (UV) -Photoluminescence (PL) -Fourier transform Infra-red (FTIR) spectroscopy.

327

Books for study: 1. Solid State Physics Rita John, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014. (Unit I andV) 2. Material Science , M. Arumugam, 3rd Edition Anuradha Agencies. (Unit II) 3. Material Science – V. Rajendran, McGraw Hill Education,Chennai,2017 (Unit III and IV) 4. Material Science, G.K. Narula, K.S. Narula andV.K.Gupta, Tata McGraw - Hill, 1988. (Unit IV). 5. Material Science R.B. Gupta , Satya prakashan,1992 (Unit III and IV)

Books for reference: 1. Material Science for Engineers 5th Edition J.C. Anderson, K.D. Leaver, P. Leevers, R.D. Rawling Shapmanand Hall, London 2. Elements of Material Science and Engineering. Lawrence H. Van Vlack, 6thEdition, second ISE reprint, Addison - Wesley.

Web references: 1. www.uptu.ac.in/pdf/sub_nme_301_m_30sep14.pdf 2. www.fisica.ufpr.br/cmlepienski/brian.pdf 3. www.pnl.gov/main/publications/external/technical.../PNNL-17764.pdf 4. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nanomaterials 5. https://link.springer.com/article/10.1007/s11837-013-0826-6 6. https://www.slideshare.net/ChannaKarunathilaka/characterization-of-polymers 7. https://www.slideshare.net/Biswajit_A/smart-materials- 34678533 8. https://engineering.jhu.edu/materials/research-projects/metallic-glasses/ 9. https://www.fei.com/introduction-to-electron-microscopy/sem 10. https://www.researchgate.net/.../What_is_the_difference_between_SEM_and_TEM_te...

MEDICAL PHYSICS (OTHER DEPARTMENT ELECTIVE) Sem: II Code: Paper: XI Credit: 3

Objective : • To give a varied and deep knowledge about the role of various physical quantities in the field of medicine • study the application of the various physical principles in the instrumentation techniques in medicine. Outcome: • Students will appreciate role of Physics in medicine and human physiology

Unit - I : Terminology

328

Terminology – Modeling - Measurement - Physical basis of heat and temperature- Thermometry –Thermography –Heat therapy –Cryosurgery –Measurement of pressure in the body - Eye - Digestive system –Skeleton - Urinary bladder

Unit-II : Physics of Lungs Physics of lungs: - The airways- Blood Lung interaction – Physics of some common lung diseases. Physics of Cardiovascular system: O2 and CO2 exchange in the Capillary system – Work done by the heart – Blood pressure and measurement – Physics of some cardiovascular diseases.

Unit- III : Sound and Light in Medicine Sound in medicine – General properties of sound – The Stethoscope – Ultrasound picture of the body – Ultrasound to measure motion – Physiological effects of ultrasound in therapy – Light in medicine- Application of visible light, UV and IR in medicine – Lasers in medicine. Unit- IV : Radiation Physics Physics of radiation therapy- The dose units used in radiotherapy – Principles of RT – Brachy therapy- in medicine – Biological effects of ionizing radiation – Units and limits – Radiation protection in nuclear medicine Unit - V : Instrumentation Physics Instrumentation: Basic of principles of ECG, EEG, Electro-retinogram, Electro-oculogram and pacemakers. Books for study :

1. Medical Physics- John R.Cameron- Jamer G.Skofronick- John Wiley and Sons,1978.( Unit I – Unit – IV) 2. Bio Physics- K.N. Ramachandran and M. Dakshinamurthy- Tamilnadu Text Book, Society, 1976.(Unit – V)

Books for reference:

1. Handbook of Physics in Medicine and Biology - IOPscience - S Tabakov - 2010.

2. Physics in Biology and Medicine – Taylor, 4th Edition - Elsevier 2009

3. Physics in Biology and Medicine, Third Edition. Paul Davidovits. P.U.P.A. Gilbert. Willy Haeberli. 2003

Web references:

1. https://is.muni.cz/www/384/.../Physics_in_Biology_and_Medicine_3rd_Edition.pdf 2. www.springer.com/in/book/9783319126814 3. ttps://www.slideshare.net/urvashi_nikte/radiation-physics-29729459 4. www-naweb.iaea.org/nahu/DMRP/.../slides/Chapter_01_Basics_radiation_physics.pdf

329

5. science.widener.edu/~vatnick/power_point/respir-2.ppt 6. https://www3.nd.edu/../mphysics/Medical%20Physics/...%20Physics%20of%20the%2 7. learn.healthpro.com/light-therapy-sound-therapy/ 8. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1SiL6AaQCtk 9. https://www.dundee.ac.uk/medphys/instrumentationclinicalengineering 10. https://www.wiley.com/.../Physics+and+Instrumentation+of+Diagnostic+Medical+Ultra.. .

QUANTUM MECHANICS – II

Sem: III Code: Paper: XII Credit: 4

Objectives:

• To infuse quantum mechanics into classical view of scattering so as to appreciate the role of quantum mechanics in atomic and sub-atomic systems • To understand the time dependent approximations and other methods to analyze many- electron systems. Outcomes: • Analyze a problem quantum mechanically and outline the principle of approach to many body problems • Apply quantum mechanics to advanced problems and associate its applications spectroscopy and solid state physics. Unit I: Scattering theory Kinematics of scattering process - differential and total cross - section - wave mechanical picture of scattering - scattering amplitude - scattering amplitude in terms of Green's function - Born approximation and its validity - scattering by Yukawa potentials -optical theorem - partial wave analysis - phase shifts - scattering amplitude - very low energy scattering - scattering length – The effective range theory. Unit II: Evolution with time Time dependent perturbation theory - first order transition under constant perturbation - physical interpretation of the curve - transition probability - second order transition under constant perturbation - - Fermi - Golden rule- harmonic perturbation - adiabatic and sudden approximation - Semi classical treatment: Einstein's coefficients - interaction of atom with quantized radiation. Unit III: Relativistic wave equations The Klein - Gordon equation - plane wave solution - charge and current densities - Dirac matrices and their properties - Dirac equation - free particle solution of Dirac equation -- existence of electron spin - negative energy states of positron spin of Dirac particle - properties of gamma matrices – traces - covariant form of Dirac equation and proof for covariance Unit IV: Classical fields

330

Classical fields - Euler Lagrange equations - canonical coordinates for quantization of fields - Hamiltonian formulation - second quantization - quantization of real and complex scalar fields - creation, destruction and number operators - quantization of Schroedinger equation - second quantization of K.G equation. Unit V: Atomic and molecular structure Approximation in atomic structure -central field approximation - Thomas - Fermi statistical model - Hartee - Fock self consistent field method – valence bond theory - Heitler - London theory of hydrogen molecule - the doublet separation of spectral lines in alkali atom.

Books for study: 1. A Text Book of Quantum Mechanics. P. M. Mathews and K.Venkatesan - Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2000.[Unit – I] 2. Quantum Mechanics - V. Devanathan - Narosa Publishing - New Delhi, 2006. [Unit – I] 3. Quantum Mechanics. Gupta, Kumar and Sharma - Jai Prakash Nath andCo, Meerut. 11th edition. [Unit – IIandUnit – III] 4. Quantum mechanics. Sathya Prakash -Kedar Nath, Ram Nath and Co. Publications. [Unit – III] 5. Advanced Quantum mechanics. Sathya Prakash-Kedar Nath, Ram Nath and Co. Publications. [Unit – IVand V] 6. Quantum Mechanics. L. Schiff - Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1968.[Unit – V] Books for reference: 1. Quantum Mechanics. L. Schiff - Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1968. 2. Quantum Mechanics. V. K. Thankappan - Wiley - Eastern, New Delhi, 1985. 3. Quantum Mechanics - A.K. Ghatak and S. Loganathan -McMillan India, 3rd edition. 4. Quantum Mechanics. . J.L. Powell and B. Crasemann -Narosa Publishing House , New Delhi - 1993. Web references: 1. http://www.netsa.org.lk/OcwWeb/Physics/index.html 2. http://www.theory.caltech.edu/people/preskill/ph229 3. http://www.nscl.msu.edu/~pratt/phy851/lectures/lectures.html 4. https://www.physics.harvard.edu/uploads/files/thesesPDF/lupusax.pdf 5. www.tcm.phy.cam.ac.uk/~bds10/aqp/lec20-21_compressed.pdf 6. www.tcm.phy.cam.ac.uk/~bds10/aqp/lec18.pdf 7. staff.ustc.edu.cn/~yuanzs/teaching/Fermi-Golden-Rule-No-II.pdf 8. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Klein–Gordon_equation 9. www.philiphofmann.net/book_material/notes/heitlerlondon2.pdf 10. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gamma_matrices

331

ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY AND RELATIVITY

Sem: III Code: Paper: XIII Credit: 4 Objectives: • To provide an introduction to electrostatics, magneto statics, boundary value problems and dielectrics, propagation characteristics of electromagnetic waves • To explain classical electrodynamics based on Maxwell's equations including its formulation in covariant form and insight into relativistic electrodynamics Outcome: • Students will be able to analyze the concept of Electrodynamics fields, dielectric behavior, interaction of EM waves with matter, propagation of EM waves through waveguides. • Interpret Maxwell’s equations in various media and relativistic Electrodynamics in four vector Unit I: Electrostatics Electrostatic Potential- Gauss’ law-Application of Gauss’s law to a spherically symmetric charge distribution– Electric field and potential of a dipole and Quadruple –Equi potential surfaces- Poisson’s equation - Laplace equation - Uniqueness theorem for field of a charge distribution - Method of electrical images - spherical conductor when earthed, insulated conducting sphere near a point charge- Electrostatic energy- Electrostatic Boundary conditions on field vectors. Unit II: Magnetostatics and Dielectrics Biot-Savart’s law-Ampere’s theorem-Magnetic scalar potential-Equivalence of a small current loop and a magnetic dipole-Magnetic vector potential-Lorentz condition-Dielectrics- Polarisation - Different types of Polarisation - Polarisability - displacement vector, dielectric constant and electric susceptibility - Boundary conditions on field vectors - potential energy of charge distribution in the presence of dielectrics - dielectric sphere in a uniform field – Lorentz field in a dielectric – Clausius-Mossotti relation. Unit III: Maxwell’s Equations Equation of continuity - Displacement current - Maxwell’s Equations – Physical significance-Integral form – Electromagnetic energy and Poynting’s theorem – Poynting vector - Wave equation - vector and scalar potentials - Maxwell’s equations in terms of electromagnetic potentials - Non - uniqueness of electromagnetic potentials and concept of gauge - Lorentz gauge Unit IV: Wave Propagation Reflection-Refraction-Boundary conditions at the surface of Discontinuity-Fresnel’s equations-EM waves in free space, non-conducting isotropic dielectric medium and linear isotropic conducting medium - Interaction of EM waves with matter - propagation of EM waves in rectangular wave guides-Transverse electric mode(TE) and Transverse magnetic(TM) mode - Radiation from an oscillating electric dipole-Expression for radiative power. Unit V: Relativistic Electrodynamics

332

Minkowsky space - Invariance of D’ Alembertian operator - Lorentz transformation for space and time in four vector form –Transformation for charge and current densities –Equation of continuity in covariant form– Transformation of electromagnetic potentials - Lorentz condition in covariant form - Invariance of Maxwell’s field equations in terms of four vectors . Books for study: 1. Electromagnetic theory and electrodynamics, Sathya Prakash, Kedarnath Ramnath and Co, Meerut 2. Electrodynamics, Gupta, Kumar and Singh, S.Chand and Co, New Delhi . 3. Electrodynamics, Chopra and Agarwal K.Nath and Co, Meerut Books for reference: 1. Classical Electrodynamics, J.D.Jackson and John Willey (1962), New york 2. Introduction to special theory of relativity – Robert Resnick, Wiley Eastern Ltd, I Edn 3. Foundations of Electromagnetic Theory – J.R Reitz, F.J, Milford and R.W. Christry, Narosa, III Edn, New Delhi, 1998. 4. Electromagnetic Fields and waves - P. Lorrain and D.R.Corson, CBS, New Delhi, II Edn, 1996 5. Introduction Electrodynamics, David J. Griffith ( II Edition ) Prentice Hall of India, Web references: 1. http://www.plasma.uu.se/CED/Book/index.html 2. http://www.thphys.nuim.ie/Notes/electromag/frame-notes.html 3. http://www.thphys.nuim.ie/Notes/em-topics/em-topics.html 4. http://dmoz.org/Science/Physics/Electromagnetism/Courses_and_Tutorials/ 5. https://www.cpp.edu/~pbsiegel/supnotes/nts1331.pdf 6. NPTEL :: Physics - Electromagnetic Theory nptel.ac.in/downloads/115101005/ 7. Magnetostatics- Nptel nptel.ac.in/courses/115101005/downloads/lectures-doc/Lecture- 23.pdf 8. Module 6 : Wave Guides Lecture 43 : Rectangular Wave Guide ... - nptel https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101057/downloads/lec43.pdf 9. Lecture 10: TEM, TE, and0 TM Modes for Waveguides ... - Keith W. Whites whites.sdsmt.edu/classes/ee481/notes/481Lecture10.pdf

333

GENERAL PRACTICAL - II (Any 15 experiments)

Sem: III Code: Paper : XIV Credit: 4

Objectives: • To impart practical skills through hands on experience with instruments, computers, circuits and their troubleshooting. • To acquire strong foot hold of physics concepts and strengthen analytical skills. Outcome:

• Student will be able to measure data, practically analyze, interpret results, plot graphs and prepare a report.

1. Specific charge - Thomson method. 2. Wavelength and separation between wavelengths – Michelson’s interferometer . 3. Hall constants of a semiconductor - Hall effect. 4. G. M. Counter – characteristics. 5. G. M. Counter - absorption coefficient – maximum range of β rays. 6. Susceptibility - Guoy’s method. 7. Susceptibility - Quincke’s method. 8. Compressibility in liquids – Ultrasonic interferometer. 9. Thickness of L. G. Plate. 10. Dielectric constant of a liquid. (Graph using Origin) 11. Solar constant – Lee’s Disc method. 12. Thickness of wire – LASER and air wedge. 13. Thickness of plate - Edser Butler fringes. 14. Coefficient of thermal expansion – Air wedge method. 15. Ultrasonic diffraction – RF oscillator. 16. Mutual Inductance – Carey Faster’s bridge. 17. Solar cells – Characteristics and efficiency. 18. Thickness of mica sheet – Michelson’s interferometer. 19. Spectral Analysis – UV - Visible spectrophotometer. (Demonstration)

334

20. Spectral Analysis – FTIR spectrometer. (Demonstration) 21. Scilab – Simple experiments (Demonstration) ADVANCED ELECTRONICS (CORE ELECTIVE) Sem: III Code: Paper: XV Credit: 3

Objectives: • To understand peripheral devices applied to microprocessors and microcontrollers. • To learn, interfacing the peripheral devices with microprocessors and microcontroller programming. To update knowledge on satellite communication and Antennas. Outcomes: • Student will be able to write and execute programs using 8085 interface and microcontroller 8051

Unit I: Peripheral Devices Peripheral Devices – Hand shake signals – Programmable peripheral interface – 8255 . Interfacing 8255 to 8085 Programmable keyboard/display interface – 8279 - Block diagram of 8279 – Keyboard section – Scan section – Display section – MPU interface section - . Programming the 8279 – Illustration: 8279 interface to 8085

Unit II: Architecture of Microcontroller 8051 Introduction - Pin out functions of 8051 – Internal architecture of 8051 – Program counter – Program memory – Data memory – Internal RAM and registers - Special function registers - of 8051 - I/O ports – Timers and Control registers –Serial interface - Interrupt system Addressing modes – Immediate, register, direct and indirect addressing modes

Unit – III: 8051 instructions and applications Instruction set of 8051 - Arithmetic, Logical, Data move Jump and Call instructions,– Assembly language programming - simple programs to illustrate arithmetic and logical operations (addition, multiplication and division - 8 bit) – Applications: Interfacing of LED – Interfacing of single key.

Unit IV: Antenna Radiation field and Radiation resistance of a short dipole antenna -Grounded λ/4 Antenna- Ungrounded λ/2 Antenna- Antenna Arrays-Broadside and End Side Arrays-Antenna Gain- Directional High Frequency Antennas- Sky Wave Propagation-Ionosphere-Ecles and Larmor Theory-Magneto Ionic Theory-Ground Wave Propagation.

Unit V: Satellite Communication Satellite Communication: Orbits, Station keeping; Satellite attitude; Path loss calculation; Link calculation - link models – system parameters – link equations – link budget; Multiple access techniques; Transponders; Effects of nonlinearity of transponders.

335

Books for study : 1. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and applications. Ramesh Gaonker 3 rd edition, Willey eastern ltd.( Unit I, II, III) 2. Fundamentals of 8085 microprocessor, V.Vijayendran -Viswanathan Pub .( Unit I, II, III) 3. 3. Fundamentals of 8086 microprocessor- V.Vijayendran -Viswanathan Pub .( Unit I, II, III) 4. Fundamentals of microprocessors and micro computers. B.Ram, Dhanapattra publications, New Delhi (Units I, II, III) 5. Advanced microprocessors and microcontrollers.III Edition B.P.Singh and Renu Singh New age International Publishers (Unit III) 6. Electronic Communications – Dennis Roddy andCoolen , Prentice Hall of India, IV Edition,1995 (Unit IV,V) 7. Communication systems, B.P.Lathi, Willey eastern ltd. (Unit IV,V) 8. Advanced electronics communication Systems ,fourth Edition, Wayne Tomasi Prentice Hall, Inc., (1998) (Unit IV,V)

Books for reference: 1. Microprocessor and its applications, Nagoorkani, first edition, RBA publications,1999 2. The 8051 Microcontroller, Kenneta J.Ayala Penram International – India. 3. Electronics Communication system by G.Kennedy . Davis .Tata Mc Graw Hill Pub.

Web references: 1. https://www.ectnote.com/2009/12/8255-programmable-peripheral-interface.html 2. https://www.tutorialspoint.com › Microprocessor › Programmable Peripheral Interface 3. https://www.tutorialspoint.com › Microprocessor › 8279 Programmable Keyboard 4. https://www.slideshare.net/sb108ec/8051-architecture-sb-14877955 5. https://www.elprocus.com/led-interfacing-with-8051-microcontroller/ 6. https://www.elprocus.com/led-interfacing-with-8051-microcontroller/ 7. home.etf.rs/~vm/os/mips/predavanja/i8051/8051d.ppt 8. https://www.slideshare.net/ishanegi35/antennas-wave-and-propagation 9. EC6602 ANTENNA and WAVE PROPAGATION - ppt downloadslideplayer.com/slide/10388121/ 10. https://www.tutorialspoint.com › ... › Satellite Communications

336

ADVANCED NUCLEAR PHYSICS (CORE ELECTIVE) Semester: III Code: Paper: XV Credit :3

Objectives: • To comprehend the advanced models and heavy ion reactions in Nuclear Physics. • To get introduced to QCD, MIT bag model of hadrons and Abdus Salam model of electroweak unification.

Outcomes: • Student would have developed skills to apply quark models to analyze weak interaction physics such as beta and kaon decay. • Skills to read and understand articles in nuclear and particle physics.

Unit I: Nuclear forces: Nucleon - Nucleon scattering: Basic concepts – Spin dependence and Charge independence of nuclear forces – Effective range theory ofn-p scattering - Differences between (p - p) and (n - p) scattering– Proton - Proton scattering below 10MeV: Theory Experimental data– High energy nucleon-nucleon scattering: (n-p) and (p-p) scattering above 10 MeV.

Unit II: Nuclear Models: Fermi gas model - Collective model: Vibrational states – Mathematical analysis of vibrational states– Rotational states – The Nilsson model–Optical model.

Unit III: Heavy Ion Nuclear Reactions: Introduction – Main features of H.I reactions – Techniques used in H.I reactions – Determination of life times:Transport method – Combination of Transport method and Threshold detector – Projection method - H.I reactions and Coulomb barrier –formation of anomalous nuclei in H.I reactions.

Unit IV: Neutrino Physics: Pauli’s Neutrino Hypothesis – Properties of Neutrino (charge, spin, mass, helicity) - Experimental verification of the existence of Neutrino: Leipunski’s experiment – Alikhanov experiment – Cowan and Reines experiment – Neutrino mass and double β-decay rates – Neutrino mixing and oscillation.

Unit V: Quark Model and Weak Interaction: Quark model for hadrons – Colour quantum numbers – Colour confinement– Quantum chromo dynamics (QCD) – Asymptotic freedom in QCD - Elementary ideas on MIT bag model - Tau - Theta puzzle – Parity non-conservation in weak interactions - Exchange bosons of the weak interaction - Electroweak unification - Basic ideas of Weinberg and Abdus Salam model of weak interaction.

337

Books for study: 1. Nuclear Physics and Particle Physics –Sathyaprakash, Sultan Chand andSons.(Unit I and II). 2. Fundamentals of Nuclear Physics - Jahan Singh, Pragati Publication. (Unit III, IV and V) 3. Elements of Nuclear Physics, M.L.Pandyaand R.P.S. Yadav - Kedarnath Ramnath and Co. 4. Nuclear Physics – Theory and Experiment, R.R.Roy and B.P. Nigam, Wiley Eastern 5. Introduction to Elementary particles, David Griffiths, Johm Wiley andSons, 1987 6. Nuclear Physics, Irvin Kaplan, Addison Wesley, 1962

Books for reference: 1. Atomic and Nuclear Physics (Vol. 2), S.N. Ghosha 2. Nuclear and particle Physics, W.E. Burcham and M. Jobes 3. Introduction to Nuclear Reactions, G.R. Satchler 4. Quarks and Leptons. F. Halzen and A.D. Martin 5. Nuclear Physics - An Introduction, S.B .Patel, New Age International. 6. Concepts of Nuclear Physics, B.L. Cohen, Tata McGraw Hill 7. Nuclear and Particle Physics, W.E. Burcham and M. Jobes, JohnWiley and Sons.

Web references: 1. http://www.diva-portal.se/smash/get/diva2:813446/FULLTEXT01.pdf 2. https://www.physi.uni-heidelberg.de/~fschney/2008SS-Preseminar/Bag_models.pdf 3. The deformed shell model or nilsson model : Nuclear ...oxfordindex.oup.com/view/10.1093/acprof:oso/9780198507246.003.0008 4. www.bhojvirtualuniversity.com/ss/sim/physics/msc_f_phy_p3u2.do 5. https://link.springer.com/content/pdf/10.1007/BF02724442.pdf 6. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cowan–Reines_neutrino_experiment 7. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Electroweak_interaction 8. Physics | Nuclear Reactions | Pauli's Neutrino Hypothesis | by ...https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MuhHgTVQNZE 9. Quantum ChromoDynamicshttps://arxiv.org/pdf/hep-ph/0505192 10. https://www.britannica.com/science/electroweak-theory

338

INSTRUMENTATION TECHNIQUES (CORE ELECTIVE) Sem: III Code: Paper: XVI Credit: 3

Objective: • To understand the working of electronic instruments, control circuits and biomedical instrumentation. • To develop the knowledge on the physics for the structural characterization through the X-Ray diffraction. Outcome: • Students are familiarized with maintenances and measurements different electronic instruments in electronics fields. • Students get hands on experience to find the errors in the electronic instrument.

Unit I: X-Ray Diffraction X-ray diffraction: Principle- Instrumentation and application of Electron diffraction- principle- Instrumentation and application of Neutron diffraction- principle – Instrumentation and application.

Unit II: Electronic Measurements and Instruments Analog and digital instruments-comparison- Errors in ammeter, voltmeter and multimeter- DC ammeter- DC voltmeter- ohmmeter- Basic controls of CRO- Dual trace oscilloscope- Dual beam oscilloscope- Digital storage oscilloscope.

Unit III: Transducers Classification of Transducer- Active and passive transducer- force and displacement transducer- Strain gauges – Effects of changes in temperature- Piezoelectric transducer- Thermistors- Thermoelectric transducers.

Unit IV: Control Circuits and Applications Generation of control pulses- microprocessor based implementation-static circuit breakers for DC and AC circuits- regulated power supply- UPS- SMPS.

Unit V: Bio Medical Instrumentation Bio amplifiers- Bio potentials- Bio electricity- Bio potential recording: ECG, EEG, EMG, ERG- Specific types of electrodes used- different lead systems- their waveforms.

Books for study: 1. Elements of crystallography – Dr. V.Velmurugan( Unit – I) 2. Electrical and Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation – ER.R.K.Rajput, S.Chand(New edition)(Unit – II and III) 3. Industrial electronics – G.K.Mithal.(Unit – IV)

339

4. Bio medical instrumentation- M.Arumugam, Anuradha agencies publishers, II edition.(Unit – V)

Books for reference: 1. Elements of X-Ray diffraction R.D.Culity 2. Electronic Instrumentation – S.K.Khedkar- Punevidyarthigriha Prakashan (First edition) Web references: 1. Basics of X-ray diffraction - nptel nptel.ac.in/courses/113108054/3 2. X-ray diffraction and structural analysis - nptel nptel.ac.in/courses/115103030/2 3. Neutron diffraction - nptel nptel.ac.in/courses/115103030/6 4. Familiarization with CRO and Function Generator - nptel www.nptel.ac.in/courses/122104013/labs/Esc102LAB.../Lab1_July2004_FINAL.doc 5. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Transducer 6. Basics of ups seminar presentation - SlideShare https://www.slideshare.net/MuraliKrishnan16/basics-of-ups-seminar-presentation 7. Sms - SlideSharehttps://www.slideshare.net/kumar_vic/sms-17183918 8. biopotential amplifiers - WordPress.com https://hkumarblog.files.wordpress.com/2014/04/biopotential-amp.pptx 9. Biopotential – Wikipediahttps://sv.wikipedia.org/wiki/Biopotential 10. Basic ElectroCardiogram (ECG)fac.ksu.edu.sa/sites/default/files/ecg_revised_0.pptx

340

FUNDAMENTALS OF ASTROPHYSICS (OTHER DEPARTMENT ELECTIVE) Sem: III Code: Paper: XVII Credit: 3

Objectives : • To know about the Solar system • To understand the Stellar evolution • To have an idea of galaxies and instrumentation Outcome:

• The students will easily understand the fundamentals of Astrophysics

Unit I: Astronomers Hipparchus-Ptolemy-Corpernicus-Galileo-Kepler-Newton-Herschel-Einstein-Hubble

Unit II: Solar system Solar system - Types of Planets - Asteroids – Meteroids - Comets - Sun - Composition- Photosphere- Chromosphere – Sun spots - Solar flares- Eclipses- Solar- Lunar-Time of Occurence - Safety- Similarities and Differences

Unit III: Stellar Evolution Spectral classification of Stars - Harvard system -Birth of a Star- Protostar –Maturity –Ageing – Death of star- white dwarfs Chandrasekhar limit- Neutron stars - Black holes.

Unit IV: Galaxies Galaxies –Milky way-Stellar populations-Types of galaxies-Elliptical galaxy –Spiral galaxy- Irregular galaxy-Quasers- origin of galaxies

Unit V Astronomical Instruments

341

Classification of Telescopes- Optical Telescope - Reflector Telescope - Radio Telescopes - Significance of star chart -Hubble space Telescope- X-ray astronomy: Sun-Stars-Supernova remnants- Galaxies.

Books for study: 1. Introductory Astronomy- Nicholas and Thomas,Wesley publishing Company II Encyclopedia-Space ( Unit-I,II,III) 2. Modern Physics – R. Murugesan, S. Chand and Co (Unit-III) 3. X-ray Astronomy : K D Abhyankar (Unit V)

Books for reference: 1. Introductory Astronomy- Nicholas and Thomas,Wesley publishing Company

Web references:

1. https://www.nasa.gov/audience/forstudents/5-8/features/nasa.../what-is-an-eclipse-58 2. www.space .com 3. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=n1y8w0F8R3s – Sun 4. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zzbCEF37MfU – Solar System 5. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Qd6nLM2QlWw – Solar System 6. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zRSPMkUXdMc – Galaxies 7. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RdrGcg_WNaM- Celestial objects

METHODS OF SPECTROSCOPY

Sem: IV Code: Paper: XVIII Credit: 4 Objective: • To make the students understand the basic concepts of different types of spectroscopic methods, their instrumentation techniques and simple applications. Outcome: • On completion of the paper, the students will be able to interpret the given spectra. Unit I: Microwave and Microwave Spectroscopy: Classification of molecules – linear poly atomic molecules – symmetric top molecules –Stark effect – Quadrupole hyperfine interaction – microwave spectrometer – Application – the inversion spectrum of ammonia.

342

Infrared Spectroscopy: Vibrational energy of a diatomic molecule – selection rules – vibrating diatomic molecule – diatomic rotator –vibrations of polyatomic molecules – normal vibrations of CO2 and H2O molecules – Fermi resonance – hydrogen bonding – FTIR spectroscopy (instrumentation and advantages only)

Unit II: Raman Spectroscopy Raman effect – quantum mechanical description of the Raman effect – classical approach to Raman effect – mutual exclusion principle – rotational spectroscopy – vibration rotation spectroscopy – FT Raman spectrometer – non linear Raman effects – hyper Raman effect – stimulated Raman effect – inverse Raman effect – coherent anti stokes Raman scattering (CARS).

Unit III: NMR and ESR Spectroscopy NMR Spectroscopy: Magnetic properties of nuclei – resonance condition - NMR instrumentation – relaxation processes – Bloch equations –chemical shift. ESR Spectroscopy: Theory of ESR – comparison between NMR and ESR – instrumentation – hyperfine splitting – determination of g –value – line width – applications – structural determination and biological studies.

Unit IV: NQR and Mossbauer Spectroscopy NQR Spectroscopy: Principle of NQR – the Quadrupole nucleus - Nuclear Quadrupole energy levels for axial and non axial symmetry – NQR instrumentation – Chemical bonding - applications – Quadrupole resonance of minerals. Mossbauer Spectroscopy: Principle of Mossbauer spectroscopy – applications – chemical shift – quadrupole splitting – and Zeeman splitting.

Unit V: Surface Spectroscopy Electron energy loss spectroscopy (EELS) – reflection absorption IR spectroscopy (RAIRS) – inelastic helium scattering – photoelectron spectroscopy (PES) – X ray(XPES) – ultraviolet (UPES) – Auger electron spectroscopy (AES) - X ray fluorescence (XRF) – applications. Books for study:

1. Molecular structure and spectroscopy, G. Aruldhas, Prentice Hall, New Delhi (Unit I , II, III, IV – NMR, NQR) 2. Vibrational spectroscopy, D.N. Sathyanarayana, New Age International Publishers (Unit II) 3. Methods of spectroscopy , Gurdeep Chatwaal. (Unit III- ESR Spectroscopy) 4. Fundamentals of spectroscopy, C.N Banwell Tata Mc Graw Hill (Unit V)

Books for reference:

1. Microwave Spectroscopy - Towns and Shallow, McGraw Hill.

343

2. Scattering of light and Raman effect - Bhagavantham – Chemical Publishing Co 3. Nuclear Quadrupole Resonance – Hagas Hahn – Academic Press. 4. Principles of Mossbauer Spectroscopy – Chang, Mc Graw Hill. 5. Electronic spectra of diatomic and polyatomic molecules – Herzberg – Van Nostrand Reinhold Co. Web references:

1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rotational_spectroscopy 2. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Infrared_spectroscopy 3. https://www.slideshare.net/sherishahine/infrared-spectroscopy-32876736 4. https://www.slideshare.net/ajamilan12/raman-spectroscopy-13063160 5. https://www.chem.fsu.edu/.../10%20CHM%205710%20Vibrational%20spectroscopy. 6. bionmr.unl.edu/courses/chem991a...to_nmr/lectures/chapter-1-NMR-theory.ppt 7. www.nmr2.buffalo.edu/resources/edu/matr/NMR-Lecture-SOS.ppt 8. www.nptel.ac.in/courses/122101001/Slide/lect15part1.doc 9. Lecture-12 Electronic Spectroscopy - nptel nptel.ac.in/courses/122101001/12 10. Introduction to EPR spectroscopy - nptelnptel.ac.in/courses/104106048/2

SOLID STATE PHYSICS Semester: IV Code: Paper: XIX Credit:4

Objectives: • To understand the free electron theory quantum mechanically and learn its applications. • To learn about band theory and its success towards classification of materials. • To acquire knowledge about superconductors and magnetic materials Outcome: On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to • Learn the basics of band theory and underlying theoretical development for the description of certain properties and phenomena of solid states.

Unit I: Lattice Vibrations Vibrations of one dimensional monoatomic and diatomic linear lattice – the Brillouin zone –Normal modes of vibrations - phonons - momentum of phonons -- lattice thermal conductivity – inelastic scattering of photons and by phonons - Umklapp process. Debye's model of lattice heat capacity - modes - The Debye approximations - limitations of the Debye model.

Unit II: Free electron theory

344

Somerfield’s Quantum theory - Free electron gas in one dimensional potential well–Free electron gas in three dimensions - Density of states - Fermi energy- Fermi – Dirac statistics - Application of free electron gas model - Electronic specific heat - spin paramagnetism of free electrons.

Unit III: Band theory of solids Bloch theorem and proof - Kronig - Penny model - electron energy bands - velocity, acceleration and the effective mass of an electron – Tight binding Approximation - Concept of Fermi surface - characteristics of Fermi surface -Distinction between metals, insulators and semiconductors – Energy band diagram and Fermi level – Hall effect.

Unit IV: Superconductivity Superconductivity - basic concepts - Meissner effect - isotope effect – entropy - specific heat - Thermodynamics of superconducting transition – Type-I, Type-II superconductors - London equations - London penetration depth – BCS Theory (qualitative ) - Flux quantization – Quantum tunneling - AC and DC Josephson effect - Applications of Superconductors: SQUIDS – high temp Superconductors.

Unit V: Magnetic Properties of solids Quantum theory of Ferromagnetism –Weiss field - exchange interactions - Magnons – Magnon dispersion relation - Domain theory of Ferromagnetism - Bloch wall - Molecular theory of Antiferromagnetism - Neel temp - Ferrimagnetism – Structure of Ferrite:MgAl2O4 - Curie temperature and susceptibility of ferrimagnets - Applications of Ferrite.

Books for study: 1. Solid State Physics - M.A. Wahab Narosha Publishing house. (All Units) 2. Solid State Physics - S.L.Gupta and V.Kumar. K.Nath andCo,Meerut. (All Units) 3. Solid state physics, R.K.Puri and V.K.Babbar, third edition, S.Chand and company Ltd.(2005) (All Units) 4. Solid State Physics – S.O.Pillai, New Age International, New Delhi, 1997. (All Units) 5. Solid state physics, H.C.Gupta, Vikas publishing house private Ltd. (1995). (All Units)

Books for reference: 1. Introduction to Solid State Physics - C. Kittel - Wiley Eastern - New Delhi 2. Solid State Physics – R.L.Singhal, Kedarnath and Co., Meerut – 6th Edition. 3. Solid State Physics Rita John, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014. 4. Solid State Physics - A.J. Dekker - Macmillan India 5. Introduction to Solids – Azaroff, Tata McGraw Hill. 6. Elementary Solid State Physics Principles and applications – M.Ali Omar, Addison Wesley, 1974 7. Solid State Physics - H.E. Hall - John Wiley and Sons 8. Principles of Solid state Physics – H.V.Keer, Wiley Edition.

Web references: 1. www-thphys.physics.ox.ac.uk/people/SteveSimon/.../LectureNotes2012. 2. www.web.mit.edu/course/6/6.732/www/texts.html

345

3. Lecture 5: Reciprocal lattice II, Brillouin zone and Bragg s,.- nptel nptel.ac.in/courses/113104012/5 4. Debye Theory of Specific Heat, Lattice Vibrations – Worked., - nptel nptel.ac.in/courses/115106061/21 5. Pauli Paramagnetism and Landau Diamagnetism - nptel nptel.ac.in/courses/115106061/37 6. Magnetic properties – nptel nptel.ac.in/courses/112108150/pdf/PPTs/MTS_16_m.pdf 7. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/.../lecture-notes/MIT2_57S12_lec_notes_2004.pdf kronig penney 8. web.mit.edu/6.763/www/FT03/Lectures/Lecture11.pdf Josephson 9. web.mit.edu/8.13/www/JLExperiments/JLExp39.pdf superconductivity 10. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/materials...and...magnetic-properties.../lecture-notes/

ADVANCED ELECTRONICS AND C PROGRAMMING PRACTICAL (Any 15 experiments)

Sem: IV Code: Paper: XX Credits : 4 Objectives: • Write and solve simple programs using microprocessor 8085 interface and 8051 interface and perform advanced electronics experiments • Write C programs for numerical methods problems Outcome: • Can demonstrate advanced digital circuits and use microprocessor and microcontroller for interface. • Can write and execute C programs.

1. Micro controller 8051 – Ascending and descending order and Fibonacci series 2. Micro controller 8051 – Smallest, Largest in an array and block move. 3. Microprocessor 8086 – addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. 4. Frequency counter to count up to 99. 5. Study of ALU. 6. Solving simultaneous equations - Op-Amp. 7. Solving differential equations - Op-Amp. 8. Active filters - low pass, high pass and band pass filters– First order - Op-Amp. 9. UJT - Characteristics and construction of relaxation oscillator. 10. Interfacing PLC to display data in various ports, for blinking of LED in Port A and Port B and to design up and down mod counter with μP 8085.

346

11. Interfacing external keyboard to receive a single key press and to affect a blinking and rolling of message in the internal LED display with μP 8085 through IC 8279. 12. Interfacing ADC with μP 8085. 13. Interfacing DAC to generate waves with μP8085. 14. Interfacing PLC to effect traffic signal with microcontroller 8051. 15. Interfacing stepper motor with microcontroller 8051. 16. Programming in C - Newton - Raphson method- four roots- verification by MS-EXCEL / manual Calculation. 17. Programming in C - Simpson’s 1/3 and 3/ 8 rules - verification by MS-EXCEL / manual Calculation. 18. Programming in C - Newton’s forward and backward interpolation- verification by MS-EXCEL / manual Calculation. 19. Programming in C - Runge Kutta method – verification by MS-EXCEL / manual Calculation. 20. MASM - Simple Programs.

SPACE SCIENCE (CORE ELECTIVE) Sem: IV Code: Paper: XXII Credit: 3

Objectives:

• To enlighten the basic concepts of Modern astronomy and Astrophysics. • To enrich the theoretical knowledge of the student on the various instrumentation used in the field. • To acquire knowledge on satellite communication system and its applications.

Course Outcomes:

• The students would obtain a broad and basic knowledge from the course, which emphasis the very wide range of applicability of concepts from many areas in Astrophysics. • Students will be able make observations regarding the earth or space and infer conclusions from them.

Unit I: Milky Way and Solar system Galaxies - Types of Galaxies – Milky way: General structure - Solar system - Planets - Asteroids – Meteoroids - Comets.

Unit II: Stellar Evolution Birth of a star - Evolution of stars - Post main sequence - White dwarfs -Red giants - Neutron stars and Black holes - Equation of state for stellar interior (Qualitative only) - Energy generation in stars - Structure of Stellar Atmosphere.

Unit III: Spectral Classification

347

Spectral classification of Stars - Harvard system - Hertz sprung - Russel Diagram - Luminosity effect on stellar spectra - Variable stars - Composite stars:Neutron stars-Black hole- Star clusters-Supernova - Binary stars - Chandrasekhar limit.

Unit IV: Astronomical Instruments Optical telescope - Celestial and Terrestrial telescopes - General properties of telescope: light gathering power - angular magnification - resolving power - Astronomical standard spectrograph - Characteristics of spectrographs: Resolving power-Dispersion-Speed-Throughput - Radio telescope – Hubble space telescope.

Unit V: Satellite Communications Kepler’s laws – Orbits and inclination power systems – Attitude control –Geostationary orbits – Advantages and disadvantages - Satellite links – Parameters: Angle of elevation- Propagation delay-Orbital spacing – Satellite communication frequency bands, GIS and GPS (elementary ideas) – Indian satellites and applications.

Books for study: 1. Modern Physics – R. Murugesan, S. Chand and Co. [Unit – I , Unit – II and Unit - IV] 2. Astrophysics - K. D. Abhyankar, Tata McGraw Hill Co.[Unit – III] 3. Introduction to Astrophysics - Baidyanath Basu, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. [Unit – II, Unit – III and Unit - IV] 4. 4. Communication Electronics – N D Deshpande, D A Deshpande and P K Rangole, Tata McGraw Hill Co.[ Unit - IV,(1989) [Unit – V] 5. Electronic Communication Systems – Kennedy and Davis – Fourth Edition - Tata McGraw Hill Co.[Unit - V]

Books for reference 1. Stellar structure -S.Chandrasekar, Donar - New York. 2. Astrophysics and Stellar Astronomy - T. L. Surihart, John Wiley, New York. 3. Astrophysics A modern Perspective. .K. S. Krishnaswami, New Age International.

Web references:

1. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/physics/8-901-astrophysics-i-spring-2006 2. https://www.slideshare.net/gbbantayearth/stars-stellar-evolution 3. www.ucolick.org/~neil/ay4_s08/brodieclass7_08.ppt 4. astro.physics.uiowa.edu/~kaaret/genastro11s/L11_blackholes.ppt 5. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chandrasekhar_limit 6. www.phy.ohiou.edu/~mboett/astro401_fall12/evolution.ppt 7. www.physics.nptu.edu.tw/ezfiles/116/1116/attach/.../pta_23875_4821651_13355.ppt 8. https://www.slideshare.net/junelynhigara/astronomical-instruments 9. https://www.slideshare.net/niranjan123456789/satellite-communications-ppt 10. courses.missouristate.edu/huiliu/csc690/slides/satellite.ppt

348

Chennai - 600 004

PG AND RESEARCH DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS

M.PHIL PHYSICS

SYLLABUS

2018-19 onwards

349

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (A), CHENNAI – 4 PG and RESEARCH DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS BOARD OF STUDIES – (2018 - 2019) MINUTES OF THE BOARD MEETING HELD ON 03. 04.2018 The meeting of the Board of studies was held on 03-04-2018. The proposed new syllabi were presented before the board.

MEMBERS OF THE BOARD 1. DR. HEMAMALINI RAJAGOPAL CHAIR PERSON ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR and HEAD PG and RESEARCH DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (A), CHENNAI - 4

2. DR. RITA JOHN UNIVERSITY NOMINEE PROFESSOR and HEAD DEPARTMENT OF THEORETICAL PHYSICS UNIVERSITY OF MADRAS CHENNAI - 25

3 . DR. P. BABU SUBJECT EXPERT ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR and HEAD PG and RESEARCH DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS A.M JAIN COLLEGE CHENNAI - 87

4. DR. S. JEROME DAS SUBJECT EXPERT ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF PHYSICS LOYOLA COLLEGE CHENNAI - 34

INTERNAL MEMBERS (ALL THE MEMBERS OF STAFF)

5. MRS. J. SRIVIDYA - ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR 6. DR. (MRS). G. USHA - ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR 7. DR.(MRS). JOVITA THEODORE - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 8. DR. (MRS). D. JAYALAKSHMI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 9. DR.(MRS). R. VASANTHI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 10. DR. (MRS). R. RAJAKUMARI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 11. DR. (MRS). V. NIRMALA - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 12. MRS. M. P. SAVITHIRI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 13. DR. (MRS). A. ANURADHA - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 14. DR. (MRS). S. SAROJINI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 15. MRS. R. VANATHI VIJAYALAKSHMI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 16. DR.(MRS). K. S. EZHILARASI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 17. DR. MRS. B. ANITHA - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR

350

18. DR. MRS. S. MAHALAKSHMI - ASSISTANT PROFESSOR 19. MS.D.JEMIMAL - DEPT. ALUMNI 20. MS.S.DHARANI - STUDENT REPRESENTATIVE

P.G. and Research Department of Physics

Paper Page Subject Title of the paper Total Credits No. No. Code

I Research Methodology 5 100 4

II Advanced Physics 7 100 4

III Special Paper 100 4

X-ray Crystallography 9

Principles and Methods of 11 Crystal Growth

Applied Spectroscopy 13

NanoScience and Nano 15 Technology

Molecular Quantum 17 Mechanics

Solid State Ionics 19

IV Dissertation 100 4

Title of the Papers - 2018 – 2019 onwards

Course Outcome:

Upon completion of M.Phil Degree course in Physics, the student will be able to

• Choose, analyse and solve a research problem. • Prepare a report and present in Journal / Conference.

351

• Troubleshoot UG and PG practical classes as they have been trained. • Handle UV-Visible and FTIR Spectrophotometers as they are given hands on training. • Handle classes in advanced physics topics with ease.

COURSE DETAILS OF M. Phil. PHYSICS

Paper I : Research Methodology Paper II : Advanced Physics Paper III : Special Paper 1. X-ray Crystallography 2. Principles and Methods of Crystal Growth 3. Applied Spectroscopy 4. Nano Science and Nano Technology 5. Molecular Quantum Mechanics 6. Solid State Ionics Paper IV: Dissertation

Distribution of weekly hours - 30 hours

S. No. Paper Hrs/week Max. Marks Credit 1 I 6 100 4

2 II 6 100 4

3 III 6 100 4

4 Dissertation 12 100 4

Question paper pattern In each paper, 8 questions to be asked without omitting any Unit . Out of 8 questions, 5 questions have to be answered. Each question carries 20 marks. Evaluation of Dissertation : As per norms of University of Madras.

352

Changes made in New Syllabus

1. Special papers - Molecular Quantum Mechanics and Solid State Ionics have been added. 2. In paper – I, fortran-90 program has been included instead of C. 3. All other papers have been restructured.

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

Paper I Code:

Objective: • To introduce the methodology of doing research, consolidate findings using and perform calculations in fortran and interpret results. Outcome: • The student will be able to perform literature survey, identify a problem, collect, process, analyse, interpret data, write a report and present the same orally.

Unit - I : Scientific Research Types of Research and scientific method – Research design – formula of a working Research hypothesis– methods of investigation- Methods of data collection – Processing and analysis of data – Interpretation and Report writing – Presenting a paper in a seminar and submission to the journal – Writing of synopsis and thesis.

Unit – II: Data Analysis Introduction – Statistical description of data - Mean, variance, skewness, median, mode – Distributions – Student’s t-test, F- test, Chi-square test – Linear and rank correlations – Modelling data: Least-squares, Fitting data - Curve fitting - Normal Equations for curve fitting.

Unit – III: Numerical Methods Solution of differential equations - Euler’s method – Runge - Kutta method (2nd and 4th order) -Least squares, straight line and parabola - Simultaneous Equations- Gauss-Jordan elimination method- Gauss-Jordan method (2x2, 3x3) - Matrix inversion method- Characteristic equation of a matrix- Eigen values and Eigen vectors of a matrix – Diagonalisation of a matrix. Differentiation and Integration- Legendre polynomials- Gaussian Quadrature- Interpolation- Newton divided difference interpolation- Monte Carlo Method-- Lagrange interpolation

353

Unit – IV: FORTRAN 90 Elements of Fortran 90– Fortran character set – Data classification- Constants and variables – Arithmetic expressions – I/O statements – formatted Input/ Output statements - Logical expressions – Conditional and control statements - Arrays – Control statements (DO, IF, GOTO structures) - Function subprogram – subroutine subprogram - File processing- Programs to add, subtract , multiply and sort numbers . Ascending and descending order of numbers.

Unit – V: Programming for Numerical methods in FORTRAN 90 Solving quadratic equation, Matrix addition , subtraction , multiplication- Newton’s forward and backward interpolation - Straight line curve fitting- Numerical integration through Simpson’s 1/3 rule, Trapezoidal rule- Solution of differential equations - Euler’s method – Runge - Kutta method (2nd order) - Newton Raphson method.

Books for study: 1. Research Methodology-a. Mustafa, AITBS Publishers, New Delhi (2015) (Unit –I) 2. C.R. Kothari, Research methodology: Methods and Techniques, (New age International, New Delhi, 2006). (Unit – I, II) 3. Troy Baer, An Introduction to FORTRAN 90, Ohio Supercomputer Centre, Columbus, OH, USA. (Unit – IV, V) 4. H. K. Dass, Mathematical Physics, S. Chand and Company, New Delhi (2003). (Unit – III) 5. Computer oriented Numerical Methods, V. Rajaraman, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. (Unit – II,III) 6. Computer Programming in fortran 90, E. Rajaraman, Prentice Hall Pvt, Ltd. (Unit –IV,V)

Books for reference: 1. Rajammal Devadas, Hand Book of Methodology of Research (R.M.M. Vidyalaya Press, , 1976). 2. Fortran Programming in fortran 90, Gottfried, McGraw Hill. 3. Engineering Mathematics, Thilagavathy, Gunavathy and Kandasamy, S.Chand and Co

Web references:

1. http://oscinfo.osc.edu/training/f90/html/bsld.002.html 2. www.mrao.cam.ac.uk/~pa/f90Notes/HTMLNotesnode40.html 3. pages.mtu.edu/~shene/COURSES/cs201/NOTES/F90-Basics.pdf 4. www.phy.ohiou.edu/~elster/phys5071/extras/MHJ_Ch7_integration.pdf

354

ADVANCED PHYSICS

Paper II Code:

Objectives: • To learn the concepts of various characterization techniques in scientific research and the recent advances in Physics. • To gain basic foundation in experimental as well as theoretical physics in the field of research. Outcome: Students will be able to

• Gain knowledge of the latest advances in the field of research in Physical sciences. • acquire analytical thinking through the characterization techniques and implement it for her research work.

Unit - I : Relativistic Wave Equations Klein – Gordan equation – charge and current densities - KG equation for a charged particle in an EM potential – Algebra of matrices - Dirac equation - Plane wave solution and its normalization - Covariant form of Dirac equation - Electron spin and its magnetic moment.

Unit - II : Quantum Theory of many particle system and Energy band calculations Approximation in atomic structure: central field approximation–Thomas-Fermi approximation – Hartree method - Energy band calculations – Effective mass - Reduced Zone Scheme - Tight Binding approximation - Pseudo potential method.

Unit - III : Introduction to Crystal Growth Homogeneous and heterogeneous nucleation – Normal segregation – zone refining – crustal growth – Techniques of crystal growth – Principles of Growth from solution, hydrothermal growth, growth from melt solutions and melts, normal freezing, Floating zone method – crystal pulling, Flame fusion method, vapour deposition technique, growth by condensation and chemical transport reaction methods (qualitiative only) – applications of single crystals.

Unit - IV: Analytical techniques Principle, experimental arrangement and applications of FT-IR spectroscopy, FT-Raman spectroscopy, IR and Raman Spectroscopy - NMR Spectroscopy, Principle and Instrumentation - Thermal analysis of different Materials: TG/DTA and DSC – Non radiative Transitions - Principle of Auger Electron Spectroscopy.

Unit – V: Introduction to Nanostructures and their analyzing techniques Quantum confinement - 3D, 2D, 1D and 0D structures – surface effects of nanomaterials – quantum dots - energy levels of a semiconductor quantum dot –UV, Photoluminescence Spectroscopy, XRD and SAXS as analyzing tools - Principle of electron microscopy - Instrumentation of SEM, EDX, TEM and STM - Particle size determination.

355

Books for study: 1. Relativistic Quantum mechanics – Devanathan – NarosaPublishers.(Unit - I) 2. Advanced Quantum mechanics. Sathya Prakash -Kedar Nath, Ram Nath and Co. Publications.(Unit - I and II) 3. Solid State Physics – H C Gupta –II revised and enlarged edition – Vikas Publishing house – 2008.(Unit -II) 4. Principles of solid state Physics – H V Keer – Wiley Eastern limited (Unit – III) 5. Molecular structure and spectroscopy – G. Aruldhas – II Edition – PHI (Unit – IV) 6. M. William and D. Steve, Instrumental Methods of Analysis (CBS Publishers, New Delhi, 1986). (Unit -IV) 7. Nanoscience and nanotechnology – K. K. Choudhary – Narosa Publishing House -2016. (Unit – V) 8. Principles of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology – M. A. Shah and Tokeer Ahmad – Narosa Publishing house – 2010.(Unit – V)

Books for reference: 1. Angular Momentum, M. E. Rose, John Wiley and Sons , New York, 1957 2. Relativistic Quantum Mechanics I James D. Bjorken and Sydney D. Drell, McGraw Hill 3. Advanced Quantum theory and Fields,S. L. Guptha and I. D. Guptha, S. Chand and Co., New Delhi. 4. Introduction to Solid State Physics, C. Kittel, 7thEdn., Wiley New York, 1996 5. Introduction to Nano technology, Charles P.Poole Jr, Frank J. Owens, Wiley- India Edition (2008). 6. Quantum Chemistry, Ira A. Levine –PHI.

Web references:

1. www.tcm.phy.cam.ac.uk/~bds10/aqp/handout_relqu.pdf 2. https://plato.stanford.edu/entries/quantum-field-theory 3. https://web.physics.ucsb.edu/~mark/ms-qft-DRAFT.pdf

356

X-RAY CRYSTALLOGRAPHY (Special Paper )

Paper: III Code:

Objectives: • To learn the concepts of crystal lattice, symmetry operations. • To gain basic theory related to crystal structure determination and analysis

Outcome: Students will be able to • Solve the crystal structures • Critically analyse the crystallographic parameters

Unit - I: Basic Concepts Lattices, planes and indices – X-ray diffraction – Reciprocal lattice – Bragg’s law in reciprocal space - Crystal systems and symmetry - Point groups - Space groups – Symmetries – Translation, rotation, reflection, inversion, screw and glide - Symmetry relationships – Equivalent positions.

Unit - II: Theory of Structure Factors Atomic scattering factor, structure factor, electron density function and their relation – Friedel’s law – Unitary and normalized structure factors – Harker-Kasper inequalities – Sayer’s relations - General phase and probability relations – Inequalities – F’s, U’s and E’s -Structure invariants and semi-invariants – Symbolic addition methods.

Unit - III: Intensity Data Collection and Reduction Phase problem in crystallography - Methods of its solution (qualitative) - Patterson, heavy atom, anomalous scattering, isomorphous replacement - Crystallization – Growing crystals - choosing crystal – Crystal mounting – Optical alignment – measurement of crystal properties - Theory of Lorentz and polarization corrections – data reduction in practice – absorption – Deterioration - Scaling - Refinement by least squares: the method of least squares – Refinement 2 against |Fo| – Weighting functions - Goodness -of- fit parameters.

Unit – IV: Structure Analysis Bond lengths – Standard deviation in bond length – Bond angles - Standard deviation in bond angles - Comparison of bond lengths and bond angles – Averaging bond lengths and angles – Least square planes – Absolute configuration – Thermal motion - Torsion angles - Concept of conformation.

Unit - V: Conformational Analysis

357

Bonding in solids: Ionic, Covalent (polar, non-polar) and Metallic bonds - van der Waals’ radii of atoms - Contact distance criteria - van der Waals’ interactions – Hydrogen bonds - Molecular stability – Crystal packing.

Books for study: 1. X- ray Structure Determination, George H. Stout and Lyle H. Jensen, John Wiley and sons. (All Units) 2. Elementary Crystallography, D. Velmurugan, MJP Publishers, Chennai-5(All Unit s) 3. BioPhysics, Vasantha Pattabi and Gautham. N, Narosa Publishers. (All Units)

Books for reference : 1. An Introduction to Crystallography, F.C. Phillips, Longmans I Pbln 2. An Introduction to Crystallography. M.M. Woolfson, Cambridge University Press II Edn 3. Outline of Crystallography for Biologists, David Blow, Oxford University Press 4. Crystal Structure Analysis, Principles and Practice, W.Clegg, A.J.Blake, R.O.Gould, P.Main, Oxford University Press 5. Crystal Structure Analysis for Chemists and Biologists, Jenny P.Glusker, Mitchell Lewis and Miriam Rossi, Wiley-VCH Edn 6. Fundamentals of Crystallography, C. Glacovazzo, H. L. , D. Viterbo, F.Scordari, G.Gill, G. Zanotti and M. Catti, Oxford University Press 7. Modern Crystallography and Structure of crystals (II Edn), B.K. Vainshtein, Fridkin and V.L.Indenbom,Springer-Verlag, Berlin. 8. Statistical Methods in Crystallography, S. Parthasarathy and V. Parthasarathy.

358

PRINCIPLES AND METHODS OF CRYSTAL GROWTH (Special Paper ) Paper: III Code:

Objective: • To expose the students with theories of nucleation and crystal growth, crystal growth from solution, melt and vapour phase and Basics of Non linear optics. Outcome: • Students will be familiarized with synthesis and analysis of materials related to various applications

Unit - I : Classical Theory of Nucleation Gibbs-Thomson equation- theory of nucleation- Energy of formation of a nucleus- Different possible shapes of nucleus- Homogeneous nucleation of Binary system- Heterogeneous nucleation – Free energy of formation of a critical heterogeneous- cap shaped- disc shaped nucleus- Heterogeneous nucleation of Binary vapour- Secondary nucleation.

Unit - II: Theories of Crystal Growth Surface energy theory- Diffusion theory- Adsorption layer theory- Volmer theory- Bravais theory –Kossel theory- Stranski’s treatment- Two dimensional nucleation theory, Three dimensional nucleation theory- Free energy and Driving force of crystallization- Phase relations- Growth kinetics.

Unit - III: Experimental Crystal Growth Part-I Growth from melt, Bridgman, Czochralski, Zone melting, Verneuil techniques- Physical Vapour Deposition(PVD)- Chemical Vapour Deposition(CVD)- Flux growth- Epitaxial growth- Gel growth- Temperature variation method: Stationary temperature profile, Linearly time varying temperature profile and Oscillatory temperature profile.

Unit - IV: Experimental Crystal Growth Part- II Solution Growth Techniques Growth from low temperature solution growth: Selection of solvents and solubility- Meir’s solubility diagram- Saturation and supersaturation- measurement of supersaturation –growth by restricted evaporation of solvent, slow evaporation, slow cooling and temperature gradient methods-criteria for optimizing solution growth parameters- basic apparatus for solution growth. High temperature solution growth: Principles of flux growth-choice of flux-Hydrothermal growth method.

Unit - V: Non Linear Optics Elements of the theory of Non linear optics- Frequency Doubling and Mixing- Optical parametric Generation, Amplification and Oscillation- Nonlinear index of refraction- Nonlinear Absorption properties and characterization of second order and third order Nonlinear optical materials- Phase matching – Laser induced surface damage threshold.

359

Books for study: 1. Introduction to Crystal Growth Methods, B.R.Pamplin,1975, Pergamon press, Oxford. 2. Crystal growth- Methods and Processes, P.Santhanaraghavan and P.Ramasamy, KRU Publications, Kumbakonam (2000). 3. Nonlinear Optics Robert W.Boyd third edition (Academic press, Newyork, 2003) 4. Essentials of Lasers and Nonlinear Optics- G.D.Baruah Pragati Prakashan.

Books for reference: 1. Crystal Growth Processes, J.C.Brice,1986, John Wiley and Sons, NY. 2. Handbook of Nonlinear Optics-Second Edition, Revised and Expanded- Richard L.Sutherland(Science Applications International Corporation Dayton, Ohio, U.S.A)

APPLIED SPECTROSCOPY (Special Paper )

Paper III Code:

Objective : • To get an insight of experimental methods of spectroscopy, their theories and applications. Outcome: • Upon completion of this paper, the student will be able to take any spectra and interpret the results quantitatively and qualitatively.

Unit - I: Infrared and Raman Spectroscopy Vibration of diatomic and simple polyatomic molecules - Anharmonicity – Born Oppenheimer approximation – Normal modes of vibration – Interpretation of vibrational spectra – FTIR. Raman scattering- Mutual exclusion principle – Structure determination through IR and Raman spectroscopy - Surface Enhanced Raman scattering: Surfaces for SERS study - SERS study of bio molecules – SERS in medicine.

Unit - II : UV, Atomic Emission and Absorption Spectroscopy Basic concepts - Law of absorption - Beer’s law - Instrumentation – Factors affecting the position of UV bands - Characteristic of organic compounds - Applications of UV - Visible spectroscopy. Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy: Principle - Measurement of atomic absorption – Instrumentation - Sensitivity- Applications - Qualitative and Quantitative analysis. Atomic Emission spectroscopy: Principle - Measurement of light intensity – Instrumentation – Sensitivity – Applications - Qualitative and quantitative analysis.

Unit – III : NCA and Group Theory

360

Introduction to NCA - secular equations - Potential energy matrix - Kinetic energy matrix - G matrix for bent XY2 molecule - ab initio method. Symmetry operations and their matrix representation - Group multiplication table - Point groups and their classification - Character table - Rules for construction - C2v, C3v and d2h character table. Application to molecular spectroscopy- IR and Raman activities- space group symmetry

Unit - IV: Surface Analysis Techniques Atomic collision and Backscattering spectrometry: Energy loss of light ions and Backscattering Depth profiles – Sputter Depth profile and Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry – Channeling: Basics and its application in Thin Film analysis – X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy – Electron Microprobe analysis of surface – SEM, TEM, AFM and STM – Non-radiative Transitions and Auger Electron Spectroscopy.

Unit - V: Electronic Spectra: Fluorescence and Phosphorescence Spectroscopy Electronic Excitation of Diatomic Species - Franck Condon Principle - Resonance and Normal Fluorescence - Intensities of Transitions – Phosphorescence - Population of Triplet State and Intensity - Experimental Methods - Applications of Fluorescence and Phosphorescence - NMR spectroscopic methods - Basic concepts and their applications.

Books for study: 1. Basic Principles of Spectroscopy, Raymond Chang, McGraw Hill International Book Company. 2. Molecular Structure and Spectroscopy, G. Aruldhas, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2001. 3. Spectroscopy, H. Kaur, Pragathi Prakasan, Meerut , 2001. 4. Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy, C. N. Banwell and E. M. Mccash, 4th Edn., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1994. 5. Fundamentals of Surface and Thin Film Analysis, Leonard C. Feldman and James W. Mayer.

Books for reference 1. Spectroscopy and Molecular Structure, G. W. King, Hoit Rinchart and Winsten Inc. London 1964. 2. Vibrational Spectroscopy, D. N. Sathya Narayana, New Age International Publishers, 1996.

Web references: 1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Character_table 2. www.symmetry.jacobs-university.de/ 3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Surface-enhanced_Raman_spectroscopy 4. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ultraviolet–visible_spectroscopy 5. life.nthu.edu.tw/~labcjw/BioPhyChem/Spectroscopy/beerslaw.htm

361

NANOSCIENCE AND NANOTECHNOLOGY (Special Paper )

Paper: III Code:

Objective: • To know basics of nano science and technology, synthesize and characterize nanomaterials and its applications Outcome: • Student will be able to carry out her project on nano material synthesis and characterization and find its viablility and applications for societal needs

Unit - I: Basics of Nanoscience and Nanotechnolgy Introduction - Overview of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology - Theory, Definitions and History – Properties at nanoscale - Nanoparticles – Size and confinement Effects - 0D, 1D,and 2D nanomaterials - Classification of Nanomaterials – Fraction of surface atoms – Specific surface energy and surface stress – Carbon based nanomaterials.

Unit - II: Synthesis of Nanomaterials Top down and Bottom up approach ( Elementary ideas) -Synthesis of nanoparticles: Chemical reduction method – sol-gel method - Sonochemical Reactor – Ball milling– Spray Pyrolyser - Nanocrystalline thin film by spin coating- Chemical bath deposition – Dip coating- Effect of particle size on Physical / Chemical properties.

Unit - III: Characterization of Nanomaterials Diffraction technique: XRD – Structure and Determination of grain size using X-ray line broadening – Imaging technique: SEM and TEM – Scanning probe microscopic technique: STM and AFM – Optical microscopic technique: Confocal laser scanning microscopy – Spectroscopic techniques: UV-Visible spectroscopy, Infrared surface spectroscopy – Raman spectroscopy – Photoluminescence study.

Unit - IV: Nanoelectronics Nanosensors – Electrochemical sensors – Sensors based on physical properties – Sensor of the future – Smart dust – Moore’s law – FET to SET – Magnetic RAM – Vertical Magnetic resistive RAM (VMRAM) – Millipede drive – Holographic data storage system – Phase change memory – Nanotube RAM – Molecular memory.

Unit - V: Applications and Societal Implications Biomedical applications: Biomolecules and nanoparticles interaction – Nanoprobes – Nanobiosensors – Nanodrug administration – Nanotechnology in diagnostic and therapeutic applications – Other significant applications: Carbon nanotube emitters – Nanofilters – Nano solar cells – Nano in food preservation – Basic ideas of Nanocomposite shape memory polymers - First Industrial revolution to the Nano revolution – Implication of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology on society – Issues.

362

Books for study: 1. Richard Brooker and Earl Boysen, (2005), Nanotechnology, Wiley Publishing inc. 2. Pradeep T., (2007), Nano :The Essentials, Tata McGraw- Hill Publishing Co. 3. Mark Ratner and Daniel Ratner, (2003), Nanotechnology, Pearson Education, Singapore. 4. Mick Wilson, et.al (2005), Nanotechnology, Overseas Press, New Delhi. 5. Poole CP and Owen FJ, (2005), Introduction to Nanotechnology, “A Wiley – Interscience”

Books for reference: 1. J.H.Fendler, (1998), Nano Particles and Nanostructured films: Preparation, characterization and applications, John Wiley and Sons. 2. B.C. Crandall, (1996), Nanotechnology: Molecular speculations on global abundance, MIT Press. 3. K.P. Jain, (1997), Physics of semiconductor nanostrucutures, National Publications

MOLECULAR QUANTUM MECHANICS (Special Paper ) PAPER III CODE: Objective: • To introduce the basic concepts of quantum chemical calculations since it is the basis for most of the molecular modeling calculations. Outcome: • The students will be able to apply mathematical and the theoretical principles to solve atomic and molecular physics problems. Unit I: Many Electron Systems Hartree-Fock self-consistent field method - Electron correlation - The atomic Hamiltonian - The Condon-Slater rules - The Born-Oppenheimer approximation - The Hydrogen molecule ion + + - Approximate treatments of 퐻2 ground electronic state - Molecular orbitals for 퐻2 excited states - Molecular orbital configurations of homonuclear diatomic molecules - The hydrogen molecule – The valence bond treatment of H2 – Electron probability density.

Unit II: Electron Correlated Methods Hartree-Fock method for molecules – MO treatment of heteronuclear diatomic molecules - Rayleigh-Schrödinger many body perturbation theory – Configuration interaction (CI) wave functions; multiconfiguration SCF (MCSCF), complete active space SCF (CASSCF), multireference CI (MRCI) – Coupled cluster methods - Basis functions.

363

Unit III: Molecular properties, semi-empirical and molecular mechanics methods Population analysis – Dipole moment – Molecular geometry and conformations – Molecular vibrational frequencies and thermodynamic properties – Huckel MO method – Extended Huckel method – The formulation of CNDO, INDO, MNDO, AM1 and PM3 methods – Potential energy (force field) in molecular mechanics – Various energy terms in force field – Newtonian and Hamiltonian dynamics – Phase space trajectories – Classification of dynamical systems – Determination of properties.

Unit IV: Density Functional Theory-I

Electron density - The original idea: The Thomas-Fermi model – The traditional Thomas- Fermi and Thomas-Fermi-Dirac models – Three theorems in Thomas Fermi theory - Thomas- Fermi - Dirac-Weizsacker model – The Hohenberg-Kohn theorems – Kohn-Sham method – Exchange-correlation potential(Introductory concepts)

Unit – V: Density Functional Theory and Reactivity Parameters

Local-Density Approximation (LDA) – Local Spin Density Approximation (LSDA)- Gradient corrected and hybrid functionals (Introductory concepts) - Reactivity parameters; chemical potential, electronegativity, chemical hardness, softness and Fukui function - Atoms in molecules –HSAB principle – Maximum hardness principle and its proof - Modeling the : the bond-charge model

Books for study: 1. Quantum Chemistry – Ira. N. Levine, Vth Edition; Prentice-Hall of India, New Delhi, 2000 (All units) 2. Density functional theory of atoms and molecules – R. G. Parr and W. Yang; Oxford University press, New York, 1989. (Unit V) 3. Essential of - Theories and Models, IInd Edition, Christopher J. Cramer; John Wiley & Sons, England, 2004. Books for reference: 1. Ab initio molecular orbital theory – W. J. Hehre, L. Radom, P. V. R. Schleyer and J. A. Pople; John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1985. 2. Essential of Computational Chemistry - Theories and Models, II Edition, Christopher J. Cramer; John Wiley & Sons, England, 2004. 3. Modern quantum chemistry – Introduction to advanced electronic structure theory – Attila Szabo and Neil S. Ostlund, Dover publications INC, New York, 1996. 4. Molecular dynamics simulation – Elementary methods - J.M. Halie, John Wiley & sons, Inc., 1997. (Unit III) 5. Electronic structure – Basic theory and Practical methods – Richard M. Martin, Cambridge University Press, UK, 2005.

364

6. Density functional theory – A practical introduction – David S. Sholl, and Janice A. Steckel – John Wiley & sons, Inc., 2009.

SOLID STATE IONICS (Special Paper ) PAPER III CODE: Objective : • To introduce the basic concepts about solid state Ionics and different solid state ionic materials • To familiarize with preparation techniques of solid state ionic materials and their theories, various characterization techniques • To introduce knowledge on the various application areas of Solid state ionic materials Outcome : On the successful completion of the course, students will be able to understand • different preparation methods of solid state ionic materials and impart knowledge on properties, various theoretical models, characterization and applications of the above materials. • the concepts behind solid state ionic materials and their use in battery fabrication, Solar cells, and Fuel cells etc. Unit - I: Basic aspects of Solid State Ionics Fundamentals of crystals-cyrstalline and amorphous materials-types of bonds-ionic solids- defects in ionic solids- Point Defects- types- Vacancies-Frenkel- schottky defects. Types of Ionic solids - Ionic conductivity – Dielectric loss in ionic crystals- Normal and super ionic conductors – broad classification of super ionic conductors: polycrystalline/ crystalline, glass/ amorphous materials Unit - II: Solid State Ionic Materials Fast Ionic Solids - Super ionic materials and structures, alkali ion conductors, β- aluminas, silver ion conductors, copper ion conductors, structural principles for fast Ag+ and Cu2+ ion conductors, oxygen and halide ion conductors, proton conductors, magnesium ion conductors- Electrolytes-Solid , liquid ,Gel and Polymer Electrolytes-, composite, polymeric electrolytes and nano-composite polymeric materials. Unit - III: Preparation Techniques of Solid State Ionic Materials and models of Ion Conduction Various methods of preparation of amorphous/glassy, poly and single crystalline materials – melt quenching - thermal evaporation – sputtering – solution casting-Film blowing - gel dissociation –spin coating-hot press technique – Pyrolisis. Mechanism of ion conduction in solid state ionic materials- theoretical models - transport mechanism through defects – free ion model – domain model – jump diffusion model and frequency dependent conductivity. Unit - IV: Techniques for Characterization of Solid State Ionic Materials Characterization of ion transport properties; AC Impedance Spectroscopy (IS) for conductivity of (σ) measurements; electrical conductivity – two probe method – four probe

365

methods – DC polarization methods viz, Tubandt’s method, Wagner’s method, Transient Ionic Current (TIC) method for ionic mobility (µ), ionic transference number (tion), mobile ion concentration (n) and ionic drift velocity (vd) measurements. Temperature dependent studies on σ, µ, n, vd Techniques - Linear Sweep Voltammetry- Cyclic Voltammetry.Thermal analysis: Differential Thermal Analysis (DTA), Differential Scanning (DSC), Thermal Gravimetric Analysis (TGA) -Glass transition – factors determining glass transition temperatures. Unit - V: Applications of Superionic Soilds Battery and Non-Battery applications – conventional cells - fuel cells –Solid oxide fuel cells-sensors and partial pressure gauges- Solid state batteries-Lithium ion batteries, coulometer- timers-Electro chromic display devices-electrochemical capacitors-Supercapacitors- Solar cells- Solar cells with solid Electrolytes- Dye sensitized solar cells-Dye sensitized solar cells with Polymer Electrolytes Books for study: 1. S.O.Pillai, Principles of Solid State Physics, New Age International, New Delhi, 1997 2. S.Chandra. Superionic Solids-Principles and applications. North Holland Amsterdam, 1981. 3. V.R. Gowarikar, N.V.Viswanathan and J.Sreedhar, Polymer Science, New Age International, 2011 4. Impedance Spectroscopy Theory, Experiment, and Applications, (Eds) Evgenij Barsoukov and J. Ross Macdonald, Wiley Interscience (2005) 5. An Introduction to Electrochemistry, Glasstone, Tata Book House, 6. Solid state chemistry and its applications, West, Tata Book House. Books for reference: 1. Handbook of Polymer science and technology volume-1, Becker, Sri Eswari Enterprises, 2. Physics of Electrolytes – Transport Processes in solid Electrolytes and in Electrodes (Eds. J Hladik), Academic press, New york 1972 . 3. Fundamentals of Electrochemistry, 2nd Edition, V.S.Bagotsky, Wiley Interscience. (2006) 4. Electrochemical Methods: Fundamental and Application, Allen J.Bard Wiley and Sons Publications (2001)

366

M.Sc. Zoology – Learning Outcomes

1. Students will be able to identify the major groups of organisms with an emphasis on animals and be able to classify them within a phylogenetic framework. 2. Students will be able to compare and contrast the characteristics of animals that differentiate them from other forms of life. 3. Students will be able to use the evidence of comparative biology to explain the theory of evolution. They will be able to use specific examples to explicate how descent with modification has shaped animal morphology, physiology, life history and behaviour. 4. Students will be able to explain how organisms function at the level of the gene, genome, cell, tissue, organ and organ-system. Drawing upon this knowledge, they will be able to give specific examples of the physiological adaptations, development, reproduction and behaviour of different forms of life. 5. Students will be able to explicate the ecological interconnectedness of life on earth by tracing energy and nutrient flows through the environment. They will be able to relate the physical features of the environment to the structure of populations, communities, and . 6. Students will be able to apply fundamental mathematical tools (statistics) and physical principles (physics, chemistry) to the analysis of relevant biological situations. 7. Students will be able to demonstrate proficiency in the experimental techniques and methods of analysis. 8. Students will be able to access the primary literature, identify relevant works for a particular topic, and evaluate the scientific content of these works. 9. Students will be able to apply the scientific method to questions in zoology by formulating testable hypotheses, gathering data that address these hypotheses, and analyzing those data to assess the degree to which their scientific work supports their hypotheses. 10. Students will be able to present scientific hypotheses and data both orally and in writing in the formats that are used by practicing scientists.

367

EVOLUTION AND DIVERSITY OF INVERTEBRATES

Semester: I Paper: I

Hours: 90

Objectives

1. To comprehend the animal diversity and phylogeny of invertebrates through evolutionary aspects. 2. To study their structural peculiarities and affinities.

Unit I (18 hours)

Geological time scale, Principles of Taxonomy-Origin and Development of systematics, Utility of systematics, Systems of Classification. Nomenclature – Binomial, Trinomial, Hierarchy, Taxon and Category, Species, species concept, sub species, race. Tools for study of Taxonomy.

Unit II (18 hours)

Phylogeny of protozoa, Shelled protozoa. Origin and Evolution of Metazoa – Polymorphism, Nematocysts ; Ctenophora - affinities – Economic importance of Coelentrates. Origin of Bilateria – Coelom –types and evolution. Acoelomata, Pseudocoelomata, Eucoelomata. Phylogeny of helminthes.

Unit III (18 hours)

Rotifera, Gastrotricha, Nemertenia, Acanthocephala, Endoprocta, Phoronida, Siphunculida, Chaetognatha, and Pogonophora –Morphology, Structural Peculiarities, Classification and Affinities - Fossil trilobites.

Unit IV (18 hours)

Relationship of Nephridia and Coelomoducts, Trochophore larva and its significance – Types of feeding and mode of life in polychaetes – Reproduction in polychaetes – Evolutionary significance of Peripatus – Crustacean larvae and their significance. Respiration and Excretion in Arthropoda – Origin and Evolution of Arachnida.

Unit V (18 hours)

Structural peculiarities of Monoplacophora, Aplacophora, polyplacophora, Shell in Mollusca, Foot in Mollusca – Respiration and Excretion in Mollusca – Adaptive radiation in

368

Gastropoda – Origin of Echinoderms – Fossil Echinoderms – Economic importance of Echinoderms.

REFERENCES

1. Borradaile. L.A Eastham, L.E.S and J.T Sounders 1977, The Invertebrate Cambridge University press. 2. Barrington F.J.W.1969 Invertebrata Structure and Functions, English language Book Society. 3. Corter.G. General Zoology of Invertebrates, Sidewick and Jackson Ltd., London. 4. Dhami, J.K and P. S. Dhami1979. Invertebrate Zoology Edition 5, R. Chand & Company. 5. Hyman L.H. 1951 The Invertebrate Volume I-VI, Mc Graw Hill Book Co. Newyork 6. Kotpal. R.L 1990. Textbook of Minor Phyla.11th Edition, Rastogi Publications. 7. Kotpal. R.L. 2014 Modern Text Book of Zoology: Invertebrates : Animal Diversity-I 11thEdition Rastogi Publications.

Web resources www.aboutbioscience.org/topics/biodiversity/ https://archive.org/details/ost-biology-textbookofevolut00lind

CELL, AND GENETICS

Semester:I Paper: II

Hours: 90

Objective

1. To understand the molecules within cell and the interaction between cells that allows construction of multicellular organism. 2. To focus on the techniques and procedures commonly utilized in cell and molecular biology research.

Unit I (20 hours)

Cell organization: Subcellular organelles and their functions. Molecular composition of cell - structure and function of ER, Golgi apparatus, Mitochondria, Nucleus, Lysosomes.

369

Microscopy- Bright field, Dark field, Phase contrast, fluorescence; Electron (TEM, SEM and Tunneling SEM). Hybridization-FISH; Flow cytometry;

Unit II (18 hours)

Biomembranes - structural organization, transport across membrane (Passive Active and Bulk transport); Cell-Cell adhesion- Cell junctions ( Tight junctions, gap junctions, desmosomes, adherens); Extra cellular matrix (ECM)- components and role of ECM in growth. Cell signalling and their receptors, intracellular signal transduction.Cell cycles and its regulations.

Unit III (18 hours)

Organization of Eukaryotic DNA in to chromosomes; DNA replication – mechanism; Transcription- prokaryotic RNA polymerases- role of sigma factor. TATA box, promoter, closed and open promoter complexes- initiation, elongation and termination of transcription, post transcriptional modifications in prokaryotes (tRNA and rRNA). Inhibitors of transcription.

Unit IV (17 hours)

Translation in prokaryotes and eukaryotes; Post translational modifications; Protein sorting and secretion; Protein folding and degradation. Gene Expression : Genetic code, Regulation of Gene Expression.

Unit V (17 hours)

Mutations: Gene mutations, Mutagens, Oncogenes, site- specific mutagenesis and mutational hot spots.. DNA Repair – types of damages, repair by direct reversal of damage, excision repair, recombination repair, SOS repair.

REFERENCES

1. Bruce Alberts, Alexander Johnson, Julian Lewis, Martin Raff, Keith Roberts, Peter

Walter. 2002. Molecular Biology of the Cell. Fourth edition. Garland Science.

2. Burns G. W. 1969. The Science of Genetics. The McMillan Company, New York.

3. Cooper G.M. and Hausman R.E. 2009. The Cell: A Molecular Approach. 5th edition.

Sunderland. Mass. Sinauer Associates, Inc.

4. Freifelder, D. 1992. Essentials of Molecular Biology. 2nd edition. Jones & Bartlett

Publications.

370

5. De Robertis, E. D.F. and De Robertis. E. M. F. 1981. Cell and Molecular

Biology. Saunder International Edition.

6. Gerald Karp G. 2010. Cell and Molecular Biology: Concepts and Experiments . 6th edition.

John Wiley & Sons. Inc.

7. Levine R. P. 1968. The Science. Holt Reinhart and Winston.b New York.

8. Lodish,H., Berk, A., Zipursky, S.L., Matsudaira, P., Kaiser, A., Kreiger, Scott,and

Darnell, J. 2004. Molecular . Fifth edition. W.H.Freeman and Company.

DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY

Semester - I Paper-III Objectives Hours : 90

1. To understand the development of gametes, fertilization and foetal development . 2. To acquire knowledge about the recent trends in fertility.

Unit I 16hours

History, basic concepts of developmental biology- theories. Developmental patterns among the metazoans. The cellular basis of Morphogenesis, Differential cell affinity, thermodynamics model of cell interactions. Germ cells-origin, Gametogenesis, Spermatogenesis, Oogenesis, egg membranes.

Unit II 20hours

Fertilization – Recognition of egg and sperm. Sperm activation – Acrosome reaction – fusion of gametes, activation of egg, metabolism – Fusion of genetic material. Preparation for cleavage, Patterns of embryonic cleavage. Mechanism of cleavage, Nucleus of cleavage cells, Distribution of cytoplasmic substances in the egg during cleavage, Role of egg cortex; Gastrulation- Reorganizing the embryonic cells- Morphogenetic movements.

Unit III 18hours

Chemodifferentiation - Nucleocytoplasmic interactions;. Early vertebrate development – Neurulation. Organogeny of brain, eye, heart, and kidney. Organizer concept: Classical experiments. Embryonic induction and competence. Mechanism of induction.

Unit IV 18hours

371

Human development – Reproductive organs, Reproductive cycle, Hormonal control, Implantation- Pregnancy, Role of Hormones in Pregnancy, Extra embryonic membranes, Placenta-structure, Umblical cord, Ectopic pregnancy, Parturition, Delivery Normal and Caesarian , Neonatal care, Immunization schedule.

Unit V 18hours

Birth control- Safety methods for Birth control. Necessity for Birth control; contraceptive devices. Infertility causes-Male and Female. Artificial insemination, Twins, IVF, Embryo transfer, GIFT; Surrogacy, Importance of family system, Role of Parents.

REFERENCES

1. Berrill, N.J. 1986. Developmental Biology. Tata Mc Graw Hill Publication Co.Ltd.

2. Balinsky. 1982. Introduction to Embryology. 3rd Edition. Toppan Company Ltd.,Tokyo, Japan.

3. Gilbert,S.F. 1997. Developmental Biology. 5th edition. Sinauer Associates, Inc., Sunderland, Massachusetts.

4. Robert S. McEwen. 3rd ed- Vertebrate Embryology. 3rd Edition. Henry Holt and company, New York .

5. Verma P.S., V.K.Agarwal and Tyagi. 1995, Chordate Embrology. S. Chand and Co New Delhi.

6. Sastry, K. V. and Dr. Vineeta Shukal. 2004. Developmental Biology. Ist Edition. Rastogi Publications.

7. Veer Bala Rastogi. 2011. Chordate Embryology, Kedar Nath and Ram Nath ,Delhi

372

MICROBIOLOGY AND IMMUNOLOGY Semester I Paper IV

Hours: 90

Objectives

1. To understand the structure and role of microbes in daily life 2. To understand the interaction of microbes with human health and immunity

Unit I 19 hours

Microbiology: microbial taxonomy - classification and nomenclature of microorganism. Nutritional requirements of microorganisms - Culture media types, kinetics of growths. Enumeration of bacteria. Staining techniques – simple staining, differential staining - Gram staining, acid fast, capsular staining, flagellar staining. Microbial diseases: route of entry, pathogenicity, symptoms, treatment and preventive measures of bacterial diseases – tuberculosis, typhoid, viral diseases - hepatitis, measles and Fungal diseases - Candidiasis.

Unit II 19 hours

Food Microbiology - microorganisms in fresh food materials – meat, poultry, and , general principles of food preservation. Dairy microbiology - Microorganisms in milk, milk products. Industrial microbiology: Primary metabolites and secondary metabolites and their applications - production of penicillin, alcohol, VitaminB-12; – Microbes as biofertilizer - Rhizobium, phosphate solubilizing bacteria. Use of E.coli as pollution indicators.

Unit III 18 hours

Types of immunity - innate and acquired. Components of the immune system - Lymphoid organs and cells: primary and secondary lymphoid organs, types of immune cells. Development, maturation, activation and differentiation of T-cells and B-cells; T Cell Receptor. Primary and secondary immune response. Humoral and cellular immunity.

Unit IV 17 hours

Antigen – properties and types, antigen presenting cells, antigen processing and presentation . Antibody – structure, types and functions. Genetic diversity of antibodies; antigen- antibody reactions; Major Histocompatibility Complex.

Unit V 17 hours

Immune responses to infections - immunity to viruses, bacteria, fungi. Cytokines - interleukins, interferons. Complements - pathways, hypersensitivity; Immunodeficiency diseases

373

- HIV; Vaccines: types, Vaccination schedule. Autoimmune disorders – Type I diabetes, rheumatoid arthritis (RA), multiple sclerosis and myasthenia gravis.

REFERENCES

1. Ananthanarayanan and Panickar CKJ, 2008, Text book of microbiology, Orient Longman Pvt.Ltd.

2. Eli Benjamini, Geoffrey Sunshine, Sidney Leskowitz, 1996, Edition 3, Wiley. 3. Janis kuby, Barbara A. Osborne, 1992, Immunology textbook, WH Freeman and Co. Ltd. 4. Male D., Roth D. and Roit I.M., 2002. Immunology, 8th edition, Elsevier science publishers. 5. Parihar P., 2008. Dairy Microbiology, Student Edition. 6. Pelczar M J, Chan ECS and Krieg NR, 2007, Microbiology, Tata McGraw Hill 7. Prescott LM, Harley JP and Klein DA, 2003, Microbiology, McGraw Hill education. 8. William C., Frazier, Dennis C. Westoff and Vanitta K.N. 2013, Food Microbiology. 5th Edition, Mc Graw Hill Education. www.aboutbioscience.org>topics>microbiology/ www.edufive.com

PRACTICAL – I INVERTEBRATA AND CHORDATA

Semester I Paper V

INVERTEBRATA

1. Identification and study of Protozoans, Sponges, Coelenterates, Platyhelminthes,

Aschelminthes, Annelida, Arthropoda, Mollusca and Echinoderms – slides and specimens.

2. Identification and study of larval forms from all major phyla of Invertebrates.

3. T.S of Sea Anemone, Planaria, Fasciola, Ascaris, Tapeworm, Earthworm, Nereis

and Leech

4. Identification of Protozoan parasites

374

5. Identification of Helminth parasites

6. Mounting: Prawn Appendages, Housefly,Mousquito mouth parts,

7. Dissection: Prawn –Nervous and Digestive system

Sepia- Nervous system

CHORDATA

1. Identification of Important South Indian Fishes, Amphibians, Reptiles, Birds and Mammals.

2. Mounting: Fish Pituitary gland and otolith.

3. Dissections: Fish Digestive system and Aortic arches

4. Virtual dissection: -Frog.

OSTEOLOGY

1. Pectoral and Pelvic limbs of fish, frog, calotes, pigeon and rabbit.

2. Dentition –Rabbit and Human.

VISIT

1. field visit –( Adyar-Estuary // any other)

2. Study of campus Fauna.

EVOLUTION AND DIVERSITY OF CHORDATES

Semester: II Paper VI

Hours : 90

Objectives

1. To comprehend the animal diversity and phylogeny of chordates. 2. To study their structural peculiarities and affinities to different modes of life.

Unit I (18 hours)

Origin of chordates - review of theories - Broad Classification of Chordates. Systematic review of Cephalochordates, Hemichordates and Urochordates -Affinities and adaptations. Ostracoderms. Evolutionary and structural peculiarities of Cyclostomata, Systematic review of Placoderms.

375

Unit II (18 hours)

Chondrichthyes – Origin and evolution, Characteristics, Economic importance. Fossil history. Osteichthyes – Origin and evolution. Structural peculiarities and distribution of Dipnoi

Unit III (18 hours)

Amphibia: Origin and Evolution, Terrestrialization of the Amphibians - Structural peculiarities of Urodela, Apoda and Anura. Reptiles: Origin and Evolution Dinosaurs, Systematic review of flying reptiles, mammal like reptiles, Systematic review of Chelonia, Crocodilia, Rhyncocephalia and Squamata.

Unit IV (18 hours)

Aves: Origin and evolution of Birds, Ratitae, Fossil Birds, Migration. Mechanism of Flight and Perching, Flight adaptations , Beaks and Feet in Birds. Mammals: Origin and evolution - Prototheria, Metatheria and Eutheria. Evolution of man.

Unit V (18 hours)

Comparative Anatomy: Epidermal derivatives - Brain and eye - Heart and aortic arches, vertebrate kidneys.

REFERENCES

1. Dhami J.K and P. S.Dhami 1981. Chordate Zoology R. Chand. 2. Hyman .L.H 1966 Comparative vertebrate Anatomy -Chicago Press. Chicago. 3. Jollce M. 1968 Chordate Morphology East West Press Pvt Ltd 4. Mayor . E 1969. Principles and Systematic Zoology. Mc Graw –hill.Co. 5. Romer.A.J and Parson T.S 1978. Vertebrate Body W.B Sounders Co., Philadelphia 6. Waterman A.J 1972. Chordate Structure and Functions. Macmillan co

376

BIOCHEMISTRY AND BIOPHYSICS

Semester: II Paper: VII

Hours: 90

Objectives

1. To introduce the physical principles that underlie the dynamics of life. 2. To understand the fundamental chemical principles that govern complex biological systems.

Unit I 18 hrs

Structure of atoms, molecules and chemical bonds, Principles of – pH, buffer, pH scale , Bronstead -Lowry concept of acids and bases. Strong and Weak acids, Ionization of weak acids, Handerson-Hasselbach equation. Colligative properties. Maintenance of pH in blood. High energy rich compounds. Axioms of living matter.

Unit II 18 hrs

Bioenergetics- coupling, concept of energy, Laws of Thermodynamics, glycolysis, oxidative phosphorylation, Kreb’s cycle, Electron transport chain, coupled reaction group transfer, biological energy transducers, HMP shunt.

Unit III 18 hrs

Enzymes and enzyme kinetics, characteristics of enzymes, chemical nature of enzymes, Michaelis – Menten hypothesis. Fischer’s Lock and Key model , Koshland induced fit model. Metabolism of proteins-transamination, oxidative deamination, demethylation, structure and functions of lipids, β oxidation of lipids, structure and synthesis of cholesterol.

Unit IV 18 hrs

Instrumentation: Principle, working mechanism and applications of Electrophoresis, Spectrophotometer, Chromatography, Centrifuge, Computerised Tomography(CT), Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI).

Unit V 18 hrs

Radiation Biophysics: Ionizing radiation, Units of radioactivity, exposure and dose. Biological effects of radiation: effect on nucleic acids, proteins, enzymes and carbohydrates. Cellular effects of radiation: somatic and genetic. Measurement of radioactivity – Geiger Muller counter and Scintillation counter.

377

REFERENCES

1. Ambika Shanmugam 2002. Fundamentals of Biochemistry. S. Chand and Co. 2. Casey, E. J. 1962 Biophysics concepts and Mechanism. Affiliated East –West Press Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 3. Jain J.L 2005, Fundamentals of Biochemistry –Publishers: S. Chand and Co. 4 .Sathyanarayana and Chakrabani 2004, Biochemistry - Publishers: S. Chand and Co. 5. Subramanian, M.A. 2005, Biophysics - MJP Publishers, Chennai.

Web resources www.aboutbioscience.org/topics/biophysics/ www.freebookcentre.net

PRACTICALS II: CYTOGENETICS, DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY, BIOCHEMISTRY, MICROBIOLOGY AND IMMUNOLOGY

Semester: II Paper VIII

CELL BIOLOGY

1. Calibration of micrometer.

2. Measurement of a cell using micrometer.

3. Differential and total blood cell count of human blood.

4. Histological fixing, embedding and sectioning using microtome and staining

5. Histochemical identification of carbohydrates, proteins, lipids and DNA

GENETICS

1. Preparation of culture medium and culture of Drosophila.

2. Identification of Drosophila mutants.

3. Squash preparation of grasshopper testes to study meiotic stages

4. Onion root tip squash preparation to study mitotic stages

378

5. Study of giant chromosomes in the salivary gland of Chironomous larva

6. Human Karyotyping

7. Identification of Syndromes using karyotyping

8. Pedigree Analysis of human traits.

10. PTC tasting

BIOCHEMISTRY

1. Preparation of different molar solution.

2. Preparation of different normal solution (serial solution)

3. Qualitative analysis of tissues – liver and egg albumin

4. Quantitative estimation of glucose by Anthrone method.

5. Quantitative estimation of protein by Lowry et al method.

DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY

1. Developmental stages of frog 2. Metamorphosis of Frog 3. Observation of chick embryo development -16, 24, 48 and 96 hrs. 4. Placenta of sheep, Shark and Pig 5. Human ovum and sperm

MICROBIOLOGY

1. Preparation and sterilization of culture media.

2. Streaking method - types, spread and pour plate techniques.

3. Staining techniques - Gram staining.

4. Spotters - Incubator, inoculation hood, autoclave, culture media, inoculation

loops.

IMMUNOLOGY

1. Identification of human blood groups.

379

2. Isolation and histological slide preparation of lymphoid organs of Fish

3. Raising of antibodies in fish against goat RBC as antigen

3. Single and double Immuno diffusion

3. Visit to microbiology and Immunology laboratories.

ELECTIVE-I –PARASITOLOGY

Semester-II Paper - IX

Hours: 60

Objectives

1. To provide knowledge about the general biology of the parasites. 2. To focus on the description, life cycle, pathology, diagnosis, prevention and control of each parasitic type.

UNIT I 12 hours

Introduction to parasitology - parasite classification: protozoa and helminthes. Outline of Types of host and parasites. Host parasite relationship. Parasitism. Outline of Parasitic diseases and causative agents.

UNIT II 12 hours

Sources of Infection, Modes of infection, Course of infection, Immunity in parasitic infections. Parasitic adaptations. Pathogenic free living amoebae: Naegleria and Acanthamoeba.

UNIT III 12 hours

Protozoan diseases – Amoebiasis (Entamoeba histolytica): Giardiasis (Giardia lambia), Trichomoniasis (Trichomonas vaginalis) - morphology, life cycle, pathogenesis, symptoms, lab diagnosis, treatment and control.

UNIT IV 12 hours

380

Helminthic diseases – Taeniasis (Taenia solium); Ascariasis (Ascaris lumbricoides), Ancylostomiasis (Ancylostoma duodenale) - morphology, life cycle, pathogenesis, symptoms, lab diagnosis, treatment and control.

UNIT V 12 hours

Vector borne diseases – Malaria ( Anopheles spp), Leishmaniasis (Sand fly) Filariasis (Culex sps) - morphology, life cycle, pathogenesis, symptoms, lab diagnosis, treatment and control.

REFERENCES

1. Burt, 1970. Platyhelminthes and parasitism. The English press ltd. 2. Chakraborty P, 2005, Text book of Medical Parasitology, New Central Book age Pvt., Ltd., 3. Jayaram Panicker C.K. 2013. Paniker’s Textbook of Medical Parasitology. Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers. 4. Roberts C.S and J.Janovy 2009. Foundations of parasitology, Eighth edition, McGraw Hill. 5. Sharma PN and Ratnu LS, 1984. An Introduction to Parasitology, S Chand Company Ltd., 6. Subash Chandra Parija 2013. Text book of medical parasitology, protozoology and helminthology. 4th Edn. All India Publishers and distributers, Delhi.

Elective II - ENTOMOLOGY

Semester- II Paper: X

Objectives Hours: 60

1. To acquire in depth knowledge on Public Health Entomology and control of vectors and vector borne diseases. 2. To understand the pest management strategies and gain knowledge on insects and their economic importance.

Unit I (12 hours)

General characters of Class Insecta. Classification of insects up to order. Morphology of an insect. Types of mouthpart in insects – biting and chewing, piercing and sucking, sponging and siphoning types. Metamorphosis in insects – Types of metamorphosis – ametabola, hemimetabola, holometabola - Hormonal control of metamorphosis .

381

Unit II (12 hours)

Honey bee -Morphology-Life history-Bee colony- Social life in honey bees-Bee pasturage – Bee pollination - Bee language and communication - Uses of honey- Diseases and natural enemies of honey bee. Silk worm –Types, Silk gland - Cultivation and Rearing of Silk worms - Life cycle - Uses of Silk – Diseases and natural enemies of silkworm. Lac insect – Biology and behavior of Lac Insect - Lac cultivation - Uses of Shellac – Diseases and natural enemies of Lac Insect.

Unit III (12 hours)

Insects associated with diseases in Human and their control measures – vectors – Mosquitoes (Aedes, Anopheles, Culex) – Housefly (Musca domestica) - Sandfly (Phlebotomous argentipes) - Bed bug (Cimex hemipterus) - Human body louse (Pediculus humanus humanus) – Rat fleas (Xenopsylla cheopis).

Unit IV (12 hours)

Pest definition-Types of damage to plants by insects and their control measures – Pest of Rice – Rice stem borer (Tryporyza incertulas), Pest of sugar cane – Shoot borer ( Chilo infuscatellus), Pest of Ground nut – Red hairy caterpillar (Amsacta albistriga), Pest of cotton – Pink bollworm (Pectinophora gossypiella), Pest of vegetables – Brinjal shoot and borer (Leucinodes orbonalis), Pest of fruit – Mango nut weevil (Sternochetus mangifera), Pest of stored products – Rice weevil (Sitophilus oryzae), Pulse beetle – (Callousobruchus chinensis) and Red flour beetle (Tribolium castaneum).

Unit V (12 hours)

Pest control strategies - Physical, Mechanical and Chemical control –Biological control – Botanicals, microorganisms, predators and parasites. Pheromones in pest control – Classification of insecticides – mode of entry, mode of action and chemical nature - Integrated pest management.

REFERENCES

1. Chapman, R.F. 1998. The Insect: Structure and Function.10th Edition. Cambridge University Press, UK. 2. Patnaik, B.D. 2013. A Text Book of Entomology. Dominant Publishers and Distributers Pvt. Ltd., India.

382

3. Ravindranathan K. R. I. 2003. Economic Zoology. Dominant Publishers and Distributers Pvt. Ltd., India. 4. Shukla, G.S. and Upadhyay, V. B. 2001. Economic Zoology. Rastogi Publications, Meerut. 5. Vasantharaj David, B. and Kumaraswami, T. 1975. Elements of Economic Zoology. Popular Book Depot, Madras. 6. Vasantharaj David, B., Muralirangan, M.C. and Meera M. 1992. Harmful and Beneficial Insects. Popular Book Depot, Madras. 7. Yadav, M. 2010. Applied Entomology. Discovery Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi

Web Resources

http://guides.library.cornell.edu/entomology

https://entomology.unl.e du › IANR › Entomology

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pest (organism)

EXTRA DISCPLINARY PAPER I - ORNAMENTAL FISHERIES (FOR STUDENTS OF OTHER DEPARTMENTS)

Semester: II Paper: XI

Objectives Hours: 60

1 .To acquire knowledge about aquarium fishes.

2. To understand the maintenance and management of aquarium.

Unit I (12 hours)

Introduction, definition, origin and history of aquarium fishes. Classification of aquarium based on salinity, temperature and species selection. Types of aquarium tank – construction of aquarium tank. Setting of freshwater aquarium tank – size, location, selection of stones, gravels – selection of plants – branched, rooted and floating.

Unit II (12 hours)

Selection of ornamental fishes - Description of common species of ornamental fishes - Fresh water fishes – gold fish, guppies, black molly, zebra – marine water fishes – butterfly fish,

383

parrot fish, anemone fish, marine angel fish. Diseases of aquarium fish – parasitic, bacterial, viral, protozoan, fungal and nutritional deficiency diseases.

Unit III (12 hours)

Management of aquarium - Water quality management - Chemical characteristics - Oxygen, carbon dioxide, chlorine, ammonia, nitrites and hydrogen sulphide – physical characteristics – turbidity, pH, temperature. Filtration – physical, chemical and biological filtration.

Unit IV (12 hours)

Introducing of Aquarium fishes – Fish nutrition – Classification of feed – Artificial feed – feed formulation, ingredients and feed preparation – Live feed – Dry feed – Vacation feed. Breeding in aquarium fishes – Egg layers – scatters, hangers, buriers, stowers, anchors, splashers, scoopers, hiders, carriers and nest builders. Live bearers - ovoviviparous and viviparous.

Unit V (12 hours)

Prospects of Ornamental fishes - Economic importance of ornamental fishes - Self - employment, Loan availability, small scale industries, Role of women in ornamental fish culture. List of fresh water and marine ornamental fishes available in India for export. Strategies for improvement of ornamental fish industry in India.

REFERENCES

1. Dey V.K. 1997. Ornamental Fishes - MPEDA Handbook of Aqua Farming. 2. Noga, E.J. 2010. Fish Disease: Diagnosis and Treatment. John Wiley and Sons. 3. Helen E. Robert, H.E., Wiley, J. and Sons, 2009. Fundamentals of Ornamental Fish health. 4. Tekriwal, K.L. and Rao, A. A. 1999. Ornamental Aquarium Fishes of India. TFH Publishers, Kingdom Books. 5. Tekriwal, K.L. and Rao, A. A. 2001. Review of “Ornamental Aquarium fishes of India”, Kingdom Books. 6. Sarvesh, M. 2006. Hand book of Ornamental fishes. Eastern Book Corporation. 7. Thomas, P. C., Rath, S. Ch. and Mohapatra, K. D. 2003. Breeding and seed production on fin fish and shell fish. Daya Publishing House, Delhi.

384

Web Resources

http://vikaspedia.in/agriculture/fisheries/fish-production/culture-fisheries/ornamental- aquaculture/livebearers-of-ornamental-fishes?content=small

http://vikaspedia.in/agriculture/fisheries/fish-production/culture-fisheries/ornamental-a quaculture/overview-of-ornamental-industry

ANIMAL BIOTECHNOLOGY AND BIOETHICS

Semester: III Paper: XII

Hours : 90

Objective

To apply this knowledge to the basic understanding and application of the emerging fields of animal biotechnology along with ethical guidelines.

Unit I (18 hours)

Biotechnology scope, importance and branches. Genetic engineering- Gene nature, Requirements for genetic engineering- enzymes- Exonucleases and Endonucleases, Restriction Endonucleases, Ligases, DNA and RNA polymerases, Reverse transcriptases, Alkaline Phosphatases, T4 polynucleotide kinases, Terminal Transferase. Cloning vectors – Plasmid – pBR322, Bacteriophage – Lambda DNA, Artificial Chromosomes - BAC and YAC, SV40, Shuttle vector. Gene Cloning/ rDNA technology – Isolation of desired DNA, Isolation of vector DNA, Ligation, Invitro construction of DNA, Linkers and adapters, transfer of rDNA into host. Genomic and cDNA library.

Unit II (18 hours)

Selection and screening of recombinants – direct selection, insertional inactivation method, blue - white selection method, colony hybridization test, Blotting technique – Southern, Northern and Western blotting. PCR technique. Applications of Genetic engineering - production of insulin, growth hormones, interferon, production of recombinant vaccines for rabies, hepatitis B, Chicken pox and malaria, Gene therapy. Human Genome project.

385

Unit III (18 hours)

Animal cell, tissue and organ culture – requirements, substrates for cell culture, culture media, sterilization of glassware, equipments required for cell culture , disintegration of tissue, establishment of cell cultures, types of cell lines – finite and continuous cell lines. Mass production of animal cell in bioreactor, suspension culture, organ culture, whole embryo culture. Applications of cell culture – tissue plasminogen activator, blood factor, production of monoclonal antibodies and their use in diagnosis.

Unit IV (18 hours)

Micromanipulation technology - equipments used in micromanipulation; artificial insemination and germ cell manipulations; in vitro fertilization and embryo transfer, breeding of farm animals. Concepts of transgenic animal technology; production of transgenic animals and their importance in biotechnology. Stem cells.

Unit V (18 hours)

Bioethics in animal biotechnology – Good manufacturing practices (GMP), Good lab practices (GLP). Legal and ethical importance of genetic engineering - Ethical issues associated with Genetically Modified (GM) food and animals. Biosafety regulation – national and international levels. Intellectual property Rights (IPR).

REFERENCES

1. Benjamin Lewin. 2007. Gene X. 10th edition. Jones and Bartlett publishers Inc. Ltd. 2. Brown, T.A. 2007. Genomes 3. 3rd edition. Garland Science Publishers, London, 3. Masters J.R.W. 2000. Animal Cell Culture: Practical Approach. Oxford University Press. 4. Old R.W & Primrose. 2006. Principles of Gene manipulations. 6th edition. S.B.Blackwell Scientific publications. 5. Ranga M.M. 2002. Animal Biotechnology. 3rd edition. Agrobios India Limited.

386

6. Ramadass P. Meera Rani S., 1997. Text Book of Animal Biotechnology. 2nd edition. Akshara Printers. 7. Srivastava.A.K. 2008. Animal Biotechnology Oxford and IBH publishing 8. Yadov P.R 2009. Textbook of Animal Biotechnology. Discovery publishing Pvt Ltd.

https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov.class https://www.genome.gov.

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

Semester: III Paper: XIII

Hours: 90

Objectives

1. To understand fundamentals of research methods. 2. To develop an understanding of various research designs and techniques.

UNIT-I (18 hours)

Concepts of Research – Definition, origin, meaning, characteristics, objectives and Importance of Research Methodology in Scientific Research.

UNIT-II (18 hours)

Types of Research – Descriptive Vs Analytical, Applied Vs Fundamental, Quantitative Vs Qualitative, Conceptual Vs Empirical and Research Methods Vs Methodology.

UNIT-III (18 hours)

Review of Literature – Needs, literature search procedure and sources of literature. Research formulation - Defining, formulating and selecting the research problem.

UNIT-IV (18 hours)

387

Research Design - Basic Principles, need and features of a good design - Types of research design. Data Collection – Methods of data collection, sampling methods – Data processing and Analysis strategies –Hypothesis Testing – Generalization and Interpretation. Hypothesis formulation –Null and Alternate Hypothesis.

UNIT-V (18 hours)

Research Report- Types of Report- structure and content of report – Cover and Title Page, Introductory Page, Text, Reference Section, Bibliography.

References

1. Gurumani N. 1992. Research Methodology for Biological Sciences, MJP Publishers 2. Kothari C.R. 1996. Research Methodology methods and techniques, wishwa Prakasam Publications, Second Edition. New Delhi. 3. Ross 1974. “Research An Introduction” Barnes & Noble publisher 4. Saravanavel P. 1998. Research Methodology, Kithab Mahal, Sizth Edition. 5. Sharma K.R. 2002. Research Methodology, National Publishing House, Jaipur, New Delhi, 2002. Web resource

388

PRACTICAL – III PHYSIOLOGY, BIOTECHNOLOGY, BIOINFORMATICS,

BIOSTATISTICS

Semester: III Paper: XIV

PHYSIOLOGY

1. Effect of enzyme concentration on amylase activity with reference to pH and temperature.

2. Effect of substrate concentration on amylase activity with reference to pH and temperature.

3. Oxygen consumption in Fish / Crab with relation to light and body weight.

4. CO2 released by fish / Crab with relation to light and body weight.

5. Measurement of Q10 with reference to opercular movements in fish

6. Estimation of water loss in an arthropod.

7. Observation of haemolymph in crab

8. Measurement of heart beat during rest and exercise in human.

9. Monitoring the Blood pressure in humans using Sphygmomanometer

9. Principles and application of the following instruments: Kymograph,

Sphygmomanometer, ECG.

BIOTECHNOLOGY

1. Electrophoresis Unit

2. Blotting techniques

3. Column Chromatography

4. ELISA

5. Visit to Biotechnology Laboratory

389

BIOINFORMATICS

1. Basics of Bioinformatics, Types of database, Online Sequence retrieval – NCBI

2. Literature database – Pub Med, Medline

3. Sequence database – Protein – Swiss prot, prosite, P fam, Nucleotide – Gen Bank.

4. Homology Study – Basic Alignment – BLAST and FASTA

BIOSTATISTICS

1. Collection and Classification of data

2. Representation of data: Diagram and Graph

3. Measures of Central tendency: Mean, Median, Mode

4. Calculation of Correlation Coefficient

ELECTIVE III - BIOINFORMATICS AND BIOSTATISTICS

Semester: III Paper: XV

Hours: 60

Unit I 7 hrs

Definition: Scope of bio-informatics. Operating systems-windows. MS office- MS word, power point, MS Excel. Internet –browsing and e- mailing.

Unit II 15 hrs

Sequencing alignment - Introduction - Strings – Hemming’s/Edit and Levenshtein distance pairwise sequence alignment- gap penalty - parametric sequence alignment - sub optimal alignment - multiple alignments - common multiple alignment methods. Sequence data base and

390

their use - introduction to data base search FASTA - BLAST Amino acid substitution matrices PAM and BLOSSUM.

Unit III 8 hrs

Phylogenetic Analysis –Phylogenetic tree and its construction. Genomics, proteomics: structural proteomics.

Unit IV 15 hrs

Biostatistics: Population, Sample, Statistical sampling methods in Biological study - Tabulation - Graphical and diagrammatic presentation - Histogram, Frequency Polygon - Frequency curve . Variation - Discrete and Continuous - Mean, Median and Mode.

Unit V 15 hrs

Measure of Dispersion - Standard deviation - standard error ; Elements of Probability - addition and multiplication probability; Patterns of Distribution - Binomial, normal and Poisson; simple correlation - Coefficient of correlation - Students t test and Chi – Square test -ANOVA.

REFERENCES

1. Dan Gusfield, 1997. Algorithms on strings trees and Sequences. 2. David W.Mount, 2001. Bio-informatics Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory press 3. Dov Stekel, 2003. Microarry Bioinformatics. Cambridge University Press. 4. Ignacimuthu. C, 2005. Basic Bioinformatics. Narosa Publishing house. 5. Imtiyaz Alam Khan, 2005. Elementary Bioinformatics. Pharma Book Syndicate. 6. Kapoor, V.K 1990. Problems & Solutions In Statistics. Sultan Chand & Sons

Web resources https://learn.org/articles/What_is_Bioinformatics.html

391

ELECTIVE - IV AQUACULTURE

Semester: IV Paper: XVI

Hours: 60 Objectives:

1. To provide a basic understanding about aquaculture practices and various culture methods 2. To understand the aquatic resource utilization.

Unit I Hours: 12

Introduction: Habitat, morphology, feeding, breeding of - Marine fishes: Oil sardine, Mackerel and Seabass, Brackish water fishes: Chanos, Mullet and Pearl spot. Biology of economically important Indian major carps – Catla, Rogu, Mrigal and minor carps- Labeo bata, Labeo calbasu, Labeo fimbriatus.

Unit II Hours: 12

Fish feed: Live feed organisms – Artemia and Rotifer- Culture methods. Artificial feed – formulations and feeding methods. Growth of fish - factors influencing growth, length, weight, relationship. Age determination - Different methods – scale, otolith and bone method.

Unit III Hours: 10

Reproduction in fishes: Breeding techniques – hypophysation, induced breeding, cryopreservation. Transgenic fishes – development and applications. Production of super female fishes.

Unit IV Hours: 13

Aquaculture farm – site selection, layout and construction of fish pond. Water source and water quality parameters and water quality management. Types of ponds in aquaculture. Different types of culture methods – composite, integrated, paddy cum fish culture. Ornamental fishes- Goldfish, Angel fish and guppies. Setting of aquarium and maintenance of aquarium fishes.

Unit V Hours: 13

Shell Fishes: Prawn culture, edible oyster culture and mussel culture. Processing, preservation storage and spoilage of fishes, By products of fish industry. Fish harvesting - Gears and crafts in fish harvesting. Common fish pathogens, diseases, symptoms and control measures.

392

REFERENCES

1. Bardach JE., Ryther JH and Miller WD, 1987. Aquaculture, B. John Wiley & Sons, New York. 2. Chakrabarti, N. M. 1998. Biology, Culture and Production of Indian Major Carps. Narendra Publishing House, New Delhi 3. Coche, A. G. and J. F. Muir. 1996. Pond Construction and Fresh Water Fish Culture – Pond Farm Structures and Layouts – Simple Methods for Aquaculture. FAO. Daya Publishing House, New Delhi. 4. Jhingran V.G. , 1982. Fish and fisheries of India. Hindustan publishing Company, India. 5. Pillay, T. V. R. Aquaculture: Principles and Practices. Fishing News Books. 6. Santhanam R., 1990. Fisheries Science. Daya publishing house, New Delhi. 7. Srivastava C.B.L., 2002. A text book of fishery science and Indian fisheries, Kitab Mahal, . 8. Yadav B. N., 1997. Fish and fisheries. Daya publishing house, New Delhi.

www.fishes.org www.fao.org

EXTRA DISCIPLINARY PAPER II - MATERNITY AND CHILD CARE

(FOR THE STUDENTS OF OTHER DEPARTMENTS) Semester: III Paper: XVII Hours: 60

Unit I 13 hours Reproductive organs - Female and Male- structure, Function. Spermatogenesis, Oogenesis. Puberty- Hormonal changes during puberty, Menstrual cycle.

Unit II 12hours

Fertilization-Mechanism, Pregnancy test- strip method; Stages of pregnancy -I,II and III trimester; Physiological changes during pregnancy, Ectopic pregnancy.

Unit III: 11 hours

Role of Hormones in pregnancy -LH, FSH, Progesterone, Relaxin, oxytocin, prolactin- Pregnancy-related problems- Anaemia, Rh factor ; CVS and Amniocentosis.

Unit IV 12hours

393

Epiduresis, Labour pain; False pain. Parturition: Normal, Caesarian. Lactation- Mother’s milk and its advantages. Birth control - Necessity for Birth control; methods- contraceptive devices.

Unit V 12hours

Infertility in Male and Female. ART-Artificial insemination, Test tube Baby, Multiple pregnancy IVF, Embryo transfer, GIFT; Childcare-Inborn errors in man, Immunization schedule. Importance of family system- Role of Parents.

REFERENCES

1. Verma P.S., V.K. Agarwal and Tyagi 1995. Chordate embryology, S.Chand and Co New Delho 110 055, 420pp

2. Gerard, J. Tortora and Sandra Reynolods Grabowski.. 2003. Principles of anatomy and Physiology. 10th edition. Mac Millain.John Wiley and Sons, IMC

3. Sastry, K.V and Dr. Vineeta Shukal. 2004. Developmental Biology, 1st Ed. Rastogi publications.

Web resources https://biology.duke.edu>research>dev.

ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY

Semester: IV Paper: XVIII

Hours: 90

Objectives

1. To understand the essential physiological functions. 2. To focus on all the functions and life activities of life.

Unit I 18hrs

Homeostasis and homeostatic mechanisms of the body - Thermoregulation, Exothermic and Endothermic organisms- Endothermy and physiological mechanism of body temperature regulation - Physiological adaptation to osmotic and ionic stress; mechanism of cell volume regulation - Osmoregulation in aquatic and terrestrial environments.

394

Unit II 17hrs

Nutritive requirements – General, Structure and function of digestive system, Absorption of digested food-hormonal control of digestion. Energy balance, BMR. Excretion: Structure of kidney – Mechanism of urine formation – acid base regulatory mechanisms; endocrine regulation of water and mineral balance.

Unit III 21hrs

Comparision of respiratory system in animals. Physiology of respiration, Respiratory pigments - transport of gases. Physiology of aerial and aquatic respiration in invertebrates and vertebrates. Respiratory adaptations in animals living in oxygen deficient environment- high altitude- deep sea. Circulation - types of heart - physiology of cardiac muscle - heart beat and its regulation - composition of blood and coagulation.

Unit IV 18hrs

Types of muscles.Mechanism of muscle contraction. Neuronal control of muscle contraction. Nervous System- types, neuron, nerve impulse, resting potential, stimulation conduction of nerve impulse - synaptic transmission – neuro muscular junction – Reflex arc.

Unit V 16hrs

Sensing the Environment- photoreception, chemoreception, mechanoreception, echolocation. Bioluminescence, pheromones, colouration, and function. Endocrinology: endocrine glands in vertebrates - endocrine related diseases and disorders in Man

REFERENCES

1. Dantzler W.H. (ed.) Comparative Physiology (Handbook of Physiology): Vol. 1, 2, 2. Guyton A.G. 2002. Text Book of Medical Physiology, 12th Edn. Saunders Publication. 3. Hoar W.S. 1983. General and Comparative Animal Physiology, 3rd Edn. Prentice Hall Inc. 4. Nelson K. S. Animal Physiology- Adaptation and Environmental, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK. 5. Prosser C.L. 1973. Comparative Animal Physiology, 3rd Edition. W.B. Saunders and Co., Philadelphia. 6. Rastogi S.C. 2001. Essentials of Animal Physiology, 3rd Edition. New Age International Publishers, New Delhi 7. Randal, D., Burggren, W. and French K. 2002. Eckert Animal Physiology, Mechanisms and adaptations. 4th Edition. W. H. Freeman and Company, New York.

395

8. Schmid-Nielson K. 2002. Animal Physiology: Adaptations and Environment, 5th Edition, Cambridge University Press, UK.

Web Resources

https.//learn org>Animal-biology>Ani.. https://animal phys4e.sinaver.com

ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY AND TOXICOLOGY Semester: IV Paper: XIX Hours: 90 Objectives 1. To learn about various global and regional environmental concerns that effect various forms of life. 2. To understand the exposure of man and animal to potentially hazardous environment factors of chemical, biological and physical nature.

Unit I 18hours

The Environment – Abiotic – (light, temperature, water, air and soil), biotic factors, Law of limiting factors , animal interactions- positive and negative. Habitat ecology – fresh, marine, and esturine water, terrestrial- characteristic and adaptation. Environment and Human health, Environmental ethics. Concept of , Ecological pyramids, Food chains, food web, Energy flow in an ecosystem, Biogeo chemical cycles – gaseous and sedimentary cycles. Unit II 17hours

Population ecology - characteristics of a population, Population density, natality, mortality, age distribution of population, population growth curves; population dispersion.Community ecology - Nature of communities - community structure and attributes, edge effect and Ecotones, Ecological succession, concept of climax. Unit III 20hours Wild life conservation and management – Wild life of India; reasons for depletion of wild life, necessity for wild life conservation, modes of wild life conservation, protection by law, causes of , threatened species, protected species of Indian wild life, red data book, WWF, CITES, IUCN, establishment of sanctuaries and national parks, Biodiversity management approaches, principles of biodiversity conservation.

Unit IV 17hours

396

Environmental pollution- Air , Water , Soil ,Noise and Pesticide . Automobile emission of heavy metals - fertilizers - food additives - animal, plant and mushroom toxins. Role of biotechnology in pollution detection, bioremediation, biodegradation; organic farming and its merits, green chemistry.

Unit V 18hours

Toxicology - definition and Scope. Bioassay test - single species test - multi species test - acute toxicity test - sub acute toxicity test - chronic toxicity test - determination of LC 50 and LD50 values - Pathological techniques – autopsy.

REFERENCES 1. Gupta P.K. and Salunka, D.K. 1985. Modern Toxicology, Volume I and II, Metropolitan, New Delhi. 2. LU F.C., 1985. Basic Toxicology, Hemisphere Publication, Corporation, Washington, N.Y., London. 3.Odum E. P. 1983. Basic Ecology, Saunder’s College Publishing, New York 4.Sharma P.D., 1996. Environmental Biology and Toxicology, Rastogi Publication, Meerut, India. 5. Sood, A. 1999. Toxicology, Sarup and Sons, New Delhi. 6. Verma and Agarwal, 2003. Environmental Biology – S.Chand &Co.Publications.

Web resources www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov.books

PROJECT Semester: IV Paper: XX

1. Project paper - 90 hours of practical work, analysis and interpretation 2. Project work should be original and independent research by the student 3. Two Copies of project report and also soft copy of report in CD should be submitted at the end of the term. 4. The maximum length of the report should not exceed 30 pages (typed matter; Times New Roman 12; space 1.5 ) excluding bibliography, tables and diagrams and annexure. 5. A certificate from the Supervisor under whom the candidate worked that the report submitted is a record of research work done by the candidate during the period of study under

397

her and that the report has not formed the basis for the award to the candidate of any Degree, Diploma, Associateship, Fellowship or other similar title should be provided. 6. A viva (oral examination) will be conducted on the project work at the end of the term.

PRACTICAL – IV ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY, AQUACULTURE AND MEDICAL LABORATORY TECHNIQUES Semester: IV Paper: XXI

Environmental Biology 1. Estimation of dissolved O2 and CO2 in water sample 2. Estimation of salinity and alkalinity in different water samples 3. Estimation of calcium and Magnesium in water samples 4. Estimation of Primary productivity in pond water 5. Analysis and submission any five Fresh water and Marine of Plankton. 6. Study of marine habitat- rocky shore fauna, sandy shore fauna, muddy shore fauna. 7. Study of fauna in their natural Habitats by visiting places of zoological interest. 8. Visit to water treatment plants and Tannery Effluent treatment plant

Aquaculture

1. Morphology and Morphometric measurement of fish 2. Fish anatomy (digestive system) 3. Identification of locally available and economically important marine and freshwater fish Species belonging to different families-Use of manuals 4. Identification of cultivable prawns, commercially important invertebrates and their economic importance (Crab, Lobster, Clam, Mytilus, Loligo and Sepia) 4. Fish farm implements – Secchi disk, pH meter, hand centrifuge, aerator, Plankton net, cast net, drag net and gill net. Gut content analysis of plankton feeder and Carnivorous fish 5. Observation of models of Crafts 6. Observation of fish parasites – Prepared specimen and Slide preparation 7. Observation of public health fishes (larvivorous fishes) and Aquarium fishes 8. Fish by - products 9. Observation of Larval stages of prawn collected from Hatchery 10. Visit to Aquafarms

Medical Laboratory Technology

1. Pregnancy Test 2. Widal test 3. ELISA 4. Glucose test

398

5. Visit to medical Lab and Diagnostic centre

ELECTIVE-V - MEDICAL LABORATORY TECHNIQUES

Semester: IV Paper: XXII Hours: 60 Objective

To make the students to gain the clinical knowledge and diagnosis of diseases.

Unit I 12 hours

Setting of a clinical laboratory, laboratory safety. Hematology – Different methods of collection of blood samples; anticoagulants; complete blood count – Total Red Blood Cells (RBC), White Blood Cells (WBC), platelets, Hemoglobin estimation by Sahli’s method; preparation and staining of blood smear – Differential Leucocyte Count (DLC). Bleeding time and clotting time. Erythrocyte Sedimentation Rate (ESR),

Unit II 12 hours

Clinical Chemistry, blood glucose – glucose tolerance test , Liver function test – Alanine Amino Tranferase (ALT) and Aspartate Aminotransferase (AST), endocrine function – Estimation of thyroxin (T4) and Thyroid Stimulating Hormone (TSH), Blood Urea Nitrogen (BUN).

Unit III 12 hours

Diagnostic measures: Blood pressure, ECG, EEG, angiogram. Diagnosis of dengue, malaria, typhoid and Hepatitis A and B. Analysis of - sputum, cerebro spinal Fluid (CSF), urine analysis – cast and crystals, stool analysis.

Unit IV 12 hours

Pregnancy test - human Chorionic Gonadotropin (hCG), semen analysis, infertility investigation of male and female. Vaginal smear examination , Diagnostic skin test - Mantoux test. Mycoses – superficial, intermediate and deep.

Unit V 12 hours

Fine Needle Aspiration Cytology (FNAC) test breast cancer diagnosis. Staining techniques – bacteria – Gram staining; fungal culture technique and staining – Lacto phenol Cotton Blue (LCB).

399

REFERENCES

1. John Bernerd Henry M.D. 1991. Clinical diagnosis and Management by Laboratory

methods. WB Saunders Company, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, Inc.

2. John D. Bauer 1982. Clinical Laboratory methods, Edition 9, Mosby.

3. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J. 1994. Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements. Weivell, Publishing Ltd.,

4. Rajalakshmi, 2008. Biomedical Instrumentations. Sam publications.

5. Ramnik Sood. 2006. Medical Laboratory technology: Methods and Interpretations. Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers (P) Ltd

6. Satish, Gupta, 2010. Short text book of Medical Microbiology. Edition 10, Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers (P) Ltd.

400

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI-600 004

DEPARTMENT OF ZOOLOGY

M.Phil. SYLLABUS

2017-18 ONWARDS

401

M.Phil degree course in Zoology

(Syllabus)

Paper – I

Research Methodology

Paper – II

Recent Advances in Zoology

Paper – III

Optional papers

• Entomology

• Aquaculture & Farm Management

• Aquatic Biology

• Immunology and Immunotechnology

• Microbiology

• Reproductive Biology

• Physiology

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

Unit I - Principles and Applications Microscopy – Electron Microscopy – SEM, TEM. Spectrophotometer - Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer, UV Visible Spectrophotometer, NMR and ESR Spectroscopy, Plasma Emission Spectroscopy, X-Ray Diffraction and Fluorescence Spectroscopy.

UNIT - II Separation and Analytical Techniques Chromatography – Paper, Column, Ion exchange, TLC, HPLC, GLC, GC. Electrophoresis - Paper, Gel, PAGE, SDS- PAGE- Gel documentation-2D electrophoresis, Flow Cytometer. Tracer Techniques – Auto Radiography. Immunological Techniques - ELISA, RIA. Blotting Techniques - Western, Southern and Northern.

402

UNIT - III Cellular Identification Microtechnique - Principles of microtechnique - types of microtomes and their biological uses. Histology - Kinds of fixatives-characteristics of fixatives; dyes and their mode of action- pretreatment-mordants, staining; mounting of tissues- making permanent slides of microtome sections. Histochemistry - Histochemical tests for proteins, carbohydrates, lipids and nucleic acids- stain employed and staining procedure.

UNIT – IV Biostatistics Collection and classification of data - diagrammatic and graphical representation of data- measurement of central tendency - standard deviation – Probability Distribution (Poisson, Normal and Binomial) - student `t' test and Z test - correlation and regression - Chi square test – ANOVA – one way and two way.

UNIT – V Scientific Thesis Writing Choosing the problem for research-sources of information-collection from journals and periodicals-abstracts and preparation of index cards-methods of editing and abstracting- preparation of scientific manuscript-thesis writing-proof correction.

References

• Anderson, Durston & Polle, 1970. Thesis and assignment, writing Wiley Eastern Limited • Bier, 1959. Electrophoresis, theory, methods and applications, Academic Press, London, New York. • Block, R. I. Durram E.K. and Eweig,G, 1956. A manual of paper chromatography and electrophoresis academic press, New York. • Campbej R C., 1975. Statistics for Biologists IInd Ed. Cambridge University Press, London. • Chayan J & Butcher R.G., 1973. Practical histochemistry, Willey Interscience Publication, London. • Fisher R.A, 1950. Statistical methods of research workers. • Gurumani N., 1992. Research Methodology for Biological Sciences, MJP Publishers • Jones R M., 1966. Basic microscopic techniques University of Chicago Press, Chicago. • Kothari C. R., 1996. Research Methodology methods and techniques, wishwa Prakasam Publications, Second Edition. New Delhi. • Malter K, 1972. Statistical analysis in Biology, Chapmen Hall, London.

403

• Ross, 1974. “Research An Introduction”

• Saravanavel P., 1998. Research Methodology, Kithab Mahal, Sizth Edition.

• Sharma K. R., 2002. Research Methodology, National Publishing House, Jaipur, New Delhi.

Recent Advances in Zoology

Unit I

Gene Technology DNA sequencing and Human genome project, DNA finger printing and foot printing, DNA amplification and RT-PCR, Gene and cDNA Library. Detection of genetic diseases using DNA recombinant technology, screening and counseling – Human gene therapy - Cloning technique and its application in Biology, knock out genes– Ethical issues. Reproductive technologies related to human in vitro fertilization. Unit II

Immunology Complement fixation, structure and classes of antibodies, genetic basis of antibody diversity. MHC. Structure of antigen and its properties, antigen processing and presentation. T and B lymphocytes activation and role in humoral and cell mediated immunity.Vaccines live and attenuated, killed, multi-subunit and DNA vaccines. Hypersensitivity and auto immune diseases. ELISA, RIA, Hybridoma Technology.

Unit III

Tissue culture Techniques Animal Culture: Media requirements and sterilization techniques, primary and established cell lines. Culture methods: hanging drop, monolayer and suspension. Applications of animal cells line and tissue culture. Stem cells: adult and embryonic, applications to tissue engineering.. .

Unit IV Environmental Biology Bioremediation.- Bio-Indicators and Molecular markers. Renewable and Non-renewable sources of energy, Conventional and Non-conventional, Solar & Tidal energy – Biogas production – Nuclear energy Biodiversity – Types, measures of diversity – Biodiversity conservation, laws. Remote sensing and GIS – Basic concepts

Unit V Recent techniques in Zoology

404

Chromatographic Separation (TLC to HPLC), X-Ray Crystallography, Immunoassays & immunocytological techniques. Computer aided techniques to data analysis and presentation, Phylogenic analysis, Cryotechniques, Electron, cryo, Confocal and Scanning Electron Microscopy.

References

• ABBAS, A.K.,LICHTMAN, A.K.,POBER , J.S.(1998) Cellular and Molecular Immunology. III Edition W.B.Saunders Company, U.S.A. • BENJAMIN LEWIN. (1999) Genes VII. Oxford University Press, New York. • BRANDEN, C., TOOZE, J. (1999) Introduction to protein structure. II Edition, Garland Publishing , Inc., New York. • DESMOND, S.T., NICHOLL. (1994) An introduction to genetic engineering Cambridge University Press, New York. • JONATHAN GRAVES, DUNGAN REAVEY (1996) Global Environmental Change. Plant, Animal and Communities. Long man. • HAWKINS, J.D. (1996) Gene structure and expression. III Edition. Cambridge University Press, New York. • Ecology: Principles and Applications- Chapman & Reiss • Environmental Biology- Park • Biodiversity- Wilson

ENTOMOLOGY

UNIT I:

Morphology and classification of insects, Mouth parts of insects, Metamorphosis, Juvenile hormones and ecdysones. Host plant insect interaction.

UNIT II:

Beneficial insects – Honey bees – kinds of honey bees, bee language and communication, swarming, Economic importance of honey bees, diseases of honey bees. Silk worms – types of silkworm, life cycle, uses of silk, diseases of silk worm. Lac insects, Productive insects, Scavenger insects, Social life in insects.

UNIT III:

Destructive insects - Pests of rice, pests of cotton, pests of oil seeds, pests of vegetables, pests of fruits and trees, stored product pests.

UNIT IV :

Integrated pest management systems – Prophylactic measures – cultural, mechanical, physical methods. Biological control - Predatory insects, parasites, parasitoids,

405

bacterial pesticides, Fungal pesticides, Viral pesticides, Plant extracts – alkaloids. Chemical methods - Pesticides, classification – types of formulation – mode of action – toxicity – insecticide resistance – environmental safety.

UNIT V :

Biotechnological studies in insects – Insect cell lines, protein sequencing with special reference to chitin. Intellectual property rights, patents – Bioethical issues.

REFERENCES

• Vasantharaj David B., 1971. Economic Entomology.

• Nalina Sundari M S. and Santhi R., 2006. Entomology.

• Sathe T.V., 2003. Agrochemicals and pest management.,

• Law J.H., 1987. Molecular Entomology.

• Wiggles Worth U.B., The principles of insect physiology.

• Coppel and Martins, 1971. Biological insect pest suppression.

• Sathe and Bhosale, 2001. Insect pest predators.

• Patil and Sathe, 2003. Insect predators and pest management.

• Sathe and Bhoje, 2000. Biological pest control.

• Sathe et al., 2003. Indian pest parasitoids.

• Richards and Davis, 1997. Imms General Text book of Entomology.

AQUACULTURE & FARM MANAGEMENT

Unit I

Aquaculture-Introduction Extensive, intensive & semi-intensive culture practices in India. Basic considerations in the selection of species for culture. Cultivable freshwater fishes in India. Biology of major carps & other fishes –food & feeding habits.

Unit II

Breeding habits of major carsps. Procurement of seeds from nature. Identification of different stages of fish seed. Transport of different stages of fish seed- identification & support of brooders.

406

Unit –III

Construction of fish farm-site selection-pond productivity-soil quality. Source of water-water quality management in Aquaculture -Temperature-salinity-pH-Dissolved Oxygen & Carbon-di- oxide levels-Nutrients-trace elements. Fish culture in large water bodies like reservoirs & lakes, seed procurement-stocking-harvesting

Fish nutrition & feed development-live feed- (Artemia, Rotifer, Cladocerans, Spirulina & Chlorella) Formulated feeds-feed processing-feed cost.

Fish hatchery-hatching technology for major carps & live fishes

Brackish water fish production-Lates calcarifer.

Unit IV:

Aquarium fishes-Aquarium tanks- maintenance-selection of aquarium & Ornamental fish culture as cottage industry & its export potential, Industrial perspectives & prospects.

Brackish water Aquaculture-fishes inhabiting brackish water-brackish water fishes suitable for culture-culture practices in CIBA &other activities in CIBA.

Unit V:

Mariculture-Prawn culture-classification of economically important prawns-prawn hatchery- developmental stages-extensive culture methods-intensive culture methods-Feed & feeding management-shrimp disease diagnosis & health management.

Biotechnologu-application of genetics in aquaculture sex manipulation chromosomal & gene manipulation-genetic engineering-hybridization-genetic conversation in fishes.

References

1. Pillay T.V.R. 1994. Aquaculture - Principles and Practices. Fishing News Books,

Blackwell, London.

2. Jhingran, V.G. 1998. Fish and Fisheries of India. Hindustan Publishing

Corporation, New Delhi.

3. Baradach, J.E., J.H. Ryther, J.H. and W.O. Mc Larney, W.O., 1972. Aquaculture. The farming and Husbandry of Freshwater and Marine Organisms. Wiley Interscience, New

407

York.

4. Yadav B. N., 1997, Fish and fisheries. Daya publishing house, New Delhi.

5. Santhanam R., 1990, Fisheries Science. Daya publishing house, New Delhi.

6. Jhingran C.G. , 1981, Fish and fisheries of India. Hindustan publishing Company,

India.

7. Srivastava C.B.L., 2002, A text book of fishery science and Indian fisheries, Kitab

Mahal, Allahabad.

AQUATIC BIOLOGY UNIT I : Habitat Ecology Physico-chemical properties of fresh water( ponds, lakes and rivers) and marine ; Kinds of aquatic habitats ( fresh water and marine); Classification of lentic and lotic environments.:Distribution and impact of environmental factors on the aquatic biota ; Productivity mineral cycles and biodegradation in different aquatic ecosystems.

UNIT – II : Energetics Plant animal interaction and suitability of the environment – Ecological energetics : Food chain, food webs, energy transfer through trophic chains and ecological efficiencies in aquatic ecosystems. Plant microbial interaction – Physiological adaptations of animals to the limiting factors – oxygen, pressure, temperature and light.

UNIT III : Aquatic Fauna: General study of freshwater organisms (Plankton, Nekton, & Benthos), Binomics of fresh water organisms – benthos – filter feeders – deposit feeders – periphyton – phyto and zoo plankton – nekton – Nueston and their examples.

UNIT IV: Water pollution Definition-Types, pollutants - sources of water pollution, effects and control of water pollution. Heavy metal pollution. Bioindicators in pollution. Pollution control by using microbes. Conservation of water bodies.

UNIT V: Water pollution monitoring. Methods of monitoring - Biological methods- Detection methods for DO, BOD, Pathogen monitoring by heterotrophic plate count, multiple tube method, membrane filtration methods, Other emerging techniques such as enzyme detection, hybridization, PCR, gene probe technology etc. Strategies for controlling pathogen transfer. Chemical methods- Detection methods for COD, pH, alkalinity, TSS, TDS, Total organic carbon, oil, grease etc.

REFERENCES

408

1. Limnology Charles R. Goldman and Alexender J. Horns 1983, McGraw Hill International Book Co., New Delhi. 2. Elements of ecology and Field Biology, Robert Lew Smith, 1977, Harper and Row Publishers, New York, London. 3. Environmental Protection , Emil T. Chanlett, 1973, McGraw Hill Co., New Delhi. 4. Field Biology and ecology. Allend H. Benton andf Willilmn, E. Warner Jr. 1976. Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi. 5. Modern concepts of ecology H.D. Kumar 1997. Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 6. Ecolopgy of Freshwater, Alison Leadlay Brown 1971. Heinemann Educational Books Ltd, London. 7. Introduction to Ecology, Papul A. Colinvaux, 1978 John Wiley and Sons, Inc. New York. 8. Environmental Pollution, Mastumura, M. 1972 Academic Press, London. 9. Sewage Pollution Microbiology, Ralph Mitchell, 1972. John Wiley & Sons, Inc, New York, London. 10. An Introduction to freshwater Organisms, A. Tonapi 11. Fish and Fisheries of India. V. G. Jhingram, 1980 Hindustan Publishing Co.,New Delhi.

IMMUNOLOGY AND IMMUNOTECHNOLOGY

UNIT I Introduction to immune system, adaptive & innate immune response, cell & organs of the immune system. Cellular and Humoral Immunity. B and T cell development and differentiation, activation and receptors. Immune system in chordates. – Lymphoid organs and immune cells in fishes, amphibians, reptiles, birds and mammals.

UNIT II Antigens structure, types, characters and functions. Preparation of different types of antigens and vaccines. Adjuvants and haptens - Role of adjuvants and haptens in antigen and vaccine preparation . Administration of antigens and vaccines in animals.

UNIT III Antibody - structure, types, characters and functions. Preparation of monoclonal antibodies and its applications. Complement system, complement components, their structures and functions, mechanism of compliment activation by classical and alternate pathway, complement function test and interleukins and MHCs. immunodeficiency diseases.

UNIT IV Immunomodulation – Mechanisms of immunomodulation, classification – immunoadjuvants, immunosupperssors and immunostimulats. Types of immunomodulators – recombinant, synthetic and natural preparations. Prophylactic and therapeutic immunomodulators. Immunotherapy.

UNIT V

409

Immunotechnology: Isolation of immune cells, Immunodiffusion – single and double immunodiffusion. Immunoelectrophoresis, RIA, ELISA. Testing the efficacy of antigens and vaccines.

REFERENCES 1. Roitt I, Male, Brostoff. (2002), Immunology, Mosby Publ. 2. Ashim K. and Chakravarthy, (1998), Immunology, Tata McGraw-Hill. 3. Goldsby RA, Kindt TK, Osborne BA and Kuby J (2003) Immunology, 5th Edition, W.H. Freeman and Company, New York, New York. 4. Eli Benjamini, Richard Coico and Geoffrey Sunshine (2000). Immunology a short course. 4 th Edn. Wiley. 5. Arvind Kumar (2013). Text book of Immunology. Energy and Resources Institute, TERI. 6. Helen Chapel , Mansel Haeney and Siraj Misbah. (2006). Essentials of Clinical Immunology. Wiley. MICROBIOLOGY

UNIT 1 Agricultural Microbiology and Microbial Ecology Soil Enzymes – origin and range of enzymes in soil, methods of measurement and extraction of soil enzymes, interactions between agrochemical and soil enzymes. Recent advances in biological Nitrogen fixation Microbial Biofertilisers. Microbiology of the Extreme Environment- Hot springs, acid springs and lakes. Microbial life in hyper saline environments – ecophysiological aspects, sea and salt lakes. UNIT II Applied and Environmental Microbiology Microbiology and production of Lactic Starter Culture Concentrates. Microbiology of Dried Milk Powders and Concentrated Milks.. Quality Control in the Food and Dairy Industry – HACCP system.. Recent advances in Microbiological waste treatment methods - Activated Sludge Process- Anaerobic sludge digestion- Mass scale production of Effective Microorganisms (EM) for waste treatment.-Economics of waste treatment

UNIT III Fermentation Technology Various methods for isolation of pure culture methods for measurement of microbial growth, manipulation of environment, nutritional and genetic parameters for over production of metabolites, maintenance and preservation of microbes (pure culture).. Design of production nutrient media, preparation of inoculum, alternative carbon and nitrogen sources. Design of

410

fermenter: material for construction, aeration, agitation, sterilization of gases and liquids, on-line and off line monitoring of rheological parameters, types of fermentors, solid state (substrate) fermentation.

Unit – IV: Microbial Products and their bioprocesses Single cell protein – Chlorella, Spirullina, Yeasts, Mushrooms – SCP from wastes. Clinically important microorganisms and their effects on infection and immunity. Production of toxins by microorganism. Disease caused by pathogens and their control. Production of medicinally important substances by microbes. Products produced through recombinant microbes – insulin, vaccines, and antibiotics. Production of antibodies in E.coli implications of SCP. Microbial production of enzymes – cellulase, lipase, Taq polymerase, and restriction endonuclease. Production of wine, vinegar and alcohol. Biofertilizers – cyanobacteria, Azospirillum, VAM and Azolla. UNIT V Medical Microbiology Rapid Detection of Food borne pathogens. Pathophysiology of Infectious diseases – diseases of respiratory tract, alimentary tract, skin and soft tissues. Molecular basis of Mycoplasma pathogenicity, AIDS - Recent developments in aetiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis and control of AIDS.Viral hepatitis, alcoholic hepatitis

References 1. Microbial Ecology by J. M. Lynch 2. Bergey’s Manual of Systematic Bacteriology Volume 1. Springer 3. Annual Reviews in Microbiology Volumes 46 & 49 by L. N. Ornston, A. Balows and E. P. Greenberg (eds). Academic Press 4. Microbes in Extreme Environments by D. J. Kushner 5. Microbial Technology by H. J. Peppler. Academic Press 6. Annual Reviews in Microbiology Volume 48 by L. N. Ornston, A. Balows and E. P. Greenberg (eds). Academic Press 7. Food Microbiology by M. R. Adams and M. O. Moss 8. Dairy Microbiology Volumes 1 and 2 by R. K. Robinson. 9. Fermentation Microbiology and Biotechnology by E. M. T. El-Mansi and C. F. A. Bryce. 10. Microbiological Aspects of Pollution Control by Dart and Stretton. Surabhi Publishers, Jaipur 11. Microbial Technology by H. J. Peppler. Academic Press. 12. Lecture notes on Epidemiology and Community by Farner and

411

REPRODUCTIVE BIOLOGY

Unit I

Reproductive biology-history and concepts-scope and problems-Gametogenesis-gametogenic synchrony-developmental patterns among metazoans.

Unit II

Fertilization-cleavage-Gastrulation-vertebrate development – development of various organs.

Unit III

Cellular interaction during organ formation-induction-competence and receptors-Induction at single cell level (eg. Vulval induction in nematode.)

Unit IV

Hormones as mediators of development-vitellogenesis in invertebrates- metamorphosis-Insects and Amphibians-Environmental regulation of animal development.

Unit V

Developmental patterns in invertebrates-larval forms-larval ecology –life history-evolution- dispersal-nutrition.

References

1.Devis A., Blakely A. and Kidd C. 2001. Human Physiology, Harcourt Publishers Limited, Churchill, Livingstone. 2. Elder K. and Dale B. 2000. In vitro fertilization 2nd (Ed), Cambridge University Press. 3. Guyton A.C. 1986. Textbook of Medical Physiology 7th (Ed), W.B. Saunders Company Igaku / Saunders. 4. Guyton A.C. 1992. Human Physiology and Mechanism of Diseases 5th (Ed), W.B. Saunders Company Igaku / Saunders. 5. Kessel R.G. 1998. Basic Medical Histology, Oxford University Press New York.

412

Physiology Unit I Biological oxidation-reduction reactions, redox potentials, relation between standard reduction potentials & free energy change (derivations and numericals included). High energy phosphate compounds – introduction, phosphate group transfer, free energy of hydrolysis of ATP and sugar phosphates . Metabolic changes during starve-feed cycle, exercise, diabetes and alcohol abuse.Oxidative Phosphorylation-Components, Properties and function of electron transport system, Chemiosmotic hypothesis. Unit II Enzymes: classification, mechanism of enzyme action, factors affecting enzyme action, Isoenzymes. Antioxidant enzymes. Importance of Antioxidants and enzymes in relation with human health. Vitamins: Structure and function of fat and water soluble vitamins. Reactive oxygen species and their generation, scavenging mechanism, enzymatic and non- enzymatic components of antioxidative defence mechanism. Calcium modulation. Unit III Composition, functions and regulation of saliva, gastric, pancreatic, intestinal and bile secretions.Digestion and absorption of carbohydrates, lipids, proteins and nucleic acids. Air passages and lung structure, pulmonary volumes, alveolar surface tension, work of breathing and its regulation. Unit IV Neurophysiology-Excitation and conduction, generation and conduction of action potential, saltatory conduction, ion channels and transport of ions. Synaptic transmission, Neurotransmitters and Neurohormones – chemistry, synthesis, storage and release. Blood Brain CSF barrier– Characteristics, transport systems. Sensory receptors. Unit V Structure of nephron, glomerular filtration, tubular reabsorption of glucose, water and electrolytes. Tubular secretion. Homeostatic regulation of water and electrolytes, Acid-base balance. Secretion and functions of hormones of thyroid, pituitary and gonads. Role of hormones in reproduction and pregnancy. Mechanism of action of hormones.

References 1. Principles of Biochemistry- Lehniger (2000) Nelson & Co., CBS Publishers & Distributors, Delhi-110032. CBS ISBN, 81-239-0295-6. 2. Harpers Biochemistry – Robert K.Muuay., Daryl.K.Granner., Peter.A.Mayes., & Victor.W.Rodwell (2004) Prentice Hall International, ISBN-8385-3612-3. 3. Elements of Biochemistry (2006) – H.S. Srivastava, Rastogi Publications, Meerut. 4. Animal function- Principles and adaptation- Gordon, S. Malean, et al., (2000) The Macmillan Company. 5. Text book of Physiology and Biochemistry – Bell, Davidsar.

413

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS)

CHENNAI – 600 004

DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY

M. Sc. and M.Phil. SYLLABUS

2018-2019 onwards

414

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

Title of the papers for syllabus effect from the academic year 2018-19

S.N Paper Title of the paper Code UE IA Tot C o No. No al

1 I ALGAE AND BRYOPHYTES. 75 25 100 4

II MYCOLOGY AND PLANT PATHOLOGY. 75 25 100 4

III PTERIDOPHYTES, GYMNOSPERMS AND PALEOBOTANY. 75 25 100 4

IV CELL BIOLOGY, MOLECULAR BIOLOGY AND 75 25 100 4 BIOINFORMATICS.

V PRACTICAL I (COVERING CORE PAPERS I,II & III) 75 25 100 4

2 VI ANGIOSPERM ANATOMY, MICROTECHNIQUE & 75 25 100 4 HISTOCHEMISTRY.

VII EMBRYOLOGY AND PALYNOLOGY. 75 25 100 4

VIII PRACTICAL II (COVERING CORE PAPERS IV,VI & VII) 75 25 100 4

415

IX CORE ELECTIVE I- INSTRUMENTATION. 75 25 100 3

X CORE ELECTIVE II- MICROBIAL TECHNOLOGY AND 75 25 100 3 BIOSTATISTICS.

XI EDE I - HERBAL BEAUTY THERAPY. 75 25 100 3

3 XII TAXONOMY OF ANGIOSPERMS. 75 25 100 4

XIII GENETICS, EVOLUTION AND PLANT BREEDING. 75 25 100 4

XIV PRACTICAL III(COVERING CORE 75 25 100 4 PAPERS XII& XIII)

XV CORE ELECTIVE III-GENE CLONING AND GENE THERAPY. 75 25 100 3

XVI CORE ELECTIVE IV-HERBAL SCIENCE 75 25 100 3

XVII EDE II-GARDENING AND LANDSCAPING. 75 25 100 3

4 XVIII PLANT PHYSIOLOGY AND BIOCHEMISTRY. 75 25 100 4

XIX ECOLOGY, REMOTE SENSING AND PHYTOGEOGRAPHY. 75 25 100 4

XX PROJECT 75 25 100 4

XXI PRACTICAL IV(COVERING CORE PAPERS XVIII, XIX) 75 25 100 4

XXII CORE ELECTIVE V- PLANT BASED MICROENTERPRISES 75 25 100 3

Controller of Examinations Signature of H.O.D

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch V - BOTANY SYLLABUS

Soft Skills Courses

416

Semester Paper Title of the Papers Subject UE I A Total Credit

code

I I English for Life and 75 25 100 2 Communication skills

II II Career English and 75 25 100 2 Behavioral Skills

III III Life Coping Skills for 75 25 100 2 success

IV IV Employability Skills 75 25 100 2

II II INTERNSHIP PINTN 100 2

417

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

PART – A 5 x 2 = 10

ANSWER IN 50 WORDS NO CHOICE

PART – B 5 x 4 = 20

ANSWER IN 200 WORDS INTERNAL CHOICE EITHER OR

PART – C 3 x 15 = 45

ANSWER IN 1500 WORDS CHOICE 3 OUT OF 5

INTERNAL ASSESMENT 25 (TEST 5, SEMINAR 5, ASSIGNMENT 5, MODEL EXAM 10)

SEMSTER EXAMINATION 75

TOTAL 100

418

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch V - BOTANY SYLLABUS

ALGAE AND BRYOPHYTES

Semester I

Paper No. CORE I Credits 4

Hours. 6/week CODE No:

OBJECTIVES

To study about lower plants. This paper imparts the knowledge about the occurrence, distribution, structure and life history of lower plants such as algae and bryophytes.

ALGAE

UNIT I

Classification of algae by Fritsch (1935). General characteristics for classification. Diagnostic characters of different classes of algae Chlorophyceae, Bacillariophyceae, Euglenophyceae, Phaeophyceae, Rhodophyceae and Cyanophyceae.

UNIT II

Structure , reproduction and life cycle of Ulva, codium, cyclotella, Dictyota, Gracillaria and oscillatoria. Ecology of algae. Algae of hot springs, Marine ice algae, Epiphytes, Soil algae symbiotic association of algae.

BRYOPHYTES

419

UNIT III

Reimer’s classification of Bryophytes. (1954) general characteristics for classification. Diagnostic characters of different classes of bryophytes. Comparative structural, organization of the vegetative and reproductive organs at class level.

UNIT IV

Alteration of Generation (life cycle in bryophytes)- Origin of bryophytes , Ecology of Bryophytes, vegetative reproduction in bryophytes, economic importance of bryophytes. Structure ,reproduction and life cycle of Targionia, Anthoceros and Polytrichum.

UNIT V

Algae in medicine- human food- - phycocolloids, toxic seawed, pollution and algae. Biofertilizers, Blue green algae , Soil reclamation, Algalisation. Application of sphagnum in horticulture peat beds, air layering.

LEARNING OUTCOME: Students can able to identify various algae, know the technologies to culture algae and their biological importance. They can learn the ecological importance of bryophytes also.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Kumar, H.D.1999. Introductory Phycology, Affiliated East West Press Ltd., New Delhi. 2. Vasishta, B.R. 1996. Bryophyta, S. Chand & Co. Ltd. New Deihi. 3. Bilgrimi, K.S. and L.C. Saha.1992. A Text Book of Algae. CBS publishers Delhi. 4. South, G.R. and A. Whittick.1987. Introduction to Phycology. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford. 5. Dubey, R.C. 2002. A Text Book of Biotechnology, S. Chand and Company Ltd., Ram Nagar, New Delhi- 110055 6. Parihar, N.S. 1985. Bryophytes, Indian University Press Allahabad 7. Clarke, G.C.S. and Duchetl, 1979. Bryophytes Systematics, Academic Press.

420

8. Cavers, I. 1990. The inter relationships of Bryophyta. 9. Prempuri, 1990. Bryophytes – Morphology, growth and differentiation 10. Vashishta, B.R. 1992. Bryophyta, Chand and Company Ltd.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

MYCOLOGY AND PLANT PATHOLOGY

Semester I

Paper No. CORE II Credits 4

Hours. 6 CODE No:

OBJECTIVES

The paper deals with the thallus structure and reproduction of fungus and their economic importance. This paper also gives knowledge on pathogens causing diseases in plants and their mode of action.

MYCOLOGY

Unit I

Classification of Fungi (Alexopoulos, 1962). A brief study on the salient features of structure and reproduction of different classes of fungi (No Type Study)

421

Unit II

Heterothalisum in fungi, Sexuality in fungi, Parasexuality ,sex hormones in fungi Cultivation of mushroom-Pleurotus, Economic importance of fungi.

Structure and reproduction and life history of the following genera:

Ascomycetes : Taphrina

Basidiomycetes : Polyporus

PLANT PATHOLOGY

UNIT III

Infection process – Direct and indirect methods of entry of pathogen. Host plant defense – structural and biochemical barriers, pre-existing and pathogen induced barriers. Plant pathogen in offence – enzymes, toxins and growth regulators, phytoalexins.

UNIT IV

Plant disease control measures – Quarantine, cultural practices, biological control and fungicide protection.

422

UNIT V

A study of symptoms, causal organism and control measures of the following diseases : Blast disease of rice, Bacterial leaf blight of rice, smut of maize, Late blight of potato, Little leaf of brinjal, Tikka disease of groundnut, Wilt of cotton, Leaf curl of peach, Citrus canker and Tobacco mosaic virus.

LEARNING OUTCOME: The students will gain basic knowledge of morphology, reproduction and the economic importance of fungi. By studying plant pathology they can understand the various infections occurred in plants and the mechanism of infections and also control measures of plant diseases.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Paul, Y.S., 2012. Text book of Mycology and Plant Pathology, Kalyani

Publishers.

2. Sambamurthy, A.V.S.S., 2008. Mycology and Plant Pathology, ISBN – 10.

3. Alexopolous, G.J and G.W Mims (1983) Introductory Mycology, 3rd Welay

Eastern, Reprint, April 1986.

4. Burnett, J.H. 1976, Fundamental of Mycology, Edward Arnold Publishers,

London.

5. Mundkur, B.B. 1953. Fungi and Plant Diseases Macmillan Company Ltd.,

London

423

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch V - BOTANY SYLLABUS

PTERIDOPHYTES, GYMNOSPERMS AND PALEOBOTANY

Semester No. I

Paper No. Core III Credits 4

Hrs. 6/week Code No:

OBJECTIVES

This paper imparts the knowledge about the occurrence, distribution, structure and life history of Pteridophytes and Gymnosperms besides adequate information about Paleobotany

PTERIDOPHYTES

UNIT I

Reimer’s classification of Pteridophytes (1954). Criteria for classification. Comparative structural organization of the vegetative and reproductive organs at order level.

424

UNIT II

Alternation of generation, origin of sporophytes, origin of Pteridophytes, Apogamy, Apospory Ecology of pteridophytes. Evolution of stele and heterospory and seed habit.

UNIT III

Origin of vascular cryptogams. Economic importance of Pteridophytes . Azolla as biofertilizer, mass cultivation of Azolla.

GYMNOSPERMS

UNIT IV

K.R. Sporne’s classification of Gymnosperms, criteria for classification. Comparative structural organization of the vegetative and reproductive organs of the classes. Cycadopsida, Coniferopsida and Gnetopsida. Distribution and economic importance of Gymnosperms.

PALEOBOTANY

UNIT V

Geological time scale. Methods of fossilization. Types of fossils – Fossil forms – Sphenophyllum, Botryopteris, Lepidostrobus and Calamostrachys.

425

LEARNING OUTCOME: Students could gain knowledge about the occurrence, distribution, structure, anatomy and life history of pteridophytes and gymnosperms. They can also learn about the economic importance of pteridophytes and gymnosperms. They could learn about the fossils and its types.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Vashista, P.C., Sinha, A.K., Kumar, 2010. Pteridophyta, S.Chand, New Delhi,

India.

2. Sambamurthy A.V.S.S. 2006. A Text book of Bryophytes, Pteridophytes and

Paleobotany. I K International Publishing house Pvt.Ltd.

4. Vashista.P.C. 2003. Gymnosperms. S.Chand & Co Ltd., New Delhi.

5. Dubey, R.C. 2002. A textbook of Pteridophytes. S.Chand and Co.

6. Sharma, O.P. 2001. Gymnosperms. Pragoti Prakashan, Meerut.

7. Rashid, A. 1999. An Introduction to Pteridophyta, Vikas Publication House Pvt.

Ltd., New Delhi.

8. Steward, W.N. 1983. Paleobotany and the evolution of plants, Cambridge Univ.

Press, London.

9. Vashista, B.R. 1987. Gymnosperms, Chand and Co.

10. Mitra, J.N. Mitra, D. and Chandhuri, S.K. 1990. Studies in Botany.

426

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

CELL BIOLOGY, MOLECULAR BIOLOGY AND BIOINFORMATICS

Semester No. I

Paper No. Core IV Credits 4

Hours. 6/week Code No:

OBJECTIVES

The paper deals with the structure and function of plant cell, DNA replication, transcription and the use of computers in molecular biology.

Unit I

Concept of prokaryote and Eukaryote. Ultrastructure and functions of plasma membrane, chloroplast, mitochondria, ribosome, Golgi, Nucleus. Cell signaling. Cell cycle, mitotic and meiotic cycle and its significance.

Unit II

427

Nucleic acids and types. Base pair rule, wobble hypothesis. Plasmid-pBR322. Nucleases, restriction endonucleases, palindrome, RFLP, Southern hybridization, dot blot hydridization.

Unit III

DNA replication (prokaryotes and eukaryotes), enzymes involved in replication, DNA repair. DNA sequencing. Transcription, enzymes involved in transcription, post transcription changes, reverse transcription, Translation. overlapping genes.

Unit IV

Recombinant DNA (DNA insertion in to Plasmid). Transformation. Direct and indirect gene transfer. Detection of recombinant molecule, production of gene products from cloned genes. Genome library, cDNA library.

Unit V

Applications of computer in Biology. Database –sequence and structural database (NCBI), DNA (Genbank, EMBL, DDBJ) protein database (Swissport, prosite). Protein prediction, molecular visualization of proteins (RASMOL), phylogenetic analysis, drug targeting, drug discovery, nanotechnology, Rice genome project.

428

LEARNING OUTCOME:

Students can understand the structure and functions of various cell organells. Studies on DNA technology and applications of bioinformatics can make the students to develop database techniques in the field of drug discovery, nano technology etc.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Karp, G. 2010. Cell and Molecular Biology: Concepts and Experiments. 6th

Edition. John Wiley & Sons. Inc.

2. Gupta. P.K. 2000. Cell and Molecular Biology, Rastogi Pub. Meerut.

4. Ignacimuthu, S. 2005. Basic Bioinformatics, Narosa publishing house.

5. Lesk, A.M. 2002. Introduction to Bioinformatics. Oxford University press.

6. Rastogi. 1996. Cell and molecular biology. New age international publishers.

7. Elliott, W.H. and Ellioff. 1997. Biochemistry and molecular biology. Oxford.

8. Freifelder D., 1987. Molecular Biology. Narosa publishing house.

9. Rastoji, S.C., Mendiratta,N., Rastogi, P. 2009. Bioinformatics : Methods and

Applications, PHI, Third Edition.

429

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

PRACTICAL I

Semester No. I

Paper No. CORE V Credits 4

Hours. 6 CODE No:

ALGAE, BRYOPHYTES, MYCOLOGY, PLANT PATHOLOGY

PTERIDOPHYTES, GYMNOSPERMS

ALGAE:

External and internal structure of the vegetative and reproductive organs of the following genera Ulva, codium, cyclotella, Dictyota, Gracillaria and oscillatoria.

BRYOPHYTES:

Porella or Pellia, Targionia, Anthoceros, and Polytrichum

MYCOLOGY AND PLANT PATHOLOGY:

430

1. Identification of diseased plant specimens. 2. Field trip to rice research station

PTERIDOPHYTES:

External and internal structure of the vegetative and reproductive organs of the following

Equisetum, Ophioglossum, Isoetes, Osmunda, Adiantum and Marselia

GYMNOSPERMS:

Araucaria, Podocarpus, Cupressus, Ephedra, and Gnetum

Fossils Sphenophyllum, Botryopteris, Lepidostrobus and Calamostachys.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

ANGIOSPERM ANATOMY, MICROTECHNIQUES AND HISTOCHEMISTRY

431

Semester No. II

Paper No. 7 CORE VI Credits 4

Hours. 6 CODE No:

OBJECTIVE

The paper deals with the anatomical features of plants. Preparation of permanent slides, staining, histochemistry is dealt with staining of tissue to identify the distribution of biomolecules in the cells.

UNIT I

Cell wall, ultra structure, components and functions of the cell wall, plasmodesmata and pits. Microscopic structure of the cell wall – crassulae, trabeculae, warts- meristems: classification, theories regarding shoot and root. Vascular cambium: composition, organization and seasonal activity and cork cambium, polyderm and rhytidome – wound periderm.

UNIT II

Xylem: Concept of protoxylem and metaxylem, primary xylem and secondary xylem. Structural characteristics and variations of the tissue components. Reaction xylem- tension and compression wood. Porous wood, non-porous wood. Heart

432

wood and sap wood. Dendrochronology. Phloem: Concept of protophloem and metaphloem. Primary and secondary phloem.

UNIT III

Anomalous secondary growth in dicots and arborescent monocots- primary thickening meristem in palms. Leaf structure based on symmetry, environment and photosynthetic types. Stomata, senescence and abscission. Secretory tissues- structure, classification and significance.

UNIT IV

Specimen preparation: Free hand section, clearing and whole mounts. Squashes, smears and maceration. Serial sections. Wax embedded sections, Ultra thin sections. Fixatives – Types FAA (Formalin acetic acid alcohol), formaldehyde and glutaraldehyde fixative (double fixative) Osmium tetraoxide. Importance of mordants in staining.

UNIT V

Classification and chemistry of biological stains. Bright field dyes and fluorochromes. General stain. Specific stain, Monochromatic stain and metachromatic stain. Acidic stain, basic stain, Neutral stain, vital stain, negative stain. Mountants, glycerine jelly, Canada balsam and DPX. Types of mounting – temporary, semi permanent and permanent.

Histochemistry – Definition, detection and localization of structural and storage components in plants using specific dyes and fluorochromes – starch, protein and lipid.

433

LEARNING OUTCOME: By learning anatomy the students can understand the internal structure of plant cells and their different stages of growth and the formation of wood. They can learn the staining techniques and fixing of plant materials.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Vasishita , P.C. 2001. Taxonomy of Angiosperms, S.chand Publications.

2. Pandey, B.P. 2007. Taxonomy of Angiosperms, S. Chand publishers.

3. Sambamurthy, A.V.S.S., 2010. Taxonomy of Angiosperms, Vedams Books

International.

4. Fahn, A. 1989. Plant anatomy. Pergamon Press, Oxford, London.

5. Jain, S.P. 1998. Anatomy of seed plants. Rastogi publications. Meerut, India

6. Clark, G. 1981. Staining procedures. Williams and Wilkins. Baltimore

7. Krishnamurthy, K.V. 1988. Methods in plant histochemistry. S. Viswanathan

Printers and publishers pvt. limited, Chennai.

8. Kierman, J.A. 1999. Histological and histochemical methods. Butterworth

Publications, London.

434

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

EMBRYOLOGY AND PALYNOLOGY

Semester No. II

Paper No. CORE VII Credits 4

Hours. 6/ Week CODE No:

OBJECTIVES

The paper deals with the reproductive biology of the higher plants. The students are also introduced to pollen morphology, pollen allergy and aerobiology.

UNIT I

Microsporogenesis: Tapetum – types, ultrastructure and functions, Microgametogenesis: ultrastructure of the components of male gamete, sperm dimorphism, preparation of pollen by acetolysis. Megasporogenesis: classification of embryo sac, ultra structure of the components of embryo sac, nutrition of the embryosac. Role of callose in relation to microsporogenesis, pollen tube and megasporogenesis.

UNIT II

435

Significance of pollen – pistil interactions, self incompatibility and interspecific incompatibility, methods to overcome incompatibility, recognition – rejection reaction, role of extracellular proteins in pollen, stigma and style. Double fertilization –discharge and movement of sperms, differential behavior of sperms syngamy and triple fusion, polyspermy and hetero fertilization.

UNIT III

Embryogenesis of dicot embryo, monocot embryo and chimeric embryo. Nutrition of embryo, structure, cytology and functions of suspensor. Types of endosperm, cytology of endosperm, polyembryogeny, apomixis and its importance, Parthenocarpy.

UNIT IV

Pollen morphology: Pollen units, pollen viability and storage, pollen bank, pollen sterility, polarity, symmetry, shape and size, aperture, structure and types, NPC system. Pollen wall ultra structure and development, exine sculpturing, chemistry and functions of sporopollenin and pollenkit.

UNIT V

436

Applied palynology: Aeropalynology – Methods of aerospora survey and analysis. Latro palynology-pollen allergy and pollen calendar. Melliso palynology – Quantitative and qualitative pollen analysis of honey, pollen load. Paleopalynology – Role in coal and oil explorations. Forensic palynology, palynology and taxonomy.

LEARNING OUTCOME: Students would learn the morphology of pollen, pollen inability, storage, pollen bank etc. They gain more knowledge on Microsporogenesis, Megasporogenesis, Embryogenesis, Reproductive biology and Applied Palynology. They can learn to classify the plants based on pollen structure.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Amal Kumar Mondal. 2005. Advanced plant taxonomy. New central book agency. Kolkatta.

2. Bhojwani, S.S. and Bhatnagar, S.P. 2011. Embeyology of Angiosperms. Vikas

Pub. House Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.

3. Kashinath Bhattacharya,2011.A Text book of Palynology, New central book

Agency.

4. Johri, B.M. 1984. Embryology of Angiosperms. Springer Verlag, New York.

Kasinath Bhattacharya 2006. A textbook of palynology, New central book agency, Kolkatta.

5. Maheswari, P. 1991. An introduction to the embryology of Angiosperms.

TataMcGraw Hill pub. Co. ltd.

6. Malik, C.P. 1996. Pollen spore research emerging strategies. Today and tomorrow’s printers and publishers, New Delhi.

437

7. Moore, P.D. and Webb. 1978. An illustrated guide to pollen analysis. Hooder and Stoughton Ltd. London.

8. Shukla, A.K. Vijayaragavan, M.R. and Chaudhry. 1988. Biology of pollen. APH publication, New Delhi.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

PRACTICAL II

Semester No. II

Paper No. Core VIII Credits 4

Hours. 6 Code No:

CELL BIOLOGY, MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, BIOINFORMATICS

Identification of cell organelles from charts/photographs

Identification of different stages of mitosis using squash technique.

Identification of different stages of meiosis using smear technique.

Isolation of genomic DNA.

Electrophoresis of nucleic acid.

Preparation of competent E.coli cells.

Transformation and recovery of plasmid clones.

438

Isolation of plasmid DNA.

Southern blot.

Internet, e-mail.

Database search techniques.

Searching and retrieval of protein and DNA sequences.

Molecular visualization of proteins.

ANGIOSPERM ANATOMY, MICROTECHNIQUE, HISTOCHEMISTRY

Laboratory work planned on the basis of topics listed under anatomy theory.

Preparation of ten permanent double stained slides.

Microslide preparation and identification of stomata.

Detection and localization of some storage components in plants using specific dyes.

EMBRYOLOGY AND PALYNOLOGY

T.S. of anther – various stages of microsporogenesis (Permanent slide)

L.S. of ovule – various stages of megagametogenesis

Dicot embryo- various stages of development.

Monot embryo –various stages of development.

Mounting of Pollinia anddicot embryo .

Pollen grain morphology- size, shape and exine sculpturing.

439

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

INSTRUMENTATION

Semester No. II

Paper No. Elective I Credits 3

Hours.4/ Week Code No:

OBJECTIVES

The paper deals with various research methods adopted in biological sciences. The working principles of various instruments are introduced

Unit I

Microscopy- simple, compound, binocular, phase contrast, interference, polarizing, dark field, ultraviolet, fluorescent microscopes. Microtome and types. Electron microscope – SEM, TEM. Micrometry, haemocytometer.

Unit II

440

Buffer (phosphate, acetate buffer), pH, Principles and applications of - pH meter – electrode, digital, oxygen electrode, cell fractionation, homogenizers, sonication.

UNIT III

Centrifugation – principles and applications. Types of centrifuges. Types of centrifugation methods (differential, density gradient).

UNIT IV

Separation techniques -Chromatography – principle, paper, thin layer, column chromatography, HPLC, Ion exchange chromatography, . Electrophoresis –polyacrylamide -PAGE, SDS- agarose.

441

UNIT V

Spectrophotometer, fluorimeter, luminometer – principle, working mechanism and its application.

LEARNING OUTCOME: Students can learn the biological techniques, principles and working mechanism of various instruments used in the field of biology and their applications.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Wilson and Goulding, 1987. Principles of biochemical techniques, Oxford University Press.

2. Jayaraman , J. Introduction to biochemical techniques..

3. Verma, P.K. 1995 Plant physiology and biochemistry.

4. Lehninger, A.L., Nelson, D.L. and Cox, M.M. 2000. Principles of

Biochemistry, CBS Publishers, New Delhi.

5. Research Methodology. 2006. N.Gurumani.

6. Stryer, L.1999. Biochemistry, N.H. Freeman &Co., New York.

442

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

MICROBIAL TECHNOLOGY AND BIOSTATISTICS

Semester No. II

Paper No. Elective II Credits 3

Hours. 4/ Week Code No:

OBJECTIVES

The course deals with the basic knowledge about the microbes. Information is provided about the food microbiology. It also deals with the importance of microbes in industry and agriculture. Biostatistics promotes analysis of various biological problems using statistical variations.

INDUSTRIAL MICROBIOLOGY

UNIT I

Industrial fermentation – Types of bioreactors – Inoculum development – Scaling up process from shake flask to industrial fermentation – Recovery and purification of intracellular and extracellular products.

UNIT II

Microbial production of antibiotics – Penicillin, Streptomycin – Organic acid – Lactic acid, Citric acid, Vitamin B12 – Amino acid – Lysine – Enzyme – Amylase

ENVIRONMENTAL MICROBIOLOGY

443

UNIT III

Microbes in terrestrial, aquatic, - microbes in the extreme environments and their adaptations ; methods for the determination of microbial numbers, biomass and activities. Significance of microbial activities in the environment. Microbial degradation of pesticides, petroleum hydrocarbons, Fate of GMM.

AGRICULTURAL MICROBIOLOGY

UNIT IV

Production of bacterial bioferilizers – criteria for strain selection – preparation of biofertilizer. Mass cultivation of Azotobacter, Azospirillum, Phophate biofertilizer. Production of mycorrizal biofertilizers. Microbial herbicide, Bacterial insecticides ( Bacillus thuringenesis) ; viral insecticides and endo pathogenic fungi.

UNIT V

STATISTICAL METHODS: Measures of central tendency ( Mean , Median , Mode ) and dispersal (Mean deviation , standard deviation ) , standard errors, levels of significance, Chi square test, ANOVA ( One way).

LEARNING OUTCOME: Students would gain basic knowledge on microbes involved in various fields such as environmental degradation processes, industrial production of chemicals, antibiotics and in agriculture. Learning statistical analysis would be helpful for the students research work to analyse the problems statistically.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Ananthanarayan and Paniker, 2006. Text book of Microbiology, Orient Blackswan, 7th edition. 2. Pelczar,M. Microbiology, E.C.S. Chan and N.R. Krieg, Tata McGraw-Hil.

444

3. Rangaswami, G. Bagyaraj,D.J., Bagyaraj., D.G. 2005. Agricultural Microbiology, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 4. Stanbury, P.F., Whitaker, A. and Hall, 1995.Principles of fermentation technology. 5. Cruger, A text book of Industrial microbiology. 6. Ingraham, J and C. Ingraham, 1995.Introduction to Microbiology, Belmont, CA : Wadsworth. 7. Patel, A.H.Text book industrial microbiology. 8. T.D. Brock, M.T. Madison, J.M. Martinko and J. Parker, 1994, Biology of Microorganism 7th ed. Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice hall.

445

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

HERBAL BEAUTY THERAPY

Semester No. II

Paper No. EDE 1 Credits 3

Hours. 4 Code No:

OBJECTIVES

The importance of herbs in herbal treatment and beauty care is discussed in this paper.

UNIT I

History, role of aroma oils in human life – A brief knowledge about few aroma oils – A detailed study of biological source, morphological characters, chemical constituents, properties and uses. Aroma oils - Ylang Ylang oil – Sandalwood oil – Lavender oil – Tea tree oil – Eucalyptus oil.

UNIT II

446

A brief knowledge about few and base oils - A detailed study of biological source, morphological characters, chemical constituents, properties and uses. Base oils – Sesame oil – Neem oil – Castor oil – Sunflower oil – Olive oil.

UNIT III

Herbal therapy – A brief classification of the plant kingdom. Morphological characters, chemical constituents, properties and uses of the following herbal plants. – Hibiscus rosa-sinensis, Carica papaya, Lawsonia alba, Trigonella foenum graecum. Emblica officinalis, Murraya koenigii, Cyanodon dactylon, Cucumis sativus, Curcuma longa, Vettiveria zizanoides.

447

UNIT IV

Human skin types and nature, Human hair and nail structure and types. Few beauty techniques – Massage therapy, facials, pedicure and manicure, mehendi art.

UNIT V

Common beauty problems and herbal remedies – pimples, prickly heat, sun tan, under eye dark circle, wrinkles, hair fall, premature greying, alopecia, dandruff, pigmentation.

LEARNING OUTCOME: Students can understand the chemical constituents of herbs and their applications. This study develops beauty conscious of individuals and remedy for their problem.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Audrey Davis Sivasothy, 2012. Hair care rehab. The ultimate hair repair and reconditioning manual, Saja Publishing Company, LLC.

2. Blossom Kochar, 2002. Hair, Skin and Beauty Care. The complete body book,

VBS Publishers, New Delhi.

3. Meenakhi Sinha, Reena Rajgopal, Suchismita Banerjee, 2000. All you wanted to

448

know about Hair Care, Sterling Publishers Pvt.Ltd. New Delhi.

4. Parvesh Handa, Herbal beauty care, A orient paperback pvt. Ltd.

5. Penny Rich, Practical aroma therapy, Paragon book service Ltd, Bristol.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

TAXONOMY OF ANGIOSPERMS

Semester No: III

Paper No: CORE IX Credits 4

Hours: 6/ Week CODE No:

OBJECTIVES

The classification of flowering plants and their technical description are taught in this paper. The economic importance of the flowering plants are discussed.

UNIT I

Botanical exploration and contribution with special reference to India by William Roxburgh, J.D. Hooker, Robert Wright, Nathanial Wallich and Gamble, J.S. Principles of classification as proposed – Artificial – Linnaeus, Natural – Bentham

449

and Hooker, Phylogenetic system - Hutchinson, Modern – Takhtajan. Botanical gardens and herbaria of world, preparation and maintenance of Herbarium, Botanical survey of India – its organization and role.

UNIT II

Modern trends in taxonomy, chemotaxonomy, numerical taxonomy, biosystemics. ICBN uninominal systems- genesis binomial nomenclature, importance and principle. Important articles, typification, principles of priority, effective and valid publication, author citation, recommendations and amendents of code. Glossories and dictionaries, Taxonomic literature (Index Kewensis)

UNIT III

Polypetalae – Nympheaceae, Sterculiaceae, Portulaceae, Rhamnaceae, Vitaceae, Sapindaceae, Combretaceae, Turneraceae.

UNIT IV

450

Gamopetalae – Sapotaceae, Oleaceae, Boraginaceae, Scrophulariaceae, Bignoniaceae, Convolvulaceae, Acanthaceae, Verbenaceae.

UNIT V

Monochlamydeae – Nyctaginaceae, Aristolochiaceae, Casuarinaceae. Monocots – Orchidaceae, Amarylidaceae, Lilliaceae, Commelinaceae, Cyperaceae.

LEARNING OUTCOME: This subject develops the students to identify the plants and their taxonomical classifications. The characteristics and the significance of various plants are studied.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Singh, M.P. 2017. Plant Biodiversity and Taxonomy.

2. Jaspal Juneja, 2009. Fundamentals of Biodiversity Taxonomy.

3. Parhasarathy, N. 2015.Biodiversity of Lianas.

4. Rosell Pellens and Phillippe Grankolas, 2016. Biodiversity Conservation and

Phylogenic systematics.

5. Hutchinson, J. 1973. The families of flowering plants. Oxford University Press,

Oxford.

6. Jaffrey, C. 1973. Biological nomenclature.

451

7. State, C.A. 1989. Plant taxonomy and biosystematics. Edward Arnold, London.

8. Sivaraj, V.V. 1984. Introduction to principles of plant taxonomy. Oxford publishing co. New Delhi.

9. Hutchinson, J. 1969. Evolution and phylogeny of flowering plants.

10. Singh, V and Jain, D.K. 1966. Taxonomy of angiosperms.

452

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

`GENETICS, PLANT BREEDING AND EVOLUTION

Semester No: III

Paper No: CORE X Credits 4

Hours: 6/week Code No:

OBJECTIVES

The genetic basis of inheritance is discussed in this paper. Various genetic disorders are introduced. To impact theoretical knowledge about plant breeding, understanding evolutionary theories and concepts.

UNIT I

Structure of Gene ,Operon , inducible operon , Operator site, Promoter, Polycistronic m RNA, Regulator, regulator constitutive,Regulator super repressor, repressor, super repressor, inducer. Gene function and regulation in prokaryotes with reference to Lac operon and trp operon. Producer gene , structural gene and integrator gene. Gene Regulation eukaryotes –Britten and Davidson model, Arabidopsis- gene regulation in flowering.

UNIT II

453

Recombination: Homologous and non-homologous recombination, site-specific recombination. Holiday model of recombination.Transposable genetic elements: Ac element, transposase, transposon, simple transposon, composite transposon, Is element. Transposons in Zea mays. Transposable elements in prokaryotes. UV induced mutation and its repair mechanism. Mismatch DNA repair mechanism. Mutation types- frame shift mutation, addition, deletion, substitution, transition and transversion. Xeroderma pigmentosum.

UNIT III

ABO blood group in humans. QTL mapping, Gene mapping methods: Linkage maps, tetrad analysis, mapping with molecular markers ,mapping by using somatic cell hybrids. Extra chromosomal inheritance, maternal inheritance. Organelle genomes : Organization and functions of chloroplast and mitochondrial DNA.

PLANT BREEDING

UNIT IV

Objectives of plant breeding, characteristics improved by plant breeding, Genetic basis of breeding self and cross – pollinated crops. Pure line theory, pure line selection and mass selection, clonal selection methods. Hybridization ,Genetics and physiological basis of heterosis.

EVOLUTION

UNIT V

454

Lamack, Darwin concepts of variation, adaptation, struggle, filters and natural selection. Isolation mechanisms – Speciation, Allopatricity and Sympatricity, Convengent evolution,Co-evolution, the evolutionary time scale.

LEARNING OUTCOME: The students can understand the basics of mendelian inheritance and their genetic interaction. They will develop an understanding of plant breeding techniques and concepts of evolution.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Watson, J.D. et al. 2003. Molecular Biology of the Gene. Fourth Edition. The

Benjamin Cummings Pub. Co.

2. Lewin, B. 2003. Genes VIII. Oxford University Press.

3. Lewin, B. 2001. Genes VII. Oxford University Press.

4. Friefelder,D. 2005. Molecular Biology. Second Edition. Narosa Pub.

House.

5. Lewin, B. 1994. Genes V. Oxford University Press.

6. Sobtir.C. and Gobe. 1991. Eukaryotic chromosomes. Narosa Publishing house.

7. Smith-Keary, P. 1991. Molecular Genetics. Macmillan Pub. Co. Ltd.

London.

8. Acquaah, G.2007. Principles of Plant Genetics and Breeding. Blackwell

455

Publishing.

9. William.S., Klug and Michael, R. Cummings, 2003. Concepts of Genetics.

Seventh edition. Pearson Education (Singapore)Pvt.Ltd.

10. Singh, B.D. 2006. Plant Breeding, Kalyani Publishers.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

PRACTICAL PAPER III

Semester No: III

Paper No: CORE XI Credits 4

Hours: 6 CODE NO:

TAXONOMY OF ANGIOSPERMS

Description of species based on a collection of both herbarium and live specimens.

Description of genus based on not less than five different species of the genus.

Identification of key characters both qualitative and quantitative preparations and use of key at genetic and specific level.

Diagnostic characters of families and their uses in the preparation of the key.

456

Herbarium technique with special reference to theory plants, succulents and aquatic plants.

Field visits for atleast 7 days to collect specimens in and outside the state and on the spot study of vegetation. Submission of not less than 30 herbarium sheets representing families studied.

Study of the diagnostic features of the taxa of different families mentioned in the theory.

Construction of floral diagrams and floral formula.

GENETICS

Problems in lac operon.

Problems in three point test cross and order of genes.

Problems in ABO blood groups in humans.

Problems in mutation

Spotters.

457

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

GENE CLONING AND GENE THERAPY

Semester No: III

Paper No: ELECTIVE III Credits 3

Hours: 4/week CODE NO:

OBJECTIVES

To give a clear knowledge of genetic engineering, cloning vectors, enzymes involved in cloning. To understand the procedure involved in recombinant DNA technology and restriction mapping. To focus on the application of gene cloning in plants and animals.

Unit I

Definition of genetic engineering, gene cloning and recombinant DNA cloning vectors: plasmids, bacteriophages, plant and animal vectors.

Unit II

458

Gene cloning in prokaryotes and eukaryotes, Isolation of DNA to be cloned, insertion of DNA fragment into vector. Use of Restriction Linkers: use of Homopolyer tails, Transfer of recombinant DNA into Bacteria cell. Selection of clones.

Unit III

Gene Therapy: Definition, Germ cell and Somatic cell. Amniocentesis in human; patient therapy, embryo therapy.

Unit IV

Restriction mapping –. Random amplified polymorphic DNA using PCR. DNA finger printing; Gene Tagging. Physical methods of gene delivery. Gene transfer techniques.. Genetic counselling – Eugenics, .

Unit V

Transgenic plants with herbicide resistance, insect resistance, virus resistance and resistance against bacterial and fungal pathogens. Transgenic plants for hybrid seed production and molecular farming.

459

LEARNING OUTCOME: The students would gain knowledge about Molecular biology and Gene therapy. They can learn about the techniques such as PCR, Gene gun, RAPD.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Neal Stewart, Jr. 2008. Plant Biotechnology and Genetics: Principles, Techniques and Applications. JohnWiley&sons Inc. 2. Smith. J.K. 1996. Biotechnology – 3rd Ed. Cambridge Univ. Press, Cambridge. 3. Khan. I.A. and A. Khanum .2004. Fundamentals of Biotechnology – Forensic Science Genetic Engineering. Ukaaz publication, Hyderabad. 4. Trehan. K.,1997. Biotechnology. New age International (p) limited publishers, Chennai. 5. Ignacimuthu, S.1998. Plant Biotechnology. Tata Mc Graw Hill, publishing company Ltd., New Delhi. 6. Gupta. P.K. 1998. Elements of Biotechnology. Rastogi publications, Meerut. 7. Dubey. R.C. 1993. A text Book of Biotechnology. 8. Ignacimuthu, S.1998. Applied Plant Biotechnology. Tata Mc Graw Hill, publishing company Ltd., New Delhi.

460

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

HERBAL SCIENCE

Semester No: III

Paper No: Elective IV Credits 3

Hours: 4/week Code No:

OBJECTIVES

To study about cultivation, extraction and preservation of crude drugs obtained from herbs which are used in pharmaceuticals. To understand the morphology and biochemistry of various herbal plants..

UNIT I

A general account of cultivation, collection, drying and preservation of crude drugs and medicinal plants. Adulteration of drugs, types of adulteration and detection methods.

UNIT II

461

A general account on poisonous plants. Thevettia nerifolia, Strychnos nux-vomica, Calotropis gigantea, Abrus precatorius.

UNIT III

Extraction and isolation of pharmaceutically important plant constituents, Chromatographic and Spectroscopic techniques. Screening and verification of medicinal value of plant parts by in vitro studies.

UNIT IV

A detailed account on the distribution, morphology and biochemistry of the useful parts of the following.

1.Rhizome – Curcuma longa, Acorus calamus.

2.Leaves – Ocimum sanctum, Acalypha indica.

3.Seeds – Trigonella foenum graecum, Piper nigrum.

4.Flower – Eugenia caryophillata, Crocus sativus.

UNIT V

5.Whole plant – Phyllanthus amarus, Mentha arvensis.

6. Root – Rawolfia serpentina, Vettiveria zizanoides.

7. Bark – Chinchona, Cinnamomum.

462

LEARNING OUTCOME: Students can understand the morphology, biochemistry of herbs and various methods of cultivation, collection and preservation of crude drugs extracted from herbal plants. They can learn to identify the adulteration of herbal products.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Anne Green, 2000. Principles of Ayurveda, Thomsons, London.

2. Kokate et.al., 1999. Pharmacognosy, Nirali Prakashkan.

3. Agnes and Arber, 1999. Herbal Plants and Drugs, Mangal Deep Publications.

4. Faroogi, A.A. and B.S. Sreeramu, 2004. Cultivation of Medicinal and Aromatic

Crops. Univ. Press, Pvt.Ltd., Hydrabad.

5. Rao, A.P. 1999. Herbs that heal. Diamond Pocket Books (P) Ltd. New Delhi.

6. Kumar, N.C. 1993. An introduction to medicinal botany and Pharmagonosy,

Emkay Publications, New Delhi.

463

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

GARDENING AND LANDSCAPING

Semester No. IV

Paper No. EDE II Credits 3

Hours. 4/week CODE No:

OBJECTIVES

To introduce the students to garden equipments, methods and various gardening practices.

UNIT I

1. Importance of creating a garden.

2. Role of environmental factors in plant growth (a) water (b) Temperature (c) Light (d) Soil.

3. Manures and fertilizers (chemical and biofertilizers)

4. Potting and repotting.

464

5. Tools for garden maintenance.

UNIT II

1. Propagation of plant (a) sexual method (b) vegetative method

2. Garden maintenance activities (fertilizing watering, mulching, sodding, weeding, thinning, pruning, staking, supporting).

3. Plant diseases and control measures.

UNIT III

1. Types of gardens.

2. Gardening layout playing and designing.1. Flower garden 2. Kitchen garden. 3. Terrace garden.

465

UNIT IV

Methods of cultivation of the following plants

(a) yielding plant – Brinjal.

(b) Flower yielding plant – rose.

(c) Hanging pot plant - spider plant/ money plant.

(d) Epiphyte – orchids

(e) Fruit yielding plant – Banana.

UNIT V

1.Growing plants indoor. : The indoor environment (a) Lighting (b) Temperature (c) Aeration (d) Water supply (e) disease/pest control.

2.Art of flower arrangement

(a) Arranging flower – flower selection, procuring flowers.

(b)Choosing containers (c) Choosing plants.(d) Design creation (vertical, horizontal, triangular, Japanese Ikebana style.)

LEARNING OUTCOME: Students can learn the various horticultural techniques and they can apply in their surrounding area. They can develop kitchen garden, terrace garden orchids and self employment students are encouraged.

466

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Adams, C.R. Banfor, K.M. and M.P. Early. 1993. Principles of Horticulture.

2. Laura William Rice Robert, P. Rice, J.R. 1997, 1993, 1986. Practical horticulture. Prentice hall

3. Harman, H.T. and D.F. Kestler. 1976. Plant propagation principles and practice.

Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.

3. Rao,K.M. Textbook of horticulture. MacMillan India Ltd. New Delhi.

4. Jules Janick. 1982. Horticulture science. Surjeet Publications, New Delhi.

5. Kumar, N. 1997. Introduction to Horticulture. Rajalakshmi publications,

Nagercoil, Tamil Nadu.

467

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

PLANT PHYSIOLOGY AND BIOCHEMISTRY

Semester No. IV

Paper No. CORE XII Credits 4

Hours. 6/week CODE No:

OBJECTIVES

The paper aims at giving students a comprehensive knowledge and information on the physiological pathway involved in the efficient function fo the plants. The various processes operating in the plant enables to have an overall knowledge of the practical application in relation to agriculture.

UNIT I

Introduction – The scope of plant physiology. Plant and water relation – Molecular structure of water, diffusion, osmosis, components of water potential, Chardakov’s method of determination of water potential. A general account of absorption and translocation of water. Transpiration, various concepts of mechanism of closing and opening of stomata.

468

UNIT II

Photosynthesis- Photosynthetic pigments and its functions An outline of chlorophyll . Mechanism of light reaction. Photophosphorylation. Carbon fixation (Dark reaction) C4 syndrome. Crassulacean acid metabolism. . Factors affecting photosynthesis.

UNIT III

Respiration – Glycolysis, TCA cycle, proton pump concept, mitochondrial electron transport chain, substrate phosphorylation, and oxidative phosphorylation energy yield of glycolysis and TCA. Enzymes- Classification, nomenclature, properties and mechanism of action. Allosteric inhibition.

UNIT IV

Nitrogen fixation – Biological nitrogen fixation Symbiotic and asymbiotic nitrogen fixation, amino acid biosynthesis. Phytohormones - Biosynthesis of phytohormones - auxin, gibberellins, cytokinin, ethylene and abscissic acid. Response of phytohormone to plants.

UNIT V

469

Macromolecules: Carbohydrates, Protein And lipids –Secondary metabolites Classification and biosynthesis of terpenes, Biosynthesis of steroids classification of alkaloids biosynthesis of Quinine, Classification of plant phenols and biosynthesis of anthocyanin.

LEARNING OUTCOME: The student will understand the basic fundamentals of anabolic and catabolic activity of plant cell. They gain knowledge on plant metabolites and the significance of plant hormones.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Sinha, R.K. 2015. Modern Plant Physiology, Narosa Publishing Hons Pvt. Ltd.,

New Delhi.

2. Jain,V.K.2010. Fundamentals of Plant physiology, S.chand & Co., Pvt.Ltd.,

New Delhi.

3. Taiz,L., Zeiger, E. 2010. Plant Physiology, Sinauer Associates Inc., U.S.A. 5th

Edition.

4. Hopkins, W.G., Hunger, N.P., 2009. Introduction to Plant Physiology, John

Wiley & Sons, U.S.A. 4th Edition.

5. Lehninger, A. L., D.l.Nelson and M.M. Cox, 2000. Principles of biochemistry

CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi

6. Salisbury, F.B. and Ross, C.W. 1953. Plant physiology. Wardsworth Publishing

Co., California.

470

7. Stryer, L.1999. Biochemistry, N.H. Freeman &Co., New York.

8. Plant physiology Gupta 2005 oxford &1Bh Publishing.

A textbook of plant physiology Biochemistry & Biotechnology 2008. SK

Verma, Mohit Verma S. Chand

471

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

ECOLOGY, REMOTE SENSING AND PHYTO GEOGRAPHY

Semester No. IV

Paper No. core XIII Credits 4

Hours. 6/week Code No:

OBJECTIVES

To focus on the ecosystem, types, succession and bioindicators. To create awareness on pollution and its control measures. To understand phytogeography, continental drift. To learn remote sensing and its application to botany.

UNIT I

Concept of ecosystem – kinds of ecosystem structure and function of ecosystem. Biogeochemical cycles (Hydrological, carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus and sulpur cycles). Major ecosystems – Marine, forest fresh water ecosystem, micro ecosystems –artificial microecosystem . Homeostasis of ecosystem.

472

UNIT II

Ecological Succession – (causes and effects) Biodiversity and its importance. Concept and theories of climax ,study of vegetation by quadrat method. Edge effect. Bioindicators and environmental management.

UNIT III

Pollution ecology – Definition, detailed study of types, causes and consequences, pollution control through law. Green house Effect, , Asian brown cloud. Alnino effect, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Germplasm banks.

UNIT IV

Principles of Phytogeography – Phytogeography of India and its vegetational types and continental drift. Evidences of continental drift, paleomagnetic, seismic, outline of land masses.

UNIT V

473

Remote sensing – Definition, working principle, application with reference to mapping of water resources, onset of monsoon, denudation of forests. Indian international satellites currently in orbit.

LEARNING OUTCOME: The students gain wide knowledge about their surrounding environment, changes and pollution of ecosystem. They can understand the distribution of vegetation in India, biodiversity and its importance and also the application of remote sensing.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Ambust, R.S 2000, Text book of Plant Ecology, Students, friends and Co. 2. Bhatia, K.N., 2000., A Treatise on plant ecology. Pradeep publications. 3. Kaushik, M.P., Introductory ecology. Jai Prakash Nath & Co. 4. Kumar, H.D., 1998. Modern concepts of Ecology. Vikas publicating house Pvt., Ltd. 5. Kotal, I. & N.P. Bali, concepts of ecology Vishal publications.3 6. Kumerasan, V, 1995. Plant ecology and Phyto geography. Saras publications. 7. Odum, E. 1990. Fundamentals of ecology. W.B.Saunders company. 8. Padhig. S. 1995. Forestry in India. A critical study International Book Distributors. 9. Robinson Glen, O.M. 1980. The forestry service. The John Hopkins University Press. 10. Sharma., P.D. 2000. Elements of Ecology. Rastogi Publications.

474

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

PRACTICAL IV

PLANT PHYSIOLOGY & ECOLOGY

Semester No. IV Paper No. Core XV Credits 4

Hours. 6/week Code No:

PLANT PHYSIOLOGY

Determination of osmotic potential with potato tuber. Determination of osmotic potential by plasmolytic method. Paper chromatography method to separate chloroplast pigments. Thin layer chromatography method to separate chloroplast pigments. Determination of absorption spectra of chlorophyll a and b. Estimation of glucose (plant), amino acid. (plant) and protein (plant). Determination of rate of transpiration. Determination of the effect of NaCl on membrane permeability. Determination of rate of different respiratory substrates. Effect of intensity of light on O2 evolution during photosynthesis using Wilmott’s bubbler. Demonstration Dialysis, Determination of water potential by Chardakov’s method, Determination of RQ.

ECOLOGY

475

Determination of quantitative characters of community by random quadrat method, belt transect method, minimum size, frequency percentage, density and abundance. A minimal one day study trip may be arranged to visit environmental study centres of excellence and or satellite tracking station/ meteorological stations, departments. Morphological, anatomical studies of Hydrophytes – Nelumbium / Nymphaea, hydrilla. Xerophytes – Aloe, Nerium. Mesophytes – Hibiscus, Mango. Psamophytes – Spinifix.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Sc. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

PLANT BASED MICROENTERPRISES

Semester No. IV Paper No. ELECTIVE V Credits 3

Hours. 6/week Code No:

OBJECTIVES

This course provides knowledge about organic farming, soil conditioning, plant propagation with the aim of improving plant growth, yield, quality& nutritional values. To understand the preservation techniques of fruits and vegetables and also cultivation and significance of mushroom.

UNIT I

476

Organic manures and fertilizers. Composition of fertilizer, NPK content of various fertilizers. Common organic manures bone meal, cowdung, poultry waste, oil cakes, organic mixtures and compost. Preparation of compost, aerobic and anaerobic – advantages. Vermicompost preparation, vermiwash. Panchakaviyam.

UNIT II

Common garden tools. Methods of plant propagation by seeds. Vegetative propagation, cutting, grafting, budding and layering. Use of growth regulators for rooting.

UNIT III

Gardening – types of garden, ornamental, indoor garden, kitchen garden, terrace garden, vegetable garden for marketing. Rockery and artificial ponds. Ornamental garden designing, garden components flower beds, borders, hedges, edges, drives, paths, garden adornments.

UNIT IV

477

Packaging of fruits, vegetables. Preservation techniques drying, heat treatment, low temperature storage and by chemicals. Preparation of wine, vinegar and dairy products.

UNIT V

Significance of mushrooms. Types of mushrooms (button mushroom, oyster mushroom). Spawn isolation and preparation. Cultivation. Value added products from mushroom – pickles, candies and dried mushrooms.

LEARNING OUTCOME: Students can acquire knowledge about organic farming and their advantages. They can learn various horticultural techniques and they are motivated to develop kitchen garden or terrace garden in their living area. By knowing mushroom cultivation and horticultural techniques the students can develop self employment and economical improvement.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Adams, C.R. Banford, K.M. and Early, M.P. 1993. Principles of Horticulture. 2. Sathe,T.V. 2004. Vermiculture and Organic farming, Daya Publishers. 3. Peter, K.V. 2017. Basic Horticulture. 4. Hartman, H.T. and D.F. Kestler. 1976. Plant propagation principles and practice. Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. 5. Jules Janick, 1982. Horticulture Science. Surjeet publications, New Delhi. 6. Ignacimuthu, S.1998. Plant Biotechnology. Tata Mc Graw Hill Ltd., New Delhi. 7. Gupta. P.K.,1998. Elements of Biotechnology. Rastogi publications, Meerut. 8. Dubey. R.C.1993. A text Book of Biotechnology.

478

(AUTONOMOUS)

CHENNAI 600 004

M.PHIL. BOTANY

SYLLABUS

(for the students admitted from 2018 - 2019)

479

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Phil. DEGREE – Branch V - BOTANY SYLLABUS

( Effect from the academic year 2018-19)

PAPER NO. TITLE OF THE PAPER CODE NO. MARKS

I Research Methodology. MBY01 100

II Advanced Plant Biotechnology. MBY02 100

III Hydrobiology (Guide paper) MBY03 100

III Mycology (Guide paper) 100

480

III Pharmacognosy (Guide paper) 100

III Environmental Biology (Guide paper) 100

IV DISSERTATION MBY04 100

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Choice to answer 5 out of 8 questions. 5 x 20 = 100

Controller of Examinations Signature of H.O.D.

481

MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Phil. DEGREE – Branch v - BOTANY SYLLABUS

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

PAPER NO. I CODE NO:

OBJECTIVES

The paper deals with various research methods adopted in biological sciences. The working principles of various instruments are introduced.

UNIT – I

Instrumentation, principle and working mechanism of pH meter Haemocytometer. Micrometry: Methods of fractionation- Cell sorting, Centrifugation, Chromatography, Electrophoresis.

UNIT –II

Methods of quantitative analysis- Spectrophotometry, IR, NMR, Radioisotopic methods: Geiger Muller & Liquid Scintillation Counters.

482

UNIT – III

Statistical methods

Presentation of data, frequency, distribution graphical presentation frequency polygon and curve, &cumulative frequency curve. Central tendency and measures of dispersion, mean, mode, median and their properties - Mean deviation, standard deviation and coefficient of variation – ANOVA.

UNIT – IV

Library: - Structure of a scientific library, journals (current and back volumes), books. Catalogue: Types of catalogues - Card catalogue, computerized catalogue

(b) Journals: Indexing journals, abstracting journals, research journals, review journals, e-journals. Impact factor of journals, NCBI-Pub Med.

UNIT – V

Presentation and publication of research outcomes - Preparation of a dissertation: - Consolidation and analysis of data, photographs, illustration, tables and graphs. Preparation of manuscript - introduction, review of literature, materials and methods, results, discussion, bibliography (methods of citing references, arrangement of references), summary

483

(b) Preparation of research paper and short communications.

(c) Preparation of review articles.

(d) Proof reading - standard abbreviations for proof correction.

(e) Presentation of research findings in seminars and workshops.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1.Wilson, and Walker, 2000. Practical Biochemistry, Wiley Eastern, New Delhi.

2.Mahajan, B.K. 1989. Methods in Biostatistics. Jaypee Brothers, New Delhi.

3. Ackerman E A, Ellis L E E, Williams L E (1979). Biophysical Science. Prentice-Hall Inc.

4. Chang R (1971). Basic principles of spectroscopy. McGraw Hill.

5. Pesce A J, Rosen C G, Pasty T L. Fluorescence Spectroscopy: An introduction for Biology and Medicine. Marcel Dakar.

6. Stanford J R (1975). Foundation of Biophysics. Academic press.

7. Henry B Bull (1971). An Introduction to physical biochemistry. F A Devis Co.

8. Perkampus H (1992). UV-VIS Spectroscopy and its applications. Springer-Verlag.

9. Garry D Christian, James E O’reilvy (1986). Instrumentation analysis. Alien and Bacon, Inc.

10. Friefelder D. Physical Biochemistry. W H Freeman and Co.

11. Mahadevan A, Sridhar R (1996). Methods in Physiological Plant Pathology. Sivakmi Publications.

484

12. Salle A J (1974). Fundamental principles of Bacteriology. McGraw Hill.

13. Principles of biochemical techniques.1987. Wilson and Goulding, Oxford University Press.

14.Introduction to biochemical techniques. Jayaraman.

15.Plant physiology and biochemistry. 1995. Verma PK.

16.Biochemistry. Lehninger.

17. Research Methodology. 2006. N.Gurumani.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Phil. DEGREE – Branch V - BOTANY SYLLABUS

ADVANCED PLANT BIOTECHNOLOGY

PAPER NO. II CODE NO:

OBJECTIVES

The biotechnological methods and application oriented topics are covered. Importance of lower organisms in environmental perspective is discussed.

UNIT I

485

Mass cultivation and culturing of macro and micro algae. Algal products of commercial importance of alginate, carageenan and agar. Fuel from algae. Bioremediation. Algal cell culture techniques and their applications in biotechnology.

UNIT II

Fungi -Rhizosphere – rhizoplane and phyllosphere, phylloplane. Antagonism, mycopesticides, mycoherbicide, genetic engineering for strain improvement in fungi. Role of mycorrhizal fungi.

UNIT III

Microbes in the extreme environments and their adaptations methods for the determination of microbial numbers, biomass and activities. Significance of microbial activities in the environment Microbial degradation of pesticides, petroleum and hydrocarbons; Microbial inoculants in agricultural; microbes as biological control agents.

UNIT IV

Cell totipotency, role of growth regulators in tissue culture, organogenesis in vitro, cytodifferentiation, cryopreservation.

UNIT V

Applications of tissue culture in agriculture, applications of tissue culture in horticulture and forestry. Transgenic plants for crop improvement. Molecular farming from transgenic plants. Bioethics in plant genetic engineering.

486

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Alexopoulos, C. J. And Bold, H. C. Algae and Fungi. The Macmillion Co. London 2. Bold, H. C and Wynne, M. J. 1978.Introduction to the Algae: Structure and Function. Prantice Hall of India New Delhi 3. Chapman,V. J. 1962. The Algae. Macmillan and Co. Ltd. New York. 4. Dioxn, P. S. 1973. Biology of Rhodophyta. Hafner Press. New York. 5. Dodge, J. E. The Fine Structure of Algal Cells. AP London 6. Fogg., G. E. 1953. The Metabolism of Algae. Methuen & Co. London 7. Text book industrial microbiology by A.H. patel. 8. Alexopoulos. Introduction to mycology. Wiley Eastern Pvt. Ltd. New York (1973) 9. Elizabeth Moore and Lander Fundamentals of Fungi. Prantice hall New Jursery 10. Text book of industrial microbiology by L.E. casida. 11. G. Tortora, B. Funke and C. Case. Microbiology: An Introduction. 5th ed. Menlo Park, CA: Bejamin/Cummings, 1995 12. J. Ingraham and C. Ingraham. Introduction to Microbiology. Belmont, CA:Wadsworth, 1995. 13. T.D. Brock, M.T. Madison, J. M. Martinko and J. Parker.Biology of Microorganisms. 7th ed. Englewood Cliffs, N.J: Prentice-Hall, 1994. 14. Bojwani, S.S. 1990. Plant Tissue Culture: Applications and Limitations, Elsevier Science Publisher, New York, USA. 15. Collins, H.A. and Edwards, S. 1998. Plant Cell Culture, Bios Scientific Publishers, Oxford, UK. 16. Hall, R.D. (Ed.) 1999. Plant Tissue Culture: Techniques and Experiments, Academic Press, New York. 17. Kartha, K.K. 1985. Cyropreservation of plant cells and organs. CRC Press, Boca Raton, Florida. 18. Khasim, S.M. 2002. Botanical Microtechnique: Principles and Practice, Capital

487

Publishing Company, New Delhi. 19. Vasil, I.K. and Thorpe, T.A. 1994. Plant Cell and Tissue Culture, Kluwer Academic Press, The Netherlands QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Phil. DEGREE – Branch V - BOTANY SYLLABUS

HYDROBIOLOGY

PAPER No. III CODE No:

UNIT I

Fresh water ecosystem. Lotic and lentic – permanent and temporary, soil algae.

UNIT II

Marine and estuarine environments – planktonic and benthic algae. Distribution pattern of algae in relation in extreme habitats.

UNIT III

Chief factors governing distributionof algae. Primary productivity.

UNIT IV

Pollution. Eutrophication. Algae as indicators of pollution. Role of algae in sewage disposal.

UNIT V

Physiological and biochemical studies of algae invitro and invivo, preparation and maintenance of culture medium.

REFERENCE BOOKS

488

1. B.R. Vashista, A.K.Sinha, V.P.Singh. Botany for degree students algae. 2. David singh Algae biodiesel. 3. Chopra, G.L. A. textbook of Algae. 4. Desikachari, T.V. Cyanophyta. 5. Bilgrami and Saha. Textbook of Algae. 6. P.D.Sharma. Ecology and environment

489

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Phil. DEGREE – Branch V - BOTANY SYLLABUS

MYCOLOGY

PAPER NO: III CODE NO: MBY 03

UNIT I

Culture techniques and maintenance of fungal and bacterial cultures.

UNIT II

Industrial applicationof fungi.

UNIT III

Role of fungi in human diseases.

UNIT IV

Antimicrobial activity of plant products.

UNIT V

Fatalities causedby mycoses naming some common mycoses, recent development in medical mycology.

REFERENCES :

1. Rangaswamy, 1986. Plant diseases.

490

2. Singh, R.S. 1982.Plant diseases. 3. Thanyakumar, S. 1972. Fungi. 4. Mundkar, 1953. Fungi and diseases. 5. Burnett, 1976. Fundamentals of mycology

491

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Phil. DEGREE – Branch V - BOTANY SYLLABUS

PHARMACOGNOSY

PAPER No. III CODE No.

UNIT I Pharmacognostic techniques. Partial maceration for epidermal peeling.

UNIT II Clearing of leaves for epiderma, tissues and venation patterns. Stomatal index, stomatal frequency. Vein islet and vein ending characters. Mesophyll and epidermal cell ratio.

UNIT III Powder microscopy. Preliminary . Tannins, starch, lipids, lignin, suberin, mucilage. Calcium, alkaloids, phenols.

UNIT IV Adulteration of drugs, general methods and principles of extraction- soxhlet, chromatography, HPLC, GLC, HPTLC.

UNIT V Microtome for paraffin embedded materials and double staining procedure.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1 .Cutter, E.G. 1978. Plant Anatomy Part I & II Edwarn Arnold p. Ltd. London.

2. Eames and McDaniels, L.H. 1947. Introduction to plant anatomy. McGraw Hill.

3. Esau, K. 1972. 1977.Plant Anatomy. John Wiley and sons. New York.

492

4. Fahn, A. 1989. Plant anatomy. Pergamon Press, Oxford, London.

5. Gary, P. 1964. Hand book of basic microtechnique. John Wiley and sons.

6. Clark, G. 1981. Staining procedures. Williams and Wilkins. Baltimore.

7. Conn, H.J. 1977. Biological stains. R.D. Lillie ed. The Williams and Wilkins.

8. Baltimore. Reprinted by Sigma chemical company. 1991. St. Louis.

9. Gahan, P.B. 1984. Plant Histochemistry and cytochemistry. Academic press.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI – 600 004

M. Phil. DEGREE – Branch V - BOTANY SYLLABUS

ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY

PAPER NO. III CODE NO: MBY 03

UNIT I

Distribution of species – vegetation study of communities, major ecosystem of the world.

UNIT II

Interaction of species – productivity estimation of an ecosystem.

Nutrient dynamics

493

UNIT III

Environmental pollution – effects and control measures. change and carbon sequestration process. Bioremediation and bioconservation of xenobiotics

UNIT IV

Tolerance of plants to various stresses such as light, salinity, drought and nutrients.

UNIT V

Natural resources and management. Application of GIS & RS in environment studies.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Verma, P.S. and Agarwal, V.K. 1999. Concept of ecology. S.Chand & Co Ltd. New Delhi. 2. Shukla, R.S. and Chandel, P.S. 1998. Plant Ecology, S.Chand & Co Ltd. New Delhi. 3. Odum, E.P. 1983. Basic Ecology. Holt Saunders, International editions. 4. Ambust, R.S 2000, Text book of Plant Ecology, Students, friends and Co. 5. Bhatia, K.N., 2000., A Treatise on plant ecology. Pradeep publications.

494

DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM Title of the revised syllabus papers for the Batch June 2018 onwards

COURSE: M.Sc. GEOGRAPHY Paper Subject SEM Title of the Paper UE IA TOTAL C No. Code I I APPLIED GEOMORPHOLOGY 75 25 100 4 II ADVANCED CLIMATOLOGY 75 25 100 4 III THEMATIC CARTOGRAPHY 75 25 100 4 GEOGRAPHY OF INDIA WITH SPECIAL IV 75 25 100 4 REFERENCE TO TAMIL NADU PRACTICAL – I MAPPING OF V 75 25 100 4 PHYSICAL DATA THEORETICAL ECONOMIC II VI 75 25 100 4 GEOGRAPHY REGIONAL PLANNING AND VII 75 25 100 4 DEVELOPMENT VIII ELECTIVE - I CULTURAL GEOGRAPHY 75 25 100 3 ELECTIVE - II FIELD WORK IN IX 75 25 100 3 GEOGRAPHY RESEARCH ANALYTICAL EDE-I 75 25 100 3 TECHNIQUES PRACTICAL – II DATA PROCESSING X 75 25 100 4 AND MAPPING III XI GEOGRAPHICAL THOUGHT 75 25 100 4 REMOTE SENSING AND ITS XII 75 25 100 4 APPLICATIONS ELECTIVE – III POLITICAL XIII 75 25 100 3 GEOGRAPHY ELECTIVE – IV RESEARCH XIV 75 25 100 3 METHODOLOGY FUNDAMENTALS OF GEOGRAPHICAL EDE-II 75 25 100 3 INFORMATION SYSTEM PRACTICAL – III REMOTE SENSING XV 75 25 100 4 TECHNIQUES IV XVI SETTLEMENT GEOGRAPHY 75 25 100 4 XVII POPULATION GEOGRAPHY 75 25 100 4 ELECTIVE V- GEOGRAPHICAL XVIII 75 25 100 3 INFORMATION SYSTEMS PRACTICAL – IV COMPUTER AND GIS XIX 75 25 100 4 APPLICATION XX PROJECT 75 25 100 4

495

M.Sc. Geography

SEMESTER-I

No. Exam Marks Title of the paper of Credits Paper Number Hrs Hrs UE IA Total CORE PAPER-I Applied Geomorphology 6 4 3 75 25 100 CORE PAPER-II Advanced Climatology 6 4 3 75 25 100 CORE PAPER-III Thematic Cartography 6 4 3 75 25 100 Geography Of India With CORE PAPER-IV Special Reference To Tamil 6 4 3 75 25 100 Nadu Practical Paper-I Mapping CORE PAPER-V 6 4 31/2 75 25 100 Of Physical Data

SEMESTER-II

No. Exam Marks Title of the paper of Credits Paper Number Hrs Hrs UE IA Total Theoretical Economic CORE PAPER-VI 6 4 3 75 25 100 Geography Regional Planning And CORE PAPER-VII 6 4 3 75 25 100 Development ELECTIVE-I Cultural PAPER-VIII 6 4 3 75 25 100 Geography ELECTIVE-II Field Work PAPER-IX 6 3 3 75 25 100 in Geography Research Analytical EDE-I 6 3 3 75 25 100 Techniques Practical – II Data CORE PAPER- X 6 4 31/2 75 25 100 Processing And Mapping

496

SEMESTER-III

No. Exam Marks Title of the paper of Credits Paper Number Hrs Hrs UE IA Total CORE PAPER-XI Geographical Thought 6 4 3 75 25 100 Remote Sensing And Its CORE PAPER- XII 6 4 3 75 25 100 Applications ELECTIVE-III Political PAPER- XIII 6 3 3 75 25 100 Geography ELECTIVE-IV Research PAPER- XIV 6 3 3 75 25 100 Methodology Fundamentals of EDE-II Geographical Information 6 3 3 75 25 100 System Practical – III Remote CORE PAPER- XV 6 4 31/2 75 25 100 Sensing Techniques

SEMESTER-IV

No. Exam Marks Title of the paper of Credits Paper Number Hrs Hrs UE IA Total CORE PAPER-XVI Settlement Geography 6 4 3 75 25 100

CORE PAPER-XVII Population Geography 6 4 3 75 25 100 ELECTIVE-V PAPER-XVIII Geographical Information 6 3 3 75 25 100 Systems PRACTICAL – IV CORE PAPER-XIX Computer And GIS 6 4 31/2 75 25 100 Application

CORE PAPER-XX Project 6 4 3 75 25 100

497

SEMESTER – I CODE: PAPER – I CREDIT: 4 APPLIED GEOMORPHOLOGY Objectives: This paper explains the Interior forces within and on the earth which resulting to various landforms on the earth surface. Understanding the landforms and theories of Geomorphology paves the knowledge for the hydrologists, resource explorers and the Engineers.

1. Scope and Content - Approaches in Geomorphology – Fundamental concepts- Geological Time Scale-Structure of Earth’s Interior (Sial –Sima-Nife) - Origin of Continents and Ocean Basins: Wegner’s Theory of Continental Drift- Plate -Tectonics Theory - Seafloor spreading – Isostasy. 2. Rocks: Origin , Classification, types and Characteristics of rocks- Orogenetic forces: Folds -Types of Folds – Tensional forces: Faults and its types -Sudden forces: Volcanoes and its types- Distribution of Volcanoes- Earthquakes and its types- Distribution of Earthquakes- Tsunami_ Denudation :Weathering and its types- Mass Wasting. 3. Landforms associated with fluvial action, Types of Streams- Drainage Pattern- Erosion, transportation, Depositional fluvial landforms- Cycle of Erosion- Davis and Penck. 4. Landform associated with Glacial: Erosion, Transportation, Depositional landforms- Aeolion: Erosion, Transportation, Depositional landforms -Karst: Erosion, Transportation, Depositional landforms- Coastal action: Erosion, Transportation, Depositional landforms -Coastal Classification (Sheppard, Johnson and Valentine). 5. Applied Geomorphology- Application of Geomorphology to Hydrology- stratigraphic and lithological zones – River channel restoration- potential-Dam Sites Selection – Good reservoir sites-Resource exploration: surface expression of ore bodies- Weathering residues-Placer Deposits – Oil Exploration-Hazards Management. References:

1. Singh,Savindra (2017).Physical Geography. Pravalika Publications,Allahabad. 2. Siddhartha,K&Mukherjee. R (2008).The earth’s Dynamic Surface. Kiyasala publication 3. Singh, Savindra. (2006) Geomorphology. Prayag Pustak Bhawan,Allahabad. 4. Thornbury, W.D. (1960)Principals of Geomorphology. John Wiley, New York. Web Sources: 1. En.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geomorphology 2. En.wikipedia.org/wiki/volcano 3. http://www.geographynotes.com/articles/applied-geomorphology-meaning-two-main- lines-specific-applications-and-techniques/779

LEARNING OUTCOMES: The students are able to have thorough knowledge of Basics of landforms, Earth’s Interior and formation of Landforms.

498

SEMESTER - I

CODE: PAPER – II CREDIT:4 ADVANCED CLIMATOLOGY Objectives: This paper gives enormous knowledge about climatic elements and general circulation of Atmosphere. It elucidates the classification of climate and causes of recent climatic changes at global level and its remedies.

1. Climatic Parameters – Heating Processes - Heat Balance – Factors Affecting the Distribution of Temperature – Temperature Distribution: Horizontal – Vertical – Temperature Inversion – Atmospheric Pressure – Factors Affecting Pressure – Vertical and Horizontal Distribution of Pressure- Pressure belts 2. General Circulation of Atmosphere – Tri cellular Model – Jet Streams – Precipitation – Types of Rainfall - Monsoon and its Mechanism – Theories of monsoon –El Nino – La Nino. 3. Air masses and Types- Fronts and its Types – Sources – Clouds and its types – Atmospheric disturbances – Cyclones –Factors promoting cyclones- Tropical and Extra Tropical cyclones. 4. Classification of Climate – Koppen’s Classification – Climatic Zones in India based on Koppen’s classification- Agro Climatic zones for India and Tamilnadu. 5. Climatic Change: Greenhouse effect – Global Warming – Ozone depletion – Causes, Effects, Remedial Measures – Concept of Micro Climatology – Urban Climatology – Heat Island – Urbanizations as a cause of .

References: 1. Siddhartha.K. (2016). Atmosphere,Weather & Climate. Kitab Mahal 2. Saha,Pijushkanthi. (2012).Modern Climatology. Allied Publishers Private Limited, New Delhi 3. Lal, D.S.(2006).Climatology. Chitanya Publishing House, New Delhi. 4. Singh,Savindra.(2003) Climatology. Prayag Pushtak Bhavan – India. 5. Gochenleong. (2001).Certificate Physical and Human Geography. Oxford University Press, NewDelhi 6. Barry, R.G. and Chorley P.J. (1998). Atmospheric Weather and Climate. Routledge, London and New York. 7. Mausam’ India Journal of Meteorology. 8. Season crop report published by Agricultural University, Coimbatore. Web Sources: 1. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/climatology 2. http://www.atmospericpressure.net/ 3. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/atmospheric_pressure 4. http:/en.wikipedia.org/Wikipedia.org/wiki/koppen_climate_classification

LEARNING OUTCOMES: Students would have an understanding about the Climatic Elements, Circulation of Atmosphere, types of cyclones, classification of Indian and Tamil Nadu Agro Climatic regions – Students gains awareness of causes and remedies for climatic change.

499

SEMESTER - I CODE: PAPER – III CREDIT: 4 THEMATIC CARTOGRAPHY Objectives: It gives a clear idea of the recent trends and development in cartography, compilation of data and generalization of thematic maps. It explains the components and tones of maps and also gives enormous idea of techniques of thematic maps and construction of cartograms.

1. Cartography and its importance – Maps- Types of Maps – Purposes of thematic maps – Cartographic process – Computer Assisted Cartography – Data encoding - Data input, storing, analysis and display-Data output - Recent Trends and developments in Cartography

2. Compilation of data and generalization of thematic maps – compilation data – Base data - sources of primary data – methods of compilation, methods of generalization – selection - classification, symbolization – symbolizing data at points, line, area, statistical surfaces. 3. Components of Map – map design – goals of map design – elements of map design ( Distance or scale, direction, legend, sources of information, Inset map, title, projection, locator maps and index maps)and Map layout – visual hierarchy – typographic and their designs. 4. Colour and thematic maps – perception of colour – colour specification system – subjective aspects of colour – colour in cartographic design; map production and reproduction map printing and non-printing techniques. 5. Techniques of thematic mapping – Mapping of terrain (contouring, layer tinting, hill shading, Hachures) – weather - climatic and socio-economic information – Pictorial maps- construction of cartograms. References: 1. Misra,P. and A. Ramesh.(2006).Fundamentals of Cartography. McMillan Co. Publishing, New Delhi. 2. Robinson, H. (1995). Elements of Cartography. (6th Edition). John Wiley and Sons, New York 3. Tyner,Judith.(1992).Introduction to thematic Cartography. Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 4. Border, D. (1990).Cartography : Thematic map design. WCB WMC Brocan Publishers. Web Sources: 1. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/carography 2. http://www.geography.wisc.edu/histcart 3. http://www.map-symbol.com/sym_lib.htm.

LEARNING OUTCOMES:

500

The student develop the skills to compile maps, the role and importance of colour in preparing a map. Enriches knowledge about contours, map design and techniques of cartography.

SEMESTER - I CODE: PAPER – IV CREDIT: 4 GEOGRAPHY OF INDIA WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO TAMIL NADU

Objectives: To have in depth knowledge about India, awareness about the resources, population of India and special explanation about the administrative and physiographic divisions of Tamil Nadu. 1. India – Geographic location- neighboring countries-territorial borders-strategic importance-Physiographic (mountains, plateaus, plains, Islands)- Drainage system Rivers and watersheds) –Multipurpose projects

2. Climate and seasons- Indian monsoons and rainfall patterns- Tropical cyclones and western disturbances- Floods and droughts- Climatic regions- Natural vegetation and animal resources- Soil types and their distributions

3. Agriculture-Food and non food crops(cultivation and distribution)-agricultural regions- Minerals(metallic and non-metallic)- Distribution and mines- Major industries: Metallurgical, Textile, Engineering, Chemical and allied industries - Industrial regions

4. Population(distribution, density, growth rate, literacy)urban and rural settlements- Urbanization and development of Megalopolis and associated urban problems - Transportation -Roadways, Railways, Airways, ports and harbours- trade(imports and exports)

5. Tamil Nadu-Administrative divisions- Physiographic divisions- rivers-climate-Rainfall pattern- Natural vegetation- soils-Agriculture(Cropping pattern and distribution)- Industries – Population(distribution, density, growth rate,literacy) Transportation –trade and commerce.. References: 1. Hussain,Majid.(2018).Geography of India. McGraw Hill Education (India) Private limited,Chennai 2. Khullar,D.R. (2011). India A Comprehensive Geography.Kalyani Publishers, Ludhiana. 3. Tiwari, R.C. (2010). Geography of India. PrayagPustakBhawan, Allahabad. 4. Deshpande, C.D. (1988). A Regional Geography of India.ICSSR,New Delhi. 5. Spate, O.H.K., and A.T.A., Learmonth(1972). India and Pakistan: A General and Regional. Web sources: 1. https://www.mapsofindia.com/geography 2. www.indianmirror.com/geography/geography.html

501

LEARNING OUTCOMES: To have enormous knowledge about our political and physical divisions of India and Tamilnadu. These knowledge gaining will help to know the potential regions and backward regions of India and Tamilnadu

SEMESTER - I CODE: PAPER – V CREDIT: 4 PRACTICAL – I MAPPING OF PHYSICAL DATA

Objectives: The paper gives training about how to analyse the physical features seen on the map, such as a drawing profiles, drainage basin analysis, and knowledge about the graphs of water level fluctuation and water balance graph with different method represent the climatic data

1. Morphometric analysis – Gradient analysis – Smith, Robinson, Wentworth - Hypsometric, Clinographic, Terrain classification – Altimetric - Frequency curve. 2. Contour interpolation and contour Drawing -Profiles- Serial- Superimposed, Composite, Projected- Block Diagram. 3. Drainage basin Analysis – Delimiting the watershed – Basin Relief – Drainage pattern – Stream order – Drainage Density – Bifurcation ratio – Length Ratio – Horton’s Analysis – Sinuosity Index – Thal wag profile. 4. Hydrology – Water level fluctuation using ground water data – mapping Rainfall- distribution - Theissen Polygon Method – Isohyets method – water balance graph-Located wind rose maps. 5. Foster’s climo-graph – climatic graphs – Climatographs- Rainfall Variability- Interpretation of Weather Maps-Mapping of cyclonic track. References:

1. Singh, R.L and Rana Singh P.B. (2014). Elements of Practical Geography. Kalyani Publishers,Ludhiana 2. Partha Basu,Pijushkanti Saha. (2010).Advanced Practical Geography. Books and Allied Limited 3. Khan, M.Z.A. (1998).Text book of Practical Geography. Concept publishing Company, NewDelhi 4. Negi, Balbir Singh. (1995). Practical Geography. (3rd edition).Kedar Nath and Ram Nath, Meerut - Delhi. 5. Monkhouse F.F. (1980) Maps and Diagrams. Wilkinson H.R. Methuen and Co. Ltd. Web Sources:

1. agilemodeling.com/artifacts/physicalDataModel.htm 2. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Morphometrics 3. https://www.wou.edu/las/physci/taylor/g322/drainage_anal.pdf 4. mapsgis3015.blogspot.com/2008/12/climograph.html

502

LEARNING OUTCOMES: Paper gives working skills to the student to develop their practical knowledge with their surroundings. Practical knowledge provides fabulous knowledge and gradual specialization with their subject.

SEMESTER – II CODE: PAPER – VI CREDIT: 4 THEORETICAL ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY

Objectives: To teach the basic theories of Spatial and Economic Activities. To make students update and frame efficient maps based on the Plans.

1. Economic geography- Basic Concepts: resources and its types- renewable and non- renewable-exhaustible and non-exhaustible-conventional and non-conventional-biotic and abiotic-recyclable and non-recyclable- ubiquitous-Economic activities -Primary secondary and tertiary. 2. Primary Activities: types of farming-Whittlesey’ classification of agriculture, forestry, fishing and mining- Farming tenancy- Farmer types(large, medium, small, marginal and landless labourers- Von thunen theory o agricultural location. 3. Secondary Activities-s –spatial interaction -Spatial association-spatial Organization;-Edward Ullman’s theory of spatial interaction(principles of transferability , complementarily and intervening opportunity-Manufacturing - Manufacturing Regions of the world, Special Economic Zones 4. Industries-major industries of the world (Cotton, Jute, silk, Iron and steel, Metallurgical, ship building, automobile and machine tools)-Industrial regions-factors affecting Industrial location – Weber’s theory of Industrial location –Walter Isard’s theory of Location and space economy. 5. Tertiary Activities: Transport, Trade and Services.-technology parks-Network analysis(graph theory)-vertices and nodes-connectivity and accessibility- location- allocation model-Recent Trends and Scope Of Economic Geography in development. References 1. Siddhartha.K. (2016).Economic Geography. KitabMahal, New Delhi 2. Saxena, H.M. (2016).Economic Geography.RawatPublications,New Delhi 3. Knowles, R. and J.Wareing.(2004).Economic and Social Geography.Rupa series 4. Lloyd, P.E. and P.Dicken(1992). Location in Space: A Theoretical Approach to Economic Geography. Harper International Edition. 5. Goh, Chengleong. andGillan Clare Morgan. (1982). Human and Economic Geography. Oxford University Press 6. Abler, Adam Gould. P.(1972). Spatial Organisation : A Geographer’s View of the World. Englewood Cliff. New Jersey. Web sources:

1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Economic_geography 2. geog.ufl.edu/files/Economic-Geography-3.pdf 3. https://www.e-education.psu.edu/geog597i_02/node/768

503

LEARNING OUTCOMES: The Students have the skill to make maps with Spatial Analysis. They will have thorough understanding of Demand, Supply and the Theories of Economic Geography.

SEMESTER - II CODE : PAPER – VII CREDIT: 4 REGIONAL PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT Objectives: This paper initiates the student to infer the planning procedures, types of planning and strategies for specific purpose and regions.

1. Regional Planning – Concepts and Principles-Changing Concept of Development, concept of underdevelopment; measuring development: Indicators (Economic, Social and Environmental); Human development. – frame work for regional planning –Types of regional Planning - Approaches – Bottom up approach – Top down approach in Planning 2. Regions and Regionalism- classification of regions– Regional Hierarchy – Resource regions – Delineation of Planning Region; Regionalization of India for Planning - Metropolitan region – Backward Regions and Regional Plans- Special Area Development Plans in India(Hilly region, tribal region, drought prone regions). 3. Basis of planning – planning processes – Sectoral, temporal and spatial dimensions, short term – long term – perspective of planning – land use and area development-Growth Pole Model of Perroux- Growth Centre Model in Indian Context; Myrdal, Hirschman, Rostow – Multilevel planning. 4. Regional population analysis - Population Projection - Impact of Population on Regional Planning – Principles of locational analysis 5. Regional Planning in India-Five year plans- Annual plans- specific Area Plans-Planning in Tamil Nadu – Block level and District level planning – Panchayat Raj and planning- Planning and Programmes to improve developing regions-Thrust areas to implement plans.

References: 1. Chandna R.C. (2014).Regional Planning and Development. Kalyani Publishers,Ludhiana 2. Chand, Mahesh and V.K. Puri. (2011).Regional Planning in India. Allied Publishers Pvt,Ltd 3. Hall, P. (1992). Urban and Regional Planning. Routledge, London. 4. Misra, R. P. and Tiwari P.S (1980). Micro level planning and development process. (Vol. I). Methods and Technique of integrated Rural Development in India. Heritage Publishers, New Delhi. Web Sources:

1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regional_planning 2. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/regionalism_(international_relation)

504

3. www.tn.gov.in/tcp/activities.htm 4. www.slideshare.net/charujaiswal/planning-regions-of-india

Learning Outcomes: To acquire knowledge about the Regionalization in India. To enrich knowledge of planning and implementation of plans in backward and developing areas.

SEMESTER - II CODE: PAPER –VIII CREDIT: 3 ELECTIVE - I CULTURAL GEOGRAPHY

Objective: It gives an elaborate idea of themes and evolution of culture and different types of costumes, languages religions and races at global level.

1. Culture – Concept – Framework of cultural geography –– Man’s invasion of the earth – Earliest Hominids – Australopitheas – Homo habit’s – Homoeructus – Homo Sapiens – Domestication of plants and animals - Human evolution – Early Life – Primitive life – Modern life.

2. Housing and settlement – Elements of Housing systems – Basic settlement forms – Early Hunting tool – Manufacturing tool – Early transport carriers and modes of Transport – Early Agriculture – Tools used for early agriculture.

3. Ancient to recent types of lifestyle: – Food and international cuisine – costumes of the world -Jewellary and its types – Arts of the world – Music of the world – Dances of the world from time to time and from region to region.

4. Languages – World Distribution Indo European Linguistic Family Bi-Linguism – Language and Culture – Religion – Major Religions of the World.

5. Races – Major Races of the World – Caucasoid, Negroid, Mongoloid and Mixed races – Identification of Races and basic traits– Ethnicity-Tribes of the World- Impact of development on tribes of the world.

References: 1. Gettics - et al 1988 ‘Introduction to Geography’, W.M.C. Brown Publishers, Dubuque. 2. J.E. Spencer and W.L. Thomas 1978 ‘Introducing Cultural Geography’, John Wiley and Sons, New York. 3. Majid Hussain 1994 ‘Cultural Geography’, Anmol Publications Pvt., Ltd. New Delhi. 4. Robert H. Stoddard and Others 1986 ‘Human Geography’, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey Web Sources:

1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cultural_geography 2. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Race_(human_categorization) 3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clothing_in_the_ancient_world

505

4. https://books.google.co.in/books?isbn=8180690741

Learning Outcomes: Human evolution through various phases, Cultural evolution by means of Settlement, Food, Life style, Languages, religions faces and tribes of the world are well established.

SEMESTER - II CODE: PAPER –IX CREDIT: 3

ELECTIVE –II FIELD WORK IN GEOGRAPHY Objective: It gives clear idea of the importance of field work in Geography teaching. It gives an idea of identification of Landforms through different types of survey such as Eco, Socio-economic and land use survey. 1. Field work – Definition, Importance and Significance – Geography Teaching and Field work – Maps for field work (Historical, Topographical, Geological, Thematic, Sketch maps and Route maps) 2. Landform Survey – Identification of landforms – (Mountains, Plateaus, Plains – Coastal and River, Beaches and lakes) – Field survey – One exercise and Preparation of Survey Report 3. Eco-Survey – Identification and Classification of Bio-diversity – Flora and Fauna, Field Survey (One exercise– College/Road/Home Environment/National Park – Prepare Rough Plan/Sketch Plan and Survey Report) 4. Socio-Economic survey–Primary and Secondary – Questionnaire/Schedules, Interview, Census and Statistical Reports. Prepare a field survey report (One exercise with Map/Plan/Sketch/Photographs and Diagrams) 5. Land use Survey – Land use types – Residential, Industrial, Institutional, Commercial, Recreational, Open space, Mixed and other Land uses. Prepare a Land use Survey – Map/Plan/Sketch/Photographs/Diagram. References: 1. E.M. Sanders (1999). “Observational Geography”, George Philip and Sons Ltd, London. 2. Hatch (1938). “Outdoor Geography”, Blackie and SM Limited, London and Glascow. 3. J.E. Archa and T.H. Dalton (1920). “Fieldwork in Geography”, Batsford Ltd, London. 4. K.S. Wheelr and M. Herding (1965). “Geographical Fieldwork: A Hand Book”, Blend Educational Ltd. Web Sources: 1. www.rgs.org › ... › Fieldwork and local learning 2. www.fao.org/docrep/006/t0165e/t0165e07.htm 3. www.cifor.org/.../practical-guide-for-socio-economic-livelihood-land-te...

506

Learning Outcomes: This Paper gives training about how to draw sketch and Route maps which is useful to prepare a sketch plan of a particular area. Knowledge about how to Prepare a survey map.

SEMESTER - II CODE: EDE-I CREDIT: 3 RESEARCH ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES (Offered to other Department)

Objective: The paper gives broad idea of collection of data, sampling and methods of hypothesis testing for a research study. It gives clear vision of various spatial and statistical analysis of research. It also gives knowledge of trend surface and construction of models for social studies.

1. Data Collection – Data Sources – Data Types – Primary, Secondary – Sampling – Simple Random – Stratified – Nesting. 2. Hypothesis Testing - Needs and Types of hypotheses – Goodness of fit and significance and confidence levels - Parametric and Non-parametric procedures: Chi-square test, ‘T’ test, ‘F’ test, Analysis of Variance (ANOVA). 3. Bivariate Analysis: Scatter diagram – Simple linear– Spearman’s Rank and Product Moment Correlation Coefficients, Regression – Residuals and their Mapping. 4. Multivariate Analysis: Basic Principles and elements of Factor Analysis - Principal - Cluster Analysis. 5. Trend Surface and Models: Gravity Models- Population Potential – Index of Concentration- Growth rate- Scalogram

References:

1. David Unwin, Introductory Spatial Analysis, Methuen, London, 1981. 2. Gregory, S. Statistical Methods and the Geographer, Longman, London, 1978. 3. Hammond R and P.S. Mc Cullagh 1974.Quantitative Techniques in Geography: An Introduction, Clarendan Press, Oxford, 4. Maurice Yeats, An Introduction to Quantitative Analysis in Human Geography, McGraw Hill, New York, 1974. 5. Peter Haggett, Andrew D. Cliff, and Allan Frey, Location Methods Vol. I and II, Edward Arnold, London, 1977. Web Sources: 1. www.slideshare.net/parabprathamesh/primary-sec 2. unstats.un.org/unsd/hhsurveys/finalpublication/ch19fin3.pdf 3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Statistical_hypothesis_testing 4. www.fs.fed.us/nrs/pubs/jrnl/2014/nrs_2014_butler_001.pdf

507

Learning Outcomes: Enables students to know the data types and sources. To Make familiar with the statistical techniques and introduce the students to be well aware of the advanced techniques for data analysis

SEMESTER - II CODE: PAPER – X CREDIT: 4 PRACTICAL – II DATA PROCESSING AND MAPPING Objectives: It gives detailed information of the types of data, collection of data through questionnaires and schedules and also explains sampling techniques which is important for research analysis. Paper gives clear vision of mapping techniques through various methods, and spatial statistics for research purposes.

1. Data – Types – Collection of Data through Questionnaires and Schedules: Constructing questionnaires and report preparation for residential preference – Consumer Behavior – Environmental Quality. 2. Sampling Techniques – Nesting – Stratified – Random Sample Selection – Urban land use map along road – Traffic flow – Measures of connectivity and Accessibility(Alpha, beta and Detour index-Shimbel index-Associate number.. 3. Residual Mapping – Least square method and mapping – Mapping of attributes: Preparation of maps using X2 Test and Scalogram- Measures of inequality – Location Quotient –Index of concentration 4. Distribution Maps – Population potential using gravity model – Threshold determination and mapping.- - Index of dissimilarity – Lorenz curve - Gini Co-efficient. 5. Spatial Statistics – Mean Centre – Median Centre – weighted mean centre- Standard deviation – correlation – RN Statistics.

References: 1. Partha Basu,Pijushkanti Saha. (2010).Advanced Practical Geography. Books and Allied Limited. 2. Khan, M.Z.A.(1998).Text book of Practical Geography. Concept publishing Company, NewDelhi 3. Khullar, Dr. (1997). King’s Practical Geography. Educational Publishers, Delhi. 4. Negi, Balbir Singh. (1995). Practical Geography. (3rd edition)Kedar Nath and Ram Nath, Meerut -Delhi 5. Cole and King.(1989).Quantitative Geography Techniques and Theories in Geography. John Wiley and Sons Ltd., London. Web Sources:

1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_mapping 2. https://www.statpac.com/surveys/sampling.htm 3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Residuated_mapping 4. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dot_distribution_map

508

Learning Outcomes: The students have enormous knowledge about data collection and analyzing, sampling techniques. Maps are drawn by the students using statistical techniques and interpreting skills of the solutions.

SEMESTER - III CODE: PAPER-XI CREDIT: 4 GEOGRAPHICAL THOUGHT Objectives: This paper explains the views and research works of various authors about the nature of geography. It elaborates the contribution of authors in Schools and Discoveries paves the scientific way for emerging new modern themes. Geography explores with his new dimension examines through theories, models and spatial approaches with the quantitative techniques.

1. Nature and content of Geography – Applied Geography – Pre-Modern – Early Origins of Geographical Thinking with reference to the Classical and Medieval Philosophies (Greek- Roman-Arab-Chinese-Indian-Varenius – Immanuel Kant – Alexander Von Humbolt – Cart Ritter) 2. Modern – Evolution of Geographical Thinking and Disciplinary Trends in Germany, France, Britain, United States of America– Impact of exploration and Discoveries – Determinism, Possibilism – Dualism and Dichotomy in Geography. 3. Recent Trends in Geography –Paradigms in Geography – Paradigm’s Shift- Quantitative Revolution - Theories and methodological developments –Models (types of models) in Geography-System and System Analysis in Geography 4. Modern Geographic thoughts-Positivism- Humanism- Behaviorism- Feminism- Radical Geography- Post -Regional Concept - Areal Differentiation 5. Scientific Approaches in Geography – Theory and fact-Hypothesis-Scientific Explanation( Induction and Deduction) -Changing Concept of Space in Geography-Time space Geography- Locational Analysis – Spatial Analysis- Recent trends in Geography References:

1. Hussain,Majid. (2015).Evolution of Geographical Thought. (5th Edition). Rawat Publication, New Delhi. 2. Nayak,Anoop and Alex Jeffrey.(2013). Geographical Thought: An Introduction to Ideas in Human Geography. Pearson Education 3. Chriswell,Tim. (2012).Geographical Thought – A Critical Introduction. Wiley Blackwell 4. Dikshit, R.D. (2009). Geographical Though Contextual History of Ideas. Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi 5. Adhikari, Sudeepta. (2009).Fundamentals of Geographical Thought. Chaitanya Publishing House,Allahabad 6. Chorley, R.J and Haggett. Eds.(1967).Models in Geography. Web Sources: 1. www.overcart.com/geographical-thought-a-contextual-history-of-ideas-eng. 2. www.alibris.com/search/books/isbn/9788120311824

509

LEARNING OUTCOMES: To attain the knowledge of basics and foundations in Geography. To know the school of thoughts of Philosophers in Geography. To update the modern trends in Geography using spatial analysis.

SEMESTER - III CODE: PAPER- XII CREDIT: 4 REMOTE SENSING AND ITS APPLICATIONS Objectives: This paper explains the concepts and types of remote sensing based on platforms. It also describes the image processing, aerial photo interpretations. It also deals with applications of remote sensing on various fields.

1. Concept of Remote Sensing –Principles of Remote Sensing– Electromagnetic Radiation Interaction with Atmosphere and Earth Surface-Interaction- – Types of Remote sensing based on platform, Energy sources, Imaging media, regions of Electromagnetic spectrum; sensor resolutions – Spatial, spectral, radiometric and temporal resolution – Image referencing system. 2. Microwave Remote sensing – Introduction – Passive, Active Microwave Remote Sensing – Radar Imaging – Airborne versus space bore radars – Radar systems – SLAR and SAR System. 3. Image Processing - Manual and Digital – Data analysis–Pre -processing methods - (Radiometric and Geometric Correction)- Image registration- Image Enhancement (Filtering)- Image Transformation- Image Classification (Supervised and Un-supervised- Image Display 4. Image and Aerial Photo Interpretation – Interpretation Procedure-Elements -Interpretation Strategies-Interpretation Keys-Equipment for Image Interpretation-Photomorphic Analysis 5. Application of Remote Sensing - Land Cover and Land use mapping – Change detection in land use – Water – Forest – Agriculture – Environmental Impact assessment – Urban planning. References: 1. Chandra, A.M& Ghosh.S.K.(2016).Remote Sensing and Geographic Information System. Narosa Publishing House 2. Bhatta, Basudeb. (2011).Remote sensing and GIS. Oxford University Press, India. 3. Reddy, M. Anji.(2002). Remote Sensing and Geographical Information System. B.S. Publications, A.P. 4. Lillesand, T.M. and R.W. Kifer. (1999). Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation. John Wiley sons, New York.. 5. Curran,Pane J. (1985). Principles of Remote Sensing. Longman group Ltd., London. Web Sources: 1. landsat.gsfc.nasa.gov/education/tutorials.html 2. www.iirs.gov.in/

510

3. www.nrsc.gov.in/&remotesensing.org/

LEARNING OUTCOMES: Students are able to explain the types of Remote Sensing based on various categories- Students are able to elucidate the microwave remote sensing and its advantage over other EMR band-Students learn image processing Techniques- Students are able to interpret aerial and imagery-Students understand the applications of RS in various fields.

SEMESTER - III CODE: PAPER –XIII CREDIT: 3 ELECTIVE – III POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY Objective: This paper gives an idea of history, development, theories and approaches to the study. It covers the political area at the global level which comprises economic, human, political pattern of states, territory, frontiers and boundaries. Also deals about political geography of India in various aspects including electoral system in India. 1. Nature and Scope of political geography – History – development of political geography- Geopolitical school of thought – Approaches to study.

2. Political area: Countries of world – Natural setting of Political – Economic and human features, Political patterns of states – Dependent areas; Territory, State and Nation: Territory and Territoriality – Elements of Spatial structure – Nation and Nationalism – Frontiers and Boundaries – Boundaries and International tension in . 3. Political geography of India: Historical background – Political units of India – States of the Indian Union. Union of India: Physical factors – Economic aspects – population and ethnic factors – Other territories. 4. Electoral geography – Elections in India – Electoral division – Parliamentary constituencies – Assembly constituency – Local body election –Corporation – Town Panchayat –Municipality –Village administration. 5. Theories of Political Geography: Sack’s theory of Human territoriality – Hartshorne’s theory of Territorial Integration. References: 1. G. Etzel Pearcy and Russell H. Fifield (1948). “Political Geography”. Thomas Y. Crowell company, USA. 2. G. Etzel Pearcy and Associates (1957). “World Political Geography”. Second Edition, Thomas Y. Crowell company, USA. 3. J.R.V. Prescoot (1972). “Political Geography”. Richard Clay (The Chaucer Press) Ltd., Great Britain. 4. Peter J. Taylor (1985). “Political Geography: World Economy, Nation-Sate and Locality”. Longman Group Limited, New York. 5. Samuel Van Valkenburg and Carl L. Stotz (1955). “Elements of Political geography”. Second Edition, Prentice-Hall, New Jersey. Web Sources: 1. www.geography.about.com/od/politicalgeography 2. www.electoralgeography.com/new/en/category/countries/i/india

511

3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Political_geography

Learning Outcomes: The paper gives the students a board understanding about the world political scenario. The paper helps to understand the factors inducing political conflicts which affects peace and also enriches the students about the Indian political system.

SEMESTER - III CODE: PAPER –XIV CREDIT: 3 ELECTIVE - IV RESEARCH METHODOLOGY Objective: This paper gives the broad idea about how to execute a research study. Establishing step by step logical organization and precise methods to identify problems, gather data, analyze and draw valid conclusions.

1. Definition of Research – Aims and Objective of Research – Types of Research – Qualitative, Quantitative, Descriptive, Analytical, Applied, Fundamental, Conceptual, Empirical – Scientific method - Selection of problem.

2. Data Collection: Primary and Secondary data – Field work – Aerial Photograph, Census data and satellite imageries as data sources - Sampling and sample survey – Designing Questionnaires and schedules.

3. Hypothesis testing - formulation of Hypothesis – its importance – Scientific Hypothesis – Null Hypothesis – Alternative Hypothesis - Hypothesis Testing - X2 Test, ‘t ‘ Test, ‘F’ Test.

4. Need for Quantitative Techniques – Measurement of Quantitative data – levels of measurement - Nominal, Interval, Ordinal and Ratio scales – Data transformation – Measures of central tendency and dispersion – Correlation and Regression.

5. Design of Project – Research proposal – Scientific Writing – Methodological frame work - Chapter organization – Appendix – Bibliography.

References: 1. Amodoe and Colledge1975 ‘An Introduction to Scientific Reasoning in Geography’, John Willey and Sons. 2. Louns burry J.P. 1979 ‘Introduction to Scientific Geographical Research’, Brown and Co, Iowa. 3. Cole and King 1989 ‘Quantitative Geography Techniques and Theories in Geography’, John Wiley and sons Ltd., London. 4. Sadhu Singh 1980 ‘Research Methodology in Social Science’,Himalaya Publishing Company, Bombay. Web Sources: 1. www.fao.org/.../the...census...censuses...surveys/...survey-design/en/ 2. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Statistical_hypothesis_testing 3. https://blog.udemy.com/quantitative-techniques/

512

Learning Outcomes: Gained the Knowledge about the execution of the research study. Developed their skill on setting up of the aims and objectives in solving the problems and identified the need and various quantitative techniques for the Research Study. Acquired the skill on the design and writing of a research proposal and project. Enables students to know the data types and sources- Make familiar with the statistical techniques-Introduce the students to well aware of the advanced techniques for data analysis. SEMESTER - III CODE: EDE-II CREDIT: 3 FUNDAMENTALS OF GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM (Offered to Other Department) Objective: This paper is designed for non-geographers who can gain knowledge on the history and components of cartographic techniques and the coordination between Maps and GIS software. They are made aware of Toposheets, Aerial photos, GPS and GIS applications 1. Geography as Spatial science and GIS concepts: Introduction - Definition – History and development of GIS – Components: Hardware, Software, Procedure, Data and Users – Digital Cartography 2. Maps and GIS – Shape of the earth – Coordinate systems –– Map projection and its Types- UTM - Geo Referencing 3. Data Sources – Topographical maps – Aerial photos – Satellite Imageries – Global positioning systems -Data Input - Keyboard entry - Scanning – Digitization. 4. Basic Data Models: Spatial and Non-spatial Data – Raster and Vector Data – Advantages and Disadvantages of Raster and Vector GIS – Database Management-Data models(Hierarchical, network, relational and object oriented). 5. GIS Software –CAD- GIS-ARC GIS, ARC VIEW, MAP INFO,GRASS and QGIS -GIS application : Environmental and National Resources Management, Planning and Engineering, Land Information System, Urban Planning. References: 1. Chandra A.M. & Ghosh.S.K. (2016).Remote Sensing and Geographic Information System. Narosa Publishing House 2. Bhatta,Basudeb.(2011). Remote sensing and GIS. Oxford University Press / Radha press NewDelhi. 3. Dr. M.A. Siddique 2006 ‘Introduction to Geographic Information Systems’, Sharda Pustak Bhawan, Allahabad 4. Clarke 2001 ‘Getting started with Geographical Information systems’, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Web Sources:

513

1. wamis.org/agm/pubs/agm8/Paper-6.pdf 2. http://igre.emich.edu/wsatraining/TManual/Chapter1/Chap1.pdf 3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GIS_file_formats 4. ww.gisinecology.com/Introduction_To_GIS_Software.htm

Learning outcome: This paper is offered for other department students who are made to understand the sources of geographical data (spatial and non-spatial) to create analyse and prepare map. The uses and application of GIS software in various fields. SEMESTER - III CODE: PAPER – XV CREDIT: 4 PRACTICAL – III REMOTE SENSING TECHNIQUES

Objectives: This paper helps to acquire more knowledge about aerial photographs and satellite imageries. Training given to the students about stereoscope, how to view the images through stereoscope, marking principal point, identification of flight direction. Satellite imageries are digitized through the image classification.

1. Aerial Photographs-Orientation-Stereoscope Viewing of Photographs-Identification of Flight Direction- Flight route deflection-)-Photometric Exercise-Scale factor- Height and area measurement in Aerial Photo- Distance and area measurement with Google Application – Comparative study of Aerial Photograph, with Topo sheet and imagery (5 Exercises) 2. Aerial photo Interpretation-Elements of Aerial photo Interpretation-Identification of Relief, River, Drainage, Land use, Buildup Structure and Transportation lines ( 5 Exercises) 3. Interpretation of Satellite Imageries-Interpretation Keys- Annotation (2 exercise)-Interpretation (2 Exercise each for true colour and false colour composite)- Interpretation of Radar image from IMD website – Cyclonic tracking 4. Hands on processing of digital data – Data formats and storage of digital data (BIP,BIL,BSQ) –Grey Scale – Intensity profile – Histogram- supervised and unsupervised classification. 5. GPS- Identification of Latitude and Longitude- Track length calculation- GPS survey – Open and Closed Survey- Height measurement with GPS References:

1. Bhatta,Basudeb. (2011).Remote sensing and GIS. Oxford University Press, India 2. ParthaBasu,PijushkantiSaha(2010). Advanced Practical Geography. ’Books and Allied Limited 3. Khan, M.Z.A (1998).Text book of Practical Geography. Concept publishing Company, NewDelhi 4. Khullar,Dr. (1997). King’s Practical Geography. Educational Publishers, Delhi.

514

5. Negi, Balbir Singh (1995).Practical Geography.(3rd edition).KedarNath and Ram Nath, Meerut, Delhi Web sources: 1. landsat.gsfc.nasa.gov/education/tutorials.html 2. www.iirs.gov.in/ 3. www.nrsc.gov.in/&remotesensing.org/

LEARNING OUTCOMES: The Students are trained to have hands on experience on Remote Sensing and GPS. To have the knowledge and Skills to Interpret the Aerial photographs and Satellite Imagery.

SEMESTER - IV CODE: PAPER- XVI CREDIT: 4 SETTLEMENT GEOGRAPHY Objectives: This paper helps to know about the difference between rural and urban settlements and their functions. Various theories relating to settlement will help them to know about the origin of urbanization and house types.

1. Settlements – Rural and Urban Settlements – Site – Situation – Pattern – Function – Planned Settlement – Advantages and Disadvantages. 2. Rural Settlement – Site and situation factors – Pattern – Size and Spacing of Rural Settlement. Types, Forms and Pattern of rural settlements: Cause and effect; Classification of rural settlements; Rural Urban Fringe- structure, Characteristics and Functions 3. Functional classification of towns and villages; Functional classification of urban centers, Size of village, Size and distribution of hamlets, Character of villages and village sites, Functional structure of towns in India 4. Settlement Hierarchy, Christaller’s Central place theory: Measurement of Hierarchy, Primate city, Urban Fringe, Suburb, Metropolis, Mega polis, Conurbation, Urban sprawl 5. Housing and House Types, Factors influencing house type – Relief, Climate, Socio economic and other factors, Building materials for House types – Walls, Roofing, Materials. Types of Houses in India-Types of rural and urban houses in India

References:

1. Verma, Usha, AnuradhaSahay, and Sinha V.N.P. (2017).Introduction to Settlement Geography. Rajesh Publications 2. Siddhartha, K & Mukherjee. S. (2016). Cities, Urbanisation and Urban Systems(Settlement Geography). Kitabmahal Publishers 3. Mandal, R.B.(2001).Introduction to Rural Settlements. Concept Publishing House, NewDelhi 4. Ghosh.S. (1998).Introduction to Settlement Geography.Sangam Books Limited 5. Negi. Dr. B.S. Rural Geography.KedarNath Ram Nath, Meerut. 6. Ramachandran. R. (1992). Urbanisation and Urban systems in India. Oxford University Press, New Delhi. Web Sources:

515

1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Settlement_geography 2. https://golearngeo.wordpress.com/.../urban-rural-settlement-geography/ 3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Settlement_hierarchy

LEARNING OUTCOMES: The Students know the Settlement pattern in Village and Cities. The students have the knowledge of House Types in India.

SEMESTER - IV CODE: PAPER – XVII CREDIT: 4 POPULATION GEOGRAPHY Objectives: The paper discusses the theories of population, Population distribution and density in India as well as at global level. It also deals with the spatial movement of people at global level and current trend in population policies.

1. Population Geography: Nature, Scope and Objectives –-Geography as a field of specialization – Theories of Population – Malthus Theory – Demography Transition Theory – Optimum Theory - Population Data Sources. 2. Population: World Distribution of Population – Population Density – Growth – Population Composition (Male, Female, Age, Caste, Religion) – Fertility rate – Birth and Death rate – Occupational structure – Population projection – Population Policies. 3. Population Distribution and Density in India – Factors affecting Population density( Physical and Human)-Indian Population Composition – Growth rate – Birth, Death and Fertility rate – age composition – Male and Female Composition – Caste and Religion – Occupational structure. 4. Spatial movement of Population: Migration-Types of Migration( permanent, temporary, voluntary) – Push (drought, famin e, lack of jobs, over population and civil war)and Pull factors(better job, better education, a better standard of living)-Internal Migration-International Migration-Causes and Consequences of Migration. 5. Population Policies and Problem – India Population Pressure –Over population-unemployment problem-inadequate infrastructural facilities-Social crimes and Economic imbalance- Population Explosion- Population and Environment Interface.

References:

1. Syed,Maurya. (2014).Population Geography. Pravalika Publications 2. Bruce,C.K .(2013) Tools and Issues (Second Edition). Rowman and Little field,U.K. 3. Chandana,R.C (2012)Geography of Population- Concepts (10th Edition). Kalyani Publishers,NewDelhi 4. Qazi,S.A.(2009).Population Geography. Efficient offset Printers, New Delhi 5. Hussain,Majid. (2009).Population Geography. Anmol publications Pvt,Ltd.

Web Sources 1. geog.ucsb.edu/~carr/geog141/GPOPGEOG_1.1.pdf

516

2. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/World_population 3. www.census2011.co.in/density.php 4. www.idc-online.com/.../Population_Density_and_Distribution_in_India.... 5. http://www.geography.learnontheinternet.co.uk/topics/popn1.html#density

LEARNING OUTCOMES: The students have the immense knowledge of Population growth, determinants and their impact and consequences on the country’s growth.

SEMESTER - IV CODE: PAPER –XVIII CREDIT: 3 ELECTIVE – V GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEMS Objectives: This paper introduces the basic concepts of GIS Software for mapping with the help of different sources of Data set. It also explains the data management and analysis. The paper elaborates GIS applications to the various fields and the usage of GPS.

1. Introduction, Definition and Development – Components - GIS and Map Concepts – Node, Arc-Polygon, Topology - Software for GIS Mapping - Map Info, Arc Info, SPAN, GRASS, Geo Media, IDRISI. 2. Data Collection: Sources - Natural Resource Dataset - Census Data - Remotely sensed Data - Digital Data - Data Input - Keyboard Entry - Digitization, Encoding, and Scanning - Data Format. 3. Data Management: Database Approach - Data Structure - Data Models: Hierarchical - Network relational - Spatial data Models - Raster and Vector - Data conversion - Spaghetti Model - Data Storage - Quality Control - Data Linkage - Sources of Error. 4. Data Analysis and display: Data layers – Buffering - Format, Geometric and Projectional Transformations - Attribute Editing and Query functions - Overlay, Neighborhood and connectivity functions - Output formatting – Data display Devices - Hard and Soft. 5. GIS Applications: Resource/ Environment / Network Management – Socio-Economic, Recreational and Planning and GPS application. References:

1. Chandra A.M&Ghosh.S.K. (2016).Remote Sensing and Geographic Information System.Narosa Publishing House 2. Bhatta,Basudeb(2011). Remote sensing and GIS, Oxford University Press/ Radha press NewDelhi. 3. Siddique,Dr. M.A.(2006).Introduction to Geographic Information Systems.ShardaPustakBhawan, Allahabad. 4. Clarke 2001. Getting started with Geographical Information systems. Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 5. Anand,Dr. P.H. and V. Rajesh Kumar (2003). Principles of Remote Sensing and GIS. Sri Venkateswara Publications, Kumbakkonam.

517

6. Burrough,P.A. (1998) Principles of Geographic Information System for Land Resource Assessment. McDonnell, Oxford University Press. Web sources:

1. wamis.org/agm/pubs/agm8/Paper-6.pdf 2. http://igre.emich.edu/wsatraining/TManual/Chapter1/Chap1.pdf 3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GIS_file_formats 4. ww.gisinecology.com/Introduction_To_GIS_Software.html

LEARNING OUTCOMES: To update the theoretical knowledge of Automated Cartography and the latest trends of GIS application and mapping techniques. SEMESTER - IV CODE: PAPER – XIX CREDIT: 4

PRACTICAL – IV COMPUTER AND GIS APPLICATION Objectives: This paper gives a hands on experience on the statistical analysis using MS Excel spreadsheet, SPSS software and GIS mapping. It also gives training to manual methods of vector to raster transformation.

1. Computer Applications is Geography: Creation of folders, Saving File, Data Base Creation using Excel – Use of Formula – Calculation of Mean, Median, Standard Deviation, Percentage, Growth Rate – Population Density – Co-efficient of Variability – Index of Concentration – If analysis. 2. Application of SPSS Software – Frequency Table, Cross table, Rank Correlation, Product moment Correlation – Regression – Factor Analysis – Cluster Analysis. 3. Computer Graphics and GIS Mapping – Charts (Pie, Bar/Column) Quantities (Graduated colors, Graduated symbols, proportional symbols, Dot density). 4. Manual methods of Vector to Raster Transformation- Cell Addresses- Mathematical Calculations of Vector to Raster Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and Division) - Raster Overlay - Buffering. 5. GIS Mapping using Computer Software: On screen digitization: Creation of Map - Editing – Geo Referencing – Point, line, Area Mapping– Buffer. References: 1. Chandra A.M. & Ghosh.S.K. (2016).Remote Sensing and Geographic Information system. Narosa Publishing House 2. Bhatta, Basudeb (2011). Remote sensing and GIS. Oxford University Press / Radha Press NewDelhi 3. Siddique, Dr. M.A. (2006).Introduction to Geographic Information Systems. Sharda Pustak Bhawan, Allahabad. 4. Clarke (2001). Getting started with Geographical Information systems. Prentice Hall, New

518

Jersey. Web sources.

1. wamis.org/agm/pubs/agm8/Paper-6.pdf 2. http://igre.emich.edu/wsatraining/TManual/Chapter1/Chap1.pdf 3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GIS_file_formats 4. ww.gisinecology.com/Introduction_To_GIS_Software.htm LEARNING OUTCOMES: The Student have the skills to Create Maps using GIS. The Students acquires knowledge on creating the thematic maps through manual and as well as by using of QGIS and Arc GIS.

SEMESTER - IV

CODE: PAPER – XX CREDIT: 4

PROJECT The students have to select a specific topic for their Project Work. The students may select some of the following themes for their project.

Land Evaluation- Land-use - Land cover analysis - Water Sources - Slope Studies - Climatic Change - Settlement Studies - Agriculture Studies-Health Studies-Infrastructure Studies - Vegetation Studies- Recent trends /Issues in Geography

The students should follow the research guidelines by referring Research Methodology before taking up the Project Work.

Project Report (not to exceed of 50 pages excluding tables, Maps, Charts, references, index and bibliography)

The project report should contain the given below: a) Introduction b) Review of literature c) Study Area d) Data sources e) Main Objectives f) Materials and Method g) Results and Discussion h) Conclusion i) Photos j) References

Content UE IA

Project Report 60 15

Viva-Voce 15 10

519

Total 75 25

Above work has to be done with the consultation of the staff-in-charge(project tour). Viva-Voce would be conducted as the project report is completed.

LEARNING OUTCOMES: The students enhance and explore their knowledge in Geography. The application of research methodology in their project work is well executed.

DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM Title of the papers of revised syllabus for the batch 2018 onwards

COURSE: GEOGRAPHY AND TOURISM ADMINISTRATION - M.Sc DEGREE

Paper Subject Semester Title of the Paper UE IA Total C No. Code I I STUDY OF LANDFORMS 75 25 100 4 II ART AND ARCHITECTURE 75 25 100 4 HOSPITALITY AND HOTEL III 75 25 100 4 MANAGEMENT IV MEDICAL TOURISM 75 25 100 4 PRACTICAL – I MAP READING AND V 75 25 100 4 MAP ANALYSIS II VI CLIMATOLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY 75 25 100 4 VII MODERN SYNTHESIS OF TOURISM 75 25 100 4 VIII ELECTIVE – I CULTURAL GEOGRAPHY 75 25 100 3 ELECTIVE - II FIELD WORK IN IX 75 25 100 3 GEOGRAPHY RESEARCH ANALYTICAL EDE-I 75 25 100 3 TECHNIQUES PRACTICAL – II MAPPING OF SPATIAL X 75 25 100 4 DATA FOR TOURISM III XI TOURISM MARKETING 75 25 100 4 INTERNATIONAL TRAVEL FORMS XII 75 25 100 4 AND FORMALITIES ELECTIVE – III POLITICAL XIII 75 25 100 3 GEOGRAPHY ELECTIVE – IV RESEARCH XIV 75 25 100 3 METHODOLOGY

520

FUNDMENTALS OF GEOGRAPHICAL EDE-II 75 25 100 3 INFORMATION SYSTEM PRACTICAL – III AUTOMATED XV 75 25 100 4 TOURISM DATA ANALYSIS TOURISM ADMINISTRATION AND IV XVI 75 25 100 4 TOUR OPERATORS TOURISM AND INFORMATION XVII 75 25 100 4 TECHNOLOGY ELECTIVE – V CATERING FOR XVIII 75 25 100 3 TOURISM PRACTICAL – IV ON THE JOB XIX TRAINING, INSTITUTIONAL TRAINING 75 25 100 4 AND TOUR REPORTS XX PROJECT 75 25 100 4

521

M.Sc. GEOGRAPHY AND TOURISM ADMINISTRATION SEMESTER-I

No. Exam Marks Title of the paper of Credits Paper Number Hrs Hrs UE IA Total CORE PAPER-I Study of Landforms 6 4 3 75 25 100 CORE PAPER-II Art and Architecture 6 4 3 75 25 100 Hospitality and Hotel CORE PAPER-III 6 4 3 75 25 100 Management CORE PAPER-IV Medical Tourism 6 4 3 75 25 100 Practical – I Map reading CORE PAPER-V 6 4 31/2 75 25 100 and Map analysis

SEMESTER-II

No. Exam Marks Paper Number Title of the paper of Credits Hrs Hrs UE IA Total

Climatology and CORE PAPER-VI 6 4 3 75 25 100 Oceanography CORE PAPER- Modern synthesis of 6 4 3 75 25 100 VII Tourism Elective -I Cultural PAPER-VIII 6 3 3 75 25 100 Geography Elective -II Field work PAPER-IX 6 3 3 75 25 100 in Geography Research Analytical EDE-I 6 3 3 75 25 100 Techniques

Practical – II Mapping 1/2 CORE PAPER- X of Spatial Data for 6 4 3 75 25 100 Tourism

522

SEMESTER-III

Marks No. Exam Title of the paper of Credits Paper Number Hrs Hrs UE IA Total

CORE PAPER-XI Tourism Marketing 6 4 3 75 25 100 International Travel CORE PAPER-XII 6 4 3 75 25 100 forms and Formalities PAPER- XIII ELECTIVE III 6 3 3 75 25 100 Political Geography PAPER - XIV ELECTIVE IV 6 3 3 75 25 100 Research Methodology Fundamentals of EDE-II Geographical 6 3 3 75 25 100 Information System PRACTICAL - III 1/2 CORE PAPER -XV Automated Tourism 6 4 3 75 25 100 Data Analysis

SEMESTER-IV

No. Marks Exam Title of the paper of Credits Paper Number Hrs Hrs UE IA Total

Tourism CORE PAPER-XVI Administration and 6 4 3 75 25 100 Tour Operators Tourism and CORE PAPER- Information 6 4 3 75 25 100 XVII Technology ELECTIVE-V Catering PAPER-XVIII 6 3 3 75 25 100 For Tourism PRACTICAL-IV On the Job Training, 1/2 CORE PAPER-XIX 6 4 3 75 25 100 Institutional Training and Tour Reports CORE PAPER -XX Project 6 4 3 75 25 100

523

SEMESTER - I CODE: PAPER-I CREDITS: 4 STUDY OF LANDFORMS Objective: This paper gives an in-depth knowledge on the various types of Rocks and the basic relief features of the earth surface and their agents of denudation in detail. 1. Internal structure of Earth – Layers of the Earth -Rocks – Types of Rocks- Igneous, Metamorphic and Sedimentary- Major landforms –Relief features of the first order- Continents and Oceans –Seas- Inland seas- Ocean Basins. 2. Relief features of the Second Order – Mountains and its types - Plateaus and its types - Plains and its types –Lakes and its types. 3. Relief features of the Third Order – Weathering and its Types– Physical-Chemical- Biological-Mass movement and its Types- Rock fall-Slump- Landslide-Earth flow-Mudflow- Debris flow- Avalanche. 4. Fluvial and Karst Landforms-V-shaped valley-Rapids- Waterfalls- Types of Waterfalls- Pot holes-Meanders-Alluvial Fans and Cones- Flood Plains- Delta- Types of Delta- Groundwater- Aquifer- Springs – Types of Springs- - Lapies- Sinkholes- Dolines – Uvalas - Poljes- Caves - blind valleys - Natural Tunnels - Stalactite and Stalagmite. 5. Glacial, Wind and Coastal landforms- Glaciers-Cirque-Arete-Horn-Col-Hanging valley- Drumlins-Nunataks-Till-Moraines-Aeolian landforms Deflation Hollows-Zeugens- Yardangs- Barchans- Sand ripples- Sand Ridges-Sand Dunes- Coastal-Cliff-Coves-Sea Caves- Bay and Beaches-Sandbars-Barriers-Spits-Lagoon and Tombolo. References: 1. D.S.Lal(2009) Physical Geography,Sharda Pustak Bhawan,Allahabad. 2. K.Siddhartha and S.Mukherjee (2006) The Dynamics of Earth Surface,Kisalaya Publications. 3. Nater Singh Raina(2012) Contemporary Physical Geography, Concept publishing company. 4. Richard H.Bryant (2013) Physical Geography, Rupa & Co., 5. Savindra Singh(2008) Geomorphology, Prayag Pustak Bhawan, Allahabad Web Source: 1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geomorphology 2. www.the-crossword-solver.com/word/studyof landforms 3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Landform

Learning Outcomes: Landforms are the major determinants of tourism attraction, the clear knowledge of understanding the origin and evolution of land forms are essential. This paper reveals in-depth knowledge of it.

524

SEMESTER - I CODE: PAPER –II CREDIT: 4 ART AND ARCHITECTURE Objective: It gives an idea about the different types of art and architecture and the importance of it in Tourism. It gives significant knowledge of Hindu, Mauryan, Dravidians, Chalukyas, Pallavas and Nayakas and also gives a board understanding of Rock cut Architecture and Art of different cultures and all types of Indian paintings. 1. Art and architecture – Definition – Significance – Importance – Types of art and Architecture – role of art and architecture in tourism – role of archeological department in Art and Architecture management. 2. Architecture: Introduction –Indus Valley Civilization-Mauryan Architecture- Buddhist – Dravidians: Chalukyas, Rashtrakutas- Pallavas- Structural Temples- Chola, Pandya – Hoysala- Vijayanagar – Nayakas 3. Rock cut Architecture- Sultanate and Mughal architecture – Indo-saracenic -Christian Architecture: Atrium, Basilica, Bema, and Mausoleum –British -Indo Gothic Architecture. 4. Rock Art- Rajput Art – Rajasthan Art – Bengal school of Art –Gandhara - Peshawar – Mathura school of Art - Sarnath and Kosambi – Southern School of Art. 5. Murals – Mughal – Rajput – Mysore – Tanjore – Madhubani – Pattachitra – Warli –Modern Indian Paintings. References: 1. R.S. Sharma and K.M.Shrimali (2009) Art and Architecture of North India’,Rup and Co., New Delhi,Volume IV, part 2. 2. Gupta, S.P & S.P Asthana., (2007 ) Elements of Indian Art: Including Temple Architecture, Iconometery, NewDelhi 3. Nath, R.,(2004) Temples and Erotic Art of Khajuraho, Rupa and Co., New Delhi, 4. Tomory Edith, (2002) , ‘A history of Fine Art in India and West”, Orient Longman, Chennai Web Sources: 1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arts_%26_Architecture 2. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Indian_rock-cut_architecture 3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Indian_painting 4. indian-heritage-and-culture.blogspot.com/.../midnapore-patachitra-painti...

Learning Outcomes: Students are familiarized with the different types of art and architecture of India. The way art and architecture reflects growth of tourism in India. Students can get better understanding about the history of the rock cut architecture and art.

525

SEMESTER – I CODE: PAPER –III CREDIT: 4 HOSPITALITY AND HOTEL MANAGEMENT

Objective: This paper is useful to understand the concept and the development of Hotel Industry. To classify the types of Accommodation and analyze the functions of Hotel management and presents a clear vision of catering and also deals need and importance of human resources management in hotel industry. 1. Introduction – Hospitality Management – Growth and development of hospitality industry – Role of Hospitality in Tourism – Laws and Regulation pertaining to Hospitality 2. Accommodation – Emergence of Hotel – Classification and grading of Hotels – Types of Accommodation – Main and Supplementary accommodation – International/National Hotel Associations and its aims and functions – Changing profile of the Accommodation Sector. 3. Hotel Management – Objective and functions of Hotel – Room and tariff plans – Housekeeping and allied service – food and beverages management – restaurant and lobby management – Kitchen and cutlery – Dining management. 4. Catering – Types of catering – Airways – Railways – Roles of Private and Public caterers – National and International cuisine –Food Quality and Food packaging – Training for food packing – Food Preservation and it importance. 5. HR Management – Sales Marketing – purchase and storage – Event Management – Objective – Employability – Professionalism Food quality and security. References: 1. Jag Mohan Singh 1991 ‘Professional Hotel Management’, S.Chand and Company Ltd., Ram Nagar, New Delhi – 110051 2. Negi 1990 ‘Hotels for Tourism Development’, Metropolitan India. 3. R.E.Sinha 1996 ‘Tourism Strategies, Planning and Development’, Common Wealth Publishers. 4. R.K.Sinha 1992 ‘Travel and Tourism Management’, Dominant Publishers and Distributors 116-A South Anarkali, New Delhi – 110051 5. Travis Elliot 1971 ‘Food Services and Management’, Orient Longman, London. Web Sources: 1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hospitality_management_studies 2. study.com/directory/category/Business/Hospitality_Management.html 3. http://www.wisegeek.org/ Learning outcomes: Students gained knowledge about the role and importance of hotel industry in the growth of tourism along with their rules and regulations as well as various types of accommodation and cuisine styles of India

526

SEMESTER - I CODE: PAPER – IV CREDIT: 4 MEDICAL TOURISM Objective: This paper gives the scope, purpose and dimensions of Medical Tourism and gives broad idea of different types of Medical Treatment. It briefs about the Indigenous and Medical Travel Services in detail. It also gives the current scenario of Indian Medical Tourism. 1. Medical Tourism – Nature and Scope of Medical Tourism – Current Scenario, History, Purpose of Medical Travels – Dimensions of Medical Tourism (Wellness tourism, Health tourism). 2. Types of Medical Tourism – Treatment types Natural and Allopathy- Heart, Orthopedic, Cardiology, pediatric and Ayurvedic Therapies, Popular Natural – Common used and Fever, Jaundice, Yellow Fever. 3. Indigenous System – AYUSH and types of Ayurvedic, Yoga, Unani, Sidha and Homeopathy Therapies, Spa, Rejuvenation. 4. Medical Travel Services – National and International Travel Services, Visas, Hospital Logistics, Medical Record Transfer, Communications, Client Assistant, Destination Management, One bill Transparent Pricing. 5. Indian Medical Tourism – India as destiny for Medical treatment – Factors influencing Medical Tourism in India – Indian Medical Touristic destination – NAHT – National Association of Health Tourism, Risks – Legal Issues/ Ethical Issues). References: 1. Neil Lunt, Russell Mannion(2014). Patient mobility in the global marketplace: a multidisciplinary perspective. International Journal of Health Policy and Management (IJHPM) 05/2014; 2(4):155-7. DOI:10.15171/ijhpm.2014.47 2. "Indian medical care goes global",Aljazeera.Net, June 18, 2006 Nov 11, 2006 3. CII-McKinsey (2002): “Health Care in India: The Road Ahead”, CII, McKinsey and Company and Indian Healthcare Federation, New Delhi. 4. Kohli, Shweta Rajpal (2002): “Medical Tourism Growing at 30% a Year: Study”, Rediff.com Money, 12 November. Accessed 27 November 2009: 5. Koivusalo, M and Michael Rowson (2000): “The World Trade Organisation: Implications for Health Policy”, Medicine Conflict and Survival, 16(2)175-91.

Web Sources: 1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Medical_tourism 2. www.cdc.gov/features/medicaltourism/ 3. medicaltourism.com

Learning Outcomes: To broaden the knowledge about the upcoming field of tourism such as medical tourism with the need of it and also analyzing the inflow of tourist towards indigenous medical treatments found in India.

527

SEMESTER – I CODE: PAPER –V CREDIT: 4 PRACTICAL - I MAP READING AND MAP ANALYSIS

Objective: This paper enables the student to learn about Map types, different scale, direction, Bearing, Time calculations and various geographical features. A tourist student should have the knowledge of reading and interpreting a map, this practical paper would help them in this regard.

1. Map - Definition – Types - Scales - Plain, Graphical, Comparative, Time, Pace Scale – Map Setting and Map Reading. 2. Representation of direction of Maps – True North, Magnetic North – Calculation of Magnetic declination – Bearing (Forward and Backward), Conversion of Bearing to Direction – True and Magnetic Bearing – Latitude, Longitude – International Date Line – Calculation of time for important cities of the world – GMT time zones. 3. Land Features and Cross Section Drawing – Hill, Mountains, Plateau, Volcano, Spur, Waterfall, Sand Dunes, V Shaped and U Shaped Valley – Hanging Valley, Conventional Signs and Symbols – Identification of Symbols from Topographic Tourism Plate. 4. Appreciation of Physical, Population, Transport and Tourism Plates – Land use Maps. 5. Interpretation of Topographical Maps (1:50000), Physical and Transport – Tourism Plates. References: 1. Monk House F.F 1980 ‘Maps and Diagrams’, Wilkinson H.R. Methuen and Co. Ltd. 2. R.L. Singh 1979 ‘Elements of Practical Geography’, Kalyani Publishers, New Delhi. 3. R.P. Misra and A. Ramesh 1989 ‘Fundamentals of Cartography’, Macmillan Company, New Delhi. 4. Ramamurthy 1982 ‘Map Interpretation’, Rex Printers, Chennai. 5. Sarkar A.k. 1992 ‘Practical Geography A Systematic Approach’, Orient Longman, Calcutta.

Web Sources: 1. www.physicalgeography.net/fundamentals/2b.html 2. asymapwork.blogspot.com/p/cross-section.html 3. www.vedamsbooks.com/.../national-atlas-indianational-thematic-mapping-o 4. www.mhhe.com/earthsci/geology/plummer/student/.../topomaps.mhtml 6. https://sites.google.com/.../topographical-maps/topics-covered-in-topography... Learning Outcomes: Students are getting familiarity to handle the various types of maps as well as to interpret with practical knowledge in detail and also the use of direction.

528

SEMESTER - II CODE: PAPER -VI CREDIT: 4 CLIMATOLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY Objective: Develops an in-depth knowledge of climate and its parameters. An overview conceptual knowledge of Oceanography is dealt in this paper. The knowledge on climatology and oceanography enables the tourism students to understand the world from geographical perspective. 1. Weather and Climate- Elements of weather and Climate,-Composition and Structure of the Atmosphere – Troposphere, -Stratosphere, Ionosphere Mesosphere, Thermosphere, Exosphere 2. Atmospheric Temperature- Vertica, Horizontal and Seasonal distribution of temperature- Pressure- Vertical and Horizontal distribution of Pressure – Winds(Planetary Periodic and local winds). 3. Air Masses and Fronts- Classification and Properties; Clouds and types- Atmospheric disturbances: Tropical and Temperate cyclones; Thunderstorms and Tornadoes 4. Oceanography – Scope – Importance – Surface configuration of the Ocean floor – Continental shelf – Continental slope – Abyssal plain – Deeps and Trenches 5. Distribution of Temperature and Salinity of Ocean and Seas – Circulation of Oceanic waters –Eli no - Waves, Tides and Currents – Marine deposits and Coral reefs, fringing reef, Barrier reef -Ocean as store house of resource for future. References: 1. Barry, R. G & Chorley, R.J. (1998). “Atmosphere, Weather and Climate”, Routledge. 2. Patterson, S. (1969). “Introduction of Meteorology”, McGraw-Hill Book Co., London. 3. Trewartha, G.T. (1980). “An Introduction to Climate”, International Students Edition, McGraw Hill, New York. 4. K. Siddhartha (1999). “Oceanography: A Brief Introduction”, Kisalya Publications, New Delhi.

Web Sources: 1. www.amazon.in/Climatology-Oceanography-Geography.../9351670066 2. www.bookdepository.com/Climatology-Oceanography.../978818620400... 3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oceanography 4. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Climatology

Learning outcomes: This paper gives in depth idea of climatic elements and their intensity towards the atmospheric disturbance. It also reveals knowledge of oceanic surface and its wealth and movement. The benefits of the students would be two way - the correlation between tourism and geography.

529

CODE: SEMESTER II CREDIT: 4 PAPER VII MODERN SYNTHESIS OF TOURISM

Objective: This paper gives a complete dimension of tourism. It gives idea of different types of tourism, its impact and emerging forms of tourism at National and Global level.

1. Nature and Scope of Tourism – Types of tourists: Traveler, Visitor, Excursionist and Transit visitor- Historical growth and Modern Dimensions of tourism.

2. New Paradigms of tourism at national and global level- Eco tourism- Green tourism- Pilgrimage tourism- Sustainable tourism - Geo tourism - Culinary tourism - Heritage tourism- Nautical tourism- Farm and rural tourism-Soft tourism- MICE tourism

3. Emerging technologies in the tourism sector- Public and private sector in tourism- Web services and travel search engines-mobile apps for tourism promotion-customer Management relationship system-online product sales and marketing (ease my trip, travel planner websites)

4. Sustainable tourism: Concept of demand and supply in tourism- Multiplier effects in tourism- Cost benefit Analysis, Environmental -SWOT Analysis- Sustainable development of tourism in India and Global scenario.

5. Ecological Planning –environmental awareness and consideration or tourism- - Future prospects of tourism- approach (Economic Profit, Ecological planet, Social People) References: 1. A.V.Seaten and M.M.Bennett 1996 ‘Marketing Tourism Products – Concept Issues,Cases’, International Thompson Business Press, London. 2. Negi 2004 ‘Tourist Guide and Tour Operation, Planning and Organising’, Kanishka Publishers, New Delhi. 3. Pran Nath Seth 1985 ‘Sucessful Tourism Management’, Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi Web Sources: 1. https://www2.gwu.edu/~iits/GSTAworkbook/ConservationWorkbook.pdf 2. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Travel_agency 3. http://dtxtq4w60xqpw.cloudfront.net/sites/all/files/pdf/unwtodigitalresources_volume1_t echtourism_eng_0.pdf

Learning Outcomes: This paper introduces the student to the new avenues and modern tourism trends in terms of new paradigms, modern technologies and sustainable tourism for future development.

530

SEMESTER - II CODE: PAPER –VIII CREDIT: 3 ELECTIVE - I CULTURAL GEOGRAPHY

Objective: It gives an elaborate idea of themes and evolution of culture and different types of costumes, languages religions and races at global level.

6. Culture – Concept – Framework of cultural geography –– Man’s invasion of the earth – Earliest Hominids – Australopitheas – Homo habit’s – Homoeructus – Homo Sapiens – Domestication of plants and animals - Human evolution – Early Life – Primitive life – Modern life.

7. Housing and settlement – Elements of Housing systems – Basic settlement forms – Early Hunting tool – Manufacturing tool – Early transport carriers and modes of Transport – Early Agriculture – Tools used for early agriculture.

8. Ancient to recent types of lifestyle: – Food and international cuisine – costumes of the world -Jewellary and its types – Arts of the world – Music of the world – Dances of the world from time to time and from region to region.

9. Languages – World Distribution Indo European Linguistic Family Bi-Linguism – Language and Culture – Religion – Major Religions of the World.

10. Races – Major Races of the World – Caucasoid, Negroid, Mongoloid and Mixed races – Identification of Races and basic traits– Ethnicity-Tribes of the World- Impact of development on tribes of the world.

References: 5. Gettics - et al 1988 ‘Introduction to Geography’, W.M.C. Brown Publishers, Dubuque. 6. J.E. Spencer and W.L. Thomas 1978 ‘Introducing Cultural Geography’, John Wiley and Sons, New York. 7. Majid Hussain 1994 ‘Cultural Geography’, Anmol Publications Pvt., Ltd. New Delhi. 8. Robert H. Stoddard and Others 1986 ‘Human Geography’, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey Web Sources: 5. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cultural_geography 6. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Race_(human_categorization) 7. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clothing_in_the_ancient_world 8. https://books.google.co.in/books?isbn=8180690741

531

Learning Outcomes: Human evolution through various phases, Cultural evolution by means of Settlement, Food, Life style, Languages, religions faces and tribes of the world are well established.

SEMESTER - II CODE: PAPER –IX CREDIT: 3

ELECTIVE – II FIELD WORK IN GEOGRAPHY Objective: It gives clear idea of the importance of field work in Geography teaching. It gives an idea of identification of Landforms through different types of survey such as Eco, Socio-economic and land use survey. 6. Field work – Definition, Importance and Significance – Geography Teaching and Field work – Maps for field work (Historical, Topographical, Geological, Thematic, Sketch maps and Route maps) 7. Landform Survey – Identification of landforms – (Mountains, Plateaus, Plains – Coastal and River, Beaches and lakes) – Field survey – One exercise and Preparation of Survey Report 8. Eco-Survey – Identification and Classification of Bio-diversity – Flora and Fauna, Field Survey (One exercise– College/Road/Home Environment/National Park – Prepare Rough Plan/Sketch Plan and Survey Report) 9. Socio-Economic survey–Primary and Secondary – Questionnaire/Schedules, Interview, Census and Statistical Reports. Prepare a field survey report (One exercise with Map/Plan/Sketch/Photographs and Diagrams) 10. Land use Survey – Land use types – Residential, Industrial, Institutional, Commercial, Recreational, Open space, Mixed and other Land uses. Prepare a Land use Survey – Map/Plan/Sketch/Photographs/Diagram. References: 5. E.M. Sanders (1999). “Observational Geography”, George Philip and Sons Ltd, London. 6. Hatch (1938). “Outdoor Geography”, Blackie and SM Limited, London and Glascow. 7. J.E. Archa and T.H. Dalton (1920). “Fieldwork in Geography”, Batsford Ltd, London. 8. K.S. Wheelr and M. Herding (1965). “Geographical Fieldwork: A Hand Book”, Blend Educational Ltd. Web Sources: 4. www.rgs.org › ... › Fieldwork and local learning 5. www.fao.org/docrep/006/t0165e/t0165e07.htm 6. www.cifor.org/.../practical-guide-for-socio-economic-livelihood-land-te...

532

Learning Outcomes: This Paper gives training about how to draw sketch and Route maps which is useful to prepare a sketch plan of a particular area. Knowledge about how to Prepare a survey map.

SEMESTER - II CODE: EDE-I CREDIT: 3 RESEARCH ANALYTICAL TECHNIQUES (Offered to other Department)

Objective: The paper gives broad idea of collection of data, sampling and methods of hypothesis testing for a research study. It gives clear vision of various spatial and statistical analysis of research. It also gives knowledge of trend surface and construction of models for social studies. 6. Data Collection – Data Sources – Data Types – Primary, Secondary – Sampling – Simple Random – Stratified – Nesting. 7. Hypothesis Testing - Needs and Types of hypotheses – Goodness of fit and significance and confidence levels - Parametric and Non-parametric procedures: Chi-square test, ‘T’ test, ‘F’ test, Analysis of Variance (ANOVA). 8. Bivariate Analysis: Scatter diagram – Simple linear– Spearman’s Rank and Product Moment Correlation Coefficients, Regression – Residuals and their Mapping. 9. Multivariate Analysis: Basic Principles and elements of Factor Analysis - Principal - Cluster Analysis. 10. Trend Surface and Models: Gravity Models- Population Potential – Index of Concentration- Growth rate- Scalogram References: 6. David Unwin, Introductory Spatial Analysis, Methuen, London, 1981. 7. Gregory, S. Statistical Methods and the Geographer, Longman, London, 1978. 8. Hammond R and P.S. Mc Cullagh 1974.Quantitative Techniques in Geography: An Introduction, Clarendan Press, Oxford, 9. Maurice Yeats, An Introduction to Quantitative Analysis in Human Geography, McGraw Hill, New York, 1974. 10. Peter Haggett, Andrew D. Cliff, and Allan Frey, Location Methods Vol. I and II, Edward Arnold, London, 1977. Web Sources: 5. www.slideshare.net/parabprathamesh/primary-sec 6. unstats.un.org/unsd/hhsurveys/finalpublication/ch19fin3.pdf 7. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Statistical_hypothesis_testing 8. www.fs.fed.us/nrs/pubs/jrnl/2014/nrs_2014_butler_001.pdf

533

Learning Outcomes: Enables students to know the data types and sources. To Make familiar with the statistical techniques and introduce the students to be well aware of the advanced techniques for data analysis

SEMESTER - II CODE: PAPER –X CREDIT: 4 PRACTICAL – II MAPPING OF SPATIAL DATA FOR TOURISM Objective: This Paper gives a training the representation of tourism mapping, diagrammatic representation of tourist data. The spatial statistical technique and mapping of distribution of Tourist Centres. 1. Tourism Mapping – Chorocromatic maps – Choro- Schematic maps – Choropleth map of attraction, accommodation, travel agencies and money exchange centers (2 exercises Chennai , Tamil Nadu) 2. Mapping of Traffic area _ Area I, Area II and Area III- Air port code mapping – Airport destination mapping-Air fare calculation (2 exercises) 3. Diagrammatic representation of tourist data by line graph, Bar, Pie, Pictorial diagram using computer – Travel cost- Isoline and Isochrones maps –Flow Chart - Itinerary preparation. 4. Spatial statistics – Mean centre, Median centre, Weighted mean centre, Standard distance- deviation circle – Correlation – Chi-square test. 5. Mapping of Distribution of Tourist Centers and its types (3 exercises)– Nearest Neighbour Analysis(tourist centers), -Graphs (Growth data), Tourist flow diagrams(national, International) References:

1. Aslam Mohammed 1977 ‘Statistical Methods in Geographical Studies’, Rajesh Publication. 2. Cole and King 1989 ‘Quantitative geography, Techniques and Theories in Geography’, John Wiley & sons Ltd., London. 3. Gregory S. 1963 ‘Statistical Methods and Geography’, Longman, London. 4. K. Briggs .B.A 1976 ‘Introducing Transportation Network’, University of London Press Ltd. 5. Monk House F.J 1984 ‘Maps And Diagrams’, Methuen and Co. Ltd., London. 6. R.L. Singh 1980 ‘Elements of Practical Geography’, Kalyani Publications, New Delhi. Web Sources: 1. www.govtonlineexam.com/.../Optional-Geography-7-Cartography.pdf 2. www.academia.edu/.../Structural_Geology_An_Introduction_to_Geomet... 3. ww2010.atmos.uiuc.edu/(Gh)/guides/maps/sfcobs/wnd.rxml 4. www.iasri.res.in/design/ebook/EB.../5-Spatial%20Data%20Analysis.pdf 5. webapps.fundp.ac.be/geotp/SIG/Spatial%20Statistics/spatstat.ppt

Learning outcomes: The students would have the knowledge of analytic representation of tourist data diagrammatically and also can map the tourist data.

534

SEMESTER - III CODE: PAPER –XI CREDIT: 4 TOURISM MARKETING

Objective: The paper explains about Tourism Business, Concepts like Marketing, Marketing mix along with Function and Management process.

1. Marketing Concept – Mass production and the Markets – Marketing in Tourism – The Tourist “Product” – Tourist Markets – Markets – Market segmentation – Its bases, Marketing process and function.

2. Marketing Mix – Elements - Product Policy - Pricing Policy - Promotion Programmes – Marketing Services - Intangibility - Heterogeneous - Temporary Ownership - Perish ability - Inseparability.

3. Tourist Markets - Classification Based on Marketing Purposes - Vacation Tourist - Business Tourist - Recreation Tourist - Properties of the Tourist products.

4. Marketing Process and Functions - Market Research - Product Formalities - and Development Product Distribution - Product Advertising - Sale Promotion and Public Relations.

5. Tourism Marketing Management - Attitudes and the Business Environment - Production Orientation - Sales Orientation - Marketing Orientation – Market Plan – Future of Tourism threats and Tourism Growth – Tourism Marketing and Employment.

References:

1. A.V. Seatan and M.M. Bennett 1996 ‘Marketing Tourism Products-Concepts Issues, Cases’, International Thompson Business Press, London. 2. Chuck.Y. Gee et al 2000 ‘The Travel Industry’, AV Publishing Company, Connecticut. 3. Mario D’ Souza 1998 ‘Tourism Development and Management’, Mangaldeep Publication, New Delhi. 4. Prof. Akshaykumar 1997 ‘Tourism Management’, Common Wealth Publishing, New Delhi. 5. Rantildeep Singh 1994 ‘Tourism Today Structure Marketing and Profile’, Anmol Publication, Allahabad. Web Sources: 1. www.tourismmarketingconcepts.com/ 2. http://www.dukagjinicollege.eu/research/Elida%20Cirikovic(fq_135-141).pdf 3. http://www.researchgate.net/publication/236971347_Marketing_Mix_Modeling_for_the _Tourism_Industry_A_Best_Practices_Approach

535

Learning Outcomes: Helps in understanding the need for marketing in tourism and also differentiating the marketing tourism products from other products in the market.

SEMESTER – III CODE: PAPER –XII CREDIT: 4 INTERNATIONAL TRAVEL FORMS AND FORMALITIES Objectives – To explain the forms and formalities required and related to travelling and the necessity of travel regularities and documents.

1. International travel (in- bound and outbound, transit,)-travel related tasks (Agency/person involved)- Tourist Traffic region(UNWTO regions and traffic regions I,II, III)- elements of travel(Point of generation, destination, Transit, stop over, circle trip). 2. Travel Documentation- Passport- Definition - Types of Passport- Ordinary or Normal – Official – Diplomat -Documents required for applying a passport – Various Services Offered by the Passport Office – Loss of Passport. 3. Visa- Definition – Travel Information Manual - Types of Visa- Entry/Visitor Visa – Transit Visa – Transit without Visa – Re-entry permits – Exit Visa – Schengen visa - Obtaining a Visa- Requirements for Visa – Visa Refugee, visa refund 4. Travel regulations - Health Regulations for International Travel – special permit for Restricted areas - Vaccinations – Health Certificates – Immunization - Validity of Vaccination –.Emigration and Immigration – Travel Insurance 5. Customs Regulations – Clearance of Incoming Passengers - Foreign Exchange/currency – Indian Currency – Cash - Traveler Cheque – Bank Draft – Telegraph Transfer – Credit Cards- Travel Insurance- Taxes paid by Travelers – Airport Taxes – Taxes charged by the Indian Government References 1. Sunetra Roday, Archana Biwal, Vandana Joshi, 2009, “Tourism Operations and Management”, Oxford Uniersity Press. 2. Bhatia. A.K. 2001, “International Tourism Management”, Sterling Publishing Pvt Ltd, New Delhi. Web Sources: 1. https://www.airfrance.hr/HR/en/common/.../pratique/visa_document_airfrance.htm 2. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Travel_document 3. https://www.icao.int/Meetings/atconf6/Documents/Doc%209626_en.pdf

536

Learning Outcomes: Understand the importance and types of travel documents. Knowledge of the procedure for obtaining the Visa based on the travel and the significance of the travel documents

SEMESTER - III CODE: PAPER –XIII CREDIT: 3 ELECTIVE – III POLITICAL GEOGRAPHY Objective: This paper gives an idea of history, development, theories and approaches to the study. It covers the political area at the global level which comprises economic, human, political pattern of states, territory, frontiers and boundaries. Also deals about political geography of India in various aspects including electoral system in India. 6. Nature and Scope of political geography – History – development of political geography- Geopolitical school of thought – Approaches to study.

7. Political area: Countries of world – Natural setting of Political – Economic and human features, Political patterns of states – Dependent areas; Territory, State and Nation: Territory and Territoriality – Elements of Spatial structure – Nation and Nationalism – Frontiers and Boundaries – Boundaries and International tension in South Asia. 8. Political geography of India: Historical background – Political units of India – States of the Indian Union. Union of India: Physical factors – Economic aspects – population and ethnic factors – Other territories. 9. Electoral geography – Elections in India – Electoral division – Parliamentary constituencies – Assembly constituency – Local body election –Corporation – Town Panchayat –Municipality –Village administration. 10. Theories of Political Geography: Sack’s theory of Human territoriality – Hartshorne’s theory of Territorial Integration. References: 6. G. Etzel Pearcy and Russell H. Fifield (1948). “Political Geography”. Thomas Y. Crowell company, USA. 7. G. Etzel Pearcy and Associates (1957). “World Political Geography”. Second Edition, Thomas Y. Crowell company, USA. 8. J.R.V. Prescoot (1972). “Political Geography”. Richard Clay (The Chaucer Press) Ltd., Great Britain. 9. Peter J. Taylor (1985). “Political Geography: World Economy, Nation-Sate and Locality”. Longman Group Limited, New York. 10. Samuel Van Valkenburg and Carl L. Stotz (1955). “Elements of Political geography”. Second Edition, Prentice-Hall, New Jersey. Web Sources: 4. www.geography.about.com/od/politicalgeography

537

5. www.electoralgeography.com/new/en/category/countries/i/india 6. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Political_geography

Learning Outcomes: The paper gives the students a board understanding about the world political scenario. The paper helps to understand the factors inducing political conflicts which affects peace and also enriches the students about the Indian political system.

SEMESTER - III CODE: PAPER –XIV CREDIT: 3 ELECTIVE - IV RESEARCH METHODOLOGY Objective: This paper gives the broad idea about how to execute a research study. Establishing step by step logical organization and precise methods to identify problems, gather data, analyze and draw valid conclusions.

1. Definition of Research – Aims and Objective of Research – Types of Research – Qualitative, Quantitative, Descriptive, Analytical, Applied, Fundamental, Conceptual, Empirical – Scientific method - Selection of problem.

2. Data Collection: Primary and Secondary data – Field work – Aerial Photograph, Census data and satellite imageries as data sources - Sampling and sample survey – Designing Questionnaires and schedules.

3. Hypothesis testing - formulation of Hypothesis – its importance – Scientific Hypothesis – Null Hypothesis – Alternative Hypothesis - Hypothesis Testing - X2 Test, ‘t ‘ Test, ‘F’ Test.

4. Need for Quantitative Techniques – Measurement of Quantitative data – levels of measurement - Nominal, Interval, Ordinal and Ratio scales – Data transformation – Measures of central tendency and dispersion – Correlation and Regression.

5. Design of Project – Research proposal – Scientific Writing – Methodological frame work - Chapter organization – Appendix – Bibliography.

References: 5. Amodoe and Colledge1975 ‘An Introduction to Scientific Reasoning in Geography’, John Willey and Sons. 6. Louns burry J.P. 1979 ‘Introduction to Scientific Geographical Research’, Brown and Co, Iowa. 7. Cole and King 1989 ‘Quantitative Geography Techniques and Theories in Geography’, John Wiley and sons Ltd., London. 8. Sadhu Singh 1980 ‘Research Methodology in Social Science’,Himalaya Publishing

538

Company, Bombay. Web Sources: 4. www.fao.org/.../the...census...censuses...surveys/...survey-design/en/ 5. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Statistical_hypothesis_testing 6. https://blog.udemy.com/quantitative-techniques/

Learning Outcomes: Gained the Knowledge about the execution of the research study. Developed their skill on setting up of the aims and objectives in solving the problems and identified the need and various quantitative techniques for the Research Study. Acquired the skill on the design and writing of a research proposal and project. Enables students to know the data types and sources- Make familiar with the statistical techniques-Introduce the students to well aware of the advanced techniques for data analysis

SEMESTER - III CODE: EDE-II CREDIT: 3 FUNDAMENTALS OF GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM (Offered to Other Department) Objective: This paper is designed for non-geographers who can gain knowledge on the history and components of cartographic techniques and the coordination between Maps and GIS software. They are made aware of Toposheets, Aerial photos, GPS and GIS applications 6. Geography as Spatial science and GIS concepts: Introduction - Definition – History and development of GIS – Components: Hardware, Software, Procedure, Data and Users – Digital Cartography 7. Maps and GIS – Shape of the earth – Coordinate systems –– Map projection and its Types- UTM - Geo Referencing 8. Data Sources – Topographical maps – Aerial photos – Satellite Imageries – Global positioning systems -Data Input - Keyboard entry - Scanning – Digitization. 9. Basic Data Models: Spatial and Non-spatial Data – Raster and Vector Data – Advantages and Disadvantages of Raster and Vector GIS – Database Management-Data models(Hierarchical, network, relational and object oriented). 10. GIS Software –CAD- GIS-ARC GIS, ARC VIEW, MAP INFO,GRASS and QGIS -GIS application : Environmental and National Resources Management, Planning and Engineering, Land Information System, Urban Planning. References: 5. Chandra A.M. & Ghosh.S.K. (2016).Remote Sensing and Geographic Information System. Narosa Publishing House

539

6. Bhatta,Basudeb.(2011). Remote sensing and GIS. Oxford University Press / Radha press NewDelhi. 7. Dr. M.A. Siddique 2006 ‘Introduction to Geographic Information Systems’, Sharda Pustak Bhawan, Allahabad 8. Clarke 2001 ‘Getting started with Geographical Information systems’, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Web Sources:

5. wamis.org/agm/pubs/agm8/Paper-6.pdf 6. http://igre.emich.edu/wsatraining/TManual/Chapter1/Chap1.pdf 7. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GIS_file_formats 8. ww.gisinecology.com/Introduction_To_GIS_Software.htm

Learning outcome: This paper is offered for other department students who are made to understand the sources of geographical data (spatial and non-spatial) to create analyse and prepare map. The uses and application of GIS software in various fields. SEMESTER – III CODE: PAPER –XV CREDIT: 4 PRACTICAL – III AUTOMATED TOURISM DATA ANAYLSIS

Objective: It gives training in tourism data analysis and data representation statistically and familiarization of online booking. Hands on experience of the application of GIS in tourism. 1. Data base creation (Spatial and Non Spatial data-tourist ) Data Base Manipulation (Data conversion into percentage , Ratio, Average, Deviation) Data Analysis-growth rate, scalogram, Index of concentration (Tourist spots, Hotels, Travel Agency) 2. Creation of Thematic layers – Layers of Tourist attraction and its types ( 3Exercises) – Accommodation (Star Hotels and Budget Hotels) – Travel agencies (2 Exercises) Money Exchange centre (2 Exercises) 3. Vector data Analysis – Creation of Point, Line and Area layers ,Buffering for Tourist attraction ( 2 Exercises) 4. Itinerary preparation – Air fare calculation – preparation of reservation card – manual, computerized- Brochures – Pamphlets – Short Guide book Preparation for any two Tourist spots. 5. Automated Tour Operations - Online Bus booking, train booking and Flight booking , hotel booking (economy class, business class etc)

References:

1. Aslam Mohammed 1977 ‘Statistical Methods in Geographical studies’, Rajesh Publications. 2. Cole and King 1989 ‘Quantitative Geography – Techniques and Theories in Geography’,

540

John Wiley and Sons Ltd., London. 3. K. Briggs .B.A. 1976 ‘Introducing Transportation Network’, University of London Press Ltd. 4. Monk House F.J 1984 ‘Maps and Diagrams’, Methuen and Co. Ltd., London. 5. ‘Science in Geography Series’, 1994, Oxford University Press. 6. Taffy E.J. and Gauthier Jr. H.L. 1973 ‘Geography of Transportation’, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey. Web Sources: 1. https://people.hofstra.edu/geotrans/eng/methods/ch1m3en.html 2. psscive.nic.in/.../CBSE%20Class%20XII%20Travel%20&%20Tourism/C... 3. https://books.google.co.in/books?isbn=817022957X 4. https://www.stat.berkeley.edu/~aldous/206-SNET/.../xie_levinson.pdf 5. http://www.gdufs.biz/Questionnaire%20Design.pdf

Learning Outcomes: Students will gain in-depth knowledge to analyze various data of tourism with the help of Statistics and can prepare spatial maps using GIS. And also the students would get knowledge of online booking

SEMESTER - IV CODE: PAPER -XVI CREDIT: 4 TOURISM ADMINISTRATION AND TOUR OPERATORS Objective: This paper gives various types of Tourism administration and necessary skills for tourism operation and functions of agencies, role of Tour operators and travel agency . And also deals with various transport systems and role of transport in tourism promotion. 1. Tourism Administration – Definition – Basic Concept Financial Management – Foreign Currency Conversions – Currency Regulation – RBI Regulation and Formalities. Tourism and Skills – Types of Skills: Personal Skills – Technical Skills – Language Skills – Communication Skills – Entrepreneurial Skills – Computer Skills. 2. Tourist Visitor-Traveler-Excursionist - Definition and Differentiation- Tourism Recreation and Leisure- Inter-relationships - Tourism Components -Elements and Infrastructure - Types and Typologies of tourism 3. Tour Operator – Types of Tour Operator – Inbound – Outbound – Domestic – types of Package Tour- Independent tours – Inclusive Tours - Escorted tours – Business Tours - Guides and Escort- Tourism Operations and Transport – Transport System and Development – Water and Air Transport – Freight Rates – Cargo Management. Role of Transport in the Promotion of Tourism 4. Travel Agency – Infrastructure – Location – Adequate Finance – Approval – Source of Income – Commission on Selling – Incentives - Types of Travel agencies-Whole sale Travel

541

Agency – Retail Travel Agency- Full Service – Commercial – Implant Agency - Functions of Travel agency 5. Impact of Tourism – Economic Impact – Employment – Tax revenue – Foreign exchange- Improved Infrastructure – The Multiplier effect- Environmental Impact – Depletion of Natural Resources – Positive Impacts – Socio- Cultural Impact of Tourism. References: 1. Sunetra Roday et.al (2009) Tourism Operations and Management, Oxford University Press. 2. Jagmohan Negi 2004 ‘Tourist Guide and Tour Operation, Planning and Organising’, Kanishka Publishers, New Delhi. 3. Lajipathi Rai 1993 ‘Development of Tourism in India’, Printwell, Jaipur. 4. Y.G.Joshi and D.K.Varma 1998 ‘Social Environment for Sustainable Development’, Rawat Publications, Jaipur. Web Sources: 1. www.psscive.nic.in/...%20Tourism/Class%20IX%20Tourism%20Product%20I.... 2. www.iti.gov.nt.ca/.../tourism-product-diversification-and-marketing-pro... s1.downloadmienphi.net/file/downloadfile4/147/1389984.pdf 3. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Travel_agency 4. http://www.jtst.gov.bc.ca/tourismstrategy/

Learning Outcomes: Acquired the knowledge about the various types of Tourism Administration. Enriches the necessary skills for Tourism Operation and Functions of Agencies. Explore the function and formalities of Tours. Identify the various Transport systems and role of Transport in Tourism Promotion. SEMESTER - IV

CODE: PAPER –XVII CREDIT: 4

TOURISM AND INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY Objectives: This paper gives an idea how to book accommodation as well as e tickets for railways, airways and roadways. It helps to gain knowledge to use recent technology in tourism 1. Role of technology in travel &tourism industry- Internet, Reservation system, Computer systems, Mobile communication,- Hospitality and Tourism industry- Communication, Reservations and Guest Services Systems. 2. Main sectors in Travel Industry –Transport sector- Airline ticketing – Railway booking- Car/Bus rental – Accommodation Sector – hotel booking – Attraction Sector – sightseeing – historical places. 3. Role of Technology in tourism promotion- Advertising(online,media, magazines)- Personal selling through mobile apps and messages-public relations and Publicity-digital marketing (Online advertising,b.Informative websites,c.search engine marketing)- Tourism promotions (Voicemail/social media marketing by user).

542

4. Other Role of Technology -Booking systems - technology provide customer the option to book tickets from home 5 Technology in marketing- Customer Relationships and Follow ups – a database of customer information – an electronic newsletter – Emails regarding the new offers – Feedback – surveys regarding service. References: 1. Tourism and Information Technology G. Raveendran (2010)Department of Tourism, Transport Bhawan, New Delhi-110 001.

2. Information Technology: (2010)Its Uses in Tourism Industry Mekonnen G/Egziabher (Catering and Tourism Training Institute) 3. Information and Communication Technologies in Tourism 2010: Proceedings of ... By Ulrike Gretzel, Rob Law, Matthias Fuchs

Web Sources: 1. http://www.egyankosh.ac.in/bitstream/123456789/36241/1/MTM4-13.pdf] 2. http://foldoc.org/Information+and+Communication+Technology 3. http://specials.ft.com/lifeonthenet/FT3NXTH03DC.html

Learning Outcomes: The students would have the theoretical knowledge about the various recent technology used in the field of travel and tourism industry. The sector based technology is also briefed in the paper. The procedures online booking of train, bus, flight and hotel is also explained

SEMESTER - IV CODE: PAPER –XVIII CREDIT: 3 ELECTIVE – V CATERING FOR TOURISM

Objective: It gives immense information about growth and significance of catering and also deals with factors affecting catering and eating habits. It deals with Regional cuisines of India and meal plans. And also discusses the legal and Health issues related to Catering.

1. Catering – Scope - Importance and Significance - Growth and Role of Catering in the Travel and Tourism industry – Factors affecting catering and eating habits (Natural, Religious and Socio-Economic). 2. Food and Beverage Department – Types of Food and Beverage Operations - Classification of Catering Establishments - Commercial (Hotels, Restaurant, Coffee shop, Bars, Banquets, Snack Bar, Executive Lounges) Non-Commercial (Hospitals, Residential Mess, Office Canteens) 3. Cuisines – Factors affecting Cuisine – New Cuisine (Fusion Cuisines, Nouvelle Cuisines) Global Cuisines (East Asia – Japan, Chinese, North American – U.S.A, Oceanic Cuisines) - Regional Cuisines (North Indian and South Indian Cuisines)

543

4. Food and Meal Plans – Basic Types of Menu (Breakfast, Brunch, Lunch, Hi-Tea, Dinner, Supper) – Designing Menu – Menu Types (Ala Carte & Table D’Lote) – Menu Planning – Considerations and Constraints – Regional Cuisines of India – Hyderabadi, Bengali, Goan, Gujarathi, Rajasthani, Kashmiri, Maharashtra, Punjabi, Chettinad, Kerala, Dum, Awadhi. 5. Impact of Catering in Tourism – Economic Impact (Employment Generation and Earnings) – Environmental Impact (Food Contamination – Solid Waste Generation and Disposal) – Legal and Health Issues in Catering. References: 1. Brian Verghees,(2009), ‘Professional F&B Services’Mc. Millan India Ltd., Chennai 2. David Fostlett, (1999), ‘Theory of Catering’, ELTS Publishers, London 3. Sudier Andrews, (2007), ‘Food & Beverages Services’, Tata Mc. Graw Hill Ltd., New Delhi 4. Thangam E. Phillip (2010), “Modern Cookery for Teaching and Trade” Vol I & II, Orient Black Swan Publishers Ltd, New Delhi Web Sources: 1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Global_cuisine 2. https://www.yaaka.cc/unit/types-of-catering-establishment/ 3. www.studymode.com/.../role-of-catering-establishment-in-travel-tourism..

Learning Outcomes: Gained knowledge about the growth and significance of Catering and Identified the type of food and beverages operation. Develops the ability on dealing with the regional cuisines of India and also Meal plans. Acquiring knowledge on the legal and health issues related to catering.

SEMESTER - IV CODE: PAPER –XIX CREDIT: 4 PRACTICAL – IV ON THE JOB TRAINING, INSTITUTIONAL TRAINING AND TOUR REPORTS Objectives: This paper intends prepare the student as tour operator, organizer guide and also as a travel agent in exposing oneself to tourism marketing arena. 1. On the Job Training - Tourism Organization/Travel Agencies. 2. Tour Report preparation. 3. Institutional Internship – Catering, Railways, Bus Transport, and Institution engaged in Ticketing Airport

Content External Valuation Internal Total

544

S. No Valuation (100) Viva- Reports Total (25) Voce (50) (75) (25)

On the Job 1 Training (Two 20 5 25 5 30 Training)

2 Tour 20 15 30 5 40

Institutional 3 10 5 15 5 20 Training

4 Internal Viva 10 10

Total 50 25 75 25 100

Learning Outcomes: After completion of this paper, the student becomes a full fledged tour operator who can conduct tours on her own and can start their self earned tour business

SEMESTER - IV

CODE: PAPER –XX CREDIT: 4

PROJECT

The students have to select a specific topic for their Project Work. The students may select some of the following themes for their project.

Tourism management, tourism product, tourist destinations, medical tourism, travel formalities and hotel industry and cater industry, eco tourism and various other tourism related topics.

The students should follow the research guidelines by referring Research Methodology before taking up the Project Work.

545

Project Report (not to exceed of 50 pages excluding tables, Maps, Charts, references, index and bibliography)

The project report contains the following: a) Introduction b) Review of literature c) Study Area d) Data sources e) Main Objectives f) Materials and Method g) Results and Discussion h) Conclusion i) Photos j) References

Content UE IA

Project Report 60 15

Viva-Voce 15 10

Total 75 25

Above work should be done with the consultation of the staff-in-charge (project tour). Viva-Voce would be conducted after the completion of the project report.

LEARNING OUTCOMES: The students enhance and explore their knowledge in tourism and travel industry. They get fully equipped in preparing a report. They are aware of research techniques applied for the analysis of the tourism data.

546

DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY

M.PHIL GEOGRAPHY

Title of the Papers of Revised Syllabus for the Batch June 2018 onwards

Paper Marks Title of the Paper Subject Code No. (100)

I Research Methodology in Geography

Quantitative Techniques in Geographical II Research

Optional Paper (Syllabus will be framed by the III supervisor based on Subject Specialization)

547

CODE: PAPER-I CREDITS: RESEARCH METHODOLOGY IN GEOGRAPHY Objective: This paper gives the broad idea about how to execute a research study. Establishing step by step logical organized and rigorous methods to identify problems, gather data, analyze and draw valid conclusions. 1. Research: Objectives – Science and Scientific Explanations – Research in Pure – Applied and Social Science – Inter disciplinary – Multi disciplinary approaches in geography. 2. Geographic concepts, theories and laws, and models in research: Davis Concept, Central Place Theory, Von Thunen, Big Bang theory, Multiple Nuclei, Concentric Zone Theory, Malthus Theory, Demographic Transition Theory, Optimum Theory, Weber’s Industrial Location, Zelensky. 3. Collection of Primary and Secondary data – Designing of questionnaire and schedule - coding and need for pilot study. Generation of data – Sampling and Sample observation and data recording. 4. Formulation of Hypothesis – Testing of hypothesis –Chi-square test- ‘F’ test- ‘T’ test- – qualitative and quantitative thematic maps-Statistical and Cartographical mapping techniques. 5. Reference Work: Notes taking – Bibliographic work – Review of Journals and books: Design of Research: Aims and Objectives – Methodological framework. Organisation of chapters – Footnotes – Appendix – Glossary – Selected Bibliography. Final drafting of Thesis – Editing – Drafting of synopsis – Abstracts and Research findings. References: 1. Amodoe & Colledge 1975 ‘An Introduction to Scientific Reasoning in Geography’, John Willey and Sons. 2. Banag and Laurenborg J.P. 1979 ‘Introduction to Scientific Geographical Research’, Brown and Co, Lowa. 3. Cole and King 1989 ‘Quantitative Geography Techniques and Theories in Geography’, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., London. 4. Davis K.D. 1972 ‘The Conceptual Revolution in Geography’, Longman, London. 5. Gregory S 1963 ‘Statistical Methods for Geographers’, University of London Press. 6. Sadhu Singh 1980 ‘Research Methodology in Social Science’, Himalaya Publishing Company, Bombay. Learning Outcomes: students will gain the Knowledge about the execution of the research study. Their skill will be Developed on setting up of the aims and objectives in solving the problems and identify the need for various quantitative techniques to carry out the Research Study.

548

CODE: PAPER-II CREDITS: QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES IN GEOGRAPHICAL RESEARCH Objective: This paper helps to acquire more knowledge about Quantitative techniques to find the problems and solutions. 1. Research Data – Types – Qualitative – Quantitative – Semi quantitative – Data Sources – Topography Maps, Census, Thematic Maps, Aerial Photo, Satellite Imageries, Net Sources, Geographical web search Engine. 2. Data Explosion – Current Trends – Problems of Data Management – Data Input – Data Management – Data Manipulation – Data Analysis. 3. Research Analytic Techniques: Correlation Regression, Residuals. Hypothesis testing, Contingency tables, Multivariate analysis – Factor – Cluster. 4. Population and regional data Analysis – Sampling, Selection of Samples Nesting – Stratified – Random – Systematic. Index of Concentration – Index of Dissimilarity, Rn Statistics, Theissen Polygon, Buffering, Land use analysis, Scalogram, Weightage Index. 5. Use of Remotely censored data in Geographical analysis and Mapping – Aerial Photos and Satellite Imageries.-Automated Computer Cartography GIS and Remote sensing in geographical research (three classic data models –raster and vector data-Data generation – Data transformation to Mapping form. References: 1. Lily Sand and Keifer 1998 ‘Fundamentals of Image Interpretation, Methuen company, London. 2. Keith c. Clark 1990 ‘Analytical and Computer Assisted Cartography’ Prentice Hall Eaglewood cliff, New Jersy. 3. Gregory. 1963 ‘Statistical Methods for Geographers’, Longman, London. 4. P.A.Burrough and M.C. Donnell 1998 ‘ Principles of Geographical Information System’ Oxford University Press, London. 5. Andrey J.Roth 1995 ‘The Research papers on Process, Form and Content’, Wadsworth publishing company, U.S.A. 6. R.J. Johnson 1974 ‘Multivariate Statistical Analysis in Geography’, Arnold, U.S.A. 7. G.S. Gosal(ed) 1999 ‘Fourth survey of Research Geography’, Manak Publications, New Delhi. 8. Dr. K.L. Narasimha Moorthy 1999 ‘Geographical Research’, Concept Publishing Co., New Delhi. Learning Outcomes: students can develop their skill on setting up of the aims and objectives in solving the problems and identify the need for various quantitative techniques to execute Research . They will acquire the skill on the design and writing of a research proposal and project. Enables students to know the data types and sources-Make familiar with the statistical techniques.

549

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI - 600 004

POST GRADUATE SYLLABUS FOR THE ACADEMIC YEAR 2018 -2019 ONWARDS

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

M.Sc. HOME SCIENCE-FAMILY RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 2018-2019 ONWARDS

550

551

DEPARTMENT OF HOME SCIENCE

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

TITLE OF THE PAPERS OF THE SYLLABUS FOR THE BATCH 2018 -2019 ONWARDS

COURSE: M.SC. HOME SCIENCE – FAMILY RESOURCE MANAGEMENT DEGREE: M.SC.

SEM PAPER NO TITLE OF COURSE PAGE CODE UE IA TOTAL C NO.

I I LIFE SPACE PLANNING 1 75 25 100 4

II WOMEN’S STUDIES 3 75 25 100 4

III SURFACE ENRICHMENT IN TEXTILES 5 75 25 100 4

IV RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 7 75 25 100 4

V LIFE SPAN NUTRITION 9 75 25 100 4

Il VI 11 75 25 100 4

VII INTERIOR DECORATION 13 75 25 100 4

VIII INTERIOR DECORATION PRACTICAL 15 75 25 100 4

IX ELECTIVE-I EQUIPMENT 17 75 25 100 3

X ELECTIVE- II ENTREPRENEURSHIP MANAGEMENT 19 75 25 100 3

XI EDE I - BASICS OF INTERIOR DECORATION 41 75 25 100 3

III XII HUMAN ENGINEERING 21 75 25 100 4

XIII ADVANCED RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 23 75 25 100 4

XIV APPLIED STATISTICS 25 75 25 100 4

XV ELECTIVE – III FOOD PROCESSING AND PRESERVATION 27 75 25 100 3

552

XVI ELECTIVE-IV INTERIOR DECORATION IN COMMERCIAL 30 75 25 100 3 ESTABLISHMENTS

XVII EDE II - HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION 43 75 25 100 3

IV XVIII FAMILY FINANCE MANAGEMENT 32 75 25 100 4

XIX FAMILY RELATIONSHIP AND COUNSELLING 34 75 25 100 4

XX DISSERTATION 36 75 25 100 4

XXI GARDENING AND LANDSCAPING 37 75 25 100 4

XXII ELECTIVE V- FOOD MICROBIOLOGY 39 75 25 100 3

Controller of Examinations Signature of H.O.D.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS)

CHENNAI- 600 004

DEPARTMENT OF HOME SCIENCE

M. Sc. HOME SCIENCE –FAMILY RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

1. OBJECTIVES OF THE COURSE The objectives of the course are to enable the students to understand the principles of Interior Design and to apply in domestic and commercial sectors. The course also empowers them on women issues and rights.

2. CONDITION FOR ADMISSION: A candidate who has passed the B.Sc. Home Science- Nutrition Food Service Management and Dietetics / B.Sc. Home Science- Clinical Nutrition

553

3. ELIGIBILITY FOR THE AWARD OF DEGREE: A candidate shall be eligible for the award of the degree only if she has undergone the prescribed course of study in a college affiliated to the University for a period of not less than two academic years, passed the examination of all the four semesters prescribed earning 92 credits.

4. DURATION OF THE COURSE The course for the Degree of Master of Family Resource Management shall consist of two academic years with four semesters.

5. EXAMINATION: There shall be four examinations, first semester examination at the middle of the first academic year and the second semester examination at the end of the first academic year. Similarly the third and fourth semester examinations will be held at the middle and the end of the second academic year respectively

554

6. COURSE OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATION:

First semester

Course Subjects Inst. Credit Exam. Max.marks Total Code components Hrs s Hrs CIA External

Core paper-I Life Space 6 4 3 25 75 100

Planning

Core paper-II Women’s studies 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper-III Surface Enrichment 6 4 3 25 75 100 in Textiles Core paper-IV Research 6 4 3 25 75 100 Methodology

Core paper-V Life Span Nutrition 6 4 3 25 75 100

Soft skill-I 2 40 60 100

Second semester

Course Subjects Inst. Cred Exam. Max.marks Total Code components Hrs its Hrs CIA External

Core paper-VI Consumer Education 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper-VII Interior Decoration 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper-VIII Interior Decoration 6 4 3 25 75 100 Practical

555

Elective-I Household Equipment 4 3 3 25 75 100

Elective-II Entrepreneurship 4 3 3 25 75 100

Management

Elective Extra One of the elective 4 3 3 25 75 100 disciplinary -I offered by other department in the college

Soft skill-II 2 40 60 100

Internship** 2

Third semester

Course Subjects Inst. credi Exam. Max.marks Total Code components Hrs ts Hrs CIA External

Core paper-IX Human Engineering 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper-X Advanced Resource 6 4 3 25 75 100 Management

Core paper-XI Applied Statistics 6 4 3 25 75 100

Elective paper- Food Processing 4 3 3 25 75 100 III Preservation

Elective IV Interior decoration in 4 3 3 25 75 100 commercial establishments

556

Elective Extra One of the elective 4 3 3 25 75 100 disciplinary –II offered by other department in the college

Soft skill-III 2 40 60 100

Fourth semester

Course Subjects Inst. credi Exam. Max.marks Total Code components Hrs ts Hrs CIA External

Core paper- XII Family Finance 6 4 3 25 75 100 Management

Core paper- XIII Family Relationship 6 4 3 25 75 100 And Counseling

Core paper- XIV Dissertation 6+2 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper- XV Gardening And 6 4 3 25 75 100 Landscaping

Elective V Elective- Food 4 3 3 25 75 100 Microbiology

Soft skill-IV 2 40 60 100

EXTRA DISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE OFFERED BY THE DEPA.RTMENT HOME SCIENCE TO OTHER MAJOR STUDENTS

EXTRA BASICS OF INTERIOR 4 3 3 25 75 100 DISCIPLINARY DECORATION ELECTIVE I

557

( Semester -II)

EXTRA HOSPITAL 4 3 3 25 75 100 DISCIPLINARY ADMINISTRATION ELECTIVE II

( Semester -III)

The following procedure to be followed for internal marks:

Theory papers: Internal marks:25

Best test markout of three 5 marks

Seminar 5 marks

Assignment 5 marks

Model exam 10 marks

------

25 marks

------

Theory papers: External Marks: 75

Part A 5X2 10 marks

Part B 5X4 20 marks

Part C 3X 1545 marks

------

558

75 marks

------

7. REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCEEDING TO SUBSEQUENT SEMESTER:

i. Candidates shall register their names for the First Semester Examination after the admission inthe PG Courses.

ii. Candidates shall be permitted to proceed from, the First Semester up to Final Semester irrespective of their failure in any of the Semester Examination subject to the condition that thecandidates should register for all the arrears subjects of earlier semester along with current(subsequent) semester subjects.

iii. Students should have a minimum of 75% of the days in the semester in each paper.

iv. In case of candidate earning less than 50% of attendance in anyone of the Semestersdue to any extraordinary circumstance such as medical grounds. Such candidates, who shallproduce Medical Certificate certified by the Principal of the College, shall be permitted toproceed to the next semester and to complete the course of study. Such candidate shall have torepeat the missed semester by rejoining after completion of final semester of the course, afterpaying the fee for the break of study as prescribed by the University from time to time.

v. In respect of married students undergoing PG course the minimum attendance condo nation (theory/ practical) shall be relaxed and be prescribed as 55% instead of 65%. If they conceive during their academic career, medical certificate from the doctor attached to the Govt. Hospital ( D.G.O) and fee prescribed for

559

Rs 250/- therefore together with the attendance details shall be forwarde to the office to consider the condonation of attendance mentioning the category.

65%-74%-Permitted to appear for semester exam with condonation fee.

50%-60%- Not eligible to attend the semester exam. But can proceed to the next year/next semester and they can take university examination by paying the prescribed con donation fee of Rs 250/-

560

PG COURSES

PATTERN OF QUESTION PAPER FOR - CORE

PART –A ( 50 words)

5 questions no choice 5x2 marks =10 marks

PART- B (250 words)

10 questions ( either or) 5x4marks =20 marks

PART –C ( 500 words )

3 questions out of 5 3x15 marks = 45 marks

Total =75 marks

PATTERN OF QUESTION PAPER- ELECTIVE

PART - A ( 50 words ) 3 questions out of 4 3x5 =15marks

PART-B ( 250 words) 4 questions either or 4x15 =60 marks

Total =100 marks

561

PROGRAMME OUTCOME

On completion of the programme the student can

1. Use the knowledge of elements of design, principle of interior decorations in interiors as well as exteriors. 2. Learn the application of principles of design in creating beautiful commercial Interiors. Such as hotels, health care centers. 3. Learn the skill of preparing the developmental plans for women’s rights and apply knowledge about empowerment of women related to national policies. 4. Apply the principle of management in life situations. 5. Learn about family dynamics, human growth and how to manage financial resource.

562

LIFE SPACE PLANNING SEMESTER: I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK CORE : I CREDIT: 4 PAPER NO: 1 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to 1. Learn the significance of housing. 2. Learn the space designing principles 3. Identify the major components of building construction and develop aesthetic and Satisfying interiors.

THEORY Unit I : Space Concept and Layout a. Definition, Housing needs – protective, physiological, psychological, and social health aspects b. Factors considered in selection of the site. c. Principles of house planning contributing to livability of home. Unit II: Planning Interiors and Exteriors a. Factors determining the effectiveness of domestic architecture. Trends in domestic architecture b. Plans –open plan and closed plan c. Planning the exterior –Definition of landscaping and units of land scape gardening Unit III: Materials used in Exterior and Interior a. Wall finishes – Exterior and interior – selection, types, advantages and disadvantages. b. Hard floor finishes –types, characteristics, advantages and disadvantages. c. Resilient floor finishes- types, characteristics, advantages and disadvantages. Unit IV: Housing Standard a. Concept of plinth area and carpet area b. Minimum and Maximum space requirements of rooms, doors, windows, ventilators and storage units.

563

Unit V: Housing Financial Institutions a. HDFC, LIC, HUDCO b. Tamil Nadu Housing Board c. Banks- Nationalized Banks offering loan to entrepreneurs

RELATED EXPERIENCE 1. Visit to neighborhoods to learn various housing constructions - building architecture, exterior and interior wall finishes.

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the students can:

1. Explain utilization of space, principles of planning space for comfortable living. Assessment method : Tests , end semester examination 2. Apply knowledge on the use plinth area and carpet area to create spacious rooms in interior. Assessment method : Tests , assignments, end semester examination

3. To learn the skill of preparing the house plan and assessing floor plans and house plans. Assessment : Assignment, Test, end semester examination

REFERENCES 1. Agan, T., 1976, The House – Its plan and use, pheladelphia, J.B. Hippincoll. 2. Despande, R.S., 1979, Build your own house, Poona, United Book Corporation. 3. Humphery, H., 1980, Household Book, New York, P.F. Collierand and sons Corporation 4. Kicklighter, C.E. and Kicklighter, J.C., 1989, Residential Housing, New York, The good heart - Willcox Co., Inc. 5. Rao, G.H., 1992, Plan for small house, Madras, Indira Gopinath and company. 6. Rao, G.H., 1992, Plan for Duplex House, Madras, Indira Gopinath and Company. 7. Rao, G.H., 1992, Sketch plan for house, Madras, Indira Gopinath and company. 8. Peter K,v 2016 Horticulture for Nutrition Security -E Book-www. ASTRA lint.com ASTRAL publishers New Delhi 9. Collies .J.R, Lloyd .T and Mactariane 2017 Rethinking the Economics of Land and Housing Zed Books Ltd .United King dom. 10. Tighe R. Mubller .E 2013 The Affordable Housing Leader ,Routledge, Canada 11. Eran Gates 2016 Designing a Home and A life Simon and Schuster Ltd

564

E-REFERENCES 1. www.homedecoratingroombyroom.com 2. www.interiordesignsolutions.com 3. www.thegardener.btinternet.co 4. www.ebay.com

WOMEN’S STUDIES

SEMESTER I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK CORE : II CREDIT: 4 PAPER NO. 2 CODE NO.

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 1. Understand the role and status of women in the society. 2. Develop concern for women’s issues and problems. 3. Create awareness among students on the major developmental programmes.

THEORY Unit I: Status of women in the Family, Community and Nation a. Status of women in modern India – Social, health, educational, employment, economic, legal and political status. b. Women’s empowerment. Unit II: Problems and Issues Related to Women a. Education – school dropout, non-enrollment, illiteracy b. Employment – organized and unorganized sector, wage discrimination, harassment. c. Exploitation of women – Dowry, Divorce, domestic violence – physical and verbal, gender discrimination – female foeticide and infanticide. Unit III: Legal Protection Act a. Legal Act related to dowry, divorce, adoption, property, prostitution, sexual exploitation and discrimination, family violence, termination of pregnancy. b. Obscene advertisement and projection of women in mass media. Unit IV: Developmental Programmes for Women

565

a. DWCRA, ICDS, CSWB, b. TINP, IMY, PMRY, Unit V: Policies for Women’s Development a. National Policy for women b. National Commission for women c. Plans for Development-Five year plans

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the students can:

1. Explain about the various programmes of women’s rights and laws related ot women empowerment. Assessment method : Tests , end semester examination 2. Apply knowledge about empowerment of women related to national policies. Assessment method : Tests , assignments, end semester examination

3. To learn the skill of preparing the developmental plans for womens rights.

REFERENCES 1. Jeyaraj, N., 2001, Women and Society, Madurai: Lady Doak College. 2. Kaptan, S., and Subramanian, V.P.. 2001, Women in advertising, New Delhi: Book Enclave. 3. Pruthi, R., Devi, P., and Pruthi, R., 2001, women in law and politics, Jaipur: Mangal Deep Publications. 4. Pruthi, R., Devi, P. and Pruthi, R., 2001, Status and Position of women in Ancient, Medievel and modern India, Jaipur: Mangal Deep Publications. 5. Rehman, M.N., and Biswal, K.K., 1993, Education work and women, New Delhi : Common Wealth Publishers. 6. Singh, S.N., 2001, prospectus for women empowerment, New Delhi : Common Wealth Publishers. 7. Davis .K and Evans .M and lorber .J 2016 Gender and Women Studies. Sage Publications New Delhi E-REFERENCES 1. www.indiastat.com 2. www.indmedica.com 3. www.nigcair.res.in 4. www.indianmedicine.nic.in

566

SURFACE ENRICHMENT IN TEXTILES SEMESTER I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK CORE III CREDIT: 4 PAPER NO. 3 CODE :

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 1. Understand the principles of art and its application in home furnishings and clothing 2. Study various methods of hand printing, dyeing and fabric painting.

THEORY Unit I: Basic Principles of art a. Elements Of Design - Optical illusions created by elements of design b. Art Principles-Application of art principles in garments and home furnishings Unit II: Hand printing, Dyeing and fabric painting a. Printing and Painting - developing design Block, stenciling, tie and dye, batik- Equipment required, preparing the fabric painting and finishing process Unit III: Embroidery a. Embroidery-Hand and machine embroidery, appliqué, cut work, smocking, drawn thread work, mirror work, bead and sequence work Unit IV: Window treatment and floor coverings a. Curtains and draperies- types. Curtains headings and fixtures b. Carpets and rugs – classification, selection, materials used, maintenance and care Unit V: Preparation of samples a. Hand and machine embroidery-Preparation on handkerchief b. Appliqué-cutwork, draw thread work, mirror work, beads and sequences c. Batik, tie and dye, block and stenciling d. Fabric painting –Different styles

RELATED EXPERIENCE Visit to an art exhibition

567

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the students can:

1. Explain about the use of art principles in painting, printing and embroidery. Assessment method : Tests , end semester examination 2. Apply knowledge about illusion and applications about art on fabric. Assessment method : Tests , assignments, end semester examination

3. To learn the skill of doing embroidery and painting on fabric.

REFERENCES 1. Clarke.W., 1979, A Introduction to Textile printing, London, NewnersButtonworths Co., Ltd 2. Fishburn. A., 1984, Creating yourb own soft furnishing, London, Macdonald Co., Ltd 3. Mani, A., 1969, Tie and dye ,New York, taptengen Publishing Co., Ltd 4. Mathews.M.,1984, Practical Clothing Construction, PartII, Madras Thompsons and Co., Ltd 5. Ruth, A.H., 1967, Home Furnishings , II Editiopns, Newe Delhi, Wiley Eastern Pvt Ltd 6. VidyaSagar, P.V., 1998, Hand book of Textiles, New Delhi, Mittal Publications Pvt.Ltd 7. Wormkighton .A, 1985, soft Furnishings for the home , New York, Auvas Edition Ltd 8. Yates.M.P., 1996, Textiles a Handbook for designers Norton and Company, New York 9. Borah .B –Probha .M 2014 Traditional Costumes of Garo and Khasi Tribes OF Meghalaya E Book ASTRAL Publishing www.astralint .Com 10. Erin and Gates 2016 , Elements of style and Designing a Home Simon and Schuster Ltd 11. Karthik T and Gopalakrishnan .D 2018 , Home Textiles ,E-Book Astral International PVT Ltd Mumbai

568

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

SEMESTER: I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : IV CREDIT : 4

PAPER NO :4 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Understand the principles of designing research. 2. Gain knowledge on the tools used for data collection. 3. Acquire skills analysis of data, report and thesis writing

THEORY

Unit-I: Introduction to Research

a. Research- Meaning, objectives, motivation, types, significance, methods of research and research ethics and informed consent. Unit-II: Research design and collection of data

a. Formulation of research problem. b. Research Design- Meaning, need, and types. c. Tools of collection of data- Observation, questionnaire, interview schedule, scaling techniques. d. Validity and reliability Unit-III: Sampling concepts

a. Defining target population and sample, sampling types- Probability and non Probability sampling, advantages and disadvantages. Unit-IV: Processing and analysis of data

569

a. Data- Editing, coding, classification, dependent and independent variables, confidence levels, tabulation and interpretation. b. Hypothesis –, basic concepts- meaning, types , testing of hypothesis. Unit-V: Research proposal and Report Writing

a. Developing a research proposal and types of reports b. Thesis writing- Format, typing, appendices, bibliography and footnotes. COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the students can:

1. Describe the various tools of research and research design. 2. Explain and Design research proposal.

REFERENCES

1. Best, J.W. and James, V.K., 2000, Research in Education, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 2. Gupta. S.P., 2001, Statistical Methods, New Delhi, Sultan & Co., Publishers 3. Kerlinger, F.M., 1964, Foundations of Behavioural Research, New York, Holt and Winston Inc. 4. Kothari, C.R., 2002 Research methods and techniques, New Delhi, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 5. Krishnaswami, O.R., 1993, Methodology of Research in Social Sciences. 6. Bombay, Himalaya Publishing House. 7. Agarwal, Y.P., 1990, Statistical methods, New Delhi, Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd., 8. Gupta, S.P., 1990, Statistical methods, Madras, Sultan Chand and Son. 9. Kothari C. R (2004), 'Research Methodology Methods and Techniques', Second Edition, New Age International (P) Limited, Publishers, New Delhi. 10. Palanisamy, S and Manoharan, M., 1999., Statistical Methods for Biologists, Palani, Paramount Publications. 11. Rao, K.V., 1996, Bio-statistics, Madras, Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers

570

LIFE SPAN NUTRITION

SEMESTER: I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : V CREDIT:4

PAPER No :5 CODE :

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 1. Understand the role of nutrition in maintaining good health. 2. Understand the dietary modifications at different stages of family life. 3. Understand the different problems and complications during life cycle.

THEORY Unit I: Infant and Child Nutrition a. Infancy – Feeding and composition. b. Growth and nutritional assessment – Growth chart, LBW babies – characteristics and nutritional care. c. Childhood – Growth and development, food and nutrient needs, dietary adequacy. d. Complications in infancy and childhood related to nutritional inadequacies. Unit II: Adolescent nutrition a. Growth and development, food and nutrient requirements, b. Food habits, nutritional concerns with regard to eating disorders. c. Complications in adolescence related to nutritional inadequacies.!!@@##$$ Unit III : Nutrition in Adulthood a. Food and nutrient requirements during adulthood b. Nutritional concerns in adulthood related to nutritional inadequacies Unit IV : Nutrition in Pregnancy and Lactation a. Physiological changes, food and nutrient requirements, typical food preferences, impact of nutritional status on infants. b. Complications during pregnancy and lactation. Unit V : Geriatric Nutrition a. Food and Nutritional requirements - Nutritional care of the elderly.

571

b. Nutritional problems of old age.

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the student can

1. Identify the various nutritional problems and related complications during the life cycle. Assessment method : Tests , Assignment, end semester examination

2. Plan nutritious meals to combat malnutrition within the family, Assessment method : Menu planning, Presentation, Group discussion

REFERENCES 1. Antia, F.P., 1992, Clinical Dietetics and Nutrition Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2. Corinne, R.H., 1996, Normal and therapeutic nutrition, Mcmallian Co., New York. 3. Davidson, S.R. and Passmore J.F., 1989, Human Nutrition and Dietetics, ELBS London. 4. Mahan, K.L., and Stump, S.E., 1996, Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet therapy M.B. Saunders Co., USA. 5. Balasubramanian et al., 1998, Dietary guidelines for Indians, ICMR, New Delhi. 6. Passmore, AH and Adams, A.A., 1990, Clinical assessment of nutritional status – A working manual, Will and Wilson Publishing, London 7. Bamji et al(1996), Textbook of Human Nutrition Oxford and IBH Publishing co. Pvt. Ltd. Delhi. 8. Shils.E.M, Shike .M, Ross. A.C, Cabellero. B and Cousins.R.J (2011) Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, Eleventh Edition, Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, Philadelphia 9. Mahan, K.L., and Stump, S.E., 1996, Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet therapy M.B. Saunders Co., USA. 10. Nix .S(2016) Williams' Basic Nutrition & Diet Therapy, Fifteenth Edition, Elsevier

E-REFERENCES 1. www.ingenta.connect.com 2. www.fda.gov/search.html 3. www.wodsworth.com/nutrition 4. http://golgy.harvard.edu./biopages,html 5. www.whfreeman.com 6. http://www.harcourtcollege.com

572

7. www.eatright.org.

CONSUMER EDUCATION

SEMESTER: II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE: VI CREDIT: 4

PAPER NO: 6 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Develop wise purchasing skills in the market

2. Understand the responsibilities of an enlighted consumer

THEORY

Unit I : , Consumer and Buying Practices

a. Definition and the concept of consumerism and consumer b. Rights and responsibilities of consumer. c. Market and their interrelationship d. Elements of better purchasing skills - Process of consumer decision making - what, when, where, why and how much to buy. Unit II : Consumer Education

a. Objectives and advantages b. Consumer Guidance - CGSI (Consumer Guidance Society of India), IOCU (International Organisation of Consumer Union), objectives of Consumer movement.

573

Unit III: Market

a. Market - Types of Markets, Channel of Distribution. c. Brands – Different brands, importance of Branding. d. Labels - Importance of labeling, merits and demerits e. Advertisement - Importance of advertisement f. Packing – Importance of packaging Unit IV : Quality Assessment of Products

a. Definition - Standards and standardization, importance of standardization, Quality certification - BIS, FPO, AGMARK, , ISO, need for grading HACCP

Unit V : Consumer Problems and Protection

a. Malpractices - Incorrect weights and measures, Adulteration - food adulteration, Misleading advertisement. Misbranding, Mislabelling, deceptive packing, black marketing and hoarding. b. - Consumer Protection Act, Fruit Product order, ISI certificate Act, Food Adulteration Act, Essential Commodities Act, The Standards of Weights and Measures Act, Consumer protection Act ,Monopolies and Restrictive Trade Practices Act, Quality control and inspection Act,. Consumer Redressal Forum.

RELATED EXPERIENCE

1. Market survey to analyse various brands of products 2. Simple tests to detect adulteration in common foods.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 1. Develop wise purchasing skills Assessment: seminar, assignment 2. Understand rights and responsibilities of a consumer Assessment: test, end semester examination

574

REFERENCES

1. Kumar, N., 1999, Consumer Protection in India, Delhi, Himalaya Publishing House. 2. Miller, R.L and Stafford A.V., 2001, Economic Issue for consumer California, Belmont wood worth publishers. 3. Perumal, R., 1994, Consumer Co.operatives in India - Problems and prospects, New Delhi, Kanishka Publishers and Distributors. 4. Sethi, M and Seetharaman P. Consumerism a group concept Delhi, Phoneix Publishing House. 5. Sherlekar, S.A., 1984, Trade Practices and Consumerism, Bombay Himalaya Publishing House.

INTERIOR DECORATION SEMESTER II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK CORE VII CREDIT:4 PAPER NO: 7 CODE NO.

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 1. Gain an understanding of the basic art principles 2. Learn the dimensions of colour and use of colour in the interior 3. Apply aesthetics and creative ability in making interiors functional

THEORY Unit I : Interior Design a. Concept and objectives of interior design, past and present trends in interior design b. Review of Art Principles c. Colour – Colour theories – Prang and munsell colour system, physical and psychological colour theories, colour harmony – related and contrasting colour harmonies, developing colour scheme for a room Unit II : Furniture for the Home a. Selection, arrangement, care and maintenance of furniture. b. Contemporary furniture – characteristics, design and materials used in furniture. c. Space saving furniture

575

Unit III : Lighting in the Home a. Ideal lighting requirements. b. Lighting – Methods and types- general, local and accent lighting. c. Effect of coloured light on coloured materials. Unit IV : Accessories for the Home a. Importance and types of accessories – Three tests for accessories – functional, decorative, functional and decorative, pictures – mounting of pictures. b. Flower arrangement – Definition, selection of containers, styles of flower arrangement, conditioning of flowers, application of art principles in the arrangement of flowers. c. Indoor Plants – Types, uses and care Unit V: Window Treatment a. Interior – selection of draperies, curtains b. Types of window treatments- Draperies, curtains and blinds.

RELATED EXPERIENCE Visit to handicraft exhibition COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 1. Understand basic art principles Assessment: seminar, assignment 2. Learn to decorate functional interiors Assessment: test, end semester examination REFERENCES 1. Alexander, M.J., 1972, Design Interior Environment, Hariyana, Harcourt- Brace Pvt. Ltd. 2. Brian, W. and Tom, W., 1977 Indoor Plants, London, Macdonald Guidelines Pvt. Ltd. 3. Craig, H.T. and Rush, O.D., 1962 Homes with character, Boston, Health Co., Pvt. Ltd. 4. Coe Stella., 1984, Ikebana. A practical and philosophical guide to Japanese flower arrangement, London, Century Publishing Co. Ltd., 5. Faulkner, S. and Faulkner, S., 1960 Inside Todays Home, Newyork, Rimettard and WinstemPvt. Ltd. 6. Goldstein, V. and Goldstein, V., 1960, Art in every day life, New York, Macmillan Co. Pvt. Ltd. 7. Jean, T., 1980, Flower arranging, London, Macdonald Guidelines Pvt. Ltd., 8. John Lester and Steven Violet., 1975, The world of houseplants and flower arranging, New York, Galahod Book Co.

576

9. Rutt, H., 1973, Home furnishing, New York, John Wiley an Sons Pvt. Ltd.

JOURNAL 1. Architecture Design, Journal of Indian Architecture. 2. Inside outside, Business India Group, Mumbai. 3. Indian Design and Interior, Media Transasia India Ltd.,

E-REFERENCES 1. www.interiordesign.net 2. www.furniturearrangement.com 3. www.homedecoratingroombyroom_com 4. www.interiordesignsolutions.com 5. www.thegardener.btinternet.co 6. www.ebay.com

INTERIOR DECORATION PRACTICAL

SEMESTER II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK CORE : VIII CREDIT:4 PAPER NO. 8 CODE :

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 1. Gain an understanding of the basic art principles for applying in the interior 2. Learn and apply the dimensions of colour and use of colour in the interior 3. Apply aesthetics and creative ability in making interiors functional

THEORY Unit I : Floor Plans a. Floor plans for different income group plans showing walls, size, location of windows and built-in cabinet in different rooms, symbol and scale of the drawings. Unit II: Furniture and Flower arrangement a. Furniture arrangement for different rooms with furniture cutouts using art principles

577

b. Flower arrangement – styles - line, mass, modern, floating, Japanese - Ikebana – moribana and nageire. Unit III: Furnishing the interior -Application of Art Principles a. Application of art principles in the area arrangement and accessories arrangement. Unit IV: Colours a. Application of art principles in the area arrangement - use of colour in the interiors for furnishing. Unit V:Creation of Art objects a. Painting - Glass, tile, fabric and pottery.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 1. Learn to create art objects Assessment: practical sessions 2. Learn to furnish interiors Assessment: practical test, end semester examination

REFERENCES 1. Alexander, M.J.,1972, Design Interior Environment, Haryana, Harcourt Brace Pvt.Ltd. 2. Brian, W. & Tom, W., 1977, Indoor Plants, London, Mac Donald Guidelines Pvt. Ltd. 3. Craig, H.T. & Rush, O.D., 1962, Homes with Character, Boston, Health Co., Pvt. Ltd. 4. Coe Stella., 1984, Ikebana. A Practical and Philosophical guide to Japanese Flower 5. arrangement, London, Century Publishing Co. Ltd. 6. Faulkner, S. & Faulkner, S., 1960, Inside today’s home, New York, Rimettard&WinstemPvt. Ltd. 7. Goldstein, V. & Goldstein, V., 1960, Art in Everyday Life, New York, Macmillan Co Pvt. Ltd. 8. Jean, T., 1980, Flower Arranging, London, Macdonald guidelines Pvt. Ltd. 9. John Lester & Steven Violet., 1975, The World of House Plants & Flower Arranging,New York, Galahod Book Co. 10. Rutt, H., 1973, Home Furnishing, New York, John Wiley and Sons Pvt. Ltd. 11. GopinathRao, C.H., 1993, Sketch Plans for House, 7th edition, Jai Ganesh offset printers,Chennai. 12. GopinathRao, C.H., 1992, 36 Plans, 3rd edition, Jai Ganesh offset printers, Chennai.

578

HOUSEHOLD EQUIPMENT SEMESTER II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 4 HOURS/WEEK CORE : ELECTVE I CREDIT: 3 PAPER NO : 9 CODE :

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 1. Learn the availability of different types of labour saving devices. 2. Study the strength and limitations of base materials. 3. Learn the working principles use and care of oven refrigerator and solar oven.

THEORY Unit I: a. Influence of household equipments in modern family life – Factors influencing the choice of consumer durables – Materials and Construction, Cost, Safety, Name Plate, Warranty and Guarantee. Unit II: a. Base materials – types strength and limitation of base materials used in the construction of utensils and major equipment b. Finishes – types, merits and limitations of different base materials. Unit III: a. Minor equipment – principle, use and care. b. Pressure cooker, pressure pan, mixer, toaster and electric iron c. Accessories for food preparation. Unit IV: a. Major equipment – principles use and care b. Cooking ranges, micro oven, washing machine, vacuum cleaner, refrigerator, food processor and grinder. Unit V: a. Furniture – modern furniture- their use and care.

579

b. Storage furniture – their use and care.

PRACTICALS 1. A market survey to learn the trends in household equipment. 2. Demonstration of the use of solar cooker.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 1. Understand strength and limitations of various base materials and finishes Assessment: seminar, assignment 2. Learn the working principles, use and care of selected minor and major equipments Assessment: test, end semester examination

REFERENCES 1. Wilson P. Household Equipment and Management (1996) Selection and Management, Houghton Miffin Company/ Boston Atlanto, Ballas London. 2. Peet, L.J. (1970) Household Equipment, John Wiley & Sons. New York. 3. Vanzante H (1970) Household Equipment, Principle New York. 4. Peet L.J. And pickets H.SS (1975) Household Equipment, New York 5. Garrison C. and Ruth E (1982) Modern Household Equipment, New York Macmillon pub.co.in. 6. Senthi M., ‘Institutional Food Management (2004) New Age International (P) Limited, Publishers, New Delhi. 7. Errekrans.F and Inman 1958 Equipment, 15th Home- London Harper Brothers. 8. Kotschevar L.H. and Terrel M.S. Food Service Planning Layout and Equipment, John Wiley & Sons, New York.

580

ENTREPRENEURSHIP MANAGEMENT SEMESTER: II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : ELECTIVE II CREDIT: 3

PAPER No : 10 CODE :

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 1. Learn the qualities of an entrepreneur 2. Understand the process and procedure of setting up of an enterprise. 3. Develop managerial skills.

THEORY

Unit I: Entrepreneur and Entrepreneurship a. Definition and need, qualities of an entrepreneur. b. Factors motivating entrepreneurs Unit II: Enterprise a. Definition, types of organization – sole proprietorship, partnership, stock company – private and public limited. b. Steps for starting an enterprise, marketing – steps in conducting market survey. c. Product selection – principles of product selection and development, sales promotion Unit III: Project Report a. Meaning and significance of project report b. Elements of project formulation c. Planning commission guidelines for project formulation/preparation, legislation – licensing, registration. Unit IV: Management of Business Enterprise a. Financial management – Break even analysis, working capital, cost concept, pricing of the product. b. Interface with Government – Incentives, sales tax, income tax, excise duty – export and import duties. Unit V: Human Resource Management

581

a. Managing employees in an enterprise, labour law application – Factories Act, Workman Compensation Act and Industries Dispute Act. b. Problem faced by women entrepreneurs.

RELATED EXPERIENCE

Visit to units run by women entrepreneurs.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 1. Explain the importance of entrepreneurship to create entrepreneurs. Assessment method : Tests , end semester examination 2. Apply knowledge of starting business and acquiring financial help and incentives from government. Assessment method : Tests , assignments, end semester examination

3. To learn the skill of preparing the project.

REFERENCES 1. AbhaMathur Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship (ODISHA) 2018 Edition ISBN No.:9789386882479 2. Gupta and Srinivasan, N.P., 1985, Entrepreneural development, New Delhi, Sultan Chand and Sons Educational Publishers. 3. Holt, D.H., 1990, Entrepreneurship development, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India. 4. Khanka, S.S., 1990, Entrepreneurship development, New Delhi, Chand and Co., Ltd., 5. ParamjeetKaur Dillon., 1993, Women Entrepreneurs, Problem and prospectus, New Delhi, Blaze Publishers Co., Ltd 6. Yadav, C.P., 2000, Encyclopaedia of Entrepreneurship development, Volume I, Lucknow, Anmol Publication Ltd. 7. Yadav, C.P., 2000, Encyclopaedia of Entrepreneurship development, Volume II, Lucknow, Anmol Publications Ltd. 8. Yadav, C.P., 2000, Encyclopaedia of Entrepreneurship development, Volume III, Lucknow, Anmol Publications Ltd. 9. Yadav, C.P., 2000, Encyclopaedia of Entrepreneurship development, Volume IV, Lucknow, Anmol Publications Ltd.

JOURNALS 1. Journal of Entrepreneurship, Sage Publications Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.

582

E-REFERENCES 1. www.ibusinessdevelopment. 2. www.enterweb.org/entrship.htm 3. www.entrepreneuriadevelopment.com 4. www.entrepreneurialdevelopmentcenter 5. www.entrepreneurship.mit.edu

HUMAN ENGINEERING SEMESTER : III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK CORE : IX CREDIT: 4 PAPER NO : 12 CODE:

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 1. Understand the principles of human engineering. 2. Learn the applications of human engineering in work environment.

THEORY Unit I : Human Engineering a. Definition, concept, scope and general applications – Ergonomics related cognitive performance. b. Ergonomics characteristics of place, material and activity. Unit II:Ergonomic consideration in the design a. Concept of work, work place and worker b. General ergonomic consideration in the design of work place- c. Occupational safety Unit III: Anthropometric Measures and Dimensions a. Dimensions of worker at work and rest-sitting and standing measurements - normal, maximum, vertical and horizontal reaches. Unit IV: Work Environment a. Temperature – Air movement, humidity, exchange of heat between human body and surroundings, comfort and discomfort, factors affecting comfortable temperature, ventilation – requirement of air movement.

583

b. Lighting – Adequacy of artificial lighting at work place, solar radiation according to the seasons, day light for interior, physiological requirements, psychologicaleffect oflighting and the work efficiency of personnel. c. Noise – Definition, outdoor and indoor noise of home. Effect on physical, psychological and intellectual activities. Measurement of noise and abatement.

Unit V: Application of Ergonomics a. Application of ergonomics consideration in kitchen - Modular kitchen - Different types of kitchen layouts, Work triangle, Reaches - Minimum and maximum vertical reaches for cupboards - Materials used - Wood, Steel, Aluminium and furniture design. b. Biomechanics - Ladder and stair biomechanics, forces and joint muscle activity, slips and falls.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 1. Learn the basic principles of human engineering Assessment: seminar, assignment 2. Learn the Ergonomic consideration in the design and work place Assessment: seminar 3. Understand application of ergonomics consideration in kitchen layouts, Work triangle, Reaches - Minimum and maximum vertical reaches Assessment: test, end semester examination

REFERENCES 1. Barnoer. R.M., 1980, Motion and time study design and measurements of work, New York, John Wiley and Sons Pvt. Ltd 2. David J. Oborne., 1982, Ergonomics at work, New York, John Wiley and Sons Pvt. Ltd 3. Grandjean., 1973, Ergonomics of the Home, New York, Taylor and Francia Co., Ltd., 4. HarrurDavitfray., 1989, Mind and Body Mechanic New York, W.B.SounderPvt. Ltd 5. Steidle N and Braton, E.C., 1968, Work in the Home, New York, John Wiley and Sons Pvt. Ltd

JOURNAL

584

1. Journal of Environmental Science and Engineering.

E-REFERENCES 1. www.ergonomics.org. 2. www.ergo.human.cornell.edu 3. www.humansystemengineer.com. 4. www.rintonpress.com 5. www.radio.weblogs.com ADVANCED RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

SEMESTER III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION - 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : X CREDIT: 4

PAPER NO: 13 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Understand the concept of systems approach to management. 2. Acquire skills in the use of resources - time and energy management.

THEORY

Unit I: System Approach

a. Definition, system and their characteristics, A system approach to management. b. Family system and subsystem, family environment, micro and macro interrelationship between family and their system Unit II : Components of Management

a. Input, throughput and output components. Planning - attributes of a plan, factors affecting planning.

585

b. Implementing - plans and goals, components of implementing, factors affecting implementing. Feed back - types of feedback, input - output relationship and effects on future management. Unit III: Resources

a. Definition, types, factors affecting family resources, decision making - definition, steps in decision making process and kinds of decision. Unit IV: Time Management

a. Concept, Nature, Factors affecting time management - general and specific aids facilitating time management - PERT, Gantt chart. Unit V: Energy management

a. Concept and types of energy, reasons for fatigue, controlling factors. Energy required for different household tasks according to energy cost. Body mechanics, Work simplification-Principles and techniques, Mundel‘s classes of changes.

RELATED EXPERIENCE

Home Management Residence Course

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 1. Understand system’s approach in management Assessment: seminar, assignment 2. Learn skills in the use of resources Assessment: test, end semester examination

REFERENCES

586

1. Aswathappa, K., 1997, Human Resource Management, Text and care, New Delhi, Tata MC Graw Hill Publishers Company Ltd. 2. Duvall, E.M, 1961, Family living, New york, Macmillan Company. 3. Gross, R.H. and Crandall, E.W., 1971, Management for modern families, New Delhi, Sterling publishers Ltd. 4. Khasgiwala, A, 1993, Family Dynamics, New Delhi, Anmol Publisher. 5. Lander, F.F and Lander, M.V., 1976, Personal adjustment, Marriage and Family Living, New york, Practice Hall. 6. Nickell, P and Dorsey., 1970, Management for family living, New Delhi. wiley western Pvt. Ltd., 7. Rao, P.S and Rao, V.S.P., 1997, Personal Human Resource Management, New Delhi, Konark Publishers. 8. VenkataRatnan, C.S and Srivastava, B.K., 1999, personal management and Human resources, New Delhi, Tata MC Graw Hill publishing company Ltd

JOURNAL

1. Journal of Human Values - Sage Publication, New Delhi. 2. Journal of Psychological Review, Madras Psychological Society, Chennai. 3. Journal of Family Welfare, Family Planning of India. 4. Social Welfare, Central Social Welfare Board, New Delhi. 5. Yojana.

E-REFERENCES

1. www.timemanagemnet.guide.com 2. www.applegate.co.uk 3. www.ahawksmere.co.uk 4. www.mgtshtml. 5. www.hrmguide.net 6. www.wikipedia.org

587

APPLIED STATISTICS

SEMESTER III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : XI CREDIT : 4

PAPER NO :14 CODE:

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Learn the methods by which statistical data are analysed

2. Apply appropriate statistical analysis in research work

THEORY

UnitI:

a. Measures of central tendency- Calculation of arithmetic mean, median and mode of individual observations, discrete series and continuous series. Merits and demerits of mean, median and mode. UnitII:

a. Measures of dispersion-range, Quartile deviation, mean deviation and standard deviation b. Measures of skewness-positive and negativeskewness, Karl pearson’s coefficient of skewness and Bowley’s coefficient of skewness Unit III:

a. Measures of relationship – Correlation analysis – Types of correlation, Methods of studying correlation- Scatter diagram- merits and demerits, Calculation of Karl Pearson’s Coefficient of Correlation and Spearman’s rank Correlation Coefficient.

588

UnitIV:

a. Regression analysis- regression lines-difference between correlation and regression analysis, uses of regression analysis, Simple regression analysis using regression equations of Yon X and X on Y. UnitV:

a. Tests of Hypotheses- Procedure of testing hypothesis, two types of errors in testing hypotheses, two- tailed and one tailed tests of hypotheses. Tests of significance of large samples, tests of significance for small samples- student’s t test. b. Chi- square test – definition, uses and limitations, F-test- definition, applications, ANOVA- assumptions, one way and two way ANOVA.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can

1. Solve problems to find the desired measure of central tendency, dispersion, relationship, regression and tests of significance. 2. Apply knowledge to test hypothesis and interpret the results obtained.

REFERENCES

1. Gupta. S.P., 2014, Statistical Methods, Forty Fourth Revised Edition, New Delhi, Sultan Chand & Co., Publishers 2. Palanisamy, S and Manoharan, M., 1999., Statistical Methods for Biologists, Palani, Paramount Publications. 3. Rao, K.V., 1996, Bio-statistics, Madras, Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers

589

FOOD PROCESSING AND PRESERVATION

SEMESTER : III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION : 4 HOURS/WEEK

CORE ELECTIVE : III CREDIT : 3

PAPER NO: 15 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Understand the principles of different techniques used in processing and preservation of foods. 2. Study the applications of different processing methods in the food industry.

THEORY

Unit I : Introduction

a. Food processing - Principals of food processing and preservation, Effect of processing on sensory characteristics and nutritional properties of foods Unit II : Processing and preservation by heat

a. Heat processing using steam or water - Blanching, pasteurization, sterilization and UHT processing, extrusion cooking. b. Heat processing using hot air – Dehydration, baking, roasting. c. Heat processing using oil – frying. d. Heat processing by radiated energy and microwave heating. Unit III : Processing and preservation by low-temperatures

a. Refrigeration, freezing, Controlled Atmosphere, Modified Atmosphere and dehydro-freezing. Use of microorganisms - food fermentations, pickling, smoking. Unit IV : Processing and preservation of Beverages

590

a. Types of beverages, importance, Fruit Beverages. Ingredient selection, extended shelf life. Unit V : Packaging

a. Principles, functions and types, Methods of food packaging – Vacuum packaging, Carbon-di-oxide, nitrogen packaging, aseptic packaging, Flexible packaging.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can

1. The students will be skilled to handle the packing machinery. 2. Add on knowledge about the food safety and food handling in food industry

REFERENCES

1. Chakraverty, A., Majumdar, A.S., Raghavan. G.S. V. &Ramawamy, H.S. (Eds.) (2003). Handbook of Postharvest Technology , Fruits, Vegetables, Tea, and Spices. USA: Marcel Dekker Inc. 2. Brennan, J.G. (Ed.) (2006). Food Processing Handbook. Weinheim, Germany: Wiley- VCH Verlag GmbH &Co.KGaA. 3. Fellows, P.J. (2000). Food Processing Technology- Principles and practice. (2nd Ed.). Florida, USA: CRC Press LLC. 4. Karel, M. and Lund, D.B. (2003) Physical Principles of Food Preservation (2 ed) NTY, USA: Marcel Dekker. 5. Rahman, M.S. (Ed.). (2007). Handbook of Food Preservation. (2nd Ed.). Florida, USA: CRC Press. 6. Smith, J.S., &Hui, Y.H. (Eds.) (2004). Food Processing: Principles and Applications. Oxford, UK: Blackwell Publishing. 7. S.M Reddy (2015), “Basic Food Science and Technology”, New Age International Publishers. 8. Sun, Da-Wen (Ed.) (2005). Emerging technologies for Food Processing. California, USA: Elsevier Academic Press. 9. “Food packaging technology Handbook (2nd revised edition)” by NIIR Board, Published by NIIR project consultancy service, ISBN: 978981039090, Code: N193 2012. 10. Fellows, P.J, “Food processing technology: Principles and Practice”, Second edition, Woodhead Publishing limited, Cambridge, 2005. 11. Sahay, K.M and K.K Singh, “UNIT operations in Agricultural Processing”, vikas publishing House Pvt ltd, New Delhi, 2003. 12. Sahin, S and Summu, S.G (2006), Physical Properties of Foods, NY, USA: Springer Science

591

13. Farnworth, E.R (ed) (2008), “Handbook of Fermented Functional foods (2nded)”, Florida, USA: CRC Press. 14. Hui, Y.H et al., (2004), “Handbook of food and beverage fermentation technology”, New York, USA: Marcel Dekker Inc., 15. Chen, X.D and Mujumdar, A.S (2008), Drying technologies in food processing, Sussex, U: Blackwell publishing. 16. Frazer, W.C and Dennis C Westhoff (4rd edition) (2008), Food microbiology, McGraw Hill Companies,

E-REFERENCES

1. Novel packaging technologies - www.foodprotection.org 2. Regulations and Types of packaging - www.worldpackaging.org 3. Canning - http://www.metal-pack.org 4. Vacuum packaging - http://www.culinaryinnovations.co.uk/ 5. Techniques of food processing - mofpi.nic.in 6. Novel Food processing techniques - www.ift.org 7. Modified atmosphere packaging - www.adph.org

592

INTERIOR DECORATION IN COMMERCIAL ESTABLISHMENTS

SEMESTER III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 4 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : ELECTIVE IV CREDIT: 3

PAPER NO : 16 CODE :

OBJECTIVES:

1. Learn the application of principles of design in creating beautiful commercial interiors. 2. Understand the importance of human factors in interiors.

THEORY

Unit I:Commercial Interiors

a. Space planning for office interiors- definition and importance, cabinets, conference room. b. New trends in commercial building, basic concepts of commercial buildings, features of shopping complex, Hotel and Hospital. Unit II:Application of Interior Decoration in different commercial establishments

a. Hotel – Canteen, restaurant etc. b. Health care - Clinic, hospital, beauty parlour, boutique etc. c. Events – Interior decoration for different events (i) Domestic – Birth day parties, wedding anniversary, house warming ceremony. (ii) Formal – official meeting, seminars. Unit III:Types and need of Furniture in Interiors

a. Develop different types of furniture design with regard to activity. b. Estimate the furniture in terms of materials, construction details, design, uses, care and maintenance, age group, hours of use, durability and budget.

593

c. Preparation of records- collection of furniture for different activities, different materials, market survey of furniture. Unit IV:Human factors in Interiors

a. Green building technology – meaning, concept, need, importance impact of green building on human health and natural environment, and benefits of green building. b. Green building practices and technologies – Roof, walls, floor- electrical plumbing, windows, and air conditioning (HVAC), insulation, interior finishes and landscaping. Unit V:Commercial plan for different Interiors

a. Design analysis of small commercial centres – shops, restaurants, clinics, parlours, boutiques – Through observation and drawing plans. Presentation of plan and Report. b. Design analysis of large commercial areas – Offices, polyclinic, stadium, hospitals.- Through observation and drawing plans. Presentation of plan and Report. c. Estimation of cost for any one scheme.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 1. Learn the application of principles of design in creating beautiful commercial Interiors. Such as hotels, health care centres Assessment: seminar, assignment 2. Understand the importance of human factors in interiors Assessment: test, end semester examination

REFERENCES:

1. Faulkner, R., and Faulkner, S., (1987) Inside Todays Home, Rinehart Publishing House, Newyork. 2. Rao, M.P. (1998), Interior Design, Principles and Practice, StamdardPublisherw, Delhi. 3. Riggs, J.R. (1992) Materials and Components of Interior Design, Regent Hall, New Jersey. 4. Rai. G.D. (1996), Solar Energy Utilization, Khanna Publishers, Delhi. 5. Chaffin, D.B.and Anderson, G.B.J. (1984) Occupational Biomechanics,JohnWilley,Newyork. 6. Wilhide, Eand Cope Stick, I. (2000), Contemporary Decorating, Conron, octopus Ltd, London. 7. Chaudhari, S.N. 2006, Interior Design, Aavishkar Publishers, Jaipur. 8. Kasu, A.A. 2005, Interior Design, Ashish Book Centre, Delhi. 9. Arulmanickam, A.P. and T.K. Palaniappan (1993), Estimating and Costing, Pratheeba Publishers, Coimbatore.

594

FAMILY FINANCE MANAGEMENT

SEMESTER: IV HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK CORE: XII CREDIT: 4 PAPER NO. 18 CODE:

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 1. Understand the techniques of financial management 2. Learn the procedures to maintain economic security for the family.

THEORY Unit I: Concept Related to Family Income a. Guidelines in income management, methods of handling money. b. Factors determining income – Education, employment, occupational status, family size, type, income, residence and life style. Unit II: Financial Management a. Budget – Objectives, characteristics and advantages, budgetary control in the context of changing economic conditions. b. Stages in family life cycle and utilisation of money. Unit III: Controlling a. Guidelines to account and record keeping, fundamental principles of account and record keeping, balance sheet and net worth growth. b. Family credit - Kind, reasons, uses and limitations of credit, sources of consumer credit for family use. Unit IV: Economic Security a. Definition of Savings and investment, importance of savings, methods of investment. b. Types of savings – Shares and bonds, unit trust of India, LIC, GPF, postal savings, chit funds and banks. Unit V: Personal Tax Planning

595

a. Income tax-definition, principles and procedures of Income tax, preparation and statement of income in the case of salaried class people, knowledge on various exemptions and deductions. b. Types of Tax – Direct tax - Wealth tax, gift tax, house tax and capital gains tax.

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the student can

1. Understand the techniques of financial management Assessment: seminar, assignment

2. Describe procedures to maintain economic security for the family. Assessment: test, end semester examination

REFERENCES 1. The Keys to Family Business Success, Aspen Family Business Group 2011 2. John RomanRobert FinchFamily Financial Management South Western Educational Publishing; 7th revised edition edition2004 3. Larry Burkett, Family Financial Workbook: A Family Budgeting Guide Moody Publishers; New edition, 2002 4. Eugene F. Brigham, Michael C. Ehrhardt, Financial Management: Theory & Practice 15th Edition 2017 5. Balu, V. and Murugan. S., 2000, Financial Management, Chennai, Sri Venkateswara Publications 6. Bigelow, H.H., 1975, Family Finance – A study in the economics of consumption, New York, J.B. Lippinco 7. Chowdhry, S.B., 1973, Management Accountancy, New Delhi, Kalyani Publications Ltd., 8. Gross, I.H. and Crandall, E.W., 1971, Management for modern families, New Jersey, Prentice Hall Inc. 9. Lokhoitea, R.N., 1999, How to save tax on your salary and pre-requisite, New Delhi, Vision Book Private Ltd. 10. Nickkell, P. and Dorsey, J.M., 1976, Management in Family living, New York, John Wiley and Sons Inc. 11. Ruth E., Decan and Firebaugh, F.M., 1975, Family Resource Management, London, Allyn and Bacon Ltd

E-REFERENCES 1. www.ibusinessdevelopment.com

596

FAMILY RELATIONSHIP AND COUNSELLING

SEMESTER IV HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK CORE XIII CREDIT: 4 PAPER NO. 19 CODE :

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 1. Acquire knowledge on family and functions of family. 2. Gain knowledge on marital adjustments. 3. Understand the importance of counseling.

THEORY Unit I:Family

a. Definition, types and functions of family. b. Family structure in India – Nuclear, extended and joint family – Characteristics, advantages and disadvantages Unit II: Marriage

a. Marriage – definition, motives and functions of marriage, types of marriage. b. Factors influencing marriage relationship – age, personality characteristics, socio- economic status, religion, in – law adjustments, career, sex relationship. Unit III :Adjustment

b. Definition – need for adjustment in the family, adjustment during different stages of family life cycle. Unit IV: Family Crisis

a. Definition, meaning and types of crisis, Crisis in the family – divorce, separation, death, alcoholism, and drug abuse. Single parenthood, adolescent pregnancy, suicide, mental illness and domestic violence. Effects of crisis on family and children. Methods of over coming crisis. Unit V: Guidance and Counselling

597

a. Definition, need, types, techniques and scope of guidance and counseling, Marital counseling- pre-marital and marriage counseling parenting – types, importance of parenting – physical, social, emotional, finance and legal responsibilities. Sibling relationships. COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can

1. Explain the structure of families and factors associated for successful family life. Assessment method : Tests , end semester examination 2. Apply knowledge learnt for sustaining happy family life and acquire knowledge about counseling. Assessment method : Tests , assignments, end semester examination

3. To learn the skill of managing human resources in a family.

REFERENCES 1. Ahiya R.2001, Indian Social system, jaipur, Rawat Publication. 2. Berger, M., 1991, Challenge of AIDS, New Delhi, National Book Trust. 3. Devdas, R.P. and Jaya N. 1984. A text book on child development, Madras Macmillan India Limited. 4. Kephert, W.M. 1997. The family, society and the individual, Houghton miffin Company, Boston. 5. Memoria, C.B. 1981. Social Problems and Social disorganization in India. Kitabmahal, Allahabad. 6. Papalia, D.E. and Olds, S.W. 1996. Human development. New Delhi, Tata McGrew Hill Publishing Company. 7. Pati, R.N. 2002, Reproductive child Health, New Delhi, APH Publishing Corporation 8. Seetharaman .P ,Bhatra.S and Mehara .P 2005 , CBS Publishers New Delhi 9. .Aashima .A and Kapoor ,H 2012, Home Management, Astral International PVT Mumbai 10. .Aashima .A and Kapoor ,H 2012, HomeEconomics, Astral International PVT Mumbai 11. James .J ,Noore and Asay .S 2012 Family Resource Management Sage New Delhi .

598

DISSERTATION

SEMESTER:IV CREDIT : 4

CORE XIV

PAPER NO :20 CODE :

GARDENING AND LANDSCAPING

SEMESTER IV HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK CORE: XV CREDITS: PAPER NO: 21 CODE:

OBJECTIVES: To enable the students to 1. Understand the importance of plants in landscape gardening. 2. Gain knowledge on propagation methods 3. Enable the students to learn the principles of landscape gardening

THEORY: Unit I: a. Ornamental plants – classifications – annuals and perennials, Shrubs and Trees – flowering and foliage shrubs, and trees, climbers and creepers, cacti and succulents, ferns, palms, hardy bulbs and tender bulbs. Unit II: a. Propagation methods – Sexual and asexual methods of propagation- division, cutting, layering, grafting, budding and tissue culture. Unit III: a. Ornamental plant protection methods – Indoor plants – potting and repotting techniques, plant after care, plant protection – chemical and mechanical. Pest and diseases. Unit IV:

599

a. Landscaping – Meaning and importance,Lawn – importance, components preparation, methods of cultivation, use, maintenance, types of lawn. b. Types of garden,garden design – formal and informal, principles of landscape gardening. Unit V: a. Modern trends in gardening – Terrace garden, Rock garden, Bonsai culture, developing ornamental plants in Home garden for flats, pots and other accessories – roof garden, hanging garden.

RELATED EXPERIENCE a. Sketching landscaping on paper and its application on land b. Visits to agricultural university

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 1. Classify plants used in landscape gardening Assessment: seminar, assignment 2. Describe methods of propagation ornamental plant protection methods Assessment: test, end semester examination

REFERENCES: 1. S.C. Dey (2012), Indoor Gardening Paperback AGROBIOS 2. Nanditha Krishna, M. Amirthalingam (2014),Sacred Plants of India, Penguin Books Limited 3. Charles Dowding (2015), How to create a New Vegetable Garden: Producing a beautiful and fruitful garden from scratch, Green Books 4. Ross, R. (1999), colorful gardening – climbers, Ryland peters and small, London. 5. Ross, R. (1999), colorful gardening – Bulbs, Ryland peters and small, London. 6. Scott – James, A. (1995), perfect plant perfect garden, corner octopus limited, London. 7. Too good, A. (1995), Designing with house plants, Grange Books publication, London

600

FOOD MICROBIOLOGY SEMESTER-IV HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 4 HOURS/WEEK

CORE: ELECTIVE V CREDIT:3

PAPER NO: 22 CODE:

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 1. Acquire knowledge on the role of micro organisms responsible for food spoilage and food borne illness 2. Learn the importance of personal hygiene and safe handling of food.

THEORY Unit I :Micro organisms and Their Importance in Food Industry a. Micro organisms in air, water, soil and plants. Factors affecting growth of micro organisms in food - Nutrient content, pH, Redox Potential and Water activity. b. Importance of micro organisms in food industry - Economic importance of yeasts, moulds and bacteria. Unit II: Contamination and Spoilage of Plant Foods a. Definition, Fitness of food for consumption, causes, classification - ease of spoilage. b. Contamination and spoilage of cereals and products, pulses, vegetables and fruits. Unit III: Contamination and Spoilage of Animal Foods a. Contamination and Spoilage of egg, fish, meat, poultry, milk and milk products. Unit IV : Food Borne illness and prevention a. Food intoxication and infection - Bacillus cereus, Campylobacter, Clostridium botulinum, Escherichia Coli, Salmonella, Shigella, Staphylococcus aureus, Vibrio, Clostridium Welchi, EntamoebaHistolytica, Polio Virus, Hepatitis Virus, Tubercle bacilli. Unit V: Safety and Hygiene a. Safe handling of food, food packaging, personal hygiene of food handlers, Cleaning of equipment and sanitizing agent.

601

DEMONSTRATION: 1. Hanging drop preparation 2. Simple and gram staining 3. Preparation and distribution of culture media 4. Inoculation and incubation of culture 5. Examination of cultures prepared from water, vegetables , fruits, meat and milk.

RELATED EXPERIENCE Visit to a microbiology laboratory of an institute.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 1. Understand the role of microorganisms in food spoilage and food borne illness Assessment: seminar, assignment 2. Describe methods of personal hygiene and safe handling of food Assessment: test, end semester examination

REFERENCES 1. Ananthanarayan and Paniker's Textbook of Microbiology Tenth edition with booklet, 2017 Mittal Books 2. Parija, 2016, Textbook of Microbiology and Immunology, 3rd Ed, Mosby. 3. Harvey , 2012.Lippincott's Illustrated Reviews Microbiology with the Point Access Scratch Code, Third edition, Wolters Kluwer 4. Moss M.O., 2005, Food Microbiology, New Age International Publishers. Bangalore. 5. Frazier, W.C and West Hoff., 1995, Food Microbiology, Tata McGraw - Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi. 6. Pelzer M.J and Raid R.D., 1972, Microbiology, Tata McGraw Hill. New york. 7. Bamforth .C.W (2005), 'Food, Fermentation and Micro-organisms', First Edition, Blackwell Publishing Ltd, . 8. Adams .M.R & Moss .M.O (2008), 'Food Microbiology',Third Edition, Royal Society Of Chemistry', UK.

E-REFERENCES 1. International Journal of Food Microbiology IUMS and ICFMH www.elsevier.com 2. Food microbe.com Food Microbiology and Food Hygiene Research Publication.

602

3. Food Safety HACCP, Food Quality, Food Microbiology and Hygiene www.Food quality news.com BASICS OF INTERIOR DECORATION

(EXTRADISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE FOR OTHER MAJOR STUDENTS)

SEMESTER- II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 4 HOURS/WEEK

CORE :EDE I CREDIT: 3

PAPER NO :11 CODE NO :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to 1. Gain knowledge and understand the basic art principles. 2. Learn the dimensions of colour and application of art principles in interior.

THEORY Unit I: Interior Design a. Concept, objectives and importance of interior design. b. Elements of design Unit II: Concept and application of Art Principles a. Interior design – Balance, Harmony, Proportion, Rhythm and Emphasis. Unit III: Colour a. Colour Theory – Prang colour theory and Psychologist colour chart.

b. Colour harmonies – Related and contrasting colour harmonies. Unit IV: Flower Arrangement a. Definition and importance b. Styles in flower arrangement Unit V: Furniture Arrangement a. Selection of furniture for a family b. Art principles in the arrangement of furniture for different rooms.

603

RELATED EXPERIENCE a. Flower arrangement – different styles of flower arrangement. b. Furniture arrangement – furniture arrangement in different rooms.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 1. Undersatnd and wide knowledge on basic art principles Assessment: seminar, assignment 2. Learn to decorate functional interiors Assessment: test, end semester examination

REFERENCES

1. The Smaller Home : Smart Designs for Your Home, Sater, Dan, HarperCollins Publisher, 2008

2. Interior Design 01 Edition, Chaudhari, S N, Aavishkar Publishers, 2011

3. Sketching for Architecture and Interior Design, Laurence King Publishers, 2011 4. Alexander, M.J., 1972, Design Interior Environment, Hariyana, Harcourt- Brace Pvt. Ltd. 5. Brian, W. and Tom, W., 1977 Indoor Plants, London, Macdonald Guidelines Pvt. Ltd. 6. Craig, H.T. and Rush, O.D., 1962 Homes with character, Boston, Health Co., Pvt. Ltd. 7. Coe Stella., 1984, Ikebana. A practical and philosophical guide to Japanese flower arrangement, London, Century Publishing Co. Ltd., 8. Faulkner, S. and Faulkner, S., 1960 Inside Todays Home, Newyork, Rimettard and WinstemPvt. Ltd. 9. Goldstain, V. and Goldstein, V., 1960, Art in everyday life, New York, Macmillan Co. Pvt. Ltd. 10. Jean, T., 1980, Flower arranging, London, Macdonald Guidelines Pvt. Ltd., 11. John Lester and Steven Violet., 1975, The world of houseplants and flower arranging, New York, Galahod Book Co. 12. Rutt, H., 1973, Home furnishing, New York, John Wiley and Sons Pvt. Ltd.

E - JOURNAL 1. Architecture Design, Journal of Indian Architecture. 2. Inside outside, Business India Group, Mumbai. 3. Indian Design and Interior, Media Transasia India Ltd., E- REFERENCES

604

1. www.interiordesign.net 2. www.furniturearrangement.com 3. www.home_decorating_room_by_room_com 4. www.interior_design_solutions.com 5. www.thegardener.btinternet.co

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION

(EXTRADISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE FOR OTHER MAJOR STUDENTS)

SEMESTER: III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : EDE II CREDIT:3

PAPER No :17 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Know about the types of hospitals and their administration. 3. Gain knowledge about the legal aspects of hospital administration. 4. Know about National and International organizations financing medical care.

THEORY

Unit I : Hospital Organization and Management

a. Introduction, general principles, management structure and duties, History and functions of Hospitals. b. Relationship of Hospital to the Community Unit II : Legal Aspects of Hospital Management

a. Duties and responsibilities of nurses, doctors and employees in the hospital. b. Medical malpractices, laws affecting disease afflicted Unit III :Organisations Financing Medical Care

605

a. National - ICMR, NIN, CFTRI b. International - WHO, UNICEF, FAO Unit IV : Accounting and Financial Management in Hospitals.

a. Principles, analysis and interpretation of financial reports, Preparation and use of budgets. b. Methods of cost computation COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can

1. Understand the organization and functioning of hospitals Tests and assignments

2. Knowledge about funding agencies, financial and legal management Seminars, Presentations and group discussions

REFERENCES

1. Davidson S.R. and Passmore J.F., 1975, Human Nutrition and Dietetics. Vol. I II Edition. 2. Francis, C.M and D' Souza, M.C., 2000, Hospital Administration. Jay Brothers. 3. Gillespie S. McNeil G., 1992, Hospital Management Macmillan and Co., New York. 4. Mitchell et. al., 1987, Nutrition in Health & disease, Pitman M. Edu. Publishing Co., 5. Robinson et.al., 1986, Normal and Therapeutic Nutrition. Macmillan Co., New york.

E - REFERENCES

1. www.ingenta.connect.com - Food and Food ways. 2. www.fda.gov/search.html 3. www.wodsworth.com/nutrition 4. www.elsevier.com - Indian Journal of Nutrition and food microbiology.

606

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI - 600 004

POST GRADUATE SYLLABUS FOR THE ACADEMIC YEAR 2018-2019 ONWARDS

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

M.Sc. HOME SCIENCE-FOOD SERVICE MANAGEMENT & DIETETICS 2018-2019 ONWARDS

607

DEPARTMENT OF HOME SCIENCE

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

TITLE OF THE PAPERS OF THE SYLLABUS FOR THE BATCH 2018-2019 ONWARDS

COURSE: M.SC. HOME SCIENCE - FOOD SERVICE MANAGEMENT AND DIETETICS DEGREE: M.SC.

SEM PAPER TITLE OF COURSE PAGE CODE UE IA TOTAL C NO NO.

I I SELECTED TOPICS IN FOOD SERVICE MANAGEMENT 1 75 25 100 4

II HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 3 75 25 100 4

III ADVANCED FOOD SCIENCE 5 75 25 100 4

IV RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 7 75 25 100 4

V LIFE SPAN NUTRITION 9 75 25 100 4

II VI FRONT OFFICE MANAGEMENT 11 75 25 100 4

VII THERAPEUTIC DIETETICS 13 75 25 100 4

VIII THERAPEUTIC DIETETICS PRACTICAL 15 75 25 100 4

IX ELECTIVE- I HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT 17 75 25 100 3

X ELECTIVE- II ENTREPRENEURSHIP MANAGEMENT 19 75 25 100 3

XI EDE-I BASICS OF INTERIOR DECORATION 42 75 25 100 3

III XII NUTRITIONAL CARE PROCESS AND DIET COUNSELLING 21 75 25 100 4

XIII FINANCIAL MARKETING AND MANAGEMENT 23 75 25 100 4

XIV APPLIED STATISTICS 25 75 25 100 4

XV ELECTIVE- III FOOD PROCESSING AND PRESERVATION 27 75 25 100 3

XVI ELECTIVE –IV FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY CONTROL 30 75 25 100 3

608

XVII EDE- II HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION 44 75 25 100 3

IV XVIII SPORTS NUTRITION 32 75 25 100 4

XIX PUBLIC HEALTH NUTRITION 34 75 25 100 4

XX QUANTITY FOOD PRODUCTION AND SERVICE 36 75 25 100 4

XXI DISSERTATION 39 75 25 100 4

XXII ELECTIVE V- FOOD MICROBIOLOGY 40 75 25 100 3

Controller of Examinations Signature of H.O.D.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS)

CHENNAI- 600 004

DEPARTMENT OF HOME SCIENCE

M. Sc. HOME SCIENCE -FOOD SERVICE MANAGEMENT AND DIETETICS

6. OBJECTIVES OF THE COURSE The objectives of the course are to enable the students to understand the principles and functions of catering management, develop managerial skills, learn the qualities of an entrepreneur and acquire skills in quantity food preparation and service. The course also aims at equipping students to learn about the principles of planning diets for various diseased conditions and to gain knowledge about nutritional problems and health intervention programmes and policies.

609

7. CONDITION FOR ADMISSION: A candidate who has passed the B.Sc. Home Science/ B.Sc. Nutrition Food Service Management and Dietetics / B.Sc. Clinical Nutrition

8. ELIGIBILITY FOR THE AWARD OF DEGREE: A candidate shall be eligible for the award of the degree only if she has undergone the prescribed course of study in a college affiliated to the University for a period of not less than two academic years, passed the examination of all the four semesters prescribed earning 92 credits.

9. DURATION OF THE COURSE The course for the Degree of Master of Science in Food Service Management and Dietetics shall consist of two academic years with four semester.

10. EXAMINATION: There shall be four examinations, first semester examination at the middle of the first academic year and the second semester examination at the end of the first academic year. Similarly the third and fourth semester examinations will be held at the middle and the end of the second academic year respectively

6. COURSE OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATION:

First semester

Course Subjects Inst. Credits Exam. Max. Marks Total components Hrs hrs CIA External

Core paper-I Selected Topics In Food Service 6 4 3 25 75 100 Management

Core paper-II Human Physiology 6 4 3 25 75 100

610

Core paper-III Advanced Food Science 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper-IV Research Methodology 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper-V Life Span Nutrition 6 4 3 25 75 100

Soft skill-I 2 25 75 100

Second semester

Course Subjects Inst. Credits Exam. Max.marks Total components Hrs Hrs CIA External

Core paper-VI Front Office Management 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper-VII Therapeutic Dietetics 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper-VIII Therapeutic Dietetics Practical 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Elective- I Hospital Management 4 3 3 40 60 100

Core Elective-II Entrepreneurship Management 4 3 3 25 75 100

Elective- Extra (one of the elective offered by 4 3 3 25 75 100 disciplinary-I other department in the college)

Soft skill-II 2 25 75 100

Internship * 2 100

611

Third semester

Course Subjects Inst. Credits Exam. Max.marks Total components hrs hrs CIA External

Core paper-IX Nutritional Care process and 6 4 3 25 75 100 Diet Counselling

Core paper-X Financial Marketing 6 4 3 25 75 100 &Management

Core paper-XI Applied Statistics 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Elective-III Food Processing and 4 3 3 25 75 100 Preservation

Core Elective-IV Food Safety and Quality 4 3 3 25 75 100 Control

Elective- II (One Of The Elective Offered by 4 3 3 25 75 100 Other Departments in the Extra disciplinary- College ) I

Soft skill-III 2 25 75 100

Fourth semester

Course components Subjects Inst. credits Exam. Max.marks Total Hrs hrs CIA External

Core paper-XII Sports Nutrition 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper-XIII Public Health Nutrition 6 4 3 25 75 100

612

Core paper-XIV Quantity Food Production 6 4 3 25 75 100 and Service

Core paper XV Dissertation 6+2 4 3 25 75 100

Elective-V Elective- Food Microbiology 4 3 3 25 75 100

Soft skill-IV 2 25 75 100

EXTRADISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE OFFERED BY THE DEPARTMENT HOME SCIENCE TO OTHER MAJOR STUDENTS

Course components Subjects Inst. credits Exam. Max.marks Max.marks hrs hrs CIA External

Extra Disciplinary Basics of Interior 4 3 3 25 75 100 Elective 1 Decoration

( Semester -II)

Extra Disciplinary Hospital 4 3 3 25 75 100 Elective II Administration

( Semester -III)

The following procedure to be followed for internal marks:

Theory papers: Internal Marks: 25

Best test mark out of three 5 marks

Seminar 5 marks

Assignment 5 marks

613

Model exam 10 marks

------

25 marks

------

Theory papers: External Marks: 75

Part A 5X2 10 marks

Part B 5X4 20 marks

Part C 3X 15 45 marks

------

75 marks

------

Break up details for attendance

Below 60% - No marks

60% to 75% -3 marks

76%-90% -4 marks

91%- 100% - 5 marks

7. REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCEEDING TO SUBSEQUENT SEMESTER:

i. Candidates shall register their names for the First Semester Examination after the admission in the PG Courses.

614

ii. Candidates shall be permitted to proceed from, the First Semester upto Final Semester irrespective of their failure in any of the Semester Examination subject to the condition that the candidates should register for all the arrears subjects of earlier semester along with current (subsequent) semester subjects.

iii. Students should have a minimum of 75% of the days in the semester in each paper.

iv. In case of candidate earning less than 50% of attendance in anyone of the Semesters due to any extraordinary circumstance such as medical grounds. Such candidates, who shall produce Medical Certificate certified by the Principal of the College, shall be permitted to proceed to the next semester and to complete the course of study. Such candidate shall have to repeat the missed semester by rejoining after completion of final semester of the course, after paying the fee for the break of study as prescribed by the University from time to time.

V. In respect of married students undergoing PG course the minimum attendance condo nation ( theory/ practical) shall be relaxed and be prescribed as 55% instead of 65%. If they conceive during their academic career, medical certificate from the doctor attached to the Govt. Hospital ( D.G.O) and fee prescribed for Rs 250/- therefore together with the attendance details shall be forwarded to the office to consider the condonation of attendance mentioning the category.

65%-74%-Permitted to appear for semester exam with condonation fee.

50%-60%- Not eligible to attend the semester exam. But can proceed to the next year/next semester and they can take university examination by paying the prescribed con donation fee of Rs 250/-

Less than 50%- Not eligible to attend the semester exam. Not permitted to proceed to the next semester:; must repeat the semester by rejoining after obtaining prior permission from the university.

8 . PASSING MINIMUM

a) There shall be no passing minimum for internal.

615

b) For external examination, passing minimum shall be 50% of the maximum marks prescribed for the paper c) In the aggregate ( external + internal) the passing minimum shall be of 50% for each paper/practical/ project/ and viva voce d) Grading shall be based on overall marks obtained ( internal + external).

9. CLASSIFICATION OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES

Candidates who secured not less than 60% of aggregate marks ( internal + external) in the whole examination shall be declared to have passed the examination in first class .

All others successful candidates shall be declared to have passed in second class

Candidates who obtain 75% of marks in the aggregate ( internal + external) shall be deemed to have passed the examination in first class with distinction, provided they pass all examinations prescribed for the course in the first appearance.

10. GRADING SYSTEM

The term grading system indicates a 10 point scale of evaluation of the performance of the students in terms of marks grade points letter grade and class.

11. RANKING

Candidates who pass al the examination prescribed for the course with the first appearance itself alone are eligible for ranking / distinction

616

12. PATTERN OF QUESTION PAPER- CORE

PART –A ( 50 words)

5 questions no choice 5x2 marks =10 marks

PART- B (250 words)

10 questions ( either or) 5x4marks =20 marks

PART –C ( 500 words )

3 questions out of 5 3x15 marks = 45 marks

Total =75 marks

PATTERN OF QUESTION PAPER- ELECTIVE

PART - A ( 50 words ) 3 questions out of 4 3x5 =15marks

PART-B ( 250 words) 4 questions either or 4x15 =60 marks

Total = 75 marks

13. TRANSITORY PROVISION

Candidates who have undergone the course of study prior to the academic year 2012-2013 will be permitted to appear for the examinations under those regulations for a period of 3 years .i:e up to the

617

inclusive of April/ May 2016 examinations. Thereafter, they will be permitted to appear for the examination only under the regulations then in force.

618

PROGRAM OUTCOME

On completion of the programme the student can

1. Describe the organizations, administration, personnel and financial management related to the Hospitality units and Hospitals. 2. Describe the legal aspects and laws concerning food service units and hospitals. 3. Plan and design the layout and interior décor as well as plan and prepare meals and menu’s for various types of commercial and non-commercial food service units. 4. Provide nutritional counseling and dietary modifications for various disease conditions and plan individual menus according to the disease conditions. 5. Understand the importance of personal and personnel hygiene, HACCP and safe handling of food.

SELECTED TOPICS IN FOOD SERVICE MANAGEMENT

SEMESTER: I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE CREDIT:4

PAPER No : I CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Understand the principles and functions of catering management 2. Develop managerial skills. 3. Gain knowledge about laws governing food service establishments.

THEORY

619

Unit I : Organization and administration of food service industry

b. Principles, functions of management c. Tools of management- organization chart, job description, job specification, work schedule, job analysis. d. Organization chart and functions of different departments in a hotel - Front office, Housekeeping, Quantity food production and Service units. e. Laws governing catering establishments Unit II: Personnel Management

b. Recruitment and selection - Sources of recruitment. steps involved in selection. c. Training – Importance, methods of training. d. Performance appraisal - Promotion and dismissal of employees, grievance and redressal e. Leadership qualities - Types of leadership, characteristics of a good leader. Unit III: Work Improvement

b. Work simplification, motion economy, work improvement programme, Application of work improvement c. Methods for work improvement study, work sampling- pathway chart, process chart, micro motion study, chronocyclograph. Unit IV: Cleaning sanitation and safety

a. Cleaning and sanitation – principles of cleaning, factors that influence the cleaning process, principles of sanitation in food service operations b. Environmental hygiene and sanitation- site, structure , equipment, air light, water supply, ventilation , waste disposal, pest control c. Safety- causes and prevention of accidents Unit V: Environmental Management

a. Conservation of natural resources- Energy conservation and water conservation b. Solid waste management

COURSE OUTCOMES

On the completion of the course the student can

620

1. Describe the organization and administration of food service industry, personnel and environmental management Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

2. Describe significance of work Improvement, cleaning, sanitation and safety Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Dhawan.V (2005) Food Beverage Service, Noida, Frank Bros.& Company Limited. 2. Gupta .C.B(2017) Management Theory and Practice, Nineteeth Edition, New Delhi, Sultan Chand & sons. 3. Khan .M.A(1990) Concepts of Foodservice Operations and Management John Wiley & Sons, London 4. Kinton and Cessarani (1999), Theory of Catering, John Wiley & Sons, London. 5. Koschewar L. and Terrel M.E. (1961) Food Service Planning layout and Equipment, John Wiley and Sons Ltd. 6. Lewis J. M, Ronald F (1984) Food Service System Management. AVI Publishing Company. 7. Longree. K (1967) Quantity Food Sanitation, John Wiley and Sons, Icn., New York. 8. Magris, M, Canty .Mc. C and Brighton. R (1933), Introduction to catering Oxford Blackwell, Scientific publications, London. 9. Mericks,P and Jones.P (1986) The Management of Catering Operations, Holt, Pinehart and Winston publishers. 10. Sethi.M (2007), Institutional Food service, New Age Publications (p) Ltd, New Delhi. 11. Sethi.M (2007), Catering Management, New Age Publications (p) Ltd, New Delhi 12. Negi.J(2014)Professional Hotel Management , Third Edition, New Delhi, S.Chand& company private limited. 13. Palacio.J.P and Theis.M. (1994) West& Wood's Introduction to Foodservice , Eighth Edition. Merrill Education Products, New Jersey. 14. Paul M., Peter J., (1986) The Management of catering operations, Holt, Pinehart and Winston publishers. 15. West B.B. Wood L. Harger V.P. (1966) Food Service in Institutions ,John Willey and Sons, Inc., New York HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY

SEMESTER I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : II CREDIT : 4

PAPER NO : 2 CODE :

621

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1) Learn the anatomy and physiological functioning of the various systems in the body. 2) Understand the integrated functioning of various systems in the body.

THEORY

Unit I : Cardiovascular system

a. Hemostasis b. Conduction system, ECG, Cardiac cycle, Action of heart and its regulation, factors influencing blood pressure and regulation of blood pressure

Unit II : Gastro-Intestinal system

a. Digestion and absorption of carbohydrate, protein and fat, Gastro-intestinal movements and their regulation. Unit III : Excretory System

a. Kidney – Renal functions – Urine formation, Micturition, Role of kidney in maintaining acid-base balance b. Skin – Excretory function, Regulation of body temperature c. Lungs – Gaseous transport in lungs and tissues, Regulation of respiration Unit IV : Regulatory systems

a. Nervous system – CNS,ANS-Parts and functions. b. Endocrine system – Regulatory functions and disorders of pituitary, thyroid, parathyroid, adrenal glands and pancreas c. Effect of stress on nervous, endocrine, digestive, cardiovascular and respiratory systems Unit V : Reproductive system

622

a. Male reproductive system – Spermatogenesis, Male sex hormones b. Female reproductive system – Role of hormones in ovulation, menstruation, pregnancy and lactation COURSE OUTCOME

On the completion of the course the student can

1. To develop firm knowledge base on the anatomy and functioning of the various systems in the body and their integration. Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

2. Relate to the pathological features seen in disease condition. Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

REFERENCES

1. Ganong, 1995, Review of Medical physiology, Prentice Hall international, London 2. Guyton, 1991, Human physiology and Mechanism of diseases, W.B Saunders and co. London 3. Guyton A.C. and Hall J.E., 2001, Pocket companion to Text book of Medical Physiology, 10th edition, W.B Saunders company, Philadelphia 4. Elaine N. Marieb, Anatomy and physiology, The Benjamin/Cummings Publishing company Inc., New York 5. Mcknaught and Callander, Illustrated physiology, W.B Saunder and company, Philadelphia 6. Ross and Williams (2000) Anatomy and physiology, Churchill Livingston, London 7. Tortora J.G and Anagnostakos N.P, 1991, Principles of anatomy and Physiology, Canfield Press, San Francisco

623

ADVANCED FOOD SCIENCE

SEMESTER: I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : III CREDIT:4

PAPER No : 3 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Understand the factors affecting the cooking of various food stuffs. 2. Gain knowledge on the methods of cooking different foods

THEORY

Unit I: Cereals and

a. Cereal cookery - gelatinization, dextrinisation and syneresis, factors affecting cooking quality of cereals. b. Batters and doughs - Types of flours, factors affecting gluten formation. c. Baking - Role of ingredients in baking, preparation of bread, cakes, cookies and pastry d. Legumes - Germination, factors affecting cooking and role of pulses in cookery toxic constituents. Unit II: Flesh Foods, Egg and Milk

a. Meat and poultry – composition and tenderization of meat b. Fish - Nutritional significance of fish c. Egg – Factors affecting of foam formation, coagulation. d. Milk and milk products – fermented and non fermented. Properties of milk , role of milk in cookery Unit III: Vegetables and Fruits

624

a. Chemical components, changes during ripening, browning reaction and its prevention, effect of cooking.

Unit IV: Fats and Oils, Sugars

a. Fats and oils - Effect of heating on fats and oil, hydrogenation, winterization and rancidity - Types and prevention, role of fats in cooking

b. Sugar cookery – functions of sugar- sugar related products- molasses, corn syrup, maple syrup, jaggery, honey- sugar cookery - crystallisation, stages in sugar cookery, crystalline and non crystalline candies.

Unit-V:Techniques in the preparation of a. Puff, cake and cookies b. Egg- whipping quality c. Stages of sugar cooking – preparation of mysorepak, groundnut toffee d. Jams and jellies e. Fats and oils -Smoking temperature – preparation of mayonnaise f. Milk -Preparation of paneer and custard

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the students can:

1. Explain the factors affecting the cooking of various food stuffs. Assessment: class test, model exam 2. Choose the appropriate techniques for the preparation of different culinary items Assessment: class test, assignment and seminars

REFERENCES 1. Brown.A.2015.Understanding Food Principles and Preparation, fifth edition, Cengage Learning, Singapore. 2. Cameron, A., Fox; B.C., 1990, "Food Science, Nutrition and Health", Edward Arnold, London. 3. Grisworld, R.M., 1962, "The Experimental Study of Foods", Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston. 4. Potter, N.M., 2002, "Food Science", The AVI Publishing Company, Connecticut.

625

5. Paul, C. Palmer, H.H., 1972, "Food Theory and applications", John Wiley and sons Inc. New York. 6. Peckham, G.C., 1975, Foundations of Food Preparation:, Macmillan and Company, London 7. Srilakshmi, B., 2003. "Food Science", New Age International Publishers, New Delhi.

E-REFERENCES 1. Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 2. www.pubs.acs.org 3. Food Quality and Preference 4. www.elsevier.com 5. International Journal of Food Science and Technology

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

SEMESTER: I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : IV CREDIT : 4

PAPER NO :4 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

4. Understand the principles of designing research. 5. Gain knowledge on the tools used for data collection. 6. Acquire skills in analysis of data, report and thesis writing

THEORY

Unit-I: Introduction to Research

b. Research- Meaning, objectives, motivation, types, significance, methods of research and research ethics and informed consent.

626

Unit-II: Research design and collection of data

e. Formulation of research problem. f. Research Design- Meaning, need, and types. g. Tools of collection of data- Observation, questionnaire, interview schedule, scaling techniques. h. Validity and reliability Unit-III: Sampling concepts

b. Defining target population and sample, sampling types- Probability and non Probability sampling, advantages and disadvantages. Unit-IV: Processing and analysis of data c. Data- Editing, coding, classification, dependent and independent variables, confidence levels, tabulation and interpretation. d. Hypothesis –, basic concepts- meaning, types , testing of hypothesis. Unit-V: Research proposal and Report Writing

c. Developing a research proposal and types of reports d. Thesis writing- Format, typing, appendices, bibliography and footnotes.

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the students can:

3. Describe the various tools of research and research design. Assessment: Class Test, Model Exam 4. Formulate research proposals. Assessment: Assignment

REFERENCES

12. Best, J.W. and James, V.K., 2000, Research in Education, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 13. Gupta. S.P., 2001, Statistical Methods, New Delhi, Sultan & Co., Publishers 14. Kerlinger, F.M., 1964, Foundations of Behavioural Research, New York, Holt and Winston Inc. 15. Kothari, C.R., 2002 Research methods and techniques, New Delhi, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 16. Krishnaswami, O.R., 1993, Methodology of Research in Social Sciences.

627

17. Bombay, Himalaya Publishing House. 18. Agarwal, Y.P., 1990, Statistical methods, New Delhi, Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd., 19. Gupta, S.P., 1990, Statistical methods, Madras, Sultan Chand and Son. 20. Kothari C. R (2004), 'Research Methodology Methods and Techniques', Second Edition, New Age International (P) Limited, Publishers, New Delhi. 21. Palanisamy, S and Manoharan, M., 1999., Statistical Methods for Biologists, Palani, Paramount Publications. 22. Rao, K.V., 1996, Bio-statistics, Madras, Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers

LIFE SPAN NUTRITION

SEMESTER: I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : V CREDIT:4

PAPER No :5 CODE :

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 4. Understand the role of nutrition in maintaining good health. 5. Understand the dietary modifications at different stages of family life. 6. Understand the different problems and complications during life cycle.

THEORY Unit I: Infant and Child Nutrition e. Infancy – Feeding and composition. f. Growth and nutritional assessment – Growth chart, LBW babies – characteristics and nutritional care. g. Childhood – Growth and development, food and nutrient needs, dietary adequacy. h. Complications in infancy and childhood related to nutritional inadequacies. Unit II: Adolescent nutrition d. Growth and development, food and nutrient requirements, e. Food habits, nutritional concerns with regard to eating disorders. f. Complications in adolescence related to nutritional inadequacies.!!@@##$$ Unit III : Nutrition in Adulthood

628

c. Food and nutrient requirements during adulthood d. Nutritional concerns in adulthood related to nutritional inadequacies Unit IV : Nutrition in Pregnancy and Lactation c. Physiological changes, food and nutrient requirements, typical food preferences, impact of nutritional status on infants. d. Complications during pregnancy and lactation. Unit V : Geriatric Nutrition c. Food and Nutritional requirements - Nutritional care of the elderly. d. Nutritional problems of old age.

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the student can

3. Identify the various nutritional problems and related complications during the life cycle. Assessment method : Tests , Assignment, end semester examination

4. Plan nutritious meals to combat malnutrition within the family, Assessment method : Menu planning, Presentation, Group discussion

REFERENCES 1. Antia, F.P., 1992, Clinical Dietetics and Nutrition Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2. Corinne, R.H., 1996, Normal and therapeutic nutrition, Mcmallian Co., New York. 3. Davidson, S.R. and Passmore J.F., 1989, Human Nutrition and Dietetics, ELBS London. 4. Mahan, K.L., and Stump, S.E., 1996, Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet therapy M.B. Saunders Co., USA. 5. Balasubramanian et al., 1998, Dietary guidelines for Indians, ICMR, New Delhi. 6. Passmore, AH and Adams, A.A., 1990, Clinical assessment of nutritional status – A working manual, Will and Wilson Publishing, London 7. Bamji et al(1996), Textbook of Human Nutrition Oxford and IBH Publishing co. Pvt. Ltd. Delhi. 8. Shils.E.M, Shike .M, Ross. A.C, Cabellero. B and Cousins.R.J (2011) Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, Eleventh Edition, Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, Philadelphia 9. Mahan, K.L., and Stump, S.E., 1996, Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet therapy M.B. Saunders Co., USA. 10. Nix .S(2016) Williams' Basic Nutrition & Diet Therapy, Fifteenth Edition, Elsevier

629

E- REFERENCES 8. www.ingenta.connect.com 9. www.fda.gov/search.html 10. www.wodsworth.com/nutrition 11. http://golgy.harvard.edu./biopages,html 12. www.whfreeman.com 13. http://www.harcourtcollege.com 14. www.eatright.org.

FRONT OFFICE MANAGEMENT

SEMESTER: II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE - ELECTIVE CREDIT : 4

PAPER No : 6 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students

1. To understand the varied dimensions of a food service industry with special reference to front office 2. To study the concepts of organization, communication and operational procedures in front office

THEORY

Unit I:

a. Classification of hotels based on star category, size ownership and other categories. Types of rooms Unit II:

a. Hotel organization - Organization pattern in a large, medium and small sized hotel.

630

b. Functions of receptionist, job description of front office manager, assistant front office manager, assistant manager, reservation manager, lobby manager, front office assistants, night manager, night clerk,bell captain and bellboy. Unit III:

a. Tariff structure –tariff, basis of charging, tariff fixation, room tariff card- group rate, volume rate , executive business service rates, tour group whole sale rate, discounted rate, crib rate ,extra bed rate, family rate, crew rate corporate rate and student faculty programme. Unit IV:

a. Front office and guest handling – stages of guest contact with the hotel-the guest arrival, preparing ,receiving, registration procedure-systems of registration, rooming of guest, group arrival , VVIP guest arrival and greeting. b. Activities of front desk during stay- mail and message handling , safe deposit boxes,

Unit V:

a. Guest accounting - basics of keeping accounts, guest ledger ,city ledger- accounting entries, front office cashiering ,guest accounting process, night auditing- night audit duties, night audit process ,night audit report and departure procedure

COURSE OUTCOME

On the completion of the course the student can

1. Describe classification of hotels, hotel organization and tariff structure. Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

2. Describe guest handling, activities of front desk during customer stay and guest accounting. Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

REFERENCES

631

1. Ismail. A ( 2004) Front Office Operations and Management, Delmar Publications 2. Baker.S , Bradley.P and Huyton .J( 1996) Principles of Hotel Front Office Operations , Cassell publications 3. Andrews.S ( 1982) Hotel Front Office Training Manual , Tata mc Graw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New Delhi 4. Chankravarti B.K (1999) Hotel Management Theory, APH publishing corporation, New Delhi 5. Chon. K and Sparrow R. T (2001) Welcome to Hospitality- An Introduction, Second Edition, Delamar publication 6. Tewari .J.R(2009) Hotel Front Office: Operations and Management, Oxford University Press 7. Negi. J(2013) Hospitality Reception and Front Office Procedures and Systems, S.Chand&Company Private Limited, New Delhi. 8. Abbott.P&Lewry .S (2007) Front Office Procedures, Social Skills, Yields and Management, Second edition, Butterworth-Heinemann Elsevier, Oxford. 9. Bhatnagar .S. K(2011) Front Office Management ,Frank Brothers, Noida 10. Aggarwal .R (2002) Hotel Front Office System and Procedures, Sublime Publications, Jaipur. 11. White.P.B and Beckley.H(1998) Hotel Reception, Fourth Edition, Hodder and Stoughton, Lincolnshire

THERAPEUTIC DIETETICS

SEMESTER: II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : CREDIT:4

PAPER No : 7 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to understand

1. The basic principles and significance of therapeutic nutrition 2. Knowledge on diagnosis and dietary treatment for various diseases.

THEORY

Unit I : Nutritional Management in theDiseases of Gastrointestinal system

632

a. Causes, symptoms and nutritional management of gastritis, peptic ulcer , flatulence, malabsorption syndrome, inflammatory bowel syndrome. b. Hepatitis, cirrhosis of liver, cholecystitis, cholelithiasis and pancreatitis Unit II : Nutritional Management in theDiseases of Kidney, Endocrine System and Obesity

c. Diseases of Kidney Causes, symptoms and nutritional management of nephritis, nephrosis, renal failure, renal stones and dialysis g. Nutritional management of obesity Causes and nutritional management

Unit III : Nutritional Management in Cardiovascular Diseases and HIV/AIDS

a. Diseases of Cardiovascular system Causes and nutritional management of hyperlipoproteinemia, atheroselerosis,

hypertension and congestive cardiac failure

b. HIV infection and AIDS Causes and nutritional management

Unit IV : Nutritional Management in Cancer and Burns

a. Cancer Causes and nutritional management

b. Burns Types and nutritional management.

Unit V : Nutritional Management in Metabolic Diseases

a. DiabetesMellitus Types, causes, symptoms and nutritional management.

b. Gout, and Phenyl ketonuria Symptoms and treatment.

633

COURSE OUTCOME

On the completion of the course the student can

1. Describe nutritional management in the diseases of gastrointestinal system and cardiovascular system Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

2. Describe nutritional management in the diseases of kidney and obesity Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

3. Describe nutritional management in the diseases of metabolic disorders, cancer and burns Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

REFERENCES

1. Alpers, et al., 1999, Manual of Nutritional Therapeutics, Little Brown, Washington. 2. Antia, F.P., 2000, Clinical Dietetics and Nutrition, Oxford Press, New Delhi. 3. Chatterjee, M.N. and Shinde, R., 1994, Text book of Medical Biochemistry, Jaypee Brothers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 4. Garrow, J.S. James, W.P.T. and Ralpha., 2000, Human Nutrition and Dietetics, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh. 5. Gaw et al., 1995, Clinical biochemistry. Churchill Livingston Publications, London 6. Gowenlock, A.H., 1988, Varley's Practical Clinical Biochemistry, CBS publishers and distributors, India. 7. Mahan, K.L. and Syliva, E.S., 2000, Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, W.B. Saunders Company, Philadelphia. 8. Ramakrishnan., 1994, Text book of Clinical Biochemistry, T.R. Publications, Madras. 9. Robinson et al., 1994, Normal and Therapeutic Nutrition, Macmillian Co., New York. 10. Srilakshmi, B., 2005, Dietetics, New Age International (P.) Limited, Publishers, New Delhi 11. Malhan,K.NandAtlin(2002).Krauses Food Nutrition and Diet Therapy, W.B Saunders Company, Philadelphia. 12. Bamji et al(1996), Textbook of Human Nutrition Oxford and IBH Publishing co. Pvt. Ltd. Delhi. 13. Shils.E.M, Shike .M, Ross. A.C, Cabellero. B and Cousins.R.J (2011) Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, Eleventh Edition, Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, Philadelphia

634

14. Nix .S(2016) Williams' Basic Nutrition & Diet Therapy, Fifteenth Edition, Elsevier

THERAPEUTIC DIETETICS PRACTICAL

SEMESTER: II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : CREDIT:4

PAPER No : 8 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Plan therapeutic diets. 2. Learn skills in the preparation of therapeutic diets.

PRACTICAL

PLANNING AND PREPARATION OF DIETS FOR

1. Peptic Ulcer 2. Ulcerative Colitis 3. Hepatitis 4. Cirrhosis of Liver 5. Pancreatitis 6. Diabetes Mellitus 7. Nephritis 8. Nephrosis 9. Atherosclerosis 10. Hypertension 11. Colon Cancer

635

COURSE OUTCOME

On the completion of the course the student can

1. Describe nutritional management through planning of diets for Peptic Ulcer, Ulcerative Colitis, Hepatitis, Cirrhosis of Liver, Pancreatitis, Diabetes Mellitus,Nephritis, Nephrosis, Atherosclerosis, Hypertension and Colon Cancer Assessment: practical tests and end semester examination.

REFERENCES

1. Antia. F.P.. 1992. Clinical Dietetics and Nutrition. Bombay, Oxford University Press. 2. Passmore. P.and Eastwood. M.A. 1986. Human Nutrition and dietetics. London,ELBS. 3. Robinson. C.H. et al. 1994. Normal and Therapeutic Nutrition. New York, Macmillan and Co. 4. Williams. S.R. 1994. Nutrition and Diet Therapy. New York., Mosby Mirror Publishing Co. 5. Sri Lakshmi. B. 2010. Dietetics. New Delhi ,New Age International Pub

HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT

SEMESTER: II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : ELECTIVE I CREDIT: 3

PAPER No : 9 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Know about the types of hospitals and their administration. 2. Gain knowledge about the legal aspects of hospital administration. 3. Know about National and International organizations financing medical care.

THEORY

636

Unit I : Hospital Growth and classification of hospitals in India

b. History, types and functions of Hospitals, c. Relationship of Hospital to the Community

Unit II: Organization and Management

a. Organizational chart, advantages and limitation chart, duties and responsibilities of hospital administrator, doctor, nurses and other employees. b. Effective hospital management- principles of management, skills and characteristics of effective manager.

Unit III : Legal Aspects of Hospital Management

a. General acts legislations applicable to hospitals. b. Law of torts, consumer protection act, patient’s bill of rights, law of negligence

Unit IV: Organisations Financing Medical Care

a. National - ICMR, NIN, CFTRI b. International - WHO, UNICEF, FAO

Unit V: Accounting and Financial Management in Hospitals.

a. Principles, analysis and interpretation of financial reports. b. Preparation and use of budgets, Methods of cost computation.

COURSE OUTCOME

On the completion of the course the student can

1. Describe growth, classification, and organizations financing medical care of hospitals in India. Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

637

2. Describe organization and management, legal aspects of hospital management, accounting and financial management in hospitals. Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

REFERENCES

1. Davidson S.R. and Passmore J.F., 1975, Human Nutrition and Dietetics. Vol. I II Edition. 2. Francis, C.M and D' Souza, M.C., 2000, Hospital Administration. Jay Brothers. 3. Gillespie S. McNeil G., 1992, Hospital Management Macmillan and Co., New York. 4. Mitchell et. al., 1987, Nutrition in Health & disease, Pitman M. Edu. Publishing Co., 5. Robinson et.al., 1986, Normal and Therapeutic Nutrition. Macmillan Co., New york.

E – REFERENCES

1. www.ingenta.connect.com - Food and Food ways. 2. www.fda.gov/search.html 3. www.wodsworth.com/nutrition 4. www.elsevier.com - Indian Journal of Nutrition and food microbiology.

ENTREPRENEURSHIP MANAGEMENT

SEMESTER: II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : CREDIT: 3

PAPER No : 10 CODE :

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 4. Learn the qualities of an entrepreneur 5. Understand the process and procedure of setting up of an enterprise. 6. Develop managerial skills.

638

THEORY

Unit I: Entrepreneur and Entrepreneurship c. Definition and need, qualities of an entrepreneur. d. Factors motivating entrepreneurs Unit II: Enterprise a. Definition, types of organization – sole proprietorship, partnership, stock company – private and public limited. b. Steps for starting an enterprise, marketing – steps in conducting market survey. c. Product selection – principles of product selection and development, sales promotion Unit III: Project Report d. Meaning and significance of project report e. Elements of project formulation f. Planning commission guidelines for project formulation/preparation, legislation – licensing, registration. Unit IV: Management of Business Enterprise a. Financial management – Break even analysis, working capital, cost concept, pricing of the product. b. Interface with Government – Incentives, sales tax, income tax, excise duty – export and import duties.

Unit V: Human Resource Management a. Managing employees in an enterprise, labour law application – Factories Act, Workman Compensation Act and Industries Dispute Act. b. Problem faced by women entrepreneurs.

RELATED EXPERIENCE

Visit to units run by women entrepreneurs.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can

639

4. Explain the importance of entrepreneurship to create entrepreneurs. Assessment method : Tests , end semester examination 5. Apply knowledge of starting business and acquiring financial help and incentives from government. Assessment method : Tests , assignments, end semester examination

REFERENCES 1. AbhaMathur Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship (ODISHA) 2018 Edition ISBN No.:9789386882479 2. Gupta and Srinivasan, N.P., 1985, Entrepreneural development, New Delhi, Sultan Chand and Sons Educational Publishers. 3. Holt, D.H., 1990, Entrepreneurship development, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India. 4. Khanka, S.S., 1990, Entrepreneurship development, New Delhi, Chand and Co., Ltd., 5. ParamjeetKaur Dillon., 1993, Women Entrepreneurs, Problem and prospectus, New Delhi, Blaze Publishers Co., Ltd 6. Yadav, C.P., 2000, Encyclopaedia of Entrepreneurship development, Volume I, Lucknow, Anmol Publication Ltd. 7. Yadav, C.P., 2000, Encyclopaedia of Entrepreneurship development, Volume II, Lucknow, Anmol Publications Ltd. 8. Yadav, C.P., 2000, Encyclopaedia of Entrepreneurship development, Volume III, Lucknow, Anmol Publications Ltd. 9. Yadav, C.P., 2000, Encyclopaedia of Entrepreneurship development, Volume IV, Lucknow, Anmol Publications Ltd.

JOURNALS 1. Journal of Entrepreneurship, Sage Publications Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi. E-REFERENCES 1. www.ibusinessdevelopment. 2. www.enterweb.org/entrship.htm 3. www.entrepreneuriadevelopment.com 4. www.entrepreneurialdevelopmentcenter 5. www.entrepreneurship.mit.edu

640

NUTRITIONAL CARE PROCESS AND DIET COUNSELLING

SEMESTER: III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : CREDIT:4

PAPER No :12 CODE :

OBJECTIVES:

To enable the students to understand

1. The basic principles and significance of nutritional care 2. Knowledge on assessment of nutritional status of a patient 3. Plan, implement and evaluate of nutritional care through diet counseling.

THEORY

Unit I – Nutritional care process

a. Definition, Steps in nutritional care process-Nutrition assessment, Nutritional diagnosis, b. Nutrition Intervention and Nutrition Monitoring and evaluation. Unit II : Adaption of Therapeutic diets.

a. Purpose of therapeutic adaption, Types of dietary adaption, Diet prescription and factors influencing diet prescription, Constructing therapeutic diets, Routine b. Hospital diets- Clear liquid, Full liquid, soft diet, Regular normal diet. Unit III : Tube Feeding or Enteral feeding

a. Definition, Types, Techniques, Indications and contraindications for Enteral feeding, b. Complications of enteral feeding and advantages of enteral feeding. Unit IV : Paraenteral Feeding or Intravenous Feeding

a. Definition, Types, Techniques, Indications and contraindications for Paraenteral feeding,

641

b. Complications of Paraenteral feeding and advantages of Paraenteral feeding, TPN formulae for children , and adults. Unit V : Patient care and Diet counselling

a. Patient care- phases, Diet counseling-Definition, Factors influencing counseling, b. Dietitian- Definition, Classification, Role and responsibilities of dietitian, code of ethics.

COURSE OUTCOME

On the completion of the course the student can

1. Describe nutritional care process, adaption of therapeutic diets, patient care and diet counselling. Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

2. Describe tube feeding / enteral feeding and parenteral feeding / intravenous feeding Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

REFERENCES :

1. Bamji et al(1996), Textbook of Human Nutrition Oxford and IBH Publishing co. Pvt. Ltd. Delhi. 2. WHO ( 2003)Diet, Nutrition and Prevention of Chronic Diseases, WHO Technical Report series, Geneva 3. Anitia F.P,( 2008) Clinical Dietetics and Nutrition, Oxford University Press, New York. 4. Shils.E.M, Shike .M, Ross. A.C, Cabellero. B and Cousins.R.J (2011) Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, Eleventh Edition, Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, Philadelphia 5. Mahan, K.L., and Stump, S.E., 1996, Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet therapy M.B. Saunders Co., USA. 6. Nix .S(2016) Williams' Basic Nutrition & Diet Therapy, Fifteenth Edition, Elsevier 7. Zaloga .G.P(1994) Nutrition in Critical Care, Mosby, St Louis 8. Mario.S (2014)Nutrition in Critical Care, Cambridge University Press 9. Skipper.A (2012) Dietitian’s Handbook of Enteral and Paraenteral Nutrition Second Edition, ASPEN publications, Maryland 10. Nelson.J.K, Moxness. K.E, Jensen.M.D and Gastineau.C.F(1994)Mayo Clinic Diet Manual A Handbook of Nutrition Practices, Seventh Edition,Mosby, St Louis

642

E-REFERENCES

1. www.sciencedaily.com 2. www.cdc.gov / nchs 3. www.whoindia.org

FINANCIAL AND MARKETING MANAGEMENT

SEMESTER: III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : CREDIT:4

PAPER No :12 CODE :

OBJECTIVES:

To enable the students to

1. To create awareness about cost components and cost control strategies. 2. To prepare effective budgets. 3. To understand pricing policies and marketing strategies.

THEORY

Unit I – Financial management

a. Objectives and functions of finance management. b. Costing – cost components, cost control – food cost, labour cost, overhead cost. c. Records for control – purchasing and receiving records, storage and store room records, food production records, service records, cash transaction records, operating and maintenance records, personnel records. Unit II :Budgeting

a. Definition and types of budgets.

643

b. Steps in budget preparation. c. Factors to be considered while planning budget deviations. Unit III :Pricing

a. Factors affecting pricing, food service establishment, environment. b. Methods of pricing – formal and informal. c. Types of taxes. Unit IV :Accounting

a. Conventional accounting techniques – single entry, double entry, advantages of double entry techniques. b. Types of accounts – personal, real, nominal. c. Books of accounts – ledger, cash book, purchase book, sales book, purchase return book, sales return book, journal – single, double and triple column journals. Trial balance, profit and loss account, Balance sheet. Measures of profitability. Unit V :Marketing in food service organizations

a. Definitions, marketing cycle, marketing mix. b. Marketing as a managerial function. c. Merchandising and sales promotion d. Branding. COURSE OUTCOME

On the completion of the course the student can

1. Understand cost components and cost control strategies in finance management. Assessment method: Test, Assignments.

2. Access financial and marketing information from a wide variety of sources and use this information in food service organizations.

REFERENCES :

1. Reid, R.D: (1983) Food Service and restaurant marketing. New Yor: Van NostranReinhold Company. 2. Sagowitz,S.:(1985) Anticipating customer demands, Food Management.

644

3. Sneed,J., and Kreese, K.H(1989) Understanding food service financial management Rockville, Md.Aspen System Corporation. 4. Balu. V and Murugan, S (2000), Financial Managemnt, Chennai Sri Venkateshwara publications. 5. Lokhoitea.R,N(1999), How to save tax, New vision publishers, New Delhi.

645

APPLIED STATISTICS

SEMESTER III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : XI CREDIT : 4

PAPER NO : 11 CODE NO:

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Learn the methods by which statistical data are analysed

2. Apply appropriate statistical analysis in research work

THEORY

Unit I:

b. Measures of central tendency- Calculation of arithmetic mean, median and mode of individual observations, discrete series and continuous series. Merits and demerits of mean, median and mode. Unit II:

c. Measures of dispersion-range, Quartile deviation, mean deviation and standard deviation d. Measures of skewness-positive and negative skewness, Karl pearson’s coefficient of skewness and Bowley’s coefficient of skewness Unit III:

b. Measures of relationship – Correlation analysis – Types of correlation, Methods of studying correlation- Scatter diagram- merits and demerits, Calculation of Karl Pearson’s Coefficient of Correlation and Spearman’s rank Correlation Coefficient.

646

Unit IV:

b. Regression analysis- regression lines-difference between correlation and regression analysis, uses of regression analysis, Simple regression analysis using regression equations of Yon X and X on Y. Unit V:

c. Tests of Hypotheses- Procedure of testing hypothesis, two types of errors in testing hypotheses, two- tailed and one tailed tests of hypotheses. Tests of significance of large samples, tests of significance for small samples- student’s t test. d. Chi- square test – definition, uses and limitations, F-test- definition, applications, ANOVA- assumptions, one way and two way ANOVA. COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can

3. Solve problems to find the desired measure of central tendency, dispersion, relationship, regression and tests of significance. 4. Apply knowledge to test hypothesis and interpret the results obtained.

REFERENCES

4. Gupta. S.P., 2014, Statistical Methods, Forty Fourth Revised Edition, New Delhi, Sultan Chand & Co., Publishers 5. Palanisamy, S and Manoharan, M., 1999., Statistical Methods for Biologists, Palani, Paramount Publications. 6. Rao, K.V., 1996, Bio-statistics, Madras, Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers

FOOD PROCESSING AND PRESERVATION

SEMESTER : III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION : 4 HOURS/WEEK

CORE ELECTIVE : III CREDIT : 3

PAPER NO: 15 CODE :

647

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

3. Understand the principles of different techniques used in processing and preservation of foods. 4. Study the applications of different processing methods in the food industry.

THEORY

Unit I : Introduction

b. Food processing - Principals of food processing and preservation, Effect of processing on sensory characteristics and nutritional properties of foods Unit II : Processing and preservation by heat

e. Heat processing using steam or water - Blanching, pasteurization, sterilization and UHT processing, extrusion cooking. f. Heat processing using hot air – Dehydration, baking, roasting. g. Heat processing using oil – frying. h. Heat processing by radiated energy and microwave heating. Unit III : Processing and preservation by low-temperatures

b. Refrigeration, freezing, Controlled Atmosphere, Modified Atmosphere and dehydro-freezing. Use of microorganisms - food fermentations, pickling, smoking. Unit IV : Processing and preservation of Beverages

b. Types of beverages, importance, Fruit Beverages. Ingredient selection, extended shelf life. Unit V : Packaging

b. Principles, functions and types, Methods of food packaging – Vacuum packaging, Carbon-di-oxide, nitrogen packaging, aseptic packaging, Flexible packaging.

648

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can

a. Describe the principles & methods used to preserve foods. Assessment : Assignment, Tests b. Apply the various techniques used to prepare and preserve foods Assessment : Practical, food industry visits.

REFERENCES

17. Chakraverty, A., Majumdar, A.S., Raghavan. G.S. V. &Ramawamy, H.S. (Eds.) (2003). Handbook of Postharvest Technology Cereals, Fruits, Vegetables, Tea, and Spices. USA: Marcel Dekker Inc. 18. Brennan, J.G. (Ed.) (2006). Food Processing Handbook. Weinheim, Germany: Wiley- VCH Verlag GmbH &Co.KGaA. 19. Fellows, P.J. (2000). Food Processing Technology- Principles and practice. (2nd Ed.). Florida, USA: CRC Press LLC. 20. Karel, M. and Lund, D.B. (2003) Physical Principles of Food Preservation (2 ed) NTY, USA: Marcel Dekker. 21. Rahman, M.S. (Ed.). (2007). Handbook of Food Preservation. (2nd Ed.). Florida, USA: CRC Press. 22. Smith, J.S., &Hui, Y.H. (Eds.) (2004). Food Processing: Principles and Applications. Oxford, UK: Blackwell Publishing. 23. S.M Reddy (2015), “Basic Food Science and Technology”, New Age International Publishers. 24. Sun, Da-Wen (Ed.) (2005). Emerging technologies for Food Processing. California, USA: Elsevier Academic Press. 25. “Food packaging technology Handbook (2nd revised edition)” by NIIR Board, Published by NIIR project consultancy service, ISBN: 978981039090, Code: N193 2012. 26. Fellows, P.J, “Food processing technology: Principles and Practice”, Second edition, Woodhead Publishing limited, Cambridge, 2005. 27. Sahay, K.M and K.K Singh, “UNIT operations in Agricultural Processing”, vikas publishing House Pvt ltd, New Delhi, 2003. 28. Sahin, S and Summu, S.G (2006), Physical Properties of Foods, NY, USA: Springer Science 29. Farnworth, E.R (ed) (2008), “Handbook of Fermented Functional foods (2nded)”, Florida, USA: CRC Press. 30. Hui, Y.H et al., (2004), “Handbook of food and beverage fermentation technology”, New York, USA: Marcel Dekker Inc.,

649

31. Chen, X.D and Mujumdar, A.S (2008), Drying technologies in food processing, Sussex, U: Blackwell publishing. 32. Frazer, W.C and Dennis C Westhoff (4rd edition) (2008), Food microbiology, McGraw Hill Companies,

E-REFERENCES

8. Novel packaging technologies - www.foodprotection.org 9. Regulations and Types of packaging -www.worldpackaging.org 10. Canning - http://www.metal-pack.org 11. Vacuum packaging - http://www.culinaryinnovations.co.uk/ 12. Techniques of food processing - mofpi.nic.in 13. Novel Food processing techniques - www.ift.org 14. Modified atmosphere packaging - www.adph.org

650

FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY CONTROL

SEMESTER -III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 4 HOURS/WEEK

CORE ELECTIVE-IV CREDIT: 3

PAPER NO :16 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students

1. To learn about the importance of food safety and quality control 2. To gain knowledge on the existing quality control systems 3. To gain familiarity with the standards and specifications used

THEORY

Unit I : Introduction to food safety and quality

a. Introduction to concepts of food quality, food safety, food quality assurance and food quality management. b. Importance and functions of quality control. Unit II :Food adulteration

a. Food adulteration, nature of adulterants, methods of evaluation of food adulterants and toxic constituents. b. Current challenges in food adulteration. Unit III : Safety Vs Hazards

a. Microbiological considerations in food safety, good manufacturing practices (GMP), good hygienic practices & food safety management. b. Evaluation of food safety – sensory evaluation, quality analysis and applications of HACCP in food safety. Unit IV :Quality control in food industry

651

a. Quality Control concepts as applied to the food industry, Methods of evaluation and control of the various aspects of quality of raw materials. b. Manufacturing process and testing of finished products. Unit V :Role of National and International regulatory agencies in food safety

a. Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), AGMARK, Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI), Codex alimentarious commission, USFDA. b. International organization for standards (ISO) and its standards for food quality and safety (ISO 9000 series, ISO 22000, ISO 15161, ISO 14000), FSSC COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can

1. Demonstrate knowledge of food safety and management system. Assessment : Visit to manufacturing unit

2. Audit food materials and quality control of foods.

Assessment : Internal audit training program.

REFERENCES: 1. Early. R. (1995): Guide to Quality Management Systems for the Food Industry, Blackie, Academic and professional, London 2. Gould, W.A and Gould, R.W. (1998). Total Quality Assurance for the Food Industries, CTI Publications Inc. Baltimore 3. Pomeraz, Y. and MeLoari, C.E. (1996): Food Analysis: Theory and Practice, CBS publishers and Distributor, New Delhi 4. Bryan, F.L. (1992): Hazard Analysis Critical Control Point Evaluations A Guide to Identifying Hazards and Assessing Risks Associated with Food Preparation and Storage. World Health Organization, Geneva 5. Kirk, R.S and Sawyer, R. (1991): Pearson s Composition and Analysis of Foods, Longman Scientific and Technical. 9th Edition, England 6. Food and Agricultural Organization (1980): Manuals of Food Quality Control. 2 Additives Contaminants Techniques, Rome 7. Furia, T.E. Ed. 1980. Regulatory Status of Direct Food Additives. CRC Press, Florida 8. Krammer, A. and Twigg, B.A. (1970). Quality Control for the Food Industry. 3rd Edn. AVI, Westport.

652

9. Rekha S. Singhal ,Pushpa R. Kulkarni, Dananesh V. Rege, (1997). Hand Book of Indices of food Quality and Authenticity, wood head Publishing Ltd 10. Hubbard, Merton R. (2003). Statistical Quality Control for the Food Industry, 3rd Edition, Springer 11. Neal D. Fortin. 2009. Food regulation, WileypPublishers 12. Naomi Rees. David Watson. 2000. International standards for food safety, An Aspen Publications 13. O’Rourke. 2005. European Food law, 3rd edition, Thomson, Sweet and Maxwell 14. Philip,A.C. Reconceptualizing quality. New Age International Publishers,Banglore. 2001. 15. Bhatia,R. and Ichhpujan,R.L. Quality assurance in Microbiology. CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi. 2004. 16. Kher, C.P. Quality control for the food industry. ITC Publishers, Geneva. 2000.

E-REFERENCES

1. http://www.fssai.gov.in/ 2. http://www.medindia.net 3. http://www.foodsafety.unl.edu/

SPORTS NUTRITION

SEMESTER : IV HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6HOURS/WEEK

CORE :XV CREDIT : 4

PAPER NO : 21 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students

1. To provide students an overview of the physiological implications of sports activities and its relationship to nutritional status. 2. To understand the utilization of nutrients during exercise and sports activities and the principles involved in nutrient recommendation for athletes

THEORY

Unit I : Introduction to Sports Nutrition and Exercise physiology

653

a. Definition of physical activity, exercise and sport. Basic training and nutrition principles. Basic sports nutrition guidelines. b. Exercise physiology –definition. Muscle physiology –overview of muscle tissue histology, muscle fiber types, muscular contraction and muscular adaptation to exercise training, Cardiopulmonary response and adaptations to exercise. Unit II: Macro Nutrient Guidelines for Sports Activities

a. Carbohydrates – as a source of energy for exercise, recommendations of carbohydrates for athletes, recommended intake of carbohydrate before, during and after training or competition. Use of carbohydrate loading, application of glycemic index and glycemic load in sports nutrition. b. Fats – as a source of energy for exercise, effects of training on fat usage, recommendations for athletes, effect of inadequate fat intake on training performance and health. Recommended intake of fat before, during and after training or competition. c. Proteins – role of protein for athletes, protein recommendations for athletes, recommended intake of protein before during and after training or competition, effects of inadequate protein intake in athletes, effects of excessive protein intake on training, performance and health. Use of protein and amino acid supplements. Considerations of protein intake of vegetarian athletes. Unit III: Energy Systems and Nutritional Ergogenics

a. Overview of energy systems- ATP- CP system, Lactic acid system, Aerobic System- Oxidative phosphorylation, Fuel utilization and respiratory exchange ratio. b. Definition of ergogenic aid and dietary supplement, types of dietary supplements and nutritional ergogenics commonly used by endurance, strength and team sport athlete. Unit IV: Micro Nutrient Guidelines for Sports Activities

a. Vitamins- The influence of exercise on vitamin requirements, recommended daily vitamin intake, vitamins and energy metabolism, vitamins and antioxidant protection. b. Minerals – Role of minerals in bone formation, blood formation and immune system. Impact of inadequate mineral intake on health and performance, female athletic triad. Unit V: Fluid intake during exercise and sports

a. Effect of exercise on fluid balance – effect of hypohydration and loss of electrolytes during exercise. Type, Timing and amount of fluid and electrolyte intake, application of fluid and electrolyte guidelines. Hyponatremia; hyperhydration ;Use of sports drinks.

654

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the student can

1. Describe muscle physiology and the adaptations of the muscular and cardiopulmonary systems to exercise. 2. Apply knowledge of nutrient requirements and nutrient timing to plan diets for athletes before, during and after exercise to enhance performance. 3. Demonstrate knowledge of recommended schedule of fluid intake by athletes, before, during and after exercise.

REFERENCES:

1. Asker E, Jeukendrup and Michael Gleeson (2004) ‘Sports Nutrition: An introduction to energy production and performance’ Human Kinetics 2. Bean A (2000) ‘The complex guide to sports nutrition’ A&C Black Publishers, London 3. Benardot (2006 )“Advanced Sports Nutrition”, Human Kinetics Ltd., U.S.A. 4. Brouns F and Cargill C (2002) “Essentials of sports nutrition” John Wiley & Sons Ltd., England 5. Clark N (2003) ‘Sports Nutrition Guidebook’, Human Kinetics, U.S.A. 6. Dunford M and Doyle AJ, Nutrition for Sport and Exercise, Thomson Wadsworth, Australia. 7. Fink H H, Mikesky A E, Burgoon LA (2012) Practical Applications in Sports Nutrition, Jones and Barlett Learning , U.S. A. 8. Kleiner S and Robinson M.G (2001) ‘Power Eating’, Human Kinetics, U.S.A. 9. Maughan R J and Burke LM (2002) ‘Sports Nutrition’, Blackwell Science Ltd. 10. Dunford .M & Doyle .J.A (2008),'Nutrition for Sport and Exercise', Thomson Wadsworth, USA. 11. Driskell J.A &Wolinsky. I (2002), 'Nutritional Assessment OfAthelets', CRC Press LLC, USA.

PUBLIC HEALTH NUTRITION

SEMESTER : IV HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE: XIII CREDIT: 4

PAPER NO: 19 CODE:

OBJECTIVES

655

To enable the students to

1. Understand common nutritional problems - causes and consequences. 2. Know the various nutrition and health intervention programmes and policies.

THEORY

Unit I : Concept of Public Nutrition

a. Definition and concept of Public Nutrition b. Relationship between health and nutrition, role of nutrition in national development. Unit II: Communicable and Noncommunicable diseases.

a. Communicable diseases - Epidemiology, mode of transmission, prevention and control of AIDS, STD, Cholera, Typhoid, Tuberculosis, Malaria, Hepatitis and Leptospirosis. b. Non communicable diseases - PEM, Nutritional anemia, vitamin A deficiency (VAD) and Iodine Deficiency Disorder. Unit III: Assessment of nutritional status

a. Need and importance, Direct and Indirect methods - Clinical examination, nutritional anthropometry, biochemical tests, functional indices, biophysical methods, diet surveys, vital statistics and ecological factors. b. Nutrition surveillance - Definition and Importance. Unit IV: Programmes and organizations for Nutrition Surveillance

a. National Nutrition Policy, National Programmes - ICDS, Prophylaxis programmes, National Goitre control Programme. b. State level Programmes - TINP, School lunch programme. c. Organizations - FAO, WHO, UNICEF, CARE, World Bank, ICMR, ICAR, NIN and CFTRI. Unit V - Nutrition Education

a. Meaning and purpose of Nutrition Education b. Types and uses of Audio aids, Video aids and Audio-Visual aids COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the students can:

656

1. Explain the common nutritional problems their causes and consequences Assessment: class test, model exam

2. Demonstrate knowledge of the various nutrition and health intervention programmes and policies prevalent in India Assessment: assignment 3. Conduct assessment of nutritional status of a selected population in the community. Assessment: assignment on nutritional survey and seminars

REFERENCES :

1. Bamji et al., 1996, Textbook of Human Nutrition Oxford and IBH Publishing co. Pvt. Ltd. Delhi. 2. Park, K., 1995, Textbook of Preventive and Social Medicine, Banarasidas Bharat Publication, Jabalpur. 3. WHO, 2003, Diet, Nutrition and Prevention of Chronic Diseases, WHO Technical Report series, Geneva 4. Mahajan, B.K., and Gupta M.C., 2002, Textbook of Preventive and Social Medicine, Jaypee brothers, New Delhi. 5. James.T, Noor Sylvan and Asay, 2012, Family Resource Management, Sage publication, California, 6. Seetharaman. P, Btra. S and Mehra. P, 2005, introduction to Family Resource Management, CBS Publication, New Delhi.

E-REFERENCES

1. www.sciencedaily.com 2. www.cdc.gov / nchs 3. www.whoindia.org

657

QUANTITY FOOD PRODUCTION AND SERVICE

SEMESTER -IV HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 4HOURS/WEEK

CORE : CREDIT : 4

PAPER NO : 20 CODE NO :

OBJECTIVES

To enable students to

1. Develop skills in Food service layout planning 2. Acquire skills in Quantity Food preparation and table setting.

THEORY :

Unit I : Facilities planning and design

b. Size and Types of kitchens- Square, rectangular, parallel, straight, U-shape c. Designing food facilities – Layout of kitchen spaces, developing kitchen plan, planning of layout- determining work areas, workers area of reach. d. Architectural features- wall, floor, lighting , ventilation, drainage, acoustic measures ,plumbing, waste disposal Unit II : Equipment

a. Classification and selection - According to weight / size, order of use, mode of operation, custom built equipment ,Factors influencing selection of equipment, b. Purchasing equipment- Purchasing decision, identifying supply sources, purchase procedures and methods, c. General schedule for installation, care maintenance of equipment- refrigerator, cooking range, food processor, coffee maker, purchase, microwave oven Unit III : Quantity food purchase, receiving storage

a. Methods of purchasing, purchase procedures- Specifications for different foods

658

b. Receiving and storage- receiving process and facilities, dry storage refrigerated and freezer storage, inventory records and control Unit IV : Menu planning, food production and service

a. Menu planning - Functions of menu, factors affecting menu planning. Menu format and constructions Types of menu - A la Carte and Table d' hote menu , combination occasional, cyclic, single use French classical menu, b. Food production- standardized recipes, recipe adjustment, recipe files, production control- ingredients assembly and portion control c. Service- Methods of assembly , delivery and service, factors affecting choice of distribution systems- types of food service systems, equipment needs, Styles of service- self service, tray service, waiter – waitress service, table setting and serving procedures , portable meals, Dinner ware, table ware, glassware – types and factors influencing selection table covers d. Dishwashing –methods and procedures Unit V : Food safety

a. Hygiene in food handling - Receiving, storage, preparation,cooking, holding , serving , clearing , disposal, time temperature relationships b. Employee health and personal hygiene - - proper attire, hand washing, personal habits, cuts abrasions and illness c. Implementation of HACCP in Food Service. d. Food safety regulations and standards

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the subject Quantity food production and service the students can

1. Plan and design food service facilities based on type of service and cuisines. Assesment : Assignment, Tests

2. Develop skill related to food production and services. Assesment : Assignment, Tests

659

REFERENCES

1. Brown.A.2015.Understanding Food Principles and Preparation, fifth edition, Cengage Learning, Singapore. 2. Negi.J. Ritusha.G.M.J and Suniti. 2013. Food and Beverage Service skills and techniques. S.Chand and company private limited, Chennai. 3. Andrew. S. 2009. Food and beverage services a training manual. Second edition. Tata McGraw- hill publishing company limited, New Delhi. 4. Katsigiris . C. and Thomas. C. 2009. Design and Equipment for Restaurants and Food Service, Third edition. John wiley and sons. 5. George .B. 2008. Catering management. Third edition. New age international private limited, New Delhi. 6. Sethi. M. 2008. Catering Management. Third edition. New age international private limited, New Delhi. 7. Sethi. M. 2008. Institutional Food Management. Third edition. New age international private limited, New Delhi. 8. Dittmer. P.R. and Keefe. J.D. 2008. Principles of Food Beverage and Labour cost controls.Mcgraw hill publishers, New Delhi. 9. Lilicrap.D. and Smith. R. 2003. Food and beverage service. Sixth edition. Hodder and Stoughton, London. 10. Davis. B. Lockwood.A. Joannis.P. and Alcitt.P. 2008. Food and beverage management. Prilaye limited Haryana, India. 11. Kinton. R. Ceseran. V. 1999 The theory of Catering . Ninth edition. British Library catalogue in publication data, USA. 12. West and Wood. 1994. Introduction to food science. Eight edition. June Payne Palacio, USA.

E-REFERENCES

1. www.fda.gov 2. www.wadsworth.com/nutrition 3. www.ific.org 4. www.vrg. Org 5. www.setupmyhotel.com. 6. www.ihmnotes. 7. www.hospitality-school.com.

660

DISSERTATION

SEMESTER:IV CREDIT : 4

PAPER NO : 21 CODE NO :

FOOD MICROBIOLOGY SEMESTER-IV HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 4 HOURS/WEEK

CORE: ELECTIVE V CREDIT:3

PAPER NO: 22 CODE:

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 3. Acquire knowledge on the role of micro organisms responsible for food spoilage and food borne illness 4. Learn the importance of personal hygiene and safe handling of food.

THEORY Unit I :Micro organisms and Their Importance in Food Industry c. Micro organisms in air, water, soil and plants. Factors affecting growth of micro organisms in food - Nutrient content, pH, Redox Potential and Water activity. d. Importance of micro organisms in food industry - Economic importance of yeasts, moulds and bacteria. Unit II: Contamination and Spoilage of Plant Foods c. Definition, Fitness of food for consumption, causes, classification - ease of spoilage. d. Contamination and spoilage of cereals and cereal products, pulses, vegetables and fruits. Unit III: Contamination and Spoilage of Animal Foods a. Contamination and Spoilage of egg, fish, meat, poultry, milk and milk products. Unit IV : Food Borne illness and prevention

661

a. Food intoxication and infection - Bacillus cereus, Campylobacter, Clostridium botulinum, Escherichia Coli, Salmonella, Shigella, Staphylococcus aureus, Vibrio, Clostridium Welchi, EntamoebaHistolytica, Polio Virus, Hepatitis Virus, Tubercle bacilli. Unit V: Safety and Hygiene a. Safe handling of food, food packaging, personal hygiene of food handlers, Cleaning of equipment and sanitizing agent.

DEMONSTRATION: 6. Hanging drop preparation 7. Simple and gram staining 8. Preparation and distribution of culture media 9. Inoculation and incubation of culture 10. Examination of cultures prepared from water, vegetables , fruits, meat and milk. RELATED EXPERIENCE Visit to a microbiology laboratory of an institute.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 3. Describe the role of microorganisms in food spoilage and food borne illness Assessment: seminar, assignment 4. Advocate methods for personal hygiene and safe handling of food Assessment: test, end semester examination

REFERENCES 9. Ananthanarayan and Paniker's Textbook of Microbiology Tenth edition with booklet, 2017, Mittal Books 10. Parija, 2016, Textbook of Microbiology and Immunology, 3rd Ed, Mosby. 11. Harvey , 2012.Lippincott's Illustrated Reviews Microbiology with the Point Access Scratch Code, Third edition, Wolters Kluwer 12. Moss M.O., 2005, Food Microbiology, New Age International Publishers. Bangalore. 13. Frazier, W.C and West Hoff., 1995, Food Microbiology, Tata McGraw - Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi. 14. Pelzer M.J and Raid R.D., 1972, Microbiology, Tata McGraw Hill. New york. 15. Bamforth .C.W (2005), 'Food, Fermentation and Micro-organisms', First Edition, Blackwell Publishing Ltd, United Kingdom.

662

16. Adams .M.R & Moss .M.O (2008), 'Food Microbiology',Third Edition, Royal Society Of Chemistry', UK.

E-REFERENCES 4. International Journal of Food Microbiology IUMS and ICFMH www.elsevier.com 5. Food microbe.com Food Microbiology and Food Hygiene Research Publication. 6. Food Safety HACCP, Food Quality, Food Microbiology and Hygiene www.Food quality news.com BASICS OF INTERIOR DECORATION

(EXTRADISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE FOR OTHER MAJOR STUDENTS)

SEMESTER- II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 4 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : EDE I CREDIT: 3

PAPER NO : 11 CODE NO :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to 1. Gain knowledge and understand the basic art principles. 2. Learn the dimensions of colour and application of art principles in interior.

THEORY Unit I: Interior Design c. Concept, objectives and importance of interior design. d. Elements of design Unit II: Concept and application of Art Principles a. Interior design – Balance, Harmony, Proportion, Rhythm and Emphasis. Unit III: Colour a. Colour Theory – Prang colour theory and Psychologist colour chart.

b. Colour harmonies – Related and contrasting colour harmonies. Unit IV: Flower Arrangement

663

a. Definition and importance b. Styles in flower arrangement Unit V: Furniture Arrangement a. Selection of furniture for a family b. Art principles in the arrangement of furniture for different rooms.

RELATED EXPERIENCE a. Flower arrangement – different styles of flower arrangement. b. Furniture arrangement – furniture arrangement in different rooms.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 1. Undersatnd and wide knowledge on basic art principles Assessment: seminar, assignment 2. Learn to decorate functional interiors Assessment: test, end semester examination

REFERENCES

3. The Smaller Home : Smart Designs for Your Home, Sater, Dan, HarperCollins Publisher, 2008

4. Interior Design 01 Edition, Chaudhari, S N, Aavishkar Publishers, 2011

13. Sketching for Architecture and Interior Design, Laurence King Publishers, 2011 14. Alexander, M.J., 1972, Design Interior Environment, Hariyana, Harcourt- Brace Pvt. Ltd. 15. Brian, W. and Tom, W., 1977 Indoor Plants, London, Macdonald Guidelines Pvt. Ltd. 16. Craig, H.T. and Rush, O.D., 1962 Homes with character, Boston, Health Co., Pvt. Ltd. 17. Coe Stella., 1984, Ikebana. A practical and philosophical guide to Japanese flower arrangement, London, Century Publishing Co. Ltd., 18. Faulkner, S. and Faulkner, S., 1960 Inside Todays Home, Newyork, Rimettard and WinstemPvt. Ltd. 19. Goldstain, V. and Goldstein, V., 1960, Art in everyday life, New York, Macmillan Co. Pvt. Ltd. 20. Jean, T., 1980, Flower arranging, London, Macdonald Guidelines Pvt. Ltd.,

664

21. John Lester and Steven Violet., 1975, The world of houseplants and flower arranging, New York, Galahod Book Co. 22. Rutt, H., 1973, Home furnishing, New York, John Wiley and Sons Pvt. Ltd.

E - JOURNAL 1. Architecture Design, Journal of Indian Architecture. 2. Inside outside, Business India Group, Mumbai. 3. Indian Design and Interior, Media Transasia India Ltd.,

E- REFERENCES 6. www.interiordesign.net 7. www.furniturearrangement.com 8. www.home_decorating_room_by_room_com 9. www.interior_design_solutions.com 10. www.thegardener.btinternet.co 11. www.ebay.com 12. www.en.wikipedi

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION

(EXTRADISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE FOR OTHER MAJOR STUDENTS)

SEMESTER: III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : EDE II CREDIT : 3

PAPER No : XVII CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Know about the types of hospitals and their administration. 3. Gain knowledge about the legal aspects of hospital administration. 4. Know about National and International organizations financing medical care.

THEORY

665

Unit I : Hospital Organization and Management

c. Introduction, general principles, management structure and duties, History and functions of Hospitals. d. Relationship of Hospital to the Community Unit II : Legal Aspects of Hospital Management

c. Duties and responsibilities of nurses, doctors and employees in the hospital. d. Medical malpractices, laws affecting disease afflicted Unit III : Organisations Financing Medical Care

c. National - ICMR, NIN, CFTRI d. International - WHO, UNICEF, FAO Unit IV : Accounting and Financial Management in Hospitals.

c. Principles, analysis and interpretation of financial reports, Preparation and use of budgets. d. Methods of cost computation

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can

1. Understand the organization and functioning of hospitals Tests and assignments

2. Knowledge about funding agencies, financial and legal management Seminars, Presentations and group discussions

REFERENCES

6. Davidson S.R. and Passmore J.F., 1975, Human Nutrition and Dietetics. Vol. I II Edition. 7. Francis, C.M and D' Souza, M.C., 2000, Hospital Administration. Jay Brothers. 8. Gillespie S. McNeil G., 1992, Hospital Management Macmillan and Co., New York. 9. Mitchell et. al., 1987, Nutrition in Health & disease, Pitman M. Edu. Publishing Co., 10. Robinson et.al., 1986, Normal and Therapeutic Nutrition. Macmillan Co., New york.

666

E - REFERENCES

5. www.ingenta.connect.com - Food and Food ways. 6. www.fda.gov/search.html 7. www.wodsworth.com/nutrition 8. www.elsevier.com - Indian Journal of Nutrition and food microbiology.

667

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI - 600 004

POST GRADUATE SYLLABUS FOR THE ACADEMIC YEAR 2018-2019 ONWARDS

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

M.Sc. HOME SCIENCE-FOODS AND NUTRITION

2018-2019 ONWARDS

668

DEPARTMENT OF HOME SCIENCE

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

TITLE OF THE PAPERS OF THE SYLLABUS FOR THE BATCH 2018-2019 ONWARDS

COURSE: M.SC HOME SCIENCE - FOODS AND NUTRITION DEGREE: M.SC.

PAPER NO

SEM TITLE OF COURSE PAGE NO. CODE UE IA TOTAL C

I L ADVANCED NUTRITION-1 1 75 25 100 4

II HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 4 75 25 100 4

III ADVANCED FOOD SCIENCE 6 75 25 100 4

IV RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 8 75 25 100 4

V LIFE SPAN NUTRITION 10 75 25 100 4

II VI NUTRITIONAL BIOCHEMISTRY 12 75 25 100 4

VII ADVANCED NUTRITION II 14 75 25 100 4

VIII ADVANCED NUTRITION PRACTICAL 16 75 25 100 4

IX ELECTIVE-I- FOOD BIOTECHNOLOGY 18 75 25 100 3

X ELECTIVE II- ENTREPRENEURSHIP MANAGEMENT 20 75 25 100 3

XI EDE-I BASICS OF INTERIOR DECORATION 42 75 25 100 3

III XII ADVANCED CLINICAL NUTRITION 22 75 25 100 4

XIII THERAPEUTIC NUTRITION 24 75 25 100 4

XIV APPLIED STATISTICS 26 75 25 100 4

XV ELECTIVE-III- FOOD PROCESSING AND PRESERVATION 28 75 25 100 3

669

XVI ELECTIVE –IV- FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY CONTROL 31 75 25 100 3

XVII EDE- II HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION (TO OTHER DEPTS) 44 75 25 100 3

IV XVIII NUTRACEUTICALS 33 75 25 100 4

XIX PUBLIC HEALTH NUTRITION 35 75 25 100 4

XX DISSERTATION 37 75 25 100 4

XXI SPORTS NUTRITION 38 75 25 100 4

XXII ELECTIVE V- FOOD MICROBIOLOGY 40 75 25 100 3

Controller of Examinations Signature of H.O.D.

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI- 600 004

DEPARTMENT OF HOME SCIENCE

M. Sc. HOME SCIENCE -FOODS AND NUTRITION

1. OBJECTIVES OF THE COURSE

The objectives of the course are to enable the students to understand the principles and functions of the various nutrients and apply the knowledge in planning diets for life cycle and various therapeutic conditions.

2. CONDITION FOR ADMISSION:

670

A candidate who has passed the B.Sc. Home Science- Nutrition Food Service Management and Dietetics / B.Sc. Home Science- Clinical Nutrition

3. ELIGIBILITY FOR THE AWARD OF DEGREE: A candidate shall be eligible for the award of the degree only if she has undergone the prescribed course of study in a college affiliated to the University for a period of not less than two academic years, passed the examination of all the four semesters prescribed earning 92 credits.

4. DURATION OF THE COURSE The course for the Degree of Master of Foods and Nutrition shall consist of two academic years with four semesters.

5. EXAMINATION: There shall be four examinations, first semester examination at the middle of the first academic year and the second semester examination at the end of the first academic year. Similarly the third and fourth semester examinations will be held at the middle and the end of the second academic year respectively

671

6. COURSE OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATION:

First semester

Course Subjects Inst. Credits Exam. Max. marks Total components hrs hrs CIA External

Core paper-I ADVANCED 6 4 3 25 75 100

NUTRITION-I

Core paper-II HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper-III ADVANCED FOOD 6 4 3 25 75 100 SCIENCE Core paper-IV RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper- LIFE SPAN NUTRITION 6 4 3 25 75 100

V

Soft skill-I 2 40 60 100

Second semester

Course Subjects Inst. Credits Exam. Max marks Total components hrs hrs CIA External

Core paper-VI NUTRITIONAL 6 4 3 25 75 100 BIOCHEMISTRY

Core paper-VII ADVANCED NUTRITION II 6 4 3 25 75 100

672

Core paper-VIII ADVANCED NUTRITION 6 4 3 25 75 100 PRACTICAL

Elective-II OFFERED BY OTHER 4 3 3 25 75 100

Extra disciplinary DEPTS

Elective paper-I FOOD BIOTECHNOLOGY 4 3 3 25 75 100

Elective paper -II ENTREPRENEURSHIP 4 3 MANAGEMENT

Soft skill-II 2 3 40 60 100

Internship** 2

Third semester

Course Inst. Credits Exam. Max.marks Total components hrs Subjects hrs CIA External

Core paper-IX ADVANCED CLINICAL 6 4 3 25 75 100 NUTRITION

Core paper-X THERAPEUTIC NUTRITION 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper-XI APPLIED STATISTICS 6 4 3 25 75 100

Elective- III (ONE OF THE ELECTIVE 4 3 3 25 75 100 OFFERED BY OTHER Extra DEPARTMENTS IN THE disciplinary-II COLLEGE )

673

Elective paper FOOD PROCESSING AND 4 3 3 25 75 100 III PRESERVATION

Elective paper FOOD SAFETY AND 4 3 3 25 75 100 IV QUALITY CONTROL

Soft skill-III 2 40 60 100

Fourth Semester

Course components Subjects Inst. credits Exam. Max.marks Total hrs hrs CIA External

Core paper-XII NUTRACEUTICALS 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper-XIII PUBLIC HEALTH 6 4 3 25 75 100 NUTRITION

Core paper-XIV DISSERTATION 6+2 4 3 25 75 100

Core paper- SPORTS NUTRITION 6 4 3 25 75 100

XV

Elective-IV ELECTIVE- FOOD 4 3 3 25 75 100 MICROBIOLOGY

Soft skill-IV 2 40 60 100

674

EXTRADISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE OFFERED BY THE DEPARTMENT HOME SCIENCE TO OTHER MAJOR STUDENTS

EXTRA BASICS OF INTERIOR 4 3 3 25 75 100 DISCIPLINARY DECORATION ELECTIVE I

( Semester -II)

EXTRA HOSPITAL 4 3 3 25 75 100 DISCIPLINARY ADMINISTRATION ELECTIVE II

( Semester -III)

The following procedure to be followed for internal marks :

Theory papers: Internal marks:25

Best two test marks out of three 10 marks

Model exam 10 marks

Seminar /Assignment 5 marks

------

675

25 marks

------

Project

First phase report 5 marks

Second phase report 5 marks

Final report 15 marks

------

25 marks

------

7. REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCEEDING TO SUBSEQUENT SEMESTER:

i. Candidates shall register their names for the First Semester Examination after the admission inthe PG Courses.

ii. Candidates shall be permitted to proceed from, the First Semester upto Final Semester irrespective of their failure in any of the Semester Examination subject to the condition that thecandidates should register for all the arrears subjects of earlier semester along with current(subsequent) semester subjects.

iii. Students should have a minimum of 75% of the days in the semester in each paper.

676

iv. In case of candidate earning less than 50% of attendance in anyone of the Semesters due to any extraordinary circumstance such as medical grounds. Such candidates, who shall produce Medical Certificate certified by the Principal of the College, shall be permitted to proceed to the next semester and to complete the course of study. Such candidate shall have torepeat the missed semester by rejoining after completion of final semester of the course, afterpaying the fee for the break of study as prescribed by the University from time to time.

v. In respect of married students undergoing PG course the minimum attendance condo nation (theory/ practical) shall be relaxed and be prescribed as 55% instead of 65%. If they conceive during their academic career, medical certificate from the doctor attached to the Govt. Hospital ( D.G.O) and fee prescribed for Rs 250/- therefore together with the attendance details shall be forward to the office to consider the condonation of attendance mentioning the category.

65%-74%-Permitted to appear for semester exam with condo nation fee.

50%-60%- Not eligible to attend the semester exam. But can proceed to the next year/next semester and they can take university examination by paying the prescribed con donation fee of Rs 250/-

677

PROGRAMME OUTCOME

On completion of the programme the student can

1. Demonstrate comprehensive understanding of core nutrition knowledge, including macronutrients, micronutrients, and research methods.

2. Use evidence-based approaches to solve problems in clinical nutrition, community nutrition, nutrition education, nutrition intervention and foodservice.

3. Design, implement, interpret, and communicate research in food and nutrition.

4. Demonstrate attributes of professional development for the field of food and nutrition.

5 Apply management and leadership principles to foodservice, clinical, and community nutrition services.

678

ADVANCED NUTRITION – I

SEMESTER I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : I CREDIT : 4

PAPER NO :1 CODE NO :

OBJECTIVE

To enable students to learn

1. The chemistry and role of carbohydrates, fat and protein in the body and in the diet. 2. The role of these macronutrients in health and disease. 3. How the body derives energy from macronutrients. 4. The methods of assessing body composition and the relationship between bodyweight and energy balance.

THEORY

Unit I : Carbohydrates

a. Classification, food sources and nutritional significance of monosaccharides, disaccharides, oligosaccharides and polysaccharides- b. Digestion, absorption and transport of carbohydrates –glucose transporters, maintenance of blood glucose levels c. Glycemic response to carbohydrate- glycemic index and glycemic load Unit II: Fiber

a. Chemistry and characteristics of dietary and functional fibers- cellulose, hemicellulose, pectins, lignin, gums, βglucans, Fructans, resistant starch

679

b. Selected properties, physiological and metabolic effects of fiber; c. Role of fiber in disease prevention and management; Recommended fiber intake

Unit III: Proteins

a. Classification of proteins and amino acids, food sources, digestion, absorption, and functions b. Assessment of protein needs and recommended dietary allowances. Amino acid requirements. Concepts of amino acid pool, protein turnover, amino acid imbalance and toxicity. Evaluation of protein quality and effects of deficient and excessive intake of proteins. Unit IV: Lipids

a. Classification of lipids and fatty acids, food sources, digestion, absorption, transport. Functions of lipids and functions of essential fatty acids. Role of n3 and n6 fatty acids in health and disease. Requirements and recommended dietary allowances. Effects of deficiency and excessive intake of fat. Unit V: Energy

a. Methods for the measurement of body composition, components of energy expenditure- BMR, RMR, thermic effect of food and physical activity, assessment of energy expenditure- direct calorimetry, indirect calorimetry, doubly labeled water and derived formulas. Estimating total energy requirement, concepts in energy intake - RDA, DRI, b. Regulation of body weight- genetic influences, hormonal influences, positive energy balance, negative energy balance,

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the student can

1. Explain the chemistry and functions of macronutrients in the body and diet. Assessment method : Tests , end semester examination

2. Apply knowledge on the use of macronutrients for healthy eating which can maintain wellness and prevent disease. Assessment method : Tests , assignments, end semester examination

3. Can choose appropriate measures to assess body composition in nutritional investigations.

680

Assessment : Assignment

REFERENCES

1. Bamji, M.S. et al., 1996, Text Book of Human Nutrition, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 2. Whitney, E.N. and Rolfes, S.R.,2008, Understanding Nutrition, Thomson Wadsworth – Australia. 3. Gibney M.J., Lanham-New S.A., Cassidy A., Vorster H.H. (2009) Introduction to Human Nutrition 2nd Edition, A John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., Publication, U.K. 4. Graff, J.L. and Gropper, S.S., 2009, Advanced Nutrition and Human Metabolism, Wadsworth - Cengage Learning, USA. 5. Shil, M.E. et al., 1999, Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease Vol.I and II. Lea and Febiger, New York. 6. Srilakshmi, B., 2004, Nutrition Science, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi. 7. Swaminathan, M., 1988, Essentials of Food and nutrition vol. I and II, The Bangalore Printing and Publishing Co. Ltd., Bangalore.

E-REFERENCES

1. www.wadsworth.com/nutrition 2. www.fda.gov/search.html 3. www.bookman.com.au/vitamins 4. www.thriveonline.com/eats/vitamins/guide.indext.html 5. www.heartinfo.org 6. www.nlm.nih.gov 7. www.ilsi.org/pubs.html 8. www.faseb.org/ajcn

681

HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY

SEMESTER I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : II CREDIT : 4

PAPER NO : 2 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

3) Learn the anatomy and physiological functioning of the various systems in the body. 4) Understand the integrated functioning of various systems in the body.

THEORY

Unit I : Cardiovascular system

c. Hemostasis d. Conduction system, ECG, Cardiac cycle, Action of heart and its regulation, factors influencing blood pressure and regulation of blood pressure

Unit II : Gastro-Intestinal system

b. Digestion and absorption of carbohydrate, protein and fat, Gastro-intestinal movements and their regulation. Unit III : Excretory System

d. Kidney – Renal functions – Urine formation, Micturition, Role of kidney in maintaining acid-base balance e. Skin – Excretory function, Regulation of body temperature f. Lungs – Gaseous transport in lungs and tissues, Regulation of respiration

682

Unit IV : Regulatory systems

d. Nervous system – CNS,ANS-Parts and functions. e. Endocrine system – Regulatory functions and disorders of pituitary, thyroid, parathyroid, adrenal glands and pancreas f. Effect of stress on nervous, endocrine, digestive, cardiovascular and respiratory systems Unit V : Reproductive system

c. Male reproductive system – Spermatogenesis, Male sex hormones d. Female reproductive system – Role of hormones in ovulation, menstruation, pregnancy and lactation COURSE OUTCOME

On the completion of the course the student can

3. To develop firm knowledge base on the anatomy and functioning of the various systems in the body and their integration. Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

4. Relate to the pathological features seen in disease condition. Assessment: Tests and end semester examination.

REFERENCES

8. Ganong, 1995, Review of Medical physiology, Prentice Hall international, London 9. Guyton, 1991, Human physiology and Mechanism of diseases, W.B Saunders and co. London 10. Guyton A.C. and Hall J.E., 2001, Pocket companion to Text book of Medical Physiology, 10th edition, W.B Saunders company, Philadelphia 11. Elaine N. Marieb, Anatomy and physiology, The Benjamin/Cummings Publishing company Inc., New York 12. Mcknaught and Callander, Illustrated physiology, W.B Saunder and company, Philadelphia 13. Ross and Williams (2000) Anatomy and physiology, Churchill Livingston, London 14. Tortora J.G and Anagnostakos N.P, 1991, Principles of anatomy and Physiology, Canfield Press, San Francisco

683

ADVANCED FOOD SCIENCE

SEMESTER: I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : III CREDIT:4

PAPER No : 3 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

3. Understand the factors affecting the cooking of various food stuffs. 4. Gain knowledge on the methods of cooking different foods

THEORY

Unit I: Cereals and Legumes

e. Cereal cookery - gelatinization, dextrinisation and syneresis, factors affecting cooking quality of cereals. f. Batters and doughs - Types of flours, factors affecting gluten formation. g. Baking - Role of ingredients in baking, preparation of bread, cakes, cookies and pastry h. Legumes - Germination, factors affecting cooking and role of pulses in cookery toxic constituents. Unit II: Flesh Foods, Egg and Milk

e. Meat and poultry – composition and tenderization of meat f. Fish - Nutritional significance of fish g. Egg – Factors affecting of foam formation, coagulation. h. Milk and milk products – fermented and non fermented. Properties of milk , role of milk in cookery Unit III: Vegetables and Fruits

684

b. Chemical components, changes during ripening, browning reaction and its prevention, effect of cooking.

Unit IV: Fats and Oils, Sugars

c. Fats and oils - Effect of heating on fats and oil, hydrogenation, winterization and rancidity - Types and prevention, role of fats in cooking

d. Sugar cookery – functions of sugar- sugar related products- molasses, corn syrup, maple syrup, jaggery, honey- sugar cookery - crystallisation, stages in sugar cookery, crystalline and non crystalline candies.

Unit-V: Techniques in the preparation of g. Puff, cake and cookies h. Egg- whipping quality i. Stages of sugar cooking – preparation of mysorepak, groundnut toffee j. Jams and jellies k. Fats and oils -Smoking temperature – preparation of mayonnaise l. Milk -Preparation of paneer and custard

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the students can:

3. Explain the factors affecting the cooking of various food stuffs. Assessment: class test, model exam 4. Choose the appropriate techniques for the preparation of different culinary items Assessment: class test, assignment and seminars

REFERENCES 8. Brown.A.2015.Understanding Food Principles and Preparation, fifth edition, Cengage Learning, Singapore. 9. Cameron, A., Fox; B.C., 1990, "Food Science, Nutrition and Health", Edward Arnold, London. 10. Grisworld, R.M., 1962, "The Experimental Study of Foods", Houghton Mifflin Company, Boston. 11. Potter, N.M., 2002, "Food Science", The AVI Publishing Company, Connecticut.

685

12. Paul, C. Palmer, H.H., 1972, "Food Theory and applications", John Wiley and sons Inc. New York. 13. Peckham, G.C., 1975, Foundations of Food Preparation:, Macmillan and Company, London 14. Srilakshmi, B., 2003. "Food Science", New Age International Publishers, New Delhi.

E-REFERENCES 6. Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 7. www.pubs.acs.org 8. Food Quality and Preference 9. www.elsevier.com 10. International Journal of Food Science and Technology

686

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

SEMESTER: I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : IV CREDIT : 4

PAPER NO :4 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

7. Understand the principles of designing research. 8. Gain knowledge on the tools used for data collection. 9. Acquire skills in analysis of data, report and thesis writing

THEORY

Unit-I: Introduction to Research

c. Research- Meaning, objectives, motivation, types, significance, methods of research and research ethics and informed consent. Unit-II: Research design and collection of data

i. Formulation of research problem. j. Research Design- Meaning, need, and types. k. Tools of collection of data- Observation, questionnaire, interview schedule, scaling techniques. l. Validity and reliability Unit-III: Sampling concepts

c. Defining target population and sample, sampling types- Probability and non Probability sampling, advantages and disadvantages. Unit-IV: Processing and analysis of data

687

e. Data- Editing, coding, classification, dependent and independent variables, confidence levels, tabulation and interpretation. f. Hypothesis –, basic concepts- meaning, types , testing of hypothesis. Unit-V: Research proposal and Report Writing

e. Developing a research proposal and types of reports f. Thesis writing- Format, typing, appendices, bibliography and footnotes.

688

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the students can:

5. Describe the various tools of research and research design. Assessment: Class Test, Model Exam 6. Formulate research proposals. Assessment: Assignment

REFERENCES

23. Best, J.W. and James, V.K., 2000, Research in Education, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 24. Gupta. S.P., 2001, Statistical Methods, New Delhi, Sultan & Co., Publishers 25. Kerlinger, F.M., 1964, Foundations of Behavioural Research, New York, Holt and Winston Inc. 26. Kothari, C.R., 2002 Research methods and techniques, New Delhi, Wiley Eastern Ltd. 27. Krishnaswami, O.R., 1993, Methodology of Research in Social Sciences. 28. Bombay, Himalaya Publishing House. 29. Agarwal, Y.P., 1990, Statistical methods, New Delhi, Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd., 30. Gupta, S.P., 1990, Statistical methods, Madras, Sultan Chand and Son. 31. Kothari C. R (2004), 'Research Methodology Methods and Techniques', Second Edition, New Age International (P) Limited, Publishers, New Delhi. 32. Palanisamy, S and Manoharan, M., 1999., Statistical Methods for Biologists, Palani, Paramount Publications. 33. Rao, K.V., 1996, Bio-statistics, Madras, Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers

689

LIFE SPAN NUTRITION

SEMESTER: I HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : V CREDIT:4

PAPER No :5 CODE :

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 7. Learn the role of nutrition in maintaining good health. 8. Understand the dietary modifications at different stages of family life. 9. Know the different problems and complications that occur during life cycle.

THEORY Unit I: Infant and Child Nutrition i. Infancy – Feeding and composition. j. Growth and nutritional assessment – Growth chart, LBW babies – characteristics and nutritional care. k. Childhood – Growth and development, food and nutrient needs, dietary adequacy. l. Complications in infancy and childhood related to nutritional inadequacies. Unit II: Adolescent nutrition g. Growth and development, food and nutrient requirements, h. Food habits, nutritional concerns with regard to eating disorders. i. Complications in adolescence related to nutritional inadequacies.!!@@##$$ Unit III : Nutrition in Adulthood e. Food and nutrient requirements during adulthood f. Nutritional concerns in adulthood related to nutritional inadequacies Unit IV : Nutrition in Pregnancy and Lactation a. Physiological changes, food and nutrient requirements, typical food preferences, impact of nutritional status on infants. b. Complications during pregnancy and lactation. Unit V : Geriatric Nutrition e. Food and Nutritional requirements - Nutritional care of the elderly.

690

f. Nutritional problems of old age.

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the student can

5. Identify the various nutritional problems and related complications during the life cycle. Assessment method : Tests , Assignment, end semester examination

6. Plan nutritious meals to combat malnutrition within the family, Assessment method : Menu planning, Presentation, Group discussion

REFERENCES 1. Antia, F.P., 1992, Clinical Dietetics and Nutrition Oxford University Press, New Delhi. 2. Corinne, R.H., 1996, Normal and therapeutic nutrition, Mcmallian Co., New York. 3. Davidson, S.R. and Passmore J.F., 1989, Human Nutrition and Dietetics, ELBS London. 4. Mahan, K.L., and Stump, S.E., 1996, Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet therapy M.B. Saunders Co., USA. 5. Balasubramanian et al., 1998, Dietary guidelines for Indians, ICMR, New Delhi. 6. Passmore, AH and Adams, A.A., 1990, Clinical assessment of nutritional status – A working manual, Will and Wilson Publishing, London 7. Bamji et al(1996), Textbook of Human Nutrition Oxford and IBH Publishing co. Pvt. Ltd. Delhi. 8. Shils.E.M, Shike .M, Ross. A.C, Cabellero. B and Cousins.R.J (2011) Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, Eleventh Edition, Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, Philadelphia 9. Mahan, K.L., and Stump, S.E., 1996, Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet therapy M.B. Saunders Co., USA. 10. Nix .S(2016) Williams' Basic Nutrition & Diet Therapy, Fifteenth Edition, Elsevier

E-REFERENCES 15. www.ingenta.connect.com 16. www.fda.gov/search.html 17. www.wodsworth.com/nutrition 18. http://golgy.harvard.edu./biopages,html 19. www.whfreeman.com

691

20. http://www.harcourtcollege.com 21. www.eatright.org.

NUTRITIONAL BIOCHEMISTRY

SEMESTER :II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : VI CREDIT: 4

PAPER NO :6 CODE NO :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Understand biochemistry related to nutritional sciences. 2. Learn the metabolism of proximate principles. THEORY

Unit I : Introduction to Analytical Techniques

a. Centrifugation Technique- Principles and application of differential, density gradient and ultra- centrifugation b. Chromatography-Principles and applications of paper, thin layer chromatography, column chromatography, adsorption, ion-exchange and gas -liquid chromatography. c. Electrophoresis, principles and applications of paper and gel electrophoresis. d. Spectroscopic Methods - Principles and applications of photocolorimetry, spectrophotometry, spectrofluorimetry and flame photometry Unit II : Carbohydrate Metabolism

692

a. Glycolysis, citric acid cycle, gluconeogenesis, hexose monophosphate shunt, role of electron transport chain, oxidative phosphorylation. Unit III : Lipid Metabolism

a. Oxidation of saturated and unsaturated fatty acids, Biosynthesis of fatty acids and glycerides, Metabolism of phospholipids, lipoproteins, cholesterol and ketone bodies. Unit IV : Nucleic acid metabolism and Recombinant DNA Technology

a. Nucleotide metabolism - synthesis and degradation of purines, synthesis and degradation of pyrimidines, Nucleic acids - DNA structure and replication, RNA - structure and synthesis, Recombinant DNA technology (concept only) Unit V : Protein and Amino Acid Metabolism

a. General pathways of amino acid catabolism, Metabolism of specific amino acids - phenylalanine, tyrosine, methionine, cystine and cysteine, Protein biosynthesis

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the student can

1. Describe the primary metabolic pathways of carbohydrate, lipids, proteins and nucleic acids. Assessment : Tests, end semester examination

2. Demonstrate an understanding of the principle and applications of the various analytical techniques employed to estimate nutrients. Assessment: Seminar, assignment.

REFERENCES

1. Lehinger, A.L., 1992, The molecular basis of cell structure and function. New Delhi; Kalyani Publishers.

693

2. Harper H.A., 1997, Review of Physiological Chemistry, Loss Angles Lange Medical Publications 3. M,N.Chatterjee and Rana Shinde.,1993, Text Book of medical biochemistry. New Delhi, Jaypee Brothers medical publisherspvt. ltd. 4. Philip D.Mayne., 1994, in Diagnosis and Treatment, ELBS, England 5. Wilson K and Walker I., 1997, Principles and Techniques of Practical biochemistry, Cambridge University Press, London.

E-REFERNCES

1. http://www.elseiver.com 2. htt://www.sciencedirect.com

694

ADVANCED NUTRITION II

SEMESTER -II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : VII CREDIT: 4

PAPER NO: 7 CODE:

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Understand the significance of minerals and vitamins.

2. Know the utilization and effects of deficiency of micronutrients

THEORY

Unit I: Macrominerals

a. Calcium, phosphorus, magnesium, sodium, potassium and chloride - Food sources, digestion, absorption, transport, storage, metabolism and excretion, functions, interactions with other nutrients, requirements, deficiency, toxicity and assessment. Unit II: Micro minerals and ultra-trace elements

a. Micro minerals : Iron, zinc, copper, selenium, chromium, iodine, manganese molybdenum and Fluoride - Food sources, absorption, transport, storage metabolism, functions, interaction with other nutrients, requirements, deficiency, toxicity and assessment. b. Ultra trace elements :Nickel, silicon, vanadium, arsenic, boron - Food sources, absorption, transport, storage, functions, interaction with other nutrients, requirements, deficiency, toxicity and assessment. Unit III: Fat soluble vitamins

a. Vitamins A, D, E and K - Food sources, digestion, absorption, transport, storage, metabolism, functions, interaction with other nutrients, requirements, deficiency, toxicity and assessment.

695

Unit IV: Water Soluble Vitamins

a. Thiamine, Riboflavin, Niacin, Pantothenic acid, Biotin, Vitamin B6, Folic acid, Vitamin B12 and Vitamin C - sources, digestion, absorption, transport, storage, functions metabolism, interaction with other nutrients, requirements, deficiency, toxicity and assessment.

Unit V: Body Fluid and Electrolyte balance

a. Distribution, maintenance of fluid balance and electrolyte balance.

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the students can:

1. Describe the functions of vitamins and minerals in the body , their requirements and metabolic integrity. Assessment: class test, model exam 2. To identify effects and symptoms of inadequate and toxic intake of different micronutrients Assessment: class test, assignment and seminars

REFERENCES

1. Graff, J.L. and Gropper, S.S., 1999, Advanced Nutrition and Human Metabolism Wadsworth - Thomson learning, Australia. 2. Shills, M.E. et al., 1994, Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease Vol.I and II Lea and Febiger, New York. 3. Whitney, E.N. and Rolfes, S.R., 1999, Understanding Nutrition, West Wadsworth - An International Thomson Publishing Company, New York.

E-REFERENCES

1. www.fda.gov/search.html 2. bookman.com.au/vitamins 3. www.thriveonline.com/eats/vitamins/guide.index.html 4. www.nlm.nih.gov 5. www.wadsworth.com/nutrition

696

697

ADVANCED NUTRITION PRACTICAL

SEMESTER -II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : VIII CREDIT: 4

PAPER NO: 8 CODE:

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Learn the various techniques in food analysis. 2. Develop skills in estimation of metabolites 3. Gain an understanding of modern techniques employed in food and biochemical analysis.

PRACTICAL

Quantitative Analysis

1. Determination of iodine number. 2. Determination of acid value. 3. Estimation of calcium content in food. 4. Estimation of phosphorus content in food. 5. Estimation of iron content in food. 6. Estimation of vitamin C content in food. 7. Estimation of glucose in blood. 8. Estimation of serum cholesterol. 9. Estimation of total protein in serum. 10. Estimation of albumin globulin ratio. 11. Estimation of serum creatinine 12. Estimation of serum urea.

698

DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS

1. Estimation of ash content in foods 2. Determination of fat. 3. Estimation of protein by microkjeldahl method. 4. Separation of sugars by paper chromatography. 5. Determination of energy value of foods using bomb calorimeter.

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the student can

1. Estimate nutrients such as calcium, phosphorous, iron and vitamin C in food stuffs 2. Estimate various metabolites such as glucose, cholesterol, total protein, A:G ratio, urea, and creatinine in serum samples. Assessment: Demonstration, tests and semester examination

REFERENCES

1. ICMR.,1978, Laboratory Techniques in Nutrition., NIN, Hyderabad. 2. Chawla, R., 1995, Practical Clinical Biochemistry Methods and Interpretations, Jaypee Brothers, Medical Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 3. James C.S., 1995, Analytical Chemistry of Foods, Blackie Academic and Professional Publishers. 4. Oser, B.L., 1965, Hawk's Physiological Chemistry, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi. 5. Pattabiraman, T.N., 1998, Laboratory Manual in Biochemistry, All India Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi.

699

FOOD BIOTECHNOLOGY

SEMESTER II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 4 HOURS/WEEK

CORE ELECTIVE: I CREDIT: 3

PAPER NO: 9 CODE:

OBJECTIVE

To enable the students to

1. Understand the principles of traditional food biotechnology. 2. Gain knowledge on current developments in food biotechnology. THEORY

Unit I: Fermentation

a. Fermentation- Definition and advantages of food fermentation. Microbial cultures in food industry and its use.-bacteria, yeast, molds b. Methods used in preparation of fermented food products-bread, wine, vinegar, beer , meat, and fish, vegetables, fermented soya products, cheese. Unit II: Enzymes and their importance in food industry

a. Sources, characteristics and applications - amylase, invertase, protease, lipase, pectinase Unit III: Genetically modified foods and organic foods

a. Genetically modified foods- Definition, Importance and ethical issues of genetically modified foods, kinds of genetically modified foods-golden rice, transgenic potatoes, genetically modified soya, maize and tomato b. Organic foods-Definition and importance, general principles of organic farming, c controversies related to organic foods. Unit IV: Post Harvest Technologyof fruits, vegetables and food

a. Post-harvest technology of fruits and vegetables- Biological, environmental and physiological factors involved in deterioration of fruits and vegetables. Post-harvest technology procedures-

700

temperature management, control of humidity, special treatments, packing and transportation systems. b. Post-harvest technology of food grains- Traditional and modern methods of storing food grains, code of practices for safe storage of paddy, treatments for insect control. Unit V: Food Additives

a. Sweeteners - Nutritive sweeteners, high intensity sweeteners, low calorie sweeteners. b. Flavoring agents and colorants

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the student can

1. Explain the importance of enzymes in food industry. 2. Demonstrate knowledge of the techniques employed in food industry. Assessment: Seminar, tests and semester examination.

REFERENCES

1. Adams M.R. and Moss. O., 1996, Food Microbiology, New age International, New Delhi. 2. Aylward., 2001, Food Technology Processing and Laboratory Control, Agrobios India. 3. Desrosier. N.W. and Desrosier. J.N., 1987, The Technology of Food Preservation, CBC Publishing, Delhi 4. JoodJudesh and KhetarpaulNeelam., 2002, Food Preservation Agrotech Publishing Academy, New Delhi 5. Lee B.H., 1996, Fundamentals of Food Biotechnology, VCH publisher Inc., New york, USA.

E- REFERENCES

1. www.ifst.org 2. www.faia.org.uk 3. http://food safetyindia.nic.in/haccp.htm 4. www.nzifst.org.nz/unitoperations/index.htm

701

ENTREPRENEURSHIP MANAGEMENT SEMESTER II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 4 HOURS/WEEK CORE ELECTIVE: II CREDIT: 3 PAPER NO:10 CODE :

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 1. Learn the qualities of an entrepreneur 2. Understand the process and procedure of setting up of an enterprise. 3. Develop managerial skills. THEORY Unit I: Entrepreneur and Entrepreneurship a. Definition and need, qualities of an entrepreneur. b. Factors motivating entrepreneurs Unit II: Enterprise a. Definition, types of organization – sole proprietorship, partnership, stock company – private and public limited. b. Steps for starting an enterprise, marketing – steps in conducting market survey. c. Product selection – principles of product selection and development, sales promotion. Unit III: Project Report a. Meaning and significance of project report b. Elements of project formulation c. Planning commission guidelines for project formulation/preparation, legislation – licensing, registration. Unit IV: Management of Business Enterprise a. Financial management – Break even analysis, working capital, cost concept, pricing of the product. b. Interface with Government – Incentives, sales tax, income tax, excise duty – export and import duties. Unit V: Human Resource Management

702

a. Managing employees in an enterprise, labour law application – Factories Act, Workman Compensation Act and Industries Dispute Act. b. Problem faced by women entrepreneurs. RELATED EXPERIENCE Visit to units run by women entrepreneurs.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 6. Explain the importance of entrepreneurship to create entrepreneurs. Assessment method : Tests , end semester examination 7. Apply knowledge of starting business and acquiring financial help and incentives from government. Assessment method : Tests , assignments, end semester examination

REFERENCES 1. Gupta and Srinivasan, N.P., 1985, Entrepreneural development, New Delhi, Sultan Chand and Sons Educational Publishers. 2. Holt, D.H., 1990, Entrepreneurship development, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India. 3. Khanka, S.S., 1990, Entrepreneurship development, New Delhi, Chand and Co., Ltd., 4. ParamjeetKaur Dillon., 1993, Women Entrepreneurs, Problem and prospectus, New Delhi, Blaze Publishers Co., Ltd 5. Yadav, C.P., 2000, Encyclopaedia of Entrepreneurship development, Volume I, Lucknow, Anmol Publication Ltd. 6. Yadav, C.P., 2000, Encyclopaedia of Entrepreneurship development, Volume II, Lucknow, Anmol Publications Ltd. 7. Yadav, C.P., 2000, Encyclopaedia of Entrepreneurship development, Volume III, Lucknow, Anmol Publications Ltd. 8. Yadav, C.P., 2000, Encyclopaedia of Entrepreneurship development, Volume IV, Lucknow, Anmol Publications Ltd.

JOURNALS 1. Journal of Entrepreneurship, Sage Publications Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.

E REFERNCES 1. www.ibusinessdevelopment. 2. www.enterweb.org/entrship.htm

703

3. www.entrepreneuriadevelopment.com 4. www.entrepreneurialdevelopmentcenter1 5. www.entrepreneurship.mit.edu

704

ADVANCED CLINICAL NUTRTION

SEMESTER -III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : IX CREDIT: 4

PAPER NO :12 CODE :

OBECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Understand clinical significance of various diseases 2. Understand the effects of the diseases 3. Gain knowledge on the medical nutrition therapy for various disease conditions

THEORY

Unit – I: Diseases of the cardio vascular system

a. Clinical effects, laboratory Investigations and principles in the treatment of Hyperlipoprotenemia, Atherosclerosis, Myocardial Infarction and Hypertension. Unit – II:Disorders of the liver

a. Clinical effects, laboratory investigations and principles in the treatment of Jaundice, Hepatitis, Fatty Liver, Cirrhosis. Unit – III: Diseases of the Kidney

a. Clinical effects, laboratory investigations and principles in the treatment of :, Nephritis, Renal Failure, Renal calculi and Dialysis. Unit – IV:Diabetes mellitus and Inborn Errors

a. Biochemical changes, diagnosis, monitoring, laboratory investigation and treatment of Diabetes Mellitus.

705

b. Diagnosis and monitoring Development, Treatment and laboratory investigation of Diabetic Ketoacidosis, Clinical effects and Laboratory investigation of Gout, Xanthinuria, Phenylketonuria. Unit – V:Nutrient Drug Interactions

a. Introduction to pharmacokinetics of drugs, effect of nutritional status on drug utilization, effect of drugs on nutritional status.

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the student can

1. Describe the clinical significance and effects of various diseases. 2. Demonstrate the medical nutrition therapy to be adopted for various diseases. Assessment: Seminar, powerpoint presentation, tests and semester examination.

REFERENCES

1. Allan Gaw et al. (1995) Clinical Biochemistry. Churchill Livingston. London. 2. Ramakrishnan&RajiSwamy (1995) Textbook of Clinical Biochemistry and immunology. T.R. Publications Pvt. Ltd.Chennai. 3. M.N. Chatterjee and RanaSheinder (1994) Textbook of Medical Biochemistry. Jaypee Brothers Pvt. Ltd.New Delhi. 4. Mahan,L.K. and Escott Stumps S (2008) Krause’s Food & Nutrition Therapy 12th edition. Saunders Elsevier 5. Shils, M.E., Shike, M, Ross, A.C., Caballero B and Cousins RJ (2005) Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease. 10th edition. Lipincott, William and Wilkins. 6. Mathew and Aggarwal (2004) Prep Manual for Undergraduates Medicine. Second edition. Elsevier, New Delhi.

E- REFERNCES

706

1. www.emedicine.com 2. www.medlineplus.com 3. www.healthplus.com 4. www.mayoclinic.com

707

THERAPEUTIC NUTRITION

SEMESTER: III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : X CREDIT:4

PAPER No :13 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

3. Understand the basic principles and significance of therapeutic nutrition 4. Gain knowledge on diagnosis and dietary treatment for various diseases.

THEORY

Unit I: Nutritional Management in the diseases of gastrointestinal system

c. Causes, symptoms and nutritional management of gastritis, peptic ulcer , flatulence, malabsorption syndrome, inflammatory bowel syndrome. d. Hepatitis, cirrhosis of liver, cholecystitis, cholelithiasis and pancreatitis Unit II: Nutritional Management in the diseases of kidney, endocrine system and obesity

a. Diseases of Kidney Causes, symptoms and nutritional management of nephritis, nephrosis, renal failure, renal stones and dialysis c. Nutritional management of obesity Causes and nutritional management

Unit III: Nutritional management in cardiovascular diseases and HIV/AIDS

a. Diseases of Cardiovascular system Causes and nutritional management of hyperlipoproteinemia, atheroselerosis, hypertension and congestive cardiac failure

708

d. HIV infection and AIDS Causes and nutritional management

Unit IV : Nutritional management in cancer and burns

a. Cancer

Causes and nutritional management

b. Burns Types and nutritional management.

Unit V : Nutritional management in metabolic diseases

c. Diabetes Mellitus Types, causes, symptoms and nutritional management.

d. Gout, and Phenyl ketonuria Symptoms and treatment.

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the subject Therapeutic Nutrition the students can

1. Demonstrate knowledge of the various disease conditions, their etiological factors and diagnostic parameters. Assessment method: Test, assignments and end semester examinations. 2. Translate the nutritional principles of various disease conditions into dietary recommendations and diet plans Assessment method: Tests seminars and group discussions about a topic.

REFERENCES

15. Alpers, et al., 1999, Manual of Nutritional Therapeutics, Little Brown, Washington.

709

16. Antia, F.P., 2000, Clinical Dietetics and Nutrition, Oxford Press, New Delhi. 17. Chatterjee, M.N. and Shinde, R., 1994, Text book of Medical Biochemistry, Jaypee Brothers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. 18. Garrow, J.S. James, W.P.T. and Ralpha., 2000, Human Nutrition and Dietetics, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh. 19. Gaw et al., 1995, Clinical biochemistry. Churchill Livingston Publications, London 20. Gowenlock, A.H., 1988, Varley's Practical Clinical Biochemistry, CBS publishers and distributors, India. 21. Mahan, K.L. and Syliva, E.S., 2000, Krauses Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, W.B. Saunders Company, Philadelphia. 22. Ramakrishnan., 1994, Text book of Clinical Biochemistry, T.R. Publications, Madras. 23. Robinson et al., 1994, Normal and Therapeutic Nutrition, Macmillian Co., New York. 24. Srilakshmi, B., 2005, Dietetics, New Age International (P.) Limited, Publishers, New Delhi 25. Malhan,K.NandAtlin(2002).Krauses Food Nutrition and Diet Therapy, W.B Saunders Company, Philadelphia. 26. Bamji et al(1996), Textbook of Human Nutrition Oxford and IBH Publishing co. Pvt. Ltd. Delhi. 27. Shils.E.M, Shike .M, Ross. A.C, Cabellero. B and Cousins.R.J (2011) Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease, Eleventh Edition, Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, Philadelphia 28. Nix .S(2016) Williams' Basic Nutrition & Diet Therapy, Fifteenth Edition, Elsevier

710

APPLIED STATISTICS

SEMESTER III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : XI CREDIT : 4

PAPER NO : 14 CODE NO:

OBJECTIVES

To enable students to learn

1. Analysis of data for measures of central tendency, dispersion, relationship, regression and tests of significance 2. The appropriate use of these statistical techniques in research work. THEORY

Unit I:

c. Measures of central tendency- Calculation of arithmetic mean, median and mode of individual observations, discrete series and continuous series. Merits and demerits of mean, median and mode. Unit II:

e. Measures of dispersion-range, Quartile deviation, mean deviation and standard deviation f. Measures of skewness-positive and negativeskewness, Karl pearson’s coefficient of skewness and Bowley’s coefficient of skewness Unit III:

c. Measures of relationship – Correlation analysis – Types of correlation, Methods of studying correlation- Scatter diagram- merits and demerits, Calculation of Karl Pearson’s Coefficient of Correlation and Spearman’s rank Correlation Coefficient. Unit IV:

711

c. Regression analysis- regression lines-difference between correlation and regression analysis, uses of regression analysis, Simple regression analysis using regression equations of Yon X and X on Y. Unit V:

e. Tests of Hypotheses- Procedure of testing hypothesis, two types of errors in testing hypotheses, two- tailed and one tailed tests of hypotheses. Tests of significance of large samples, tests of significance for small samples- student’s t test. f. Chi- square test – definition, uses and limitations, F-test- definition, applications, ANOVA- assumptions, one way and two way ANOVA. COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the student can

5. Solve problems to find the desired measure of central tendency, dispersion, relationship, regression and tests of significance. Assessment: Test and tutorials 6. Apply knowledge to test hypothesis and interpret the results obtained. Assessment : Assignment

REFERENCES

7. Gupta. S.P., 2014, Statistical Methods, Forty Fourth Revised Edition, New Delhi, Sultan Chand & Co., Publishers 8. Palanisamy, S and Manoharan, M., 1999., Statistical Methods for Biologists, Palani, Paramount Publications. 9. Rao, K.V., 1996, Bio-statistics, Madras, Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers

712

FOOD PROCESSING AND PRESERVATION

SEMESTER : III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION : 4 HOURS/WEEK

CORE ELECTIVE : III CREDIT : 3

PAPER NO: 15 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

5. Understand the principles of different techniques used in processing and preservation of foods. 6. Study the applications of different processing methods in the food industry.

THEORY

Unit I : Introduction

c. Food processing - Principals of food processing and preservation, Effect of processing on sensory characteristics and nutritional properties of foods Unit II : Processing and preservation by heat

i. Heat processing using steam or water - Blanching, pasteurization, sterilization and UHT processing, extrusion cooking. j. Heat processing using hot air – Dehydration, baking, roasting. k. Heat processing using oil – frying. l. Heat processing by radiated energy and microwave heating. Unit III : Processing and preservation by low-temperatures

c. Refrigeration, freezing, Controlled Atmosphere, Modified Atmosphere and dehydro-freezing. Use of microorganisms - food fermentations, pickling, smoking. Unit IV : Processing and preservation of Beverages

713

c. Types of beverages, importance, Fruit Beverages. Ingredient selection, extended shelf life. Unit V : Packaging

c. Principles, functions and types, Methods of food packaging – Vacuum packaging, Carbon-di-oxide, nitrogen packaging, aseptic packaging, Flexible packaging.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can

a. Describe the principles & methods used to preserve foods. Assessment : Assignment, Tests c. Apply the various techniques used to prepare and preserve foods Assessment : Practical, food industry visits.

REFERENCES

33. Chakraverty, A., Majumdar, A.S., Raghavan. G.S. V. &Ramawamy, H.S. (Eds.) (2003). Handbook of Postharvest Technology Cereals, Fruits, Vegetables, Tea, and Spices. USA: Marcel Dekker Inc. 34. Brennan, J.G. (Ed.) (2006). Food Processing Handbook. Weinheim, Germany: Wiley- VCH Verlag GmbH &Co.KGaA. 35. Fellows, P.J. (2000). Food Processing Technology- Principles and practice. (2nd Ed.). Florida, USA: CRC Press LLC. 36. Karel, M. and Lund, D.B. (2003) Physical Principles of Food Preservation (2 ed) NTY, USA: Marcel Dekker. 37. Rahman, M.S. (Ed.). (2007). Handbook of Food Preservation. (2nd Ed.). Florida, USA: CRC Press. 38. Smith, J.S., &Hui, Y.H. (Eds.) (2004). Food Processing: Principles and Applications. Oxford, UK: Blackwell Publishing. 39. S.M Reddy (2015), “Basic Food Science and Technology”, New Age International Publishers.

714

40. Sun, Da-Wen (Ed.) (2005). Emerging technologies for Food Processing. California, USA: Elsevier Academic Press. 41. “Food packaging technology Handbook (2nd revised edition)” by NIIR Board, Published by NIIR project consultancy service, ISBN: 978981039090, Code: N193 2012. 42. Fellows, P.J, “Food processing technology: Principles and Practice”, Second edition, Woodhead Publishing limited, Cambridge, 2005. 43. Sahay, K.M and K.K Singh, “UNIT operations in Agricultural Processing”, vikas publishing House Pvt ltd, New Delhi, 2003. 44. Sahin, S and Summu, S.G (2006), Physical Properties of Foods, NY, USA: Springer Science 45. Farnworth, E.R (ed) (2008), “Handbook of Fermented Functional foods (2nded)”, Florida, USA: CRC Press. 46. Hui, Y.H et al., (2004), “Handbook of food and beverage fermentation technology”, New York, USA: Marcel Dekker Inc., 47. Chen, X.D and Mujumdar, A.S (2008), Drying technologies in food processing, Sussex, U: Blackwell publishing. 48. Frazer, W.C and Dennis C Westhoff (4rd edition) (2008), Food microbiology, McGraw Hill Companies,

E-REFERENCES

15. Novel packaging technologies - www.foodprotection.org 16. Regulations and Types of packaging -www.worldpackaging.org 17. Canning - http://www.metal-pack.org 18. Vacuum packaging - http://www.culinaryinnovations.co.uk/ 19. Techniques of food processing - mofpi.nic.in 20. Novel Food processing techniques - www.ift.org 21. Modified atmosphere packaging - www.adph.org

715

FOOD SAFETY AND QUALITY CONTROL

SEMESTER -III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 4 HOURS/WEEK

CORE ELECTIVE-IV CREDIT: 3

PAPER NO :16 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students

4. To learn about the importance of food safety and quality control 5. To gain knowledge on the existing quality control systems 6. To gain familiarity with the standards and specifications used

THEORY

Unit I : Introduction to food safety and quality

c. Introduction to concepts of food quality, food safety, food quality assurance and food quality management. d. Importance and functions of quality control. Unit II :Food adulteration

c. Food adulteration, nature of adulterants, methods of evaluation of food adulterants and toxic constituents. d. Current challenges in food adulteration. Unit III : Safety Vs Hazards

c. Microbiological considerations in food safety, good manufacturing practices (GMP), good hygienic practices & food safety management. d. Evaluation of food safety – sensory evaluation, quality analysis and applications of HACCP in food safety. Unit IV :Quality control in food industry

716

c. Quality Control concepts as applied to the food industry, Methods of evaluation and control of the various aspects of quality of raw materials. d. Manufacturing process and testing of finished products. Unit V :Role of National and International regulatory agencies in food safety

c. Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), AGMARK, Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI), Codex alimentarious commission, USFDA. d. International organization for standards (ISO) and its standards for food quality and safety (ISO 9000 series, ISO 22000, ISO 15161, ISO 14000), FSSC COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can

1. Demonstrate knowledge of food safety and management system. Assessment : Visit to manufacturing unit

2. Audit food materials and quality control of foods.

Assessment : Internal audit training program.

REFERENCES: 17. Early. R. (1995): Guide to Quality Management Systems for the Food Industry, Blackie, Academic and professional, London 18. Gould, W.A and Gould, R.W. (1998). Total Quality Assurance for the Food Industries, CTI Publications Inc. Baltimore 19. Pomeraz, Y. and MeLoari, C.E. (1996): Food Analysis: Theory and Practice, CBS publishers and Distributor, New Delhi 20. Bryan, F.L. (1992): Hazard Analysis Critical Control Point Evaluations A Guide to Identifying Hazards and Assessing Risks Associated with Food Preparation and Storage. World Health Organization, Geneva 21. Kirk, R.S and Sawyer, R. (1991): Pearson s Composition and Analysis of Foods, Longman Scientific and Technical. 9th Edition, England 22. Food and Agricultural Organization (1980): Manuals of Food Quality Control. 2 Additives Contaminants Techniques, Rome 23. Furia, T.E. Ed. 1980. Regulatory Status of Direct Food Additives. CRC Press, Florida 24. Krammer, A. and Twigg, B.A. (1970). Quality Control for the Food Industry. 3rd Edn. AVI, Westport.

717

25. Rekha S. Singhal ,Pushpa R. Kulkarni, Dananesh V. Rege, (1997). Hand Book of Indices of food Quality and Authenticity, wood head Publishing Ltd 26. Hubbard, Merton R. (2003). Statistical Quality Control for the Food Industry, 3rd Edition, Springer 27. Neal D. Fortin. 2009. Food regulation, WileypPublishers 28. Naomi Rees. David Watson. 2000. International standards for food safety, An Aspen Publications 29. O’Rourke. 2005. European Food law, 3rd edition, Thomson, Sweet and Maxwell 30. Philip,A.C. Reconceptualizing quality. New Age International Publishers,Banglore. 2001. 31. Bhatia,R. and Ichhpujan,R.L. Quality assurance in Microbiology. CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi. 2004. 32. Kher, C.P. Quality control for the food industry. ITC Publishers, Geneva. 2000.

E-REFERENCES

4. http://www.fssai.gov.in/ 5. http://www.medindia.net 6. http://www.foodsafety.unl.edu/

718

NUTRACEUTICALS

SEMESTER :IV HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : XII CREDIT: 4

PAPER NO :18 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Learn the constituents of nutraceuticals. 2. Understand the mechanism of action and applications of functional foods.

THEORY

Unit I : Nutraceuticals

a. Importance and classification of functional foods and nutraceuticals, health and safety aspects of functional foods Unit II : Nutraceuticals of plant origin

a. Grains, oilseeds, vegetables and fruits - Components, mechanism of action and uses Unit III :Nutraceuticals of animal and microbial origin

a. Milk, egg and probiotics, designer egg and milk – Functional components, mechanism of action and uses Unit IV : Herbal Products as functional foods

a. Ginger, garlic, fenugreek, mint, wheat grass, algae, neem, echinacea, ginseng and thyme - active principles, mechanism of action and uses Unit V : Prebiotics and Probiotics

a. Prebiotics and Probiotics as functional ingredients and their role in health care.

719

RELATED EXPERIENCE:

Visit to nutraceutical industries

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can

1. Describe the different nutraceutical ingredients and their function. Assessment : Assignment, Tests

2. Identify different testing assess quality of nutraceuticals. Assessment : Hand-on Training, Lab internship

REFERENCES

1. Gold berg.,1994, Designer foods, Pharma foods and Nutraceuticals.

2. Wildman., 2000, Handbook of Nutraceuticals and Functional Foods, CRC press.

E-REFERENCES

1. http://phytochemicals.tamu.edu 2. www.dotpharmacy.co.uk/upneutra.html 3. www.nutrition.org.uk.

720

PUBLIC HEALTH NUTRITION

SEMESTER : IV HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE: XIII CREDIT: 4

PAPER NO: 19 CODE:

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

3. Understand common nutritional problems - causes and consequences. 4. Know the various nutrition and health intervention programmes and policies.

THEORY

Unit I : Concept of Public Nutrition

c. Definition and concept of Public Nutrition d. Relationship between health and nutrition, role of nutrition in national development. Unit II: Communicable and Noncommunicable diseases.

c. Communicable diseases - Epidemiology, mode of transmission, prevention and control of AIDS, STD, Cholera, Typhoid, Tuberculosis, Malaria, Hepatitis and Leptospirosis. d. Non communicable diseases - PEM, Nutritional anemia, vitamin A deficiency (VAD) and Iodine Deficiency Disorder. Unit III: Assessment of nutritional status

c. Need and importance, Direct and Indirect methods - Clinical examination, nutritional anthropometry, biochemical tests, functional indices, biophysical methods, diet surveys, vital statistics and ecological factors. d. Nutrition surveillance - Definition and Importance. Unit IV: Programmes and organizations for Nutrition Surveillance

721

d. National Nutrition Policy, National Programmes - ICDS, Prophylaxis programmes, National Goitre control Programme. e. State level Programmes - TINP, School lunch programme. f. Organizations - FAO, WHO, UNICEF, CARE, World Bank, ICMR, ICAR, NIN and CFTRI. Unit V - Nutrition Education

c. Meaning and purpose of Nutrition Education d. Types and uses of Audio aids, Video aids and Audio-Visual aids COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the students can:

1. Explain the common nutritional problems their causes and consequences Assessment: class test, model exam

2. Demonstrate knowledge of the various nutrition and health intervention programmes and policies prevalent in India Assessment: assignment 3. Conduct assessment of nutritional status of a selected population in the community. Assessment: assignment on nutritional survey and seminars

REFERENCES :

7. Bamji et al., 1996, Textbook of Human Nutrition Oxford and IBH Publishing co. Pvt. Ltd. Delhi. 8. Park, K., 1995, Textbook of Preventive and Social Medicine, Banarasidas Bharat Publication, Jabalpur. 9. WHO, 2003, Diet, Nutrition and Prevention of Chronic Diseases, WHO Technical Report series, Geneva 10. Mahajan, B.K., and Gupta M.C., 2002, Textbook of Preventive and Social Medicine, Jaypee brothers, New Delhi. 11. James.T, Noor Sylvan and Asay, 2012, Family Resource Management, Sage publication, California, 12. Seetharaman. P, Btra. S and Mehra. P, 2005, introduction to Family Resource Management, CBS Publication, New Delhi.

E-REFERENCES

722

4. www.sciencedaily.com 5. www.cdc.gov / nchs 6. www.whoindia.org

723

DISSERTATION

SEMESTER: IV CREDIT : 4

CORE : XIV

PAPER NO : 20 CODE :

724

SPORTS NUTRITION

SEMESTER : IV HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6HOURS/WEEK

CORE :XV CREDIT : 4

PAPER NO : 21 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students

3. To provide students an overview of the physiological implications of sports activities and its relationship to nutritional status. 4. To understand the utilization of nutrients during exercise and sports activities and the principles involved in nutrient recommendation for athletes

THEORY

Unit I : Introduction to Sports Nutrition and Exercise physiology

c. Definition of physical activity, exercise and sport. Basic training and nutrition principles. Basic sports nutrition guidelines. d. Exercise physiology –definition. Muscle physiology –overview of muscle tissue histology, muscle fiber types, muscular contraction and muscular adaptation to exercise training, Cardiopulmonary response and adaptations to exercise. Unit II: Macro Nutrient Guidelines for Sports Activities

d. Carbohydrates – as a source of energy for exercise, recommendations of carbohydrates for athletes, recommended intake of carbohydrate before, during and after training or competition. Use of carbohydrate loading, application of glycemic index and glycemic load in sports nutrition. e. Fats – as a source of energy for exercise, effects of training on fat usage, recommendations for athletes, effect of inadequate fat intake on training performance and health. Recommended intake of fat before, during and after training or competition. f. Proteins – role of protein for athletes, protein recommendations for athletes, recommended intake of protein before during and after training or competition, effects of inadequate protein

725

intake in athletes, effects of excessive protein intake on training, performance and health. Use of protein and amino acid supplements. Considerations of protein intake of vegetarian athletes. Unit III: Energy Systems and Nutritional Ergogenics

c. Overview of energy systems- ATP- CP system, Lactic acid system, Aerobic System- Oxidative phosphorylation, Fuel utilization and respiratory exchange ratio. d. Definition of ergogenic aid and dietary supplement, types of dietary supplements and nutritional ergogenics commonly used by endurance, strength and team sport athlete. Unit IV: Micro Nutrient Guidelines for Sports Activities

c. Vitamins- The influence of exercise on vitamin requirements, recommended daily vitamin intake, vitamins and energy metabolism, vitamins and antioxidant protection. d. Minerals – Role of minerals in bone formation, blood formation and immune system. Impact of inadequate mineral intake on health and performance, female athletic triad. Unit V: Fluid intake during exercise and sports

b. Effect of exercise on fluid balance – effect of hypohydration and loss of electrolytes during exercise. Type, Timing and amount of fluid and electrolyte intake, application of fluid and electrolyte guidelines. Hyponatremia; hyperhydration ;Use of sports drinks.

COURSE OUTCOME

On completion of the course the student can

1. Describe muscle physiology and the adaptations of the muscular and cardiopulmonary systems to exercise. 2. Apply knowledge of nutrient requirements and nutrient timing to plan diets for athletes before, during and after exercise to enhance performance. 3. Demonstrate knowledge of recommended schedule of fluid intake by athletes, before, during and after exercise.

REFERENCES:

12. Asker E, Jeukendrup and Michael Gleeson (2004) ‘Sports Nutrition: An introduction to energy production and performance’ Human Kinetics 13. Bean A (2000) ‘The complex guide to sports nutrition’ A&C Black Publishers, London

726

14. Benardot (2006 )“Advanced Sports Nutrition”, Human Kinetics Ltd., U.S.A. 15. Brouns F and Cargill C (2002) “Essentials of sports nutrition” John Wiley & Sons Ltd., England 16. Clark N (2003) ‘Sports Nutrition Guidebook’, Human Kinetics, U.S.A. 17. Dunford M and Doyle AJ, Nutrition for Sport and Exercise, Thomson Wadsworth, Australia. 18. Fink H H, Mikesky A E, Burgoon LA (2012) Practical Applications in Sports Nutrition, Jones and Barlett Learning , U.S. A. 19. Kleiner S and Robinson M.G (2001) ‘Power Eating’, Human Kinetics, U.S.A. 20. Maughan R J and Burke LM (2002) ‘Sports Nutrition’, Blackwell Science Ltd. 21. Dunford .M & Doyle .J.A (2008),'Nutrition for Sport and Exercise', Thomson Wadsworth, USA. 22. Driskell J.A &Wolinsky. I (2002), 'Nutritional Assessment OfAthelets', CRC Press LLC, USA.

FOOD MICROBIOLOGY SEMESTER-IV HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 4 HOURS/WEEK

CORE: ELECTIVE V CREDIT:3

PAPER NO: 22 CODE:

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 5. Acquire knowledge on the role of micro organisms responsible for food spoilage and food borne illness 6. Learn the importance of personal hygiene and safe handling of food.

THEORY Unit I :Micro organisms and Their Importance in Food Industry e. Micro organisms in air, water, soil and plants. Factors affecting growth of micro organisms in food - Nutrient content, pH, Redox Potential and Water activity. f. Importance of micro organisms in food industry - Economic importance of yeasts, moulds and bacteria. Unit II: Contamination and Spoilage of Plant Foods e. Definition, Fitness of food for consumption, causes, classification - ease of spoilage. f. Contamination and spoilage of cereals and cereal products, pulses, vegetables and fruits. Unit III: Contamination and Spoilage of Animal Foods a. Contamination and Spoilage of egg, fish, meat, poultry, milk and milk products. Unit IV : Food Borne illness and prevention

727

a. Food intoxication and infection - Bacillus cereus, Campylobacter, Clostridium botulinum, Escherichia Coli, Salmonella, Shigella, Staphylococcus aureus, Vibrio, Clostridium Welchi, EntamoebaHistolytica, Polio Virus, Hepatitis Virus, Tubercle bacilli. Unit V: Safety and Hygiene a. Safe handling of food, food packaging, personal hygiene of food handlers, Cleaning of equipment and sanitizing agent.

DEMONSTRATION: 11. Hanging drop preparation 12. Simple and gram staining 13. Preparation and distribution of culture media 14. Inoculation and incubation of culture 15. Examination of cultures prepared from water, vegetables , fruits, meat and milk. RELATED EXPERIENCE Visit to a microbiology laboratory of an institute.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 5. Describe the role of microorganisms in food spoilage and food borne illness Assessment: seminar, assignment 6. Advocate methods for personal hygiene and safe handling of food Assessment: test, end semester examination

REFERENCES 17. Ananthanarayan and Paniker's Textbook of Microbiology Tenth edition with booklet, 2017, Mittal Books 18. Parija, 2016, Textbook of Microbiology and Immunology, 3rd Ed, Mosby. 19. Harvey , 2012.Lippincott's Illustrated Reviews Microbiology with the Point Access Scratch Code, Third edition, Wolters Kluwer 20. Moss M.O., 2005, Food Microbiology, New Age International Publishers. Bangalore. 21. Frazier, W.C and West Hoff., 1995, Food Microbiology, Tata McGraw - Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi. 22. Pelzer M.J and Raid R.D., 1972, Microbiology, Tata McGraw Hill. New york. 23. Bamforth .C.W (2005), 'Food, Fermentation and Micro-organisms', First Edition, Blackwell Publishing Ltd, United Kingdom.

728

24. Adams .M.R & Moss .M.O (2008), 'Food Microbiology',Third Edition, Royal Society Of Chemistry', UK.

E-REFERENCES 7. International Journal of Food Microbiology IUMS and ICFMH www.elsevier.com 8. Food microbe.com Food Microbiology and Food Hygiene Research Publication. 9. Food Safety HACCP, Food Quality, Food Microbiology and Hygiene www.Food quality news.com

729

BASICS OF INTERIOR DECORATION

(EXTRADISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE FOR OTHER MAJOR STUDENTS)

SEMESTER- II HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 4 HOURS/WEEK

CORE :EDE I CREDIT: 3

PAPER NO :11 CODE NO :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to 1. Gain knowledge and understanding of the basic art principles. 2. Learn the dimensions of colour and application of art principles in interior.

THEORY Unit I: Interior Design e. Concept, objectives and importance of interior design. f. Elements of design Unit II: Concept and application of Art Principles b. Interior design – Balance, Harmony, Proportion, Rhythm and Emphasis. Unit III: Colour a. Colour Theory – Prang colour theory and Psychologist colour chart.

b. Colour harmonies – Related and contrasting colour harmonies. Unit IV: Flower Arrangement c. Definition and importance d. Styles in flower arrangement Unit V: Furniture Arrangement c. Selection of furniture for a family d. Art principles in the arrangement of furniture for different rooms.

RELATED EXPERIENCE

730

c. Flower arrangement – different styles of flower arrangement. d. Furniture arrangement – furniture arrangement in different rooms.

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can 1. Demonstrate knowledge of basic art principles Assessment: seminar, assignment 2. Apply principles of art to decorate functional interiors Assessment: test, end semester examination

REFERENCES

5. The Smaller Home : Smart Designs for Your Home, Sater, Dan, HarperCollins Publisher, 2008

6. Interior Design 01 Edition, Chaudhari, S N, Aavishkar Publishers, 2011

23. Sketching for Architecture and Interior Design, Laurence King Publishers, 2011 24. Alexander, M.J., 1972, Design Interior Environment, Hariyana, Harcourt- Brace Pvt. Ltd. 25. Brian, W. and Tom, W., 1977 Indoor Plants, London, Macdonald Guidelines Pvt. Ltd. 26. Craig, H.T. and Rush, O.D., 1962 Homes with character, Boston, Health Co., Pvt. Ltd. 27. Coe Stella., 1984, Ikebana. A practical and philosophical guide to Japanese flower arrangement, London, Century Publishing Co. Ltd., 28. Faulkner, S. and Faulkner, S., 1960 Inside Todays Home, Newyork, Rimettard and WinstemPvt. Ltd. 29. Goldstain, V. and Goldstein, V., 1960, Art in everyday life, New York, Macmillan Co. Pvt. Ltd. 30. Jean, T., 1980, Flower arranging, London, Macdonald Guidelines Pvt. Ltd., 31. John Lester and Steven Violet., 1975, The world of houseplants and flower arranging, New York, Galahod Book Co. 32. Rutt, H., 1973, Home furnishing, New York, John Wiley and Sons Pvt. Ltd.

E - JOURNAL 1. Architecture Design, Journal of Indian Architecture. 2. Inside outside, Business India Group, Mumbai. 3. Indian Design and Interior, Media Transasia India Ltd.,

E- REFERENCES 1. www.interiordesign.net

731

2. www.furniturearrangement.com 3. www.home_decorating_room_by_room_com 4. www.interior_design_solutions.com 5. www.thegardener.btinternet.co 6. www.ebay.com 7. www.en.wikipedi

732

HOSPITAL ADMINISTRATION

(EXTRADISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE FOR OTHER MAJOR STUDENTS)

SEMESTER: III HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK

CORE : EDE II CREDIT:3

PAPER No :17 CODE :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to

1. Know the types of hospitals and their administration. 3. Gain knowledge about the legal aspects of hospital administration. 4. Know about National and International organizations financing medical care.

THEORY

Unit I : Hospital Organization and Management

e. Introduction, general principles, management structure and duties, History and functions of Hospitals. f. Relationship of Hospital to the Community Unit II : Legal Aspects of Hospital Management

e. Duties and responsibilities of nurses, doctors and employees in the hospital. f. Medical malpractices, laws affecting disease afflicted Unit III :Organisations Financing Medical Care

e. National - ICMR, NIN, CFTRI f. International - WHO, UNICEF, FAO Unit IV : Accounting and Financial Management in Hospitals.

e. Principles, analysis and interpretation of financial reports, Preparation and use of budgets.

733

f. Methods of cost computation

COURSE OUTCOME On completion of the course the student can

1. Explain organization and functioning of hospitals Tests and assignments 2. Demonstrate knowledge of funding agencies, financial and legal management Seminars, Presentations and group discussions

REFERENCES

11. Davidson S.R. and Passmore J.F., 1975, Human Nutrition and Dietetics. Vol. I II Edition. 12. Francis, C.M and D' Souza, M.C., 2000, Hospital Administration. Jay Brothers. 13. Gillespie S. McNeil G., 1992, Hospital Management Macmillan and Co., New York. 14. Mitchell et. al., 1987, Nutrition in Health & disease, Pitman M. Edu. Publishing Co., 15. Robinson et.al., 1986, Normal and Therapeutic Nutrition. Macmillan Co., New york.

E - REFERENCES

9. www.ingenta.connect.com - Food and Food ways. 10. www.fda.gov/search.html 11. www.wodsworth.com/nutrition 12. www.elsevier.com - Indian Journal of Nutrition and food microbiology.

734

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI -600 004 DEPARTMENT OF HOME SCIENCE

M.Phil. HOME SCIENCE-FAMILY RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

2018-2019 ONWARDS

735

DEPARTMENT OF HOME SCIENCE

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

M.Phil. FAMILY RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Paper Title of the paper Page No. Code Total Credits no.

1 Methodology of research 1

2 Advanced family resource 3 management

3 Guide Paper 5

4 Dissertation

736

PROGRAMME OUTCOME

1. The course help to understand the significant resource of family and its management. Test, Assignment, Seminar 2. To gain knowledge about ergonomic principles and design interior with referable to decoration. Test, Assignment, Seminar 3. To acquire skills in management and Interior Design . Test, Assignment, Seminar

737

METHODOLOGY OF RESEARCH PAPER NO : 1 HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK CODE NO : CREDIT :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to learn 1. The various types of research design and analysis of data 2. The law governing research ethics.

THEORY Unit I : Fundamental Concepts a. Quantitative and Qualitative research - Research problem - definition, identification - statement of research problem and criteria for selection. b. Variables - Meaning and identification in relation to the research problem - independent, dependent, control and intervening variables. c. Hypothesis – Meaning, importance and types of hypothesis. Unit II : Tools of Research and Sampling Design a. Tools of research - Questionnaire, observation, interview schedule, opinionnaire (Thurstone's and Likert’s type), Scaling techniques - different types - nominal, ordinal, interval, ratio and rating scales Characteristics of tools - reliability and validity. b. Sampling - Meaning, types, advantages and limitations. Unit III : Research Design and Proposal

738

a. Research design - Meaning, types of research design - non - experimental and experimental, experimental control, experimental design - principles, latin square design, factorial design and randomized design. b. Research proposal - Designing of research proposal, time, budget and resources.

739

Unit IV : Processing and Analysis of Data a. Editing, coding, classification and tabulation of data. b. Bi - variate analysis - correlation and regression - types - Karl Pearson's product moment correlation coefficient, correlation by rank. Concept of bi- serial correlation, point bi- serial correlation, tetra - choric correlation. Regression - Definition, regression lines and regression equation. c. Multi variate analysis - concept only. d. (i) Parametric tests - 't' test, 'F' test, one way and two ways ANOVA (ii) Non - parametric tests - chi - square test, Mann - Whitney test [U - test] Unit V : Research Ethics a. ICMR guidelines for research on human subjects and animals - consent - philosophy - law governing ethics - public health ethics, disaster research and ethics, community participation, vulnerable population and publication ethics.

REFERENCES 1. Best J.H. Research in Education., 1983, Prentice Hall New Delhi. 2. Good and Hatt, Methods in Social research., 1983 Hill International Book Company. 3. Young. P.V and Sched C.F. Scientific Social Survey and Research., 1968, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 4. S.P. Gupta, Statistical Methods., 1983 Sultan Chand & Sons Ltd, New Delhi. 5. Wilkinson, T.S and Bhandharkar, P.L.C - Methodology and Techniques of Social Research., 1984, Himalaya publishing house, Bombay. 6. RajammalP. Devadas and K. Kulandaivelu, A Hand book of methodology of research., 1976, Sri Ramakrishna Mission Vidyalaya Teachers College, Coimbatore. 7. Kothari, C.R., 1991, Research Methodology methods and techniques, New Delhi, Wiley Easter Ltd. 8. Sharma, B.A.V., Prasad, R.D and Satyanarayana, P., 1995, Research methods in social sciences, Sterling Publishers, N.D. 9. Devadas, R.P and Kulandaivel, K., 1989, A Handbook of Methodology of Research, SPKMV, Coimbatore.

740

ADVANCED FAMILY RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

PAPER NO: 2 HOUR OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS / WEEK

CODE NO: CREDIT:

OBJECTIVES To enable the students to 1. Understand the concept of systems approach to Management. 2. Learn the various techniques to improve the quality of the life

THEORY

Unit I :Systems Approach

Concept of family resource management - Objectives, management process, system approach to family and management

Unit II : Housing

a. Advances in low cost housing design, materials and methods of construction, prefabrication - space saving technique - modular kitchen. b. Interior Decoration - Recent trends in interior decoration, materials and finishes, accessories for decoration, flower Arrangement - styles and conditioning of flowers.

Unit III : Human Engineering

a. Definition, characteristics of work place, things and activity. Applications of human engineering. b. Work Environment - Temperature - air movement, air humidifier, air circulation and requirements of air movement; Lighting - Adequacy of artificial and natural lighting, availability of sunlight according to season, physiological and psychological requirements of lighting; Noise - Definition, effects of noise on physical, psychological and intellectual activities, measurement of noise.

741

Unit IV : Energy

a. Energy sources for the community - Technology and the application - solar, wind, biomass and bio gas technology, significance of waste recycling, wealth from waste

Unit V : Quality Of Life

a. Quality of life – Augmenting family income, use of technology – use of labour saving equipment and work simplification.

b. Family resources and futurology – Research needs in the field of family resource management applicable to urban and rural areas.

RELATED EXPERIENCE

1. Evaluation of housing design as per type and size. 2. Evaluation of Interior decoration as per type and size.

REFERENCE

1. Deacon, R.E. and Firebaugh, R.M., 1986, Family resource management, - Allyn and Bacon, Boston. 2. Deacon, R.E. and Firebaugh F.M., 1975, Home management – Context and concepts, Houghton Mifflin co., Boston. 3. Gross, I.H. and Crandall E.W. and Knoll, M.M., 1980, Management for modern families, Sterling publishers, Delhi. 4. Satsangi, S.P. and Vinaysnill. G., 1978, Management of rural energy system – Galgotia publications, New Delhi. 5. Nadler, G., 1982, Motion and time study - MacGraw Hill Book company. New york. 6. Ranagrajan, V., 1975, Rural Housing in Tamil Nadu, Sangam Publishers, Madras.

JOURNALS

742

1. Rural housing NBO research our training centre, vallabhvilidyanagar. 2. Energy – Technical Notes, MCRC publications, , Madras 13. 3. Energy management – quartar journal of Nation productivity council. 4. The Indian Journal of home Science, Home science Association of India publication. 5. Journal of , American Home Economics Association publication. 6. Keemat – The consumer’s voice, consumer guidance, society of India, Mahapatiba Marg. Bombay – 1.

743

GUIDE PAPER

PAPER NO: 3 HOUR OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS / WEEK

CODE NO: CREDIT:

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students

1. To gain knowledge on the framework in which research studies are conducted 2. To gain insight on the methodology of conducting various types of research in resource management.

THEORY

Unit I

a. Formulation of hypothesis, sampling techniques, Tools of research, Research Design-Survey, Experimental and Intervention based studies Unit II

a. Human and Non human resources and its management b. New trends in interior decoration and life space planning, materials and finishes Unit III

a. Ergonomics- characteristics of place, thing and activity-occupational hazard/safety-application of ergonomics in family and commercial environments-health related issues-effect on work, body postures and safety of various equipment Unit IV

a. Entrepreneurial management-women and family as b. Environmental pollution, community health and acceptability of food items Unit V

744

a. Innovative fuel technologies and use of renewable energy resources

REFERENCES

1. Miller R.L and Safford A.V., 2001, Economic Issue for consumer California, Belmont wood worth publishers. 2. Interior design course: Principles, Practices, and Techniques for the Aspiring Designer 01 Edition, Barrons Educational Series Inc, 2006 3. Interior Design; An introduction to Art, Craft Science, Techniques and Profession of Interior Design, Ahmed A Kasu, Ashish Book Centre, 2010 4. Corporate Interiors No.8, Yee Roger, Visual Reference Pub.2007 5. Interior Design and Decoration, Sanjeev Sarkar, Arise Publicaitons, 2009 6. HarrurDavitfray., 1989, Mind and Body Mechanic New York, W.B Sounder Pvt. Ltd 7. Yadav, C.P., 2000, Encyclopaedia of Entrepreneurship development, Volume I, Luchnow, Anmol Publications Ltd

745

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS) CHENNAI -600 004 DEPARTMENT OF HOME SCIENCE

M.Phil. HOME SCIENCE - FOODS AND NUTRITION 2018-2019 ONWARDS

746

DEPARTMENT OF HOME SCIENCE

CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

M.Phil. Foods and Nutrition

Paper Title of the paper Page No. Code Total Credits no.

1 Methodology of research 1

2 Advanced Foods and 3 Nutrition

3 Guide Paper 5

4 Dissertation

747

PROGRAMME OUTCOME

1. The course helps to understand the complex scientific domain indicating how food provides essential nourishment for health. 2. It helps to understand a holistic integrated approach to balanced nutrition and dietary support in disease. The course helps to understand the challenges that face the nutritionists.

METHODOLOGY OF RESEARCH

PAPER NO : 1 HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK CODE NO : CREDIT :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to learn 1. The various types of research design and analysis of data 2. The law governing research ethics.

THEORY Unit I: Fundamental Concepts a. Quantitative and Qualitative research - Research problem - definition, identification - statement of research problem and criteria for selection. b. Variables - Meaning and identification in relation to the research problem - independent, dependent, control and intervening variables. c. Hypothesis – Meaning, importance and types of hypothesis.

Unit II: Tools of Research and Sampling Design

748

a. Tools of research - Questionnaire, observation, interview schedule, opinionnaire (Thurstone's and Likert’s type), Scaling techniques - different types - nominal, ordinal, interval, ratio and rating scales Characteristics of tools - reliability and validity. b. Sampling - Meaning, types, advantages and limitations.

Unit III: Research Design and Proposal a. Research design - Meaning, types of research design - non - experimental and experimental, experimental control, experimental design - principles, latin square design, factorial design and randomized design. b. Research proposal - Designing of research proposal, time, budget and resources.

749

Unit IV : Processing and Analysis of Data a. Editing, coding, classification and tabulation of data. b. Bi - variate analysis - correlation and regression - types - Karl Pearson's product moment correlation coefficient, correlation by rank. Concept of bi- serial correlation, point bi- serial correlation, tetra - choric correlation. c. Regression - Definition, regression lines and regression equation. Multi variate analysis - concept only. d. (i) Parametric tests - 't' test, 'F' test, one way and two ways ANOVA (ii) Non - parametric tests - chi - square test, Mann - Whitney test [U - test]

Unit V : Research Ethics a. ICMR guidelines for research on human subjects and animals - consent - philosophy - law governing ethics - public health ethics, disaster research and ethics, community participation, vulnerable population and publication ethics.

REFERENCES

1. Best J.H. Research in Education., 1983, Prentice Hall New Delhi. 2. Good and Hatt, Methods in Social research., 1983 Hill International Book Company. 3. Young. P.V and Sched C.F. Scientific Social Survey and Research., 1968, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 4. S.P. Gupta, Statistical Methods., 1983 Sultan Chand & Sons Ltd, New Delhi. 5. Wilkinson, T.S and Bhandharkar, P.L.C - Methodology and Techniques of Social Research., 1984, Himalaya publishing house, Bombay. 6. Rajammal P. Devadas and K. Kulandaivelu, A Hand book of methodology of research., 1976, Sri Ramakrishna Mission Vidyalaya Teachers College, Coimbatore. 7. Kothari, C.R., 1991, Research Methodology methods and techniques, New Delhi, Wiley Easter Ltd. 8. Sharma, B.A.V., Prasad, R.D and Satyanarayana, P., 1995, Research methods in social sciences, Sterling Publishers, N.D. 9. Devadas, R.P and Kulandaivel, K., 1989, A Handbook of Methodology of Research, SPKMV, Coimbatore.

750

ADVANCED FOODS AND NUTRITION PAPER NO : 2 HOURSOF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK CODE NO : CREDIT :

OBJECTIVES:

To enable students to:

1. gain familiarity with the recent advances in Food Science and its applications 2. critically review the recent studies in the field of Nutrition 3. focus attention on nutrition in special conditions

THEORY Unit-I : Food Science and Application a. Nutritional and anti- nutritional factors, active principles and changes in active principles during cooking and their nutritional implications on cereals, pulses, vegetables and fruits, nuts and oilseeds, milk and milk products, tea, coffee, and cocoa, spices and , meat, fish, poultry and egg, fats and oils b. Food adjuncts-Applications of natural and synthetic flavours, colors, preservatives. Functional foods-Latest trends in the concept of functional foods: their role in designer foods, nutraceuticals Unit-II : Biochemical Aspects of Nutrients a. Energy: Energy metabolism- BMR energy requirement, respiratory quotient and metabolism in starvation b. Digestion, absorption and metabolism, effects of deficiency and toxicity of macro nutrients. c. Functions, digestion, absorption and metabolism, deficiency and toxicity of micro nutrients. Unit-III: Nutrition in health and diseases a. Food and nutrient requirements for all age groups as recommended by ICMR

751

b. Nutritional modifications in diabetes mellitus, obesity, cardio vascular diseases, cancer, AIDS, burns. Unit-IV: Nutrition in special conditions a. Sports, sea voyage and space b. Emergency feeding during flood and drought. Unit-V : Community nutrition a. Assessment of Nutritional status b. Major nutritional problems in India c. National and international agencies in alleviating malnutrition. d. Nutrition Intervention Programmes in India REFERENCES: 1. Harper.M.B, (1980), The Science Of Food, Row Publishers, San Francisco, Pg:129 2. Yadav. S, (1997), Food Hazards And Food Hygiene, Annco/Publication, Pvt Ltd, Pg:30. 3. Agarwal.O.P, (2000), Agarwal’s Text Book Of Biochemistry (Physiological Chemistry), Goel Publishing, Meerut. 4. Chandra.R. K., (1991), Trace Elements In Nutrition Of Children, Nestle Nutrition Workshop Series-Vol 23, Raven Press Newyork 5. Shils,M.E., Oslon.J.A, (2000), Modern Nutrition In Health & Disease, 7th Edition, Young Vernon Publishers. 6. Zieger E.E & Filer Jr L.J. (1996), Present Knowledge In Nutrition, 7th Edition 7. World Health Organization, (1996), Trace Elements In Human Nutrition & Health 8. ICMR (2010) 9. Nutrition News (NIN), Vol 19(3), July 1998. 10. Paul Field House, (1995), Food And Nutrition, Customs AND Culture Second Edition, 11. Chandan Publishers. 12. Phillips Foster, Howard, D. Leathers, (1998), The World Food Problem, Lynne Rienner 13. Publishers, London. 14. Whitney,EN and Rolfes, S.R.,(2002), Understanding Nutrition, 8th Edition, Wordsworth Thoas Learning, Australia. 15. Insel.p., Turner.E.R., RossD., (2006), Discovering Nutrition, IIEdition, Bartlette Publishers, Boston. PERIODICALS: 1. American Journal Of Clinical Nutrition. 2. Journal Of American Dietetics Association. 3. Brirish Journal of Clinical Nutrition. 4. Eduventure Journal of Queen Mary’s College. 5. Indian Journal of Nutrition and Dietitics.

752

6. Nutrition Today. E-REFERENCES 1. www.eatright.org 2. www.infcinfo.health.org 3. www.nutrition.gog 4. www.diabetes.org 5. www.amerianhe art.org

753

GUIDE PAPER

PAPER NO: 3 HOUR OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS / WEEK CODE NO: CREDIT:

OBJECTIVES To enable the students 1. To gain knowledge of the framework in which research studies are conducted 2. To gain insight on the methodology of conducting various types of research in foods and nutrition THEORY Unit I : Study Research a. Formulation of hypothesis, Sampling techniques, Tools of research, Research Design Unit II : Survey Research a. Assessment of Nutritional status – anthropometry, biochemical indices, clinical assessment, dietary intake b. Assessment of food security i. Assessment of household security ii. Assessment of children’s food security c. Assessment of food safety Unit III: Food Analysis a. Crude fibre estimation, macronutrients and micronutrients analysis, Phytonutrient Assay Unit IV: Supplementation Studies a. Deficiency disorders, diabetes, hypercholesterolemia, liver disorder, CVD, arthritis b. Nutraceutical – formulation and supplementation of nutraceutical product Unit V: Analytical Techniques a. Chromatography, spectrophotometry, antioxidant assays, colorimetry REFERENCES: 1. Bamji Mehtab S.et al. (ed), (2000), Textbook of Human Nutrition, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi 2. Garrow, J.S., W.P.T James and A. Ralph, (2000), Human Nutrition and Dietetics, Churchill living stone, Edinburgh

754

3. Groff, JL and Gropper S.S., (2000), Advanced Nutrition and Human Metabolism 3rd edition, wadsworth thomsun Learning, Australia.

METHODOLOGY OF RESEARCH

PAPER NO : 1 HOURS OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK CODE NO : CREDIT :

OBJECTIVES

To enable the students to learn 3. The various types of research design and analysis of data 4. The law governing research ethics.

THEORY Unit I: Fundamental Concepts d. Quantitative and Qualitative research - Research problem - definition, identification - statement of research problem and criteria for selection. e. Variables - Meaning and identification in relation to the research problem - independent, dependent, control and intervening variables. f. Hypothesis – Meaning, importance and types of hypothesis.

Unit II: Tools of Research and Sampling Design c. Tools of research - Questionnaire, observation, interview schedule, opinionnaire (Thurstone's and Likert’s type), Scaling techniques - different types - nominal, ordinal, interval, ratio and rating scales Characteristics of tools - reliability and validity. d. Sampling - Meaning, types, advantages and limitations.

755

Unit III: Research Design and Proposal c. Research design - Meaning, types of research design - non - experimental and experimental, experimental control, experimental design - principles, latin square design, factorial design and randomized design. d. Research proposal - Designing of research proposal, time, budget and resources. Unit IV : Processing and Analysis of Data e. Editing, coding, classification and tabulation of data. f. Bi - variate analysis - correlation and regression - types - Karl Pearson's product moment correlation coefficient, correlation by rank. Concept of bi- serial correlation, point bi- serial correlation, tetra - choric correlation. g. Regression - Definition, regression lines and regression equation. Multi variate analysis - concept only. h. (i) Parametric tests - 't' test, 'F' test, one way and two ways ANOVA (ii) Non - parametric tests - chi - square test, Mann - Whitney test [U - test]

Unit V : Research Ethics b. ICMR guidelines for research on human subjects and animals - consent - philosophy - law governing ethics - public health ethics, disaster research and ethics, community participation, vulnerable population and publication ethics.

REFERENCES

1. Best J.H. Research in Education., 1983, Prentice Hall New Delhi. 2. Good and Hatt, Methods in Social research., 1983 Hill International Book Company. 3. Young. P.V and Sched C.F. Scientific Social Survey and Research., 1968, Prentice Hall, New Delhi. 4. S.P. Gupta, Statistical Methods., 1983 Sultan Chand & Sons Ltd, New Delhi. 5. Wilkinson, T.S and Bhandharkar, P.L.C - Methodology and Techniques of Social Research., 1984, Himalaya publishing house, Bombay. 6. Rajammal P. Devadas and K. Kulandaivelu, A Hand book of methodology of research., 1976, Sri Ramakrishna Mission Vidyalaya Teachers College, Coimbatore. 7. Kothari, C.R., 1991, Research Methodology methods and techniques, New Delhi, Wiley Easter Ltd. 8. Sharma, B.A.V., Prasad, R.D and Satyanarayana, P., 1995, Research methods in social sciences, Sterling Publishers, N.D. 9. Devadas, R.P and Kulandaivel, K., 1989, A Handbook of Methodology of Research, SPKMV, Coimbatore.

756

757

ADVANCED FOODS AND NUTRITION PAPER NO : 2 HOURSOF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS/WEEK CODE NO : CREDIT :

OBJECTIVES:

To enable students to:

4. gain familiarity with the recent advances in Food Science and its applications 5. critically review the recent studies in the field of Nutrition 6. focus attention on nutrition in special conditions

THEORY Unit-I : Food Science and Application c. Nutritional and anti- nutritional factors, active principles and changes in active principles during cooking and their nutritional implications on cereals, pulses, vegetables and fruits, nuts and oilseeds, milk and milk products, tea, coffee, and cocoa, spices and condiments, meat, fish, poultry and egg, fats and oils d. Food adjuncts-Applications of natural and synthetic flavours, colors, preservatives. Functional foods-Latest trends in the concept of functional foods: their role in designer foods, nutraceuticals Unit-II : Biochemical Aspects of Nutrients d. Energy: Energy metabolism- BMR energy requirement, respiratory quotient and metabolism in starvation e. Digestion, absorption and metabolism, effects of deficiency and toxicity of macro nutrients. f. Functions, digestion, absorption and metabolism, deficiency and toxicity of micro nutrients. Unit-III: Nutrition in health and diseases c. Food and nutrient requirements for all age groups as recommended by ICMR

758

d. Nutritional modifications in diabetes mellitus, obesity, cardio vascular diseases, cancer, AIDS, burns. Unit-IV: Nutrition in special conditions c. Sports, sea voyage and space d. Emergency feeding during flood and drought. Unit-V : Community nutrition e. Assessment of Nutritional status f. Major nutritional problems in India g. National and international agencies in alleviating malnutrition. h. Nutrition Intervention Programmes in India REFERENCES: 16. Harper.M.B, (1980), The Science Of Food, Row Publishers, San Francisco, Pg:129 17. Yadav. S, (1997), Food Hazards And Food Hygiene, Annco/Publication, Pvt Ltd, Pg:30. 18. Agarwal.O.P, (2000), Agarwal’s Text Book Of Biochemistry (Physiological Chemistry), Goel Publishing, Meerut. 19. Chandra.R. K., (1991), Trace Elements In Nutrition Of Children, Nestle Nutrition Workshop Series-Vol 23, Raven Press Newyork 20. Shils,M.E., Oslon.J.A, (2000), Modern Nutrition In Health & Disease, 7th Edition, Young Vernon Publishers. 21. Zieger E.E & Filer Jr L.J. (1996), Present Knowledge In Nutrition, 7th Edition 22. World Health Organization, (1996), Trace Elements In Human Nutrition & Health 23. ICMR (2010) 24. Nutrition News (NIN), Vol 19(3), July 1998. 25. Paul Field House, (1995), Food And Nutrition, Customs AND Culture Second Edition, 26. Chandan Publishers. 27. Phillips Foster, Howard, D. Leathers, (1998), The World Food Problem, Lynne Rienner 28. Publishers, London. 29. Whitney,EN and Rolfes, S.R.,(2002), Understanding Nutrition, 8th Edition, Wordsworth Thoas Learning, Australia. 30. Insel.p., Turner.E.R., RossD., (2006), Discovering Nutrition, IIEdition, Bartlette Publishers, Boston. PERIODICALS: 7. American Journal Of Clinical Nutrition. 8. Journal Of American Dietetics Association. 9. Brirish Journal of Clinical Nutrition. 10. Eduventure Journal of Queen Mary’s College. 11. Indian Journal of Nutrition and Dietitics.

759

12. Nutrition Today. E-REFERENCES 6. www.eatright.org 7. www.infcinfo.health.org 8. www.nutrition.gog 9. www.diabetes.org 10. www.amerianhe art.org GUIDE PAPER

PAPER NO: 3 HOUR OF INSTRUCTION: 6 HOURS / WEEK CODE NO: CREDIT:

OBJECTIVES To enable the students 3. To gain knowledge of the framework in which research studies are conducted 4. To gain insight on the methodology of conducting various types of research in foods and nutrition THEORY Unit I : Study Research b. Formulation of hypothesis, Sampling techniques, Tools of research, Research Design Unit II : Survey Research d. Assessment of Nutritional status – anthropometry, biochemical indices, clinical assessment, dietary intake e. Assessment of food security iii. Assessment of household security iv. Assessment of children’s food security f. Assessment of food safety Unit III: Food Analysis a. Crude fibre estimation, macronutrients and micronutrients analysis, Phytonutrient Assay Unit IV: Supplementation Studies c. Deficiency disorders, diabetes, hypercholesterolemia, liver disorder, CVD, arthritis d. Nutraceutical – formulation and supplementation of nutraceutical product Unit V: Analytical Techniques

760

b. Chromatography, spectrophotometry, antioxidant assays, colorimetry REFERENCES: 4. Bamji Mehtab S.et al. (ed), (2000), Textbook of Human Nutrition, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi 5. Garrow, J.S., W.P.T James and A. Ralph, (2000), Human Nutrition and Dietetics, Churchill living stone, Edinburgh 6. Groff, JL and Gropper S.S., (2000), Advanced Nutrition and Human Metabolism 3rd edition, wadsworth thomsun Learning, Australia.

761

(Autonomous) CHENNAI - 600004.

DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE

SYLLABUS FOR MASTER OF COMPUTER SCIENCE

(M.Sc., 2 YEARS COURSE - SEMESTER SYSTEM)

2018 - 2019 Onwards

762

REGULATIONS AND SYLLABI 2018 - 2019

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (A), CHENNAI – 600 004.

DEGREE OF MASTER OF COMPUTER SCIENCE

SEMESTER SYSTEM WITH CREDITS REGULATIONS

(Effective from the academic year 2018 - 2019 onwards)

1. OBJECTIVES OF THE MASTER’S PROGRAMME

M.Sc Computer Science is a two year full-time programme approved by University of Madras, that follows a semester pattern of four semesters – three semesters of course work and one semester of project work. The objective of this programme is to provide students with in-depth knowledge in the key areas of computer science and to impart knowledge and practice in emerging, cutting edge technologies in IT. The programme will enable the students to develop software solutions to real world enterprises through IT with international standards and facilitate them to be outstanding professionals.

Program Objectives:

• Broad knowledge in core areas of computer science, current and emerging technologies in IT. • Higher degree of technical skills in problem solving and application development. • Analytical and managerial skills to enhance employment potential. • A holistic and professional grooming with strong emphasis on values and ethics.

Program Outcomes:

• Analyze and develop computer programs in the areas related to algorithms, system software, compiler design, web design, mobile computing and networking for efficient design of computer based system of varying complexity • Ability to analyze a problem, identify and define the computing requirements appropriate to its solution. • Ability to apply design and development principles in the construction of software systems.

763

2. COMPONENTS OF THE MASTER DEGREE PROGRAMME

The Master Degree programme has various components. They are major, electives, non- major electives, soft skill, internship training and a real time project.

3. ELIGIBILITY CRITERIA

Candidates with Bachelor’s Degree in Computer Science or Computer Technology or BCA degree of University of Madras or any other degree accepted as equivalent thereto by the syndicate.

764

4. COURSE OF STUDY AND SCHEME OF EXAMINATION CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM

Course Max. Marks

s Components Subject Paper Title Code

Hrs C.I.A Exam

Extern Total Credit InstHrs al

FIRST YEAR

FIRST SEMESTER

Python Programming I 5 4 3 25 75 100

Advanced Java II Programming 5 4 3 25 75 100

III Systems Programming 5 4 3 25 75 100 Practical – I Python IV 4 2 3 25 75 100 Programming Lab Practical – II – Advanced V 5 2 3 25 75 100 Java Programming Lab Elective- I VI 3 3 3 25 75 100

Elective- II VII 3 3 3 25 75 100

Soft Skill-I VIII - 2 - 25 75 100

SECOND SEMESTER

Max. Marks

Course Subject Paper Title Hrs

Components Code Inst Extern

Exam

Hours Credits C.I.A al Total Digital Image Processing IX 5 4 3 25 75 100

Artificial Neural Networks X and Fuzzy Systems 5 4 3 25 75 100

Mobile Computing XI 5 4 3 25 75 100

Practical – III – Digital Image XII 5 2 3 25 75 100 Processing Lab Elective- III XIII 3 3 3 25 75 100

XIV Elective- IV 3 3 3 25 75 100

765

EDC- I XV 4 3 3 25 75 100

Soft Skill- II XVI - 2 - 25 75 100

SECOND YEAR

THIRD SEMESTER

Max. Marks

s

Course Subject Paper Title .

Components Code Hrs Inst

Exam Extern

Hours Credit C.I.A al Total Data Mining and XVII Warehousing 5 4 3 25 75 100

Web Programming with PHP XVIII 5 4 3 25 75 100 and MySQL

XIX Theory of Computation 5 4 3 25 75 100 Practical – IV – “ R ” XX 4 2 3 25 75 100 Programming Lab Practical – V – Web XXI Programming with PHP and 4 2 3 25 75 100 MySQL Lab Elective- V XXII 3 3 3 25 75 100

EDC- II XXIII 4 3 3 25 75 100

Soft Skill- III - XXIV 2 - 25 75 100

Internship Training * XXV - 2 - - - 100

FOURTH SEMESTER

Max. Marks

Course Subject s Hrs

Paper Title

Components Code .

Exam Hours

Extern Total Credit Inst C.I.A al Project and Viva-Voce XXVI - 14 - 25 75 100

Soft Skill- IV - XXVII 2 - 25 75 100

766

*Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the second semester and the result will be evaluated by two examiners within the department. The marks will be included in the third semester statement of marks.

Candidates can opt anyone Elective paper from the given list.

ELECTIVE – I

1. Bio - Inspired Computing 2. Distributed Operating Systems 3. Human Computer Interaction

ELECTIVE – II

1. Object Oriented Analysis and Design 2. Advanced Computer Architecture 3. Principles of Compiler Design

ELECTIVE – III

1. Embedded System 2. Virtual Reality 3. Cloud Computing

ELECTIVE – IV

1. Cryptography and Image Steganography 2. Software Quality and Testing 3. Genetic Algorithms and Applications

ELECTIVE – V

1. Internet of Things 2. Geographical Information System 3. Advanced Database Management Systems

767

EXTRA DISCIPLINARY COURSE – I 1. Internet Concepts 2. Cyber Security 3. Multimedia Systems

EXTRA DISCIPLINARY COURSE – II

1. E- Commerce 2. Advanced Web Design 3. Management Information System

The following procedure to be followed for internal marks.

Theory Papers Internal Marks : 25

Best 2 tests out of 3 5 Marks Model Exam 10 Marks Seminar 5 Marks Assignment 5 Marks

Practical Papers Internal Marks: 25

Practical best 2 tests out of 3 15 Marks Record 10 Marks

Project Total Marks: 100

Best 2 out of 3 Presentations (Internal Marks) 25 Marks

768

Viva-voce (External Marks) 15 Marks Project Report 60 Marks

5. REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCEEDING TO SUBSEQUENT SEMESTERS

a. Candidates shall register their names for the First semester examinations after the admission in the PG courses. b. Candidates shall be permitted to proceed from the First Semester up to the Final Semester irrespective of their failure in any of their Semester Examinations subject to the condition that the Candidates should register for all the arrear Subjects for earlier Semesters along with current (subject) Semester subjects. c. Candidates shall be eligible to proceed to the subsequent semester, only if they earn, sufficient attendance as prescribed therefore by the Syndicate from time to time.

Provided in case of the candidate earning less than 50% of attendance in any of the semester due to any extraordinary circumstance such as Medical grounds, such candidates who shall produce Medical Certificate issued by the Authorized Medical Attendant (AMA), duly certified by the Principal of the College, shall be permitted to proceed to the next Semester and to complete the course of study. Such candidate shall have to repeat the missed semester by rejoining after completion of Final Semester of the course, after paying the fee for the break of study as prescribed by the University from time to time.

6. PASSING MINIMUM

a. There shall be no passing minimum for internal. b. For external examination, passing minimum shall be of 50% of the maximum marks prescribed for the paper. c. In the aggregate (External + Internal) the passing minimum shall be of 50% for each Paper/Practical/Project and Viva-Voce. d. Grading shall be based on overall marks obtained (External + Internal).

7. CLASSIFICATION OF SUCCESSFUL CANDIDATES

769

Candidates who secure not less than 60% of aggregate marks (External + Internal) in the whole Examination shall be declared to have passed the examinations with First Class. All other successful Candidate shall be declared to have passed in Second Class.

Candidates who obtain 75% of marks in the aggregate (External + Internal) shall be deemed to have passed the examinations in the First Class with Distinction, provided they pass all the examinations (Theory papers, Practical’s, Project and Viva-voce) prescribed for the first appearance.

8. GRADING SYSTEM

As per the existing TANSCHE Grading followed by all Post - Graduate degree Courses under CBSE (with effect from 2015-2016).

a. Passing Minimum is 50% of the ESE and also 50% of the maximum of that paper/course.

b. Minimum Credits to be earned Part A (80 Credits): Core, Elective, and Extra Disciplinary Courses. Part B (10 Credits): Soft Skills, Internship. c. Marks and Grades

The following table gives the marks, Grade Points, Letter Grades and classifications to indicate the performance of the candidate. Conversion of marks to Grade Points and Letter Grades (performance in a paper / courses).

RANGE OF GRADE POINTS LETTER DESCRIPTION MARKS GRADE 90-100 9.0-10.0 O Outstanding 80-89 8.0-8.9 D+ Excellent 75-79 7.5-7.9 D Distinction 70-74 7.0-7.4 A+ Very Good

770

60-69 6.0-6.9 A Good 50-59 5.0-5.9 B Average 00-49 0.0 U Re-appear ABSENT 0.0 AAA ABSENT

Ci = Credits earned for course i in any semester.

Gi = Grade Point obtained for course i in any Semester.

n = refers to the semester in which such courses were credited.

For a Semester

GRADE POINT AVERAGE [ GPA ] = Σ i Ci Gi / Σ i Ci

Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the courses GPA= ------Sum of the credits of the courses in a semester

For the entire programme

CUMULATIVE GRADE POINT AVERAGE [ CGPA ] == Σ n Σ i Cni Gni / Σ n Σ i Cni

Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the entire programme GPA = ------Sum of the credits of the courses of the entire programme

CGPA GRADE CLASSIFICATION OF FINAL RESULT

771

9.5 - 10.0 O+ First Class-Exemplary* 9.0 and above but below O 9.5 8.5 and above but below D++ 9.0 8. 0 and above but D+ First Class with below 8.5 Distinction* 7.5 and above but below 8.0 D

7.0 and above but below A++ 7.5 6.5 and above but below A+ 7.0 First Class 6.0 and above but below 6.5 A

5.5 and above but below B+ 6.0 Second Class 5.0 and above but below B 5.5 0.0 and above but below U Re-appear 5.0

*The Candidates who have passed in the first appearance and within the prescribed semester of the PG Programme ( Core, Elective, and Extra Disciplinary courses alone) are eligible.

9. RANKING

Candidates who pass all the examinations prescribed for the course in the first appearance itself alone are eligible for Ranking/Distinction.

Provided in the case of candidates who pass all the examinations prescribed for the course with a break in the first appearance due to the reasons as furnished in the Regulations under “Requirement for Proceeding to subsequent Semester” are only eligible for classification.

772

10. PATTERN OF QUESTION PAPER

CORE and ELECTIVE THEORY PAPER

INTENDED LEARNING SKILLS Maximum : 75 Marks Passing Minimum : 38 Marks Duration : 3 Hrs

Memory Recall/ Example / Counter Part – A ( 5 X 2 = 10 marks) Example / Knowledge about the concepts / Definitions Answer all questions

(Each question carries 2 marks, taken from each unit)

(Q.No:1 to Q. No: 5)

Understanding / Descriptions Part – B ( 5 X 4 = 20 Marks)

Answer all questions

(Each question carries 4 marks, one set of question with either / or type from each unit)

(Q. No: 6 to Q. No: 10)

Application / Analysis/ Synthesis/ Part – C ( 3 X15 = 45 marks) Evaluation Answer any three questions

(Each question carries 15 marks, 3 questions out of 5. One question from each unit)

(Q. No: 11 to Q.No:15)

Questions should be uniformly distributed over all the units of the syllabus.

773

11. APPEARANCE FOR IMPROVEMENT

Candidate who have undergone the course of study prior to the academic year 2018 - 2019 will be permitted to appear for the examinations under those Regulations for a period of three years i.e., up to and inclusive of April / May 2021 Examinations. Thereafter, they will be permitted to appear for the examination only under the Regulations then in force.

CREDITS AWARDED

CREDITS x No. Of SUBJECT CREDITS PAPERS

Core Theory 4 x 9 36

Practical 2 x 5 10

Elective 3 x 5 15

Soft skill 2 x 4 8

3 x 2 6 EDC

774

Internship 2 x 1 2

Project 14 x 1 14

Total Credits for M.Sc. Computer Science Course = 91 Credits

775

PAPER I – PYTHON PROGRAMMING

Code No : Credits: 4

Semester : I

Objectives : To enable the students to learn the basic functions, principles and concepts of Python Programming.

Outcome : On completion of the course the student can

• Analyse the various constructs in Python. • Write programs in Python language.

Introduction: Getting started with Python –Elementary programming: Writing Unit – I a simple Program –Reading Input from the Console- Identifiers –Variables, Assignment and Expressions – Simultaneous Assignments –Named Constants –Numeric Data Types and operators –Evaluating Expressions and operator precedence –Type conversions and Rounding.

Functions, Strings and objects : Common Python functions –Strings and Unit – II Characters –Introduction to Objects and strings –Selections: Boolean Types ,values and Expressions – If statements –Two way if-else statements – Nested If and Multi-way if-elif-else statements- Logical operators –conditional expressions

Loops: while loop – for loop –nested loop – Minimizing numerical errors – Unit – III Functions: Defining function –calling function – functions with/without return values Objects and Classes : Defining classes for objects – Immutable objects vs. Mutable objects –Hiding data fields –class abstraction and encapsulation

Lists: List basics – copying lists – passing Lists to Functions –Returning a Unit – IV List from a function- Inheritance and polymorphism: Super classes and sub classes – overriding methods –object class- polymorphism and dynamic binding.

Unit – V Files and Exception Handling: Text input and output – File Dialogs- Exception Handling.

TEXT BOOK

776

1. Y.Daniel Liang, “Introduction to Programming using Python”, PHI Publications 2013.

1. David Beazley,Brian K Jones “Python CookBook”, O’Reily 2013 REFERENCE 2. Michael Dawson, “Python programming for the absolute beginners”, BOOKS Cengage Learning 2010.

PAPER II – ADVANCED JAVA PROGRAMMING

Code No : Credits: 4

Semester : I

Objectives :

To learn Advanced Java programming concepts like JDBC, to develop network programs in Java, to understand concepts needed for distributed and multi-tier applications and to understand issues in enterprise application development.

Outcome : On completion of the course the student can

• Develop Client/Server applications using Servlets • Develop distributed applications using RMI • Develop component-based Java software using JavaBeans.

Servlets : Introduction - servlets and dynamic web pages - life cycle of a Unit – I servlet - constituents of javax.servlet Package – Retrieving the values of parameters - javax.servlet.http package - creating cookies Session tracking – JDBC.

JSP : Tags –variables and objects-methods-control statements –loops- Unit – II Request string-user sessions- cookies-session objects.

Unit – III Java Beans-advantages of Java beans-JAR file-Introspection-Bound properties - BeanInfo interface-Constrained properties-Persistence- Customizers-Java Bean API. RMI- Introduction- remote interface- java.rmi.Server package- naming class- RMI Security Manager class- RMI Exceptions. Unit – IV EJB – container- EJB classes- interfaces- deployment descriptor-session bean-entity bean-message driven bean.

.NET Web Services-Programming Web based application development on .NET with web forms and controls –Programming web services

777

Unit – V

1. Herbert Schildt, “The Complete Reference – JAVA 2” , TMH Fifth Edition, 2006 ( UNIT III). TEXT BOOKS 2. C.Muthu, “Programming with JAVA”, Vijay Nicole Imprints private Limited,Second Edition, 2010 ( UNIT I ,IV) 3. Herbert Schildt, “The Complete Reference” – J2EE TMH, Fifth Edition, 2002( UNIT II). 4.David Chappell, Understanding .Net, Pearson education 2002

1. Bryan Basham, Kathy Sierra, Bert Bates, “Head First Servlets and JSP”, REFERENCE O’Reilly Media, 2nd Edition,2008. BOOKS 2. Kathy Sierra, Bert Bates, “Head First EJB”, O’Reilly Media, 2003.

PAPER III – SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING

Code No : Credits: 4

Semester : I

Objectives :

To understand the relationship between system software and machine architecture. To learn the design of assemblers, macro processors, linkers and loaders.

Outcome : On completion of the course the student can

• Identify different addressing modes • Analyze Assemblers ,loaders, linkers and Macros • Evaluate various System Software tools

INTRODUCTION : System software and machine architecture – The Simplified Instructional Computer (SIC) - Machine architecture - Data and Unit – I instruction formats - addressing modes - instruction sets - I/O and programming.

Assemblers: Basic assembler functions - A simple SIC assembler – Assembler algorithm and data structures - Machine dependent assembler features - Instruction formats and addressing modes – Program relocation - Unit – II Machine independent assembler features - Literals – Symbol-defining statements – Expressions - One pass assemblers and Multi pass assemblers.

Loaders and Linkers: Basic loader functions - Design of an Absolute Loader – A Simple Bootstrap Loader - Machine dependent loader features - Unit – III Relocation – Program Linking – Algorithm and Data Structures for Linking Loader - Machine-independent loader features - Automatic Library Search –

778

Loader Options - Loader design options - Linkage Editors – Dynamic Linking – Bootstrap Loaders.

Macroprocessors: Basic macro processor functions - Macro Definition and Expansion – Macro Processor Algorithm and data structures - Machine- independent macro processor features - Concatenation of Macro Parameters Unit – IV – Generation of Unique Labels – Conditional Macro Expansion – Keyword Macro Parameters-Macros within Macro.

System Software Tools: Text editors - Overview of the Editing Process - User Interface – Editor Structure. - Interactive debugging systems - Unit – V Debugging functions and capabilities – Relationship with other parts of the system – User-Interface Criteria.

TEXT BOOKS 1. Leland L. Beck, “System Software – An Introduction to Systems Programming”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2006.

2. John J. Donovan “Systems Programming”, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition, 2000

1. D. M. Dhamdhere, “Systems Programming and Operating Systems”, Second REFERENC Revised Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2000. E BOOKS 2. John R. Levine, “Linkers and Loaders” – Harcourt India Pvt. Ltd., Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2000.

PAPER IV – PRACTICAL I – PYTHON PROGRAMMING LAB

Code No : Credits: 2

Semester : I

OBJECTIVES:

To develop Python programs using control statements and loops, functions, data structures and file manipulations.

Outcome : On completion of the course the student can

• Critically analyze a problem, identify, formulate and solve problems in the area of python.

Write a program that asks the user to enter a series of positive numbers (The user should enter a negative number to signal the end of the series) 1. and the program should display the numbers in order and their sum.

2. Write a program to find the product of two matrices.

779

Write recursive and non-recursive functions for the following:

a. To find GCD of two integers.

b. To find the factorial of positive integer 3. c. To print Fibonacci Sequence up to given number n.

Write a program that writes a series of random numbers to a file from 1 to 4. n and display.

5. Write a program to reverse a string word by word.

Write a program to create file, write the content and display the contents of the file with each line preceded with a line number (start with 1) followed 6. by a colon.

Write a program that opens a specified text file and then displays a list of 7. all the unique words found in the file. (Store each word as an element of a set.)

Write a program to implement the Inheritance and Dynamic 8. Polymorphism.

Write a GUI program that displays your details when a button is clicked. 9.

Write a GUI program that converts Celsius temperatures to Fahrenheit 10. temperatures.

PAPER V – PRACTICAL II – ADVANCED JAVA PROGRAMMING LAB

Code No : Credits: 2

Semester : I

OBJECTIVES:

To learn different Java Components for developing Applications and Web Services

Outcome : On completion of the course the student can

• Implement Java Programs using JDBC

780

• Implement Java Program using Servlets, RMI • Develop application using Java Bean • Analyze the Web services Application

1. Performing Java Database Connectivity

2. HTML to Servlet Applications

3. Applet to Servlet Communication

4. Designing online applications with JSP

5. Implementing RMI

Working with Enterprise JavaBeans 6.

Working with Web Services 7.

PAPER VI – DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

Code No : Credits: 4

Semester : II

Objectives :

781

To learn and understand the fundamentals of digital image processing and various transformations, image enhancement techniques and image compression algorithms.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Apply the knowledge of conversion of analog image into digital form using the techniques of sampling and quantization. • Analyze and implement image processing algorithms. • Analyze the various applications of image processing in industry, medicine and defense.

Introduction: Digital Image Processing- Examples of Fields that Use Digital Unit - I Image Processing – Fundamental Steps in Digital Image Processing – Components of an Image processing System - Digital Image Fundamentals:

Elements of Visual Perception – Light and Electro Magnetic Spectrum – Image sensing and Acquisition – Image Sampling and Quantization – Some Basic Relationships between Pixels.

Data Structures for Image Analysis: Level of Image Data Representation – Unit - II Traditional Image Data Structures – Hierarchical Data structures. Image Pre- processing: Pixel Brightness Transformations - Geometric transformations – Local pre-processing: Image smoothing - Edge Detectors – Image Restoration.

Segmentation : Thresholding – Edge Based Segmentation: Edge Image Unit - III Thresholding - Border tracing - Region Based Segmentation – Matching. Shape Representation and Description: Region Identification – Contour

Based Shape Representation and Description - Chain codes - Simple Geometric Border Representation - Region Based Shape Representation and Description - Simple Scalar Region Descriptors.

Unit - IV Mathematical Morphology: Basic Morphological concepts – Binary Dilation and Erosion – Skeletons and Object Marking: Homotopic Transformations –

Skeleton, Maximal ball – Thinning, Thickening and homotopic skeleton – Morphological Segmentation and Watersheds.

Unit - V Image Compression: Fundamentals – Coding Redundancy – Spatial and Temporal Redundancy – Ire-relevant Information. Some Basic Compression

Methods: Huffman Coding – Arithmetic Coding – LZW Coding – Run Length Coding. 1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, TEXT BOOKS Prentice Hall, Third Edition, 2008. 2. Sonka, Hlavac, Boyle, “Digital Image Processing and Computer Vision”, Cengage Learning, 2011. REFERENCE 1. Anil.K.Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Prentice-Hall, BOOKS 1989. 2. Chanda and Majumdar, “Digital Image Processing and Analysis”, Prentice Hall, 3rd Edition.

782

PAPER VII – ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY SYSTEMS

Code No : Credits : 4

Semester : II

Objectives :

To enable the students to understand the concepts of Artificial Neural Networks, to learn the models of ANN and to understand the techniques of soft computing in terms of its tolerance and uncertainty.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Analyze basic neural network architecture • Apply Neural network models algorithms • Analyze training, verification and validation of neural network models • Apply Fuzzy Logic

Introduction to Neural Networks: Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks- Comparisons between Artificial and Biological Neural Networks- Unit-I Basic Building Blocks of ANN- ANN Terminologies. Fundamental Models of ANN:- McCulloch- Pitts Neuron Model-Learning rules – Hebb Net.

Supervised Learning Networks: Single layer Perceptron- Multilayer Perceptron model. Unit- II Unsupervised Learning Networks: Kohonen Self Organizing Feature Maps (SOM)- Learning Vector Quantization(LVQ), Max Net, Mexican Hat, Hamming Net- Counter Propagation Network- Full counter Propagation Network- Forward only Counter Propagation Network.

Unit- III Memory Models: Algorithm for Pattern Association-Hetero Associative Memory Neural Networks-Auto Associative Memory Neural Networks- Bidirectional Associative Memory.

Feedback Networks: Discrete Hopfield Net, Continuous Hopfield Net, Relationship between BAM and Hopfield Nets. Unit- IV Feed Forward networks - Back Propagation network (BPN) - Radial basis function network (RBFN).

Fuzzy Logic: Introduction- Fuzzy versus Crisp, Crisp Sets, Fuzzy Sets- Crisp Relations – Fuzzy Relations- Zadeh’s Extension Principle- Fuzzy Unit- V Logic and Interference:- Crisp Logic- Predicate Logic- Fuzzy Logic- Fuzzy Rule Based System- Defuzzification –Applications.

1. S.N.Sivanandam, S. Sumathi, S.N.Deepa, “An Introduction to Neural Networks using MATLAB”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, 2010 TEXT BOOKS 2. S.Rajasekaran, G.A.Vijayalakshmi. Pai, “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Systems and Evolutionary Algorithms”, Prentice Hall India, Second Edition 2017.

783

1.S.N.Sivanandam, S.Sumathi, S.N.Deepa, “Introduction to Fuzzy Logic using MATLAB”, TGH, 2007. REFFERENCE 2. Anderson, “An Introduction to Neural Network”, PHI, New Delhi, 2001 3. J.S.R.Jang, C.T.Sun, E.Mizutani, “Neuro-Fuzzy and Soft Computing”, BOOKS Prentice Hall India 2004.

PAPER VIII – MOBILE COMPUTING Code No : Credits: 4

Semester : II

Objectives :

The objective of this paper is to enable students to have an exposure on mobile computing.

Outcome: On completion of the course the students can

• analyze the various concepts of mobile computing • familiarize with network protocol stack • demonstrate the basics of mobile telecommunication and Ad-Hoc networks.

Mobile Communication – Mobile Computing – Mobile Computing Architecture – Frequency – Signals – Signal Propagation – Multiplexing – Unit – I Modulation – Spread Spectrum – SDMA – FDMA – TDMA – CDMA – OFDM.

Unit – II GSM – SMS – GPRS - DECT – TETRA – UMTS – IMT-2000 - 4G

IEEE 802.11 – HIPERLAN – Bluetooth - WAP – IrDA – ZigBee – RFID – Unit – III Adaptation software for Mobile Computing – power aware mobile computing – context aware mobile computing – data synchronization Mobile IP : Network Layer – Mobile Transport Layer – Mobile Agent – Unit – IV Service Discovery – Mobile File System – Mobile OS : Windows CE – Android – Symbion - Mobile VoIP

ADHOC Wireless Network : Introduction – Issues in wireless Ad Hoc Wireless Network – Issues in designing MAC protocol – Classification of MAC protocols – Issues in Designing a Routing protocol for Ad Hoc - Unit – V Classification of Routing protocols – Issues in Designing Transport Layer Protocol for Ad Hoc - Sensor Networks : Architecture and Design – Medium Access Control – Routing – Transport Layer – Energy model.

TEXT BOOKS 1. Raj Kamal, “ Mobile Computing”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2007

784

2. Jochen Schiller, “ Mobile Communications”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009

3. Asoke K Talukder, Roppa R Yavagal, “Mobile Computing” Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008

4. C.Siva Ram Murthy and B.S.Manoj, Ad Hoc Wireless Networks – Architectures and Protocols, Pearson Education, Second Edition.

1. Kauch Pahlavan, Prasanth Krishnamoorthy, “Principles of Wireless Networks”, Pearson Education,2009. REFERENCE 2. Uwe Hansmann, Lothar Merk, Martin S. Nickions, Thomas Stober, BOOKS “Principles of Mobile Computing”, Springer, 2nd Edition, 2004. 3. William Stallings, “Wireless Communications and Networks”, Pearson Education, 2005.

PAPER IX – PRACTICAL III – DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING LAB

Code No : Credits: 2

Semester : II

Objectives:

Understand the mathematical foundations for digital image representation, image transformation, image enhancement, image segmentation and image compression.

Outcomes: On completion of the course the students can

• implement programs using image processing algorithms. • gain hands-on experience on using any one of the open source software tools for processing digital images.

Digital Image Processing using Open Source Software Technology:

1. Image Enhancement Techniques

2. Histogram Equalization

3. Color Image Processing

785

4. Image Filtering

5. Edge Detection using Operators (Roberts, Perwitts and Sobels Operators)

6. Image Segmentation

7. Boundary Extraction using Morphology

8. Image Compression

PAPER X - DATA MINING AND WAREHOUSING Code No : Credits: 4

Semester : III

Objectives :

To inculcate the knowledge about Data Mining principles and techniques and to identify Business applications and trends of Data Mining.

Outcome : On completion of the course the student can

• Process raw data to make it suitable for various data mining algorithms. • Discover and measure interesting patterns from different kinds of databases.

786

• Categorize and carefully differentiate between situations for applying different data-mining techniques. • Evaluate the performance of different data-mining algorithms

Introduction: Data Mining definition – Kinds of data to be mined - Patterns to Unit – I be mined- Technologies used -Targeted Applications -Issues in Data Mining - Data: Data objects and attribute types - Basic statistical descriptions of data – Data visualization – Measuring data similarity and dissimilarity.

Data Preprocessing: Overview - Data cleaning - Data integration - Data Unit – II reduction - Data transformation and Discretization - Data Warehouse: Basic concepts – Modeling: Data cube and OLAP - Design and usage – Implementation - Data Generalization by Attribute–Oriented Induction.

Mining frequent patterns, Associations and Correlations: Basic concepts - Unit – III Frequent Itemset mining methods - Pattern Evaluation methods – Classification: Basic concepts - Decision tree induction - Bayes classification methods - Rule based classification - Model Evaluation and Selection - Techniques to improve Classification Accuracy.

Advanced classification methods: Bayesian Belief networks - Classification by Unit – IV Backpropagation - Support vector machines - Cluster analysis: Basic concepts and methods: Cluster analysis - Partitioning methods - Hierarchical methods – Density-based methods - Grid-based methods - Evaluation of clustering.

Outlier detection: Outliers and outlier analysis – Outlier detection methods – Statistical approaches – Proximity-based approaches – Clustering-based Unit – V approaches – Classification-based approaches – Mining contextual and collective outliers – Outlier detection in high dimensional data - Data mining trends and Research frontiers: Mining complex data types - Other methodologies of Data Mining - Data Mining applications - Data mining and society.

TEXT BOOK 1. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber and Jian Pei, “Data Mining Concepts and Techniques”, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 3rd Edition, 2012.

1. Ian H.Witten, Eibe Frank, Mark A.Hall, “Data Mining – Practical machine rd REFERENCE learning tools and techniques” Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2013, 3 edition. BOOKS 2. Rajan Chattamvelli, “Data Mining Algorithms” Narosa Publishing House 3. Margaret H. Dunham, S.Sridhar,“Data Mining – Introductory and Advanced Topics” Pearson Education, 2008

PAPER XI – WEB PROGRAMMING WITH PHP AND MySQL

787

Code No : Credits: 4

Semester : III

Objectives :

To understand the client/server architecture and able to develop a web application using PHP and MySQL .

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Apply a structured approach to identify needs and functionality of website • Develop a dynamic web page with the use of PHP and MySQL. • Analyze, identify and define the technology required to build and implement a website.

PHP Introduction: PHP Basics – Variables – Constants – Data Types – Unit – I Operators – Introduction to PHP Programming. Control Structures:

Conditional Statements – Conditional loops –Nested Control Statements.

Strings and Arrays: Working with String functions – Initializing Arrays – Unit – II Working with Arrays. Functions: Introduction to Functions – Passing Arguments to Functions – Returning values from functions – Nesting Functions. Objected Oriented Programming: Classes – Constructor – Destructor – Unit – III Overloading – Overriding. Cookies: Introduction – Implementing Cookies in

PHP. Handling Files: Working with Files. Reading data in web pages: Introduction – Handling data using controls – Unit – IV Text Fields – Text Areas – Check Boxes – Radio Buttons – List Boxes – Password Controls – Hidden Controls –Image Maps – File Uploads-Handling Buttons. Unit – V MySQL Database: Insert – Update – Delete – Join – Group by - Aggregate Functions - Formats – Case Studies. 1.Steven Holzner “The PHP Complete Reference 5.2”, Tata McGraw Hill Edition,2014 TEXT BOOK 2. Dr.K.Meena . Dr.R.Sivakumar , A.B. Karthick Anand Babu “Web

Programming using PHP and MySQL “, Himalaya Publishing House,2016

REFERENCE 1. Ashish Wilfred,Meeta Gupta anKarthik Bhatnagar with NIIT “ PHP BOOKS Professional Projects”, PHI Publications. 2. Larry Ullman” PHP and MySQL for Dynamic Web Sites” Fourth Edition . 2014.

788

PAPER XII – THEORY OF COMPUTATION Code No : Credits: 4

Semester : III

Objectives :

To understand the mathematical foundations of computation including automata theory, the theory of formal languages and grammars, the notions of algorithm, decidability, complexity, and computability.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Describe and transform regular expressions and grammars. • Analyze push-down automata. • Identify the design and types of Turing machine • Evaluate decidable and undecidable problems and languages.

Basics: Sets – Relations and Functions – Graphs and Trees – Strings and Languages-Introduction to Grammar. DFA and NFA: DFA-NFA- equivalence Unit – I of NFA and DFA.

Regular Expression: Regular Languages – Regular Expression – Building Regular Expressions – Language defined by Regular Expressions – Regular Unit – II Expressions to NFA – NFA to Regular Expressions – Finite Automata with output: Definition- Mealy machine –Moore machine.

Context Free Grammars: Introduction – Derivation trees – Parsing and Ambiguity – Normal Forms: CNF- GNF. Push Down Automata: Definitions Unit – III – Relationship between PDA and Context Free Language.

Turing Machines: Turing Machine – Definition – Transition function- Instantaneous Description and moves – Programming a Turing machine – Unit – IV Turing machine as Acceptors – How to recognize a language –Turing machine as Transducer –Modification of TM – N-Track TM- Semi-infinite tape / Offline / Multitape / ND Turing Machines.

Undecidability: Halting Problem – Implications of Halting problem. Chomsky Unit – V Hierarchy: Context Sensitive Grammars and Languages- Linear Bounded Automata – Relationship of other Grammars – The Chomsky Hierarchy –

789

Extending the Chomsky Hierarchy – Unrestricted Grammar – Random - Access Machine. Complexity theory-Order statistics-Polynomial time algorithm-Non deterministic polynomial time algorithms-Integer bin packing- Boolean satisfiability

1. Xavier, S P, Eugene, ”Theory of Automata, Formal Languages and TEXT Computation” Published by New Age International, New Delhi, 2004 BOOKS 2. KLP Mishra “Theory of Computer Science: Automata, Languages and Computation” PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd Third Edition,2006.

1. Michael Sipser , “Introduction to the Theory of Computation” Published by Cengage Learning Publishers, 3 rd edition, 2012. REFERENCE BOOKS 2. Peter Linz , “An Introduction to Formal Languages and Automata” Published by, Jones and Bartlett Learning 5th Edition,2011.

PAPER XIII – PRACTICAL IV – “R” PROGRAMMING LAB

Code No : Credits: 2

Semester : III

OBJECTIVES:

To enable students to learn about how

• To read and write simple R programs.

• To develop R programs using numerical and statistical operations.

•To implement the data preprocessing tasks.

• To implement classification and clustering techniques

Outcome : On completion of the course the student can write R programs.

• To perform simple operations. • To implement numerical and statistical operations. • To perform preprocessing task in data mining. • To implement classification and clustering techniques.

Develop R script for the following

To get the input from user and perform numerical operations (MAX, MIN, AVG, 1. SUM, SQRT, ROUND).

2. To perform data import/export (.CSV, .XLS, .TXT) operations using data frames.

790

To get the input matrix from user and perform matrix addition, subtraction, 3. multiplication, inverse , transpose and division operations using vector concept.

4. To perform statistical operations (Mean, Median, Mode and Standard deviation). To perform data pre-processing operations – missing data and min-max 5. normalization.

6. To perform dimensionality reduction operation using PCA.

7. To perform simple Linear Regression and Multi Linear Regression.

8. To perform K-Means clustering operation and visualize it.

9. To diagnose any disease using KNN classification.

PAPER XIV – PRACTICAL V – Web Programming with PHP and MySQL Lab

Code No : Credits: 2

Semester : III

Objectives:

To design static, dynamic and interactive web pages and web applications.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Design, develop and host a user friendly website. • Gain the skills for developing web applications.

1. Designing the Text Editor like Notepad

2. Library management System

791

3. Student Data Processing

4. Employee Payroll Processing

5. Inventory Control System

6. Bank Data Processing

ELECTIVE – I

BIO INSPIRED COMPUTING Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : I

Objectives :

To introduce students about specific computational applications inspired by nature, such as artificial neural networks, simulated annealing, cellular automata, ant colony optimization, artificial immune systems, particle swarm optimization, and genetic algorithms and other evolutionary computation system.

Outcomes: On completion of the course the students can

• Gain knowledge in Artificial Evolution, Genetic Operators, Cellular Systems and Immune system.

792

• Analyze and interpret the technology required to build a Behavioral Systems and Collective Systems .

Evolutionary Systems: Pillars of Evolutionary Theory- Artificial Evolution Unit – I - Genetic Representations - Genetic Operators – Types of Evolutionary Algorithms.

Cellular Systems: The Basic Ingredients – Cellular Automata – Other Unit – II Cellular Automata – Cellular Neural Network – Cellular Systems with Multiple Cellular Spaces – Neural Systems: Biological Nervous System – Artificial Neural Networks – Architecture.

Immune Systems: Working of Biological Immune Systems - The Unit – III Constituents of Biological Immune Systems - Lessons for Artificial Immune Systems - Algorithms and Applications –Negative Selection Algorithm – Clonal Selection Algorithm – Immunotronics.

Behavioral Systems: Behavior in Cognitive Science - Behavior in – Behavior based robotics - Navigation of a mobile Robot – an Unit – IV Intelligent Wheel Chair.

Collective Systems: Biological Self-Organization - Particle Swarm Optimization - Ant Colony Optimization - Swarm Robotics – Co-evolutionary Unit – V Dynamics: Biological Models.

TEXT BOOK 1.Dario Floreano, Claudio Mattiussi, “Bio-Inspired Artificial Intelligence: Theories, Methods and Technologies”, MIT Press, 2008.

1.Leandro Nunes De Castro, Fernando Jose Von Zuben, “Recent Developments in Biologically Inspired Computing”, Idea Group Publishing, REFERENCE 2005. 2. Leandro Nunes De Castro , “Fundamentals of Natural Computing: Basic BOOKS concepts, Algorithms and Applications”, Chapman and Hall/ CRC Computer and Information Science Series, 2006.

793

ELECTIVE – I

DISTRIBUTED OPERATING SYSTEMS

Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : I

Objectives :

This paper introduces the concepts of distributed systems, communications, synchronization and processors in distributed systems, and distributed file system.

Outcome :On completion of the course the student can

• Demonstrate the various hardware and software concepts of distributed operating systems, various design issues like , flexilibity etc., and communication and synchronization in distributed operating systems. • Analyse and interpret the scheduling in distributed operating systems, fault tolerance, real-time distributed systems, and designing of distributed file systems. • Analyse the concept of design and implementation of distributed file systems

Unit – I Introduction: Distributed system – Advantages and Disadvantages – Hardware concepts – Software concepts - Design Issues.

Unit – II Communications in distributed systems: Layered protocols – Asynchronous Transfer Mode Networks - The client–server model – Remote Procedure Call – Group communication.

Unit – III Synchronization in distributed systems: Clock synchronization – Mutual exclusion – Election algorithms – Atomic transactions – Deadlocks in distributed system.

Processes and processors in Distributed Systems:Threads – Processor Unit – IV allocation – Scheduling in Distributed Systems – Fault tolerance – Real-time distributed systems.

Unit – V Distributed File systems: Distributed file system design – distributed file system implementation - Trends in distributed file systems.

1. Andrew. S. Tanenbaum, “Distributed Operating Systems” Pearson TEXT BOOK Education 1. Andrew. S. Tanenbaum, “Modern Operating Systems”, Prentice-Hall of REFERENCE India BOOKS 2. James Martin,“Computer Networks and Distributed Processing”, Software

Techniques and Architectures”, Pearson Education.

794

ELECTIVE – I

HUMAN COMPUTER INTERACTION Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : I

Objectives :

To learn the foundations of Human - Computer Interaction ,spoken Dialogue

System , Ontology Visualization Methods and Ambient Intelligence of Human - Computer

Interaction.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Analyze of human computer interaction system based on task analysis and dialogue design. • Analyze application areas of recommender System • Apply theories and concepts associated with effective work design to real-world applications.

Introduction: Cognitive Psychology and Computer Science – Capabilities of Human-Computer Interaction - Goals of Human-Computer Unit – I Interaction(HCI) – Roles of Human, Computer and Interaction in HCI – Basic User Interfaces- HCI Design Principles – Interface Levels in HCI.

Usability Engineering: Introduction - HCI and Usability Engineering – Usability Engineering Attributes - Process of Usability - Need for Prototyping. Modeling of Understanding Process: Introduction – Goals, Operators, Unit – II Methods and Selection Rules (GOMS) – Cognitive Complexity Theory (CCT), Adaptive Control of Thought - Relation (ACT-R) – State, Operator and Result (SOAR).

Spoken Dialogue System: Introduction – Factors Defining Dialogue System – General Architecture of a Spoken Dialogue System – Dialogue Unit – III Management (DM) Strategies. Recommender Systems: Introduction – HCI Study based Personalization – Personalization in Recommender Systems – Application Areas of Recommender Systems.

Advanced Visualization Methods: Ontology Definition – Ontology Visualization Methods – Space Dimensions of Ontology Visualization – Unit – IV Ontology Languages – Ontology Visualization Tools – Ontology Reasoning – Reasoner.

795

Ambient Intelligence: The New Dimension of Human - Computer Interaction: Introduction – Ambient Intelligence Definition – Context - aware Unit – V Systems and Human - Computer Interaction. A Case Study – Context-aware agents for developing AmI Applications.

1.K.Meena and R.Sivakumar “ Human Computer Interaction” , PHI Learning TEXT BOOK Pvt Ltd., Delhi,2015

1.Alan Dix,Janet Finlay, Gregory D. “Human - Computer Interaction” REFERENCE Pearson Education, 2004. BOOKS 2.John C.Carroll,”Human-Computer Interaction in the New Millennium”, Pearson Education,2002.

ELECTIVE – II

OBJECT ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

Code No :

Credits: 3

Semester : I

Objectives :

The objective is to learn basic Object Oriented Analysis and Design Skills through an elaborate case study, use UML design diagrams and apply the appropriate design Patterns.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Describe Object Oriented Analysis and Design concepts and apply them to solve problems • Prepare Object Oriented Analysis and Design documents for a given problem using Unified Modeling Language

Unit – I An overview of object oriented systems development – Object basics – Object Oriented systems development life cycle.

796

Unit – II Object-oriented methodologies – Unified modeling language-State and dynamic models-UML Class Diagrams – Use Case Diagrams- UML Dynamic Modeling.

Unit – III Object-Oriented analysis process: Identifying use cases – Object analysis classification – Identifying object relationships, attributes, and methods.

Unit – IV The object-oriented design process and design axioms – Designing classes – Access layer: Object storage and object interoperability.

Unit – V Software quality assurance – Quality Assurance Test – Testing Strategies – Impact of Object Orientation- Test Cases- Test Plan- Continuous System

usability and measuring user satisfaction-Usability Testing – User Satisfaction Test. TEXT BOOK 1. Ali Bahrami “Object Oriented Systems Development”, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition 2008 Eleventh Reprint 2012.

1. Grady Booch, “Object-Oriented Analysis and Design with Applications”, REFERENCE Second Edition, Pearson Education Asia Publication, 2001. BOOKS 2. A.A. Puntambekar, “Object Oriented Analysis and Design”, Technical Publications, 2012.

3. Deacon,” Object Oriented Analysis and Design”, Pearson Publication.

797

ELECTIVE – II

ADVANCED COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE

Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : I

Objectives :

This paper focuses on modern advancement in parallel computer architecture with emphasis on advanced instruction level parallelism and multiprocessor architecture.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Describe the operation of modern and high performance computers. • Compare the performance of different computer architectures.

Evolution of Computer systems – Parallelism in Uniprocessor Systems: Architecture, Mechanisms – Parallel Computer Structures: Pipeline, Array, Unit – I Multiprocessor.

Linear Pipeline processors: Asynchronous and Synchronous Models – Non- linear Pipeline Processors : Reservation and Latency Analysis – Collision- free scheduling – Instruction Pipeline Design : Instruction Execution Phases Unit – II – Mechanisms for Instruction Pipelining – Arithmetic Pipeline Design: Computer Arithmetic Principles – Static Arithmetic Pipelines – Multifunctional Arithmetic Pipelines - Superscalar Pipeline Design.

SIMD Array Processor – SIMD Interconnection Network: Static vs Dynamic Unit - III Network – Mesh connection Illiac Network- Tube interconnection Network. Associative Array Processing: Associative memory organization.

Multiprocessor System Interconnects : Hierarchical Bus System - Crossbar Switch and Multiport Memory - Multistage and Combining Networks – Cache Coherence and Synchronization Mechanisms : The Cache Coherence Unit - IV Problem – Snoopy Bus Protocols – Directory-Based Protocols – Hardware Synchronization Mechanisms – Message-Passing Mechanisms : Message- Routing Schemes – Deadlock and Virtual Channels – Flow Control Strategies – Multicast Routing Algorithms.

Multiprocessor Operating Systems – Interprocessor Communication Unit - V Mechanisms-Multiprocessor Scheduling Strategies.

1.Kai Hwang, Faye A.Briggs, “Computer Architecture And Parallel Processing,” McGraw-Hill, 1985. TEXT BOOKS 2. Kai Hwang, “Advanced Computer Architecture,” McGraw-Hill International Editions, 2001.

798

1.Grama, "An Introduction to Parallel Computing: Design and Analysis of Algorithms," 2nd Edition, Pearson, 2004.

REFERENCE 2. Gita Alaghband, Harry Frederick Jordan, "Fundamentals of Parallel BOOKS Processing," Prentice Hall, 2003.

3. Seyed H Roosta, "Parallel Processing and Parallel Algorithms: Theory and Computation," Springer Science and Business Media, 1999.

ELECTIVE – II

PRINCIPLES OF COMPILER DESIGN

Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : I

Objectives :

To introduce compiler concepts, different phases of compiler and compiler construction tools.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Describe the design of a compiler including its phases and components.

• Illustrate the translation of regular expression into parse tree using syntax analyzer

• Apply the optimization techniques for the generated code. Introduction to compilers: Compilers and Translators – Structure of a Compiler – Lexical Analysis – Syntax Analysis – Intermediate code generation – Optimization – Code generation – Book keeping – Error handling Unit – I – Compiler Writing tools – Lexical Analysis: The role of the Lexical analysis – A simple approach to the design of lexical analyzers – Regular

expressions – Implementation of a lexical analyzer.

799

Basic Parsing techniques: Derivations and parse trees – Parsers – shift reduce parsing – Operator Precedence Parsing – Top down parsing – Predictive parsing – Automatic construction of efficient parsers: LR parsers – Unit – II The Canonical collection of LR (0) items – Constructing SLR parsing tables – Constructing canonical LR parsing tables – Constructing LALR parsing tables – Using ambiguous grammars – An automatic parser generator – Implementation of LR parsing tables – Constructing LALR set of items.

Syntax- Directed translation: Syntax-directed translation schemes – Unit – III implementation of syntax-directed translators – Intermediate code – Postfix notation – Three address code, quadruples, and triples- Postfix translations

Symbol tables: The contents of a symbol table – Data structures for symbol Unit – IV tables – Representing scope information – Error detection and recovery: Errors – Lexical-Phase errors – Syntactic –phase errors – Semantic errors.

Introduction to Code optimization: The principal sources of optimization – Loop optimization – The DAG representation of basic blocks – Code Unit – V generation: Object programs – Problems in code generation – A simple code generator – Peephole optimization.

TEXT BOOK 1.Alferd V.Aho and Jeffrey D.Ullman, “Principles of Compiler Design”, Narosa Publishing House, 2002

1.Alferd V. Aho, Ravi Sethi, Jeffery D.Ullman, “Compilers”, Narosa Publishing REFERENCE House, 2002. BOOKS

2. Jean-Paul Tremblay and Paul G. Soreson, “Compilers Writing”, McGraw Hill International Editions, 2000.

ELECTIVE – III

EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

800

Code No : Credits:3

Semester : II

Objectives :

To obtain a broad understanding of the technologies and applications of embedded and real- time systems, understand the architecture of embedded and real-time systems; learn about operating systems of embedded and real-time systems and the various issues associated with them.

Out come: On completion of the course the student can

• Identify the basic concepts of embedded systems and the programming languages used for embedded systems. • Apply the knowledge of Embedded system in various programming languages to develop new applications.

Unit – I Introduction: Challenges for embedded systems- Fundamental Components of Embedded systems- Examples of Embedded systems- Languages for programming Embedded systems.

Memory Management: Memory Access procedure – Types of memory – Unit – II Memory management methods. Interrupts and ISR: Interrupts definition- polling Vs Interrupts- Types – Interrupt Latency – Re Entrancy – Interrupt Priority and programmable Interrupt controller – types of ISR

Real Time Theory: Scheduling Theory – Rate Monotonic Scheduling – Unit – III Utilization Bound Theorem. Real Time Operating System : Introduction – Desktop OS Vs RTOS – Need for BSP in Embedded system - Task Management –Race condition – Priority Inversion –Inter Task communication – Timers.

801

Unit – IV Requirements Engineering: Introduction – Requirements of an Embedded system – conceptualization of a product – Requirements Engineering Process-Common problems of Requirement Engineering.

Unit – V Architecture and Design of an Embedded system: Architectural Styles – Patterns – Architecture of Card Verification System – Practices followed in

design- Design Checklist.Validation and Debugging: Differences between Application and Embedded Testing – Validation Types and Methods.

TEXT BOOK 1. Sriram.V.Iyer, Pankaj Guptha, “Embedded Real Time Systems Programming”,Tata McGrawHill, 2004

1. Dr.KVKK Prasad , “Black Book 2008 Embedded / Real time System concepts, design and programming “ Dream tech ,computer as components REFERENCE 2. Steve Heath , “Embedded System Design” , Elsevier 2003. BOOKS 3. Frank Vahid and Tony Givargis,” Embedded system Design”, John Wiley

And Sons, Inc,2002. 4. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design”, Tata McGraw- Hill, 2003.

ELECTIVE – III

VIRTUAL REALITY

Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : II

Objectives :

To understand the concepts of virtual reality and its modeling, hardware, software and applications.

802

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Analyze Virtual Environments • Identify various Geometric modeling and animation of virtual Environment • Demonstrate Simulation of Physical and Human Factors Virtual Reality and Virtual Environments: Introduction – Computer graphics – Real-time computer graphics .3D Computer Graphics: Introduction – The virtual world space – Positioning the virtual observer – The perspective projection – Human vision – Stereo perspective projection – 3D Unit – I clipping – Colour theory – Simple 3D modeling – Illumination models – Reflection models – Shading algorithms – Radiosity – Hiddeny-surface removal – Realism – Stereographic image.

Geometric Modelling: Introduction – From 2D to 3D – 3D space curves – 3D boundary representation. Geometrical Transformations: Introduction – Unit – II Frames of reference – Modelling transformations – Instances – Picking – Flying – Scaling the VE – Collision detection.

A Generic VR System: Introduction – The virtual environment – The computer environment – VR technology – Modes of interaction – VR systems. Unit – III Animating the Virtual Environment: Introduction – The dynamics of numbers – The animation of objects – Shape and object in between – Free- from deformation – Particle systems.

Physical Simulation: Introduction – Objects falling in a gravitational field – Rotating wheels – Elastic collisions – Projectiles – Simple pendulums – Unit – IV Springs – Flight dynamics of an aircraft. Human Factors: Introduction – The eye – The ear – The somatic senses – Equilibrium.

Virtual Reality Hardware: Introduction – Sensor hardware – Head-coupled displays – Acoustic hardware – Integrated VR systems. Virtual Reality Unit – V Software: Introduction – Modelling virtual worlds – Physical simulation – VR toolkits. Virtual Reality Applications: Introduction – Engineering – Entertainment – Science – Training.

1.John Vince, “Virtual Reality Systems”, Pearson Education Ltd., ACM Press, TEXT BOOK 1995.

1. Newquist HP, Gerald Marks, “Virtual Reality/Book and 3-D Glasses”, REFERENCE Scholstic; Book and Access edition, 1995. BOOKS

803

2. Joey W. Hill, “Virtual Reality.”, Ellora‟s Cave Taboo, 2005.

804

ELECTIVE – III

CLOUD COMPUTING

Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : II

Objectives :

This gives an idea of cloud computing and its services available today which may led to the design and development of simple cloud service and focused on some key challenging issues around cloud computing.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Analyse the basic concepts of cloud computing and its various models. • Apply the knowledge of cloud computing in various fields and provide security to cloud.

Unit – I Introduction to Cloud computing: Definition –Cloud Deployment models – Private Vs Public clouds – Business drivers for Cloud Computing – Cloud Technologies –Technology Challenges.

Unit – II Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS): Storage as a service : Amazon storage service – Compute as a service: Amazon Elastic compute cloud – Hp cloud system matrix - Platform as a service (PaaS): Google App Engine – PaaS Storage Aspects – Software as a Service (SaaS): Social computing service – case study : Face book, Twitter, Picasa.

Unit – III

805

Cloud challenges: Scaling computation: Scale out Vs Scale up – Amdahl’s Law- Scaling storage – CAP theorem – Multi tenancy levels – Tenants and users – Authentication- Availability – Failure Detection – Application Recovery.

Unit – IV Designing cloud Security: Introduction – Cloud security requirements: Physical Security – Virtual Security- Risk Management: Concepts – Process- Security Design Patterns- Selecting a cloud service provider: Listing the Risks – security criteria for selecting a cloud service provider.

Cloud Management: Managing IaaS : Management of cloud system Unit – V Matrix-Managing PaaS : Management of windows Azure- Managing SaaS: Monitoring Force.com : NetCharts.

1. Dinkar Sitaram , Geetha Manjunath ,” Syngress Moving to the cloud” TEXT BOOK Elsevier 2012

2. Gautam Shroff, “Enterprise Cloud Computing Technology Architecture Applications”, Cambridge University Press; First Edition, 2010.

REFERENCE 1. Dimitris N. Chorafas, “Cloud Computing Strategies” CRC Press; First BOOKS Edition 2010. 2.Toby Velte, Anthony Velte, Robert Elsenpeter, “Cloud Computing, A

Practical Approach” McGraw-Hill Osborne Media; First Edition

ELECTIVE – IV

CRYPTOGRAPHY AND IMAGE STEGANOGRAPHY

Code No : Credits:3

Semester : II

Objectives :

806

To understand the concepts of Cryptography and various Cryptographic techniques based on private and public key algorithms and learn about the standards of security.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Analyze the difference between symmetric and public key cryptography. • Apply the standard algorithms used to provide confidentiality, integrity and authenticity. • Analyze the various key distribution and management schemes. • Apply the Steganographic techniques.

Unit – I Introduction -Security Goals – Attack –Services and Mechanism – Techniques. Traditional Symmetric-Key Ciphers: – Introduction – Substitution Ciphers – Transposition Ciphers – Stream and Block Ciphers .

Unit – II Introduction to Modern Symmetric – Key Ciphers –Modern Block Ciphers – Modern Stream Ciphers – Data Encryption Standard (DES): – Introduction – DES Structure – DES Analysis –Security of DES- Multiple DES.

Unit – III Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) :Introduction – Transformations – Key Expansion – The AES Ciphers – Examples – Analysis of AES – Asymmetric – key cryptography:- Introduction – RSA Cryptosystem.

Message Integrity, Authentication: Message Integrity and Message authentication: –Message Integrity – Message Authentication. Unit – IV Digital signature: Comparison – Process – Services – Attacks on Digital

Signature – Digital Signature Schemes – Variations and Applications. Key Management: Symmetric – key Distribution – Kerberos – Public – key Distribution.

Image Watermarking: Watermarking Classification – Spatial Domain Unit – V watermarking – Frequency Domain Watermarking – Fragile watermark – Robust watermark.Image Steganography: Types of Steganography – Applications of Steganography – Embedding Security and Imperceptibility – Examples of Steganography Software- Genetic based Steganography.

807

TEXT 1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Debdeep Mukhopadhay, “Cryptography and BOOKS Network Security”, TMH , Second Edition, Reprint 2012. 2. Frank Y Shih, “Image Processing and Pattern Recognition: Fundamentals and Techniques”, Wiley IEEE Press, May 2010.

1. William Stallings, “Cryptography And Network Security Principles and REFERENCE Practices”, Pearson , Sixth Edition, 2015 BOOKS 2. Atul Kahate, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003. 3. Ingemar J.Cox, Mathew L.Miller, Jeffrey A.Bloom, Jessica Fridrich, Ton Kalker, “Digital Watermarking and Steganography”, Morgan Kaughmann Publications,Second Edition 2008.

ELECTIVE – IV

SOFTWARE QUALITY AND TESTING

Code No : Credits:3

Semester : II

Objectives :

To understand the concepts of software testing principles and quality management.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Identify the importance of software testing phase during software development. • Analyze software testing and debugging methodologies • Evaluate various Software testing automation

INTRODUCTION: Testing as an Engineering Activity – Role of Process in Unit – I Software Quality – Testing as Process – Basic Definitions – Software Testing Principles – The Tester’s Role in a Software Development Organization – Origins of Defects – Defect Classes – The Defect Repository and Test Design – Defect Examples – Developer/Tester Support For Developing a Defect Repository.

808

TEST CASE DESIGN: Introduction to Testing Design Strategies – The Smarter Tester – Test Case Design Strategies – Using Black Box Approach to Test Case Design - Random Testing –Requirements based testing – positive and negative Unit – II testing – Boundary Value Analysis – decision tables - Equivalence Class Partitioning state-based testing– cause effect graphing – error guessing - compatibility testing – user documentation testing – domain testing Using White– Box Approach to Test design – Test Adequacy Criteria static testing vs. structural testing .

LEVELS OF TESTING :The Need for Levels of Testing – Unit Test – Unit Test Planning –Designing the Unit Tests. The Test Harness – Running the Unit tests Unit – III and Recording results – Integration tests – Designing Integration Tests – Integration Test Planning – scenario testing –defect bash elimination -System Testing – types of system testing - Acceptance testing –performance testing - Regression Testing – internationalization testing – ad-hoc testing -Alpha – Beta Tests.

TEST MANAGEMENT : People and organizational issues in testing – organization structures for testing teams – testing services - Test Planning – Test Unit – IV Plan Components – Test Plan Attachments – Locating Test Items – test management – test process - Reporting Test Results – The role of three groups in Test Planning and Policy Development – Introducing the test specialist – Skills needed by a test specialist – Building a Testing Group.

CONTROLLING AND MONITORING: Software test automation – skills needed for automation – scope of automation – design and architecture for automation – requirements for a test tool – challenges in automation - Test metrics and Unit – V measurements –project, progress and productivity metrics – Status Meetings – Reports and Control Issues – Criteria for Test Completion – SCM – Types of reviews – Developing a review program – Components of Review Plans– Reporting Review Results – evaluating software quality – defect prevention – testing maturity model.

TEXT 1. Srinivasan Desikan and Gopalaswamy Ramesh, “ Software Testing – BOOKS Principles and Practices”, Pearson education, 2006. 2. Aditya P.Mathur, “Foundations of Software Testing”, Pearson Education,2008

1. Boris Beizer, “Software Testing Techniques”, Second Edition, Dreamtech, REFERENCE 2003 BOOKS 2. Elfriede Dustin, “Effective Software Testing”, First Edition, Pearson Education,2003. 3. Renu Rajani, Pradeep Oak, “Software Testing – Effective Methods, Tools and Techniques”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.

809

ELECTIVE – IV

GENETIC ALGORITHMS AND APPLICATIONS

Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : II

Objectives :

To understand the concepts of evolutionary computation and genetic programming.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Apply the evolutionary algorithm • Analyze the design of genetic algorithm • Design genetic algorithm for multiple objective optimization problems

Unit – I INTRODUCTION TO EVOLUTIONARY COMPUTATION: Biological and artificial evolution- Evolutionary computation and AI – Different historical branches of EC- Gas-EP-ES-GP- A simple evolutionary algorithm

Unit – II SEARCH AND SELECTION OPERATORS: Recombination / Crossover for strings –one-point-multi-point-uniform crossover operators- Mutation for strings- bit-flipping- Recombination/Crossover and mutation rates- Recombination for real-valued representations- Fitness proportional selection and fitness scaling- Ranking methods – Tournament selection.

Unit – III

EVOLUTIONARY COMBINATIONAL OPTIMIZATION: TSP- Evolutionary algorithms for TSPS- Hybrid evolutionary and local search algorithms. Schema

810

theorems- Convergence of EAs- Computational time complexity of EAs – No free lunch theorem.

Unit – IV CONSTRAINT HANDLING: Common techniques – penalty methods- repair methods- Analysis examples. Pareto optimality – Multiobjective evolutionary algorithms.

Unit – V GENETIC PROGRAMMING: Trees as individuals – Major steps of genetic programming- functional and terminal sets- initialization – crossover-mutation- fitness evaluation – Search operators on trees- Examples

TEXT BOOK 1. Goldberg and David E, “ Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning”, Pearson Education, New Delhi,2006

REFERENCE 1. Kalyamoy Deb, “Multiobjective Optimization using Evolutionary BOOKS Algorithms”, John Wiley and Sons, First Edition, USA, 2003. 2. John R. Koza, Forrest H Bennett III, David Andre, Martin A Keane, “Genetic Programming III:Darwinian Invention and Problem Solving “, Morgan Kaufmann, USA, 1999.

ELECTIVE – V

Internet Of Things

Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : III

Objectives :

811

To understand the concept of M2M (Machine to Machine) with necessary protocols and applications of IoT.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Build blocks of IOT. • Identify application areas of IOT. • Implement web based services on IoT devices.

Unit – I Introduction to Internet of Things: Introduction – Physical Design of IoT – Logical Design of IoT – IoT Enabling Technologies – IoT Levels and

Deployment Templates – Domain Specific IoTs: Home Automation – Cities – Environment – Energy – Retail – Agriculture – Health and Lifestyle.

Unit – II IOT and M2M: Introduction to M2M – Difference between IoT and M2M – Need for IoT Systems Management – SNMP – Network Operator

Requirements – IoT Platforms Design Methodology : Introduction – IoT Design Methodology.

Unit – III IoT Physical Devices and Endpoints : IoT Device – Examplary Device: Raspberry Pi, About the board. Linux on Raspberry Pi, Raspberry Interfaces – other IoT Devices.

Unit – IV IoT Physical Servers and Cloud Offerings: Introduction to Cloud Storage Models and Communication APIs – WAMP – AutoBahn for IoT – Xively Cloud for IoT – Amazon Web Services for IoT.

Unit – V Case Studies of IoT Design: Home Automation – Cities – Environment – Agriculture – Productivity Applications. An IoT Tool: Chief - Chief Case Studies.

TEXT BOOK 1.Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things - A Hands on Approach” Universities Press 2015.

812

1.Honbo Zhou , “The Internet of Things in the Cloud” A Middleware REFERENCE Perspective” CRC Press 2012. BOOKS 2.Dieter Uckelmann,Mark Harrison, Florian Michahelles “Architecture the Internet of Things” Springer 2011.

ELECTIVE – V

GEOGRAPHICAL INFORMATION SYSTEM

Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : III

Objectives :

To understand the importance of geographical information ,handling of spatial data and the applications of Geographical Information System.

Outcome : On completion of the course the student can

• Identify the terminologies used in GIS and applications of GIS. • Know the data types in GIS • Analyze the spatial data • Identify the current trends in GIS

Introduction: GIS Definition – Components – Geographical concepts – Input Unit – I data for GIS – Types of output products – Terminologies used in GIS – Applications of GIS.

813

GIS Data: Introduction – GIS data types – Data representation – Data Unit – II sources – Data acquisition – Data verification and editing - Georeferencing of GIS data – Spatial data models – Spatial data structures – Modeling surfaces – Modeling networks.

Spatial data analysis: Introduction – Measurement of length, perimeter and Unit – III area – queries – Buffering and neighbourhood functions – Data integrations- map overlay – Network analysis – Digital terrain visualization.

GIS Application: Introduction – Problem identification – Designing a data Unit – IV model – Project Management – Implementation problems – Project Evaluation.

Current issues and trends in GIS: Changes in technology - Internet GIS – Unit – V Mobile GIS – Open GIS consortium- Changes in data supply – Changes in the users.

1. A.M.Chandra, S.K.Ghosh, “Remote sensing and Geographic Information System” , Naroso Publishing House, 2nd edition, 2016 2. Kang-tsung Chang, “Introduction to Geographic Information Systems”, TEXT Tata Mc Graw Hill Edition ,4th edition, 2011 BOOKS 3.Peter A. Burrough and Rachael A. McDonnell, “Principles of Geographical

Information Systems”, Oxford University Press, 2011

REFERENCE 1.P.A.Burrough , “Principles of Geographical Information Systems for Land BOOK Resources Assessment” , Clarendon Press-Oxford, 1986.

814

ELECTIVE – V

ADVANCED DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : III

Objectives :

To understand the fundamental concepts of database design, query processing, database recovery systems and distributed database systems.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Construct queries using SQL. • Design databases including the E-R model and Normalization approach. • Analyze and apply concurrency control and reliability techniques. • Use RDBMS for developing industry applications.

Relational Model: Introduction - Structure of Relational Database - Relational Unit - I Algebra - Relational Calculus. Relational Query Languages: Introduction - Codd’s Rules - Structured Query Language - Embedded Structured Query Language. ER Model : Basic Concepts - Conversion of ER Model into Relations - ER Diagram Symbols.

DataBase Design: Introduction - Software Development Life Cycle - Database Development Life Cycle - Automated Design Tools. Functional Unit - II Dependency and Decomposition: Functional Dependency - Decomposition. Normalization: Introduction - Normalization - Normal Forms - BCNF - 4 NF - 5 NF

Query Processing and Optimization: Introduction - Query Processing - Unit - III Syntax Analyzer - Query Decomposition - Query Optimization. Transaction Processing and Concurrency Control: Transaction Concepts - Concurrency Control - Locking Methods - Timestamp Methods - Optimistic Methods.

Unit - IV Data Base Recovery Systems: Introduction - Recovery Concepts - Types of Failures - Types of Recovery - Recovery Techniques - Buffer Management. Database Security: Goals - Firewalls - Data Encryption. Distributed Database Systems: Introduction - Distributed Databases - Architecture of Distributed Databases - Distributed Database System Design Unit - V - Distributed Query Processing. Emerging Database Technologies: Internet

Databases - Digital Libraries - Multimedia Databases - Mobile Databases - Spatial Databases.

1.S.K. Singh, ”Database Systems Concepts, Design and Applications”, TEXT BOOKS Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi: 2006. 2.C.J. Date and others, “An Introduction to Database Systems”, Eighth Edition, Pearson Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi: 2006

815

1. Abraham Silberschatz, ”Database Systems”, McGraw Hill International, 1997. REFERENCE BOOKS 2. Paneerselvam R, ”Database management systems”, PHI, 2005. 3. Narang Rajesh, ”Database management systems”, PHI, 2005. 4. ISRD Group, “Introduction to database management systems”, TMG, 2006.

EXTRA DISCIPLINARY COURSE – I INTERNET CONCEPTS Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : II

Objectives :

To understand the basic concepts of Internet , Web browsing , Internet Protocols, searching the web and E-Mail services.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Identify the components of a web address. • Describe how to use a search engine to search for information on the web. • Use e-mail to send and receive messages.

Unit - I Internet: An Introduction – Internet Access / Dial-Up Connection – Internet

Services - World Wide Web (WWW) - Web Page – Net Surfing.

Internet / Web Browsing: Introduction - Microsoft Internet Explorer - Unit - II Netscape Navigator - Internet Addressing – IP Address – Domain Name – Electronic Mail – Uniform Resource Locator (URL).

Unit - III Internet Protocols: Introduction - Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) -File Transfer Protocol ( FTP) – Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) – Telnet – Gopher – WAIS.

Unit - IV Beyond Surfing - Searching the Web : Introduction – Web Index – Web Search Engine – Web Meta Searcher.

816

Electronic Mail (E-mail): Introduction – E-Mail Messages - Pine – Finding Unit - V an E-Mail Address – Mailing Lists - Smileys – E-Mail Ethics – E-Mail Advantages and Disadvantages – Some useful E-Mail Services.

1.Alexis Leon, Mathews Leon , “Internet for Everyone “ Leon TECH World TEXT BOOK Publication,2009. REFERENCE 1.Margaret Levine Young, “Internet:The Complete Reference”, Tata McGraw BOOKS Hill Publishing Pvt Ltd., 2. Internet for Dummies – PustakMahal, New Delhi.

EXTRA DISCIPLINARY COURSE – I CYBER SECURITY Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : II

Objectives :

To Understand the basic concepts of security and various attacks, prevention of virus , privacy in computing, legal and ethical issues in computer security.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Analyze cyber related security problems. • Identify, detect and prevent various types of computer viruses. • Apply diverse viewpoints to ethical dilemmas in the information technology field and recommend appropriate actions.

Security Problem in Computing: Secure- Attacks - The meaning of Unit - I Computer Security- Confidentiality – Integrity- Availability – Computer Criminals.

817

Program Security: Secure Programs – Fixing Faults- Unexpected Behavior Unit - II – Types of Flows- Viruses and other Malicious code: Kinds of Malicious code- Document viruses- Home for viruses – Prevention of virus Infection.

Administering Security : Organizational security Policies – Physical Unit - III Security: Natural Disasters – Power Loss – Surge Suppressor- Human vandals- contingency planning

Privacy in Computing : Privacy concepts – Privacy principles and concepts Unit - IV – Fair information Policies – controls on commercial websites – Government and Privacy.

Legal and Ethical Issues in Computer Security: Protecting programs and Unit - V Data- Copyrights – Patents - Rights of employees and employers – Ownership of Products.

TEXT BOOK 1. Charles P. Pfleeger, Shari Lawrence Pfleeger, “Security in Computing “, Fourth Edition, Pearson ,2009.

REFERENCE 1. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security”, PHI, 2006 BOOKS 2. Bruce Schneier, “Applied Cryptography”, 2nd Edition, Wiley, 2006. 3. Bruce Schneier and Niels Ferguson,“Practical Cryptography”, Wiley,2003

EXTRA DISCIPLINARY COURSE – I MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : II

Objectives : To understand the fundamental concepts of multimedia and its components and how to create interactive multimedia projects.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Analyse the various types of multimedia tools, Multimedia Graphics . Multimedia Animation • Develop a Multimedia Project.

Unit - I Introducing Multimedia: Components of Multimedia. Setting up a

Multimedia Studio : Hardware Essentials – Setting up the software.

818

Multimedia Audio : Digital audio- The sound cards – Audio Recording and Unit - II Editing Techniques - Designing Texts .

Unit - III Multimedia Graphics : The World of Colours – Digital imaging – Scanning

and Digital Photography.

Multimedia Animation: Fundamentals of computer Animation – Unit - IV Developing animations for multimedia projects. Multimedia Videos :

Introducing Digital video – Digital Video Production Techniques.

Multimedia Projects : Project Conceptualization, Design and development Unit - V – Multimedia authoring-Project planning and costing – Multimedia skill Sets

and Career Opportunities.

TEXT BOOK 1.S Gokul, “Multimedia Magic”, Bpb Publications , 2008

1. Vic Costello, Ed Youngblood and Susan Young blood “ REFERENCE BOOK Multimedia Foundations: Core Concepts for Digital Design” 2012.

819

EXTRA DISCIPLINARY COURSE – II E - COMMERCE Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : III

Objectives:

The objective of this paper is to introduce the concept of Electronic-Commerce and to understand how E-Commerce is affecting Business Enterprise, Governments, and Consumers and people in general.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Analyze E-Commerce Architecture • Identify the Network architecture for E-Commerce • Analyze various security aspects of E-Commerce • Evaluate the various implementation methods of secured payment

E-Commerce and Architecture to Models:Definition of E-Commerce – Evolution – E- commerce Technologies – Applications – Need – Drivers of E-Commerce – Advantages and Unit – I Disadvantages – E-Commerce Frame Work – Architecture of E-Commerce – E-Commerce Models – Inter and Intra Organizational E-Commerce – Impacts of E-Commerce on Business and Organizations – Success Factors of E-Commerce – Scope of E-Commerce

Unit – II Network Infrastructure and Mobile Commerce: Network Infrastructure for E-Commerce – Network Protocols – Elements of Network Infrastructure – Information Superhighway – Global Information Distribution Network – Broad Band Telecommunication – Mobile Commerce.

Web, Network Security and Firewalls: Overview of Web – Security Issues on Web – Unit - III Categories of Security Threats/Attacks – Client/Server Security – Data and Transaction Security – Network Security – Firewalls – Working of a Firewall – Importance of Firewall – Types of Firewall – Components of Firewall – Factors for Firewall Design – Firewall Architecture – Limitations of Firewall.

Encryption Techniques and Virtual Private Network(VPN): Cryptography – Encryption – Unit - IV Encryption Techniques – Hash Functions – Digital Signatures – Benefits and Limitations of Encryption – VPN Introduction – Types of VPN – Authentication Mechanism – Need and Working of VPN – Advantages and Disadvantages of VPN – Performance Issues – Firewalls and VPNs.

Electronic Payment Systems, EDI and E-Commerce Laws: Introduction – Need for EPS – Unit - V Conventional vs Electronic Payment System – Process of EPS – Electronic Payment Protection Protocols – Payment Gateway – Certificates – Digital Tokens – Types of EPS – Critical Success Factors of EPS – Risk and Security – Disadvantages of EPS – Comparison of EPS – Online Banking – Overview of EDI – VAN – EDI in Business – – E- Commerce Law – Ethical and Legal Issues. 1. S.K.Mourya and Shalu Gupta, “E-Commerce”, Narosa Publishing House, New TEXT BOOK Delhi.

REFERENCE 1. Ravi Kalakota and Andrew B. Whinston, “Frontiers of Electronic Commerce, BOOKS Eleventh Impression” ,Pearson Education Inc., Delhi, 2011.

820

2. Daniel Minoli, and Emma Minoli, “Web commerce Technology Handbook” Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, Seventh Reprint 2003.

3. Deitel, “E-Business and E-commerce for Managers”, Pearson Publications

4. RajaRaman, “Essentials of E-Commerce Technology”, PHI publications.

EXTRA DISCIPLINARY COURSE – II ADVANCED WEB DESIGN

Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : III

Objectives :

This Paper focuses on advanced web page concepts, implementation of advanced techniques using JSP and how to build a website.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Analyze the various Internet Components and Services • Develop Web applications using HTML • Implemetation of ODBC

Unit - I Internet Principles : Introduction – client server Model - Protocol – IP address - Domain name – Internet Services – E-mail – WWW- Internet Security.

Introduction to HTML : History – Tags – Documents- Header/ Body Sections Unit - II – Headings – Link Documents – Formatting Characters – Font Tag – Images

and Pictures – Listing – Tables in HTML.

Unit - III Frames and Forms : Frame set –Frames – Definition – Nested Frame sets-

HTML forms – Elements of a form - Elements of Java Script.

Unit - IV Objects and Events: Document Object model – Document Object – Image Object – Forms and Elements – Event Handling – Browser Object – Submit Event and Data Validation – Server side Script with JSP. Unit - V JSP with JDBC: Creating ODBC Data Source Name – Introduction to JDBC – User Profile with XML – A Web Design Project.

821

TEXT BOOK 1. C.Xavier “Web Technology and design” New Age International Publishers - 2010. 1. James Pence “How to do everything with HTML and XHTML“, Dream REFERENCE Tech Press - 2004. BOOKS 2. Deitel ” Internet and World Wide Web”, FourthEdition, Pearson Publications 3. Jackson ,“ Web Technologies”, Pearson Publications.

EXTRA DISCIPLINARY COURSE – II MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM

Code No : Credits: 3

Semester : III

Objectives :

The objective is to provide an overview of information system and organization, analysis of system structure, decision Theory, development and maintenance of information systems.

Outcome: On completion of the course the student can

• Illustrate how current technologies and decision support tools can be utilized to the advantage of business operations. • Apply Management Information Systems knowledge and skills learned to facilitate the acquisition, development, deployment and management of Information systems. • Demonstrate the major steps in the design and implementation phases of the System Development life cycle(SDLC).

INFORMATION SYSTEM AND ORGANIZATION: Matching the Information System Unit - I Plan to the Organizational Strategic Plan – Identifying Key Organizational Objective and Processes and Developing an Information System Development – User role in Systems Development Process – Maintainability and Recoverability in System Design. REPRESENTATION AND ANALYSIS OF SYSTEM STRUCTURE : Models for Representing Systems: Mathematical, Graphical and Hierarchical (Organization Unit - II Chart, Tree Diagram) – Information Flow – Process Flow – Methods and Heuristics – Decomposition and Aggregation – Information Architecture – Application of System Representation to Case Studies.

Unit - III SYSTEMS, INFORMATION AND DECISION THEORY: Information Theory – Information Content and Redundancy – Classification and Compression – Summarizing and Filtering – Inferences and Uncertainty – Identifying Information

822

needed to Support Decision Making – Human Factors – Problem characteristics and Information System Capabilities in Decision Making. INFORMATION SYSTEM APPLICATION: Transaction Processing Applications – Unit - IV Basic Accounting Application – Applications for Budgeting and Planning – Other use of Information Technology: Automation – Word Processing – Electronic Mail – Evaluation Remote Conferencing and Graphics – System and Selection – Cost Benefit – Centralized versus Decentralized Allocation Mechanism. DEVELOPMENT AND MAINTENANCE OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS: Systems Unit - V analysis and design – System development life cycle – Limitation – End User Development – Managing End Users – off– the shelf software packages – Outsourcing – Comparison of different methodologies. TEXT BOOK 1. Laudon K.C, Laudon J.P, Brabston M.E , “Management Information Systems - Managing the digital firm”, Pearon Education, 2004. 1.Turban E.F, Potter R.E, “Introduction to Information Technology”; Wiley, 2004.

REFERENCE 2.Jeffrey A.Hoffer, Joey F.George, Joseph S. Valachich, “Modern Systems Analysis and BOOKS Design”, Third Edition, Prentice Hall, 2002.

3.Kelkar, “Management Information Systems Today”, A concise Study, Third Edition, PHI publications.

823

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (Autonomous) Chennai – 600 004

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

M.COM SYLLABUS

With Effective from the Academic Year 2018-2019 onwards

824

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

MINUTES OF THE BOARD OF STUDIES MEETING IN COMMERCE

Board of studies meeting in Commerce for PG degree (M.Com) held on 20/02/2018 at 10.00 a.m. in the Department of Commerce, Queen Mary’s College (Autonomous), Chennai – 600 004.

MEMBERS PRESENT:

1. Dr. K. ELIZABETH PREMAKUMARI (Chairman)

HOD & Associate Professor of Commerce,

Queen Mary’s College, Chennai – 04.

2. Dr. R. RANGARAJAN (University Nominee)

Professor of Commerce,

Department of Commerce

University of Madras, Chennai -05.

3. Mrs.T.PADMAJA (Subject Expert)

Associate Professor of Commerce,

Bharathi Women’s College (A),

Chennai – 108.

4. Mrs.M.MAHARASI (Subject Expert)

Associate Professor of Commerce,

Quaid-e-Millet College,

Chennai-02.

825

Members

5. Dr. ASHA NAGESH (Associate Professor) 6. Dr. D.USHA RANI (Associate Professor) 7. Mrs. S. SANTHI (Associate Professor) 8. Dr. R. UMA MAHESWARI (Associate Professor) 9. Dr. N. PREMILA (Assistant Professor) 10. Mrs.B.REKHA (Assistant Professor)

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (Autonomous), Chennai – 600 004. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE PG Board of studies - 2018 Minutes of the Board of studies meeting held on 20/02/2018. The committee revised the syllabus of M.Com and the following changes were made. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. The following suggestions were made 1. 2.

3.

4.

826

5. The following members were present 1. Dr. K. ELIZABETH PREMAKUMARI (Chairman) HOD & Associate Professor of Commerce, Queen Mary’s College, Chennai – 04. 2. Dr. R. RANGARAJAN (University Nominee) Professor of Commerce, Department of Commerce University of Madras, Chennai.-05. 3. Mrs.T.PADMAJA (Subject Expert) Associate Professor of Commerce, Bharathi Women’s College (A), Chennai – 108. 4. Mrs.M.MAHARASI (Subject Expert) Associate Professor of Commerce, Quaid-e-Millet College, Chennai-02.

Members 5. Dr. ASHA NAGESH (Associate Professor) 6. Dr. D.USHA RANI (Associate Professor) 7. Mrs. S. SANTHI (Associate Professor) 8. Dr. R. UMA MAHESWARI (Associate Professor) 9. Dr. N. PREMILA (Assistant Professor) 10. Mrs.B.REKHA (Assistant Professor)

827

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM Title of the papers of Syllabus for the batch 2018-2019 onwards

Sem Pap. C/EL/EDE SUBJECT SUB. UE IA Total Hrs CR No. CODE I 1. Core - I Human Resource Management 75 25 100 6 4

I 2. Core - II Accounting for Decision making 75 25 100 6 4

I 3. Core - III Company Law 75 25 100 6 4

I 4. Core - IV Indian Financial System 75 25 100 6 4

I 5. Core - V Customer Relationship 75 25 100 6 4 Management

II 6. Core - VI Advanced Cost & Management 75 25 100 6 4 Accounting

II 7. Core - VII Quantitative Techniques for 75 25 100 6 4 Business Decision II 8. Core - VIII & Practices 75 25 100 6 4

II 9. EDE - I Advertising and Sales Promotion 75 25 100 4 3 - Extra Disciplinary Elective

II 10. Elective - I Marketing of Services 75 25 100 4 3

II 11. Elective - II Entrepreneurship Development 75 25 100 4 3

III 12. Core - IX Strategic Management 75 25 100 6 4

III 13. Core - X Business Environment 75 25 100 6 4

III 14. Core -X I Advanced Corporate 75 25 100 6 4 Accounting & Accounting standards III 15. EDE- II Modern Banking practices - 75 25 100 4 3 Extra Disciplinary Elective

828

III 16. Elective - III Investment Analysis & Portfolio 75 25 100 4 3 Theory III 17. Elective - IV Total Quality Management 75 25 100 4 3

IV 18. Core - XII Income Tax Law and Practice 75 25 100 6 4

IV 19. Core - XIII Organisational Behaviour 75 25 100 6 4

IV 20. Core - XIV Business Research Methodology 75 25 100 6 4

IV 21. Core - XV Financial Management 75 25 100 6 4

IV 22. Elective - V Project/ Industrial Relations 75 25 100 6 4 and Labour Welfare

Title of the papers for syllabus from the Academic Year 2018-2019

Soft skills for all courses Degree: P.G

Sem Pap. Title of the Papers Sub. Code UE IA Total Hrs Credits

No.

I I 75 25 100 2

II II 75 25 100 2

III III 75 25 100 2

IV IV 75 25 100 2

II Internship 75 25 100 2

829

M.COM - 2018-2019

I SEMESTER

Title of the Paper No. of Credits Exam Marks

Hours Hours CIA EXT Total

Core Paper – I: Human Resource Management 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – II: Accounting for Decision 6 4 3 25 75 100 Making

Core Paper – III: Company Law 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – IV: Indian Financial System 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – V: Customer Relationship 6 4 3 25 75 100 Management

Soft Skill Paper – I : - 2 3 25 75 100

Total 30 22

II SEMESTER

Title of the Paper No. of Credits Exam Marks

Hours Hours CIA EXT Total

Core Paper – VI: Advanced Cost & 6 4 3 25 75 100 Management Accounting

Core Paper – VII: Quantitative Techniques for 6 4 3 25 75 100 Business Decision

Core Paper – VIII: International Trade & 6 4 3 25 75 100 Practices

Extra Disciplinary Paper – I: 4 3 3 25 75 100 Advertising and Sales Promotion

830

Elective Paper – I: Marketing of Services 4 3 3 25 75 100

Elective Paper – II: 4 3 3 25 75 100 Entrepreneurship Development

Soft Skill Paper – II : - 2 3 25 75 100

Internship - 2

Total 30 25 -

III SEMESTER

Title of the Paper No. of Credits Exam Marks

Hours Hours CIA EXT Total

Core Paper – IX: Strategic Management 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – X: Business Environment 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – XI: Advanced Corporate 6 4 3 25 75 100 Accounting & Accounting standards

Extra Disciplinary Paper – II: 4 3 3 25 75 100 Modern Banking Practices

Elective Paper – III: 4 3 3 25 75 100 Investment Analysis & Portfolio Theory

Elective Paper – IV: 4 3 3 25 75 100 Total Quality Management

Soft Skill Paper – III : - 2 - 25 75 100

Total 30 23

IV SEMESTER

831

Title of the Paper No. of Credits Exam Marks

Hours Hours CIA EXT Total

Core Paper – XII: Income Tax Law and 6 4 3 25 75 100 Practice

Core Paper – XIII: Organisational Behaviour 6 4 3 25 75 100

Core Paper – XIV: Business Research 6 4 3 25 75 100 Methodology

Core Paper – XIV: Financial Management 6 4 3 25 75 100

Elective Paper – V: Industrial Relations and 6 3 3 25 75 100 Labour Welfare / Project

Soft Skill Paper – IV : - 2 3 25 75 100

Total 30 21

Queen Mary’s College (Autonomous) Chennai – 600 004. Question Paper Pattern for PG Courses Time: 3 hrs Total marks : 75 Total no. of units – 5 Question Paper Pattern: (Without Omitting any Unit) Section – A Answer all the questions: [5 x 2 = 10] [Five Questions one from each unit without choice] 1. 2. 3. 4.

832

5. Section – B Answer all the questions: [5 x 4 = 20] [Two Questions from each unit with either or Choice] 6. a) (OR) b) 7. a) (OR) b) 8. a) (OR) b) 9. a) (OR) b) 10. a) (OR) b) Section – C Answer any THREE questions: [3 x 15 = 45] [Three Questions to be answered out of Five Questions. One question from each unit] 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

M.COM (Choice Based Credit System)

Syllabus with effect from 2018-2019 onwards

SEMESTER – I

833

PAPER NO: 1 Hrs: 6 CODE NO:

CORE I – HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT

Objective: To provide knowledge on managing human resources in organizations and to offer an exposure on human resource practices in organisations.

UNIT I

Human Resource Management - Definition – Characteristics of Human Resource Management – Distinction between Human Resource Management and Personnel Management – Functions of Human Resource Management – Nature and Importance of Human Resource Management – Human Resource Management as a Profession – Role of Human Resource Manager – Human Resource Management Scenario in 21st Century.

UNIT II

Human Resource Planning - Importance - Characteristics of Human Resource Planning – Objectives of Human Resource Planning – Factors influencing Human Resource Plan – Process of Human Resource Planning - Limitations of Human Resource Planning - Forecasting the demand for Human Resource – Human Resource Planning at various levels – Human Resource Retention Plan.

UNIT III

Career Planning and Development - Definition of Career – Features of Career Planning - Objectives – Importance of Career Planning to individuals and organisations – Essentials of Career Planning - Limitations – Career Development – Importance – Types of Career Development Programs – Career Anchors – Career Development Cycle.

UNIT IV

Performance Appraisal – Meaning – Features – objectives – Benefits – Problems in Performance Appraisal – Characteristics of an effective Performance Appraisal System – Merit Rating – Methods of performance Appraisal - Traditional Methods – Modern Methods.

UNIT V

Human Resource Information System (HRIS) – Definition – Functional Components – Objectives – Scope – Applications – Importance – Merits – Limitations - Steps in Implementing Human Resource Information System – Computer applications in Human Resource Management - Human Resource Audit - Objectives – Need and Importance of Human Resource Audit – Scope – Benefits

834

of Human Resource Audit – Qualitative and Quantitative Indicators of Human Resource Audit – Approaches of Human Resource Audit.

Books recommended:

1. Dr. C. D. Balaji – ‘Human Resource Management’ – Margham publications. 2. Dr. C.B. Gupta – ‘Human Resource Management’. 3. Jeffiery A mello – ‘Strategic Human Resources Management’, Thomson, Singapore. 4. Randy L.Desimone, Jon M. Werner – David M. Marris - ‘Human Resources Development’ Thomson, Singapore. 5. Srinivas Kandula, - ‘Human Resources Management in Practice’, Prentice Hall of India, 2005.

Web Reference: www.springer.com www.emeraldinsight.com www.tatamcgrawhill.com www.onlinelibrary.wiley.com

M.COM - SEMESTER – I

PAPER NO: 2 Hrs: 6 CODE NO:

CORE II - ACCOUNTING FOR DECISION MAKING

Objective: To apply advanced managerial accounting concepts in order to make more informed and more effective decisions in stimulated and actual business situations and to apply Modern cost analysis techniques to control and to reduce the cost to enhance the value.

UNIT – I

Cost Volume Profit analysis and Decision Making – Pricing Decision under special circumstances – Make or Buy – Shut down or Continue – Export Vs Local sale –Expand or Contract decisions – Product Mix – Price Mix decisions, Own or Lease, Repair or Renovate, Changes vs Status quo, Sell or Scrap.

UNIT – II

835

Cost concepts in Decision Making – Incremental costing – Differential costing in managerial Decision making.

UNIT – III

Capital Investment Decision – Payback and discounted payback – Net present value and taxation – Internal rate of return – Accounting rate of return – Post project evaluations.

UNIT – IV

Transfer pricing – Introduction – Objectives of Transfer pricing – Methods of Transfer pricing – Transfer pricing and Performance management and Consumption issues – Conflict between Division and Company – Congruence.

UNIT – V

Activity based approaches to Cost and Management Analysis – Activity based Costing – Activity based Management – Target Costing – Cost ascertainment and pricing using Target costing.

Note: Composition of Marks for problem papers 80% problem 20% theory.

Books References:

1. Charler Brandon – ‘Managerial Accounting’ – TMH, New Delhi. 2. Ray H.Garrison – ‘Managerial Accounting’ – TMH, New Delhi. 3. Ravi M.Kishore – ‘Advanced Management Accounting’ – Taxman Publications, New Delhi. 4. ‘Advanced Management Accounting’ – Study Material – Institute of Chartered Accountants. 5. Homgren, Faster, Datar & Gowing – ‘Cost Accounting’ – A Managerial Emphasis, 5th Edition, Pearson. Web Reference: www.accountingcoach.com www.accountingstudyguide.com

www.cimaglobal.com www.futureaccountant.com

M.COM - SEMESTER – I

PAPER NO: 3 Hrs: 6 CODE NO:

CORE III - COMPANY LAW

Objective: To provide knowledge on Companies Act 2013 and their application in business to the students.

836

UNIT – I

The Companies Act 2013, - Introduction – Companies Act 1956 and Companies Act 2013: A comparison – Quasi Judicial Bodies – National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) and National Company Law Appellate Tribunal (NCLAT).

UNIT – II

Share Capital – Meaning – Shares and its kinds – Issue of shares – SEBI Guidelines relating to issue of shares – Share application and Share allotment – Duties of secretary with regard to allotment – Share Certificate – It’s contents and legal effects – Duplicate Share certificate – Steps involved in issuing duplicate Share certificate – Share warrant – Effect of the issue of Share warrants - Procedure for issue of Duplicate share warrant – Distinction between Share certificate and Share warrant – Debentures – Meaning and types of Debentures.

UNIT – III

Company Management – Structure of company management – Shareholders – Board of Directors – Managing Directors – Statutory provisions relating to appointment of Managing directors – Directors – Legal position of Directors – Appointment of Directors – Duties, Powers and Liabilities of Directors – Director Identification Number – Borrowing powers – Lawful borrowing – Restrictions on power of board – Restriction on borrowing powers of a company – Ultra-vires Borrowing – Consequences of unauthorised borrowing.

UNIT – IV

Company meeting – Kinds of Company meetings – General objects and purposes of meeting – Annual General meeting – Extra ordinary General Meeting – Board Meeting – Committee Meeting – Class Meeting – Creditors Meeting – Voting – Resolution.

UNIT – V

Winding up of the company – Meaning of winding up – Winding up and Dissolution – Modes of winding up – Official Liquidator – Duties and Powers of the Official Liquidator.

Books Recommended:

1.N.D.Kapoor – ‘Company Law’ – Sultan Chand & sons, New Delhi.

2. J.Shanthi - ‘Company Law’ – Margham Publications, Chennai.

3. M.R.Sreenivasan - ‘Company Law and Secretarial practice’ – Margham Publications, Chennai.

4. Ashok K Bagrial - ‘Company Law’ – Vikas, Noida

837

5. PPS Gogna - ‘Company Law’ – S.Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi.

6. K.C.Garg.Vijay Gupta, Poonam Gupta, R.C Chawla -‘Company Law’ - Kalyani Pub., New Delhi

M.COM - SEMESTER – I

PAPER NO: 4 Hrs: 6 CODE NO:

CORE IV – INDIAN FINANCIAL SYSTEM

Objective: To provide specialized knowledge and conceptual understanding on Indian Financial system and in depth knowledge on Merchant banking, Mutual funds, Factoring and other financial services.

UNIT – I

Indian Financial system – Introduction to Financial system – Components of Financial system - Relationship between Financial system and Economic development – Weakness of Indian Financial system.

UNIT – II

Financial Market - Meaning – Segments of Financial market – Money Market – Structure – Characteristics – Capital market – Primary market and Secondary market – Functions – Listing – NSE – SEBI guidelines for Investors protection.

UNIT – III

Financial service – An overview – Merchant Banking – Functions – Classifications – Leasing – Types – Hire Purchase vs Leasing – Factoring – Types – Steps – Mutual funds – Types – Venture Capital – Features – Depositories – Functions – Securitisation – Underwriting.

UNIT – IV

Financial Institutions – Development Banks – Features of Development Banks - SIDBI – Financial Assistance – EXIM Bank – Functions – New schemes – NHB – Functions – Advantages – Disadvantages – SFC – Capital functions – Scheme of assistance – UTI - Functions.

UNIT – V

838

Financial Instruments –Classification of Instruments – Negotiable instruments – Commercial papers – Bill of Lading – Letter of credit – Traveller’s cheque - Interest rate determination – Derivatives – Option and Future derivatives – Credit Rating Agency – CRISIL

Books Recommended:

1. Fabozzi - ‘Foundation of Financial markets and Institutions’, - 3rd Ed. Pearson Educations, New Delhi, 2002 2. H.R.Machi Raju - ‘Indian Financial System’, - 2nd Ed, Vikas 2002.

3. Bhole - ‘Financial Institutions and Markets’, - TMH, 2002.

4. M.Y.Khan - Financial Services’, - TMH, 2001.

5. E.Gorden and Dr.K.Natarajan – ‘Financial Markets and Institutions’ – Himalaya Publishing House.

M.COM - SEMESTER – I

PAPER NO: 5 Hrs: 6 CODE NO:

CORE V - CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT

Objective: To impact knowledge on customer relationship management and to provide an overview on the various concepts regarding to relationship marketing.

UNIT – I

Introduction to Customer Relationship Management (CRM): Emerging of Relationship marketing – Distinction between Transaction marketing and Relationship marketing – Needs for RM – Advantages CRM – Definitions – Features – Key elements of CRM – Essentials of successful CRM system.

UNIT – II

Customer Relationship – Stages of relationship – Attributes of developed relationship – Types of customer – Relationship life cycle – Customer acquisition – Customer loyalty – Customer Satisfaction – Customer relation.

UNIT – III

Relationship Drivers – Risk, Salience and emotion – Trust and commitment – Perceived need for Closeness – Customer Satisfaction – Its process – Customer data base – Evaluation of customer satisfaction.

839

UNIT – IV

Partnership – Customer partnership – Customer service – Episodes – Building relationship – Internal partnership customer – Employee interface – Human resources – Employee relation and loyalty – Empowerment – Staff development – Supplier partnership – B-to-B relationship – External partnership – Horizontal partnership – Networks and collaboration – Types – Alliances – Conclusions.

UNIT – V

Electronic CRM – Definition – Features – Distinguish between CRM and e-CRM – e-CRM architecture – Need to adopt e-CRM – Mobile CRM – Service offered challenges in m-CRM

Books References:

1. Dr. S. Sheela Rani, - ‘Customer Relationship Management’, - Margham Publications. 2. Shradha M. Bhome, Dr. Amarpreet Singh Ghurs, - Customer Relationship Management’ – International Book Home P.Ltd 3. K. Sugandhi, - ‘Customer Relationship Management’ - New Age International Publications. 4. John Egan,-‘Relationship Marketing, exploring relational Strategies in Marketing’, - Prentice hall. 5. John Anton, - ‘Customer Relationship Mangement’, - Prentice hall.

Web Reference: www.marketingpower.com www.tutortoyou.net www.marketingprof.com

M.COM - SEMESTER – II

PAPER NO:6 Hrs: 6 CODE NO:

CORE VI - ADVANCED COST AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Objective: To impart knowledge on Cost and Management accounting techniques and to develop the skills of students in the preparation of Cost and Management accounting statements.

UNIT – I

840

Installation of Costing system – Records to be maintained under the Companies Act – Management control and Information system – Cost reduction and Cost control techniques – Control over wastages, scrap, spoilage and defectives.

UNIT – II

Costing methods – Product costing – Process costing – Treatment of equivalent units – Inter process profit – JIT costing – Activity based costing.

UNIT – III

Financial Statement Analysis – Importance – Limitations – Procedure for Analysis and Interpretation – Types of Analysis – Tools of Financial Statement Analysis - Ratio Analysis – Classification of Ratios – Rearrangement of Financial Statements - Preparation of Balance sheet – Interpretations - Advance problems.

UNIT – IV

Fund flow – Importance – Uses – Limitations – Preparation of Fund Flow Statements - Cash flow Analysis – Difference between Fund Flow and Cash flow Analysis – Advantages – Limitations – Preparation of Cash Flow Statement – Advance problems.

UNIT – V

Standard Costing and Variance analysis – Standard, Standard Cost and Standard Costing – Estimated Cost – Application of Standard costing – Standard costing and Estimated cost – Standard costing system – Basis for standards – Setting standards – Revision of standards – Variance Analysis – Computation of Material, Labour, Overheads and Sales Variance.

Note : Composition of Marks for problem papers 80% problem 20% theory

Books References:

1. Murthy and Gurusamy – ‘Cost Accounting’ – Vijay Nichole Imprints and Tata MC.Graw Hill 2. Murthy and Gurusamy – ‘Management Accounting’ – Vijay Nichole Imprints and Tata MC.Graw Hill 3. Horngren C.T – ‘Cost Accounting’–A Managerial emphasis, New Delhi, Pearson Education 4. Kaplan – ‘Advanced Management Accounting’ – 3rd Ed. Pearson Education, New Delhi.

5. Polimeni, et.at. –‘Cost Accounting’: Concepts and Applications for Managerial Decision

841

Making, New York, McGrawHill Choudhary, Prasad Roy & Amitava Bhattacharya, Cost and Management Accountancy: Methods and Techniques, Calcutta, New Central Book Agency. 6. Reddy T.S and Y.H.Reddy – ‘Cost and Management Accounting’ – Margham Publ. Chennai.

Web Reference: www.futureaccountant.com www.ce.cmu.edu

www.computerizedaccount.tripod.com

M.COM - SEMESTER – II

PAPER NO: 7 Hrs: 6 CODE NO:

CORE VII - QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES FOR BUSINESS DECISION

Objective: To knowledge and quantitative methods and applications and to expertise the students in statistical analysis.

UNIT – I

Probability Distribution – Binominal Distribution – Poisson distribution and Normal Distribution.

UNIT – II

Test of Hypothesis – Procedure – Two types of errors – Two tail and One tail test of Hypothesis – Estimation – Properties of a good estimator – Test of significance for Attributes – Test of significance of large Samples - Test of significance of Small Samples – Student’s t – Distribution.

UNIT – III

Chi Square test – Definition – Uses of Chi Square test – Limitations on the use of Chi Square Test – Conditions for applying Chi Square test – Test of significance using Chi Square.

UNIT – IV

F – Test – Application of F – test – Analysis of variance - Assumptions in Analysis of variance – Techniques of Analysis variance – Analysis of variance of Two way classification model.

UNIT – V

Non- parametric Tests – Advantages of non – parametric tests – The sign test – A Rank Sum test – Mann – Whitney U Test – The one sample Run test – The Kruskal Wallis or H – Test (only

842

theory questions on the above)– Spearman’s limitations of non – parametric tests –Advance Problems in Rank Correlation.

Note: Composition of Marks for problem papers 80% problem 20% theory.

Books recommended:

1.Gupta SP – Statistical Methods, Sultan Chand, New Delhi, 2000.

2.Vittal PR – Quantitative Techniques, Margham Publications Chennai.

3.Johnson – Applied Multivariate Statistical Analysis, 5th Ed. Person Education, ND.

4.Tulsian Pandey - Quantitative Techniques, Persons Education, New Delhi.

5.Richard I.Levin and David S.Rubin – Statistics for Management, 7th Ed, Persons Education, New Delhi, 2002.

Web Reference: http://fe.ugm.ac.id/iup/materil/syllabi_quantitative.pdf.

www.aiu.edu http://www.duxbury.com/sem6/index.html.

M.COM - SEMESTER – II

PAPER NO: 8 Hrs: 6 CODE NO:

CORE VIII – INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND PRACTICES

Objective: To offer knowledge and expertise in the business and practice global and to provide exposure on the legal aspects of trade and business.

UNIT – I

International Business – Definition – Nature – Approaches and theories of International Business – Its problems – International Economic Environment – Social, Cultural, technological, economic and political environment.

UNIT – II

General Agreement on Tariff and Trade (GATT) scenario – General Agreement on Tariff and Trade and International Trade – Establishment of World Trade Organisation (WTO) – Basic principles of WTO and GATT – Their functions and areas of operations – Various Agreements under WTO.

843

UNIT – III

Industrial policy and Foreign Direct Investment – Kinds of Collaboration and Joint Ventures – Negotiating Foreign Collaboration/ Joint Venture – Drafting of agreement – Restrictive clauses in the Foreign Collaboration/ Joint Venture Agreements – Indian Joint Venture abroad.

UNIT – IV

Export Import performance of the country – Standard Input output and Value Addition Norms – Export promotion Schemes – Special Economic Zones – Export Oriented units / Export Processing Zone – Deemed Export – Export promotion Councils and Organisations etc., – Import and Export Procedures and Documentation.

UNIT – V

International finance – Introduction – Foreign Exchange – Types of foreign exchange rates – Convertibility of rupees and its implications – Direct Foreign Investment – International institutions and their role in Capital markets – I.M.F and World Bank.

Books recommended:

1. Dr.C.N.Balaji – ‘International Trade’ – Margham Publications

2. Dr. M.B.Rao, Manjula Guru – ‘WTO & International Trade’,2nd Edition’ ,Vikas Publishing House Pvt.Ltd. 3. D.S.Asora – ‘International Business’, Tamil Nadu Book House. 4. V.D.Dudeja – ‘International Business Environment’, Tamil Nadu Book House. 5. Justin Paul – ‘International Business’, 2nd Edition Prentice Hall of India. 6. Balagopal – ‘International Trade’.

Web Reference: www.emeraldinsight.com www.oxfordjounals.org www.tailorfrancis.com M.COM - SEMESTER – II

PAPER NO: 9 Hrs: 4 CODE NO:

EXTRA DISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE – I

ADVERTISING AND SALES PROMOTION

Objective: To enable the students to learn about advertisement and its impact in marketing and also to expose the students to sales promotion.

844

UNIT – I

Advertising – Definition – Nature and Importance – Advertising and publicity – Advertising objectives – Steps in advertising process.

UNIT – II

Types of Advertising – Advertising of advertising – Criticism – Objections.

UNIT – III

Advertising Media – Kinds of Media – Merits and Demerits – Choice of a Advertising media.

UNIT - IV

Advertising copy – Qualities of a good advertising copy – Classifications – Preparation of Advertising copy.

UNIT – V

Sales promotion – Definition – Objectives – Kinds of Sales promotion – Merits of Sales promotion – Drawbacks.

Note: This paper is offered to other department students as Extra Disciplinary Elective.

Books Recommended:

1. Dr.L.Natarajan, - ‘Marketing’.

2. Dr.N.Rajan Nair, - ‘Marketing’.

3. R.S.N.Pillai and Bagavathi, -‘Marketing’.

4. DR.J.Jayasankar, - ‘Marketing’.

5. Philp Kotler, - ‘Marketing’.

Web Reference: www.marketingpower.com

www.tutor2u.net

www.marketingprofs.com

M.COM - SEMESTER – II

845

PAPER NO: 10 Hrs: 4 CODE NO:

MAJOR ELECTIVE I - MARKETING OF SERVICES

Objective: To provide specialised knowledge on marketing skills for service sector and to expose students to marketing practices in service sector.

UNIT – I

Nature and classification of Services – Characteristics of Services and their marketing implications.

UNIT – II

Marketing strategies for service firms – with special reference to Information, Communication, Consultancy, Advertising, Professional services, After sales service, Recruitment, Training and Tourism.

UNIT – III

Product support services – Pricing of services – Problems of quality – Innovations in services.

UNIT – IV

Marketing of Financial services – Nature – Types – Marketing of Insurance – Mutual fund – Marketing of Non – profit firms.

UNIT – V

CRM & Relationship Marketing – Customer Satisfaction.

Books Recommended:

1. Christopher Lovelock – ‘Services Marketing’ – 4th Ed, Pearson Education. 2. E.G.Bateson, Mal1agil1g - ‘Services Marketing’ – Text and Readings, Dryden Press, Hindsdale III. 3. Philip Kotler and Paul N Bloom – ‘Marketing Professional Services’ – Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 4. Payne – ‘The Essencl of Services Marketing’ - New Delhi, Prentice Hall. 5. Helen Wood Ruffe – ‘Services Marketing’ – MacMillan India, New Delhi. 6. Mary Anm Pezzallo – ‘Marketing Financial Services’ – MacMillan.

846

Web Reference: www.managementstudyguide.com www.tutor2u.ne

www.learnmarketing.net

M.COM - SEMESTER – II

PAPER NO: 11 Hrs: 4 CODE NO:

MAJOR ELECTIVE II - ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT

Objective: To provide an indepth knowledge on opportunities and emerging trends in the global and domestic erena. The intention of this subject is to excite a healthy curiosity in the student on possible opportunities available in this emerging areas.

UNIT – I

Women and Entrepreneurship – Role of Women in a society - Challenges to Woman Entrepreneurs – Increasing Trend of Woman in business – Emerging Ecosystem – Benefits of Woman Entrepreneurship – Rural Entrepreneurship – Need – Problems – Challenges – Government and Rural Entrepreneurship - Opportunities – Benefits.

UNIT – II

Social Entrepreneurship - – Need – Types – Characteristics – Sustaining Social Development – Profile of an Ideal social enterprise – Measures of success – Benefits – Difference between Social Enterprises and Social Responsibility of Enterprises – – Sociopreneur - Family business and Entrepreneur – History of Family Businesses – Evolution – Characteristics – Advantages – Growth – Professionalism – Pitfalls – Succession planning – Challenges and issues.

UNIT – III

Sustainability – Climate change and Entrepreneurship – Understanding climate change – Impact of Global warming – Sustainability – Need for sustainability in Business – Creating buy-in to practice Sustainable businesses – Creating a Business Case for Sustainability – Entrepreneurship and Sustainability.

UNIT – IV

847

Technology Driven Entrepreneurship – Technology in Perspective – Technology is an Enabler – Types of Technology Ventures – Profile of a Technopreneur – Challenges faced by Technology based Enterprises – Technology application strategies.

UNIT – V

Entrepreneurship Education and Research – Gaps in Domain knowledge – Need for Education and Research – Entrepreneurship Education and its goal – Obstacles – Opportunities in Entrepreneurial Research – Responsibility for Proper Research and Education – Entrepreneurship Education – Current developments.

Books Recommended: 1Rajshankar – ‘Entrepreneurship – Theory and Practice’. 2.Dr.C.B.Gupta, - ‘Entrepreneurial Development in India’. 3. R.A.Sharma, - ‘Entrepreneurial change in India Industries’. 4. Vasanth Desai, -‘Entrepreneurial Development’. 5. Hans School Hummer and Arthew H.Kumlogi, - ‘Entrepreneurialship Small Mangement’. 6. Robert D.Hisrich, - ‘Entrepreneurship’. 7. Jerry Katz –‘Entrepreneurial Small Business’.

M.COM - SEMESTER – III

PAPER NO: 12 Hrs: 6 CODE NO:

CORE IX - STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT

Objective: To develop knowledge on Strategic Management and to expose students regarding framing policies and strategies for managing an organization.

UNIT – I

Strategy – Definition – Concept of Strategy – Characteristics – Types of Strategy – Policies – Business policies – Importance and classification of business policies.

UNIT– II

Strategic Management – Meaning – scope – Evolution of Strategic management concept – Levels of Strategic management – Benefits of Strategic management – Risks of Strategic management – Strategic management process – Steps – Porter’s Five Force Model.

UNIT – III

848

Strategy Formulation – Company Vision and Mission – Components of a corporate mission – Characteristics – Benefits of Mission – SWOT Analysis – Organizational Analysis – Steps – Techniques of organizational analysis.

UNIT – IV

Strategy Implementation – Vertical integration – Types – Merits – Demerits – Diversification – Types – Acquisitions and Joint venture – Merits and Demerits – Strategic alliances – BCG Analysis.

UNIT – V

Strategy evaluation and control – Significance – Techniques of Strategic evaluation and control – Levels of control – Types of control – Strategic reward system.

Books recommended:

1. Azhar Kazmi - ‘Strategic Management and Business Policy’, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1992. 2. Johnson, Gary and Scholes, Kelvan ‘Exploring Corporate Strategy’, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1994. 3. Ramaswamy V.S. and Namakumari.S – ‘Strategic Planning: Formulation of Corporate Strategy’, Macmillan, New Delhi, 1999. 4. Banerjee, Bani P. – ‘Corporate Strategies’, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 1999. 5. Certo, Samuel C and Paul J.Peter - ‘Strategic Management’, A focus on Process, Mc Graw Hill, New York, 1990. 6. Hiriyappa.B - ‘Strategic Management’, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2008.

Web Reference: www.springer.com www.emeraldinsight.com www.tatamcgrawhill.com www.onlinelibrary.wiley.com

M.COM - SEMESTER –III

PAPER NO: 13 Hrs: 6 CODE NO:

CORE X - BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT

Objective: To offer expertise knowledge on the business environment policies to the students with respect to the current scenario.

849

UNIT – I

Business – Concepts – Characteristics of Modern business – Business Environment – Nature and significance of Business Environment – Types – Micro Environment - Macro Environment - Environmental Analysis – Process – Benefits – Limitations – Techniques of Environmental Analysis.

UNIT – II

Social and cultural Environment – Culture – Concepts – Nature – Elements – Social responsibilities of business towards different groups – Cases for and against Social responsibility – Social Audit – – Characteristics – Elements – Factors governing Business Ethics.

UNIT – III

Economic environment – Economic system – Meaning – Characteristics of an economic system – Functions – Types - Capitalism – Socialism – Mixed Economy – Economic policies – Policy measures - Monetary or Credit policy – Fiscal or Budgetary policy - Foreign trade policy - Industrial policy 1991.

UNIT – IV

Ecological Environment – Ecology and eco system – Introduction – Factors causing imbalance in the Eco system – Pollution agents – Ways of preventing Industrial pollution – Environmental Protection Act, 1986 – Definition – Objectives – Criticism of the Act.

UNIT – V

Global environment – Globalisation – Concepts – Merits and Demerits – Privatisation – Concepts – Dis-investments – Limitations – Multinational corporations – Merits and Demerits of MNCS – Measures to promote Globalisation.

Books References:

1. Business Environment – Dr.C.B.Gupta 2. Business Environment – Dr.P.K.Ghosh 3. Business Environment – Dr.N.Premavathy 4. Business Environment – Namitha 5. Business Environment – Dr.V.Radha 6. Business Environment – Dr.S.Sankaran

Web Reference: www.kmworld.com www.businessethics.com www.cgi.com

850

M.COM - SEMESTER – III

PAPER NO: 14 Hrs: 6 CODE NO:

CORE XI – ADVANCED CORPORATE ACCOUNTING AND ACCOUNTING STANDARDS

Objective: To impart knowledge on Corporate accounting methods and procedures and to develop skills in the preparation of accounting statements and their analysis.

UNIT – I

Amalgamation – Types – Methods of accounting for Amalgamation – Pooling of Interest method –Purchase method – Amalgamation after Balance sheet date – Dissenting share holders – Entries at par value – Intercompany Owings – Unrealised profit and stock – Intercompany holdings - External reconstruction – Alteration of Share capital and Internal Reconstruction – Advance problems.

UNIT – II

Consolidated final statement of Holding companies and subsidiary companies – Intercompany holdings and Owings – Treatment of dividend.

UNIT – III

Insurance Company Accounts – General insurance – Life Insurance (New format) - Human Resources accounting – Valuation of Human Resource – Cost based method, Value based method of Human Resource Valuations – Recording and presenting in Financial Statements.

UNIT – IV

Accounting for Price level changes – Different methods of Inflation accounting – Current Purchase power method – Computation of Gain or Loss on monetary items – Current Cost Accounting methods – Hybrid method - Social responsibility Accounting – Methods of Social responsibility accounting and reporting – Preparation of Social Income Statement and Social Balance sheet.

UNIT – V

Indian Accounting Standards – Meaning – Objectives – Significance – Accounting Standards in India – Procedures for formulation of Standards – Disclosure of Accounting policy AS -1, Valuation of Inventories AS-2, Cash flow statement AS-3, Contingency and events occurring after Balance sheet date AS-4, Net profit or loss for the period, prior period items and changes in

851

Accounting policy AS-5, Depreciation Accounting AS-6, Accounting for Fixed Assets AS-10, Accounting for Investment AS-13, Accounting for Amalgamation AD-14, Earnings per share AS- 20, Accounting for Taxes and Income AS-22(only theory).

Note: Composition of Marks for problem papers 80% problem 20% theory.

Books Recommended:

1. Shukla M.C and T.S. Grewal, - ‘Advanced Accounts’, - New Delhi, - S. Chand and Co. Ed 2009.

2. Gupta R.L and M. Radhaswamy, - ‘Advanced Accounts’ - New Delhi, - S. Chand and Co. Ed 2010.

3. Jain S.P and K.L. Narang, - ‘Advance Accounts’, - Ludhiuana, Kalyani Publishers Ed. 2011.

4. Reddy T.S., - ‘Corporate Accounting’, - Margham Publications, Chennai.

Web Reference:

www.indiacorporateadvisor.com www.iimcal.sc.in www.futureaccountant.com

M.COM - SEMESTER – III

PAPER NO: 15 Hrs: 4 CODE NO:

EXTRA DISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE – II

MODERN BANKING PRACTICE

Objective: To provide a conceptual understanding and knowledge on modern banking practices in India.

UNIT – I

Banker – Customer – Definition – Types of deposits accounts – Savings account – Recurring deposits – Current account – Fixed deposits account.

852

UNIT – II

Procedure to open a bank account – Know your customer (KYC) – Facility of nomination – Closure of bank account.

UNIT – III

Electronic banking – E-banking services – Benefits – Hindrances – Core banking solutions (CBS) – Electronic Fund Transfer (EFT) – Electronic Clearing System (ECS) _ Real Time Gross Settlement – (RTGS).

UNIT – IV

ATM – Functions – Mechanism – Merits – Demerits.

UNIT- V

Cheque – Definition – Types – Features – Debit Cards – Credit Cards – Features – Benefits – Drawbacks.

Note: This paper is offered to other department students as extra disciplinary elective.

Books Recommended:

1. Sundaram and Varshney, - ‘Banking Theory Law and Practice’.

2. Gurusamy S, - ‘Banking Theory Law and Practice’.

3. Dinesh Kumar K.S. - ‘Banking Theory Law and Practice’.

Web Reference: www.rbi.org.in

www.sebi.gov.in

www.nsc.india.com

M.COM - SEMESTER – III

PAPER NO: 16 Hrs: 4 CODE NO:

MAJOR ELECTIVE - III

853

INVESTMENT ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO THEORY Objective: To provide on the basics of investment management and to develop skill for investment analysis and portfolio building. UNIT – I Nature and Scope of Investment Management – Investment Vs Speculation – factors favourable for Investment – Investment Media – Financial Market – Structure – New Developments in the Financial System – The Relationship of the Issue Markets and Stock Exchange of India – capital Issue Control – Investment Alternatives. UNIT – II Security Analysis and Valuation – Basic Valuation Models – Debit Valuation – Equity Valuation – Fundamental Analysis – Technical Analysis – Dow theory, Random walk theory – Company Analysis- Non- financial aspect – Financial Analysis – Financial Statement Analysis. UNIT – III Investor and Interest Rates – Kinds of Interest – Interest Rates of India – Dividend Policies and the Investor – Kinds of Dividend – Payout ratio – ROI, ROCI – Risk return – Market risk – Interest rate risk – Purchasing power risk – Business risk – Financial risk. UNIT – IV Portfolio theory – Return and Risk – Pricing – Portfolio Analysis – Markowitz theory – Williams Sharpest Ideal Index. UNIT – V Portfolio Management – Selection of Asset Mix – Formulation of Portfolio Strategy – Portfolio Selections and International Diversification – Portfolio Execution and revision – Performance Evaluation.

Books recommended:

1. L.Natarajan – ‘Investment Management’. 2. Prasanna Chandra – ‘Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management’. 3. V.V.Avandhani – ‘Security Analysis and Portfolio Management’. 4. Dr. R.P.Rastogi – ‘Investment management’. 5.Elton, Edwin and Gruber , Martin J – ‘Morden Portfolio Theory and Investment Analysis’, Wiley & sons. Web Reference: www.amazon.com

854

www.bcci.bg

www.asrm.edu.pk

M.COM - SEMESTER – III

PAPER NO: 17 Hrs: 4 CODE NO:

MAJOR ELECTIVE – IV TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Objective: To provide expert knowledge in the emerging total management techniques and to build conceptual clarity and skill of the concept applications.

UNIT – I Introduction to Quality, Definition of Quality, Quality Control, Total Quality Management - Benefits of quality – Types of quality – The Cost of Quality – Quality Control – Total quality – Total quality control – Scope of T QM – Difference between quality control and total quality management – Benefits of TQM – Elements of TQM.

UNIT – II Quality Management Philosophies – Deming philosophy – Juran philosophy – Crosby philosophy – Kaoru Ishikaw and TQM.

UNIT – III Focussing on customers – Who is the customer – The importance of customer satisfaction – Model of customer satisfaction - Kano’s Model – Customer driven quality cycle – Customer relationship management – Customer retention.

UNIT – IV Benchmarking – Advantages, Limitations, Types of benchmarking, Four phases of Benchmarking – Benchmarking process - Statistical Process control – Sources of Variation – Control Charts – ‘X’ Chart – ‘R’ Chart – ‘P’ Chart – ‘np’ Chart – Charts for Defects – ‘C’ Chart – ‘u’ Chart – Designing Control Charts.

UNIT – V ISO 9000 – Elements of ISO 9000 – Objectives of ISO 9000 – Benefits of ISO 9000 Certification – Other quality systems – QS 9000 – TE 9000 –AS 9000 – ISO 14000.

Books Recommended:

1. K.Shridhara Bhat – ‘Total Quality Management’ – Test and Cases”, Himalaya Publishing

855

house. 2. Srivivasa Gupta and Valarmathy, Vijay Nicole Imprints. 3. Dahlgaard Jens J., Kristensen K., Kanji Gopal K, - ‘Fundamentals of Total Quality Management’, Bross Chapman & Hll, London.

4. George, Stephen and Weimerskirch, Arnold, -‘Total Quality Management: ‘Strategies and Techniques Proven’, Mohit Publications. 5.Hakes, Chris (editor), - ‘Total Quality Management: The Key to Business Success NY: Chapman and Hall. 6. Fox, Roy, “Making Quality Happen. ‘Six Steps to Total Quality Management’, - McGraw-Hill. Web Reference: www.springer.com www.managementhelp.org www.tqmschool.com www.bpir.com

M.COM - SEMESTER – IV

PAPER NO: 18 Hrs: 6 CODE NO:

CORE XII – INCOME TAX LAW & PRACTICE

Objective: To provide a working knowledge of Income Tax Act1961 and the tax provisions.

UNIT – I

Income tax law – An overview of heads of Income – Salaries – features – Allowances – Perquisites – Deductions u/s16 – House property income – Annual value - Deductions u/s24 – Theoretical aspects.

UNIT – II

Profits and gains of business – Allowable expenses – Expenses expressly disallowed in computation of business income – Capital gains – Kinds of capital gains – Indexed cost of acquisition – Exemptions u/s54 – Income from other sources – Allowable deductions – Theorotical aspects.

UNIT – III

Set-off and carry forward of losses – Clubbing of income - Theoretical aspects and problems.

UNIT – IV

Deductions to be made in computing total income – Relief of Income tax – Assessment of total income of individuals – Computation of tax liability - Theoretical aspects and problems.

856

UNIT – V

Assessment of Companies – Venture capital Company – Assessment of firms - Theoretical aspects and problems.

(Problems in UNIT 111, IV and V only)

Note : Composition of Marks for problem papers 60% problem 40% theory.

Books Recommended:

1. Bhagawati Prasad – ‘Income Tax – Law & Practice’, – Vishwaprakasam Publications – New Delhi. 2. V.K.Singhania – ‘Direct taxes – Law & Practice’, – Taxman Publications. 3. B.B.Lal – ‘Direct taxes – Practice and Planning’, – Konark Publisher Pvt. Ltd. 4. Srinivas E.A – ‘Handbook of Corporate Tax Planning’,– Tata McGraw hill Publications. 5. Ranina H.P – ‘Corporate Taxation’, – A handbook – Oriental Law House, New Delhi.

Web Reference: www.incometaxindia.gov.com

www.taxsmile.com, www.taxmanagementindia.com

M.COM - SEMESTER – IV

PAPER NO: 19 Hrs:6 CODE NO:

CORE XIII – ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

Objective: To provide knowledge of employees’ behaviour in an organisation and to provide an insight organisational dynamics.

UNIT – I

Organisational Behaviour – Meaning – Nature and Scope – Important concepts - Organisational behaviour models – Foundations of individual behaviour – behavioural models.

UNIT – II

857

Perception – Process of perception – Determinants of Perception – Attitudes and values – Nature – Characteristics – Distinction between attitudes and values – Types of values – Formation of values.

UNIT – III

Groups in Organisation – Characteristics – Types of groups – Groups formation – Leadership – Importance – Qualities of a leader – Leadership styles.

UNIT – IV

Organisational change – Factors influencing change – Resistance to change – Overcoming resistance to change – Work Stress – Causes of Stress – Prevention of Stress – Counselling – Importance – Types of Counselling.

UNIT – V

Organisational Conflicts – Causes of conflicts – Stages of conflicts – Levels of conflicts – Conflicts and performance – Conflicts outcomes – Quality of work life (QWL) – Meaning – Measures to improve QWL – Benefits of high QWL.

Books Recommended:

1. Prasad L.M – ‘Organisational Behaviour’, 3rd Edition, Reprint, Sultan Chand & sons. 2. Keith Davis – ‘Organisational Behaviour’. 3. Jayasankar J - ‘Organisational Behaviour’. 4. Stephen Robbins - ‘Organisational Behaviour’. 5. Mishra, - ‘Organisational Behaviour’, Vikas Publishing House Pvt.Ltd.

Web Reference: www.journals.elsevier.com

www.unesco.org

www.onlinelibrary.wiley.com

M.COM - SEMESTER – IV

PAPER NO: 20 Hrs: 6 CODE NO:

CORE XIV – BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

858

Objective: To provide knowledge on research methods, Techniques and process and to develop skill in the application of research methods for business problem solving.

UNIT – I

Research – Meaning and Purpose – Objectives – Motivation in Research – Research process – Types of Research – Pure and applied research, Survey, Case study, Experimental, Exploratory.

UNIT – II

Definition the research problem – Selection and formulation of research problem – Review of literature – Setting up of Objectives – Definition and concepts of research designs.

UNIT – III

Principles and methods of collections of data – Primary and secondary data – Selection of appropriate method – Processing and analysis of data – Checking – Editing – Coding, Transcription and Tabulation – Data processing through Computer.

UNIT – IV

Formulation of Hypothesis – Meaning of Hypothesis – Types of Hypothesis – Sources of Hypothesis – Sampling Techniques – Sampling Size – Sampling methods – SPSS – Introduction and their usage.

UNIT – V

Interpretation and report writing – Meaning and techniques – Significance of report writing – Steps in report writing – Format.

Books Recommended:

1. Willaim .C.Emory, - ‘Business Research Method’, - R.D.Irwin Inc. Illinois 1976.

2. C.R.Kothari, - ‘Research Methodology, Method and Techniques’, - Wiley Eastern Limited.

3. Sadhu Er.Singh, - ‘Research Methodology in Social Science’, - Himala Publications.

4. William.T.Goole and Paulk, - ‘Methods in Social Research’, - Mc Graw Hill.

5. Anderson.J Et.al, ‘Thesis and Assignment Writting’, - Wiley Estern.

6. Krishnasami,- ‘Operations Research, Methodology of Research for social science’, - Himalaya,

Mumbai.

Web Reference: www.tutorsindia.com www.springs.com

859

www.authorstream.com www.socialpsychology.org.

M.COM - SEMESTER – IV

PAPER NO: 21 Hrs :6 CODE NO:

CORE XV – FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Objective: To impart knowledge on fundamentals of financial functions in business and to develop skills in financial analysis and financial decision making.

UNIT – I

Meaning – Importance and objectives of Financial Management – Time value of money – Conflicts in profit versus maximization – Functions of Manager – Methods and sources of raising finance – Sources of short term and long term finance – Problems in financial forecasting.

UNIT – II

Capital Structure decisions – Traditional and MM approaches – Current views – Determinants – Capital structure – Overtrading – Over and under capitalization – Leverages analysis EBIT – EPS analysis – Cost of capital measurement WACC-MCC and values of the firm.

UNIT- III

Investment decisions – Risk – Required rate of return – Estimating cash flows – Present value of cash flows – Evaluation of alternative investment proposals – Sensitivity analysis – Simulation – Decision making under conditions of risk and uncertainty – Inflation and investment decisions.

UNIT – IV

Working capital management – Working capital cycle – Forecasting of working capital requirement – factors influencing working capital – Different components – Inventory – Cash – Receivables – Credit policies – Collection polices.

UNIT – V

Dividend – Factors influencing dividend policy of firms – Dividend relevancy – Company law provisions on dividend payment - Determination – Dividend theories – Walter model – Gordon’s model – MM hypothesis – Dividend practice in India.

Note: Composition of Marks for problem papers 60% problem 40% theory.

Books Recommended:

860

1.Van Horne J, - ‘Financial Management & policy’, - Pearson Education, Delhi. 2. Brealey and Myers, - ‘Principles of Corporate Finance’, - New York, McGraw Hill. 3. West on and Brigham, - ‘Managerial Finance’, - New York, Holt Rinehart. 4. Pandey I.M, - ‘Financial Management’, - New Delhi, Vikas. 5. Babatosh Banerjee, - ‘Financial policy and Management Accounting’, - Calcutta, The world Press 6. Prasanna Chandrs, _ - ‘Financial Policy Theory and Practice’, - New Delhi, TMH. 7. Periyasamy P, - ‘Financial Management’, - Vijay Nicole Imprints. Web Reference: www.accounting studyguide.com www.managementparadise.com

M.COM - SEMESTER – IV

PAPER NO: 22 Hrs: 4 CODE NO:

ELECTIVE - V

INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS AND LABOUR WELFARE

Objective: To offer knowledge on managing industrial relations and the processes, regulations and the authorities regarding industrial relations.

UNIT – I

Concepts – Importance – Industrial relations problems in the public sector – Growth of Trade unions – Codes of conduct.

UNIT – II

Disputes – Impact – Causes – Strikes – Prevention – Industrial peace – Government machinery – Conciliation.

UNIT – III

Labour Welfare – Objectives – Scope – Need – Voluntary welfare measures – Statutory welfare measures – Labour – Welfare funds – Education and Training schemes.

UNIT – IV

Causes of Accidents – Prevention – Safety – Provisions – Industrial Health and Hygiene – Importance – Problems – Occupational hazards – Diseases – Psychological problems – Counselling - Statutory provisions.

861

UNIT – V

Child Labour – Female Labour – Contact Labour – Construction Labour – Agricultural Labour – Disabled – Welfare – Social Assistance – Social security – Implications.

Books References:

1. Mamoria C.B and Sathish Mamoria – ‘Dynamics of Industrial Relations’ – Himalaya Publishing House – New Delhi 1998. 2. Dwivedi R.S – ‘Human Relations & Organisational Behaviour’ – Macmillan India Ltd., New Delhi 1997. 3. Ratna Sen – ‘Industrial Relations in India’ – Shifting Paradigms, Macmillan India Ltd., New Delhi 2003. 4. Srivastava – ‘Industrial Relations and Labour Laws’ – Vikas 4th edition, 2000. 5. Venkata Ratnam C S – ‘Globalisation and Labour Management Relations’ – Response Books, 2001.

Web Reference: www.springer.com www.emeraldinsight.com

www.tatamcgrawhill.com www.onlinelibrary.wiley.com

862

,uhzpNkup fy;Y}up (jd;dhl;rp)>

nrd;id- 600 004

jkpo;j;Jiw

KJfiy - jkpo; ,yf;fpak;;

ghlj;jpl;lk;;

(2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;)

863

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 jkpo;j;Jiw KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;)

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hpj; jkpo;j;Jiwapy; 2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy; KJfiy jkpo; ,yf;fpaj;jpw;Fg; Gjpa ghlj;jpl;lk; tFf;fg;gl;Ls;sJ. mjw;Fhpa ghlj;jpl;lf;FOf; $l;lk; 28-02-2018 md;W eilngw;wJ. ghlj;jpl;lf;FO cWg;gpdh;fs;

t.vz; ghlj;jpl;lf;FO cWg;gpdh; ifnahg;gk;

1. Nguh. Kidth; g. mDuhjh

,izg;Nguhrphpah;

kw;Wk; jkpo;j;Jiwj; jiyth;>

gr;irag;gd; fy;Y}hp>

nrd;id – 600 030.

2. Nguh. jpUkjp. th. Qhdhk;gpif

,izg;Nguhrphpah;

kw;Wk; jkpo;j;Jiwj; jiyth;>

fhapNjkpy;yj; muR kfsph; fy;Y}hp

(jd;dhl;rp)>

nrd;id – 600 002.

3. Nguh. Kidth;. Nfh. fpU\;zd;

,izg;Nguhrphpah;> jkpo;j;Jiw>

864

khepyf; fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)>

nrd;id – 600 005.

4. Nguh. Kidth; e. fiythzp; ,izg;Nguhrphpah;

kw;Wk; jkpo;j;Jiwj; jiyth;>

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)>

nrd;id – 600 004.

5. Nguh. Kidth; ng. rptrf;jp

,izg;Nguhrphpah;> jkpo;j;Jiw>

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp(jd;dhl;rp)>

nrd;id – 600 004.

6. Nguh. Kidth; g.gj;kpdp

,izg;Nguhrphpah>; jkpo;j;Jiw>

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp(jd;dhl;rp)>

nrd;id – 600 004.

ghlj;jpl;lf;FO t.vz; ngau; ifnahg;gk;

1. Kidth; k.Nyhfehafp

2. Kidth; rp.fiykfs;

865

3. Kidth; R.jkpo;r;nry;tp

4. Kidth; ,u.rptrf;jp

5. Kidth; ,uh.mDuhjh

6. Kidth; ,uh.gpNukyjh

7. Kidth; nt.jkpourp

8. Kidth; ,uh.Uf;kzp

9. Kidth; gp.nt.Rrpyh

10 Kidth; eh.ky;ypfh

11. Kidth; ,uh.mUzh

12. jpUkjp `upzpMde;jd;

13. Kidth; ng.n[ah

866

14. Kidth; f.fpUj;jpfh

15. Kidth; tp.RFzh re;jpuhfhe;jhkzp 16. Kidth; f.GtNd];tup

17 Kidth; g.F.N`ku[pdp

18. Kidth; Nf.,uh.fkyh KUfd;

19. jpUkjp. k.f];J}hp gha;

20. Kidth; jphpGuRe;jhp fhh;j;jpNfad;

21. Kidth; g.KUNf];thp

867

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 jkpo;j;Jiw KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;)

kjpg;ngz;fs; tptuk;

mf kjpg;gPL 25 kjpg;ngz;fs; Gw kjpg;gPL 75 kjpg;ngz;fs; ------nkhj;jk; 100 kjpg;ngz;fs; ------mf kjpg;gPL

Njh;T : 5 kjpg;ngz;fs; fUj;juq;fk; : 5 kjpg;ngz;fs; khjphpj; Njh;T : 10 kjpg;ngz;fs; xg;gilg;G : 5 kjpg;ngz;fs; ------nkhj;jk; : 25 kjpg;ngz;;fs; ------

868

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 jkpo;j;Jiw KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) tpdhj;jhs; mikg;G

fhyk; : 3 kzp nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 75 nkhj;j myFfs; : 5

gphpT – m midj;J tpdhf;fSf;Fk; tpilaspf;f : (5x2= 10) (xt;nthU myfpypUe;Jk; xU tpdh ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. gphpT – M midj;J tpdhf;fSf;Fk; xU gf;f mstpdpy; tpilaspf;f : (5x4= 20) (xt;nthU myfpypUe;Jk; ,U tpdhf;fs; ,J my;yJ mJ vd;w Kiwapy; mikjy; Ntz;Lk;) 6. m (my;yJ) M 7. m (my;yJ) M 8. m (my;yJ) M 9. m (my;yJ) M 10. m (my;yJ) M gphpT – ,

869

vitNaDk; %d;W tpdhf;fSf;Ff; fl;Liu tbtpdpy; tpilaspf;f: (3x15= 45) (xt;nthU myfpypUe;Jk;; xU tpdh ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;.)

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. ********

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 jkpo;j;Jiw KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;)

SEM PAPER COURSE TITLE OF THE PAPERS SUBJECT UE IA TOTAL CREDIT HOURS NO. CODE

I I Core-I ,f;fhy ,yf;fpak; - ngz; 75 25 100 4 6 vOj;Jf;fs;

I II Core-II njhy;fhg;gpak; vOj;jjpfhuk; - I 75 25 100 4 6

I III Core-III njhy;fhg;gpak; nrhy;yjpfhuk; - I 75 25 100 4 6

I IV Core-IV nrt;tpay; ,yf;fpak; - I 75 25 100 4 6 (vl;Lj;njhif)

I V Core-V rq;ffhyk; 75 25 100 4 6

870

I I - SOFT SKILL – PAPER I 75 25 100 2 After college hours

II VI Core-VI njhy;fhg;gpak; vOj;jjpfhuk; - 75 25 100 4 6 II

II VII Core-VII njhy;fhg;gpak; nrhy;yjpfhuk; - 75 25 100 4 6 II

II VIII Core-VIII nrt;tpay; ,yf;fpak; - II 75 25 100 4 6 (gj;Jg;ghl;L)

II IX Elective-I mw ,yf;fpak; - jpUf;Fws; 75 25 100 3 4

II X Elective-II nghpahhpay; 75 25 100 3 4

II XI EDE – I jkpo;g; gz;ghl;L tuyhW - I 75 25 100 3 4

II II - SOFT SKILL - PAPER II 75 25 100 2 After college hours

II - INTERNSHIP 75 25 100 2 Outside college

III XII Core – IX njhy;fhg;gpak; nghUsjpfhuk; - I 75 25 100 4 6

III XIII Core – X fhg;gpak; - kzpNkfiy – I 75 25 100 4 6

III XIV Core – XI ,yf;fpaf; nfhs;iffs; 75 25 100 4 6

871

III XV Elective-III Muha;r;rp newpKiwfs; 75 25 100 3 4

III XVI Elective-IV rka ,yf;fpak; 75 25 100 3 4

III XVII EDE - II jkpo;g; gz;ghl;L tuyhW - II 75 25 100 3 4

III III -- SOFT SKILL - PAPER III 75 25 100 2 After college hours

Life Coping Skills for Success

IV XVIII Core - XII njhy;fhg;gpak; nghUsjpfhuk; - 75 25 100 4 6 II

IV XIX Core - XIII fhg;gpak; - kzpNkfiy - II 75 25 100 4 6

IV XX Core - XIV Ma;NtL 75 25 100 4 6

IV XXI Core - XV mfuhjpapay; 75 25 100 4 6

IV XXII Core-XVI jpuhtplnkhopfspd; xg;gpyf;fzk; 75 25 100 4 6

IV IV -- SOFT SKILL - PAPER IV 75 25 100 2 After college hours

Employability Skills

872

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE(AUTUNOMOUS),CHENNAI – 600 004 DEPARTMENT OF TAMIL - M.A., SYLLABUS (2018 – 2019 ONWARDS) SEM PAPER COURSE TITLE OF THE PAPERS SUBJECT UE IA TOTAL CREDIT HOUR NO. CODE S

I I Core-I 75 25 100 4 6

IKKAALA ILAKKIYAM - PEN EZHUTHUKKAL

I II Core-II 75 25100 4 6

THOLKAAPPIYAM EZHUTHTHATHIKAARAM - I

I III Core-III 75 25 100 4 6

THOLKAAPPIYAM CHOLLATHIKAARAM - I

I IV Core-IV 75 25 100 4 6

SEVVIYAL ILAKKIYAM – I (ETTUTHOKAI)

I V Core-V 75 25 100 4 6

SANGA KAALAM

II VI Core-VI 75 25 100 4 6

THOLKAAPPIYAM EZHUTHTHATHIKAARAM - II

II VII Core-VII 75 25 100 4 6

THOLKAAPPIYAM CHOLLATHIKAARAM - II

II VIII Core-VIII 75 25 100 4 6

SEVIEYAL ILAKKIYAM – II (PATHUPPATTU)

II IX Elective-I 75 25 100 3 4

ARA ILAKKIYAM - THIRUKKURAL

II X Elective-II 75 25 100 3 4

PERIYAARIYAL

873

II XI EDE – I 75 25 100 3 4

TAMIL PANPATTU VARALAARU – I

III XII Core – IX 75 25 100 4 6

THOLKAAPPIYAM PORULATHIKAARAM - I

III XIII Core – X 75 25 100 4 6

KAAPPIYAM – MANIMEGALAI – I

III XIV Core – XI ILAKKIYAK KOLGAIGAL 75 25 100 4 6

III XV Elective-III AARAICHI NERIMURAIGAL 75 25 100 3 4

III XVI Elective-IV SAMAYA ILAKKIYAM 75 25 100 3 4

III XVII EDE - II TAMIL PANPATTU VARALAARU – II 75 25 100 3 4

IV XVIII Core - XII 75 25 100 4 6

THOLKAPPIYAM PORULATHIKAARAM - II

IV XIX Core - XIII KAAPPIYAM – MANIMEGALAI – II 75 25 100 4 6

IV XX Core - XIV AAIVAEDU 75 25 100 4 6

IV XXI Core - XV AKARAATHI IYAL 75 25 100 4 6

IV XXII Core-XVI DRAVIDA MOZHIKALIN OPPILAKKANAM 75 25 100 4 6

874

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 jkpo;j;Jiw KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - Kjw;gUtk;

SEMESTER PAPERS COURSE TITLE OF THE PAPER SUBJECT CREDIT HOURS CODE

I I Core-I ,f;fhy ,yf;fpak; - ngz; 4 6 vOj;Jf;fs;

I II Core-II njhy;fhg;gpak; 4 6 vOj;jjpfhuk; - I

I III Core-III njhy;fhg;gpak; 4 6 nrhy;yjpfhuk; - I

I IV Core-IV nrt;tpay; ,yf;fpak; - I 4 6

(vl;Lj;njhif)

I V Core-V rq;ffhyk; 4 6

I I -- SOFT SKILL PAPER - I 2 outside college

hours

Kjyhkhz;L - ,uz;lhk;gUtk;

SEMESTER PAPERS COURSE TITLE OF THE PAPER SUBJECT CREDIT HOURS CODE

II VI Core-VI njhy;fhg;gpak; 4 6 vOj;jjpfhuk; - II

875

II VII Core-VII njhy;fhg;gpak; 4 6 nrhy;yjpfhuk; - II

II VIII Core-VIII nrt;tpay; 4 6 ,yf;fpak; - II

(gj;Jg;ghl;L)

II IX Elective - I mw ,yf;fpak; - 3 4 jpUf;Fws;

II X Elective - II nghpahhpay; 3 4

II XI EDE – I jkpo;g; gz;ghl;L 3 4 tuyhW – I (Extra Disciplinary)

II II -- SOFT SKILL PAPER- II 2 After College Hours

II INTERNSHIP PINTN 2 Outside College

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 jkpo;j;Jiw KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhk; Mz;L - %d;whk; gUtk;;

SEMESTER PAPERS COURSE TITLE OF THE PAPER SUBJECT CREDIT HOURS CODE

III XII Core – IX njhy;fhg;gpak; 4 6 nghUsjpfhuk; - I

III XIII Core – X fhg;gpak; - 4 6 kzpNkfiy - I

876

III XIV Core – XI ,yf;fpaf; 4 6 nfhs;iffs;

III XV Elective - III Muha;r;rp 3 4 newpKiwfs;

III XVI Elective - IV rka ,yf;fpak; 3 4

III XVII EDE – II jkpo;g; gz;ghl;L 3 4 tuyhW – II (Extra Disciplinary)

III III -- SOFT SKILL PAPER -III 2 After College Hours

,uz;lhk; Mz;L - ehd;fhk; gUtk;;

SEMESTER PAPERS COURSE TITLE OF THE PAPER SUBJECT CREDIT HOURS CODE

IV XVIII Core - XII njhy;fhg;gpak; 4 6 nghUsjpfhuk; - II

IV XIX Core - XIII fhg;gpak; - 4 6 kzpNkfiy – II

IV XX Core - XIV Ma;NtL 4 6

IV XXI Core - XV mfuhjpapay; 4 6

877

IV XXII Core -X VI jpuhtpl nkhopfspd; 4 6 xg;gpyf;fzk;

IV IV -- SOFT SKILL PAPER -IV 2 After College Hours

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 jkpo;j;Jiw KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - Kjw;gUtk;

SEMESTER PAPERS COURSE TITLE OF THE PAPER SUBJECT CREDIT HOURS CODE

I I Core-I ,f;fhy ,yf;fpak; - 4 6 ngz; vOj;Jf;fs;

I II Core-II njhy;fhg;gpak; 4 6 vOj;jjpfhuk; - I

I III Core-III njhy;fhg;gpak; 4 6 nrhy;yjpfhuk; - I

I IV Core-IV nrt;tpay; ,yf;fpak; - 4 6 I

(vl;Lj;njhif)

I V Core-V rq;ffhyk; 4 6

I I -- SOFT SKILL PAPER - I 2 outside college hours

878

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - Kjw;gUtk;

Core - I jhs; - I ,f;fhy ,yf;fpak; - ngz; vOj;Jf;fs; nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (credit) myF – 1 ngz;zpak; tpsf;fk; - ngz;zpak; Njhd;wf; fhuzk; - ngz;fSf;F thf;Fupik - ngz; tpLjiy ,af;fk; - ngz;zpaj;jpd; tsu;r;rp - ngz;zpaf; Nfhl;ghLfs; - kpjthjg; ngz;zpak; - khu;f;]pag; ngz;zpak; - Nrh~yprg; ngz;zpak; - jPtputhjg; ngz;zpak; - goik thjf; FLk;gk; rhu;e;j ngz;zpak; myF – 2 ,e;jpahtpy; ngz;zpak; mwpKfk; - ,e;jpag; ngz;fspd; r%f epiy - (1947 - Mk; Mz;L tiu) - Kd; Kaw;rpAk; r%f khw;wq;fSk; - ,e;jpa tuyhWfSk; ngz; vOj;Jk; - etPd ,yf;fpak; - Njhw;w tpsf;fKk; cUthf;fKk; - ngz;fs; vOj;Jyfpy; Eioe;jjw;fhd Njitfs; - 1947 – f;F Kd; vOjpa ngz; vOj;jhsu;fSk; mtu;jk; gilg;GfSk;. myF – 3 ngz; vOj;jhsh; rpWfij - mk;ig – fhl;by; xU khd; (Kjy; 12 rpWfijfs;) gazk; -1 - gazk; -2 - xUtu; kw;nwhUtu; - xl;lf rthup - jpf;F - kpDq;F - Muk;gf; fhyf; ftpijfs; - gpsh];bf; lg;ghtpy; guhrf;jp KjypNahu;… - thfdk; - fhl;by; xU khd; - gpuRupf;fg;glhj ifg;gpujp -flw;fiuapy; xU fhtpg; gps;isahu; myF – 4 ngz; vOj;jhsh; ftpij - khyjpikj;up – vdJ kJf;FLit (Njh;e;njLf;fg;gl;l 22 ftpijfs;) mk;kh (g.vz;. 15) - vd; Foe;ij gy thuq;fshfg; Ngrtpy;iy (gf;.vz;. 16>17) - kpjf;Fk; epyk; (gf;.vz;. 18>19) - tzf;fk; Njhou; (gf;.vz;. 20>21) - vdjd;Ng ru;kpsh (g.vz;. 22) nfLf rpe;ij fbJ ,ts; JzpNt (g.vz;. 23) - xl;lfq;fs; Fjpiufs; xU kPd;$il (gf;.vz;. 24>25) - KbTwhj Aj;jk; (g.vz;. 26) - cjpu tpij (g.vz;. 29) - fiyr;rpd;dk; (g.vz;. 31) - fy;yiw tPL (gf;.vz; 32>33) - ngz;nzd;Dk; epidT (g.vz;. 35) - rhl;rpf;F tu kWf;Fk; tdg;Ngr;rp (g.vz;. 38) – ejpf;fiu ehfuPfk; (gf;.vz;. 42>43) - jiytp gpupT (g.vz;. 44) - jPg;gw;wp vupAk; epu;thzk; (g.vz;. 45) - tpyq;Fg; gz;iz (gf;.vz;. 46>47) – ngUk; gilay; (gf;.vz;.52>53) - nfLf rpe;ij nfhbJ ,ts; gzpNt (g.vz;. 54) – nfhs;isau;fs; [hf;fpuij (gf;.vz;. 60>61) – vdJ kJf;FLit (gf;.vz;. 70>71) – fdT (g.vz;. 76)

879

myF -5 ngz; vOj;jhsh; fl;Liu - Kidtu; K. tsu;kjp – Rakupahij ,af;f tPuhq;fidfs; njhFjp I (Nju;e;njLf;fg;gl;l 10 fl;Liufs; - fl;Liu vz;fs; - 1>2>3>4>5>7>9>11>17>20) UJthd ngz;fs; ifjpapYk; Nflh – ngz;kf;fs; mbikAk; Mz;kf;fs; nfhLikAk; - khju; tpLjiy – khjUk; RakupahijAk; - ngz;fSf;Fr; nrhj;Jupik – Nryk; [py;yh Rakupahijg; ngz;fs; khehL – mu;j;jkw;w rlq;Ffis mbNahL xopAq;fs; - Raey Mz;fs; Mjpf;fk; Ntz;lhk; - NfhrhKiw xopf – ngz;fSk; njhopYk; ngz;fSk; njhopyhsu;fNs! ghlE}y; : 1. mk;ig - fhl;by; xU khd; fhyr;RtL gjpg;gfk;> Kjw;gjpg;G 2000> nrd;id 2. khyjp ikj;up - vdJ kJf;FLit> fhyr;RtL gjpg;gfk;> Kjw;gjpg;G 2014> nrd;id 3. Kidtu; K. tsu;kjp – Rakupahij ,af;f tPuhq;fidfs; njhFjp – I (njhFg;ghrpupau;) (fl;LiufSk; nrhw;nghopTfSk;) jkpo;kjp gjpg;gfk;> Kjw;gjpg;G 2002> jQ;rhT+u;. ghu;it E}y;fs; : 1. Kidth; (jpUkjp) r.Kj;Jr;rpjk;guk; - ngz;zpak; Njhw;wKk; tsu;r;rpAk;> Kj;Jg;gjpg;gfk;> Ie;jhtJ gjpg;G> mf;Nlhgu; 2005> jpUney;Ntyp. 2. Kidth; g.gj;kpdp – kwf;fg;gl;l gjpTfs; - ngz; vOj;J tuyhW 1896 - 1950> Gyk; gjpg;gfk;> Kjw;gjpg;G> Nk 2016> nrd;id 3. g.Kj;Jf;FkhuRthkp – New;W Kjy; ,d;W tiu ngz;zpak;> rptuQ;[dp gg;spNf~d;];> Kjw;gjpg;G> 2004> nrd;id 4. g.R.re;jpughG> ,y.jpyftjp – ngz; tuyhWk; tpLjiyf;fhd Nghuhl;lKk;> ghujp Gj;jfhyak;> Kjw;gjpg;G brk;gu; -2011> nrd;id 5. Kidtu; gp.vd;. gpNukyjh - ,e;jpag; ngz;fs; gz;ilaf; fhyk; Kjy; 1947 tiu> md;id njurh kfspu; gy;fiyf;fofk;> Kjw;gjpg;G 1997> nfhilf;fhdy; 6. nr.fNzrypq;fd; - ngz;zbik jPu> Fkud; gjpg;gfk;> Kjw;gjpg;G [_iy 1985> nrd;id 7. ngz;fSk; tpLjiyAk;> ,e;jpa khztu; rq;fk;> rTj;tp~d;> Kjw;gjpg;G> [dtup 2000> nrd;id. 8. uh[k;fpU~;zd; - fhyk;NjhWk; ngz;ik> jhfk; ntspaPL> Kjw;gjpg;G brk;gu; 1990> nrd;id. 9. Kidtu; gpNukh mUzhr;ryk; – guj;ijau; Kjy; gj;jpdpg; ngz;bu; tiu> md;id njurh kfspu; gy;fiyf;fofk;> nrd;id. 10. Kidtu; gpNukh mUzhr;ryk; - gj;jpdpj; nja;tq;fSk; guj;ijah; tPjpfSk; ( njhy;fhg;gpah; Kjy; rpj;jh; tiu ngz;fspd; rpj;jhpg;G) rTj; Vrpad; Gf;];> ,uz;lhtJ gjpg;G> nrg;-1994. 11. Kidtu; ,uh.gpNukh – fw;G – fyhr;rhuk;> jkpo;g;Gj;jfhyak;> Kjw;gjpg;G 2003>nrd;id 12. Kidtu; ,uh.gpNukh – ngz; vOj;Jf;fspd; murpay;;;> mwpT gjpg;gfk;> Kjw;gjpg;G 2007> nrd;id 13. m.ghf;fpak; - ngz;Fy tuyhW> kUjh gjpg;gfk;> Kjw;gjpg;G 2006> nrd;id. 14. r.jkpo;r;nry;td; - ngz;ik vd;nwhU fw;gpjk;> ghujp Gj;jfhyak;> ,uz;lhk; gjpg;G 2009> nrd;id 15. nghlhg; ngz;fs; (njhFg;G) – FUjpapy; kyu;e;j kfspu; jpdk;> uPdh ntspaPL> Kjw;gjpg;G khu;r; 2007> nrd;id.

880

16. md;Gf;furp> Nkhfd; yhu;gPu; (njhFg;G) – jypj; ngz;zpak;> Ky;iy mr;rfk;> ,uz;lhk; gjpg;G> Nk 2005> kJiu. 17. J.K.Pillai, K.Rajeswari – Readings in Women’ s Education, Mother Teresa women’ s University, First Published 1988, KodaiKanal (tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;.) 18. f.gQ;rhq;fk;> ngz; nkhop gilg;G(ngz;zpaf; fl;Liufs;)fht;ah ntspaPL> Kjy; gjpg;G> 2007> nrd;id

*****

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - Kjw;gUtk;

Core – II jhs;-II njhy;fhg;gpak; - vOj;jjpfhuk; - I nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (credit) myF 1 E}d;kuG myF 2

nkhopkuG myF 3

gpwg;gpay; myF 4

Gzupay;

881

myF 5

njhifkuG> cUgpay; ghlE}y; njhy;fhg;gpak;> vOj;jjpfhuk; - ,sk;g+uzu; ciu

(ciu El;gj;jpy; tpdhf;fs; mikjy; $lhJ) (tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk; ngwy; Ntz;Lk;)

********

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - Kjw;gUtk;

Core – III jhs;-III njhy;fhg;gpak; - nrhy;yjpfhuk; - I nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (credit) myF – 1

fpstpahf;fk;-1 nrhy;tif – cah;jpizAk; m/wpizAk; - cah;jpiz - %d;W ghy;fs; - Mz;ghy;> ngz;ghy;> gyh;ghy;; gytpd;ghy; ghy;> ,lk;> fhyk;> nrg;G> tpdh> kuG tOtikjp - ,aw;ifg;nghUs; - nraw;ifg; nghUisf; $Wk;

882

Kiw - tz;zr; rpidr; nrhy; mikAk; Kiw - ,aw;ngaUk; rpwg;Gg; ngaUk; mikAk; Kiw - NtW tpidg; nghJr; nrhy; - ,;ilf; fpstp - xU ngah;g; nghJr; nrhy; - xd;nwhop nghJr; nrhy; - gy nghUs; xU nrhy; - vLj;j nkhop ,dQ; nrg;gy;. myF -3 Ntw;Wikapay; myF -4

Ntw;Wik kaq;fpay; ; myF-5 tpspkuG ghlE}y; njhy;fhg;gpak;>nrhy;yjpfhuk; - Nrdhtiuah; ciu

(ciu El;gj;jpy; tpdhf;fs; mikjy; $lhJ) (tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;) ,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - Kjw;gUtk; Core – IV - jhs;-IV - nrt;tpay; ,yf;fpak; - I nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (Credit) myF – 1 FWe;njhif> ew;wpiz – fstpay; ghly;fs; - 20 ghly;fs;.

1. FWe;njhif – 10 ghly;fs;

jiytd;> ghq;fd; $w;Wfs; - FwpQ;rpj; jpiz ,aw;ifg; Gzu;r;rp - FWe;. 2> 300>70. ,le;jiyg;ghL – FWe;. 62. ghq;fw; $l;;lk; – FWe;. 129>78>206>204>280>58.

883

2. ew;wpiz – 10 ghly;fs; jiytp $w;W – nea;jy; jpiz Njhopapw; $l;lk; rpiwg;Gwk; – ew;. 388> 275> 94. xUtopj;jzj;jy; – ew;. 382> 338. tiutpil itj;Jg; nghUs;tapw; gpupT – ew;. 87>219>369. tiuT ePl;bj;j NghJ – ew;.249>218 myF – 2

mfehD}W> Iq;FWW}W – fw;gpay; ghly;fs; - 16 ghly;fs;

1. mfehD}W – 6 ghly;fs;

Njhop> guj;ijau; $w;Wf;fs; - kUjj; jpiz.

Njhop thapy; kWj;jJ – mf. 46> 96> 116. guj;jik – mf. 106>186>376

2. Iq;FWE}W – 10 ghly;fs;

nrtpypf; $w;Wfs; – Ky;iyj;jpiz

nrtpypf;$w;Wg;gj;J 1-10

myF – 3

jpUf;Fws; - fstpay;> fw;gpay; - fhkj;Jg;ghy; - 7 mjpfhuq;fs;; fstpay; (i) jif mzq;FWj;jy; - mjp. 109 (ii) Fwpg;gwpjy; - mjp. 110 (iii) myu; mwpTWj;jy; - mjp. 115 fw;gpay; (i) gpupthw;whik - mjp. 116 (ii) Gytp - mjp. 131 (iii) Gytp - mjp. 132 (iv) Cly; ctif - mjp. 133 myF – 4 GwehD}W – filnaO ts;sy;fs;; > kfspu; ghly;fs; > xUjpizg; ghly;fs; – 15 ghly;fs; (i) filnaO ts;sy;fs; - 7 ghly;fs; mjpakhd; - Gwk;. 91> ghup – Gwk;. 109> fhup – Gwk;. 125> Ma; - Gwk;. 127> Ngfd; - Gwk;. 143> es;sp – Gwk;. 148> Xup – Gwk;. 152

(ii) kfspu; ghly;fs; - 3 ghly;fs; fhtw;ngz;L - Gwk;. 86

884

ghup kfspu; - Gwk;. 112 ef;fz;izahu; (iff;fpis) - Gwk;. 55

(iii) xU jpizg; ghly;fs; - 5 nghJtpay; jpiz – Jiw – nghUz;nkhopf;fhQ;rp – Gwk;. 182> 185> 186> 187> 189. myF – 5 gjpw;Wg;gj;J> gupghly; - 8 ghly;fs; 1. gjpw;Wg;gj;J – Mwhk; gj;J – 5 ghly;fs; - 2> 3> 5> 8> 10 6 – Mk; gj;J – MLNfhl;ghl;Lr; Nruyhjidf; fhf;ifg; ghbdpahu; ghbait. 2. gupghly; - 3 ghly;fs; - nrt;Nts;> jpUkhy;> itia. ghl E}y;fs; : 1. FWe;njhif – c.Nt. rhkpehijau; gjpg;G, nrd;id. 2. ew;wpiz – fof ntspaPL> nrd;id. 3. mfehD}W – fof ntspaPL> nrd;id. 4. Iq;FWE}W – fof ntspaPL> nrd;id. 5. jpUf;Fws; - gupNkyofu; ciu> fof ntspaPL> nrd;id. 6. GwehD}W – c.Nt. rhkpehijau; gjpg;G> nrd;id. 7. gjpw;Wg;gj;J – fof ntspaPL> nrd;id. 8. gupghly; – fof ntspaPL> nrd;id.

(tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk; )

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - Kjw;gUtk;

Core – V - jhs; - V - rq;f fhyk; nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (Credit) myF – 1 gf;. 1-95

rq;fk; cz;ikAk; ,d;ikAk; - rq;f fhyk; - xU tiuaiw – njhy;fhg;gpaj;jpd; njhd;ik – njhy;fhg;gpaj;jpd; ngUik – njhy;fhg;gpak; - njhy;fhg;gpau; tpsf;fk; - njhy;fhg;gpau; fhyk; - njhy;fhg;gpau; tpsf;Fk; md;gpd; Ie;jpiz – njhy;fhg;gpau; md;gpd; Ie;jpizapy; guj;jik – njhy;fhg;gpau; tpsf;Fk; kuGfs;.

885

myF – 2 gf;. 96-182

jpUf;Fws; - Xu; cyfg; nghJkiw – jpUf;Fws; mikg;G Kiw – jpUts;Stu; fhyk; - jpUf;Fws; tpsf;Fk; md;gpd; Ie;jpiz - jpUf;Fwspy; GJikfs; (m) ts;Stu; tpsf;Fk; ,yf;fpa kuGfs; - rq;ffhy tho;tpy; jpUf;Fws; fz;l FiwghLfs; - njhif E}y;fs; njhFg;G Kiw – vl;Lj;njhif E}y;fs; njhFg;Gk; mikg;Gk; rpwg;gpay;GfSk;. myF – 3 gf;. 183-275

gj;Jg;ghl;L E}y;fs; - Mw;Wg;gil E}y;fs; - rpyg;gjpfhuk; - kzpNkfiy – Ie;jpizg; ghly;fs; Kjy;> fU> cupg;nghUl;fs; - mfg;ghly;fSk; ghiyg; ghly;fSk; - mfg;ghly;fspy; Gwr;nra;jpfs; - Kw;fhy> gpw;fhy mf ,yf;fpaq;fs; - Xu; xg;gPL – mwj;njhL epw;wYk; mjd; khz;Gk;. myF – 4 gf;. 276-362

tuyhw;Wr; nra;jpfs; - gz;ilj; jkpou; tho;T newpKiwfs; - Gwg;ghly;fisg; gpwehl;Lg; Gwg;ghly;fSld; xg;gply; - tbtKk; cs;slf;fKk; - cs;sthW Gidjy; - cs;Siw ctkKk; ,iwr;rpg;nghUSk; - eilaoF - ,aw;ifNahbiae;j tho;Tk; ,yf;fpaKk; - tho;tpd; Kg;ngUk; epiyfs; - njhopy;fs;.

myF – 5 gf;. 363-440

tzpfk; - fiyfs; - murpayikg;G - %Nte;ju; - rkanewp – rq;fg; Gytu; jdpj;jpwd; - gy;Jiw mwpT.

Kjd;ikg; ghh;it E}y;:

rq;ffhyk; - F. Kj;Juhrd; Njd;nkhopg; gjpg;gfk;> Nryk;. ghh;it E}y;fs;:

1. jkpo;f;fhjy; - t.Rg. khzpf;fk;. 2. jkpoh;newp - t.Rg. khzpf;fk;. 3. jkpoh;fiyfs; - kh. ,uhrkhzpf;fdhh;.

886

4. jkpoh; ehfhpfKk; gz;ghLk; - m. jl;rpzh%h;j;jp. 5. rq;ffhy tho;tpay; - K.rz;Kfk;gps;is cyfj;jkpohuha;r;rp ntspaPL. (tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;)

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - Kjw;gUtk;

PAPER - I - SOFT SKILL

ENGLISH nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : after college hours FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 2 (Credit)

887

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - ,uz;lhk; gUtk;

SEMESTER PAPERS COURSE TITLE OF THE PAPER SUBJECT CREDIT HOURS CODE

II VI Core-VI njhy;fhg;gpak; 4 6 vOj;jjpfhuk; - II

II VII Core-VII njhy;fhg;gpak; 4 6 nrhy;yjpfhuk; - II

II VIII Core-VIII nrt;tpay; 4 6 ,yf;fpak; - II

(gj;Jg;ghl;L)

II IX Elective - I mw ,yf;fpak; - 3 4 jpUf;Fws;

II X Elective - II nghpahhpay; 3 4

II XI EDE – I jkpo;g; gz;ghl;L 3 4 tuyhW - I (Extra Disciplinary)

II II -- SOFT SKILL PAPER- II 2 After College Hours

II Internship PINTN 2 Outside College

888

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - ,uz;lhk; gUtk;

Core – VI jhs;-VI - njhy;fhg;gpak; - vOj;jjpfhuk; - II nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (credit)

myF 1 - capu;kaq;fpay; myF 2 - Gs;sp kaq;fpay; - 1

Q> z> e> k> d> vd;Dk; nky;ypd my;topg; nghUz;ikfspy; GzUk; NghJ Vw;gLk; khw;wq;fs; myF 3 - Gs;sp kaq;fpay; - 2

a> u> y> t> o> s vd;Dk; my;topg; nghUz;ikfspy; GzUk;NghJ Vw;gLk; khw;wq;fs; myF 4 - Fw;wpaYfug; Gzupay;-1

Fw;wpaYfuj;jpd; ,ay;G - Fw;wpaYfug; nghJg;Gzh;r;rp - Fw;wpaYfur; rpwg;Gg;

Gzh;r;rp - tpdhg;ngah; - Rl;Lg;ngah; - jpirg;ngah;g; Gzh;r;rp. myF 5 - Fw;wpaYfug; Gzupay;-2

Fw;wpaYfu vz;Zg;ngah; ngah;r;rp - gj;Jld; vz;Zg; ngah;fs; ; - msT> epiwg; ngah;fs;

- xd;gjd; Gzh;r;rp - E}W – Mapuk; Mfpatw;wpd; Gwdil.

Kjd;ikg; ghh;it E}y;; : njhy;fhg;gpak;> vOj;jjpfhuk; - ,sk;g+uzh; ciu

889

(ciu El;gj;jpy; tpdhf;fs; mikjy; $lhJ)

(tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;)

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - ,uz;lhk; gUtk;

Core-VII - jhs; - VII - njhy;fhg;gpak; nrhy;yjpfhuk; - II nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (credit)

myF 1 - ngaupay; myF 2 - tpidapay; myF 3 - ,ilapay; myF 4 - cupapay; myF 5 - vr;rtpay;

ghl E}y;;

njhy;fhg;gpak;> nrhy;yjpfhuk; - Nrdhtiuah; ciu

(ciu El;gj;jpy; tpdhf;fs; mikjy; $lhJ) (tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;);

890

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - ,uz;lhk; gUtk;

Core – VIII - jhs;-VIII - nrt;tpay; ,yf;fpak; II – gj;Jg;ghl;L nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (Credit)

gj;Jg;ghl;L E}y;fs; myF – 1 rpWghzhw;Wg;gil - (1 - 269 mbfs;) myF – 2 kJiuf;fhQ;rp - (1 - 262 mbfs;) myF – 3 kJiuf;fhQ;rp - (263 - 535 mbfs;) myF – 4 kJiuf;fhQ;rp - (536 – 780 mbfs;) myF – 5 FwpQ;rpg;ghl;L KOtJk; - (1 - 261 mbfs;) ghlE}y;fs; :

1. rpWghzhw;Wg;gil - fof ntspaPL> nrd;id

2. kJiuf;fhQ;rp - fof ntspaPL> nrd;id

3. FwpQ;rpg;ghl;L - fof ntspaPL> nrd;id ghh;it E}y;fs; :

1. gj;Jg;ghl;L Muha;r;rp - kh.,uhrkhzpf;fdhh;

( tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk; )

891

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;)

Kjyhkhz;L - ,uz;lhk; gUtk;

tpUg;gg;ghlk; - I(Elective – I) jhs; - IX mw ,yf;fpak; - jpUf;Fws; nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 60 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 4 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 3 (Credit)

myF – 1

mwd; typaWj;jy; - md;Gilik - ,dpait$wy; - nra;ed;wpmwpjy; - eLTepiyik – mlf;fKilik – xOf;fKilik myF – 2

nghiwAilik – mOf;fhwhik – nt/fhik – Gwq;$whik – gadpynrhy;yhik – jPtpidar;rk; - xg;Gutwpjy; myF - 3

mUSilik – Gyhy; kWj;jy; - $lhnthOf;fk; - fs;shik – tha;ik – ntFshik - ,d;dhnra;ahik myF – 4

ngupahiuj; JizNfhly; - rpw;wpdk; Nruhik – njupe;J nray;tif – typ mwpjy; - fhyk; mwpjy; - ,ld; mwpjy; - njupe;J njspjy; myF – 5

el;ghuha;jy; - jP el;G - $lh el;G - cl;gif – ngupahiug;gpioahik – rhd;whz;ik – gz;Gilik

892

ghlE}y;

jpUf;Fws; - jpUts;Stu;> gupNkyofu; ciu> rhujh gjpg;gfk;> nrd;id Kjw;gjpg;G Vg;uy; 2002> ghu;it E}y; :

1. jpUf;Fws; - K.tujuhrdhu; ciu> ghup epiyak;> nrd;id. 2. mw,yf;fpaf; fsQ;rpak; - Kidth; f.g.mwthzd; 3. GjpaNehf;fpy; jkpopyf;fpa tuyhW – Kidth; jkpoz;zy;

(tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;)

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - ,uz;lhk; gUtk;

tpUg;gg;ghlk; - II (Elective – II) jhs; - X - ngupahupay; nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 60 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 4 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 3 (Credit)

myF 1; nghpahUk; r%fr; #oYk;

nghpahh; <.nt.uh. gpwg;G - r%fr; #oy; - Rakhpahij ,af;fj;ijj; njhlq;Fjy; - GNuhfpj xopg;Gj; jpUkzj;ij mwpKfg;gLj;Jjy; - Nfhtpy; EioTg; Nghuhl;lk.; myF 2 nghpahUk; jkpOk;

893

jkpo;nkhopf;fhg;G - jkpo; vOj;Jr; rPh;jpUj;jk; - jkpo;nkhop tsh;r;rp - jkpo; ,yf;fpaj;jpw;F <.nt.uhtpd; gq;fspg;G myF 3 nghpahUk; ngz;zpaKk;

ngz;zpak; Xh; mwpKfk; - nghpahhpd; ngz;zpar; rpe;jidfs; ifk;ngz; kWkzk;> Foe;ij kzk; - kztpyf;F chpik - ngz;fSf;Fr;

nrhj;Jhpik - MZf;Fg; ngz; rhpepfh;. myF 4 nghpahUk; ,jopaw; gzpfSk;

nghpahhpd; ,jopaw; gzpfs; - nghpahhpd; Nfhl;ghLfs; ngw;w nray; tbtq;fs; muR Mizfs;. myF 5 nghpahUk; murpaw; gzpfSk;

murpay; gzp - tFg;G thhp chpik (,l xJf;fPl;Lr; rpf;fy;) - ,e;jpa murpay; rl;lj;jpy; ,;l xJf;fPl;Lf;F ePjpkd;wq;fspd; nray;ghL - kf;fs; ehaf muR - tpsf;fk;.

ghh;it E}y;fs;

1. nghpahhpay; - kh.ed;dd; 2. nghpahhpak; - ,uh.rf;Fgha; 3. ngz;zpak; Njhw;wKk; tsh;r;rpAk; - Kj;Jr;rpjk;guk; 4. nghpahh; <.nt.uh. rpe;jidfs; - Nt.MidKj;J jkpo;g;Gj;jfhyak;>nrd;id -17. (tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;)

894

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - ,uz;lhk; gUtk; tpUg;gg; ghlk; -I- EDE - I - jhs; - XI – jkpo;g; gz;ghl;L tuyhW – I (gpw Jiw khztpau;f;FupaJ) nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 60 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 4 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 3 (Credit) myF – 1

ehfhpfKk; gz;ghLk; - rq;f fhyj;J murpay; epiy – rq;f fhyj; njhopw;gpuptpdUk; r%f mikg;Gk;. myF – 2

jkpo;ehl;L tzpf tsk; - gz;ilj; jkpoupd; czT> cil> ciwAs;. myF – 3

gz;ilj; jkpoupd; fy;tpepiy – gz;ilj; jkpoupd; thdpay; mwpT – rq;fj; jkpoupd; rka tho;T. myF – 4

rq;f fhy tpohf;fs; - goe;jkpoupd; ek;gpf;iffs; - jkpou; fz;l ey;ywk;. myF – 5

,irf;fiyapd; tuyhW – jkpofr; rpw;gf;fiy.

Kjd;ikg; ghh;it E}y; :

jkpou; ehfupfKk; gz;ghLk; Kidtu; m. jl;rpzh%u;j;jp Ie;jpizg; gjpg;gfk;> nrd;id jpUj;jpa kWgjpg;G – 2016. ghh;it E}y;fs;;:

1. jkpoff; fiyfs; - lhf;lh;. kh.,uhrkhzpf;fdhh; 2. jkpof tuyhWk; gz;ghLk; - Nf.Nf.gps;is

895

3. jkpoh; tsh;j;j moFf;fiyfs; - kapiy.rPdp.Ntq;flrhkp 4. Ez;fiyfs; - kapiy.rPdp.Ntq;flrhkp (tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;) ,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;)

Kjyhkhz;L - ,uz;lhk; gUtk;

PAPER - II SOFT SKILL nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 2 (Credit)

896

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) Kjyhkhz;L - ,uz;lhk; gUtk;

gbg;gpilg; gapw;rp (INTERNSHIP)

nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 21 ehl;fs; FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 2 (Credit)

897

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhkhz;L - %d;whk; gUtk;

SEMESTER PAPERS COURSE TITLE OF THE PAPER SUBJECT CREDIT HOURS CODE

III XII Core – IX njhy;fhg;gpak; 4 6 nghUsjpfhuk; - I

III XIII Core – X fhg;gpak; - 4 6 kzpNkfiy - I

III XIV Core – XI ,yf;fpaf; 4 6 nfhs;iffs;

III XV Elective - III Muha;r;rp 3 4 newpKiwfs;

III XVI Elective - IV rka ,yf;fpak; 3 4

III XVII EDE – II jkpo;g; gz;ghl;L 3 4 tuyhW - II (Extra Disciplinary)

898

III III -- SOFT SKILL PAPER -III 2 After College

Hours ,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhkhz;L - %d;whk; gUtk;

Core - IX jhs; - XII njhy;fhg;gpak; nghUsjpfhuk; - I nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (Credit)

myF-1 - mfj;jpizapay; myF 2 - Gwj;jpizapay; myF 3 - fstpay; myF 4 - fw;gpay; myF 5 - nghUspay;

ghlE}y; : njhy;fhg;gpa> nghUsjpfhuk; - ,sk;g+uzu; ciu

(ciu El;gj;jpy; tpdhf;fs; mikjy; $lhJ)

(tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk; ngwy; Ntz;Lk;)

899

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhkhz;L - %d;whk; gUtk;

Core - X jhs; - XIII fhg;gpak; - kzpNkfiy -1 nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4

(Credit) myF -1

tpohtiw fhij – CuyUiuj;j fhij – kyu;tdk; Gf;f fhij myF – 2

gspf;fiwGf;f fhij – kzpNkfyhnja;tk; te;JNjhd;wpa fhij rf;futhsf; Nfhl;lKiuj;j fhij myF -3

JapnyOg;gpa fhij – kzpgy;ytj;Jj;JaUw;w fhij – gPbif fz;L gpwg;Gzu;e;j fhij – ke;jpuq; nfhLj;j fhij myF – 4

ghj;jpuk; ngw;w fhij – mwtzu;j;njhOj fhij – MGj;jpud; jpwkwptpj;j fhij myF – 5

ghj;jpukuG $wpa fhij – ghj;jpuq;nfhz;L gpr;irGf;f fhij – Mjpiu gpr;irapl;l fhij ghlE}y; :

kzpNkfiy – kJiur; $ythzpfd; rPj;jiyr;rhj;jdhu; lhf;lu; c.Nt.rh. gjpg;G> c.Nt.rh E}y;epiyak;> vl;lhk; gjpg;G 2008> nrd;id.

900

ghh;it E}y;fs;:

1. kzpNkfiy – e.K.Ntq;flrhkp ehl;lhh;> xsit R. Jiurhkpg;gps;is jpUney;Ntyp njd;dpe;jpa irt rpj;jhe;j E}w;gjpg;Gf; fofk; ypkpnll;> nrd;id – 18. Kjw;gjpg;G - jprk;gh; 1985. 2. kzpNkfiy xU Gjpa ghh;it - Kidth; eh.nrag;gpufhR thdjp gjpg;gfk;> nrd;id. Kjw;gjpg;G: brk;gh; 1999

3. fhtpa fhyk; E}w;fsQ;rpak; njhFjp: 3 - Nguhrphpah; v];.itahGhpg;gps;is> itahGhpg;gps;is epidT kd;wk;. 4. kzpNkfiyAk; nka;apaYk; - g.M. Kidth; ,uh. rPdpthrd;> khepyf; fy;Y}hp> nrd;id.

(tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk; ngwy; Ntz;Lk;)

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhkhz;L - %d;whk; gUtk;

Core – XI jhs; - XIV - ,yf;fpaf; nfhs;iffs; nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (credit) myF - 1

,yf;fpaf;nfhs;if - tpsf;fk; - jpwdha;T - ciuahrphpah;fspd; ciuj;jpwd; - jkpo; ,yf;fpaf; nfhs;iffs; - cUtKk; cs;slf;fKk; - rq;f ,yf;fpa cj;jp - njhy;fhg;gpahpd; ,yf;fpaf; nfhs;iffs;.

901

myF - 2

njhy;fhg;gpahpd; jpizf;Nfhl;ghL - fw;gidAk; ntWq; fw;gidAk; - eil - jd;Dzh;r;rpg; ghly; - fij nghjp ghly; - Guhzk;. myF - 3

Ik;ngUq;fhg;gpaq;fs; - IQ;rpWfhg;gpaq;fs; - fPo;f;fzf;F E}y;fs; - gf;jp ,yf;fpak; - gy;yth; fhyk; - rpw;wpyf;fpak;. myF - 4

ftpij - ehty; (Gjpdk;) Kd;Ndhb ehty;fs; myF - 5

jkpo; ehty;fspd; Nehf;Fk; Nghf;Fk; - rpWfij - ehlfk; - fl;Liu ghh;it E}y;fs;:

1. jpwdha;Tk; jkpo; ,yf;fpaf; nfhs;iffSk; - e. gpr;r%h;j;jp

2. ,yf;fpaf; Nfhl;ghLfs; - lhf;lh;. Kj;J rz;Kfd;

3. ,yf;fpaj; jpwdha;T - f.ghyr;re;jpud;

4. ,yf;fpaj;jpwd; - lhf;lh;. K.t

(tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;) ,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhkhz;L - %d;whk; gUtk; tpUg;gg;ghlk; - III (Elective – III) jhs; - XV Muha;r;rp newpKiwfs; nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 60 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 4 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 3 (Credit)

902

myF – 1

Ma;T tpsf;fk; – jj;Jtk; fiy mwptpay; - Ma;Tyf ehfhpfk; - ciuahrphpah;fs; fz;l Ma;TKiw. myF – 2

Ma;T nkhopeil - tuyhw;W Nehf;fpy; Ma;T tsh;r;rp – Ma;T tsh;r;rpAk; Ma;Tj;JiwfSk; - Ma;tpaypy; rpy mbg;gilf; Nfhl;ghLfs;. myF – 3

Ma;T Kiwfs; - cj;jpfs; - Nehf;Ffs; my;yJ mZFKiwfs; - jfty; jpul;ly; - fs Ma;T – mbf;Fwpg;G. myF – 4

Nkw;Nfhshl;rp – glq;fSk; ml;ltizfSk; - crhj;Jizf; Fwpg;G – gpd;dpizg;G – Ma;Tj;jpl;lk; - Ma;Ntl;L mikg;G – E}Yk; Ma;NtLk;. myF – 5

jkpoha;Tg; gug;G – jkpopaYk; gpwJiwfSk; - Ma;Tyfpy; jkpopay; - rKjha Kd;Ndw;wj;jpy; Ma;tpd; gq;F – Ma;Tr; rKjhak; - ,izg;Gfs;. ghh;it E}y;fs;;; :

1.. Muha;r;rp newpKiwfs; - Kidth; nghw;Nfh Ie;jpizg; gjpg;gfk; > 279> ghujp rhiy> jpUty;ypf;Nfzp> nrd;id – 600 005.

2. Ma;tpay; mwpKfk; - lhf;lh; jkpoz;zy; kh.,yf;Fkzd;

3. Muha;r;rp newpKiwfs; - Kidth; nghd;Drhkp

(tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;)

903

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhkhz;L - %d;whk; gUtk;

tpUg;gg;ghlk; - IV (Elective – IV) தாள் - XVI - rka ,yf;fpak; nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 60 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 4 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 3 (Credit) myF 1

Njthuk; - jpUehTf;furh; - Mwhk; jpUKiw - jpUneLe;jhz;lfk; - 40 ghly;fs;

1. Nfhapy; - nghpa jpUj;jhz;lfk; 2. Nfhapy; - Gf;f jpUj;jhz;lfk; 3. jpUmjpif tPul;lhdk; - Vioj; jpUj;jhz;lfk; 4. jpUmjpif tPul;lhdk; - milahsj; jpUj;jhz;lfk; myF 2 vl;lhk; jpUKiw - jpUthrfk; - khzpf;fthrfh; - Nghw;wpj; jpU mfty; myF 3 gd;dpuz;lhk; jpUKiw - nghpa Guhzk; – Nrf;fpohh;

1. Fq;Fypaf;fya ehadhh; Guhzk; - 35 ghly;fs; 2. tpwd;kpz;l ehadhh; Guhzk; - 11 ghly;fs; myF 4

FyNrfu Mo;thh; - ngUkhs; jpUnkhop 1. Ma;r;rpah; Cly; - “ Vh;kyh;….” 10 ghRuq;fs; (698-707) 2. Njtfp Gyk;gy; - “ MiyePs;…” 10 ghRuq;fs; (708-718) 3. Nfhriy jhyhl;L - “ kd;DGfo;…” - 10 ghRuq;fs; (719-729) 4. jrujd; Gyk;gy; - “ td;jhspid…” - 10 ghRuq;fs; (730-740) myF 5 njhz;lubg; nghbaho;thh; - jpUkhiy KOtJk; (45 ghly;fs;)

904

ghl E}y;fs; :

1. Njthuj; jpUg;gjpfq;fs; - Mwhk; jpUKiw – fq;if Gj;jf epiyak;;> jp.efh;> nrd;id. 2. jpUthrfk; - vl;lhk; jpUKiw – mUs;Rlh; gjpg;gfk;> nrd;id. 3. nghpa Guhzk; - Nrf;fpohh; Muha;r;rp ikak;> nrd;id. 4. ehyhapu jpt;a gpuge;jk; - g.M. tpj;thd; rp. Ntq;flrhkp nul;bahh;> jpUNtq;flj;jhd; jpUkd;wk;;> nrd;id.

ghh;it E}y;fs; :

1. gd;dpU jpUKiw tuyhW – f. nts;is thuzdhh; mz;zhkiyg; gy;fiyf; fof ntspaPL 2. nghpaGuhzr; nrhw;nghopTfs; - fof ntspaPL 3. FyNrfu Mo;thh; tsh;j;j gf;jpg;ngUk;gaph; - Kidth; k.Nyhfehafp jpUkiy jpUg;gjp Njtj;jhd ntspaPL

(tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngwy; Ntz;Lk;)

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhkhz;L - %d;whk; gUtk; tpUg;gg; ghlk; -II- EDE - II - jhs; - XVII – jkpo;g; gz;ghl;L tuyhW – II (gpw Jiw khztpaUf;FupaJ) nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 60 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 4 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 3 (Credit) myF – 1 jkpoff; Nfhapw; fl;blf;fiy tsu;r;rp – Xtpaf;fiy. myF – 2

905

$j;Jf;fiy – kUj;Jtf;fiy – ehlff;fiy. myF – 3 ePjpj;Jiwapd; tuyhW - jkpo;ehl;lurpaypy; tupfs; - jkpoff; fhRfspd; tuyhW - cs;shl;rp kd;wq;fspd; tuyhW. myF – 4

,ilf;fhyj; njhopw; rq;fq;fs; - rq;f fhyj;jpw;Fg; gpd; rhjpfspd; tsu;r;rp – rhjpnahopg;G Kaw;rpfs; - jkpo;g; gz;ghl;by; Mq;fpy Ml;rpapd; nry;thf;F. myF – 5

kfspu; epiy - tha;nkhop ,yf;fpaq;fSk; jkpo;g;gz;ghLk; - gonkhopAk; gz;ghLk;.

Kjd;ikg; ghh;it E}y; : jkpou; ehfupfKk; gz;ghLk; Kidtu; m. jl;rpzh%u;j;jp Ie;jpizg; gjpg;gfk;> nrd;id jpUj;jpa kWgjpg;G – 2016. ghh;it E}y;fs; :

1. jkpoff; fiyfs; - lhf;lh;. kh.,uhrkhzpf;fdhh; 2. jkpof tuyhWk; gz;ghLk; - lhf;lh;. Nf.Nf.gps;is cyfj; jkpohuha;r;rp epWtdk;> nrd;id> kWgjpg;G -2000. 3. jkpoh; tsh;j;j moFf;fiyfs; - kapiy.rPdp.Ntq;flrhkp 4. Ez;fiyfs; - kapiy.rPdp.Ntq;flrhkp (tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;) ,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhkhz;L – ehd;fhk; gUtk;

906

SEMESTER PAPERS COURSE TITLE OF THE PAPER SUBJECT CREDIT HOURS CODE

IV XVIII Core - XII njhy;fhg;gpak; 4 6 nghUsjpfhuk; - II

IV XIX Core - XIII fhg;gpak; - 4 6 kzpNkfiy – II

IV XX Core - XIV Ma;NtL 4 6

IV XXI Core - XV mfuhjpapay; 4 6

IV XXII Core - XVI jpuhtpl nkhopfspd; 4 6 xg;gpyf;fzk;

IV IV -- SOFT SKILL PAPER -IV 2 After College Hours

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhkhz;L – ehd;fhk; gUtk;

Core-XII jhs; - XVIII - njhy;fhg;gpak; - nghUsjpfhuk; - II nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100

907

(Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (Credit)

myF 1 - nka;g;ghl;bay; myF 2 - ctkapay; myF 3 - nra;Aspay; (E}w;gh 1 Kjy; 103 tiu) myF 4 – nra;Aspay; (E}w;gh 104 Kjy; 243 tiu) myF 5 - kugpay; ghlE}y; :

njhy;fhg;gpak;> nghUsjpfhuk; - ,sk;g+uzu; ciu

(ciu El;gj;jpy; tpdhf;fs; mikjy; $lhJ) (tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk; ngwy; Ntz;Lk;)

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhkhz;L – ehd;fhk; gUtk;

Core-XIII jhs; - XIX - fhg;gpak; - kzpNkfiy – II nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (Credit)

908

myF – 1

cyftwtp Gf;f fhij – cjaFkud; mk;gyk; Gf;f fhij – rpiwf; Nfhl;lk; mwf;Nfhl;lkhf;fpa fhij myF – 2

cja Fkuidf; fhQ;rdd; thshnywpe;j fhij – fe;jpw;ghit tUtJiuj;j fhij myF - 3

rpiwnra; fhij – rpiwtpL fhij myF – 4

MGj;jpud; ehlile;j fhij – MGj;jpuNdhL kzpgy;ytkile;j fhij myF – 5

tQ;rpkh efu;Gf;f fhij – gtj;jpwk; mWnfdg; ghit Nehw;w fhij

ghlE}y;:

kzpNkfiy – kJiur; $ythzpfd; rPj;jiyr;rhj;jdhu; lhf;lu; c.Nt.rh. gjpg;G> c.Nt.rh E}y;epiyak;> vl;lhk; gjpg;G 2008> nrd;id. ghh;it E}y;fs;:

1. kzpNkfiy e.K.Ntq;flrhkp ehl;lhh;> xsit R. Jiurhkpg;gps;is jpUney;Ntyp njd;dpe;jpa irt rpj;jhe;j E}w;gjpg;Gf; fofk; ypkpnll;> nrd;id – 18. Kjw;gjpg;G - jprk;gh; 1985.

2. kzpNkfiy xU Gjpa ghh;it

Kidth; eh.nrag;gpufhR thdjp gjpg;gfk;> nrd;id. Kjw;gjpg;G: brk;gh; 1999.

3;. fhtpa fhyk; E}w;fsQ;rpak;:njhFjp: 3

Nguhrphpah; v];.itahGhpg;gps;is> itahGhpg;gps;is epidT kd;wk;.

909

4. kzpNkfiyAk; nka;apaYk;

g.M. Kidth; ,uh. rPdpthrd;> khepyf; fy;Y}hp> nrd;id.

Fwpg;G :

27 - rkaf; fzf;fh; jpwq;Nfl;l fhij> 28 - fr;rp khefh; Gf;f fhij> 29 - jtj;jpwk; G+z;L jUkq; Nfl;l fhij vDk; ,k;%d;W fhijfs; ePq;fyhf kzpNkfiy KOtJk; ,lk;ngWfpwJ. ,e;j %d;W fhijfspYk; tpdhf;fs; Kw;wpYkhfj; jtpu;f;fgl Ntz;Lk;.

(tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk; ngwy; Ntz;Lk;)

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhkhz;L – ehd;fhk; gUtk;

Core-XIV jhs; - XX – Ma;NtL nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (Credit)

khztpah; 40 gf;fq;fspy; jpl;l Ma;Ntl;bid mspj;jy; Ntz;Lk;.

910

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhkhz;L – ehd;fhk; gUtk;

Core – XV jhs; - XXI - mfuhjpapay; nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (credit) myF-1 mfuhjp tuyhW – (gf;fk; 25 Kjy; 73 tiu – 48 gf;fq;fs;)

mfuhjp tuyhW - epfz;L - epfz;L nrhy; %yk; - epfz;L E}yikg;G - Nehf;fPl;L kuG tsu;r;rp - epfz;L tuyhW - ,Unkhop gd;nkhop mfuhjpfs;-fiyf;fsQ;rpak; myF-2 mfuhjp tiffs; - (gf;fk; 74 Kjy; 126 tiu – 52 gf;fq;fs;)

mfuhjp tifg;ghL - fiyf;fsQ;rpak; - nkhop mfuhjpfs; - fhyKiw mfuhjpfs; - Fwpj;j fhyepiy mfuhjpfs; - rpwg;gfuhjpfs; myF-3 mfuhjp cUthf;fk; - 1 (gf;fk; 234 Kjy; 275 tiu 41 gf;fq;fs;)

jpl;lkplYk; juT %yr; Nrfupg;Gk; - mfuhjp cUthf;fg; gbepiyfs; - mfuhjpj; jpl;lk; - nrhy; njupT - mfuhjpr; nrhw;#oy; - gjpTj; njupT - vOj;Jj;jutpyh nkhopAk; juTr; Nrfupg;Gk; myF-4 mfuhjp cUthf;fk; - 2 (gf;fk; 322 Kjy; 379 tiu 57 gf;fq;fs;)

gjpg;Gg; gzpAk; gjpTf; fl;LkhdKk; - mfuhjpg; gjpTf; $Wfs; - jiyr;nrhy; - nghUl;gFjp myF-5 mr;Rg;gbj; jahupj;jy; - mfuhjpg; Gwg;gFjp - gad;ghl;lhsu;; Fwpg;G (gf;fk; 380 Kjy; 396> 397 Kjy; 424 tiu> gf;fk; 444 Kjy; 456 tiu 55 gf;fq;fs;).

tpsf;ff; Fwpg;Gfs; - Fwpg;ghd;fs; - nrhy; tupir Kiw - nghUz;ik epuy; - mfu tupir - gpw tupir Kiwfs; - gjpT tupir Kiw - xU nghUs; gy nrhy; gjpT> gy;nghUs; nrhy;

911

gjpT> xg;Gunrhy; gjpT . gjpTj; njhFg;G - njhlu;g; gjpT . mfuhjpg; Gwg;gFjp - mfuhjpapd; Kw;gFjp> gpd;dpizg;Gg; gFjp.

Kjd;ikg; ghh;it E}y; :

jkpo; mfuhjpapay; - Kidtu; ng. khijad;.

ghu;it E}y;:

jkpo; mfuhjpapay; tsu;r;rp tuyhW - Kidtu; t.n[aNjtd;.

(tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk.;)

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhkhz;L – ehd;fhk; gUtk;

Kjd;ikg;ghlk; - XVI - Core - XVI – jhs; - XXII

jpuhtpl nkhopfspd; xg;gpyf;fzk; nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : 90 FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : 6 kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 4 (Credit) myF – 1

nkhopAk; nkhopapaYk; - tuyhw;Wf;F Kw;gl;l nkhopepiy Ma;T – jpuhtpl nkhopf;FLk;g xg;gha;tpd; tuyhW – jpuhtpl nkhopfSk; cl;gpupTfSk; - njd; jpuhtpl nkhopfs;. myF - 2

912

eLj;jpuhtpl nkhopfs; - tl jpuhtpl nkhopfs; - xypAk; gpwg;Gk; - capnuhypfspd; ,iaGk; jpupGk; - xyp khw;wq;fs; (capnuhypfs;). myF - 3

nka;nahypfspd; ,iaGk; jpupGk; - nka;nahyp khw;wq;fs; - cUgd;fSk; nrhy;yhf;fKk;. myF – 4

ngau;r; nrhw;fs; : ,lk;> jpiz> ghy;> vz; czu;j;Jk; Kiw – Ntw;Wikfs; - %tplg; ngau;fs; - vz;Zg; ngau;fs; - tpidr;nrhw;fspd; mikg;Gk; rpwg;Gk;. myF – 5

tpid tiffs; - tpidr;nrhw;fs; fhyq;fhl;Lk; Kiw – vr;rq;fSk; Kw;Wf;fSk; - tpidabahfg; gpwf;Fk; ngau;fs; - tpidg; nghUl;fs; - jpuhtpl nkhopfspd; njhluikg;G.

Kjd;ikg; ghh;it E}y; :

jpuhtpl nkhopfspd; xg;gha;T (Xh; mwpKfk;) lhf;lh; [p.[hd; rhKNty; Mrpatpay; epWtdk;> nrd;id Ie;jhk; gjpg;G – 2001. ghh;it E}y;fs; :

1. jpuhtpl nkhopfs; - I - Nguh.r.mfj;jpaypq;fdhh; kzpthrfh; gjpg;gfk; ghhpKid> nrd;id Mwhk;gjpg;G – 2016. 2. jpuhtpl nkhopfs; - II - Nguh.r.mfj;jpaypq;fdhh; kzpthrfh; gjpg;gfk; ghhpKid> nrd;id Mwhk;gjpg;G – 2016.

(tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;.)

913

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 KJfiy - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ,uz;lhkhz;L – ehd;fhk; gUtk;

PAPER - IV - SOFT SKILL nkhj;j kzp Neuk; : after college hours FwpaPl;L vz; : (Total Hours) (Code No) fy;tp thuj;jpw;F : kzp Neuk; nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Per Academic week) (Total Marks) jFjpg; Gs;spfs; : 2 (Credit)

914

,uhzpNkup fy;Y}up (jd;dhl;rp)>

nrd;id- 600 004

jkpo;j;Jiw

Ma;tpay; epiwQh; - jkpo; ,yf;fpak;;

ghlj;jpl;lk;;

(2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;)

915

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 jkpo;j;Jiw Ma;tpay; epiwQh; - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;)

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hpj; jkpo;j;Jiwapy; 2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy; Ma;tpay; epiwQh; jkpo; ,yf;fpaj;jpw;Fg; Gjpa ghlj;jpl;lk; tFf;fg;gl;Ls;sJ. mjw;Fhpa ghlj;jpl;lf;FOf; $l;lk; 28-02-2018 md;W eilngw;wJ. ghlj;jpl;lf;FO cWg;gpdh;fs;

t.vz; ghlj;jpl;lf;FO cWg;gpdh; ifnahg;gk;

1. Nguh. Kidth; g. mDuhjh

,izg;Nguhrphpah;

kw;Wk; jkpo;j;Jiwj; jiyth;>

gr;irag;gd; fy;Y}hp>

nrd;id – 600 030.

2. Nguh. jpUkjp. th. Qhdhk;gpif

,izg;Nguhrphpah;

kw;Wk; jkpo;j;Jiwj; jiyth;>

fhapNjkpy;yj; muR kfsph; fy;Y}hp

916

(jd;dhl;rp)>

nrd;id – 600 002.

3. Nguh. Kidth;. Nfh. fpU\;zd;

,izg;Nguhrphpah;> jkpo;j;Jiw>

khepyf; fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)>

nrd;id – 600 005.

4. Nguh. Kidth; e. fiythzp; ,izg;Nguhrphpah;

kw;Wk; jkpo;j;Jiwj; jiyth;>

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)>

nrd;id – 600 004.

5. Nguh. Kidth; ng. rptrf;jp

,izg;Nguhrphpah;> jkpo;j;Jiw>

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp(jd;dhl;rp)>

nrd;id – 600 004.

6. Nguh. Kidth; g.gj;kpdp ,izg;Nguhrphpah>; jkpo;j;Jiw>

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp(jd;dhl;rp)>

nrd;id – 600 004. t.vz; ngau; ifnahg;gk;

1. Kidth; k.Nyhfehafp

2. Kidth; rp.fiykfs;

3. Kidth; R.jkpo;r;nry;tp

917

4. Kidth; ,u.rptrf;jp

5. Kidth; ,uh.mDuhjh

6. Kidth; ,uh.gpNukyjh

7. Kidth; nt.jkpourp

8. Kidth; ,uh.Uf;kzp

9. Kidth; gp.nt.Rrpyh

10 Kidth; eh.ky;ypfh

11. Kidth; ,uh.mUzh

12. jpUkjp `upzpMde;jd;

13. Kidth; ng.n[ah

14. Kidth; f.fpUj;jpfh

15. Kidth; tp.RFzh

918

re;jpuhfhe;jhkzp 16. Kidth; f.GtNd];tup

17 Kidth; g.F.N`ku[pdp

18. Kidth; Nf.,uh.fkyh KUfd;

19. jpUkjp. k.f];J}hp gha;

20. Kidth; jphpGuRe;jhp fhh;j;jpNfad;

21. Kidth; g.KUNf];thp

919

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 jkpo;j;Jiw Ma;tpay; epiwQh; - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) tpdhj;jhs; mikg;G

fhyk; : 3 kzp nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 nkhj;j myFfs; : 5

gphpT – m vitNaDk; Ie;J tpdhf;fSf;F tpilaspf;f : (5x20= 100) (midj;J myfpypUe;Jk; tpdhf;fs; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk;) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

********

920

tsh;e;J tUk; Fiwtw;w jkpopyf;fpaj; Jiwapy; epiwthd Ma;T ,d;wpaikahjJ. Ma;NtLfs; I I jkpo; Ma;tpay; mjdpy; jkpo; cUthf;fk;. newpKiwfs; khzth;fs; KOikahd gapw;rp ngWjy;> newpfisAk; Ma;Tf; fl;likg;igAk; mwpjy;.

fhyq;fle;j nkhopahd Ke;ija jkpopd; tsh;r;rp Ma;Tg; epiyfis mjd;fz; gug;ig I II jkpo; Muha;r;rp tuyhW cUthd Ma;TfNs mwpjy;top nka;g;gpf;Fk;. me;j jw;fhy tifapy; jkpopy; Ma;Tfisj; ,JfhWk; cUthd njhpTnra;J Ma;Tj; jiyg;Gfs; epfo;j;Jjy;. Ma;T nghUz;ikfs; Ma;T tiffs; Mfpatw;iw mwpjy;.

khzth;jk; Fwpg;gpl;l jdpj;jpwid khzth; ntspg;gLj;Jk; tpjkhf ngUtpUg;Gk; I III Ma;Ntl;bd; kPjhd mth;jk; Ma;Tg; jdpj;jpwDk; Njh;T gug;Gf;Fs; jd;dpiwT ngWjy.; ngwr;nra;jy;.

vOj;J tbtpyhd fy;Y}hpg; Kiwahd E}nyhd;iw gbg;gpd; - tbtikf;f khzth; epiwthf xU II Ma;NtL (Dissertation) gapw;rp ngwr;nra;jy;. E}iy KOikahf tbtikj;jy;.

921

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id - 4 jkpo;j;Jiw

Ma;tpay; epiwQh; - jkpopyf;fpak; - ghlj;jpl;lk;; (2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;)

,uhzpNkhp fy;Y}hp (jd;dhl;rp)

jkpo;j;Jiw

KJfiy - jkpo; ,yf;fpak;;

(2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ghlg;gphptpd; Nehf;fKk; gaDk;

jkpopyf;fpaj; Jiwapd; ngUthhpahd ,yf;fz> ,yf;fpa mwpitg; ngWjy;. jkpopyf;fpaj;jpd; Nfhl;ghLfs;> xg;gpyf;fpak;> nfhs;iffs;> Ma;T newpfs;> mfuhjpfs;> nrk;nkhopj;jpwd; Mfpatw;iwg; gUte;NjhWk; fw;Wg; gad;ngwy;;. jdpg;gl;l nkhopahrphpauhf> nkhop Mh;tsuhf> Ma;thsuhfj; jd;id cUthf;fpf; nfhs;Sjy;.

922

,uhzpNkup fy;Y}up (jd;dhl;rp)>

nrd;id- 600 004

jkpo;j;Jiw

jkpo; - Ma;tpay; epiwQh;

(2018 - 2019 Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy;) ghlg;gphptpd; Nehf;fKk; gaDk; Ma;T> Ma;NtL ,it gw;wpa njspthd mwpitg; ngWjy;. jkpopd; Ma;Tj; Jiw tsh;r;rpia mwpjy;. jdpg;gl;lnjhU jiyg;gpyhd nra;jpfisj; Njly;> tFj;Jk;> njhFj;Jk; jpwdha;e;J Kiwahfg; gjpTnra;J Ma;Ntlhfj; je;J mJ njhlh;ghd Njh;thshplk; jf;f gjpyspj;Jj; Njh;r;rp ngWjy;.

,uhzpNkup fy;Y}up (jd;dhl;rp)> nrd;id-4

jkpo;j;Jiw Ma;tpay; epiwQh; (M.Phil ) – ghlj;jpl;lk; (2018 – 2019Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy; )

PAPER No. TITLE OF THE COURSE SUBJECT TOTAL

CODE

923

I jkpo; Ma;tpay; newpKiwfs; 100

II jkpo; Muha;r;rp tuyhW 100

III Ma;Ntl;bd; kPjhd Njh;T 100

IV Ma;NtL (Dissertation) 100

,uhzpNkup fy;Y}up (jd;dhl;rp) nrd;id-4 jkpo;j;Jiw Ma;tpay; epiwQh; (M.Phil ) – ghlj;jpl;lk; (2018 – 2019Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy; ) jhs; - I jkpo; Ma;tpay; newpKiwfs; (Research Methodology) FwpaPl;L vz; : nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Code No); (Total Marks) myF 1

924

Ma;TKiwf; fy;tp – Ma;Tk; Ma;NtLk; - Ma;tpay; Kiwfs; - Ma;Tj; Jiwfs; - Ma;tpay; mZFKiwfs; - Ma;nghUs; my;yJ rpf;fy; tpdh – Ma;tpaypy; mbg;gilf; Nfhl;ghLfs;. myF 2

fUJNfhs; - Ma;itj; jpl;lkpl;Lj; njhlq;Fjy; - Ma;tpay; Mw;Wg;gil – rhd;W %yk; - juTj;njhFg;G Kaw;rpfs; - rhd;W> juTj;njhFg;G newpfs; - jkpopy; kuG top - Ma;TnewpfSk; Gyg;ghl;Lj; jpwDk; - fsMa;T. myF 3

mbf;Fwpg;gpLk; Kiw – Nkw;Nfhs; fhl;Lk; newp – Nkw;Nfhs; ml;il – Fwpg;ngLj;jy; - Ma;;TKiw - JizE}w; gl;bay; - gpd;dpizg;G – fiyr;nrhy; epuy; - Ma;Ntl;L mikg;G. myF 4

Ma;Tyf ehfhpfk; - Ma;T nkhopeil – ciuahrphpah;fs; fz;l Ma;TKiw. myF 5

E}yfKk; Ma;NtLk; - njspTk; jpUj;jKk; - Ma;Ntl;bd; juk; - Ma;Ntl;bd; Gw mikg;G – Ma;Ntl;bd; ghfq;fs; - tha;nkhopj;Njh;T.

ghh;it E}y;fs; : 1. Ma;tpay; mwpKfk; - Kidth; jkpoz;zy; Kidth; vk;.v];. ,yf;Fkzd; 2. Muha;r;rp newpKiwfs; - Kidth; nghw;Nfh

(tpdhf;fs; midj;J myFfspypUe;Jk; ,lk;ngWjy; Ntz;Lk.; )

925

,uhzpNkup fy;Y}up (jd;dhl;rp) nrd;id-4 jkpo;j;Jiw Ma;tpay; epiwQh; (M.Phil ) – ghlj;jpl;lk; (2018 – 2019) Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy; ) jhs; - II jkpo; Muha;r;rp tuyhW (History of Tamil Research) FwpaPl;L vz; : MTAC6 nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Code No) (Total Marks)

myF – 1 jkpo; ,yf;fz Ma;Tfs;

,iwadhh; fstpay; - njhy;fhg;gpa vOj;J> nrhy;> nghUs; Ma;Tfs; - njhy;fhg;gpah; fhyk; Fwpj;j Ma;Tfs; - ahg;gUq;fyk; - tpUj;jpAiu – ahg;gUq;fyf; fhhpif – tPuNrhopak;> Nekpehjk;> ed;D}y;> gpuNahf tpNtfk;> ,yf;fz tpsf;fk;> ,yf;fzf; nfhj;J> njhd;D}y; tpsf;fk;> Kj;J tPhpak;> Rthkpehjk; Nghd;w ,yf;fz E}y;fspy; ,JfhWk; eilngw;Ws;s Ma;TfSk; mt;tpyf;fz E}y;fspd; fhy Ma;TfSk;. myF – 2 jkpo; ,yf;fpa Ma;Tfs; ( fhy Ma;Tfs; cl;gl)

rq;f ,yf;fpa Ma;Tfs; - gjpndz; fPo;f;fzf;F Ma;Tfs; - ,ul;ilf; fhg;gpa Ma;Tfs; - Ik;ngUq;fhg;gpa Ma;Tfs; - IQ;rpWfhg;gpa Ma;Tfs; - nghpa Guhzk;> fk;g uhkhazk; kw;Wk; gpw Guhzq;fs; Fwpj;j Ma;Tfs; - Kj;njhs;shapuk; Fwpj;j Ma;Tfs; - gy;NtW rpw;wpyf;fpa Ma;Tfs; - jdpg;Gyth;fs;> jdpg;ghly;fs; Fwpj;j Ma;Tfs; - rkzh; ngsj;jh; MfpNahhpd;

926

jkpo;g; gzpfs; Fwpj;j Ma;Tfs; - jkpo; ,yf;fpag; gzpfs; Fwpj;j Ma;Tfs; - fpwpj;Jth;fs; kw;Wk; ,];yhkpah;fspd; jkpo; ,yf;fpag; gzpfs; Fwpj;j Ma;Tfs; - gj;njhd;gJ kw;Wk; ,Ugjhk; E}w;whz;L ciueil> ehlfk;> Gjpdk;> rpWfij> ftpij Nghd;w ,yf;fpa Ma;Tfs; - GJf;ftpij Ma;Tfs; - xg;gpay; ,yf;fpak;> ehl;Lg;Gw ,yf;fpak; Fwpj;j Ma;Tfs; - ,jopay; Fwpj;j Ma;Tfs; Nghd;wd. myF – 3 jkpo; nkhopapay; Ma;Tfs; - epfz;Lfs;> mfuhjpapay; kw;Wk; nkhopngah;g;gpay; Fwpj;j Ma;Tfs;

mz;ikf;fhyk; tiu jkpo; nkhopapay; Fwpj;j Ma;Tfs; - jkpo; nkhopapy; NJhd;wpAs;s gy;NtWgl;l epfz;Lfs; Fwpj;j Ma;Tfs; - mtw;wpidj; njhlh;e;J jkpo; nkhopapy; vOe;j gy;NtW xUnkhop> ,Unkhop> Kk;nkhop mfuhjpfs; Fwpj;j Ma;Tfs; - jkpopy; vOe;j gy;NtW nkhopngah;g;Gfs; Fwpj;j Ma;Tfs; Mfpad. myF – 4 epWtdkag;gl;l Ma;Tfs;

jkpofj;jpYs;s gy;NtW epWtdq;fshd cyfj;jkpo; Muha;r;rp epWtdk;> jkpo; tsh;r;rpj; Jiw> jkpo; tsh;r;rpf; fofk;> jkpo;g; gy;fiyf;fofk;> md;id njnurh kfsph; gy;fiyf;fofk;> mz;zhkiyg; gy;fiyf;fofk;> kJiug; gy;fiyf;fofk;> ghujpahh; gy;fiyf;fofk;> ghujpjhrd; gy;fiyf;fofk;> mofg;gh gy;fiyf;fofk; Mfpa epWtdq;fspy; eilngw;Ws;s jkpo; Ma;Tfs; - gpw khepyq;fspYs;s Nfusg; gy;fiyf;fofk;> cRNkdpahg; gy;fiyf;fofk;> =ntq;fNlRtuhg; gy;fiyf;fofk;> fUehlfg; gy;fiyf;fofk;> ik#h;g; gy;fiyf;fofk;> jpy;ypg; gy;fiyf;fofk;> fy;fj;jhg; gy;fiyf;fofk; Nghd;w gy;fiyf; fofq;fspy;

927

eilngw;Ws;s gy;NtW jkpoha;Tfs; - ntspehl;Lg; gy;fiyf;fofq;fshd ,q;fpyhe;J Mf;];Nghh;L gy;fiyf;fofk;> vbd;gNuh gy;fiyf;fofk;> kh];Nfh gy;fiyf;fofk;> i`ly;gh;f; gy;fiyf;fofk; Nghd;w gy;fiyf;fofq;fspy; eilngw;w gy;NtW jkpoha;Tfs; - njhy;ypay; Jiw> Mrpatpay; epWtdk;> jkpo; nkhopngah;g;Gj; Jiw kw;Wk; gy;NtW cauha;Tj; jkpo;j;Jiwfspy; eilngw;w Ma;Tfs; Nghd;wd. myF – 5

,Ugjhk; E}w;whz;by; cUthd Gjpa fUj;jhf;fq;fSk; Ma;TfSk;

khh;f;;rpak; - ngz;zpak; - khh;f;rpaKk; ngz;zpaKk; - Nrh\yprk; - ghrp]k; - lhlhap]k; - ngz;zpak; - jypj;jpak; - jypj; ngz;zpak; - FwpaPl;Lapay; (Symbolism) - cstpay; (Psychology) – MSik cstpay; (Personality & Psychology) khh;f;rpaKk; cstpaYk; - khDltpay; (Anthropology) – cUttpay; (Formalism) – etPdj;Jtk; - gpd; etPdj;Jtk; - mikg;gpay;thjk; (Structuralism) – ,Uj;jypak; - (Surrialism) Nghd;w gpw;fhy ,af;fq;fSk; nfhs;iffSk; Fwpj;;j gy;NtW Ma;Tfs;. ghh;it E}y;fs;

1. R. NtYg;gps;is - ,yf;fz tuyhW 2. rp. ,yf;Ftdhh; - njhy;fhg;gpa Muha;r;rp 3. j. Re;juuhrd; - njhy;fhg;gpah; fhy Ma;T 4. ,uh. kjpthzd; - njhy;fhg;gpah; fhyk; 5. K.it.mutpe;jd; - ciuahrphpah;fs; 6. V.tp. Rg;gpukzpa Iah; - jkpohuha;r;rpapd; tuyhW 7. R. muq;fuhrd; - ghl;bay; E}y;fs; 8. v];. itahGhpg;gps;is - jkpopyf;fpa rhpjj;jpy; fhtpaf;fiy 9. g. mUzhryk; - gf;jp ,yf;fpak;

928

10. fhrpuh[d; - rpyk;G Ma;Tfs; 11. fh. rptj;jk;gp - kjKk; khlKk; 12. R. ifyhrgjp - gz;ilj; jkpoh; tho;Tk; topghLk; 13. Re;ju rz;Kfdhh; - njhFg;Gf;fiy 14. v];. itahGhpg;gps;is - jpuhtpl nkhopfs; Muha;r;rp 15. mfj;jpaypq;fk; - jpuhtpl nkhopfs; - II 16. K. rz;Kfk; gps;is - jkpo; epfz;Lfs; 17. t. n[aNjtd; - mfuhjpf;fiy tsh;r;rp tuyhW 18. kJ.r. tpkyhde;jk; - jkpopyf;fpa tuyhw;Wf; fsQ;rpak; 19. Nfh. Nfrtd; -,af;fq;fSk; ,yf;fpag; Nghf;FfSk; 20. Nfh. Nfrtd; - ,yf;fpa tpkh;rdk; (xU khh;f;rpag; ghh;it) 21. Nfh. Nfrtd; - jypj; ,yf;fpak; 22. jkpotd; - ];l;uf;RuyprKk; jkpopyf;fpaKk; 23. e. gpr;rKj;J - jpwdha;Tk; jkpo; ,yf;fpaf; nfhs;iffSk; 24. R. ghyr;re;jpud; - ,yf;fpa ,af;fq;fSk; jpwdha;Tk; 25. m. khh;f;];> Nfh.Nfrtd; - Fzh: ghrprj;jpd; jkpo; tbtk; 26. v];. Njhjhj;hp - Nrh\ypr ajhh;j;jthjj;jpd; mbg;gilfs; (Xh; mwpKfk;) 27. md;Gf;furp> Nkhfd; yh;gPh; - jypj; ngz;zpak; (njhFg;ghrphpah;fs;) 28. M. nrfe;ehjd; - Gjpa ftpijfs; khh;f;rpak; 29. ,uh. gpNukh - ngz;zpak; - mZFKiwfs; 30. ngh.eh. fkyh - etPdf; Nfhl;ghl;L Ma;Tfs; 31. nt. Nfhtpe;jrhkp> eluh[; - khh;f;rpak; ngz;zpak; cwTk; (njhFg;Gk; nkhopngah;g;Gk;) KuZk; 32. Fzh - jkpoh; nka;apay;

929

(Nkw;Fwpg;gpl;l ghh;it E}y;fs; jtpu ghlj; njhlh;ghd Vida E}y;fSk; fl;LiufSk; Ma;NtLfSk; ,jo;fSk; ,j;jhSf;Fhpa ghh;it E}y;fshfg; gad;gLj;jpf; nfhs;sTk;). ********

,uhzpNkup fy;Y}up (jd;dhl;rp) nrd;id-4 jkpo;j;Jiw Ma;tpay; epiwQh; (M.Phil ) – ghlj;jpl;lk; (2018 – 2019Mk; fy;tpahz;L Kjy; ) jhs; - III Ma;Ntl;bd; kPjhd Njh;T (On Dissertation)

FwpaPl;L vz; : nkhj;j kjpg;ngz;fs; : 100 (Code No); (Total Marks) myF - 1 m. rq;f fhyk;

jkpopd; njhd;ik – Kr;rq;fq;fs; - njhy;fhg;gpak; - rq;f ,yf;fpak; - njhif E}y; tuyhW – vl;Lj;njhif : FWe;njhif – ew;wpiz – Iq;FWE}W - mfehD}W – fypj;njhif – GwehD}W – gjpw;Wg;gj;J – ghpghly; - gj;Jg;ghl;L; : jpUKUfhw;Wg;gil –nghUeuhw;Wg;gil – rpWghzhw;Wg;gil – ngUk;ghzhw;Wg;gil – kiygLflhmk; - kJiuf;fhQ;rp – neLey;thil - Ky;iyg;ghl;L – FwpQ;rpg;ghl;L – gl;bdg;ghiy. M. rq;fk; kUtpa fhyk;;

,Uz;lfhyk; - fPo;f;fzf;F> Nky;fzf;Fg; gphpT – gjpndz; fPo;f;fzf;F E}y;fs; - jpUf;Fws; - ehybahh; - ehd;kzpf;fbif - ,d;dh ehw;gJ - ,dpait ehw;gJ – jphpfLfk; - Mrhuf;Nfhit – gonkhop –

930

rpWgQ;r %yk; - Vyhjp - KJnkhopf;fhQ;rp – fstop ehw;gJ – fhh; ehw;gJ – Ie;jpiz Ik;gJ – Ie;jpiz vOgJ – jpizkhiy Ik;gJ – jpizkhiy E}w;iwk;gJ – ife;epiy - ,d;dpiy – fhiuf;fhy; mk;ikahh; E}y;fs; - jpUke;jpuk; - Kj;njhs;shapuk; - rpyg;gjpfhuk; - kzpNkfiy.

myF - 2 m. gy;yth; fhyk; gf;jp ,yf;fpak; - irt ,yf;fpak; - jpUQhd rk;ge;jh; - jpUehTf;furh; - Re;juh; - khzpf;fthrfh; - itzt ,yf;fpaq;fs; - ngha;ifaho;thh; - G+jj;jho;thh; - Ngaho;thh; - jpUkopiraho;thh; – nghpaho;thh; - Mz;lhs; - ek;kho;thh; - kJuftp Mo;thh; - jpUkq;ifaho;thh; - njhz;lubg;nghbaho;thh; - jpUg;ghzho;thh; - FyNrfuho;thh; - Gwg;nghUs; ntz;ghkhiy - ,iwadhh; fstpaYiu – ngUq;fij. M. Nrhoh; fhyk;

ngUq;fhg;gpaq;fs; : rPtf rpe;jhkzp – tisahgjp – Fz;lyNfrp – IQ;rpW fhg;gpaq;fs; : #shkzp – aNrhju fhtpak; - cjazFkhu fhtpak; - ePyNfrp – ehfFkhu fhtpak; - gpw fhg;gpaq;fs; - fk;guhkhazk; - nghpaGuhzk; - ,yf;fz E}y;fs; - ek;gpafg;nghUs; - ahg;gUq;fyk; - Nekpehjk; - ed;D}y; - tPuNrhopak; - jz;bayq;fhuk; - Guhzq;fs; - jkpopy; Guhzq;fs; - jyGuhzq;fs;. myF - 3 m. ehaf;fh; fhyk;

rpw;wpyf;fpaq;fs; - J}J – jkpo;tpL J}J – mofh; fps;istpL J}J – tz;LtpL J}J – gps;isj;jkpo; - kPdhl;rpak;ik gps;isj;jkpo; - Kj;Jf;Fkhurhkp gps;isj;jkpo; - fyk;gfk; - ee;jpf;fyk;gfk; - jpUtuq;ff; fyk;gfk; - kJiuf; fyk;gfk; - FwtQ;rp – jpUf;Fw;whyf; FwtQ;rp -; ruNge;jpu G+ghyf; FwtQ;rp - gs;S – Kf;$lw;gs;S - irt rpj;jhe;j rhj;jpuq;fs; - jpUf;fspw;Wg; ghbahh; - jpUTe;jpahh; - rptg;gpufhrk; -

931

rptQhdNghjk; - rptQhd rpj;jpahh; - ,Ugh ,Ug/J – cz;ik tpsf;fk; - jpUtUl;gad; - tpdh ntz;gh – nfhbf;ftp – neQ;RtpL J}J – Nghw;wpg; g/nwhil ntz;gh – cz;ik newp tpsf;fk; - rq;fw;g epuhfuzk;. M. ciuahrphpah;fs; ,sk;G+uzh; - Nguhrphpah; - Nrdhtiuah; - er;rpdhh;f;fpdpah; - fy;yhlh; - mbahh;f;F ey;yhh; - ghpNkyofh; - gpw Gyth;fs; - GfNoe;jpahh;; - gl;bdj;jhh; - mUzfphpehjh; - mjptPuuhk ghz;bah; - FkuFUguh; - tpy;ypGj;J}uhh; - guQ;Nrhjpahh; - rptg;gpufhrh; - jhAkhdth; - rptQhdKdpth; myF - 4 rkak; tsh;j;j jkpo; m. irt klq;fs; tsh;j;j jkpo; irt klq;fs; tsh;j;j jkpo; - jpUthtLJiw MjPd klk; - jUkGu MjPdk; - jpUg;gde;jhs; fhrpklk; - kJiu klk; - tPuirt klq;fs;. M. rkzKk; jkpOk; rkzh; jkpo;j;njhz;L - ,yf;fz E}y;fs; - epfz;Lfs; - jpthfuk; - gpq;fy epfz;L - #lhkzp epfz;L – chpr;nrhy; epfz;L. ,. ngsj;jKk; jkpOk;

ngsj;jh; jkpo;j;njhz;L – ngsj;jh;fspd; ,yf;fpag;gzp – tpk;gprhud; fij – rpj;jhe;jj;njhif – jpUg;gjpfk; - MrpaN[hjp – tPuNrhopak;. <. KfkjpaKk; jkpOk;

Kfkjpah;; jkpo;j;njhz;L – ckWg;Gyth; - tz;zf; fsQ;rpag; Gyth; - Nrfdhg;Gyth; - fhrpk;Gyth; - rt;thJg;Gyth;> rh;f;fiug;Gyth; - iraJ KifjPd; ftpuhrh; - Fzq;Fb k];jhd;rhfpG – nra;Fjk;gpg; ghtyh; - Fyhk; fhjpW ehtyh;. c. fpwpj;jtKk; jkpOk;

fpwpj;jth; jkpo;j;njhz;L – may;ehl;Lf; fpwpj;jth;fs; - jj;Jt Nghjfh; - tPukhKdpth; - [p.A+.Nghg; - fhy;Lnty; - rPfd;ghy;F Iah; - vy;yP]; Jiu - ,Nudpa]; - jkpo;f;fpwpj;jth;fs; - Kj;Jrhkpg;gps;is – jQ;ir Mgpufhk;

932

gz;bjh; - Ntjehafk; gps;is – Ntjehaf rh];jphp - fpUl;bzg;gps;is – rhKNty; gps;is. myF – 5 gpw;fhyk; m. ciueil tsh;r;rp

MWKf ehtyh; - rp.it.jhNkhjuk; gps;is – lhf;lh; c.Nt.rhkpehj Iah; - it.K. NfhghyfpU\;zkhr;rhhpahh; - gz;bjkzp K.fjpNurQ;nrl;bahh; - fh.R.gps;is – e.K.Ntq;flrhkp ehl;lhh; - v];.itahGhpg;gps;is – kiwkiyabfs; - jpU.tp. fy;ahzRe;judhh; - ,uh.,uhfitaq;fhh; - K. ,uhfitaq;fhh; M. jkpopy; rpWfij tsh;r;rp t.Nt.R. Iah; - GJikg;gpj;jd; - gp.v];.,uhikah - F.g.uh. - ,uh[h[p – nksdp - F.mofphprhkp - jp.[hdfpuhkd; - fy;fp - mfpyd; - n[afhe;jd; - jw;fhyr; rpWfij – ghpR ngw;w rpWfijfs; - ,d;iwa fhyf;fl;lk; tiu. ,. jkpo; ehty; ,yf;fpaq;fs; rpWfijAk; ehtYk; - jkpopy; ehty; ,yf;fpak; - jkpopy; Kjy; ehty; - jkpopy; ,uz;lhtJ ehty; - khjta;ah; - f.k.eNlr rh];jphp – it.K.Nfhijehafp mk;khs; - Ntq;flukzp; – fy;fp – mfpyd; - rhz;by;ad; - eh.ghh;j;jrhujp – jkpo;thzd; - lhf;lh; .K.tujuhrdhh; - ,e;jpuh ghh;j;jrhujp – jkpo;thzd; - Nfh.tp.kzpNrfud; kw;Wk; jw;fhyg; Gjpdg; gilg;ghsh;fs;; tiu. <. ehlfj;jkpo; Guhz ,jpfhr ehlfq;fs; - rhpj;jpu ehlfq;fs; - r%f ehlfq;fs; - eifr;Rit ehlfq;fs; - Jg;gwpAk; ehlfq;fs; - jOty; ehlfq;fs; - Xuq;f ehlfq;fs; - rq;fujh]; Rthkpfs; - gk;ky; rk;ge;j Kjypahh; - tp.Nfh.#hpaehuhaz rh];jphpahh; - mwpQh; mz;zh - b.Nf.v];. rNfhjuh;fs; - Mh;.v];.kNdhfh; - jw;fhy ehlfq;fs; tiu. c. 20-Mk; E}w;whz;Lf; ftpQh;fs; kuGf;ftpij

933

ghujpahh; - ghujpjhrd; - Njrpf tpehafk; gps;is – ehkf;fy; ftpQh; - gl;Lf;Nfhl;il fy;ahzRe;juk;; - nfhj;jkq;fyk; Rg;G - Gyth; Foe;ij - Kbaurd; - thzpjhrd; - fz;zjhrd; - Rujh – Nf.rp.v];.mUzhr;ryk;; - thyp - ,d;iwa ftpQh;fs; tiu. GJf;ftpij

kzpf;nfhbg; guk;giu – vOj;Jg; guk;giu – thdk;ghbg; guk;giu – GJikg;gpj;jd; - Qhdf;$j;jd; - itj;jP];tud; - gpr;r%h;j;jp - eh.fhkuhrd; - ftpf;Nfh mg;Jy;uFkhd;; - ftpQh; kPuh - muR kzpNkfiy - K.Nkj;jh -

******

934

935

936

937

938

939

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS)

CHENNAI- 600004

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

M.Phil.

MINUTES OF THE BOARD OF STUDIES MEETING

19-02-2018

Economics is one of the most popular subjects in Indian colleges. It is an evolving subject and hence there is every need to review its course curriculum. The idea is to make economics socially relevant and employment oriented subject. The board of studies meeting was held on 19- 02-2018 in the Department of Economics, Queen Mary’s College (Autonomous), Chennai - 600004.

To meet the changing requirement of recruitment scenario to the benefits of the students, 3 Papers and Dissertation at the M.Phil. level.

In the Board of Studies meeting for M.Phil. Course effective from 2018 – 19 onwards conducted on 19-02-2018, it was suggested by the Board of Studies members to upgrade the syllabus of Advanced Economic Theory and Research Methodology.

Head of the Department

940

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS)

CHENNAI- 600004

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

BOARD OF STUDIES MEETING

19-02-2018

Economics is one of the most popular subjects in Indian colleges. It is an evolving subject and hence there is every need to review its course curriculum. The idea is to make economics socially relevant and employment oriented subject. The Board of Studies meeting was held on 19- 02-2018 in the Department of Economics, Queen Mary’s College (Autonomous), Chennai - 600004.

To meet the changing requirement of recruitment scenario to the benefits of the students, 3 Papers, and Dissertation at the M.Phil. level.

The following members were present for the Board of Studies meeting on 19-02-2018.

1. Dr.S. Chinnama, University Nominee Associate Professor, Department of Economics, University of Madras, Chepauk, Chennai – 600005

2. Dr. N. Suresh Babu, Subject Expert Associate Professor, Department of Economics, Presidency College, Chennai – 600005

3. Mrs. T. Abiramy, Subject Expert Associate Professor & Head, Department of Economics, Arts College, Chennai

941

Department Members for the Board of Studies- 2018:

4. Dr. K Sudarkodi

Associate Professor and Controller of Examinations

5. Tmt. K. Sathya Bama

Associate Professor and Head of the Department

Assistant Professors

6. Dr.L. Kokila Devi

7. Dr. D. Vijayalakshmi

8. Dr. K. Chithra

9. Dr. K. Pushpa

10. Tmt. A Meenakshi

11. Dr. C. Durgadevi

12. Dr. V. Santhanalakshmi

13. Selvi. C. K. Kripalini

14. Dr. Eswari Ramesh

15. Tmt. R.

16. Dr. K. Muneeswari

17. Selvi. C. Devi

942

QUEEN MARY’S COLLEGE (AUTONOMOUS), CHENNAI – 600 004.

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS

M.Phil. ECONOMICS 2018 – 2019

Title of the papers for syllabus effect from the Academic Year 2018 – 2019

Course: Economics Degree: M.Phil

PAPER TITLE OF THE PAPER SUBJECT TOTAL NO. CODE

I Research Methodology 100

II Advanced Economic Theory 100

III Emerging Issues and Outlook of Tamil Nadu 100

IV Dissertation 100

SUBJECT EXPERT SUBJECT EXPERT UNIVERSITY NOMINEE

943

QUESTION PAPER PATTERN FOR M.Phil. COURSE

FROM THE ACADEMIC YEAR 2018 – 2019.

Time: 3 Hours Max. Marks: 100

Total Number of Units – 5

Question Paper Pattern: (Without Omitting any Unit)

Answer any 5 Questions (Out of 8 Questions): 5*20 = 100 marks

944

ADVANCED ECONOMIC THEORY

UNIT 1

The place of theory in Modern Economic Science - Marginalist Analysis - Macro general equilibrium theory – Growth theory and distribution theory - Two sector equilibrium model (IS &LM)

UNIT 2

Stratigy of Economic Development - Types of Stratigics - Big push stratigy - Balanced vs unbalanced growth, Nurksian Doctrine of Balance Growth - Singer’s Critique of Balanced Growth Doctrine - Mehalenobis stratigy of Economic Growth.

UNIT 3

Capital theory - Stock flow Relationship - Measurement of capital - Cambridy Controversy - - Theory of investment in Education.

UNIT 4

Input - output Analysis features - Model of input - Output analysis - A two sector input-Output model-Leontief Matrix - A three sector input - Output model.

UNIT 5

Nature of welfare Economics - Pigovian welfare condition - Social welfare functions-Pareto optimality and market failure.

BOOK REFERENCES:

1. Ackley. G : Macro Economics Theory. The Macmillan Company. New York 1999. 2. Ahuja. H.L. : Advanced Economic Theory. Chand & Company. New Delhi.

2006.

3. Dewett. K.K. : Modern Economic Theory 4. Koutsoyiannis. A : Modern Micro Economics, Macmillan Company, London,

1997.

5. Shapiro. E. : Macro Economic Analysis, Galgotia Publication, New Delhi.

945

EMERGING ISSUES AND OUTLOOK OF TAMILNADU

UNIT 1

Human Resource: Size and Growth of Population - Sex Ration-Density of population - Population Policy –Literacy – Education - Human development.

UNIT 2

Agriculture and Allied Activities - The triple contribution of Agriculture - Animal Husbandary and poultry - Tamil Nadu Fisheries-Agriculture Marketing - Regulated Market -Uzhavar santhai.

UNIT 3

Role of industries in an economy - Industrial sector in Tamil Nadu plans - Industrial production performance - Large Scale Industries-(Textiles, Sugar and IT Industry). Small Scale Industries - Role and performance of SSI Sector - Kadhi & Village industries -Industrial sickness - Tamilnadu state public sector undertakings - IT development.

UNIT 4

Transport & Communication - Importance of Transport – Road Transport, Rail Transport and Waterways Transport - Policy of Tamil Nadu - Sethusamudram Ship Canal project-Media Services.

UNIT 5

Some emerging Economic Issues of Tamil Nadu – Poverty - Unemployment, Urbanisation - Housing and Environment - Media services.

BOOKS FOR REFERENCE

1. Lenord. A.G : Tamil Nadu Economy, Macmillan India Ltd, 2006 2. Naganathan. M : Tamil Nadu Economy, University of Madras, 2002 3. Yasoda Shanmugasundaram : Tamil Nadu, Ethiraj Research Center, Chennai. 2000 4. MIDS : Tamil Nadu Economy-Performance & Issues 5. Tamilnadu economic appraisal

946

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

UNIT 1

Definition of Research - Theory of Research - objectives-qualities - criteria of good Research- RD-Meaning, features types-Literature survey-Determining the sample Design.

UNIT 2

Approach to Research - (Basic, Applied, Descriptive, Historical, Experimental) -Collecting Data-Primary of secondary data – Methods - Observation techniques - Schedule of questionnaire - Interview techniques.

UNIT 3

Hypothesis - Meaning, Definition, Need for hypo - Formulation of hypothesis - Characteristic of hypothesis - Types of hypothesis - Test of hypothesis - General problems in testing hypothesis.

UNIT 4

Processing of data - Processing of Analysis of data - Steps in data processing – Editing –Coding - Classification rules-Tabulation-Interpretation of data – Precaution - Conclusion of generalization.

UNIT 5

Scaling techniques – Meaning – Classification - Important scaling techniques - Thurstone- Likert – Gutman – Sociometry - Report writing - Computer in Research applications.

Book for reference:

1. Kothari C.R. : Research Methodology-Methods and Techniques, Wiley

Eastern Ltd, 2002

2. Pauline Young : Scientific Social Surveys of Research, Prentic Hall of India

Ltd, New Delhi, 1995

3. Saravanavel. P : Research Methodology, Kitab Mahal, Allahabad 2001. 4. Ravilochanan. P : Research Methodology, Mangham Publication, T. Nagar, Chennai, 2017.

947